language-pack-gnome-oc-base/0000755000000000000000000000000012743727041013064 5ustar language-pack-gnome-oc-base/debian/0000755000000000000000000000000012743727041014306 5ustar language-pack-gnome-oc-base/debian/rules0000755000000000000000000000165312743727041015373 0ustar #!/usr/bin/make -f # Uncomment this to turn on verbose mode. #export DH_VERBOSE=1 PKGNAME=$(shell grep "^Package: " debian/control | head -1 | cut -f 2 -d\ ) PKG=$(shell pwd)/debian/$(PKGNAME) LOCALEDIR=$(PKG)/usr/share/locale-langpack build: dh_testdir clean: dh_testdir dh_testroot dh_clean binary-arch: binary-indep: dh_testdir dh_testroot mkdir -p $(LOCALEDIR) cd data; \ find -type d -exec mkdir -p "$(LOCALEDIR)/{}" \; ; \ find -type f -name "*.po" -exec sh -c "N='{}'; msgfmt -o $(LOCALEDIR)/\$${N%.po}.mo \$$N" \; ; \ [ ! -e data/extra.tar ] || tar -C $(PKG) -xf data/extra.tar [ ! -e data/static.tar ] || tar -C $(PKG) -xf data/static.tar dh_installdocs -i dh_installchangelogs -i dh_compress -i dh_fixperms -i dh_installdeb -i dh_gencontrol -i dh_md5sums -i dh_builddeb -i -- -Z xz binary: binary-arch binary-indep .PHONY: build build-arch build-indep clean binary-indep binary-arch binary language-pack-gnome-oc-base/debian/postinst0000644000000000000000000000021512743727041016112 0ustar #!/bin/sh -e if [ "$1" = "configure" ]; then /usr/share/locales/install-language-pack "oc" "gnome" "$2" || true fi #DEBHELPER# exit 0 language-pack-gnome-oc-base/debian/control0000644000000000000000000000221112743727041015705 0ustar Source: language-pack-gnome-oc-base Section: translations Priority: optional Maintainer: Language pack maintainers Build-Depends-Indep: gettext Build-Depends: debhelper (>= 8) Standards-Version: 3.9.6 Package: language-pack-gnome-oc-base Architecture: all Pre-Depends: dpkg (>= 1.16.1), ${misc:Pre-Depends} Depends: ${misc:Depends}, locales (>= 2.3.6), language-pack-gnome-oc (>= ${binary:Version}) Recommends: Conflicts: language-pack-gnome-oc (<< ${binary:Version}) Replaces: language-pack-gnome-oc (<< ${binary:Version}), language-pack-oc-base (<< ${binary:Version}), language-pack-oc (<< ${binary:Version}), language-pack-gnome-oc (<< ${binary:Version}), language-pack-gnome-oc-base (<< ${binary:Version}), language-pack-kde-oc (<< ${binary:Version}), language-pack-kde-oc-base (<< ${binary:Version}) Description: GNOME translations for language Occitan (post 1500) Translation data for all supported GNOME packages for: Occitan (post 1500) . This package provides the bulk of translation data and is updated only seldom. language-pack-gnome-oc provides frequent translation updates, so you should install this as well. language-pack-gnome-oc-base/debian/copyright0000644000000000000000000000174312743727041016246 0ustar This package is developed and maintained by the Ubuntu language pack maintainers . The original source can always be found at: http://archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu/ Copyright (C) 2004 - 2008 Canonical Ltd. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program. If not, see . On Debian systems, the complete text of the GNU General Public License can be found in `/usr/share/common-licenses/GPL'. language-pack-gnome-oc-base/debian/compat0000644000000000000000000000000212743727041015504 0ustar 8 language-pack-gnome-oc-base/debian/postrm0000644000000000000000000000021112743727041015547 0ustar #!/bin/sh -e if [ "$1" = "remove" ]; then /usr/share/locales/remove-language-pack "oc" "gnome" "$2" || true fi #DEBHELPER# exit 0 language-pack-gnome-oc-base/debian/changelog0000644000000000000000000000031412743727041016156 0ustar language-pack-gnome-oc-base (1:14.04+20160720) trusty-proposed; urgency=low * Initial Release. -- Ubuntu automatic language-pack builder Wed, 20 Jul 2016 17:00:17 +0000 language-pack-gnome-oc-base/debian/source/0000755000000000000000000000000012743727041015606 5ustar language-pack-gnome-oc-base/debian/source/format0000644000000000000000000000001512743727041017015 0ustar 3.0 (native) language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/0000755000000000000000000000000012743727041013775 5ustar language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/static.tar0000644000000000000000001346400012743725136016007 0ustar usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/problems-reporting-bugs.page0000644000373100047300000000401412371247536027147 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to report mistakes in the application. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net How to report bugs

If you do not need help for configuration but you are sure that you have found a mistake or wrong behavior in the Evolution software, or if you want to request a feature, you can file a report in the GNOME bug tracking system. Note that this requires registration first. Please try to avoid filing duplicates and check the bug writing guidelines first.

Also note that GNOME distributions sometimes introduce their own changes in Evolution that are not included in GNOME Evolution. This is hard to recognize for users but if you are aware of it please file a bug report in the bug tracker of your GNOME distribution instead.

When reporting bugs exact information is welcome as it makes it easier for others to reproduce and fix the issue. If possible please include information such as the Evolution version (under HelpAbout), your distribution, and exact steps to reproduce the problem, click by click. See the Bug Writing Guidelines for more information.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-localized-re-subjects.page0000644000373100047300000000261712371247537027501 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Avoid long subject lines due to translated "Re:" prefixes. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Handling localized "Re:" in subjects

Traditionally a "Re:" prefix is added to a subject line when replying to an email. Some email applications use localized terms for this (like "SV:" in Danish or "AW: in German). Evolution can recognize these terms to avoid subject lines getting longer as the conversation continues.

Open the Terminal application.

Run the command gsettings set org.gnome.evolution.mail.composer-localized-re 'AW:,SV:' (in case that you want "AW:" and "SV:" to be recognized).

You can also use the dconf-editor application to do this.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-search-folders-add.page0000644000373100047300000000554212371247542026732 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Setting up a search folder. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Creating A Search Folder

Click EditSearch Folders, or click MessageCreate Rule and select the criterion the search folder will be based on, or if you have run a search, click SearchCreate Search Folder From Search....

Click Add.

Enter a name in the Rule name field.

Define the conditions for the rule. For each condition, you first select which part of the message will be checked and then define the comparison.

For more information on the available conditions see Available Search Folder conditions.

If you want to define multiple conditions, define under Find items if any or if all conditions have to apply, and click Add Condition and repeat the previous step.

Select which folders will be used for the search folder in the section Search Folder Sources. Options are:

All local folders:

Uses all local folders for the search folder source in addition to individual folders that are selected.

All active remote folders:

Remote folders are considered active if you are connected to the server; you must be connected to your mail server for the search folder to include any messages from that source in addition to individual folders that are selected.

All local and active remote folders:

Uses all local and active remote folders for the search folder source in addition to individual folders that are selected.

Specific folders only:

Uses individual folders for the search folder source. In this case, click the Add to select folders.

Click OK.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-receiving-options-local-delivery.page0000644000373100047300000000341312371247537031657 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Receiving options for Local delivery accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Local delivery receiving options
Recepcion de messatge

On the Receiving Email page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Email):

Choose the file by clicking on the button next to File in the Configuration section. This will open a file chooser window.
Opcions de recepcion

On the Receiving Options page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options):

If you want Evolution to check automatically for new messages, click the Check for new messages every ... minutes option and select the frequency in minutes.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-sorting-message-list.page0000644000373100047300000001255112371247540027357 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sorting the message list of a mail folder. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Novell, Inc Sorting the message list

Evolution lets you organize your emails by letting you sort messages in the message list.

Sorting Mail in Email Threads

You can use a threaded message view to sort emails. To enable this feature, click on ViewGroup By Threads or press CtrlT.

This feature, when enabled, groups replies with the original email and allows you to follow the flow of the conversation from one message to the next.

When a new message arrives, it will be added below the parent message. Threads are sorted and displayed based on the date of the most recent message received.

For Advanced Users: There is a GSettings key that allows you to toggle between the collapsed and expanded state of the email threads. The collapsed state is enabled by default. It can be changed by starting the Terminal application and running the command gsettings set org.gnome.evolution.mail thread-expand true

Open the Terminal application.

Run the command gsettings set org.gnome.desktop.interface can-change-accels true
Sorting Mail with Column Headers

The message list displays columns that indicate whether a message has been read, whether it has attachments, how important the message is, the sender, date, and the subject. To change the columns used in the message list, you can do one of the following:

Drag and drop the column header bars

Right-click on the header.

Select the Remove This Column or Add a Column option.

Evolution allows you to sort your messages using these columns. Just click on the column label to sort the emails. The direction of the arrow next to the label indicates the direction of the sort.

Using Other Sorting Options

Evolution provides other ways for sorting email messages. You can use Sort By, Sort Ascending, Sort Descending, or Unsort.

Sort By

You can also sort email messages using the Sort By list.

Right-click on the message list column headers.

Select the Sort By option.

This brings up this list of criteria for sorting email messages:

Subject - Trimmed

Etiquetas

Destinataris

Expeditor

Emplaçament

Tèrme : abans

Follow Up Flag

Flag Status

Talha

A

Recebut

Data

Subjècte

De

Fichièr junt

Flagged

Estatut

Personalizat

Select the option you wish to use in sorting email messages.
Sort Ascending

Right-click on the message list column headers.

Select the Sort Ascending option.

The messages will be displayed with the most recent at the bottom.

Sort Descending

Right-click on the message list column headers.

Select the Sort Descending option.

The messages will be displayed with the most recent at the top.

Unsort

Right-click on the message list column headers.

Select the Unsort option.

This removes sorting from the column, reverting to the order of messages as they were added to the folder.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-usage-delete-appointment.page0000644000373100047300000000214112371247540031020 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Deleting an appointment in your calendar. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Deleting an Appointment

If you want to delete an appointment in your calendars, right-click on the appointment in the calendar and select Delete Appointment, or click on the appointment and click Delete in the tool bar or press CtrlD. If you are in the list view you can also use EditDelete Appointment.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-account-manage-unix-mbox-spool-directory.page0000644000373100047300000000574312371247537033254 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit a Standard Unix mbox Spool Directory account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Standard Unix mbox Spool Directory account settings
Editor de compte

Mail accounts can be added by choosing FileNewMail Account or via EditPreferencesMail AccountsAdd. The steps are mostly the same as for the First-Run Assistant, except for not getting asked whether to import data from other applications or to restore from a backup file.

Mail accounts can be edited via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEdit.

The following settings are available when editing an existing account:

Receiving Email and Receiving options (Standard Unix mbox Spool Directory accounts) Receiving Email and Receiving options
Sending Email (Standard Unix mbox Spool Directory accounts) Sending Email
Defaults (Standard Unix mbox Spool Directory accounts) Valors per defaut
Security (Standard Unix mbox Spool Directory accounts) Seguritat
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/import-apps-mozilla.page0000644000373100047300000000512312371247536026301 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Importing data from Mozilla Thunderbird. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mozilla

Click FileImport.

In the Importer Type tab, click Import a single file.

Go to the folder in which Thunderbird stores its data. On a Linux system, Thunderbird's files are located in the hidden folder $HOME/.thunderbird/12345678. 12345678 will be a random string. If you cannot see the .thunderbird folder, make sure to show hidden files in the file selector dialog.

If you would like to import Thunderbird mail, go to Mail/Local Folders (for local mail accounts) or ImapMail/servername (for remote mail accounts). servername will be the address of your remote mail server. Files without a file ending include your messages (not the .msf files).

If you would like to import Thunderbird/Lightning calendar data, you may be able to export your Thunderbird events as an .ical/.ics file first, and import these files into Evolution. This is required as Thunderbird stores its calendar data in a non-standard database format.

The file type will be automatically determined.

Choose the destination (e.g. the folder or calendar in Evolution) for the imported data.

Repeat the import steps until you have imported all your data.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-account-manage-microsoft-exchange.page0000644000373100047300000000175112371247536031751 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit a Microsoft Exchange account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Microsoft Exchange account settings

Please first read Choosing the right connector to find out about the right Exchange account type for you.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/intro-main-window.page0000644000373100047300000001673112371247543025750 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 An explanation of the areas shown in the Evolution window. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Barbara M. Tobias barbtobias09@gmail.com Novell, Inc The <app>Evolution</app> main window

Evolution provides functionality for E-Mail, Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, and Memos. You can switch to another functionality by using the "Switcher" buttons in the lower left corner. Depending on the displayed functionality also the displayed elements in the window differ.

Corrièl

The Evolution mail main window

Corresponding elements in the mail main window:

Menu bar

Tool bar

Folder list

Search bar

Message list

Switcher

Preview pane

Status bar
Folder list

The folder list gives you a list of the available folders for each account. To see the contents of a folder, click the folder name and its contents are displayed in the message list.

For more information see Using Folders.

 Message List

The message list displays all the read and unread messages that you have in the chosen folder. To view an email in the preview pane, click the message in the message list.

 Switcher

The switcher at the bottom of the side bar lets you switch between the Evolution tools: Mail, Contacts, Calendars, Memos and Tasks.

For more information see Changing the Switcher appearance.

You can disable the folder list and the switcher side bar by toggling ViewLayoutShow Side Bar or pressing F9.

 Preview Pane

The preview pane displays the message that is currently chosen in the message list.

You can disable the preview pane by toggling ViewPreviewShow Message Preview.
Calendièr

Elements in the calendar main window:

Menu bar

Tool bar

Calendar list

Search bar

Appointment list

Task list

Month pane

Memo list

Switcher

Status bar
Appointment List

The appointment list displays all your scheduled appointments in the time frame selected.

 Month Pane

The month pane is a small view of a calendar month. To display additional months, drag the column border to the right. You can also select a range of days in the month pane to display a custom range of days in the appointment list.

 Task list and Memo list

Tasks and memos are just displayed for your convience and are not associated to any appointments. Use the switcher to go to their main windows.
Contactes

Elements in the contacts main window:

Menu bar

Tool bar

Address book list

Search bar

Contacts list

Switcher

Contact preview

Status bar

You can disable the contact preview by toggling ViewPreviewContact Preview.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/exchange-placeholder.page0000644000373100047300000000153112371247536026422 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Connecting to Exchange Servers Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Connecting to Exchange Servers

For topics not covered here please refer to the old Evolution manual.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-encryption-gpg-getting-keys.page0000644000373100047300000000323312371247540030651 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Getting and Using GPG Public Keys. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Getting and using GPG public keys

To send an encrypted message, you need to use the recipient's public key in combination with your private key. Evolution handles the encryption, but you need to get the public key and add it to your keyring.

To get public keys from a public key server, enter the command gpg --recv-keys --keyserver wwwkeys.pgp.net keyid, substituting keyid by your recipient's ID. You need to enter your password, and the ID is automatically added to your keyring.

If someone sends you a public key directly, save it as a plain text file and enter the command gpg --import to add it to your keyring.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/import-single-files.page0000644000373100047300000000233612371247543026253 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Importing single files. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Importing single files

To import single files (mail, calendar data or contacts):

Click FileImport.

In the Importer Type tab, click Import a single file.

Choose the file.

The file type will be automatically determined.

Choose the destination (e.g. the folder in Evolution) for the imported data.

You can also import contacts that you have received as a vCard attachment of an email from its attachment menu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-searching.page0000644000373100047300000000577712371247540025256 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Searching messages. Max Vorobuov vmax0770@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Searching Mail
Searching in a Single Message

To find text in the displayed message, select EditFind in Message... from the main menu.

Searching Across Messages
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-mail-signatures.page0000644000373100047300000000212712371247542030230 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using email signatures at the bottom of a message you send. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Working with email signatures

A signature consists of one or more lines of text (or even a picture) that will be added at the end of an email that you send. It can contain contact information or other things. A signature always begins with two dashes and a space (-- ).

The term "signature" is also differently used in terms of encryption.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-word-wrap.page0000644000373100047300000000177512371247542025231 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Words are wrapped in outgoing mails at 72 characters. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Words are wrapped in outgoing mails at 72 characters

For better readability lines are wrapped after 72 characters. This value is hardcoded and cannot be changed.

To avoid line breaks within a paragraph, mark the paragraph and choose FormatParagraph StylePreformatted in the mail composer.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/searching-items.page0000644000373100047300000000116212371247541025436 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Searching content and data within Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Searching items usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-meetings-replying-to-invitation.page0000644000373100047300000000427112371247535032376 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Accepting and replying to a meeting invitation. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Replying to a Meeting Request

Meeting requests are sent as attachments and displayed as the body of an email. All the details about the event are shown, including time and dates.

You can choose whether and how to reply to the invitation and add a personal comment to your reply. Available options are to Decline, Tentatively Accept (Tentative), or Accept. You can also decide whether the time of the meeting will still be shown as free in your calendar.

If the meeting request already includes a reminder you can import the reminder to your calendar by enabling Inherit reminder.

If you click Accept the event is added automatically to the calendar that you have chosen.

After you have added the meeting to your calendar, you can make changes to the meeting, but if the original organizer sends out an update, your changes might be overwritten.

Under EditPreferencesCalendar and TasksMeeting InvitationsConflict Search you can define which calendars are used for warning you of meeting conflicts.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-reply.page0000644000373100047300000000646012371247542026263 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Answering a received email. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Replying to a message
Replying to Email Messages

To reply to a message, select the message to reply to in the message list and click the Reply button in the toolbar, or right-click within the message and select Reply to Sender. This opens the message composer. The To: and Subject: fields are already filled, although you can alter them if you prefer. In addition, the full text of the old message is inserted into the new message, either in grey with a blue line on one side (for HTML display) or with the > character before each line (in plain text mode), to indicate that it is part of the previous message.

If you are reading a message with several recipients, you can use Reply to All instead of Reply. If there are large numbers of people in the Cc: or To: fields, this can save substantial amounts of time.

Using the Reply To All Feature

Susan sends an email to a client and sends copies to Tim and to an internal company mailing list of co-workers. If Tim wants to make a comment for all of them to read, he uses Reply to All, but if he just wants to tell Susan that he agrees with her, he uses Reply. His reply does not reach anyone that Susan put on her Bcc list, because that list is not shared with anyone.

If you subscribe to a mailing list, and want your reply to go just to the list rather than to the sender, select Reply to List instead of Reply or Reply to All.

Keyboard shortcuts

Action

Shortcut keys

Reply to Sender

CtrlR

Reply to Mailing List

CtrlL

Respondre a totes

ShiftCtrlR
Default settings

The default settings for replying and forwarding can be changed under EditPreferencesComposer PreferencesGeneralReplies and ForwardsReply style.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/contacts-usage-add-contact.page0000644000373100047300000000353012371247542027455 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adding a contact to your address book. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Adding a Contact

Click FileNewContact, or right-click in a blank space in the list of contacts and click New Contact..., or press ShiftCtrlC.

Select the address book under Where: to which it will be added.

Enter the contact information. Note that there are several tabs.

You can add a photograph to the contact by clicking the large field (showing a stylized person) next to Full Name and Categories.

Click OK.
Contact Quick-Add from the Email Window

You can also add a contact directly from an email.

Right-click on the email address in the message header.

Select Add to Address Book....

Either press Edit Full to bring up the full Contact Editor, or click OK to directly add the contact to the chosen address book.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/google-services.page0000644000373100047300000000112712371247537025457 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using Google services. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Using Google services usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-account-manage-usenet-news.page0000644000373100047300000000563012371247536030441 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit a Usenet news account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Usenet news account settings
Editor de compte

Mail accounts can be added by choosing FileNewMail Account or via EditPreferencesMail AccountsAdd. The steps are mostly the same as for the First-Run Assistant, except for not getting asked whether to import data from other applications or to restore from a backup file.

Mail accounts can be edited via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEdit or by right-clicking on the respective top-level node in the folder list and choosing Properties.

The following settings are available when editing an existing account:

Receiving Email and Receiving options (Usenet News accounts) Receiving Email and Receiving options
Sending Email (Usenet News accounts) Sending Email
Defaults (Usenet News accounts) Valors per defaut
Security (Usenet News accounts) Seguritat
Other settings (Usenet News accounts) Other settings

Other account related settings that are not located in the Account Editor:

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/offline.page0000644000373100047300000000371212371247541024001 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Make Evolution mail be online again. Brian Grohe grohe43@gmail.com Patrick O'Callaghan Why is Evolution's mail offline when my net connection is working?

You may have started Evolution with the --offline commandline option to enforce offline mode.

If this is not the case and Evolution normally works but has suddenly stopped connecting to your mail accounts, you may have unintentionally clicked on the connection icon in the lower left corner. When connected, the icon resembles a pair of sockets joined together. If the sockets are open, there is no connection to your mail accounts (and the Send/Receive button is grayed out). Click on the icon to change its state.

If the problem persists and you are sure you have not clicked the icon, but you can still reach the network from other apps on your system (browsers, FTP, SSH, ping etc.) it may be that your network connection is not properly configured. For more information please take a look at the Desktop help or seek help from your distribution support forums, mailing lists etc.

Evolution's forced offline mode only refers to mail and does not apply to contacts and calendars.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-account-manage-unix-mbox-spool-file.page0000644000373100047300000000567312371247540032163 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit a Standard Unix mbox Spool File account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Standard Unix mbox Spool File account settings
Editor de compte

Mail accounts can be added by choosing FileNewMail Account or via EditPreferencesMail AccountsAdd. The steps are mostly the same as for the First-Run Assistant, except for not getting asked whether to import data from other applications or to restore from a backup file.

Mail accounts can be edited via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEdit.

The following settings are available when editing an existing account:

Receiving Email and Receiving options (Standard Unix mbox Spool File accounts) Receiving Email and Receiving options
Sending Email (Standard Unix mbox Spool File accounts) Sending Email
Defaults (Standard Unix mbox Spool File accounts) Valors per defaut
Security (Standard Unix mbox Spool File accounts) Seguritat
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-cannot-see.page0000644000373100047300000000402312371247540025326 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 If you received or sent an email, but you cannot find it anywhere. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com I cannot see some emails, where are they?

Check whether you are using filters on incoming (or outgoing) messages. These could be automatically moving your messages to another destination.

Check your search view in the search bar right above the message list. Perhaps the Show dropdown list is set to a filter like Read Messages, or the text input filed contains some value. Click the broom icon to clear the search field.

If you cannot see any emails at all in a folder, check that you have not maximized the message preview (so the message list pane is hidden). To do this, click ViewPreviewShow Message Preview.

Look in the Junk folder. Messages that are marked as Junk disappear from the original folder and are moved to the Junk folder.

Click EditShow Deleted Messages to make sure all messages are visible.

Check your default folder under EditPreferencesEmail AccountsEditDefaults. Perhaps it is set to some other folder than the folder you thought of.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/memos-usage-edit-memo.page0000644000373100047300000000205412371247536026461 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Editing a memo in your memo list. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Editing a Memo

If you want to change a memo that already exists in your memo lists,

Double-click on the memo that you want to edit in the list of memos, or right-click on the memo and click Open Memo.

Edit the memo information.

Click the Save button, or FileSave.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-working-offline.page0000644000373100047300000000607112371247541026400 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Work with your mail while not being connected to the network. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Working Offline

Forced offline mode helps you communicate with remote mail storage systems like GroupWise, IMAP or Exchange, in situations where you are not connected to the network at all times. Evolution keeps a local copy of one or more folders to allow you to compose messages, storing them in your Outbox to be sent the next time you connect.

Evolution's forced offline mode only refers to mail and does not apply to contacts and calendars.

POP mail downloads all messages to your local system, but other connections usually download just the headers, and get the rest only when you want to read the message. Before you force Evolution to be offline, Evolution downloads the unread messages from the folders you have chosen to store.

Marking folders for offline usage

To mark a mail folder for offline use,

Right-click the folder, then click Properties.

Click Copy folder content locally for offline operation.
Syncing messages for offline usage

Your connection status is shown by the small icon in the lower left corner of the Evolution main window. When you are online, it displays two connected cables. When you force offline mode via clicking the icon or via FileWork Offline, the cables separate. You will be asked whether you want to go offline immediately or synchronize folders locally before you go offline.

To download Messages for Offline Operations without immediately going offline, select FileDownload Messages for Offline Usage.

Automatic Network State Handling

Evolution automatically understands the network state and acts accordingly. For instance, Evolution switches to offline mode when the network goes down and automatically switches on when the network is up again.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/problems-getting-help.page0000644000373100047300000000216412371247536026573 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to get help for problems. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net How to get help

To receive help on problems you can send an email to the Evolution mailing list or talk to developers and other users in the IRC chat channel #evolution on the server irc.gimp.net. To connect to an IRC server you can for example use the internet messenger application Empathy.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-labels.page0000644000373100047300000000334512371247535024546 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use labels to categorize your mail while keeping it in their folders. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Using Labels

You can add colored labels to emails in order to categorize them. This is similar to Categories in the other Evolution windows.

You can search for messages with specific labels by using the quick search dropdown. Also, search folders can be created based on labels.

Adding a label to a message

To assign a label to a message, right-click the message, click Label, and choose the label to apply.

You can also quickly add a new label by choosing New Label.

Managing labels

You can add, edit and delete all labels under EditPreferencesMail PreferencesLabels. Note that you cannot remove the default labels.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-recurrence.page0000644000373100047300000000266712371247542026274 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Repeating appointments. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Using Recurrence

If you have an appointment that takes place regularly, you can define its recurrence by clicking the Recurrence button in the Appointment Editor or by clicking OptionsRecurrence. You can then choose a time and date when the appointment stops recurring, and, under Exceptions, pick individual days when the appointment does not recur. Make your selections from left to right, and you form a sentence: "Every two weeks on Monday and Friday until January 3, 2015" or "Every month on the first Friday for 12 occurrences."

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-receiving-options-unix-mbox-spool-file.page0000644000373100047300000000377512371247542032750 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Receiving options for standard Unix mbox spool file accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Standard Unix mbox spool file receiving options
Recepcion de messatge

On the Receiving Email page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Email):

Choose the file by clicking on the button next to File in the Configuration section. This will open a file chooser window.
Opcions de recepcion

On the Receiving Options page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options):

If you want Evolution to check automatically for new messages, click the Check for new messages every ... minutes option and select the frequency in minutes.

If you want Filters to be automatically used for new messages in your inbox, enable Apply filters to new messages in INBOX.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/xinclude-filter-vfolder-conditions.xml0000644000373100047300000001033612371247535031152 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000

Expedidor :

The sender's email address or the name of the sender.

Recipients:

The recipients of the message.

CC:

Only the CC recipients of the message.

BCC:

Only the BCC recipients of the message. Obviously this can only be applied to outgoing filters.

Sender or Recipients:

The sender's email address or the name of the sender or the recipients of the message.

Subjècte :

The subject line of the message.

Specific Header:

Any header including custom ones.

If a message uses a header more than once, Evolution pays attention only to the first instance, even if the message defines the header differently the second time. For example, if a message declares the Resent-From: header as "engineering@example.com" and then restates it as "marketing@example.com", Evolution filters as though the second declaration did not occur. To filter on messages that use headers multiple times, use a regular expression.

Message Body:

Searches in the actual text of the message.

Expression :

(For programmers only) Match a message according to an expression you write in the Scheme language used to define filters in Evolution.

Date sent:

Filters messages according to the date on which they were sent. First, choose the conditions you want a message to meet, such as before a given time or after a given time. Then choose the time. The filter compares the message's time stamp to the system clock when the filter is run, or to a specific time and date you choose from a calendar. You can also have it look for a message within a range of time relative to the filter, such as two to four days ago.

Date received:

This works the same way as the Date Sent option, except that it compares the time you received the message with the dates you specify.

Etiqueta :

Messages can have labels of Important, Work, Personal, To Do, or Later. You can set labels with other filters or manually.

Marca :

Sets the message score to any whole number greater than 0. You can have one filter set or change a message score, and then set up another filter to move the messages you have scored. A message score is not based on anything in particular: it is simply a number you can assign to messages so other filters can process them.

Size (kB):

Sorts based on the size of the message in kilobytes.

Estat :

Filters according to the status of a message. The status can be Replied To, Draft, Important, Read, or Junk.

Follow Up:

Checks whether the message is flagged for follow-up.

Completed On:

Pèças juntas :

Checks whether there is an attachment for the email.

Mailing List:

Filters based on the mailing list the message came from. This filter might miss messages from some list servers, because it checks for the X-BeenThere header, which is used to identify mailing lists or other redistributors of mail. Mail from list servers that do not set X-BeenThere properly are not be caught by these filters.

Regex Match:

(For programmers only) If you know your way around a regex, or regular expression, this option allows you to search for complex patterns of letters, so that you can find, for example, all words that start with a and end with m, and are between six and fifteen letters long, or all messages that declare a particular header twice. For information about how to use regular expressions, check the man page for the grep command.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-calendar-sending-invitations.page0000644000373100047300000000404412371247536031045 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sending invitations for appointments to contacts via email. Novell, Inc Sending invitations by email

If you create an event in the calendar component, you can then send invitations to the attendee list through the Evolution email tool. The invitation card is sent as an attachment in iCal format.

To send an invitation, right-click on the entry in the calendar and choose Forward as iCalendar.

When you receive an invitation, you have several options:

Acceptar :

Indicates you will attend the meeting. When you click the OK button, the meeting is entered into your calendar.

Tentatively Accept:

Indicates you will probably attend the meeting. When you click the OK button, the meeting is entered into your calendar, but is marked as tentative.

Decline:

Indicates you are unable to attend the meeting. The meeting is not entered into your calendar when you click OK, although your response is sent to the meeting host if you have selected the Send reply to sender option.

Send reply to sender:

Select this option if you want your response sent to the meeting organizers.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-read-receipts.page0000644000373100047300000000415312371247540026025 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to enable requesting read receipts. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Read receipts for emails

Read receipts are a way for people to acknowledge that they have received your email. The recipient can normally choose whether to acknowledge the receipt or not, so they are not a completely reliable way of checking if your emails have been received by someone.

You can request read receipts by enabling this option in the email composer's menu. To do so, go to OptionsRequest Read Receipt.

For read receipts that you receive you can define Evolution's behavior by going to EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditDefaultsMessage Receipts.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-write-new-message.page0000644000373100047300000000274412371247535030476 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Writing a new email to send to a recipient. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Composing a new message

You can start writing a new email message by clicking FileNewMail Message, by pressing ShiftCtrlM, or by clicking New in the toolbar.

Enter an email address in the To: field. If you want to enter multiple addresses, separate them by commas. See for more information on sending messages to more than one person.

After you have written your message, click Send or press CtrlReturn.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-default-folder-locations.page0000644000373100047300000000376612371247541030176 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Changing the location of Draft, Sent, Trash and Junk folders. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mail folder locations

You can set a different place where to store messages in your Draft folder and Sent folder in the Defaults section of the mail account editor (EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditDefaults).

For remote account types (accounts such as IMAP) you can also use folders on the mail server for Junk and Trash by selecting the corresponding Use a Real Folder option. In this case, Evolution's local virtual folders will not be used.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-spam-marking.page0000644000373100047300000000452612371247536025675 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to mark unwanted junk and spam mail. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Pete Biggs Barbara Tobias barbtobias09@gmail.com Novell, Inc Marking Mail as Junk

While SpamAssassin comes with a set of predefined rules, Bogofilter needs to be taught first before it will automatically filter junk mail. If you only train Bogofilter on bad messages, it will assume all mail is bad (because it does not know any difference) hence it will not make any decisions until the database is sufficiently large to determine what is and is not spam. In any case, when you first start using junk mail blocking, check the Junk mail folder frequently to be sure that legitimate mail doesn't get flagged as junk mail.

Manually Marking Junk Mail

If Evolution misses junk mail, right-click the message, then click Mark as Junk, or mark the message and press CtrlJ or click the Junk button in the tool bar. When you correct it, the filter can recognize similar messages in the future, and becomes more accurate as time goes on.

If legitimate mail is incorrectly flagged, remove it from the Junk folder by right-clicking it and selecting Mark as Not Junk or pressing ShiftCtrlJ, or mark the message and click the Not Junk button.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/deleting-emails.page0000644000373100047300000000324012371247536025422 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Deleting emails or attachments to reduce the size of the mailbox. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Deleting emails or attachments permanently
Emails

Evolution deletes emails on IMAP servers by marking the messages for deletion; space is not freed until you expunge the marked emails.

To Expunge a specific folder, go to FolderExpunge or press CtrlE. To Expunge all folders, go to FileEmpty Trash. This applies to other types of accounts as well.

Estacaments

To delete the attachments of an email, select the message and click MessageRemove Attachments.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-receiving-options-exchange-mapi.page0000644000373100047300000000505512371247542031452 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Receiving options for Exchange MAPI accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Exchange MAPI receiving options
Recepcion de messatge

On the Receiving Email page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Email):

Enter the address of the email server in the Server field and enter your username for that server.

Enter the Domain name for that server.

If you are in an organizational environment, you may want to contact your system administrator for more information.

Select your authentication type in the Authentication list, or click Check for Supported Types to have Evolution check for supported authentication mechanisms. Some servers do not announce the authentication mechanisms they support, so clicking this button is not a guarantee that available mechanisms actually work.

Select if you want to use a secure connection (SSL or TLS).

Click Authenticate and enter your password.
Opcions de recepcion

On the Receiving Options page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options):

If you want Evolution to check automatically for new messages, click the Check for new messages every ... minutes option and select the frequency in minutes.

You can also define if Evolution checks for new messages in all folders.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-change-columns-in-message-list.page0000644000373100047300000000334112371247536031203 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Editing the columns displayed in the list of messages. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Changing the message list columns

If you want to change the columns in the mail message list, right-click on the column headers and choose either Add a Column... or Remove This Column.

If you have a small display, you can replace the Subject column by the Subject - Trimmed which will remove prefixes such as "Re:", or you can replace the From column which displays the sender's name and email address by the Sender column which will only display the sender's name.

If you would like to have the same column layout in all mail folders except for the Sent folder, you can enable EditPreferencesMail PreferencesGeneralApply the same view settings to all folders. Note that this setting also influences Group by Threads and the Message Preview visibility in all folders.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-filters-actions.page0000644000373100047300000000505512371247542026410 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Available actions for setting up filtering. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Available Filter actions

Move to Folder:

Moves the message into a folder you specify.

Copy to Folder:

Puts a copy of the message into a folder you specify.

Suprimir :

Marks the message for deletion. The message can be undeleted until you expunge or empty the trash.

Stop Processing:

Select this if you want to all other filters ignore this message. Note that only filters listed after this particular rule will be ignored.

Set Label:

Adds a label to a message.

Assign Color:

Marks the message with a color of your choice.

Assign Score:

Assigns the message a numeric score.

Adjust Score:

Changes the numeric score by the amount you set.

Set Status:

Sets the status of the message. The status can be Replied To, Draft, Important, Read, or Junk.

Unset Status:

If the message has a status value, unsets it. If a status value is not set, it does nothing.

Beep:

Makes the system beep.

Play Sound:

Select a sound file for Evolution to play.

Run Program:

Evolution runs an application.

Pipe to Program:

Sends the message to an application of your choice. No return value is expected. This feature can be used to create automatic Web postings from email messages or to perform additional message post processing not supported by Evolution.

Forward to:

Forwards the message to another email address.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/exporting-data-mail.page0000644000373100047300000000227712371247542026233 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to export mail data from Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Exporting mail data

To save an email to a file in mbox format, select an email and click FileSave as mbox... or right-click on the message and click Save as mbox....

The same steps apply to save a complete mail folder, but you have to mark all messages in it first.

You can select all messages in a folder by clicking EditSelect All or pressing CtrlA.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-html-rule.page0000644000373100047300000000271512371247541027037 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Insert a horizontal line in the mail composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Inserting a Rule in HTML

You can insert a horizontal line into the email (at the current position of the cursor) to help divide two sections:

Click InsertRule... in the menubar.

Select width, size, and alignment.

Select Shaded if wanted.

Click Close.

Alternately, you can also use the icon in the second bar below the Subject line.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-html-text.page0000644000373100047300000000556612371247537027070 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Change font sizes, styles and colors in the mail composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Formatting Text in HTML

Text formatting tools that are available in HTML format only are located in the second tool bar below the Subject line after enabling HTML format. They also appear in the Insert and Format menus.

The icons in the tool bar are explained in tooltips which appear when you hold your mouse pointer over the buttons.

Text Styles:

Use these buttons in the lower tool bar to determine the way your email looks. If you have text selected, the style applies to the selected text. If you do not have text selected, the style applies to whatever you type next.

Boton

Descripcion

+0

Font size.

Color chooser for text. The box displays the current text color. To choose a new color, click the arrow button to the right. If you have text selected, the color applies to the selected text. If you do not have text selected, the color applies to whatever you type next. You can select a background color or image by right-clicking the message background, then selecting StylePage Style.

TT

Typewriter text, which is similar to a monospace font.

Bold A

Bolds the text.

Italic A

Italicizes the text.

Underlined A

Underlines the text.

Strike through A

Marks a line through the text.

The other buttons are explained under .

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/data-storage.page0000644000373100047300000000277412371247536024745 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Where does Evolution store my data on the harddisk? Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Data storage locations

This is only interesting for advanced users who want to debug problems.

Evolution 3.6 and later stores its data according to the XDG Base Directory Specification. By default this means:

The user's data files

$HOME/.local/share/evolution

 Various configuration and state files

$HOME/.config/evolution

 Account settings

$HOME/.config/evolution/sources

 Disposable data caches

$HOME/.cache/evolution

 Configuration settings in GSettings

$HOME/.config/dconf

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-timezones.page0000644000373100047300000000413212371247535026143 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using time zones in the calendar. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Using time zones

Evolution supports using multiple time zones.

Setting your global timezone(s)

By default Evolution uses the system-wide time zone. This can be changed under EditPreferencesCalendar and TasksGeneralTimeTime zone.

If you deal a lot with people in another specific time zone you can display that second time zone in the day view of the calendar. You can set a second time zone under EditPreferencesCalendar and TasksGeneralTimeSecond zone.

Setting a timezone for an appointment

You can also configure time zone information specific to each appointment. To do that, add a new or edit an existing appointment and click the globe button to customize the time zone that the time exists in. For example, if you live in New York but have a telephone meeting set for noon with someone in California, you need to make sure that your schedules are coordinated. Setting time zones on a per-appointment basis helps avoid that potential confusion.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-account-manage-microsoft-exchange-evo-ews.page0000644000373100047300000000554112371247541033331 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit a Microsoft Exchange 2007 or 2010 account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Exchange Web Services account settings
Editor de compte

Mail accounts can be added by choosing FileNewMail Account or via EditPreferencesMail AccountsAdd. The steps are mostly the same as for the First-Run Assistant, except for not getting asked whether to import data from other applications or to restore from a backup file.

Mail accounts can be edited via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEdit or by right-clicking on the respective top-level node in the folder list and choosing Properties.

The following settings are available when editing an existing account:

Receiving Email and Receiving options (Exchange Web Services accounts) Receiving Email and Receiving options
Defaults (Exchange Web Services accounts) Valors per defaut
Security (Exchange Web Services accounts) Seguritat
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-displaying-message.page0000644000373100047300000000135612371247540027065 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Rendering an email and handling its attachments. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Display of a message
Advanced
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-layout.page0000644000373100047300000000124612371247541025443 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adjusting the display and views of the calendar. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Changing the calendar layout usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/import-data.page0000644000373100047300000000142512371247535024602 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Importing data from another application. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Importing data from another application
Applications
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/contacts-using-contact-lists.page0000644000373100047300000000567612371247541030120 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using contact lists for grouping contacts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Using Contact Lists

A contact list is a set of contacts with a single nickname that you create. When you send mail to this nickname it is actually sent to every member of the list. This differs from a "real" mailing list in that it exists only on your computer as a convenience to you, rather than as an actual email address managed by a mailing list application on a server.

For example, you could create one contact for each family member, then add those contacts to a contact list called "Family". Then, instead of entering each person's email address individually, you can send emails to "Family" and the messages would go to all of them.

Creating a contact list

Click FileNewContact List.

Enter a name that you prefer.

Select the address book under Where: to which it will be added.

Specify the list members by either entering the names or email addresses of contacts (the text field supports autocompletion), or by dragging contacts from the Contacts window into the list, or by using the Select... button.

Choose whether you want to hide the email addresses when you send a message to the list.

Unless it is a very small list, it is recommended that you leave the addresses hidden. This is the same thing as using the “Bcc:” feature discussed in Sending a message to several recipients.

Click OK.

The contact list will be added to the chosen address book in Evolution.

Sending messages to a contact list

To send a message to the contact list, enter the name that you chose for the contact list as the recipient in the mail composer. You can also right-click the contact list in your address book and select Send Message to List.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-usage.page0000644000373100047300000000134312371247540025227 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On adding, editing, and deleting appointments. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Add, Edit, and Delete Appointments usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-html-link.page0000644000373100047300000000317212371247542027024 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Insert a link to a website in the mail composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Inserting a Link in HTML

You can insert links into the email:

Select the text that you want to turn into a link.

Either click InsertLink... in the menubar, or right-click on the selected text and click Insert Link.

Enter the address in the URL field.

Click Close.

Alternately, you can also use the icon in the second bar below the Subject line.

If you do not want a special link text you can just enter the address of the link directly. It will be automatically recognized as a link.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-several-pop-accounts.page0000644000373100047300000000321012371247536027346 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to split and sort mail when using more than one local account. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Separating POP mail for more than one account

It is not possible to have separate accounts in the accounts and folder list pane. Evolution only has one unique inbox for incoming email.

You can either use IMAP instead of POP, or move incoming emails into different folders by creating folders and creating filters: Create a new folder and create two subfolders (for incoming and for sent mail of that account). Now set up an incoming filter via EditMessage Filters...Add to move incoming mail to the incoming folder by filtering on the recipient's address and set up an outgoing filter to move outgoing mail to the sent folder by filtering on the sender's address.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-account-manage-microsoft-exchange-evo-mapi.page0000644000373100047300000000567112371247541033465 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit a Microsoft Exchange MAPI account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Exchange MAPI account settings
Editor de compte

Mail accounts can be added by choosing FileNewMail Account or via EditPreferencesMail AccountsAdd. The steps are mostly the same as for the First-Run Assistant, except for not getting asked whether to import data from other applications or to restore from a backup file.

Mail accounts can be edited via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEdit or by right-clicking on the respective top-level node in the folder list and choosing Properties.

The following settings are available when editing an existing account:

Receiving Email and Receiving options (Exchange MAPI accounts) Receiving Email and Receiving options
Defaults (Exchange MAPI accounts) Valors per defaut
Exchange Settings

In this section you can view the size of all Exchange folders.

Security (Exchange MAPI accounts) Seguritat
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-displaying-collapsible-headers.page0000644000373100047300000000306412371247542031343 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Display less email recipients of a specific message. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Collapsible Message Headers

Evolution compresses the To, Cc and Bcc headers of received mail and shows only five addresses in the message preview.

To see all recipients, click the icon next to the To: or Cc: line, or click the ellipsis (...) at the end of the five displayed addresses.

To collapse all of the message headers and just display the subject and sender in one line, click the icon next to the From: line. This is helpful on small screens.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-moving-emails.page0000644000373100047300000000262612371247535026054 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Moving emails from one folder to another. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Moved emails are still shown in the original folder

If your IMAP mail server does not yet support IMAP's "move" feature which was introduced in January 2013, Evolution "moves" messages by copying and deleting emails. Deleting means "marking messages for deletion" so all the original messages are retained until you expunge the emails marked for deletion.

See the topic on deleting emails for instructions on how to expunge email messages. Note that this applies to other types of accounts as well.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-filters-not-working.page0000644000373100047300000000664312371247543027233 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Fix problems with mail filters that do not sort and organize mail as expected. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mail filters are not working
Order of Filters

The order of filters is very important. They are applied to the original message in sequence, like a recipe.

If your first filter has a Stop Processing rule, then all messages that match this filter will ignore all succeeding filters.

When you move a message to another folder, "moving" actually means appending a copy of the message to the destination folder and marking the original message for deletion. So any subsequent filter rules will be applied to the original message that is now marked for deletion. Therefore moving a message should usually appear last in a sequence of filter rules.

To check the rules and their order of an existing filter, review its actions in the Then section by editing the filter.

Using Several Mail Clients

Another thing you have to keep in mind is that filters depend on the "new" flag that is set on the server when a particular email message is initially fetched from the server. If you use another email client aside from Evolution, your filters may not work automatically.

Logging Filter Actions

If it is still unclear why filters do not work as expected, you can enable logging filter actions.

Close Evolution.

Open the Terminal application.

Run the command gsettings set org.gnome.evolution.mail filters-log-actions true

Run the command gsettings set org.gnome.evolution.mail filters-log-file "/home/myusername/my-filter-log" and replace myusername by your username. This will create a text file named my-filter-log in your home directory. Note that the absolute path to the file name must be entered; a syntax like ~ or $HOME will not work.

Aviar Evolution.

Fetch mail to apply filters.

Open the file my-filter-log with a text editor to see which filter actions have been applied.

Note that you can disable filter logging again by using the command gsettings set org.gnome.evolution.mail filters-log-actions false

You can also use the dconf-editor application to do this.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/deleting-appointments.page0000644000373100047300000000207212371247540026666 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Deleting calendar entries to reduce the size of the mailbox. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Deleting old appointments permanently

To Purge old entries in a calendar, go to ActionsPurge in the Calendar view. You will be asked how many days old the events to remove from the calendar should be. The action will be applied to the currently opened calendar (selected in the list of calendars on the left); other calendars remain unchanged.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-layout-views.page0000644000373100047300000000375712371247537026614 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using date ranges (day, week, month) to look at the calendar. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Available views

Evolution offers five different views of your calendar data:

Day (CtrlY)

Work Week (CtrlJ)

Week (CtrlK)

Month (CtrlM)

List (CtrlL)

You can switch the view by either using the buttons in the toolbar, or by clicking ViewCurrent View.

You can also select an arbitrary range of days in the small calendar in the side bar. To do this, select the days that you want to view in your calendar.

The Previous and Next buttons move you forward and back in your calendar pages. If you are using a week or month view, you can move by week or month. To return to today's listing, click the Select today button between the two arrow buttons in the toolbar.

To visit calendar entries for a specific date, click the Select a specific date button in the toolbar.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-account-manage-imap-plus.page0000644000373100047300000000604612371247536030075 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit an IMAP+ mail account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net IMAP+ mail account settings
Editor de compte

Mail accounts can be added by choosing FileNewMail Account or via EditPreferencesMail AccountsAdd. The steps are mostly the same as for the First-Run Assistant, except for not getting asked whether to import data from other applications or to restore from a backup file.

Mail accounts can be edited via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEdit or by right-clicking on the respective top-level node in the folder list and choosing Properties.

The following settings are available when editing an existing account:

Receiving Email and Receiving options (IMAP+ accounts) Receiving Email and Receiving options
Sending Email (IMAP+ accounts) Sending Email
Defaults (IMAP+ accounts) Valors per defaut
Security (IMAP+ accounts) Seguritat
Other settings (IMAP+ accounts) Other settings

Other account related settings that are not located in the Account Editor:

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-recognized-thread-related-headers.page0000644000373100047300000000171412371247541031724 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Which thread-related headers are recognized by Evolution. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Thread related headers recognized by Evolution

Evolution supports the following headers:

References

In-Reply-To

Thread-* headers are Microsoft's proprietary headers and not supported.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-receiving-options-unix-mbox-spool-directory.page0000644000373100047300000000376012371247535034031 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Receiving options for standard Unix mbox spool directory accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Standard Unix mbox spool directory receiving options
Recepcion de messatge

On the Receiving Email page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Email):

Choose the directory by clicking on the button next to Path in the Configuration section. Some default folders are available in the list. If the directory is not among those folders, choose the last option Other.... This will open a directory chooser window.
Opcions de recepcion

On the Receiving Options page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options):

If you want Filters to be automatically used for new messages in your inbox, enable Apply filters to new messages in INBOX.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-received-notification.page0000644000373100047300000000344212371247535027554 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Options on notifications of newly received mail. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Getting notified of new mail

Evolution always notifies you of new messages by adding a yellow star to the mailer icon in the window switcher.

Switcher layout when a new message has arrived

In order to also be notified of new messages in the GNOME Notification area at the bottom of the screen, make sure that EditPluginsMail Notification is enabled and that you have set your preferred options in the Configuration tab.

Switcher layout when a new message has arrived

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/contacts-searching.page0000644000373100047300000000507612371247542026144 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Searching contacts. Max Vorobuov vmax0770@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Searching Contacts
Searching in a Single Contact

To find text in the displayed contact, select EditFind in Contact... from the main menu.

Searching Across Contacts
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-filters-conditions.page0000644000373100047300000000415012371247542027114 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Available conditions for setting up filtering. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Available Filter conditions

Source Account:

Filters messages according the server you got them from. This is most useful if you use multiple POP mail accounts.

Pipe to Program:

Evolution can use an external command to process a message, then process it based on the return value. Commands used in this way must return an integer. This is most commonly used to add an external junk mail filter.

Junk Test:

Filters based on the results of the junk mail test.

Match All:

Applies an action always to any message, without further conditions. This could be useful at the end of the list of message filters to cover those emails that did not match any conditions for the preceding filters in the list.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-search-folders.page0000644000373100047300000000425712371247541026205 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use search folders to see messages in one folder while still keeping them in their original folders. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Using Search folders

If filters are not flexible enough, or you find yourself performing the same search again and again, consider a search folder.

A search folder looks like a folder, it acts like a search, and you set it up like a filter. While a conventional folder actually contains messages, a search folder is a view of messages that might be in several different folders. The messages it contains are determined on the fly using a set of criteria that you have chosen when setting up the search folder.

Evolution automatically updates the search folder contents when new messages are received or message are deleted.

The Unmatched search folder is the opposite of other search folders: it displays all messages that do not appear in other search folders.

If you use remote email storage like IMAP, and have created search folders to search through them, the Unmatched search folder also searches the remote folders. If you do not create any search folders that search remote mail stores, the Unmatched search folder does not search in them either.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-message-templates-save.page0000644000373100047300000000355012371247537031505 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Store an existing or new message as a template Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Saving Messages as Templates
Saving an Existing Message as a Template

Select the message.

Right-click the message and choose Move to folder or Copy to folder.

Select the Templates folder under On This Computer.

You can also edit an existing message and save it as a template:

Open the message and click Reply.

Edit the message body or the addresses according to your requirements.

Select FileSave as Template.
Saving a New Message as a Template

Click New and enter in the composer window what you need for the template.

Select FileSave as Template.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-alarms-and-reminders.page0000644000373100047300000000415412371247535030137 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Setting up reminder notifications for appointments. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Reminders for appointments
General Settings

Under EditPreferencesCalendar and TasksReminders you can select those calendars for which you want to receive reminder notifications. If you do not select a calendar, you will not receive reminders for any events in this calendar. You can also define whether to show a reminder for every appointment and for every birthday and anniversary.

Manual Reminders

Apart from the general settings you can also set up reminders in the appointment editor for certain appointments only:

Click OptionsReminders or press the Reminder button in the toolbar.

From the dropdown menu, choose either one of the available default options when to show a notification reminder, or choose Customize.

In case of Customize, the reminder can be a popup, a sound played, or a program ran. You can also define whether the reminder should be repeated.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-webdav.page0000644000373100047300000000277312371247535025407 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using an online Webcal/WebDAV calendar. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Using a WebDAV calendar

Calendars of this type are read-only.

To add such a calendar to Evolution, perform the following steps:

Click FileNewCalendar.

Select the type On the Web.

Enter a name that you prefer.

Optionally choose a color that you prefer.

Choose if you want to be able to view the content also when being offline.

Enter the address of the calendar in the URL field.

Choose Use secure connection if you want to connect securely.

Enter your username.

Click Apply.

The calendar will be added to the list of calendars in Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-displaying-images-in-html.page0000644000373100047300000000566612371247535030270 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On embedded pictures in received HTML messages. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Novell, Inc Images in HTML messages

When someone sends you HTML mail that includes an image in the body of the message (for example, the welcome message in your Inbox), Evolution displays the image inside the message.

Loading images

Some images are links in a message, rather than being part of the message. Evolution can download those images from the Internet, but does not do so unless you request it. This is because remotely hosted images can be slow to load and display, and can even be used by spammers to track who reads the email. Not automatically loading images helps protect your privacy.

To load the images for one message, click ViewLoad Images or press CtrlI.

To set the default action for loading images, go to EditPreferencesMail PreferencesHTML MessagesLoading Images.

Automatically download images in emails from people you know

You can download images from emails sent by your contacts. To do this, go to EditPreferencesMail PreferencesHTML MessagesLoading Images. Enable the Load images only in messages from contacts option.

Next, go to EditPreferencesContactsAutocompletion. Enable autocompletion by ticking the Always show address of the autocompleted contact checkbox.

Saving images

To save an image that is embedded in an HTML email, right-click on the image and click Save Image....

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-reading-keyboard-shortcuts.page0000644000373100047300000000667112371247536030555 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Keyboard shortcuts that can save you some time when reading mail. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Using shortcut keys to read mail
Viewing an email

In the Mail window you read a message by selecting it in the message list. If you would like to see the message in its own window, either double-click it, press Enter, or press CtrlO.

Navigating in a message

To read mail with the keyboard, you can press the Spacebar to page down and press Backspace to page up while reading an email. Ensure that you use the keys when the message list is focused.

Navigating in a folder in the message list

Navigate in the message list by using the arrow keys on the keyboard.

Navigating in a folder's unread mail in the message list

To go to the next or previous unread messages, press the period (.) or comma (,) keys. On some keyboards, these keys are also marked with the > and < symbols, which is a convenient way to remember that they move you forward and backward in your message list. You can also use the right square bracket (]) for the next unread message, and the left square bracket ([) for the previous unread message.

Navigating in unread mail across folders

You can easily read the unread messages in all the mail folders by using the Spacebar.

When you are in the Mail window, the Spacebar has the following behavior:

When you press the Spacebar for the first time, it takes you to the next unread message.

If the message is more than one screen long, the Spacebar works as Page Down.

If you press the Spacebar after you reach the bottom of the page, it takes you to the next unread message.

If there are no more unread messages in the mailbox, pressing the Spacebar takes you to the next unread message in the next folder.

If new messages arrive in a number of folders, the Spacebar toggles between those folders. This feature allows you to switch to the next unread message in a different folder without clicking the folder.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/contacts-google.page0000644000373100047300000000262112371247541025445 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the online address book of your Google account. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Using a Google addressbook

To add such an address book to Evolution, perform the following steps:

Click FileNewAddress Book.

Select the type Google.

Enter a name that you prefer.

Choose if you want to be able to view the content also when being offline.

Enter your Google username.

Choose Use secure connection if you want to connect securely.

Click Apply.

The address book will be added to the list of address books in Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/contacts-ldap.page0000644000373100047300000001102012371247537025107 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use shared address books on a local network. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Adding LDAP access

The LDAP protocol was created to let users share contact information over a network by sharing access to a central directory. LDAP allows a company to maintain a shared set of contact information. Many companies keep a common LDAP address book for all their employees or for client contacts.

Adding an LDAP address book

Click FileNewAddress Book.

In the General tab, select the type On LDAP Servers.

Enter a name that you prefer.

Enter the address of the server, the port number (the default number is 389) and whether you want to connect securely.

Define the login method and your user name.

Click Apply.

In the Details tab you can define the following settings:

Search Base: The search base is the starting point for a directory search. Contact your system administrator for information about the correct settings.

Search Scope: The search scope is the breadth of a given search. The following options are available:

One: Searches the Search Base and one entry below it.

Sub: Searches the Search Base and all entries below it.

Search Filter: The search filter can be set here for all the LDAP queries. For example:

ObjectClass=*: Lists all the objects from the server.

ObjectClass=User: Lists only the users.

Filter (|(ObjectClass=User)(ObjectClass=groupOfNames)): Retrieves the User and Contact List objects.

(&(mail=*)(ObjectClass=*)): Lists the objects associated with the email addresses.

Timeout (minutes): The maximum time Evolution attempts to download data from the server before giving up.

Download Limit: The maximum number of results for a given search. Most servers refuse to send more than 500 contacts, but you can set the number lower if you want to shorten downloads for very broad searches.

If you are unsure about some settings, ask your system administrator.
Differences to local address books

LDAP address books work like local address books on your computer, with the following exceptions:

Network folders are only available when you are connected to the network. If you use a laptop or have a modem connection, you might want to copy or cache some of the network directory. You do this by dragging and dropping your desired contacts into the local address books.

You can also mark the network folder for offline usage. To mark the folder, right-click the folder, click Properties and select Copy Folder Content Locally for Offline Operation.

To prevent excess network traffic, Evolution does not normally load data from the LDAP server upon opening.

Depending on your server settings, you might not be able to edit all the fields in a contact stored on an LDAP server. Some servers prohibit some or all changes, and others use a smaller set of fields than Evolution allows. Check with your system administrator if you need different settings.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-html.page0000644000373100047300000000367312371247536026102 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Changing fonts, using colors, and inserting images, tables and links. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Formatting emails (in Plain Text and HTML)

Text formatting tools for basic alignment and paragraph formatting are located in the tool bar below the Subject line. They also appear in the Insert and Format menus.

The icons in the tool bar are explained in tooltips which appear when you hold your mouse pointer over the buttons.

Normally, you cannot set text color or size or embed pictures in messages. However, most newer email applications can do this by using HTML format, which is the format that also web pages use.

Some people do not have HTML-capable mail clients, or prefer not to receive HTML-enhanced mail because it is slower to download and display. Because of this, Evolution sends plain text unless you explicitly ask for HTML.

Plain Text Formatting Options
HTML-only Formatting Options
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-two-trash-folders.page0000644000373100047300000000357412371247541026671 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to have only one trash or junk folder per account. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Two Trash or Junk folders shown for the same account

If you use a remote mail account that also has Junk and/or Trash folders on the server you might face duplicated folders in Evolution.

You can easily tell the two Trash folders apart by looking at their icons. The Evolution Trash folder has a special icon whereas the other physical Trash folder looks like any other folder.

By default, Evolution's Trash and Junk folders are Search folders. They do not really exist but simply display all the messages that are marked as junk or for deletion in any folders of that account.

In order to only use the folders for Junk and Trash on the mail server, select the corresponding Use a Real Folder option under EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditDefaults. In this case, Evolution's local virtual folders will not be used.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-encryption-gpg-decrypting.page0000644000373100047300000000315612371247537030421 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Decrypting and checking the signature of received GPG messages. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Receiving messages encrypted or signed via GPG
Decrypting a received message

If you receive an encrypted message, you need to decrypt it before you can read it.

When you view the message, Evolution prompts you for your PGP password. Enter it, and the unencrypted message is displayed.

Senders must have your GPG public key before they can send you an encrypted message.
Checking the signature of a received message

To check the sender's signature of a received message, scroll down to the bottom of the message and click the logo. Evolution will display Security Information for the message.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-custom-header-lines.page0000644000373100047300000000424712371247536031004 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using custom fields in the header of composed messages Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Custom Header Lines

You can add arbitrary header lines to outgoing emails.

Enabling and managing custom headers

To set up the Custom Header plugin:

Select EditPlugins.

Enable Custom Header.

Click the Configuration tab.

You can add, edit, or remove the header fields. For every header field you add, you can specify the keys and values. The key is used as the title of the Custom Header. You can enter multiple values for the keys. You must use a semicolon to separate every value you enter.
Inserting custom headers in a message

Click NewMail Message or press ShiftCtrlM to open the message composer window.

Select InsertCustom Header.

In the Email Custom Header window, you can view all the defined header fields and values.

Set the values for the header fields by using the dropdown list.

Click OK.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-spam.page0000644000373100047300000000123512371247542024236 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to automatically handle unwanted mail. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Junk and Spam Mail Handling usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/exchange-connectors-overview.page0000644000373100047300000000503312371247537030163 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Which additional package to install in order to connect to an Exchange server. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Choosing the right connector

Depending on the version of the Microsoft Exchange server that you would like to connect to it is required to make sure that an additional package is installed that provides this functionality.

For Microsoft Exchange 2007, 2010 and newer it is recommended to use the package evolution-ews.

Install evolution-ews

For older versions of Microsoft Exchange, or if evolution-ews does not work well for you, try evolution-mapi. It uses Microsoft's Messaging API which is also used by Microsoft Outlook. However, evolution-mapi requires installing OpenChange and Samba 4, and is not as performant as evolution-ews.

Install evolution-mapi

If you are unsure which Microsoft Exchange server version is used, you may want to contact your system administrator for more information.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000050712371247535023331 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported License.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-searching-attachment-type.page0000644000373100047300000000163712371247535030356 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Unfortunately this is not possible. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Searching for emails with a specific attachment type

There currently is no way to do search for emails with a specific type of attachment (for example searching for all emails that have a PDF attachment).

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-publishing.page0000644000373100047300000000347412371247537026304 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Post your calendar content in public. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Publicacion de calendièr

In order to make one of your calendars available to the public, you can define calendars to be uploaded to a web server under EditPreferencesCalendar and TasksPublishing InformationLocationsAdd.

You can specify the online location, the frequency of publishing, which calendar(s) to publish, and authentication information for uploading.

You can publish Calendar and Free/Busy information to a WebDAV server, FTP server, a remote machine through SSH or to any other web server with HTTP PUT support.

To immediately publish calendar information, click ActionsPublish Calendar Information in the calendar.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-layout-changing.page0000644000373100047300000000131612371247542026367 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Changing the display of the mail window (message list columns and widescreen). Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Changing the mail window layout usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-account-manage-local-delivery.page0000644000373100047300000000551412371247537031101 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit a Local Delivery account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Local Delivery account settings
Editor de compte

Mail accounts can be added by choosing FileNewMail Account or via EditPreferencesMail AccountsAdd. The steps are mostly the same as for the First-Run Assistant, except for not getting asked whether to import data from other applications or to restore from a backup file.

Mail accounts can be edited via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEdit.

The following settings are available when editing an existing account:

Receiving Email and Receiving options (Local Delivery accounts) Receiving Email and Receiving options
Sending Email (Local Delivery accounts) Sending Email
Defaults (Local Delivery accounts) Valors per defaut
Security (Local Delivery accounts) Seguritat
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/contacts-add-automatically.page0000644000373100047300000000323312371247537027574 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Automatically add senders of mail that you have received to your contacts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Barbara Tobias barbtobias09@gmail.com Adding people automatically to my contacts

You can add people automatically to your contacts when you reply to received email. Enable the plugin Automatic Contacts by going to EditPlugins; click on Automatic Contacts so that it shows a check mark. Then go to EditPreferencesContactsAutomatic Contacts and enable the Create address book entries when sending emails option and select an address book in the drop-down field below that will receive the new contacts.

From now on, contacts will be automatically created for senders of received mail when you reply to that mail.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/memos-usage.page0000644000373100047300000000163312371247542024602 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On adding, editing, and deleting memos. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Add, Edit and Delete Memos

Currently there is no support for syncing memos with the Tomboy or Gnote applications.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-save-as-pdf.page0000644000373100047300000000270412371247541025405 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Converting emails into PDF files. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Save messages as PDF

In order to save emails in the PDF file format, select FilePrint and then choose Print to File. See the desktop help for general information on printing.

You can also export messages as PDF by dragging and dropping them to the file manager, instead of dropping them in mbox (text) format by default.

Open the Terminal application.

Run the command gsettings set org.gnome.evolution.mail drag-and-drop-save-file-format 'pdf'

You can also use the dconf-editor application to do this.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-encryption-gpg-create-key.page0000644000373100047300000000713312371247541030274 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Signing or encrypting messages via GPG/OpenPGP that you send. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Creating a GPG key

These steps are very technical. For average users we recommend using the Seahorse application for managing GPG/OpenPGP keys.

Before you can get or send GPG encrypted mail, you need to generate your public and private keys with GPG.

Open the Terminal application and enter gpg --gen-key.

Select an algorithm, then press Enter.

Select a key length, then press Enter.

Enter how long your key should be valid for.

Type your real name, then press Enter.

Type your email address, then press Enter.

(Optional) Type a comment, then press Enter.

Review your selected user ID. If it is correct, press O.

Type a passphrase, then press Enter.

Move your mouse randomly to generate the keys.

After the keys are generated, you can view your key information by entering gpg --list-keys. You should see something similar to this: /home/you/.gnupg/pubring.gpg ---------------------------- pub 1024D/32j38dk2 2001-06-20 you <you@example.com> sub 1024g/289sklj3 2011-06-20 [expires: 2012-11-14]

GPG creates one list, or keyring, for your public keys and one for your private keys. All the public keys you know are stored in the file ~/.gnupg/pubring.gpg. If you want to give other people your key, send them that file.

If you want, you can upload your keys to a key server:

Check your public key ID with gpg --list-keys. It is the string after 1024D on the line beginning with pub. In the example above, it is 32j38dk2.

Enter the command gpg --send-keys --keyserver wwwkeys.pgp.net 32j38dk2. Substitute your key ID for 32j38dk2. You need your password to do this.

Key servers store your public keys for you so that your friends can decrypt your messages. If you choose not to use a key server, you can manually send your public key, include it in your signature file, or put it on your own Web page. However, it is easier to publish a key once, and then let people download it from a central place when they want.

If you don't have a key to unlock or encrypt a message, you can set your encryption tool to look it up automatically. If it cannot find the key, an error message appears.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-account-manage-pop.page0000644000373100047300000000537712371247535026771 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit a POP mail account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net POP mail account settings
Editor de compte

Mail accounts can be added by choosing FileNewMail Account or via EditPreferencesMail AccountsAdd. The steps are mostly the same as for the First-Run Assistant, except for not getting asked whether to import data from other applications or to restore from a backup file.

Mail accounts can be edited via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEdit.

The following settings are available when editing an existing account:

Receiving Email and Receiving options (POP accounts) Receiving Email and Receiving options
Sending Email (POP accounts) Sending Email
Defaults (POP accounts) Valors per defaut
Security (POP accounts) Seguritat
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/tasks-caldav.page0000644000373100047300000000307412371247541024735 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using an online CalDAV task list or memo list. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Using a CalDAV task or memo list

To add such a task list or memo list to Evolution, perform the following steps:

Click FileNewTask List or FileNewMemo List.

Select the type On the Web.

Enter a name that you prefer.

Optionally choose a color that you prefer.

Choose if you want to be able to view the content also while offline.

Enter the address of the list in the URL field.

Choose Use secure connection if you want to connect securely.

Enter your username and your email address.

Click Apply.

The task list will be added to the list of task lists in Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-send-and-receive.page0000644000373100047300000000154512371247540026411 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On receiving mail and sending written emails. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Sending and receiving mail

This section refers to receiving mail and sending written emails. For writing a new message, please refer to the Composing mail section.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-organizing.page0000644000373100047300000000134112371247542026272 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On using several calendars, searching, and categories. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Sorting and organizing calendars usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-usage-add-appointment.page0000644000373100047300000000453612371247541030321 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adding an appointment. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Adding an Appointment

Click FileNewAppointment, or double-click in a blank space in the calendar to open the Appointment dialog. The particular time on the calendar view against which you have double clicked on will be suggested for the new appointment. You can also directly write in the calendar and then adjust the duration by dragging it with the mouse.

If you use the Appointment dialog:

Select a calendar in the Calendar drop-down list.

Enter a brief summary in the Summary field.

(Optional) Type a location in the Location field.

To select this event as an all day event, click OptionsAll Day Event, or click the All Day Event button on the toolbar.

Select the date and time.

If the event is not an all day event, select either For to specify the duration, or select Until to specify the ending time of the event.

(Optional) Enter a description in the Description field.

To show the time as busy to others, click OptionsShow Time as Busy.

You can also define a time zone, a category, a reminder, a recurrence, or a classification for the event, or add an attachment.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/tasks-usage-delete-task.page0000644000373100047300000000170012371247535027004 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Deleting a task from your task list. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Deleting a Task

If you want to delete a task in your task lists, right-click on the task and select Delete, or click on the task and click Delete in the tool bar or press CtrlD, or click EditDelete Task.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/contacts-usage.page0000644000373100047300000000127012371247537025301 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On adding, editing, and deleting contacts in address books. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Add, Edit, and Delete Contacts usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/tasks-using-several-tasklists.page0000644000373100047300000000234212371247536030307 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adding and using more than one task list or memo list. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Using several task lists or memo lists

You can have multiple task or memo lists and choose which of your lists get displayed. For example, you might have tasks for work, tasks for home, and tasks for the singing club of which you are a member. The side bar shows these lists, and you can select or deselect any of the boxes next to them to show and hide the corresponding tasks or memos in your view.

Tasks and memos from each task or memo list appear as different colors.

You can also use lists that are not on your computer, such as on the internet.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-usage-edit-appointment.page0000644000373100047300000000220312371247540030502 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Editing in appointment in your calendar. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Editing an Appointment

If you want to change an appointment that already exists in your calendars,

Double-click on the appointment that you want to edit in the calendar.

Edit the appointment (see Adding an Appointment for the list of available options).

Click the Save button, or FileSave.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-account-management.page0000644000373100047300000000177112371247542027051 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adding, editing and managing mail accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Gestion de compte
Common Account Types
Local Account Types
Corporate Account Types
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-enable-html-format.page0000644000373100047300000000306112371247535030602 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Enable HTML format in the mail composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Enabling HTML format

You can change the format of an email message from plain text to HTML in the email composer by choosing FormatHTML from the menu bar.

Alternately, you also can change the first dropdown list below the Subject line from Plain Text to HTML.

If you choose HTML format, a second tool bar will be displayed below the Subject line with HTML-only options.

To send all your mail as HTML by default, enable EditPreferencesComposer PreferencesDefault BehaviorFormat messages in HTML.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-html-table.page0000644000373100047300000000277412371247542027165 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Insert a table in the mail composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Inserting a Table in HTML

You can insert a table into the email (at the current position of the cursor):

Click InsertTable... in the menubar.

Select the number of rows and columns.

Define the type of layout for the table.

Optionally: Select a background color or image for the table.

Click Close.

Alternately, you can also use the icon in the second bar below the Subject line.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/xinclude-searching.xml0000644000373100047300000000367112371247535026026 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000
Saved Searches

If you search for something rather often, you will prefer not to type it many times. In this case you can use saved searches.

To save your search results, either click Save instead of OK in the Search dialog, or in case the search results are already displayed, select SearchSave Search. From now on this search will be directly available from the Search menu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-receiving-options-mh-format-directories.page0000644000373100047300000000372112371247535033150 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Receiving options for MH-format mail directories accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net MH-format mail directories receiving options
Recepcion de messatge

On the Receiving Email page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Email):

Choose the directory by clicking on the button next to Path in the Configuration section. Some default folders are available in the list. If the directory is not among those folders, choose the last option Other.... This will open a directory chooser window.
Opcions de recepcion

On the Receiving Options page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options):

If you want Evolution to check automatically for new messages, click the Check for new messages every ... minutes option and select the frequency in minutes.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-usenet-subscriptions.page0000644000373100047300000000260112371247541027503 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Subscribing to Usenet newsgroups. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Newsgroups Subscriptions

When you create a newsgroup account, you are not subscribed to any groups. To subscribe to a newsgroup:

Select FolderSubscriptions.

If you have accounts on multiple servers, select the server where you want to manage your subscriptions.

Click a group's checkbox to add a folder to your subscriptions.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/exporting-data-contacts.page0000644000373100047300000000237112371247540027120 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to export contacts data from Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Exporting contacts data

Contacts files are stored in a database, but can be saved as a vCard file.

To export a complete address book, click FileSave Address Book As vCard.

If you want to export only one contact, click FileSave as vCard or right-click on the contact and click Save as vCard.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/contacts-local.page0000644000373100047300000000217212371247535025267 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adding another local address book. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Adding another local address book

To add another local address book to Evolution, perform the following steps:

Click FileNewAddress Book.

Select the type On This Computer.

Enter a name that you prefer.

Click Apply.

The address book will be added to the list of address books in Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-searching.page0000644000373100047300000000522112371247537026073 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Searching appointments and meetings. Max Vorobuov vmax0770@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Searching for Calendar Items usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-imap-subscriptions.page0000644000373100047300000000365012371247540027132 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 IMAP folder subscriptions. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc IMAP Subscriptions

As opening many IMAP folders on the server takes time you can define which IMAP folders to check and display in Evolution, and which ones to ignore for the time being, via the IMAP Subscriptions Manager.

Select FolderSubscriptions, or right-click on the top level node of an email account in the folder list and click Manage subscriptions.

If you have accounts on multiple servers, select the server where you want to manage your subscriptions.

Evolution displays a list of files and folders available on the IMAP server.

Select a file or folder by clicking it.

You should select at least the Inbox folder. Depending upon the way your IMAP server is configured, the list of available files might include non-mail folders. If it does, you can ignore them.

Click a folder's checkbox to add a folder to your subscriptions.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-send-and-receive-automatically.page0000644000373100047300000000214012371247542031251 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Check automatically and regularly for new received mail. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Automatically check for new mail

If you want Evolution to check automatically for new messages, enable the option Check for new messages every ... minutes in the Receiving Options page of the mail account settings (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options) and select the frequency in minutes.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/tasks-organizing.page0000644000373100047300000000134712371247540025652 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On task and memo lists, searching, and categories. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Sorting and organizing tasks and memos usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/contacts-libreoffice.page0000644000373100047300000000371012371247537026447 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using data from Evolution address books in LibreOffice documents. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Contacts in LibreOffice

You can use your Evolution address books in LibreOffice as a data source. The following steps refer to LibreOffice version 3.3.3.

Click EditExchange Database... in the menu bar. This will bring up the Exchange databases dialog box.

In the right pane under Available Databases, EvolutionLocal is available as a source. Click on the small triangle to get the list of your Evolution address books.

Choose an addressbook and click Define.

In case it is not listed already, click Browse.... A file chooser dialog opens.

As Evolution stores its data in a hidden directory, press CtrlL to get the location bar displayed.

Go to /home/username/.local/share/evolution/addressbook/system/addressbook.db and click Open.

This makes the Evolution address book the default data source for LibreOffice. You can now select a field to insert into an LibreOffice document via InsertFieldsOther.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-sending-options-smtp.page0000644000373100047300000000431312371247537027403 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sending options for SMTP. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net SMTP sending options

Enter the address of your mail server for sending mail in the Server field and select if the server requires authentication (entering a username and a password).

Free webmail providers often supply information about which of these options can be used. If you are in an organizational environment, you may want to contact your system administrator for more information.

If the server requires authentication, you need to provide the following information:

Select the authentication type in the Authentication list, or click Check for Supported Types to have Evolution check. Some servers do not support this, so clicking this button is not a guarantee that available mechanisms actually work.

Enter your username.

Choose Use secure connection if you want to connect securely.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/change-switcher-appearance.page0000644000373100047300000000250112371247542027523 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Changing the display of the window buttons in the lower left corner. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Changing the Switcher appearance

The display of the window buttons in the lower left corner (Mail, Contacts, Calendar, Tasks and Memos) can be changed via ViewSwitcher Appearance. This can be helpful if you have a small display. You can also completely hide them.

The available options are:

Icons and Text

Icons Only

Text Only

Toolbar Style

Show Buttons

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-google.page0000644000373100047300000000317312371247541025403 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using the online calendar of your Google account. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Using a Google calendar

To add such a calendar to Evolution, perform the following steps:

Click FileNewCalendar.

Select the type Google.

Enter a name that you prefer.

Optionally choose a color that you prefer.

Choose if you want to be able to view the content also when being offline.

Enter your Google username.

If you have more than one Google calendar, define which of them to use.

Click Apply.

The calendar will be added to the list of calendars in Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/tasks-searching.page0000644000373100047300000000502712371247543025450 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Searching tasks. Max Vorobuov vmax0770@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Searching Tasks
Searching in a Single Task

To find text in the displayed task, select EditFind in Task... from the main menu.

Searching Across Tasks
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-meetings-sending-invitation.page0000644000373100047300000001005412371247536031551 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sending a Meeting Invitation. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Enviar un convit a una amassada

When you create a meeting (group appointment), you can specify the attendees in several categories, such as "chair" or "required". When you save the meeting listing, each attendee is sent an email with the meeting information, which also gives them the option to respond.

If you do not need to collect attendance information when you're scheduling an event, and would rather just announce the event, right-click the meeting and select Forward as iCalendar. This opens a new email message with the event notification attached as an announcement. Recipients can add the event to their calendars with one click, but it will not automatically send you email about whether they plan to attend.

To schedule a meeting:

Click FileNewMeeting.

If you have multiple email accounts, select the one to use by selecting an item in the Organizer field.

Select a calendar in the Calendar drop-down list.

Click Add to add the email addresses of people you want to invite.

Click View in the menu bar to show or hide the Type, Role, Status, and RSVP fields.

Enter a brief summary in the Summary field.

(Optional) Type a location in the Location field.

To select this event as an all day event, click OptionsAll Day Event, or click the All Day Event button on the toolbar.

Select the date and time.

If the event is not an all day event, select either For to specify the duration, or select Until to specify the ending time of the event.

(Optional) Enter a description in the Description field.

To query free/busy information for the attendees, click the Free/Busy button on the toolbar, or click OptionsFree/Busy.

Click Save to save the meeting.

An email is sent out to all the recipients, inviting them to your event.

You can also define a time zone, a category, a reminder, a recurrence, or a classification for the event, or add an attachment.

In Evolution, a meeting can have only one organizer, and only the organizer can add participants to that meeting. Though it is possible to change the organizer of a meeting, this is not recommended as a means to invite additional participants to meetings. If you want to invite additional people to a meeting and are not that meeting's organizer, it is recommended that you forward the invitation message you received from the original meeting organiser to additional participants.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-receiving-options-maildir-format-directories.page0000644000373100047300000000423612371247541034164 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Receiving options for Maildir-format mail directories accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Maildir-format mail directories receiving options
Recepcion de messatge

On the Receiving Email page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Email):

Choose the directory by clicking on the button next to Path in the Configuration section. Some default folders are available in the list. If the directory is not among those folders, choose the last option Other.... This will open a directory chooser window.
Opcions de recepcion

On the Receiving Options page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options):

If you want Evolution to check automatically for new messages, click the Check for new messages every ... minutes option and select the frequency in minutes.

If you want Filters to be automatically used for new messages in your inbox, enable Apply filters to new messages in INBOX.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-weather.page0000644000373100047300000000277412371247541025574 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Display the weather in the calendar. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Using a weather calendar

Calendars of this type are read-only.

To add such a calendar to Evolution, perform the following steps:

Click FileNewCalendar.

Select the type Weather.

Enter a name that you prefer.

Optionally choose a color that you prefer.

Choose if you want to be able to view the content also when being offline.

Choose a location by selecting continent, country and city.

Choose Use secure connection if you want to connect securely.

Choose the temperature unit.

Click Apply.

The calendar will be added to the list of calendars in Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-search-folders-enable.page0000644000373100047300000000215712371247535027431 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Activate search folders. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Enable the Search Folders Functionality

In the unlikely case that there is no Search folders top-level node displayed at the bottom of the mail folder list you have to enable EditPreferencesMail AccountsSearch Folders.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-change-quotation-string.page0000644000373100047300000000327112371247540031675 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 It is not possible to change the quotation introduction added when answering mail. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Changing the "On date, person wrote:" string when replying

Advanced users can change this string.

Open the dconf-editor application.

Navigate to org.gnome.evolution.mail.

Enter the prefered quotation string as the value for the key composer-message-attribution.

You might need to install the dconf-editor package to perform these steps.

Install dconf-editor

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-change-time-format.page0000644000373100047300000000244712371247540026751 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Changing the date and time format in the message list. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Format of dates and time

You can change the format of the Date column by setting your preferred format under EditPreferencesMail PreferencesHeadersDate/Time format.

The placeholders in the format expression are strftime formats. For a complete list of available strftime formats, run date --help in the Terminal application.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-attachments.page0000644000373100047300000000117212371247540025607 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Handling of file attachments for writing and reading mail Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Managing attachments usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/deleting-to-free-disk-space.page0000644000373100047300000000137112371247540027530 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Deleting emails and calendar entries to reduce the size of the files used by Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Freeing disk space by deleting items usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/exporting-data.page0000644000373100047300000000127512371247536025313 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to export data from Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Exporting data from <em>Evolution</em> usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-plain-text.page0000644000373100047300000000472212371247541027213 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Change font alignment and paragraph formatting in the mail composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Formatting Text in Plain Text Format

Text formatting tools are located in the tool bar below the Subject line. They also appear in the Insert and Format menus.

The icons in the tool bar are explained in tooltips which appear when you hold your mouse pointer over the buttons.

Headers and Lists:

At the left of the upper tool bar, you can choose Normal for a default text style or Header 1 through Header 6 for varying sizes of header from large (1) to tiny (6). Other styles include Preformat, to use the HTML tag for preformatted blocks of text, and three types of bullet points for lists.

For instance, instead of using asterisks to mark a bulleted list, you can use the Bulleted List style from the style dropdown list. Evolution uses different bullet styles, and handles word wrap and multiple levels of indentation.

Alinhament :

Located next to the Headers and Lists dropdown, the three paragraph icons should be familiar to users of most word processing software. The left-most button aligns your text to the left, the center button centers text, and the right button aligns the text to the right.

Indentation Rules:

The button with the arrow pointing left decreases a paragraph's indentation, and the right arrow increases its indentation.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/tasks-usage-add-task.page0000644000373100047300000000425512371247542026300 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adding a task to your task list. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Adding a Task

Click FileNewTask, or press ShiftCtrlT.

Select a task list in the List dropdown list.

Enter the task information.

Click the Save button, or FileSave.

If you just want to quickly add a task by entering a summary you can directly enter it in the list of tasks.

You can also define a time zone, a category, or a classification for the task, or add an attachment.

Assigned Tasks

Evolution can be used to assign a task to multiple people.

When you assign a task, you can specify the attendees in several categories, such as "chair" or "required". When you save the task, each attendee is sent an email with the task information, which also gives them the option to respond.

This is similar to meetings.

To create an Assigned Task, click FileNewAssigned Task.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-organizing.page0000644000373100047300000000163512371247542025451 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On folders, sorting, searching, filters, search folders, and labels. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Sorting and organizing mail

Evolution provides several options to organize your mail according to your needs.

Advanced Options
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-attachments-sending.page0000644000373100047300000000510112371247542027232 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Attaching files to emails you want to send. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Adding attachments to an email
Attaching files

To attach a file to your email in the composer:

Click Add Attachment..., or click InsertAttachment, or press CtrlM.

Select the file you want to attach.

Click OK.

You can also drag a file to the attachment bar of the composer window.

When you send the message, a copy of the attached file goes with it. Be aware that large attachments can take a long time to send and receive.

Attachment Reminder

Evolution has an Attachment Reminder plugin you can use to remind yourself to attach a file to an email. If it determines that you have not attached the file, it displays a reminder window before the email is sent.

To enable the Attachment Reminder:

Select EditPlugins.

Enable Attachment Reminder.

Click the Configuration tab.

Click Add, then enter keywords in your language such as "Attach" or "enclosed".

Based on the keywords you have added, Evolution searches the text of every mail you are going to send. If it finds any of the keywords in your email and there is no actual attached file, the reminder window is displayed.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/sync-with-other-devices.page0000644000373100047300000001332712371247535027051 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Synchronize Evolution data with handheld devices and mobile phones. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Synchronize <app>Evolution</app> with other devices

There are currently no "recommended instructions" for users.

Many distributions provide the application SyncEvolution that can be used in combination with devices that support SyncML.

In general it is recommended to use applications and devices that both support the ActiveSync protocol (such as SyncEvolution). A list of collaborative software is available on Wikipedia.

If you can provide good practices or more information on this topic feel free to file a bug report in GNOME's bug tracking system.

Palm

To synchronize with a Palm OS device like the PalmPilot(TM) and the Handspring Visor several steps are needed: First, you need to enable synchronization. Second, your computer needs to recognize and access your handheld. Third, you should decide what sort of synchronization behavior you want.

Enabling Synchronization

If you have not used a handheld device with your computer before, you need to configure it via EditGNOME Pilot Synchronization.... Make sure that you have read and write permissions on the device, which is normally in /dev/pilot. If that does not work, check in /dev/ttyS0 if you have a serial connection, or in /dev/ttyUSB1 for a USB connection. You can do this by becoming root user and adding your username to the group that owns this device node. For a USB device on sync, two device nodes are created, ttyUSB0 and ttyUSB1. The second node is the one to be used in configuring the device.

Selecting Conduits

After your computer and your Palm OS device are communicating, select the conduits you want under the Pilot Conduits section. You can use conduits to synchronize data with several applications; the Evolution conduits are labeled EAddress for the contacts in your address book; ECalendar for your calendar; and ETodo for your task list.

Click Enable, then click Settings to change what the conduit does when activated. Your options can vary depending on the conduit, but typically they are as follows:

Disabled: Do nothing.

Synchronize: Copy new data from the computer to the handheld, and from the handheld to the computer. Remove items that were on both systems but have been deleted on one.

Copy From Pilot: If there is any new data on the handheld device, copy it to the computer.

Copy To Pilot: Copy new data from the computer to the handheld.

Select the behavior you want for each conduit you choose to use. If you're not sure, use Synchronize.

Synchronizing Information

Use the following procedure to synchronize the data on your Palm OS device with the data you store in Evolution.

If you want to back up your information before synchronizing, make a copy of the .local/share/evolution directory inside your home directory.

Put your handheld device in its cradle and press the HotSync button.

If you use Palm OS version 4.0 and have password protection turned on for your handheld device, you might encounter trouble synchronizing. If this happens, try turning off password protection on your handheld, synchronize it with your desktop computer, and then re-enable password protection on your handheld.

Now your Palm OS device will synchronize data with Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-account-manage-maildir-format-directories.page0000644000373100047300000000571712371247540033406 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit a Maildir Format Mail Directories account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Maildir Format Mail Directories account settings
Editor de compte

Mail accounts can be added by choosing FileNewMail Account or via EditPreferencesMail AccountsAdd. The steps are mostly the same as for the First-Run Assistant, except for not getting asked whether to import data from other applications or to restore from a backup file.

Mail accounts can be edited via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEdit.

The following settings are available when editing an existing account:

Receiving Email and Receiving options (Maildir Format Mail Directories accounts) Receiving Email and Receiving options
Sending Email (Maildir Format Mail Directories accounts) Sending Email
Defaults (Maildir Format Mail Directories accounts) Valors per defaut
Security (Maildir Format Mail Directories accounts) Seguritat
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-search-folders-refresh.page0000644000373100047300000000235112371247542027633 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ways of updating Search folders. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Updating/refreshing Search folders

It might happen that one of your Search folders has not updated since some new email arrived or since an email was deleted, for example. This will mean that the list of emails in the folder is not up-to-date.

You can get an updated view of the search folder either by switching to another folder and then back again, or by right-clicking on the search folder and choosing Refresh.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/tasks-usage-edit-task.page0000644000373100047300000000205512371247536026474 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Editing a task in your task list. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Editing a Task

If you want to change a task that already exists in your task lists,

Double-click on the task that you want to edit in the list of tasks, or right-click on the task and click Open Task.

Edit the task information.

Click the Save button, or FileSave.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-access-gmail-imap-account.page0000644000373100047300000000231712371247541030205 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to set up a Gmail IMAP Account. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Access a Gmail IMAP Account via Evolution

Please refer to the IMAP+ mail account settings.

To access Gmail via IMAP you must turn on IMAP in your Google account. See the Gmail Help for more information.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-free-busy.page0000644000373100047300000001076012371247540026027 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using the Free/Busy view on a groupware server to set up meetings. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Entresenhas liure/ocupat

You can use the Free/Busy search for meetings to determine the availability of invitees.

In addition to the standard meeting scheduling tools, you can use the Free/Busy view to check whether people are available in advance. The Free/Busy feature is normally a function of dedicated groupware servers such as Microsoft Exchange and Novell GroupWise. However, you can also publish Free/Busy information online, and access Free/Busy information published elsewhere. If not everyone you collaborate with publishes Free/Busy data, you can still use meeting invitations to coordinate schedules with other people.

To access the free/busy view:

Click FileNewMeeting.

Click Add to add the email addresses of people you want to invite.

Click the Free/Busy button on the toolbar, or click OptionsFree/Busy.

Adjust the meeting time, either by dragging the meeting borders or by using the Autopick buttons to choose a time automatically, then click Close. Attendees on an Exchange server have the appointment updated automatically; others receive email notification of any change in plans.

Attendee List:

The Attendee List shows the people who have been invited to the appointment.

Schedule Grid:

The Schedule Grid shows the published Free/Busy information for the people you have invited. This is where you compare schedules to find free time to schedule the appointment. Individuals have visible scheduling information only if they use the same Novell GroupWise or Microsoft Exchange server you do (that is, if they are in the same organization as you), or if they publish free/busy information at a web address (URL) that you can reach and you have entered that web address for the specific contact in the Contact Editor under Personal informationWeb AddressesFree/Busy.

You can publish Calendar and Free/Busy information to a WebDAV server, FTP server, a remote machine through SSH or to any other web server with HTTP PUT support.

In corporate environments you can publish Calendar and Free/Busy information to an Exchange or Groupwise server. Note that you must use the top-level Exchange calendar if you want others to be able to access your Free / Busy information when inviting you to a meeting.

The default server can be defined under EditPreferencesCalendar and TasksPublishing InformationDefault Free/Busy Server.

Accessing Free/Busy Data Without a Groupware Server

If individuals give you a URL for Free/Busy data or for their web calendar, you can add the URL under Personal InformationWeb Addresses in the Contact Editor. Then, when you schedule a meeting with them, Evolution looks up the schedule and displays it in the Free/Busy data.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-folders.page0000644000373100047300000000610312371247541024732 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use folders to organize your mail. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Novell, Inc Using Folders

Evolution, like most mail systems, uses folders to store email messages. You start out with a few mail folders such as the Inbox, Outbox, and Drafts. You can, however, create more folders if required.

Creating A Folder

To create a folder:

Click on Folder and select New. You can also right-click anywhere on the folder list and select the New Folder option.

Specify the name and the location of the folder.

Click on the Create button.

The new folder will be shown in the folder view. You can then move messages into the folder.

The Inbox folders on most IMAP servers cannot contain both messages and subfolders. When creating additional folders on your IMAP mail server, branch the folders from the root of the IMAP account and not from the Inbox. Creating subfolders in your Inbox may prevent you from reading messages that exist in the Inbox. If this happens, move the folders to the IMAP account.
Moving Messages to New Folders

You can move messages into folders by using one of the following methods:

Drag and drop the messages into the folder.

Right-click on the message and select the Move to Folder option.

Select a message and press ShiftCtrlV.

Select a message and click on MessageMove to Folder.

The steps for copying are similar.

Moving files can be done automatically by setting up filters.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-caldav.page0000644000373100047300000000323112371247536025360 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using an online CalDAV calendar. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Using a CalDAV calendar

To add such a calendar to Evolution, perform the following steps:

Click FileNewCalendar.

Select the type CalDAV.

Enter a name that you prefer.

Optionally choose a color that you prefer.

Choose if you want to be able to view the content also when being offline.

Enter the address of the calendar in the URL field.

Choose Use secure connection if you want to connect securely.

Enter your username and your email address.

Click Apply.

The calendar will be added to the list of calendars in Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/memos-usage-delete-memo.page0000644000373100047300000000161212371247535026774 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Deleting a memo from your memo list. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Deleting a Memo

If you want to delete a memo in your memo lists, right-click on the memo and select Delete, or click on the memo and click Delete in the tool bar, or click EditDelete Memo.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-meetings.page0000644000373100047300000000121712371247537025744 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using meetings in the calendar. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Meetings usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-using-several-calendars.page0000644000373100047300000000352112371247536030646 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adding and using more than one calendar and different types. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Using several calendars

You can have multiple calendars and overlay them one over the other. For example, you might have a schedule of events for work, one for home, and one for your favorite sports team. The side bar lists those calendars, and you can select or deselect the boxes next to them to show and hide the appointments in your calendar view. By hiding and showing different sets of appointments, you can be sure to avoid conflicts, while keeping a minimum of clutter in your view.

Appointments for each calendar appear in different color.

You can also use calendars that are not on your computer, such as on the internet or in a local network.

For example, the icalshare.com website has an extensive list of shared online calendars, including national and religious holidays, phases of the moon, sports, and local and regional events.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-displaying-character-encodings.page0000644000373100047300000000374712371247536031357 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 When letters in an email are not shown correctly or missing. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Character Encodings
Received mail

If the email application of the sender is broken or misconfigured, plain text emails might not include information about the character encoding used. If you receive such messages, choose ViewCharacter Encoding from the main menu and change the currently chosen character encoding to an appropriate one that might be the encoding used by the sender. You have to make this change every time you view the message.

To make this the default setting, go to EditPreferencesMail PreferencesGeneralMessage DisplayDefault character encoding.

Sending mail

In the unlikely event that you would like to change the default character encoding for messages that you send, go to EditPreferencesComposer PreferencesDefault BehaviorCharacter encoding.

This setting only refers to Plain Text messages as HTML messages always use UTF-8 encoding.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/contacts-usage-delete-contact.page0000644000373100047300000000174112371247537030175 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Deleting a contact from your address book. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Deleting a Contact

If you want to delete a contact in your address books, right-click on the contact and select Delete, or click on the contact and click Delete in the tool bar or press CtrlD, or click EditDelete Contact.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-search.page0000644000373100047300000000307512371247541026373 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Searching for text in the mail composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Searching in the mail composer

Under the Edit menu in the message composer there are several text searching features available.

Find:

Enter a word or phrase, and Evolution finds it in your message.

Find Again:

Select this item to repeat the last search you performed.

Replace:

Find a word or phrase, and replace it with something else.

For all of these menu items you can choose whether to search backwards in the document from the point where your cursor is. You can also determine whether the search is to be case sensitive in determining a match

If you have a technical background you can also select the option to use Regular expressions for searching.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-priority.page0000644000373100047300000000250412371247542027004 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Setting a priority for messages to be sent. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Prioritizing outgoing messages

You can prioritize a message to be sent, so that the recipient sees its relative importance. To prioritize a message, click OptionsPrioritize Message in the composer window.

Evolution will ignore the message priority of incoming messages because the recipient should decide whether the message is important or not. You can set the "Important" flag for any messages.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-local.page0000644000373100047300000000223612371247540025217 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adding another local calendar. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Adding another local calendar

To add another local calendar to Evolution, perform the following steps:

Click FileNewCalendar.

Select the type On This Computer.

Enter a name that you prefer.

Optionally choose a color that you prefer.

Click Apply.

The calendar will be added to the list of calendars in Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-duplicates.page0000644000373100047300000000337012371247536025440 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to handle duplicated email messages April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Duplicate emails get downloaded
Removing duplicate emails

To remove duplicate emails in a folder, select multiple messages (or select all messages in a folder by clicking EditSelect All or pressing CtrlA) and click MessageRemove Duplicate Messages.

Reasons

Downloading duplicate emails may be due to one of the following reasons:

There are several copies of the same message in the mailbox

Evolution is having a problem with the UIDL extension.

The cache files located at $HOME/.local/share/evolution/mail/local/ are not writable.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-sharing-information.page0000644000373100047300000000134112371247537030105 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Make your information (appointments and free/busy times) available to others. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Sharing your calendar information usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-access-gmail-pop-account.page0000644000373100047300000000360312371247541030054 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to set up a Gmail POP Account. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Access a Gmail POP Account via Evolution

Follow these steps to set up your Gmail POP Account in Evolution:

Log in to your Gmail account.

Go to SettingsForwarding and POP/IMAP. Refer to the POP Download section.

Enable the POP download feature by ticking the radio button that corresponds to either of these options:

Enable POP for all mail (even mail that's already been downloaded)

Enable POP for mail that arrives from now on

Specify the other required settings for this Gmail feature.

To know the Gmail Account settings, click on Configuration instructionsOtherStandard Instructions.

On your Evolution client, go to EditPreferencesMail Accounts. Click Add.

Provide the required information. For the account settings, refer to Step 5

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-message-templates.page0000644000373100047300000000221512371247536030545 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Message templates to reuse in the composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Message Templates

A message template is a standard message that you can use at any time to send mail with the same pattern.

To enable the Message Template Plugin, click EditPlugins and enable Templates.

Message Templates
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-receiving-options-pop.page0000644000373100047300000000666312371247541027547 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Receiving options for POP accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Barbara Tobias barbtobias09@gmail.com Novell, Inc POP receiving options
Recepcion de messatge

On the Receiving Email page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Email):

Enter the address of the email server in the Server field and enter your username for that server.

Select if you want to use a secure connection (SSL or TLS).

You should enable this option if your server supports it.

Free webmail providers often supply information about which of these options can be used. If you are in an organizational environment, you may want to contact your system administrator for more information.

Select your authentication type in the Authentication list, or click Check for Supported Types to have Evolution check for supported authentication mechanisms. Some servers do not announce the authentication mechanisms they support, so clicking this button is not a guarantee that available mechanisms actually work.

Select if you want Evolution to remember your password.
Opcions de recepcion

On the Receiving Options page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options):

If you want Evolution to check automatically for new messages, click the Check for new messages every ... minutes option and select the frequency in minutes.

If you want the messages to remain on the server for a period of time, click the Leave messages on server option and the Delete after ... days option and select the number of days to allow messages to remain on the server.

The option Disable support for all POP3 extensions is only useful when accessing old or misconfigured mail servers. POP3 extensions provide enhanced functionality, however only some servers support them. In case of problems with receiving mail, enabling this setting might help.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-encryption.page0000644000373100047300000000340312371247537025473 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sending and receiving encrypted mail. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mail encryption and certificates

Evolution offers GPG Encryption and S/MIME Encryption for signing and encrypting email messages. S/MIME is used most often in corporate environments.

GPG
S/MIME
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/backup-restore.page0000644000373100047300000000430712371247536025312 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Back up and restore your Evolution data and settings. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Back up and restore

You can back up your Evolution data. The backup saves your settings, mail, contacts, tasks, memos and calendars. It will be stored in a gzip-compressed tar archive file.

Backing up

Select FileBack up Evolution Data....

Choose a filename and the folder where you want to save the backup file, and click Save.

You will be asked to close Evolution. Answer with Yes.

Note that your spam filtering settings are not included in the backup file, as these settings are not controlled by Evolution and as developers of spam filtering tools might change implementation details. If you use Bogofilter you will need to back up ~/.bogofilter/. If you use SpamAssassin you will need to back up ~/.spamassassin/.
Restoring

Select FileRestore Evolution Data....

Choose the file, and click Open.

You will be asked to close Evolution. Answer with Yes.

In the first-run assistant, you can restore Evolution data from a backup file.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/problems-debug-how-to.page0000644000373100047300000000244612371247542026505 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to provide good information when tracking down a problem. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net How to track down a problem

As a first hint, error messages will be either displayed in the statusbar or between the tool bar and the search bar.

To further track down a problem, some debug options are listed on the Evolution project website.

To contact the Evolution community for help, please see How to get help.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/default-browser.page0000644000373100047300000000761312371247536025474 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Opening links from an email in a browser and opening the mail composer from an email link on a website. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Opening links in and from the web browser
Change which web browser websites are opened in

In case you use Evolution under a different environment from GNOME,

Open a terminal application.

Find out the name of the .desktop file for your preferred browser. Depending on your browser and distribution, the file might be called for example epiphany.desktop, firefox.desktop, google-chrome.desktop, konqbrowser.desktop, or opera-browser.desktop. If you are unsure you can look up most .desktop files in the folder /usr/share/applications/.

Type this command, replace browser.desktop by the actual filename, and press Enter:

xdg-settings set default-url-scheme-handler https browser.desktop

Type this command, replace browser.desktop by the actual filename, and press Enter:

xdg-settings set default-url-scheme-handler http browser.desktop

Evolution may need to be restarted for the settings to take effect.

If the error message "xdg-settings: command not found" is shown, you need to install the package xdg-utils.

Install xdg-utils

Please see the GNOME Desktop Help.

If the preferred browser is set as default application but still does not work correctly please contact your distribution via their forum or bug tracker.

If the error message "Could not open the link: Operation not supported" is shown, you need to install the package gvfs.

Install gvfs
Change which mail application is used to write emails

Please see the GNOME Desktop Help.

Advanced options

If you have a technical background you can also tweak these settings by defining scheme-handlers in $HOME/.local/share/applications/mimeapps.list.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/contacts-autocompletion.page0000644000373100047300000000376612371247540027245 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Autocompletion of names and email addresses entered in the mail composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Autocompletion of mail recipients

You can enter the first three letters of names and email addresses in the recipients text field and Evolution will present you with a list of matches from your address books.

To enable autocompletion, go to EditPreferencesContactsAutocompletion and choose the address books from the list that Evolution should look in for matches.

Select Always show address of the autocompleted contact to also show the email address along with the name. This can be helpful to distinguish if a contact has several email addresses.

Alternately, you can click the To:, Cc:, or Bcc: buttons to get a list of the email addresses in your contacts. Select addresses and click the arrow buttons to move them into the appropriate address columns.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-delete-and-undelete.page0000644000373100047300000000465112371247536027113 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Deleting, expunging, and undeleting mail. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Deleting and undeleting messages
Deleting Messages

To delete a message, select it and press the Delete key, or click the Delete button in the toolbar, or press CtrlD, or right-click the message and click Delete.

When you press Delete or click the Trash folder, your mail is not actually deleted, but is marked for deletion. You can see all message marked for deletion in the Trash folder. To show deleted messages, click ViewShow Deleted Messages. You can view the messages striken off for later deletion.

To permanently erase all the deleted messages in a folder, click FolderExpunge or press CtrlE.

Undeleting Messages

You can undelete a message that has been deleted but not expunged yet. To undelete a message, select the message, click EditUndelete message. Note that ViewShow Deleted Messages must be enabled for this.

If you have marked a message for deletion, undeleting it unmarks it, and the message is not shown anymore in the Trash folder.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/credits.page0000644000373100047300000000514412371247535024020 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Credits and Acknowledgment. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Credits and Acknowledgment
Authors of the <app>Evolution</app> User Documentation

André Klapper

April Gonzalez

Barbara M. Tobias

Phil Bull
Translators of the <app>Evolution</app> User Documentation

(Not applicable to the English version)

Authors of the previous version

Aaron Weber

Akhil Laddha

André Klapper

Duncan Mak

Ettore Perazzoli

Francisco Javier F. Serrador

Jessica Prabhakar

Kevin Breit

Mark Moulder

Novell, Inc.

Radhika Nair

Srinivasa Ragavan

Entresenhas del contacte

The GNOME Documentation Project:

Website

Mailing list

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-spam-settings.page0000644000373100047300000001055512371247542026101 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to set up handling unwanted junk/spam mail. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Patrick O'Callaghan Pete Biggs April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Novell, Inc Junk Mail Settings
Tools

Evolution lets you check for unwanted junk or spam emails by using the Bogofilter or SpamAssassin tools. To use these tools, you need to make sure that they are installed via the software management tool of your distribution.

You might need to install Bogofilter or SpamAssassin to perform these steps.

Install bogofilter

Install spamassassin

SpamAssassin works through a set of predefined rules, hence it can determine spam straight away. Bogofilter does not come with a default set of spam criteria so it will not automatically filter anything after installing it. You must train it first to make it work. You can modify the actions of SpamAssassin by training it as well.

Junk Mail Folder

Messages that are marked as junk (either manually by the user or automatically via SpamAssassin or Bogofilter) will be moved to the Junk mail folder.

Junk Mail Preferences

The junk mail options discussed in this page refer only to POP and Local Delivery accounts. For handling junk mails on IMAP accounts, see the Evolution settings under EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options.

You can modify how Evolution handles junk mail by changing the Junk Mail Preferences:

Click EditPreferences or press ShiftCtrlS.

Select Mail Preferences.

Click on the Junk tab. Here, you can specify the following:

Checking incoming mail for junk messages.

Deleting junk messages upon exit, and how often junk messages are to be deleted.

Checking custom headers for junk.

Marking messages as not junk if the sender is in the address book.

The default junk filter.

Bogofilter and SpamAssassin options.

For more information and specific Bogofilter or SpamAssassin configuration questions it is recommended to check out the Frequently Asked Questions for Bogofilter resp. SpamAssassin.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-filters.page0000644000373100047300000001124412371247542024747 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use filter rules to sort your mail automatically into folders. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Using Filters

Message filters apply actions on messages based on conditions that you have defined. You can define filters for both incoming and outgoing emails.

Filters will be automatically applied to incoming messages for local accounts (such as POP). Mail servers for remote accounts (such as IMAP) often already filter mail directly on the server as this is faster. If you want to apply your Evolution filters to remote accounts, you can enable this under EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving OptionsOptionsApply filters to new messages in Inbox on this server.

To manually apply filters on messages in a folder, select the messages and click MessageApply Filters or press CtrlY.

You can select all messages in a folder by clicking EditSelect All or pressing CtrlA.

Creating a Filter

Click EditMessage Filters, or click MessageCreate Rule and select the criterion the filter will be based on.

Click Add.

Enter a name in the Rule name field.

Define the conditions for the rule. For each condition, you first select which part of the message will be checked and then define the comparison.

For more information on the available conditions see Available Filter conditions.

If you want to define multiple conditions, define under Find items if any or if all conditions have to apply, and click Add Condition and repeat the previous step.

Select the Actions for the Filter in the Then section.

For more information on the available actions see Available Filter actions.

The order of filters is important. Filters are applied to the original message in sequence, like a recipe.

If your first filter has a Stop Processing rule, then all the email messages that match this filter will ignore all the succeeding filters.

When you move a message to another folder, "moving" actually means appending a copy of the message to the destination folder and marking the original message for deletion. So any subsequent filter rules will be applied to the original message that is now marked for deletion. Therefore moving a message should usually appear last in a sequence of filter rules.

If you want to define multiple actions, click Add Action and repeat the previous step. For example, if you want no other existing filters to be applied choose Stop Processing as the second action in the list.

Click OK.
Editing Filters

Click EditMessage Filters.

Select the filter.

Click Edit.

Make the desired corrections, then click OK twice.
Deleting Filters

Click EditMessage Filters.

Select the filter.

Click Remove.

Click OK.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-follow-up-flag.page0000644000373100047300000000524712371247540026136 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using flags to remind you of actions. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Follow up flags for emails

To make sure you do not forget about a message, you can use the follow-up feature.

Select one or more messages.

Right-click one of the messages.

Click Mark for Follow Up....

You can also do this by selecting the message(s) and clicking MessageMark asFollow Up... or by pressing ShiftCtrlG.

A window opens to allow you to set the type of flag and the due date.

The flag itself is the action you want to remind yourself about, such as Call, Forward and Reply.

After you have added a flag, you can mark it as complete or remove it entirely by right-clicking the message and clicking either Flag Completed or Clear Flag.

When you read a flagged message, its flag status is displayed at the top, before the message headers. An overdue message might tell you "Overdue: Call by April 07, 2012, 5:00 PM."

Flags can help you organize your work in a number of ways. For example, you might add a Flag Status column to your message list and sort that way. Alternately, you could create a search folder that displays all your flagged messages, then clear the flags when you're done, so the search folder contains only messages with upcoming deadlines.

If you prefer a simpler way to remind yourself about messages, you can mark them as important by right-clicking the message, then click Mark as Important, or by selecting MessageMark asImportant from the menubar.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-receiving-options-usenet-news.page0000644000373100047300000000621312371247536031221 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Receiving options for Usenet news accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Usenet news receiving options
Recepcion de messatge

On the Receiving Email page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Email):

Enter the address of the email server in the Server field and enter your username for that server.

Select if you want to use a secure connection (SSL or TLS).

You should enable this option if your server supports it.

Free webmail providers often supply information about which of these options can be used. If you are in an organizational environment, you may want to contact your system administrator for more information.

Select your authentication type in the Authentication list, or click Check for Supported Types to have Evolution check for supported authentication mechanisms. Some servers do not announce the authentication mechanisms they support, so clicking this button is not a guarantee that available mechanisms actually work.

Select if you want Evolution to remember your password.
Opcions de recepcion

On the Receiving Options page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options):

If you want Evolution to check automatically for new messages, click the Check for new messages every ... minutes option and select the frequency in minutes.

Select if you want to show folders in short notation.

For example, comp.os.linux would appear as c.o.linux.

Select if you want to show relative folder names in the subscriptions window.

If you select to show relative folder names, only the name of the folder is displayed. For example the folder evolution.mail would appear as evolution.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/exporting-data-calendar.page0000644000373100047300000000221712371247536027057 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to export calendar data from Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Exporting calendar data

To export a complete calendar, right-click on the calendar in the list of calendars and click Save as. Available formats are iCalendar format (ICS, recommended), comma separated values (CSV), and RDF format.

If you want to export only one appointment (or task or memo), either select the appointment and select FileSave as iCalendar..., or right-click on the appointment and click Save as iCalendar....

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-forward-as-attachment.page0000644000373100047300000000225712371247541031322 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to forward a message with its attachments. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Forwarding a message with its attachments

Click MessageForward as... and choose Attachment, so the forwarded email and also its attachments get attached to the email you want to send.

If you want to have this setting by default, set EditPreferencesComposer PreferencesForward Style to Attachment.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-receiving-options-imap-plus.page0000644000373100047300000000647312371247537030664 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Receiving options for IMAP+ accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc IMAP+ receiving options
Recepcion de messatge

On the Receiving Email page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Email):

Enter the address of the email server in the Server field and enter your username for that server.

Select if you want to use a secure connection (SSL or TLS).

You should enable this option if your server supports it.

Free webmail providers often supply information about which of these options can be used. If you are in an organizational environment, you may want to contact your system administrator for more information.

Select your authentication type in the Authentication list, or click Check for Supported Types to have Evolution check for supported authentication mechanisms. Some servers do not announce the authentication mechanisms they support, so clicking this button is not a guarantee that available mechanisms actually work.

Select if you want Evolution to remember your password.
Opcions de recepcion

On the Receiving Options page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options):

If you want Evolution to check automatically for new messages, click the Check for new messages every ... minutes option and select the frequency in minutes.

Select "Use Quick Resync" if the IMAP server supports IMAP4 Extensions for Quick Mailbox Resynchronization.

You can also define if Evolution checks for new messages in all folders, or only in subscribed folders.

Select if you want Evolution to use custom commands to connect to the IMAP server.

Select if you want Evolution to show only subscribed folders.

Select if you want Evolution to override server-supplied folder namespaces.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-classifications.page0000644000373100047300000000307412371247537027312 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Classifying appointments and tasks on groupware servers. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Using Classifications

If you are using a calendar on a Novell GroupWise or Microsoft Exchange server, you can select a classification to determine who can view it.

To set a classification for an appointment or a task, click OptionsClassifications and select a classification in the editor. Public is the default category, and a public appointment can be viewed by anyone on the calendar-sharing network. Private denotes one level of security, and Confidential an even higher level.

The different levels vary depending on your server settings; check with your system administrator or adjust your delegation settings.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-display-message-source.page0000644000373100047300000000212312371247537027664 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Displaying the raw source of a message or all header lines. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Message Source

To view the message data, click on ViewMessage Source or press CtrlU. This will display the message data in a new window.

To only view the complete headers for a message, click ViewAll Message Headers. This will display the complete header data on the viewing pane.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-mail-signatures-manage.page0000644000373100047300000000201212371247536031452 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add, change, edit or delete email signatures. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Managing signatures

You can add, edit and delete all your signatures under EditPreferencesComposer preferencesSignatures.

Assigning a default signature to an email account has to be done in the account settings.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/organizing.page0000644000373100047300000000115612371247535024531 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On organizing and finding your data in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Sorting and organizing usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/intro-application.page0000644000373100047300000000323012371247542026007 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 An introduction to Evolution. Brian Grohe grohe43@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Per començar

Evolution is a stable and versatile personal information manager for the GNOME project. Evolution allows you to keep your calendars, mail, address books and tasks in one place.

By default Evolution opens the mail view. This is were you can view all your mail. You can change to other views of the application by going to the bottom of the left pane in the window (the so-called "switcher") and selecting the desired view. Learn more about the elements of the main window.

When Evolution starts, it remembers the last view that you used. However you can also explicitly start Evolution in a specific view. For the calendar view, use the command evolution --component=calendar in the Terminal application. Other available options are "mail", "contacts", "tasks", and "memos".

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/using-categories.page0000644000373100047300000000634512371247535025637 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using and managing categories for appointments, contacts, memos and tasks. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Using Categories

Another way to group contacts, appointments, tasks and memos (summarized by the term "objects" in the following text) is to mark them as belonging to different categories. You can mark an object as being in several categories or no category at all. For example in your address book, you put a friend in the "Business" category because he works with you and the "Friends" category because he is a friend.

To display only the objects in a particular category, select the corresponding category in the quick search bar.
Setting categories for an object

To mark an object as belonging to a category,

Double-click the object to bring up the corresponding editor.

Click Categories.... (If this button is not available, select ViewCategories.)

Select the category from the list. You can select as many or as few categories as you like.
Adding and managing categories

If the default list of categories does not suit your needs, you can add your own categories either directly via EditAvailable Categories, or indirectly when editing an object:

Double-click any object to bring up the corresponding editor.

Click Categories.... (If this button is not available, select ViewCategories.)

Enter the new category in the entry box at the top.

Click OK.

You can now see the category in the Categories text field in the editor.

Click OK.

In the Categories Editor you can edit or set the color and icon for each category available by clicking Edit at the bottom of the Categories window. Press Delete to delete categories from the list.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/memos-searching.page0000644000373100047300000000502712371247540025440 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Searching memos. Max Vorobuov vmax0770@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Searching Memos
Searching in a Single Memo

To find text in the displayed memo, select EditFind in Memo... from the main menu.

Searching Across Memos
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-encryption-gpg-set-up.page0000644000373100047300000000414512371247540027457 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Setting up GPG for your mail account to sign and/or encrypt and decrypt messages. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Setting up GPG for your mail account

You need a GPG key to do this. If you do not have one yet, please refer to Creating a GPG key.

Select EditPreferencesMail Accounts.

Select the account you want to use securely, then click Edit.

Click the Security tab.

Specify your key ID in the PGP/GPG Key ID field.

Below the field you can choose whether to always sign outgoing messages when using this account, and other options.

Click OK.

Click Close.

Evolution requires that you know your key ID. If you do not remember it, you can find it by typing gpg --list-keys in the Terminal application. Your key ID is an eight-character string with random numbers and letters.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-displaying-sender-photograph.page0000644000373100047300000000400512371247536031071 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Display a picture of the sender in the message header area. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Photograph Message Headers

Evolution automatically displays photographs of the sender of an email at the right side of the message header if the sender already embedded a photograph in the message.

You can also manually enable displaying the photograph of the sender of an email if the sender is in one of your address books and has a photograph stored.

To enable this functionality, select EditPreferencesMail PreferencesHeadersShow the photograph of sender in the message preview.

If there are multiple matches for a contact, the first one is always used.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-send-and-receive-manual.page0000644000373100047300000000251412371247536027666 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Force sending and receiving emails. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Manually send and receive messages

To receive new messages from the mail server and to send messages you have written that are in the local Outbox, click the Send / Receive button in the toolbar, or press F12, or choose FileSend / Receive from the main menu.

To send and receive only for one of your mail accounts, or to only send or only receive, click the small down-arrow next to the Send / Receive button and choose the corresponding option.

If you just want to send messages which are in your Outbox, you can right-click on the Outbox and click Flush Outbox.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/minimize-to-system-tray.page0000644000373100047300000000301612371247535027117 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On minimizing Evolution to the notification area. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Minimizing Evolution to the system tray

GNOME, by default, has a notification area which includes an applet that informs users of any system updates, changes, or events. This includes the arrival of email messages on Evolution. You can refer to this built-in feature of GNOME for any email notifications.

In GNOME version 2 you may modify the notification area and set it up to become a system tray by using external applications which might be available for installation in the software management tool of your distribution. Available options are for example Tint2. This is no longer possible in GNOME 3.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-spellcheck.page0000644000373100047300000000516412371247536027250 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On spell checking your mail in the composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Spell checking
Prerequirements

To use spell checking for the emails that you write you first need to make sure that the hunspell package for your specific language and the enchant package are installed via the software management tool of your distribution.

You might need to install hunspell and/or enchant to perform these steps.

Install hunspell

Install enchant
Global Preferences

Under EditPreferencesComposer PreferencesSpell CheckingOptions you can define whether your spelling is checked while you type and which color is used for underlining words that are misspelled.

You can also define which installed languages are used for spell checking in the list available under EditPreferencesComposer PreferencesSpell CheckingLanguages.

Manual spell checking in the composer

If you do not have Checking spelling while I type enabled in the Composer Preferences you can run a spell check in the email composer by clicking EditSpell Checking or by pressing F7.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-message-templates-reply.page0000644000373100047300000000254312371247535031701 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use one of your templates for replying to a message Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Using a Template as a Reply

Right-click the message you are replying to, then click Templates.

This option lists all the message templates in the Templates folder.

Select the message template of your choice. Make changes if required in the email composer window that will open.

Click Send.

When you select a message template for replying, the subject of the reply is preserved.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-vertical-view.page0000644000373100047300000000330712371247535026063 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Changing the mail view for widescreen displays. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Vertical view

Evolution provides a vertical view in addition to the classical view. In the vertical view, the message preview pane is located at the right side of the message list when compared to the classical view where the message preview pane is placed below the message list. Vertical view enables you to use the extra width of wide screen monitors.

To switch to vertical view, click ViewPreviewVertical View.

In vertical view, the message list contains double lines of compressed headers, which enables you to consume the extra width in the preview column. The compressed columns have Sender Name and Email, Attachment Icon, Date and Subject in the second line.

To switch back to classical view, click ViewPreviewClassical View.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/contacts-organizing.page0000644000373100047300000000166612371247536026354 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On address books, searching, contact lists, and categories. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Sorting, organizing and grouping contacts

There are several ways how to organize your contacts. You can use several addressbooks and categories, and for conveniently sending messages to a group of people contact lists are available.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-refresh-folders.page0000644000373100047300000000215112371247541026365 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ways to update your Evolution folders. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Updating/refreshing the folders on the mail server

To make sure that your local email folders are updated, go to FolderRefresh. This will ensure that all of your emails have been downloaded from the mail server onto your computer so that you can read them all, and that the read status is synced with the mail server.

You can also double-click on the folder name to refresh it, or press F5.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/intro-first-run.page0000644000373100047300000002541212371247541025442 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Running Evolution for the very first time. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Starting <app>Evolution</app> for the first time

The first time you run Evolution, it opens the First-Run Assistant to help you set up email accounts and import data from other applications.

Restore from backup

You will be asked whether to restore from a backup of a previous version. If you do not have a backup, go to the next page.

Show how to restore from a backup Restoring
Recepcion de messatge

First, choose the server type from the Server Type drop-down list.

If you are unsure about the type of server to choose, ask your system administrator or Internet Service Provider.

Later on, if you want to change an account, or if you want to create another one, go to EditPreferencesMail Accounts. Select the account you want to change, then click Edit. Alternately, add a new account by clicking Add.
IMAP+

Keeps the mail on the server so you can access your mail from multiple systems.

Show how to configure this account type IMAP+ receiving options
POP

Downloads your email to your hard disk.

Show how to configure this account type POP receiving options
USENET News

Connects to a news server and downloads a list of available news digests.

Show how to configure this account type Usenet news receiving options
Exchange EWS

For connecting to a Microsoft Exchange 2007/2010 or OpenChange server. Note that this is currently under development and will replace the Exchange MAPI account type in the future. It might not be available yet for your distribution.

This requires having the evolution-ews package installed.

Install evolution-ews
Show how to configure this account type Exchange Web Services receiving options
Exchange MAPI

For connecting to a Microsoft Exchange 2007/2010 or OpenChange server.

This requires having the evolution-mapi package installed.

Install evolution-mapi
Show how to configure this account type Exchange MAPI receiving options
Local delivery

Local delivery: If you want to move email from the spool (the location where mail waits for delivery) and store it in your home directory. You need to provide the path to the mail spool you want to use. If you want to leave email in your system's spool files, choose the Standard Unix Mbox Spool option instead.

Show how to configure this account type Local delivery receiving options
MH-Format Mail Directories

For downloading email using MH or another MH-style application.

Show how to configure this account type MH-format mail directories receiving options
Maildir-Format Mail Directories

Maildir-Format Mail Directories: For downloading your email using Qmail or another Maildir-style application.

Show how to configure this account type Maildir-format mail directories receiving options
Standard Unix mbox spool file

Standard Unix mbox spool file: For reading and storing email in the mail spool file on your local system.

Show how to configure this account type Standard Unix mbox spool file receiving options
Standard Unix mbox spool directory

Standard Unix mbox spool directory: For reading and storing email in the mail spool directory on your local system.

Show how to configure this account type Standard Unix mbox spool directory receiving options
None

If you do not plan to use Evolution for receiving email.

Sending mail

Available server types are:

SMTP

Sends mail using an outbound mail server. This is the most common choice for sending mail.

Show how to configure this account type SMTP sending options
Sendmail

Uses the Sendmail application to send mail from your system. It is not easy to configure, so you should select this option only if you know how to set up a Sendmail service.

Account Information

Give the account any name you prefer.

Importing Mail (Optional)

Continue with Importing data from another application.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/import-apps-outlook.page0000644000373100047300000001007312371247537026327 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Importing data from Microsoft Outlook. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Outlook

These steps refer to locally stored data such as POP accounts. For remote data (like IMAP) this is not necessary, since the data is still on the server and does not need to be manually transfered. You can set up the corresponding account in Evolution and the data will be downloaded.

Prerequisites under Windows

First, while using Microsoft Windows, prepare your messages for import:

Find your Outlook files (they normally have the file ending .pst or .ost):

Windows 7, Windows Vista

Windows XP

Outlook 2010

C:\Users\username\My Documents\Outlook Files

C:\Documents and Settings\username\My Documents\Outlook Files

Outlook 2007 and earlier

C:\Users\username\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Outlook

C:\Documents and Settings\username\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Outlook

(Replace "username" by your username.)

Copy the Outlook files to the system or partition that Evolution is installed on.

As your Windows hard drive is probably in the NTFS format, some Linux systems cannot read it without additional software. You might find it simpler to copy the mail folders to a USB drive or to burn a CD.
Importing into Evolution

Depending on your last step, either plug in the disk or USB drive with the data and wait until the file manager window opens, or mount your Windows drive.

Copy all the mail files into your home directory or another convenient place.

Aviar Evolution.

Optionally select FileNewMail Folder to create the folders you want.

Click FileImport.

In the Importer Type tab, click Import a single file.

Choose the Outlook personal folders (.pst) file that you would like to import.

The file type will be automatically determined.

If the option to import Outlook personal folders (.pst files) is not available under FileImportImport single fileFile type, your distribution might have not enabled this functionality.

Choose the destination (e.g. the folder in Evolution) for the imported data.

Repeat the import steps until you have imported all your data.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-forward.page0000644000373100047300000000547512371247542026601 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Forwarding a received email to somebody. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Forwarding a message

When you receive an email, you can forward it to other individuals or groups that might be interested.

You can forward a message as an attachment to a new message (this is the default setting, see Default settings), inline (in your message without the > character before each line), or quoted (with > character before each line).

Attachment forwarding is best if you want to send the full, unaltered message to someone else. Inline or Quoted forwarding is best if you want to send portions of a message, or if you have a large number of comments on different sections of the message you are forwarding.

To forward a message that you are reading:

Click MessageForward, the Forward button in the toolbar, or press CtrlF to use the default forwarding method. In case you want to use a different forward method, click MessageForward as or the small dropdown arrow next to the Forward button in the toolbar to choose the method.

Select a recipient for the message. The subject is already entered, although you can alter it if you want.

Add your comments on the message in the text field.

Click Send or press CtrlReturn.

Attachments to a message you are forwarding are forwarded only when you send the original message as an attachment. Inline messages do not forward any attachments.

Default settings

The default settings for replying and forwarding can be changed under EditPreferencesComposer PreferencesGeneralReplies and ForwardsForward style.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-encryption-s-mime-manage.page0000644000373100047300000000415312371247540030103 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adding, editing, viewing and deleting S/MIME certificates. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Managing S/MIME certificates

Certificates allow you to communicate with others securely over an encrypted connection, or sign a message confirming your identity to the contact. These settings only apply to S/MIME encryption.

You can import, view, edit (except for your own certificates), and delete your certificates under EditPreferencesCertificates.

If you get the error "Peer's certificate issuer has been marked as not trusted by the user. (-8172) - Cannot add SMIMEEncKeyPrefs attribute" after adding your mail certificate, go to Authorities and enable Trust this CA to identify email users for the certificate.

Your Certificates displays a list of certificates that you own. To add a signing certificate, click Import, select the file to import, then click Open and enter a password.

Contact Certificates displays a list of certificates that you have for contacts. These certificates allow you to decrypt messages as well verify signed messages.

Authorities displays a list of trusted certificate authorities that verify that your own certificate is valid.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-encryption-gpg-signing-encrypting.page0000644000373100047300000000376212371247542032066 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Signing or encrypting messages via GPG that you send. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Signing or encrypting messages

After you have set up your GPG key, you can sign or encrypt a message by clicking OptionsPGP Sign or PGP Encrypt from the message composer menu.

The Subject line of the message will not be encrypted and should not be used for sensitive information.

To have every message signed or encrypted:

Select EditPreferencesMail Accounts.

Select the mail account to encrypt the messages in.

Click Edit.

Click the Security tab.

Select Always sign outgoing messages when using this account.

Click OK.

Click Close.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/contacts-usage-edit-contact.page0000644000373100047300000000200412371247541027644 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Editing a contact in your address book. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Editing a Contact

If you want to change a contact that already exists in your address books,

Double-click on the contact that you want to edit in the list of contacts, or select the contact and press Enter.

Edit the contact information.

Click OK.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-marcus-bains-line.page0000644000373100047300000000145312371247541027437 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 The red "Marcus Bains" line displays the current time. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Time display in the Day view

The red Marcus Bains Line in the Day view of the calendar is a marker to show the current date and time.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/tasks-local.page0000644000373100047300000000236412371247535024601 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adding another local task or memo list. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Adding another local task or memo list

To add another local task list to Evolution, perform the following steps:

Click FileNewTask List or FileNewMemo List.

Select the type On This Computer.

Enter a name that you prefer.

Optionally choose a color that you prefer.

Click Apply.

The task list will be added to the list of task lists in Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-layout-general-formatting.page0000644000373100047300000000415712371247536031236 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 General formatting options for the calendar. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc General formatting options

The following options are available under EditPreferencesCalendar and TasksGeneral.

Ora

Time format:

Choose between twelve-hour (AM/PM) and twenty-four-hour time formats.

Time zone and Second zone:

The city you are located in, and optionally a second city.
Setmana de trabalh

Week starts on:

Select the day to display as the first in each week.

Jorns de trabalh :

Define which week days are work days.

Day begins:

Define at which time your work day begins.

Day ends:

Define at which time your work day ends.
Alerts

If you want to be warned before you delete any appointment, select this option.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/index.page0000644000373100047300000000575012371247536023476 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Evolution <media type="image" its:translate="no" src="figures/evolutionlogo.png"/> Evolution Mail and Calendar Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net <media type="image" its:translate="no" src="figures/evolutionlogo.png"> <span its:translate="yes">Evolution logo</span> </media> Evolution Mail and Calendar
Per començar
Mail Management
Advanced Mail Management
Advanced Mail Management (IMAP+ accounts) IMAP+
Mail Composing
Advanced Mail Composing
Calendar Management
Advanced Calendar Management
Contacts Management
Memos and Tasks Management
Data Migration and Synchronization
Corporate Environments
Microsoft Exchange
Tracking down Problems
Common Mail Questions and Problems
Common Other Questions and Problems
Further reading
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/tasks-usage.page0000644000373100047300000000124512371247540024604 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 On adding, editing, and deleting tasks. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Add, Edit, and Delete Tasks usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/xinclude-mail-account-identity.xml0000644000373100047300000000101412371247541030250 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000
Identitat

Here you define your name and your email address.

Optionally you can make this account your default account (e.g. when writing emails), set a Reply-To email address (if you want replies to messages sent to a different address), and set an organization (the company where you work, or the organization you represent when you send email from this account).

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-html-image.page0000644000373100047300000000264412371247541027153 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Embed a picture in the mail composer. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Inserting an Image in HTML

You can insert an image into the email (at the current position of the cursor):

Click InsertImage... in the menubar.

Browse to and select the file.

Click Open.

Alternately, you can also use the icon in the second bar below the Subject line, or drag an image into the text area of the message composer.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-meetings-delegating.page0000644000373100047300000000244412371247535030046 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ask somebody else to run the meeting. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Delegating Meetings

Only attendees of a meeting can delegate a meeting, but not the organizer of a meeting.

Right-click on the meeting that you want to delegate.

Click Delegate Meeting.

Select the contacts you want to delegate the meeting to.

Click OK.

Each contact receives a copy of the meeting invitation.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-search-folders-conditions.page0000644000373100047300000000355112371247537030355 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Available conditions for setting up search folders. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Available Search folder conditions

Message Location:

Checks whether the message is located in a specific folder.

Note that by default, Evolution's Trash and Junk folders are Search folders so they cannot be selected here.

Match All:

Applies an action always to any message, without further conditions. This could be useful at the end of the list of search folders to cover those emails that did not match any conditions for the preceding search folders in the list.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-account-manage-mh-format-directories.page0000644000373100047300000000564712371247537032401 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add and edit a MH Format Mail Directories account in Evolution. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net MH Format Mail Directories account settings
Editor de compte

Mail accounts can be added by choosing FileNewMail Account or via EditPreferencesMail AccountsAdd. The steps are mostly the same as for the First-Run Assistant, except for not getting asked whether to import data from other applications or to restore from a backup file.

Mail accounts can be edited via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEdit.

The following settings are available when editing an existing account:

Receiving Email and Receiving options (MH Format Mail Directories accounts) Receiving Email and Receiving options
Sending Email (MH Format Mail Directories accounts) Sending Email
Defaults (MH Format Mail Directories accounts) Valors per defaut
Security (MH Format Mail Directories accounts) Seguritat
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/contacts-using-several-addressbooks.page0000644000373100047300000000213512371247537031443 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adding different types of address books and using more than one address book. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Adding and creating address books

You can have multiple address books. For example, you might have one address book for work related contacts and one for private contacts. The side bar lists those address books, and you can select which address book is shown.

You can also use address books that are not on your computer, such as on the internet (e.g. Google) or in a local network (e.g. LDAP).

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/calendar-layout-appointment-display.page0000644000373100047300000000473512371247543031452 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Define the displaying of appointments in the calendar. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Appearance of Appointments

The following calendar-related options are available under EditPreferencesCalendar and TasksDisplay.

General

Time Divisions:

Sets the time increments shown as fine lines on the daily view in the calendar.

Show appointment end times in week and month views:

If there is space, Evolution shows the end times in the week and month views for each appointment.

Compress weekends in month view:

Select this option to display weekends in one box instead of two in the month view.

Show week numbers:

Shows the week numbers next to the respective weeks in the calendar.

Show recurring events in italic in bottom left calendar

Scroll Month View by a week
Date/Time Format

You can change the format of the Date column by setting your preferred format.

The placeholders in the format expression are strftime formats. For a complete list of available strftime formats, run date --help in the Terminal application.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/tasks-webdav.page0000644000373100047300000000306012371247537024753 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using an online WebDAV task list or memo list. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Using a WebDAV task or memo list

Lists of this type are read-only.

To add such a task list or memo list to Evolution, perform the following steps:

Click FileNewTask List or FileNewMemo List.

Select the type On the Web.

Enter a name that you prefer.

Optionally choose a color that you prefer.

Choose if you want to be able to view the content also while offline.

Enter the address of the list in the URL field.

Choose Use secure connection if you want to connect securely.

Enter your username.

Click Apply.

The list will be added in Evolution.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-several-recipients.page0000644000373100047300000000571112371247537030736 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sending to more than one person and using CC or BCC. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Sending a message to several recipients

To send a message to more than one person, enter the addresses in the composer by separating them with commas or semicolons.

If you frequently write email to the same groups of people, you can create contact lists to send them mail as though they have a single address.
Recipient types

Email messages can have three different types of recipients. The simplest way is to put the email address or addresses in the To: text field. The Cc: text field is used for recipients that are meant to receive a copy of your message but are not the primary recipients.

Addresses in the Bcc: text field are hidden from the other recipients of the message. It can be used to send mail to large groups of people, especially if they do not know each other or if privacy is a concern. If the Bcc: text field is not shown, click ViewBcc Field.

Autocompletion

It is recommended to use the Autocompletion feature of the Evolution address book for entering addresses. By using this you avoid typos and save time.

Using the buttons

Instead of typing the recipients' names you can also click the To:, Cc:, or Bcc: buttons to get a list of the email addresses in your address books. Select the addresses and click the arrow buttons to move them into the appropriate address columns (To:, Cc:, Bcc:).

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-encryption-s-mime-signing-encrypting.page0000644000373100047300000000410412371247543032470 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Signing or encrypting messages via S/MIME that you send. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Signing or encrypting messages

After you have added your certificate, you can sign or encrypt a message by clicking OptionsS/MIME Sign or S/MIME Encrypt from the message composer menu.

To have every message signed or encrypted:

Select EditPreferencesMail Accounts.

Select the mail account to encrypt the messages in.

Click Edit.

Click the Security tab.

In the Secure MIME (S/MIME) section, click Select next to Signing Certificate and specify the path to your signing certificate, or click Select next to Encryption Certificate and specify the path to your encryption certificate.

Select the appropriate options.

Click OK.

The Subject line of the message will not be encrypted and should not be used for sensitive information.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-receiving-options-exchange-ews.page0000644000373100047300000000565512371247537031334 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Receiving options for Exchange Web Services accounts. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Exchange Web Services receiving options
Recepcion de messatge

On the Receiving Email page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Email):

Enter your username for that server.

Either manually enter the Host URL and OAB URL, or click Fetch URL which will ask you for your password and then try to automatically fill in the values.

If you are in an organizational environment, you may want to contact your system administrator for more information.

Select your authentication type in the Authentication list, or click Check for Supported Types to have Evolution check for supported authentication mechanisms. Some servers do not announce the authentication mechanisms they support, so clicking this button is not a guarantee that available mechanisms actually work.
Opcions de recepcion

On the Receiving Options page (accessible via EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditReceiving Options):

If you want Evolution to check automatically for new messages, click the Check for new messages every ... minutes option and select the frequency in minutes.

You can also define if Evolution checks for new messages in all folders.

If you would like to have a copy of the address book on the server for offline access to it, enable Cache offline address book and click Fetch list. Afterwards, select the address book from the available options.

If you want Filters to be automatically used for new messages in your inbox, enable Apply filters to new messages in Inbox on this server.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/import-supported-file-formats.page0000644000373100047300000000610312371247537030304 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Supported file formats for importing data. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Supported file formats

Evolution can import the following types of files:

Corrièl

Berkeley Mailbox (.mbox or no extension):

The email format used by Mozilla, Netscape, Evolution (for local folders until version 2.32), Eudora, and many other email clients.

Maildir (no extension):

The format used by Evolution (for local folders since version 3.0). There is no need to import Maildir files as you can configure a Maildir account in Evolution and point to the folder where the Maildir files are stored.

Outlook Express 5/6 Personal Folders (.dbx):

The email file format used by Microsoft Outlook Express 5/6. For newer versions PST import is recommended.

Calendièr

vCalendar (.vcs):

A format for storing calendar files, which is generally used by Evolution, Microsoft Outlook, Sunbird, and Korganizer.

iCalendar o iCal (.ics):

A format for storing calendar files. iCalendar is used by Evolution, Microsoft Outlook, Palm OS handhelds, and others.

Contactes

LDAP Data Interchange Format (.ldif):

A standard data format for contact cards.

vCard (.vcf, .gcrd):

The address book format used by the GNOME, KDE, and many other contact management applications. You should be able to export to vCard format from any address book application.

Miscellaneous

Evolution/Mozilla/Outlook CSV/Tab (.csv, .tab):

CSV (Comma-separated values) or Tabulator files saved by using Evolution, Microsoft Outlook and Mozilla.

Outlook Personal Folders (.pst):

A file format used to store local copies of messages, calendar events, and other items within Microsoft software such as Microsoft Exchange Client, Windows Messaging, and Microsoft Outlook. It is also called "Personal Storage Table".

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-receiving-options.page0000644000373100047300000000216712371247537026753 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Available mail receiving options for several server types. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Mail Receiving Options
Mail receiving options for common server types
Mail receiving options for corporate server types
Mail receiving options for local account server types
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-not-sent.page0000644000373100047300000000271712371247536025056 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Possible reasons why emails are not sent. April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Mail is not sent

There can be several reasons why emails are not sent:

Invalid email address. Check if all the addresses listed as mail recipients are correct. If the message contains a wrong or invalid email address, the message will not be sent.

Incorrect SMTP settings. Verify if the settings used for outgoing messages is correct. Using the incorrect server address or authentication method may prevent emails from being sent

Offline status. Evolution may be offline. Check on the Send and Receive button; if it is greyed out, then you are offline. To go online, go to FileWork online. You should now be able to use the Send and Receive button.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/tasks-display-settings.page0000644000373100047300000000342012371247535027004 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Options for displaying task completion and due dates. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Displaying of tasks

The following task-related options are available under EditPreferencesCalendar and TasksTasks.

Tasks due today:

Select the color for tasks due today.

Overdue tasks:

Select the color for overdue tasks.

Hide completed tasks after:

Select this option to have completed tasks hidden after a period of time measured in days, hours, or minutes. If you do not select this option, completed tasks remain in your task list, marked as complete.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-attachments-received.page0000644000373100047300000000372712371247541027404 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Saving and opening files that are attached to received emails. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Handling attachments in received mail

If you receive an email message with one or more file attachments, Evolution displays the number of attachments and a Save or Save All button between the email header and the content of the email.

Evolution does not support saving all attachments of all messages in one folder at once.

A list of attachments is also available at the bottom of the email.

To save an attachment to disk, click the down-arrow next to the attachment icon and click Save As.

To open an attachment in another application, click the down-arrow next to the attachment icon and choose one of the available applications.

The options available for an attachment vary depending on the type of attachment and the applications that are installed on your system. For example, image files can be opened in the Image Viewer application or in the GIMP graphics editor.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-default-CC-and-BCC.page0000644000373100047300000000341312371247542026332 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Make somebody always receive copies of your sent mail. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Default CC and BCC

You can set email addresses that should always receive copies of your sent mail (either as CC visible for all recipients, or BCC not visible for other recipients) in the Defaults section of the mail account editor (EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditDefaults).

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-mail-signatures-per-account.page0000644000373100047300000000366712371247542032460 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Setting a default signature for an email account. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Default account signature

You can define a default signature for each of your mail accounts. This can be edited under EditPreferencesMail AccountsEditIdentityOptional Information.

If you have a signature for your account defined but exceptionally do not want to use it for one message, or want to use a different signature, you can change it via the dropdown menu in the right upper corner in the email composer window.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/mail-composer-message-templates-variables.page0000644000373100047300000001000212371247541032500 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Configure variables in templates and reuse items from the message you reply to Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Using Variables in Templates
Configuring Variables for Message Templates

Select EditPlugins.

Click Templates.

Click the Configuration tab.

You can add, edit or remove the key-value pairs. You can specify any number of key-value pairs.

In any template, the occurrence of every $key is replaced by the value it has in the configuration. For example, if you set the key to Manager and the value to Harry, any occurrence of $Manager is replaced by Harry in the message.

Assume that you have 1000 message templates with your current manager's name in them. When the current manager is replaced by a new one, it is not easy for you to manually replace the manager's name in all the 1000 messages. If the messages have a $Manager key value, you can reset the value in the Configuration tab of this plugin.

By default, the entire environment variables are used as a key-value pair. An occurrence of $env_variable is replaced by the value it carries. For example, an occurrence of $PATH in your template is replaced by its value when the template is used.

The replacement process uses the following order of precedence:

$key is replaced by the value set for it in the Configuration tab of the Templates plugin.

If the key is not found, it is then replaced with the value of its environment variable.

If key is neither a configuration option nor an environment variable, no changes are made.
Using Elements From a Message in a Template When Replying

Templates can contain more than just the predefined set of key-value pairs. You can also get any message header values from the email that you are applying the template on, plus the complete message body.

In order to do this, use the format $ORIG[header_name] and replace the variable header_name by the actual header. For example, if you would like to insert the subject line of the message that you reply to, use $ORIG[subject]. To insert the complete body, use $ORIG[body].

If no replacement for a variable is found, the variable is not removed (except for $ORIG[body]) but left in place so that you see that something went wrong. This could happen when trying to use headers that are not necessarily always available in the original message (for example $ORIG[reply-to]).

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evolution/memos-usage-add-memo.page0000644000373100047300000000542712371247542026270 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adding a memo to your memo list. Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Novell, Inc Adding a Memo

Click FileNewMemo, or press ShiftCtrlO.

Select a memo list in the List dropdown list.

Enter the memo information.

Click the Save button, or FileSave.

If you just want to quickly add a memo by entering a summary you can directly enter it in the list of memos.

You can also define a category, or a classification for the memo, or add an attachment.

Shared Memos

Shared Memos are like mail messages except they are scheduled for a particular day and appear on the calendar for that date. You can use shared memos to show vacations, holidays, pay days, birthdays, and so on. Posted shared memos are placed in your Calendar on the date you specify. They are not placed in your Mailbox or in any other user's Mailbox.

To send a Shared Memo,

Click FileNewShared Memo, or press ShiftCtrlH.

Select the Organizer's account name from the drop-down list given next to the Organizer field.

In the To field, type a username, then press Enter. Repeat this for additional users.

Select the task list (under List) in which you would like to create the entry.

Enter a brief summary in the Summary field.

In the Start Date field, type the date this shared memo should appear in the recipients' calendars.

Click the Save button, or FileSave.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mines/license.page0000644000373100047300000000356612300405722024167 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Legal information. Licéncia

This work is distributed under a CreativeCommons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 Unported license.

You are free:

<em>To share</em>

To copy, distribute and transmit the work.

 <em>To remix</em>

To adapt the work.

Under the following conditions:

<em>Attribution</em>

You must attribute the work in the manner specified by the author or licensor (but not in any way that suggests that they endorse you or your use of the work).

<em>Share Alike</em>

If you alter, transform, or build upon this work, you may distribute the resulting work only under the same, similar or a compatible license.

For the full text of the license, see the CreativeCommons website, or read the full Commons Deed.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mines/get-help.page0000644000373100047300000000227112300405722024242 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org 2011 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2012 Hints and warnings

You can use hints to reveal safe tiles, and flag warnings to help you keep track of flags.

Click Hint in the toolbar to reveal a hidden tile that is safe. You will be penalized for using hints: ten seconds will be added to your total time.

To enable warnings, edit the preferences by selecting MinesPreferences and ticking the checkbox next to Warn if too many flags have been placed. This will warn you when you try to place too many flags next to an open tile.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mines/documentation.page0000644000373100047300000000305112300405722025403 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2012 Aruna Sankaranarayanan aruna.evam@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Help write documentation

The GNOME Games user help is maintained by a volunteer community. You are welcome to participate.

To contribute to the Documentation Project, get in touch with us on the #docs channel on irc.gnome.org or via our mailing list .

Our wiki page contains useful information.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mines/develop.page0000644000373100047300000000207512300405722024175 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Help develop

The GNOME Games are developed and maintained by a volunteer community. You are welcome to participate.

If you would like to help develop GNOME Games, you can get in touch with the developers using irc, or via our mailing list.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mines/new-game.page0000644000373100047300000000260512300405722024236 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org 2012 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2012 Aruna Sankaranarayanan aruna.evam@gmail.com Start a new game

To start a new game:

Click the New button or select Mines New Game from the application menu.

Select your preferred board size.

If you are already playing a game, Mines will ask if you want to Start New Game or Keep Current Game. If you choose the former, your current game will be lost.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mines/faces.page0000644000373100047300000000267712300405722023630 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org 2011 Aruna Sankaranarayanan aruna.evam@gmail.com The meaning of the faces

This is a new game and you have not clicked on any tile yet.

You are currently clicking on a tile.

You have uncovered a mine. You lose.

The tile you just clicked on is safe. You can continue.

You have found all the mines. You win!
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mines/high-scores.page0000644000373100047300000000211712300405722024747 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org 2012 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2012 High scores

The high scores list the ten fastest times in which each type of mine field has been cleared.

To view the high scores, select MinesScores. The dialog will display the Small field size by default; to view other sizes, select them in the drop down menu at the top of the dialog.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mines/bug-filing.page0000644000373100047300000000412012300405722024553 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Help make <app>Mines</app> better
Report a bug or suggest an improvement

Mines is maintained by a volunteer community. You are welcome to participate. If you notice a problem you can file a bug report. To file a bug, go to .

This is a bug tracking system where users and developers can file details about bugs and crashes, or request enhancements.

To participate you need an account, which will give you the ability to gain access, file bugs, make comments, and receive updates by e-mail about the status of your bug. If you don't already have an account, just click on the New Account link to create one.

Once you have an account, log in, click on File a BugApplicationsgnome-mines. Before reporting a bug, please read the bug writing guidelines, and please browse for the bug to see if it already exists.

If you are requesting a new feature, choose enhancement in the Severity menu. Fill in the Summary and Description sections and click Commit.

Your report will be given an ID number, and its status will be updated as it is being dealt with. Thanks for helping make Mines better!

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mines/shortcuts.page0000644000373100047300000000246612300405722024601 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Brian Grohe grohe43@gmail.com 2012 Keyboard shortcuts

New game

CtrlN

Fullscreen

F11

Hint

CtrlH

Pause

Pause

Use the toolbar shortcut if your keyboard does not have a Pause key.

Help

F1

Quit

CtrlQ
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mines/translate.page0000644000373100047300000000322612300405722024533 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Help translate

The GNOME games user interface and documentation is being translated by a world-wide volunteer community. You are welcome to participate.

There are many languages for which translations are still needed.

To start translating you will need to create an account and join the translation team for your language. This will give you the ability to upload new translations.

You can chat with GNOME translators using irc. People on the channel are located worldwide, so you may not get an immediate response as a result of timezone differences.

Alternatively, you can contact the Internationalization Team using their mailing list.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mines/board-size.page0000644000373100047300000000235512300405722024577 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org 2011 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2012 How to change the game board size

You can select a field size at the start of a new game.

Click New or Mines New Game.

Select one of the grid sizes:

a 8 × 8 board with 10 mines

a 16 × 16 board with 40 mines

a 30 × 16 board with 99 mines

a custom board, where you chose the size and the number of mines

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mines/rules.page0000644000373100047300000000335412300405722023672 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org 2011 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2012 Game rules

The aim of Mines is to clear the minefield without detonating any of the mines.

Start by chosing one of the three default board sizes, or by selecting a custom board.

The game begins with the board covered in tiles. Click on any tile to uncover it. You will reveal:

A colored number, which represent the number of mines in the adjacent tiles. This will help you deduce where the mines are so that you can mark them with flags.

A blank tile, which means there are no mines under any of the adjacent tiles.

A mine, which will detonate and end the game.

Repeat the previous step until you have uncovered all the tiles which do not have mines underneath them.

If you complete the game quickly enough, you will be added to the high scores list.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mines/index.page0000644000373100047300000000266412300405722023652 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 <media type="image" src="figures/logo.png"/> GNOME Mines GNOME Mines Brian Grohe grohe43@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 <media type="image" src="figures/logo32.png">GNOME Mines logo</media> GNOME Mines

Mines is a clone of the game Minesweeper. The aim is to locate all the mines that are hidden under tiles on a rectangular board. You will need to use a combination of logic and luck to find all the mines without triggering an explosion.

Game Play
Useful tips
Advanced
Get Involved
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mines/flags.page0000644000373100047300000000543312300405722023634 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2012 Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org 2012 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2012 How to use flags

Flags are used to mark tiles which you suspect may hide a mine. Putting a flag on a tile prevents you from clicking on it and possibly causing an explosion, which would end the game.
How to place a flag on a tile

Red flags are those that cannot be clicked. To place a red flag on a tile:

right click on a blank tile.

To make the number of available flags equal to the number of remaining mines, enable Warn if too many flags placed and Use "I'm not sure" flags preference options, then restart the application.
Use of the <em>I'm not sure</em> flag

If you are not sure whether a tile hides a mine, you can use the blue I'm not sure flag.

To put an I'm not sure flag on a tile:

Right-click twice on a blank tile or once on a red flag.

To enable these flags, click MinesPreferences, and select Use "I'm not sure" flags.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mines/toolbar.page0000644000373100047300000000141412300405722024175 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2012 Toolbar

The toolbar, located under the menu bar, lets you perform common actions with your mouse. To use a toolbar item, just click on it. The buttons, from left to right, are New Game, Hint, Pause and Fullscreen.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/glade/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000752412300405316022350 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/glade/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000005264212300405316023214 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 ]>
Glade Interface Designer Manual Glade is a user interface designer for GTK+ applications. 2006 Vincent Geddes 2004 2003 Sun Microsystems 20022000 Michael Vance Projècte de documentacion de GNOME Vincent Geddes GNOME Documentation Project
vincent.geddes@gmail.com
 Sun GNOME Documentation Team Sun Microsystems Michael Vance GNOME Documentation Project Glade Manual 3.0 5 December 2006 Vincent Geddes GNOME Documentation Project Glade Manual 2.1; 17 June 2004 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project Glade User Manual 2.0 25 February 2004 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project Glade User Manual 1.2 10 Feb 2004 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project Glade User Manual 1.1 30 Mar 2002 Michael Vance GNOME Documentation Project Glade User Manual 1.0 11 May 2000 Michael Vance GNOME Documentation Project This manual describes version 3.1.0 of Glade. Feedback To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the Glade application or this manual, follow the directions in the GNOME Feedback Page. glade user interface designer Introduccion The Glade interface designer enables you to create and edit user interface designs for GTK+ applications. The GTK+ library provides an extensive collection of user interface building blocks such as text boxes, dialog labels, numeric entries, check boxes, and menus. These building blocks are called widgets. You can use Glade to place widgets in a GUI. Glade allows you to modify the layout and properties of these widgets. You can also use Glade to add connections between widgets and application source code. The user interfaces designed in Glade are stored in an XML format, enabling easy integration with external tools. You can use the libglade library to dynamically create GUIs from the XML description. Per començar To Start <application>Glade</application> You can start Glade in the following ways: Menut Applications Choose Programming Glade Interface Designer . Linha de comanda To start Glade from a command line, type the following command, then press Return: glade-3 When You Start <application>Glade</application> When you start Glade, the following window is displayed.
<application>Glade</application> window Shows theGlade window.
The Glade window contains the following elements: Barra de menuts The menus on the menubar contain all of the commands you need to work with files in Glade. Barra d'espleches The toolbar contains a subset of the commands that you can access from the menubar. Design Area The design area is where a user interface can be visually edited. Paleta The palette contains the widgets that can be used to build a user interface. Inspector The inspector displays information about the widgets in a project. Property Editor The property editor is used to manipulate the properties of widgets, as well as adding connections to source code. Barra d'estat The statusbar displays information about current Glade activity and contextual information about the menu items. Working with Projects Crear un projècte novèl To create a new project, choose FileNew. The application displays a new blank project in the Glade window. Dobrir un projècte To open an existing project, choose FileOpen. The application displays the project in the Glade window. Enregistrar un projècte You can save projects in the following ways: To save changes to an existing project file, choose FileSave. To save a new project file or to save an existing project file under a new filename, choose File Save As . Enter a name for the project file in the Save As dialog, then click Save. Working with Widgets To Select Widgets From the Palette Window You can work with the widgets in the Palette window in the following ways: Mòde de seleccion To use selection mode, click on the Selector arrow. The pointer changes to an arrow to indicate that selection mode is active. In this mode, you use the mouse to select widgets in your project. You can then use the Properties window to edit the properties of the widgets. You can also use the widget context menu to select a widget. Right-click on a widget to open the widget context menu.You can add multiple widgets of a specific type from the Palette to your project by holding down the Control key when you select a widget. You need to click on the Selector arrow or another widget in the Palette to return to normal mode. Widget placement mode To use widget placement mode, select a widget in the Palette window. When you select most widgets, the pointer changes to a pointer-plus-cross. You can then place the widget inside containers, top-level widgets, and so on. After you place a widget, the mode returns to selection mode. Top-level placement mode To use top level placement mode, select a defined top-level widget in the Palette window. When you select a top-level widget in the Palette window, the widget appears immediately on your desktop. You can then edit the widget. After you select a top-level widget, the mode returns to selection mode. To Organize Widgets In Your Project You use widget containers, or boxes, to layout and organize widgets in your project window. You can choose the following widget containers from the Palette window: Horizontal Box Vertical Box Tablèu Fixed Positions Horizontal Button Box Vertical Button Box Horizontal Panes Vertical Panes Notebook Encastre Scrolled Window Viewport You can nest boxes to create complex layout structures. When you create horizontal and vertical boxes, Glade asks you how many rows or columns to create initially, though rows and columns can easily be added or deleted later. When you have created all the boxes you require, you can add specific widgets like labels, buttons, and more complicated widgets into the boxes. Notice that Glade packs widgets into the layout which eliminates a lot of tedious work. The use of boxes enables windows to change size to accommodate different size labels in different languages when the application is localized. To Place a Widget on the Clipboard To remove a widget from a parent and place the widget on the clipboard, select the widget then choose Edit Cut . To Copy a Widget to the Clipboard To copy a widget to the clipboard, select the widget then choose Edit Copy . The original widget remains attached to the parent. To Paste a Widget From the Clipboard Into Your Project To paste a widget that exists on the clipboard into your project, choose Edit Paste .All widgets must have a unique name within Glade. If you cut a widget, and then paste the widget into your project, then the widget and all of the children of the widget keep their original names. If you copy a widget, or paste the widget multiple times into your project, then Glade generates new names for the widget copies. To Delete a Widget To delete a widget from the parent without moving the widget to the clipboard, select the widget then choose Edit Delete . To Change a Property of a Widget The property editor is used to edit the properties of a selected widget. To change a property of a widget, select the widget and then enter an appropriate value in one of the Property window's property fields. A prepaus de Glade Glade is maintained by the Glade developers and GNOME community volunteers. To find more information about Glade, please visit the Glade Web site. To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding this application or this manual, you can submit them using bugzilla. Another excellent source of information are the Glade user and developer mailing lists. In addition to subscribing, you might also want to browse the list archives, available via these same links. This program is distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public license as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. A copy of this license can be found at this link, or in the file COPYING included with the source code of this program.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/glade/figures/main-window.png0000644000373100047300000013526112300405316025145 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000PNG  IHDRgFBbKGD pHYs 7˭tIME 2:TCP IDATxwE;9gTP,PPTNOΜC<'(@A%lybwafwvwXvaa߇O3ߪoUo+8AAA:(D`   Sa{AA`Xz+E픠x-  řތ@j$G!ԏ   ]6Ą]bLksMD|kAAAٲD/  B6U~[WܶW#!nV7 TM  _> զ}?>N.6(:h$0v@S &Q3 dx2ޚ> d'RAAx6_USOW/pewN@kg2wPOZ`fjfFk@sSՔF5M㉅G5NAAڶ{ZIfΠ.xZ8SZ6hՂϽj.< v{>@A1V#ޛ7O~W-AqjTfP5=D?t$ 2 7|Q @! KsVW͍s^y ;r_RA,1~ݢ-l.`9ix wpP~a$Fy쳝|gOdhWίEj6pVXk #OG1n?_gIwZ46 UӥAh{܊jZ +6)[\~~yɬٯYp!LEY|'ϴ*VAjs]rGW~G\rОɠm'?F+ [ΨŐ,;[֯f*}'FTN[WPDUKj/d^6,ٸ1C=|'^VTCjzv؛ݛ޼b >ޫřůA¬!cpjЛ5>4,ܫ>߸ylIg  Έ%:B9ql&.=*㉷rxq{%&jב\53ZP׹|yOS#'hePkK$y7lƏ ˉe@F O}ﶔ2{rN=CQzp~ݢIKr kyQ2iqTM͒uS!BgM=I˙ WG\,i+}%>P]/S01^X^ǯDKS A>3MB;a瑱!FYO罫6e\~~,XGpty w fYp_A5 BW|ٷsa̛}x ]hb#/q#8iD}` l[B 9,; dPxxzز 'p9zJX}={ ܲ϶'fMlÎ%!+$ﱽjCunx6;.IX{` #X[naLquXd&.$= nggA9s_8p+sB*/F1XxU#;=6so`'cIF׼y!n1X1 HJm" FEFpWET>?VQA!@=C0:LxXă>TP o#aVWBZf J%Јz'|73cC5W 9YYTYc;xo&*F[NDSeEU>q?.{2cG.du` 7^=cte$]aFdQe-Kt濷{x2w\'Θ4g_\Ę)1'coIF*`45#E f o'>i4k߇56_pҰFET>?|3o kefB=fJpLAbcW,@:"A|ΞXJόPOYXI_p/n/>ΖʵX%((0Tӽ`GA=3r|!H4zfp-Oc,oQa(U_VMfr=~+s-?O6\y FyY99ɾan`4QV)&wDZhiGa9MQ1h^JgM`dRc9ֿ`JuWq Хٛ x-iI%?%78?? !,elg@ lh DGgMY@i"OA~f3qk5\gҸr`*x,x`4d+G :׽C9~seWa}3mDѦE0 zİ}Uyel2ZLN\l<wM]XW ༓&rox10&kJfԐeN;|2-N ]`q@q!0 i&M4ؐ忼-}*^aYAWoG+Útw:8ǩۼwQ:n,O`bFt(fg=_>qb׫2o)[0ѽ7Vh S]y Q3P9kOT|ż|x)߾F4tQeqo}>j]%G>!PB|d<~W#F[Q=ƀzxj:@1ŦqRm*)_vKljDIb2KKPh=X|KYLͩ6] }r;m_|P T@yP:v.|D4as֚LA٪<>Z +\bǜKJoƢ eϴy]U~@sΤCA:S0b! ¡CAz?l5#G'60kQQ_.KAA1[˻T~Iq=oV%   SvU8oމ3_?zwy   {Ey;71e_8   bLAA)D   g9I_+RAA/t#Ol]!  BY@}Xz] 1͛s>ntŜV".v,W8mZ.=Ζa̚36µ]߭"K$I$IDu k#o {85bpgEv{O^dlœhl e^nu!ڛݻsYr5Y,^?N;R;@otpuڽ+t <+Rk[*k-  /90X@Esؑ^2c F#BLr=披_PYs;h8CGgO:j<=8S?)'ʸyMsq'Hf\rU!7g]ΘÎwkrNl3ϥW9H!L;L1m%{uD;,zk_}}baGrig|ۭn?#N~C4}u`k|촀V6¾Ի`2ݫv26on}Tw}d14GLfUVߍZK$I$I$u]ϙY*\|){dY.yQv.^¢~&y&ƌK0?6/>[[~G,li,lM:ˬ9s99lްt9ｿ(?8^RSx{Ι!^/3f]1S&}^x){;6%yy!ٗ;qک'q'O.x'OoɢwBݫv,ߧu\=+Σ\<l\żk?Z[hzg鲯իWIݵnõ_WEͲٺi5VߍcKm.I$I$IԅEDo=vaа1~u:+Wn(#?_u% $'qҴXac|V^ˮ]1Lq%3Ł|̾{A$  gJ\.W\6 8|x>jR͚6+VRWWǼbPFg, Ӭ/h0`4|P۴1/2cӫ'I`cF$1!GY.R׃ $ =MrW\߲e8v6G`3ϡi*k׭qi'GhO|hdߒߒfb&Gk޲ZlQ@3@+Ym.k6n[mchMtv]$I$I$I9dN tP<[lc yFSx)yٲe#LߠQ)++ovj׾ )oX M;ltLF/>xqN9c:xGO>2ܔ,ttn^ ^+dheK7x/6ƍmڒz}?,233IMI ٗ?Q:ikݎ9ǝ̙^~B~}!/剅䔓O`4D[k )ҺkGMMtaèw8;cKm.I$I$Iԅ0y~87Y/>F0k8 !¿_C AA8ȱFE>?71@-P TAҿֿ?Es@wl9d+>`)Uݳ' ||*g{.+/C*NFW  t$i2o6{0y ~-̞snyoٽ^yu{\6{&IIoAA8kd2s69rPmX)!AAęV   tq&OAAA:8XJAA.O#8w)R   ti5VXq3AAAH\.A8 Xz|T  Й?|CqQCp#ɩOę   eK6|#FFT1С F\N'˗-bCę   |2FOl11hv^0 }o  B(),b`ZFEIRRR%+`G1[ rټD" n,|o{‰$'`_7pg?71@-P TAҿֿ?s&D"  B9gCTbE jщ=M[svps+?޲-{I9@Ạq%Űb!teC BWgClںo1:IE\\:l6'fي_l t'_ Y٧K>g'6~= ( >z;Ou% w-ns>TIB\ _Z"lq9TV-EQ WGZJ*bvٕKl1PUUMUMu[-Vᚡdy^=IK BgC?rѧOl=Ou]/F~]ǎgRϠ{RcDQܨJn9[ɧi4WqcWi,f}{eo35< sQ:uqѡKJRأrc:Nkj8OooۥQ]]M^=*?~<Þ)r J˲rv H\= IDATJLl$tqH>}PUZ/^oxv%z`8؁DQA!+s<k1H?.Proo8?oW3SZ )nHjTnպ dffQ\\LaQ!Һ4N+*+Ȥ̌۔WTM^^`VUo :k 111bF߀Aܹ]ש lcЁTRS}emD\wf38(y@gCdLGG@/G38$ufGQ*}UW5YO?pZwǎ|.(*fhk4w1fx´]שh4*C-Q^^NnA21 b}l6c4p8lN'n[L{ 3щIbl6 ra_%-3b{M.y^E +KLI F@IC|W,{35a|Epqق9/&HmjqXN8a ? AYkw/))EAF45*˰E`ETń`фlfiW5jq8x{wA m( "UR^^F||"Qh-W閑ᠴh;1X1PQUIyE9qq$$$`20x>i]V54vFE9*0B CEy)))nGh cbSUYAUe]|Nqi tt<^^^`]AFzzdfdJ6`!77{`0 D!;'AMMuUij/93/Aa8۟"M}!MGDŽ0bΙNaxp-C1gL(Mڙہz1Vt]C5F{\e%DǴyWRY]Eff&5u5h-ʆhhs8Fbc)//CUtʖ@+@jr ;vA=TKxtrQ]]l w~.kjj$~Is}>vX&/f]p6¼V8 1 e(Z5̿PwAvxܜ@TزnhHtw9gzCxκ*iI\зAut}=sBrxH||"5T|$&&zUjjp\cp{\(d8_Wv!&&r<7ɉX,`!fB4i`DlvAvvILL %Dۢya$I7<@l,$h(dO/D`z,fG;1+.g{YIFz71ء*7\! G9F]CIR[x0dEbx**{ COcl}3tp埮x7޻$-kȣW&&&"B܁iAL1t0ӟ 9 33(8ۯA|7azz fdbPd@QuflŶ:oe @UU|_!yO<1cvp477MsT0жhj='{TʍS{Mw :MFbbmb#Qل&TMd2v9X,V<^/䴰$Au5uMf fSЃM$'' ^(H H4h]˓O.sNGNPg=gZ% ͎[T`0T`PQXT-[PkvWv/;l2^v)//īx<^4!Ȃ_*q1TVU]Ww~kۉ1XLߜ'zU**;@ yL;ea0(TT܌x}旉&PFHgf*/x ӉPp}9bCMuѴ=!{>kh$T5m;E0j8oXglB_i.QWWOll׊xcf껁w/NӁ[j? أXdWUy4TJtBRƱcNcb-œ[Gv/GFz:6-p- % H/($,t]'7?xRS=۶SPPGx= P,1`3M.}= h]v:޶pP\RL=lp Id2]Aq"o;"0-h~:秮6 S9FuN\>ϙg*ni~rГ-w^/EgAW,ф޳wCrt-I,&؆;|B>o@#QWWD٬h"..>`uCk[jaEUU IKIbZЍڞqYh232ӣ{h[t`ҽ륬LY Mv] ~Y!uDr -vyٝ?nce L=(1С.:Z].j}?!raZ@ 3łtJ`b0FqQ545tXBjꉏK`1[ďBt d4e![enhkY~ ]3>x;{l ^Ӄ/"11>AVX@rJ x0SntP]ʭh[DAUHWeSxT4***ۣ7. ;]])Uόe,4g$%fby5<mY',L;f2u9S#V1eabCYu1t`}a\ts6< Z_@b :.ZE9M]c՝&qyڡH>xx<8]:FÞۙ64tͤPU]"Etcwc 4~j|Ba2(]~QV+={v1Laފr[ᅵbfD^AMU$)1WTkw.-- ۍH(ׅP&~Wm ㉎G>`_x^x;6dPH~_~ O>zO3`iyпoZ+M[oST\/W_bH@ߢ5|u߷or#[WWϵ`00j=L}Vfa|g|Dl3Uװs.f,f3ݘ3}r (!9)6A{Yyy9v{LXPjJ eedRfSOimƛoOtŁw=Hmyf~u1/ƏqN [(ov"-GgV-kq:6v2ᨫ&=EyX67꥾ʲSa@ݎlEյ{0+Uq:3Zҏ/~hbȨx=njk*vh2c4SSU 9DžyHNYi!&sdC{lnATL\uظ.:h6g|+ {϶x(L/';xn~**B֫57N^=Xgx|@HֶS59Y|.~s<n )I<}|r2` IDAT!zxϷ_~#Uk۱s/~">싐W4>s?yp-wq)Sdy|ˀ[ ,b/"^IKKirѣrZTMÚuٝOA߾جrg/>YK#*w\ gs<:jR`yII |dggf=3x~9}v9cxn  qW)+/d4QXTH]]>=gIIIrRN $''kw~ '4-=666d}wٌnZj3w 73##l7]o=h}~RRR"okm3G7!nF@5KFUZl|rq`vXx-.G-zw Sg0eEǔc۵Azk]Xm ƀ'l⨫1,h\Wt`"8m؜A%C^- 6u_jj5gK]@ZZ*II&O7o}?g@~}wQ1.-ޠ'pn> 2}N|B<WKm~0b~Aze/S^Q5n yoR9fՐQb嘓/D pޠv P_W7i*I(>y J4-pq:#誇eόx^SW]k1}GQ-`&ޤ$ЉQ)"MEX(((xH{iAz/JO{Y6aC̙3gf) gqvvN#P(1Qۤ^"v FK_')ꈊ9nQ)ZM^AÌ(e=rV|5TTק$JP0>ޚϕPb;8j֨nnj!r!)SF=ݏLv1z<1i˖)c'pv*nށظdmK|ff\R+I-SӶreZN̨5!̙)/^UL8wԧ7nT{pE7l@k:o)ڗgxyzUNΓgeY]8N)_O Kʉoc+Ƈ\(<~/ZBl޼rE֬YǓC;_OJʌwg@9} n%$nc gΜMq#yں_2Ȕ&1i+89wXd ~ʎϿXAeiV#1qܹhChiϖ0|v61bؐT?qHx89|غs9Mgr-}`M&*>.8{UWpp(Ul7‘$' xF{ܽ~*WC.qU;%\ܭO^VLy=u[a7Lvj4QF]S7pZ(Uk`̉xx"VW.ФU{LK$yJ JHy&Ùװ%\8{e*a6%^0>JG诜ǻ>=nJH[ҞمftwՅoW//L3*w`2ŧ8˲a vpw%($)1AAIzlJcSv/wW]b)S˪B^]y37beL|Tm;x ?NNfn5vz5`*/gUZ_.KMٽꅱcN3`emT^AO7_EěL6;1)NLҧWؼ%ũzFV|α'Ә0rT W]÷q#:wzmڣ#Ԫi֚yں_22|`O{oϤJڴ7WW~K˩UsկsҘq)WѾc{LqpgOYh j9sޭsZܸ TY6 2* /MlgxWZ.K-r;6q՗޶sgSJM?FlL qmЂ[7kvlZCyJUҶ~,wSOx /sK|*ٜ֮Euɒ%XDG`6ÿ.p QիS77~X %J+)enmeɲ/IH0sI~]NQ29d:eK]6&w liU#IH0SΧqg?11a}͍aؘH#S|cT $$F\l4]<\T•"E1HH޾7գ,7gYn%!٩;'/_Twn+\"]VPpt*a^b #.6;{Kagd"*2үEp.x=)GEhHSXqF;bur$=Mk]>ol-x>;{*-ZSDI$0fzN4kҘcGxPpH(|̮=c2\zV͛ҵ ޙ*ukʰܥA\w;;;z%oL531ّ)E'OrJ,ȡ1:t9PZ.YNPp/Ok|i9rSyǢE)Z.%KR\Yƌa%K`;sF#/|:v U& +Ξf)2k#ys,BBҠ~=\p٧f/w5e,-cƿbtQ@8%{ܸ=0$wك,Q"E8xq[6O>s_~>W}0P\É͍9ｫ`&""if>F pq)^`z@Rp D?-"QJqF:C}$fyw$w<}/A|\..%yyX*T([`ldE_ f"":]O}$`ghg}=ѣˣr֭o/#ؼ0'nI7<V&ŊH]s&Ol|<OZ=MLDDDDZ5?Ө/EKa4dϞ]5Wۢp&""""yFyMGvՐ m[3Ut| g"""""In}_uwQay?>OkJDDDDD 57Ҹ{pVvC dT>]s&RHKuH.jץ:ADDD$Qa "fDD$("""""p&"""""" g"""""" g""""""p&"""""RYCߖw@=/"""""bpڿ-+Q"UjaБڬaO ɓ2&""RPoW|gۧe<>>AϲajΟkoNYjժr?CXv56+nD|W_kNb0߯}T-sLyE88PLiF ?ඨCDD$?6t0vvvCraС#R\Yʖ-cn!a49I~L?Kxeqpi\~z01 Z"Rį4n];섓eXs^=WbK.K+aqԫWۢD]./N|ߜʙ4<==LEpHhAATP{{vlᡕ," g(Y"{cOִԬY-1)ʕ*养;;nL1keVHa2|`̵xfϙS ԫ[sSwFŋHHH?Vm6pT"™3gSk7WWf;hN>c 4W=w.4wˬo?&ŋT,>^͛aѣ{L?K}7˓ &&xv'۟y6.\Ț5DDr26nDNڿ-]{~Z5Shs 4r:k3^|U֬eY"""Exx8ύ@՚xn"X]:4jFJ8~\F˗r jix:<}|0cڴ''"{Uvr-zG[˗6^! l6o݈YIEDl(?<8-p \Kq{xr@#g"""""" g""""""p&"""""p&""""""ItCu|O Μdϟ hh0`41 0{{{=ﺙW]gZȕÂ/c1ʔ)l_3p,Ol|5ias/ЯO4ǯ\_,Wkϴ\BBvvv%YSv|>cE$|Okl֤ݝM6aci=6mڄU `0ݽ8?igK[O~-j`/8"ώov4g@N:m)?zdZ=܉: ZѰySguZ>-ӂ(>|Z0ijkϿ!6oùzd21cևnә: ZѴu{4WY5}0oBZ?&05-e2[:>[vhשOͬ72I_Du^9G !r,auH gIݫGezYؖK7?dZgX&xm،H'Gn<ׂ=ٽ{/Crf/]ⱎm |nFVjL :wm9~,\ʔקQb߯ں}-Y+=?]fXyS_ʖ)́GpN%-l//O~Z+AԪQ_αy~w_,XÝPDkH?Iٷ?=-3ѭN+W[3aܳFnݲj~I^{y-]6G/KYqs˝W&һG4Ϭ;dvݦtADDDDDF- gƔקo3,k4Q>VYϩg٭ԼNӞpXޜ66F)YSa..%׫;,`ؐ`֝'+[ a/W&qrevظL;emnYǚ&WFPZKEDDDD^scd+%ս3~9[iٞ:/qrŋ;Ӯmҥ^ 4>t^|T\Y3ىF`2a6'$)ZԝɮJr%}E3?ao) Ow+^LreٲO.^LmS/سw?[6on>e"nR<  on ת%7nS{tz/>r[˚zެ􃈈Ha`lQ|Syel934/7l:]$|q7EDtl 0p-@ EDDDDD$P8 """""(iIw{#g"""""" g""""""p&"""""p&"""""" g"""""" g""""""p&"""""p&""""""wueђ6s4m۲uN\iӶ U #+i[:-L IDAT{hrj:-v^j˲+>tM۲pѧ:JH[DDDD$W@tt46ImQ[ e[DDDDD잭X",`^j+>W-"""""/͝;צ3@壹mږcF~7oMiWn""""""y o9׿b[8ThСC޽;[6mooo޽{ٳTRE(4׿OS ;0~} gGx`KZr%K.ͰLz51y p .6pj)wYX6)Θ`ښ|x&M,_(Y!,,,͝;7oL:;Gɇ^OQ;gm b""""pMjx@@eG; tuNk#(@֭3=5ϯ`("""""' ~_O˨ޖ3ʦm#zymuD372 ͏裿2"""";Efh,O,\^j_j~:IQ] """""p&"""""" g"""""" g""""""p&"""""p&"""""" g"""""" g""""""p&"""""p&"""""" g"""""" g""""""p&"""""wۺ­w|76s@@Zteᒥ6m!i8[mYdM2tEDDDD0tPֹhѢlK2|HeOh`EDDDDl"::H䤶--""""pvVXg癶~Q[~[DDDDD͛7Ϧf{ڏ`0`6-njsεi3@%/m/y_DDDDD1 )Obv//nUBՖ6cE3sy_ey^wKw?9Ү={bmiڥ;+WXbDEExv[:ݻ5mӦM;ZDDDDҳuVV\iy[Z _=JNY]9qmm8qrޝ9]SB1v[vĉ5̙3DDDDD,#+W3 |5h>akrWyΟ]ɼ;s<}(r-?- #crMEDDD@luSգ)|—*WHЕ+,Y+v=ZwgHlzGDDDDD򘸸8\+UX1ⰷg_ю[0i֬)nn;sFڴrRTx/8y:}t {rY io ...)f:vx̪:r3 ּys=pvKρJH@˭BLDDDDl`0ۚV6p2mP|'yvё3,BFF׺f|9`;gGiK@kל)H gdy[dvYRx͛||jyta#973G7zHZGDDDD$O3??--M^9]#WYVڒ b""""oÙdZl){Z.4miڴ)3g""""" gy<%D l煥-x{{])"""" gIn1Ittt鏼3ЇghêtO>1cFt|b@D?ƌcӶ ~_hK``EDDDDl]_j'EfhLmQ[][DDDD1 DDDDDDDDDDDDDLDDDDDDLDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDLDDDDDDLDDDDDD|Q'bcʫDDDD )9Q833쯽xjxuN 6Wޢm """""﵂]<ݲEi֤Q~7&M&eJSdٗr֬I#-;6ml6شi3m&;a|JYE8ϿDl}b8[SA+j`o o7a qqqtڟCGtjK8"ώov4g@N:muݙv|ZP˧QQQL{}j`gK߮:d21cևnә: ZѴu{4Wik),)}0{{?HA^`t$/bg>u'""AÞe-x׭Mvm8pOCGRԷQXf=^;@62d`{!22'ź _ d ͛aV՝:029s?q4i܀wْ帹2nݝ8"#5c(y@x衇^K<TX1Kxۺ |2,t.F~^w]K7^Hc=~G az:zwC~j WU:<c<;Ӻmܜa];w _H]Xnŝ(W f¸g1uo ZV;\~w7TeCR%Ԩ^5q\PHjָfpW8q4M1V՝:$$mS-l_ 6o}(W ̡z*ڢEDDDDRƎ>:%M_3z#z%˩5)] Hd2a49},K{.#JLf˰W«/OQê3Vx8Es25mVTH7׮3,|7nW1ڢEDDDDRCGex/̫_`Sپs7իUJP0'Oaߟi//O.^R˃_nhV#(Os_<ޯS'Dj櫓7:j֨FJ^yc:n{Uuo۱.q8;;q\\JjkrBfMq?̒ޙ ?߯%l߹h OѢEpvvbg!??6] ͢O]԰ATPdٗ\xgg'Xmf֝pk~HjRR굦^LreٲO.^LmT)Ob7Cۻ,""""dEf{MnUTyt<;1ώH1̷qmi+WGsfSݙѢy6>Ű9e8Z5O劈0ş™((™H5z*9Q833Q8Q83<ƾ/;Y5 ~Zz;lў~:ek^DDDD^YV\ivH;=.;l x[[>i۶-1Q-6`t.;l"WV'(!:7o^7n\̙cjKS KmIKlƌ f3&IH>׮KuH!kD!000Wel[6 c*vlZ͟,ٵu-Ns^] `ȜEDV;EΤ@ԩsɰ̳MH ܜ`6o޼To:QDDl%:2<_?Q8:uRA,n""b+ſC/#s|& Ϸ#pi""b+:QD쾲srK)tZ؊Nk;tF d完}GQ8),+ה% DDDDD$;tCtY3*sNDDDDDL$&?q f""""]:Q$f-3~inwZN)Lɺ-Y6oO~>t0ݻuɴ)tZH}("9[t0׮_gs=g.oO}S+[D =DDDhۘbŊL&?~O-e}7 ̣GVݴ/nxw6>}rW=wΪO}1L/^'bf@3ۚߩ\[oFM-evDǺӨ+Udq,|s?AT^zcF?Ë/J՚uYlyyn֬uńj5Y6OwܱCo?_n~[C?#[]߾=;,˖-Ò_)eT~˦ߵrEDҠ#g"""""" g"""""":QDDPHE[tLDDDDDDLDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD$n""":zkq>jY&;;#jQ(,?wR1kxa0\&Q7Cx>Jie(0d`|7\&(%>+,."'Z \ rFJc06adcn^ ϭa0R+j̉Ån}>ȭeM>_S8;քQ0)x._cդz̘ͦ|.t*5p`l6qjd6Sۻq[rkY-=zyxͧp&"".v";#~Nǰ3>HP\dg4PJu.;P(GaZV;q4x;7|a~,Of-"""0 1 f<ɹ8ёz}>ȭeur.NxMr#-Zͳ}KMYdoL[$ЇTDDlhL gu?l gy Q 2_LkBH#gFZs!]VȡSlZwrL cy2}sa]e~uto_ʉK&""h g39˓EPAڳGTöm ?9 ST^T^gYFsʕ+ ]֖:~IwO3tfƌ`,˗׋eϟep֮IϞԭ,(,+mu Myg7oS9QT8[2ܾ^u{>1=߷iiKѸQû̉˨.f-wfp([>o?)BݯfI,2"""ِ)?v;QlEʔ HHHHQnI< W25kFC⩛7%Avk۩˚y1jT.}f#*KGDlgֵ8:O\D{h}ZٜŌÞ8{83ޞƎ; f@@4ٴqqqדc6'. nAudYVN3.w{]Xnqvjgg都 `4hS)̨a+S:/kz<_{9Ż5_T[&MrGfȿC4H{o4c7ҧZlAwNxϿ0mwP#O?5u9b8YիWm܈.:d0VJ||vnLc/~*Vdm&5.#LsJ0_zw_i'$$`ggW(#NqO̞3)! v׬iFhF="O ̧gc4w0ݺ֕/Oύ++!FpA+vm5^tI7 T(WvmdͺMAA!{ٻED@o>vێ3卷B>xz cN {зW76~z 'Oi9v$n.j+)ZHmo߃QO=ɲBj3)z^gӽKtSfW&?O[wh92f5'~I?M/p+~ݺF rd6q!f3{<5Ҳ#i62Y:|&-e̩vn9Kk͜foB}fL&M¯es&od3SrEy5cOaЯ'b +|N:Wqqq7=:8rßyʕ*ШwbL~sRw?,lOz]#3lkaVV,Ͱ0z0I^d?0lVu|#Oҳc2y6lYӨW:I{?:GIGӜ&2&JykOz~H+ՅIL[ԫ[Y fԦuj~,QWooqttpy+/ cf+SO wy&XvL4f]N8[ \Nb98lp'Yzsvw D(ޛ7I]ݍpbbb)Z4;8uDtt .]"66--]DX5G6-Z}kWagoǕ+ADGdv{1iL~mM}2a(9ŋW;zFR^<ޯ'k+fa}olwtw#(8Ʉo] 0@||ԪYK.[ͨwOz4^k]w:kW&N߰NM3뿬,cZ'֬v-E>xcTpw6|ة30OYp.UTK&(ޙ=^;1i?.%KdyYfX4?vHt)UX3ٱFcSS8kۈy>![i"i4-ۈaC` 0yZL<>`/KSU>&ի˓ޝ7U%&b[l)-"KY+ qEE@AgDA}\~:3::32 8:XF*n(.(* PXZN ]h4,7z.''jsi8wbvacƩk. }n-gʹo2 S+{h%%%>yWPllvKGuS%z$}wZfOw}4P'e+r5r~ixkr8h_iS]:z{ie2pH:Ѳ6תi-e_ObUGLh:&&V7\{crH.z6~om7/lZ-~Aant9g{.*]^|M 8+]>۰Y; vo%:m`Ǜ?şթZ%%=5lȐpݥ7ܯeˊ5o^z 3CF |MS=g袉袉pIҵV<{?~$| ^f[L_o_oX}_lM*..VӲ/ֲjzho;tI=pѿYw7-~r>H3NfqZDEYt.O7װ$9tUϿI9\Y1gBWϻ\6hY*9_ueSu]=L:wwꘔ<;}HfIC\l3z~[%Ok╷cxJCBF1\xmriitYlRiuRsɮD>\/=TC0_^[]]wYKn eݺŨ[][;w>8?aLIQ~~;ci$Y$YƎuOk_ɮ+y9M8Zڪ-;]s~1zz@}vkmRU>&V{Ojedn/kשן_W քӼ^O?񐮼68\onwi?nSnΓ7>ǹ񶻔9|O7<}z/5`Ј&Q>Y;h"]29Rçj>**3'vZg{i NvQ a2Gw nǟnx]RH:$逤}nuˏԭW%FAY9ڲHѭkHR8id!&4W4[I=cR>ߴEߤ\I棶~X4+H%tRlכCڼ\˖SNNZOﬗ_i aPgtk4 ^G:s42ٗmzfmy;T]SoTZq G$A(A}VwC/WS~1mxc,z+H8Fkt ^p8 2|Mt~((\ GX'hњ5ݬS;+##N)?R:ک< I"h 5smh?kj7Xf|V=b'+OOII͜9sҔM}n@\I/_n$PW^nl&]RGS3mBF |Moe7fI<:GDՁg=rzuG"h 6g&Qk>+gn@\fnLK~}Djgn@\1:Z~3E1÷YuϺºނ16 tkڌKHliL |Tʱg@[#i$9xh6[Ўeu  tk6n>]U}v5[YcF^ₐe J>PڮO@#/\wۚfM&3c4]\Z)=-eiI f?_.}%rHҒ%K|n…^? Qό& ?.҂>_sTF)6A gV՚ВN?CeivO$Z&Io:`L\>OU01 i8s4-yn{w)%bbcUUvƘqӵ&V^^nu 0&_M#(dIRS;kРTYBs~ g?O@zΕn3D&]@9[c륦v$UVV fQg\ m୅(HLt & h fЅP`L\3{pZHe vCha宇d2L8;Vqe9Mq0ZAXZZ{Yll*+Cmiγc{!v!b|& h ;Ţ+W6X>s CS1qmѭ@et4IQbbbЎO?59rӛ}@111ڱcL[#M™]S{6:e h΀VZZ悙|%IRaaUXXh:bD86A g[\S{ f>_ᬺZ۶mSEEa7:&9a kvmI fm?_͛e>mwWhڮ,l6!k&kp5fƌ˾N-fYcFI>o_~x_[0olْ%Kc49!Q`Jv|)++SjjJKK-d2cdt6Z]1Z9gUe.|IMMmպ:pm"0an#)sİ}F fF;_JKK[¥匮S& ÙtmLF=_Z%It6|m }}/ [(xC)k;붆?GDZϗ,z/]M 0(h:pm3 g@8p  @8 ,YJzO3#3YIY(8Ycp  @8Y0 $Byuתͮ7Ú1aUj-Y,X@8Юѭ -g)=oNfI&IfYfS_$2epF0g`~8xcdXZݗ?"9 rR p h3@˄tl-XE,@ƌV֘| "p  @8pO|vpJR&efC/ϛwl6ѥ3-_xzLC +/%T΂Չ/ɧr4l`ݠ2.2d~bbbRj>ߴE͙Y9{nݲ%]O{sW+>>/my:xPl6Y,Iҝٵ7VjiylݚrDM4e++61rYR:u҇~(?TJNM#Gu}n뒋/yYz5WW-SLL$)g_w 1VΜ?YڏݓO=&\A#ꆛjIү/ I݂1xtEmY.҄[tLO uj/&hȳ4k=ϧ*koMc>_Q5{Bm۾Cd[}~$wܫu_7X;tU,,ڭo5WdowoԹ6%I_lZت#5ߪ?We ?u DL8sOS&OڵkvZMTEEEB_yc :uΝ0^_~{Mfk/)>>^o=ꛒNɒsƏ˦Amj5rVS**j5ZK/ƍ_h:xPoIy _VCg6n$ %]t/˦iK,KJJZyO)etvzGշ)2L껹r>rDW_wvke/ڦ:Iv^|%7L'IsOk>H%ޭ~jfL27կhS]u-?.KUZY}O͛ۯS.qY s->{Kѷ+G>o)Z%uzaREGGJK//>_; T\RY3>=ź_kHܽG*ڽG)RӮu-xi峫]\6mRTzZr>.٬WPeu Dd8k,&IRJNcǎiܱ:%^'$s]Z>ԾW\Zo݌~}%I$ՎR2tL=\?mӨΫ^6ߘ*ΚuzUTTS[~Իy/!$III껹r$$Wki޽3Ùg@Z̜w萠#G=wc}k@~JOKT{nlVގJSbi禩nv{D}>{T)>\y%_SOCK u嵲r8|^IoߡG*.x˙{@s֙djUfb6׻͗:":oro:tHݨW_~Mߨ>{iOqmߡ/7| RjjgesQZjz}YfM2RJS˵M>uzru[{ RZZg /2t|ǭ>ߒvW8ֻ%tԭkޣ)ӯԨoϺlƥ0fo\g9Z;&iOq_NZaS'쌑 fN\|V,}\geBtF=zL/%$ek,}Oz4贁zrC:}->o\={t7[W3iWFm1r9gu'w?ЀtI=|Z%t͹稰H>uNjj8| w/UZZ_Vanuܢ+W zrу}d6[4eP2:‰!IIcFWk^N&N$-Wyy]g[6\9GDuop9_<\Q1 kʗ?y7q!6/vjƶm6jw nǟnx]RH:$逤}nuˏԭW%Fn/|߃?oؤ5s{3Fz߹z5JHHqY LsW̤"TjCFr g3 g@8p  И(myzdbƅ ѯO۸ykY̞8s!# #~Tk\h[R_|_˲WIDAThTkvPmvVVn$]ze9VhczA7F:w9zYjjRSS<F#G{y3L^kkVYYY{kI] fuXWuJ}k\z[1'3T `M6iӦMo/`H( V'][lі-[tǟnoӾ^xq[x$iǎ\KW7(̱Z1C9Wy]tSMْfْNVk@އk*@8#I{n`V45 }[K͐$*{P/@؄3{B[6mT;/(,ZͿjmٲE4lذ6ustJ-~LYgU}ˢŏ)!33tSM8_;y2מ{]seWk5PuB-+k, <s<7w,Mf78FM%"\-:~ϙctt~DF}+Ib˹ 3#4g6uF9@`~sRzh2Nj rC*9OGfIq 'I}"C?!CY2nWݮ]y0xò\3QMrjvnԧB۔8䌰, @@T9)]dqM!HIɩ˰- @@fjr<,{ –QE8ؐf8F- 99NZsU^Q#SNzgp)렗rWT(o{**uW&?bFv_m۾uOtN# 8r**䓵{O~G 8 p'%o~ f^-C2d2d6o$FIii*(9,p}^rWu33h7u}՗:c(ݻO55ծp~VLL+g4?GʕYt`~*>>^_N<u@8C]\jfMd%'Fv!\frHQf>l;ޏhkL՞Yf%R9R ٌph& ye9Rnw=Mttd6t埖3맧JrVEY*)))$nWrrG%''RX. *صK:uRuUum7F]`fYUU Z]eƤbhJQGՁTVW;kCہe2Աc(*JG#YZ+Sz>O;>|I7/6.-4j(Ŭa0ёG;wjԨ̀3ΝSd2}vWZzgSTT Tq:v쨪*TFF?Cԫ[mp\A=ͺ\WPsh\w+5= gSǒ'[k\M8:WIIt\5v}1.*(Cuرyr\:uJɧCqq}dvܩ U>UPPX^.#9+}oZjT9+4wU+ZdI?} ghxEEE!/?nӏd6d2d6e65L2-3ޫ]O_l٢ÆXbef1ǫP2eU^^$}dԯ__Ծ}U^Q>(99Y6MՊY[ck(--mt;d2z@H|f׹[Vu H9:wlSzC}T՞Gfnfӛ|X;.PA.uEzioNVrr˵ŝT]UΩ5dC+^[eO+f&66F1JNy(WRRN>$8x@EEEud;w$I} k!gv T7FF茞6Z/=׍[r=*ڽGo]ײΝKn~!;TkӊruLJTǤD%UuU$CxDNX83{7ݜ3þ,sgik\>Hݻ1 }fNF׬9EO=DX-1|dXd?ln3\8\ZZ}؇|9ULmpYr`(qqqZb/c#K~ gǨ2d8Cx1ZP3ZYcFUSRRܪfZl2nn N8܂{Z."RW3L<*m6d@wHRiN%t9Ia[.څl lj 'j9f|72sޫmI P|b_8tH{~V~¶\3@] C7^yCӺk^MYg|*ZbRN=@E?hatdR\‰:%&%mBּgk;0LؾZN*6@a*xյgu'h;Z~(p6a4R Dz^m\(=̜vz-j9Kj @3`hhYYD}%BY @8p-nͫH8P:w?F M8r(Ǡ pHFtkqHFƺ2ҭtk j+# Zҕn`-LFC^6n"ZK2ҭ" .>&5X ŅT/4&^*{32uhZl!\H$RmGK]`')A҉$%KCㄺ78uUtHtLґItXRu׸&wx=ہ ` _v gT呗5r=g}$u;vZR0F3H gμTUv i5kǨF|_7չ3gAg"59ecn=W-5jb=-ŨaF @; g==Zwm(DQu/<ÓmMt]k9}4sٍX]0.Un59 qp!hᬱAA^$9wnv;3x-9[<[g")y9{jo5zmFΝ#UՅ2fMui$hL}*GwklrFPL&'9:& l}2ȜO# eͅ/<ўyL _&#pF—ZLM^[K @$:ۗ/M>.ԂWh"dC]@D,_iʉ-IIENDB`usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/license.page0000644000373100047300000000356112500144151023213 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Legal information. License

This work is distributed under a CreativeCommons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 Unported license.

You are free:

<em>To share</em>

To copy, distribute and transmit the work.

 <em>To remix</em>

To adapt the work.

Under the following conditions:

<em>Attribution</em>

You must attribute the work in the manner specified by the author or licensor (but not in any way that suggests that they endorse you or your use of the work).

<em>Share Alike</em>

If you alter, transform, or build upon this work, you may distribute the resulting work only under the same, similar or a compatible license.

For the full text of the license, see the CreativeCommons website, or read the full Commons Deed.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/annotations-disabled.page0000644000373100047300000000144612500144153025675 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Annotations can only be added to PDF files. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Can't add annotations?

Annotations can only be added to PDF files. If your file is of a format other than PDF, the option to add annotations will be greyed out (disabled).

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/duplex-8pages.page0000644000373100047300000000247312500144152024261 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 08-Page Booklet Print an 8 page booklet. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 8-page booklet

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, choose Pages.

Type the numbers of the pages in this order: 8, 1, 2, 7, 6, 3, 4, 5

Choose the Page Setup tab.

Under Layout, in the Two-side menu, select Short Edge (Flip).

In the Pages per side option, select 2.

In the Page ordering menu, select Left to right.

Click Print.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/duplex-15pages.page0000644000373100047300000000213012500144153024326 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Print a 15 page booklet. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 15-page booklet

It is easier to print a 16-page booklet. You may wish to add a blank page to your PDF document to make it 16-pages. To do so, you can:

Create a blank PDF using LibreOffice Writer.

Merge the blank page with your PDF document using PDF-Shuffler placing the blank page at the end.

Follow the steps for printing a 16-page booklet.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/print-select.page0000644000373100047300000000227512500144152024204 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Print only specific pages, or only a range of pages. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Only printing certain pages

To only print certain pages from the document:

Click FilePrint

In the General tab in the Print window choose Pages from the Range section.

Type the numbers of the pages you want to print in the textbox, separated by commas. Use a dash to denote a range of pages.

For example, if you enter "1,3,5-7,9" in the Pages textbox, pages 1,3,5,6,7 and 9 will be printed.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/duplex-6pages.page0000644000373100047300000000473212500144152024257 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 06-Page Booklet Print a 6 page booklet. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 6-page booklet

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, select Pages.

Type the numbers of the pages in this order: 6, 3, 4, 5, 2

Choose the Page Setup tab.

Under Layout, in the Two-side menu, select Short Edge (Flip).

In the Pages per side option, select 2.

In the Page ordering menu, select Left to right.

Click Print.

Once the pages have printed, take the paper with page 2 on it, place it back in the printer, taking care to orient it correctly (page 1 will be printed on the other side).

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range select the Pages option and type: 1

Choose the Page Setup tab.

In the Page ordering menu, select Right to left.

Click Print.

It is easier to print a 8-page booklet. You may wish to add 2 blank pages to your PDF document to make it 8-pages. To do so, you can:

Create a blank PDF document 2-pages long using LibreOffice Writer.

Merge the blank PDF with your PDF document using PDF-Shuffler placing the blank pages at the end.

Follow the steps for printing a 8-page booklet.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/introduction.page0000644000373100047300000000127512500144152024313 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Introduction to the Evince Document Viewer. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Introduccion

Evince is a document viewer. See for a list of file types you can view.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/print-2sided.page0000644000373100047300000000212612500144152024072 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Printing two-sided and multi-page per sheet. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Two-sided and multiple pages per side layout for printing

You can print on both sides of each sheet of paper:

Click FilePrint.

Go to the Page Setup tab of the Print window and choose an option from the Two-sided drop-down list.

You can print more than one page of the document per side of paper too. Use the Pages per side option to do this.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/singlesided-npages.page0000644000373100047300000000505512500144152025337 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Print a booklet over 20 pages. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 n-page booklet

n is a multiple of 4.

If the number of pages in your PDF document is not a multiple of 4, you should add the appropriate number of blank pages (1, 2 or 3) to make it a multiple of 4. To do so, you can:

Create a blank PDF using LibreOffice Writer.

Merge the blank pages with your PDF document using PDF-Shuffler placing the blank pages at the end.

To print:

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, choose Pages.

Type the numbers of the pages in this order: n, 1, 2, n-1, n-2, 3, 4, n-3, n-4, 5, 6, n-5, n-6, 7, 8, n-7, n-8, 9, 10, n-9, n-10, 11, 12, n-11... ...until you have typed n-number of pages.

Choose the Page Setup tab.

Under Layout, in the Two-side menu, select One Sided.

In the Pages per side menu, select 2.

In the Page ordering menu, select Left to right.

In the Only print menu, select Odd sheets.

Click Print.

When all the pages have printed, flip the pages over and place them back in the printer.

Click FilePrint.

Choose the Page Setup tab.

In the Only print menu, select Even sheets.

Click Print.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/documentation.page0000644000373100047300000000223312500144153024437 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Contact the Documentation Team. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Help write documentation

The Document Viewer documentation is maintained by a volunteer community. You are welcome to participate.

To contribute to the Documentation Project, feel free to get in touch with us using irc, or via our mailing list.

Our wiki page contains useful information.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/singlesided-17-20pages.page0000644000373100047300000000455412500144152025553 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Print a 17, 18, 19 or 20 page booklet. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 17-page to 20-page booklet

If you have a 17, 18 or 19 page PDF document you should add the appropriate number of blank pages to make it 20-pages. To do so, you can:

Create a blank PDF using LibreOffice Writer.

Merge the blank pages with your PDF document using PDF-Shuffler placing the blank pages at the end.

To print:

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, choose Pages.

Type the numbers of the pages in this order: 20, 1, 2, 19, 18, 3, 4, 17, 16, 5, 6, 15, 14, 7, 8, 13, 12, 9, 10, 11

Choose the Page Setup tab.

Under Layout, in the Two-side menu, select One Sided.

In the Pages per side menu, select 2.

In the Page ordering menu, select Left to right.

In the Only print menu, select Odd sheets.

Click Print.

When all the pages have printed, flip the pages over and place them back in the printer.

Click FilePrint.

Choose the Page Setup tab.

In the Only print menu, select Even sheets.

Click Print.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/password.page0000644000373100047300000000212012500144153023423 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Handling password protected PDFs. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Password-protected documents

If you try to open a PDF document that is protected with a password, a window will appear asking you to enter the document password. Enter the password and click Open Document.

There are two types of passwords:

The user password is needed to view the document.

The master password is required to print the document as well as view it.

These passwords are set by the person who created the document.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/convertSVG.page0000644000373100047300000000251312500144152023626 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 You can convert a document to SVG by "printing" it to a file. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Converting a document to SVG

You can convert documents of the following format types to SVG files:

Portable Document Format (.pdf)

This works by opening the file in Document Viewer and "printing" the document as an SVG file.

Click FilePrint and go to the General tab.

Select Print to File and choose SVG as the Output format.

Choose a name and folder in which to save the file, then click Print. The SVG file will be saved in the folder you chose.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/opening.page0000644000373100047300000000320712500144152023226 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to open a document. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Opening a document

You can open a document using any one of the following ways:

Double-click on the file icon in the File Manager.

Double clicking opens PDF, PostScript, .djvu, .dvi and Comic Book Archive files in the Document Viewer by default.

Right-click on a file icon in the File Manager and click Open WithDocument Viewer.

If a Document View window is already open you can:

drag a file icon into the window from the File Manager. The new file will open in a new window (provided the file is of a file type supported by Document Viewer).

choose FileOpen from the Menubar. In the Open Document dialog box, choose the file you wish to open, and click Open. The file will open in a new window.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/editing.page0000644000373100047300000000177612500144152023223 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 You can't use the document viewer to edit files. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Can I edit documents in the document viewer?

The document viewer can't be used to make changes to documents. You need to use the appropriate editing application for the type of file you want to change.

PDF and PostScript (.ps) files are not usually intended to be edited, but PDF editing software is available. Try pdfedit, for example.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/synctex-support.page0000644000373100047300000000210312500144153024771 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to add support for SyncTeX. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Set-up SyncTeX

The following packages need to be installed in order to add support for SyncTeX:

texlive-extra-utils

gedit-plugins

In gedit, enable the SyncTeX Plugin:

Click EditPreferencesPlugins tab.

Check SyncTeX.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/synctex-editors.page0000644000373100047300000000340412500144153024733 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Which editor can you use to edit your TEX file? Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Supported editors
<app>gedit</app>

Forward Search (from gedit to the document viewer) and Backward search (from the document viewer to gedit) are both supported.

Vim-latex

The gedit plugin contains a python script (evince_dbus.py) that can be used to get SyncTeX working with Vim. In order to use vim-latex together with the document viewer you need to follow the next steps:

Copy the evince_dbus.py to some directory in your path and give it +x permissions.

Modify your ~/.vimrc file and add the following lines.

let g:Tex_ViewRule_pdf = 'evince_dbus.py' let g:Tex_DefaultTargetFormat = 'pdf' let g:Tex_CompileRule_pdf = 'pdflatex --synctex=1 -interaction=nonstopmode $*'

Now you can use Forward search from vim-latex by typing \ls. Backward search is not yet supported.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/bookmarks.page0000644000373100047300000000134512500144152023560 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 You can use annotations like bookmarks. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Bookmarks

The document viewer does not have a bookmark system. However, you can use annotations like bookmarks.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/duplex-12pages.page0000644000373100047300000000243512500144152024332 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Print a 12 page booklet. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 12-page booklet

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, choose Pages.

Type the numbers of the pages in this order: 12, 1, 2, 11, 10, 3, 4, 9, 8, 5, 6, 7

Choose the Page Setup tab.

Under Layout, in the Two-side option, select Short Edge (Flip).

In the Pages per side option, select 2.

In the Page ordering menu, select Left to right.

Click Print.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/convertPostScript.page0000644000373100047300000000270512500144152025304 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 You can convert a document to PostScript. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Converting a document to PostScript

You can convert documents of the following format types to PostScript files:

DjVu (.djvu, .djv)

Portable Document Format (.pdf)

Tagged Image File Format (.tiff, .tif)

This works by opening the file in Document Viewer and "printing" the document as a PostScript file.

Click FilePrint and go to the General tab.

Select Print to File and choose PostScript as the Output format.

Choose a name and folder in which to save the file, then click Print. The PostScript file will be saved in the folder you chose.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/synctex-beamer.page0000644000373100047300000000371712500144152024523 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using SyncTeX with the LaTeX Beamer class. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Beamer with SyncTeX

Beamer is a LaTeX class for creating slides for presentations.

You can perform forward and backward search in a Beamer-LaTeX presentation in a similar fashion to searching through other TeX files compiled with SyncTeX. However the search brings you to the corresponding frame (slide), not necessarily the associated line of text. This difference is outlined in detail below.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/develop.page0000644000373100047300000000214512500144152023225 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Improve the Document Viewer. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Help develop

The Document Viewer is developed and maintained by a volunteer community. You are welcome to participate.

If you would like to help develop the Document Viewer, you can get in touch with the developers using irc, or via our mailing list.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/convertpdf.page0000644000373100047300000000351512500144153023744 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 You can convert a document to PDF by "printing" it to a file. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Converting a document to PDF

You can convert documents of the following format types into PDF format:

Device Independent file format (.dvi)

PostScript (.ps)

This works by opening the file in Document Viewer and "printing" the document as a PDF file.

Click FilePrint and go to the General tab.

Select Print to File and choose PDF as the Output format.

Choose a name and folder in which to save the file, then click Print. The PDF will be saved in the folder you chose.

You can't select text in PostScript or .dvi files, but you usually can do this in PDF files. Converting .dvi or PostScript files to PDF will not make the text selectable. This is because the text itself isn't stored in the file (it's just an image of what the text looks like), so there is no way to recover it and put it in the PDF. You can use Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software to extract the text from files if you need to.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/synctex-search.page0000644000373100047300000000476712500144152024543 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Flip between the document viewer and gedit. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Search with SyncTeX

After you compile your TeX file with SyncTeX, you will be able to search. SyncTeX even supports forward and backward search from an included file.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/noprint.page0000644000373100047300000000510512500144152023257 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 The author may have put printing restrictions on the document. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 I can't print a document
Possible reasons for printing failure

A document might not print because of:

Printer problems or,

PDF printing restrictions.
Printer problems

There are many reasons why your printer might not be working. For example, it could be out of paper or ink, or unplugged or damaged.

To check if your printer is printing correctly:

Click your name on the topbar and select System Settings.

Click on your printer in the list.

Click on Print Test Page. A page should be sent to your printer.

If this fails, see Printing help. You may also need to see your printer's manual to see what else you can do.

PDF printing restrictions

Some PDF documents have a setting which prevents you from printing them. Authors can set this printing restriction when they write a document. The document viewer overrides this restriction by default, but you may want to check that it hasn't been disabled:

Press AltF2 to open the Run Application window.

Type dconf-editor into the text box and click Run. The Configuration Editor will open.

Browse to /org/gnome/evince using the side pane.

Make sure that the override_restrictions option is checked.

Go back to the Document Viewer and try to print the document again.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/duplex-4pages.page0000644000373100047300000000247512500144153024260 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 04-Page Booklet Print a 4 page booklet. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 4-page booklet

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, choose Pages.

Type the numbers of the pages in this order: 4, 1, 2, 3

Choose the Page Setup tab.

Under Layout, in the Two-side menu, select Short Edge (Flip).

In the Pages per side option, select 2.

In the Page ordering menu, select Left to right.

Click Print.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/openerror.page0000644000373100047300000000153112500144153023601 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Error When Opening A File. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Why can't I open a file?

If you try to open a document of a format that the document viewer does not recognize, you will get an "Unable to open document" error message. Click Close to return to the Document Viewer window.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000102712500144153022536 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 United States License.

As a special exception, the copyright holders give you permission to copy, modify, and distribute the example code contained in this document under the terms of your choosing, without restriction.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/default-settings.page0000644000373100047300000000236312500144153025054 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Save current settings as default for new documents. Sindhu S sindhus@live.in

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Change default settings

When a document is opened for the first time, default settings, such as zoom and page view preferences, are applied. Any changes you make to these settings are saved for the document.

You can save the settings which you are currently using as default for all new documents by selecting Edit Save Current Settings as Default or press CtrlT.

The new default settings do not override settings of previously opened documents, they are applied only to documents opened for the first time.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/forms.page0000644000373100047300000000243312500144152022715 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Working with fillable forms. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Forms

When filling out an interactive form, you can navigate from field to field by clicking on a field with your mouse. When you are finished filling out a text field, press Enter.

You can make a selection in a scrollable list box by clicking on the list box and scrolling to your choice with your mouse.

There may be some parts of a form that you may need to fill out by hand after you print the form. For example, you might have to circle certain things, or sign the form in one or more places. If you wish to do this electronically, you may want to try Xournal.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/duplex-11pages.page0000644000373100047300000000435312500144152024332 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Print a 11 page booklet. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 11-page booklet

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, choose Pages.

Type the numbers of the pages in this order: 11, 2, 1

Choose the Page Setup tab.

Under Layout, in the Two-side menu, select Short Edge (Flip).

In the Pages per side option, select 2.

In the Page ordering menu, select Right to left.

Click Print.

Click FilePrint again.

Choose the General tab.

Type the numbers of the remaining pages in this order: 10, 3, 4, 9, 8, 5, 6, 7

Choose the Page Setup tab.

In the Page ordering menu, select Left to right.

Click Print.

It is easier to print a 12-page booklet. You may wish to add a blank page to your PDF document to make it 12-pages. To do so, you can:

Create a blank PDF document using LibreOffice Writer.

Merge the blank PDF with your PDF document using PDF-Shuffler placing the blank page at the end.

Follow the steps for printing a 12-page booklet.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/presentations.page0000644000373100047300000000355112500144153024470 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to play presentations. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Presentations
Starting a presentation

To start a presentation:

Open a file

Click ViewPresentation (or press F5).

The presentation will be displayed full screen.

Moving through a presentation

Use the spacebar, →, ↓, or left mouse click to go to the next slide.

Use the ←, ↑ or right mouse click to go to the previous slide.

You can also use the scroll wheel to move back and forth through the presentation.

Use Esc to exit the presentation.

Supported presentation file formats

The following file formats can be used for presentations:

Comic Book Archive (.cbr and .cbz)

Device Independent file format (.dvi)

DjVu (.djvu, .djv)

OpenOffice Presentation (.odp)

Portable Document Format (.pdf)

PostScript (.ps)
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/duplex-9pages.page0000644000373100047300000000665512500144152024270 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 09-Page Booklet Print a 9 page booklet. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 9-page booklet

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, select Pages and type: 1

Choose the Page Setup tab.

Under Layout, in the Two-side option, select Short Edge (Flip).

In the Pages per side option, select 2.

In the Page ordering menu, select Right to left.

Click Print.

Once the page has printed, take the paper and place it back in the printer, taking care to orient it correctly (page 2 will be printed on the other side).

Click FilePrint again and choose the General tab.

Under Range, select Pages and type: 2

Choose the Page Setup tab and in the Page ordering menu, select Left to right.

Click Print.

Click FilePrint again.

In the General tab enter 3 in the Pages selection.

In the Page Setup tab, set the Page ordering to Right to left.

Click Print.

Once page 3 has printed, place the paper back in the printer taking care to orient it correctly (pages 4 and 9 will be printed on the other side).

Click FilePrint.

In the General tab enter pages 4,9 in the Pages selection.

In the Page Setup tab set Page ordering to Left to right.

Click Print.

Click FilePrint.

Enter pages 8, 5, 6, 7 in the Pages selection menu and set Page ordering to Left to right.

Click Print.

It is easier to print a 12-page booklet. You may wish to add 3 blank pages to your PDF document to make it 12-pages. To do so, you can:

Create a blank PDF document 3-pages long using LibreOffice Writer.

Merge the blank PDF with your PDF document using PDF-Shuffler placing the blank pages at the end.

Follow the steps for printing a 12-page booklet.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/invert-colors.page0000644000373100047300000000157212500144151024377 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Inverting the colors can make it easier to read some text. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Invert colors on a page

To swap black for white, white for black, and so on, click ViewInverted Colors.

Doing this can make it easier to read text, especially in the case of certain kinds of visual impairment.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/synctex-compile.page0000644000373100047300000000174012500144153024713 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to compile your TeX document with SyncTeX Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Compile TeX with SyncTeX

Adding the line \synctex=1 in the preamble of your TeX file will trigger synchronization with SyncTeX.

\documentclass{article} \synctex=1 \usepackage{fullpage} \begin{document} ... \end{document}

Alternatively, you can run the pdflatex command with the -synctex=1 option:

pdflatex -synctex=1 yourFile.tex usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/annotations-save.page0000644000373100047300000000237012500144152025060 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to save your annotations. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Save a copy of an annotated PDF

To save a copy of your annotated PDF for future viewing using the document viewer or any other PDF viewer that supports annotations:

FileSave a copy

Choose a name and folder in which to save the file, then click Save. The PDF will be saved in the folder you chose.

Annotations are added according to the PDF specification. Therefore, most PDF readers should be able to read them. The Okular document viewer does not support them. Adobe Reader is known to work.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/bug-filing.page0000644000373100047300000000425212500144153023614 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How and where to report problems. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 File a bug against the <app>document viewer</app>

The document viewer is maintained by a volunteer community. You are welcome to participate. If you notice a problem you can file a bug report. To file a bug, go to .

This is a bug tracking system where users and developers can file details about bugs, crashes and request enhancements.

To participate you need an account which will give you the ability to gain access, file bugs, and make comments. Also, you need to register so you can receive updates by e-mail about the status of your bug. If you don't already have an account, just click on the New Account link to create one.

Once you have an account, log in, click on File a BugCoreevince. Before reporting a bug, please read the bug writing guidelines, and please browse for the bug to see if it already exists.

To file your bug, choose the component in the Component menu. If you are not sure which component your bug pertains to, choose general.

If you are requesting a new feature, choose enhancement in the Severity menu. Fill in the Summary and Description sections and click Commit.

Your report will be given an ID number, and its status will be updated as it is being dealt with.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/duplex-16pages.page0000644000373100047300000000255312500144152024337 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Print a 16 page booklet. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 16-page booklet

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, choose Pages.

Type the numbers of the pages in this order: 16, 1, 2, 15, 14, 3, 4, 13, 12, 5, 6, 11, 10, 7, 8, 9

Choose the Page Setup tab.

Under Layout, in the Two-side menu, select Short Edge (Flip).

In the Pages per side option, select 2.

In the Page ordering menu, select Left to right.

Click Print.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/duplex-3pages.page0000644000373100047300000000350512500144153024252 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 03-Page Booklet Print a 3 page booklet. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 3-page booklet

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, choose Pages. Type the numbers of the pages in this order: 3, 2, 1

Choose the Page Setup tab.

Under Layout, in the Two-side option, select Short Edge (Flip).

In the Pages per side option, select 2.

In the Page ordering menu, select Right to left.

Click Print.

It is easier to print a 4-page booklet. You may wish to add a blank page to your PDF document to make it 4-pages. To do so, you can:

Create a blank PDF using LibreOffice Writer.

Merge the blank page with your PDF document using PDF-Shuffler placing the blank page at the end.

Follow the steps for printing a 4-page booklet.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/forms-saving.page0000644000373100047300000000354212500144153024205 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Make sure you save the form, otherwise all of the information you entered will be lost. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Saving a form

After you have filled it out, you may wish to save your form in one of two ways:

To save a copy that can be edited in the future (form remains interactive):

FileSave a copy

Choose a name and folder to save the file in, then click Save. The PDF will be saved in the folder you chose.

To save a copy that can no longer be edited (for example, to e-mail the form or submit it on-line):

Click FilePrint and go to the General tab.

Select Print to File and choose PDF as the Output format.

Choose a name and folder to save the file in, then click Print. The PDF will be saved in the folder you chose.

Copies of encrypted files can't be saved or printed.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/duplex-7pages.page0000644000373100047300000000442112500144151024252 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 07-Page Booklet Print a 7 page booklet. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 7-page booklet

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, choose Pages.

Type the numbers of the pages in this order: 7, 2, 1

Choose the Page Setup tab.

Under Layout, in the Two-side option, select Short Edge (Flip).

In the Pages per side option, select 2.

In the Page ordering menu, select Right to left.

Click Print.

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Type the numbers of the remaining pages in this order: 6, 3, 4, 5

Choose the Page Setup tab.

In the Page ordering menu, change the selection to Left to right.

Click Print.

It is easier to print a 8-page booklet. You may wish to add a blank page to your PDF document to make it 8-pages. To do so, you can:

Create a blank PDF document using LibreOffice Writer.

Merge the blank PDF with your PDF document using PDF-Shuffler placing the blank page at the end.

Follow the steps for printing a 8-page booklet.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/shortcuts.page0000644000373100047300000001524112500144152023626 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 See a list of all shortcuts, and learn how to create your own custom shortcuts. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Keyboard shortcuts
Default shortcuts
Opening, closing, saving and printing

Open a document.

CtrlO

Open a copy of the current document.

CtrlN

Save a copy of the current document with a new file name.

CtrlS

Print the current document.

CtrlP

Close the current document window.

CtrlW

Reload the document (effectively closes and re-opens the document).

CtrlR
Moving around the document

Move up/down a page.

Arrow keys

Move up/down a page several lines at a time.

Page Up / Page Down

Go to the previous/next page.

CtrlPage Up / CtrlPage Down

Go to the beginning of a page (beginning of the document if View Continuous is selected).

Home

Go to the end of a page (end of the document if ViewContinuous is selected).

End

Go to the beginning of the document.

CtrlHome

Go to the end of the document.

CtrlEnd
Selecting and copying text

Copy highlighted text.

CtrlC

Select all the text in a document.

CtrlA
Finding text

Show the toolbar that lets you search for words in the document. The search box is automatically highlighted when you press this, and the search will start as soon as you type some text.

CtrlF

Go to the next search result.

CtrlG

Go to the previous search result.

CtrlShiftG
Rotating and zooming

Rotate the pages 90 degrees counter-clockwise.

CtrlLeft arrow

Rotate the pages 90 degrees clockwise.

CtrlRight arrow

Zoom in.

Ctrl+

Zoom out.

Ctrl-
Create your own custom shortcuts

Enable the /desktop/gnome/interface/can_change_accels flag in gconf:

Press AltF2. The Run Application dialogue opens.

In the textbox, type 'gconf-editor'.

In the Configuration Editor select desktopgnomeinterface.

Check the value box for can_change_accels in the right side of the window.

You can add/change the shortcut as follows:

Open the document viewer.

Hover the pointer over the menu item you want to change/create the shortcut for.

Enter the shortcut you want on the keyboard, e.g. CtrlShiftT.

Close the document viewer.

Repeat steps 1-3.

Uncheck the value box for can_change_accels in the right side of the window.

The next time the document viewer launches, your custom shortcut key will be preserved.

Note that this also works for many other Gnome applications as well.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/translate.page0000644000373100047300000000331212500144151023560 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Localize the Document Viewer. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Help translate

The Document Viewer user interface and documentation is being translated by a world-wide volunteer community. You are welcome to participate.

There are many languages for which translations are still needed.

To start translating you will need to create an account and join the translation team for your language. This will give you the ability to upload new translations.

You can chat with GNOME translators using irc. People on the channel are located worldwide, so you may not get an immediate response as a result of timezone differences.

Alternatively, you can contact the Internationalization Team using their mailing list.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/print-order.page0000644000373100047300000000334012500144152024032 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the Collate and Reverse options to make pages print in order. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Getting copies to print in the correct order
Reverse

Printers usually print the first page first, and the last page last, so the pages end up in reverse order when you pick them up.

To reverse the order:

FilePrint

In the General tab of the Print window under Copies, check Reverse. The last page will be printed first, and so on.
Collate

If you are printing more than one copy of the document, the print outs will be grouped by page number by default. (e.g. The copies of page one come out, then the copies of page two, etc.) Collating will make each copy come out with its pages grouped together.

To collate:

Click FilePrint

In the General tab of the Print window under Copies check Collate.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/singlesided-13-16pages.page0000644000373100047300000000454012500144152025547 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Print a 13, 14, 15 or 16 page booklet. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 13-page to 16-page booklet

If you have a 13, 14 or 15 page PDF document you should add the appropriate number of blank pages to make it 16-pages. To do so, you can:

Create a blank PDF using LibreOffice Writer.

Merge the blank pages with your PDF document using PDF-Shuffler placing the blank pages at the end.

To print:

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, choose Pages.

Type the numbers of the pages in this order: 16, 1, 2, 15, 14, 3, 4, 13, 12, 5, 6, 11, 10, 7, 8, 9

Choose the Page Setup tab.

Under Layout, in the Two-side menu, select One Sided.

In the Pages per side menu, select 2.

In the Page ordering menu, select Left to right.

In the Only print menu, select Odd sheets.

Click Print.

When all the pages have printed, flip the pages over and place them back in the printer.

Click FilePrint.

Choose the Page Setup tab.

In the Only print menu, select Even sheets.

Click Print.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/print-differentsize.page0000644000373100047300000000262212500144152025562 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Printing a document on paper of a different size, shape or orientation. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Changing the paper size when printing

If you want to change the paper size of your document (for example, print a US Letter-sized PDF on A4 paper), you can change the printing format for the document.

Click FilePrint

Select the Page Setup tab.

Under the Paper column, choose your Paper size from the dropdown list.

Click Print and your document should print.

You can also use the Orientation menu to choose a different orientation:

Portrait

Landscape

Reverse portrait

Reverse landscape

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/duplex-10pages.page0000644000373100047300000000471012500144152024326 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Print a 10 page booklet. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 10-page booklet

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, select Pages.

Type the numbers of the pages in this order: 10, 3, 4, 9, 8, 5, 6, 7, 2

Choose the Page Setup tab.

Under Layout, in the Two-side option, select Short Edge (Flip).

In the Pages per side option, select 2.

In the Page ordering menu, select Left to right.

Click Print.

Once the pages have printed, take the paper with page 2 on it, place it back in the printer, taking care to orient it correctly (page 1 will be printed on the other side).

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range select the Pages option and type: 1

Choose the Page Setup tab.

In the Page ordering menu, select Right to left.

Click Print.

It is easier to print a 12-page booklet. You may wish to add 2 blank pages to your PDF document to make it 12-pages. To do so, you can:

Create a blank PDF document 2-pages long using LibreOffice Writer.

Merge the blank PDF with your PDF document using PDF-Shuffler placing the blank pages at the end.

Follow the steps for printing a 12-page booklet.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/singlesided-5-8pages.page0000644000373100047300000000447512500144153025421 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 05-Page or 4-Page Booklet Print a 5, 6, 7 or 8 page booklet. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 5-page to 8-page booklet

If you have a 5, 6 or 7 page PDF document you should add the appropriate number of blank pages to make it 8-pages. To do so, you can:

Create a blank PDF using LibreOffice Writer.

Merge the blank pages with your PDF document using PDF-Shuffler placing the blank pages at the end.

To print:

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, choose Pages.

Type the numbers of the pages in this order: 8, 1, 2, 7, 6, 3, 4, 5

Choose the Page Setup tab.

Under Layout, in the Two-side menu, select One Sided.

In the Pages per side menu, select 2.

In the Page ordering menu, select Left to right.

In the Only print menu, select Odd sheets.

Click Print.

When all the pages have printed, flip the pages over and place them back in the printer.

Click FilePrint.

Choose the Page Setup tab.

In the Only print menu, select Even sheets.

Click Print.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/textselection.page0000644000373100047300000000275312500144152024466 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 When you copy text, the text that is pasted might be different from what you had selected. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Why didn't the text I selected copy properly?

If you highlight and copy text from a document using the document viewer and then paste it into another application, the formatting may alter. It may also contain different characters than the original selection. This often happens when copying text from a PDF document with multiple columns.

This problem happens because of how some document formats handle text. The actual text in the document is stored differently from the way it is displayed. This may result in a copy that does not appear as expected.

Unfortunately, there is no real way of fixing this problem. Copying less text at a time, or copying the text into a text editor may minimise the problem. You can locate a text editor by clicking ActivitiesApplicationsAccessoriesgedit.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/duplex-14pages.page0000644000373100047300000000473112500144152024335 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Print a 14 page booklet. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 14-page booklet

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, select Pages.

Type the numbers of the pages in this order: 14, 3, 4, 13, 12, 5, 6, 11, 10, 7, 8, 9, 2

Choose the Page Setup tab.

Under Layout, in the Two-side option, select Short Edge (Flip).

In the Pages per side option, select 2.

In the Page ordering menu, select Left to right.

Click Print.

Once the pages have printed, take the paper with page 2 on it, place it back in the printer, taking care to orient it correctly (page 1 will be printed on the other side).

Click FilePrint again.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range select the Pages option and type: 1

Choose the Page Setup tab.

In the Page ordering menu, select Right to left.

Click Print.

It is easier to print a 16-page booklet. You may wish to add 2 blank pages to your PDF document to make it 16-pages. To do so, you can:

Create a blank PDF document 2-pages long using LibreOffice Writer.

Merge the blank PDF with your PDF document using PDF-Shuffler placing the blank pages at the end.

Follow the steps for printing a 16-page booklet.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/annotations.page0000644000373100047300000000432312500144153024125 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to create and customize annotations. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Adding annotations

An annotation is a note or comment added to a PDF document. You can add annotations using the document viewer.

When you open a file, you should have a side pane on the left side of the window. If you do not have a visible side pane, click ViewSide Pane or press F9.

At the top of this side pane, there is a drop-down menu with options like Thumbnails, Index and Annotations (some of which may be dimmed for some documents).

To create an annotation:

Select Annotations from the drop-down menu.

You should now see List and Add tabs under the drop-down menu.

Select the Add tab.

Click on the icon to add a text annotation.

Click on the spot in the document window you would like to add the annotion to. Your annotation window will open.

Type your text into the annotation window.

You can resize the note by clicking and holding the left mouse button on one of the bottom corners of the note, and moving it around.

Close the note by clicking on the x in the top corner of the note.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/formats.page0000644000373100047300000000311512500144153023241 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 PDF, PostScript and many others are. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Supported formats

The document viewer supports the following formats:

Comic Book Archive (.cbr and .cbz)

Device Independent file format (.dvi)

DjVu (.djvu, .djv)

OpenOffice Presentation (.odp)

Portable Document Format (.pdf)

PostScript (.ps)

Scalable Vector Graphics (.svg)

Tagged Image File Format (.tiff, .tif)

Other Image Files (.gif, .jpeg, .png)

In some Linux distributions, not all formats are supported by default, so you might not be able to view all the formats listed above.

Support for a format is called a backend. If you get the error "Unable to Open Document", you may wish to check whether the backend package for the format is installed.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/finding.page0000644000373100047300000000317112500144152023205 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Find a word or phrase in a document. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Finding text in a document

Click EditFind or press CtrlF or / to display a search box.

Type the word or phrase you want to look for and a search will start automatically.

The Find Previous and Find Next buttons let you skip from one search result to another.

To hide the search bar, click anywhere in the document.

If the word or phrase you searched is not present in the entire document, the message will say Not found. However, if it appears in the document at least once, the message will inform you of how many times the word you searched occur on each page. This is apparent if you skip from one result to another as described above or scroll through the document.

Only PDF documents are searchable. Some PDF documents are not searchable because their text is encoded in the document as an image.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/annotations-navigate.page0000644000373100047300000000241612500144153025722 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to navigate to annotations. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Annotation navigation

If you have created annotations on your document, you can use the List tab to display the list of all the annotations in the document. The list indicates the type, page number, author and date of the annotation.

To quickly navigate to the location of a particular annotation, click on the arrow to the left of the page number. You will see a list of annotations on that page. Click on the annotation you are interested in, and the document viewer will navigate to the location of the annotation in the document.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/singlesided-3-4pages.page0000644000373100047300000000441012500144152025377 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 03-Page or 4-Page Booklet Print a 3 or 4 page booklet. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 3-page or 4-page booklet

If you have a 3-Page PDF document you should add a blank page to make it 4-pages. To do so, you can:

Create a blank PDF using LibreOffice Writer.

Merge the blank page with your PDF document using PDF-Shuffler placing the blank page at the end.

To print:

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, choose Pages.

Type the numbers of the pages in this order: 4, 1, 2, 3

Choose the Page Setup tab.

Under Layout, in the Two-side menu, select One Sided.

In the Pages per side menu, select 2.

In the Page ordering menu, select Left to right.

In the Only print menu, select Odd sheets.

Click Print.

When all the pages have printed, flip the pages over and place them back in the printer.

Click FilePrint.

Choose the Page Setup tab.

In the Only print menu, select Even sheets.

Click Print.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/singlesided-9-12pages.page0000644000373100047300000000452512500144152025473 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 09-Page or 12-Page Booklet Print a 9, 10, 11 or 12 page booklet. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 9-page to 12-page booklet

If you have a 9, 10 or 11 page PDF document you should add the appropriate number of blank pages to make it 12-pages. To do so, you can:

Create a blank PDF using LibreOffice Writer.

Merge the blank pages with your PDF document using PDF-Shuffler placing the blank pages at the end.

To print:

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, choose Pages.

Type the numbers of the pages in this order: 12, 1, 2, 11, 10, 3, 4, 9, 8, 5, 6, 7

Choose the Page Setup tab.

Under Layout, in the Two-side menu, select One Sided.

In the Pages per side menu, select 2.

In the Page ordering menu, select Left to right.

In the Only print menu, select Odd sheets.

Click Print.

When all the pages have printed, flip the pages over and place them back in the printer.

Click FilePrint.

Choose the Page Setup tab.

In the Only print menu, select Even sheets.

Click Print.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/commandline.page0000644000373100047300000000437612500144153024066 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Command line The evince command can open any number of files, at specific pages and in various modes. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 The command line

To start the Document Viewer from the command line, type evince. You can open a specific file by typing the filename after the evince command:

evince file.pdf

You can open multiple files by typing the filenames after the evince command, separating the filenames by a space:

evince file1.pdf file2.pdf

The document viewer also supports the handling of files on the web. For example, after the evince command you can give the location of a file on the web:

evince http://www.claymath.org/millennium/P_vs_NP/pvsnp.pdf
Opening a document at a specific page

You can use the --page-label switch to open a document at a specific page. For example, to open a document to page 3, you would type:

evince --page-label=3 file.pdf

The page label should be in the same format as the page number displayed in the Document Viewer toolbar.

Opening a document in fullscreen mode evince --fullscreen file.pdf
Opening a document in presentation mode evince --presentation file.pdf
Opening a document in preview mode evince --preview file.pdf
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/reload.page0000644000373100047300000000173512500144152023041 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Your document will be automatically reloaded if another program changes it while you're viewing it. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Why does the document keep reloading?

If the Document Viewer detects that the document you have open has changed (perhaps because another program has modified it), it will automatically reload the document and display the most recent version for you.

If the document is deleted while you are still viewing it, it will still remain open.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/annotation-properties.page0000644000373100047300000000322312500144153026132 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to customize the author, color, style or icon of an annotation. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Customize annotations

Right click on the annotation icon in the document.

Select Annotation Properties.

In the Annotation Properties window, you can change the author, color, style and icon of your note.

The annotation properties will be applied to the note for which you made the changes only. Each note can have a different set of properties.

Can I permanently change the default annotation properties?

The default annotation properties (author, colour, style and icon) can only be changed on a particular note as stated above. So if you want all icons for your notes to be red instead of yellow, you will have to change the default from yellow to red individually on each note. There is no way to save different default settings for annotation properties, at this time.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/duplex-5pages.page0000644000373100047300000000635512500144152024261 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 05-Page Booklet Print a 5 page booklet. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 5-page booklet

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, select Pages and type: 1

Choose the Page Setup tab.

Under Layout, in the Two-side option, select Short Edge (Flip).

In the Pages per side option, select 2.

In the Page ordering menu, select Right to left.

Click Print.

Once the page has printed, take the paper and place it back in the printer, taking care to orient it correctly (page 2 will be printed on the other side).

Click FilePrint again.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, select Pages and type: 2

Choose the Page Setup tab.

In the Page ordering menu, select Left to right.

Click Print.

To print page 3, click FilePrint again.

In the General tab enter the page number in the Pages selection .

In the Page Setup tab, set the Page ordering to Right to left.

Click Print.

Once page 3 has printed, place the paper back in the printer (taking care to orient it correctly (pages 4 and 9 will be printed on the other side).

Click FilePrint.

In the General tab enter pages 4, 9 in the Pages selection.

In the Page Setup tab set Page ordering to Left to right.

Click Print.

It is easier to print a 8-page booklet. You may wish to add 3 blank pages to your PDF document to make it 8-pages. To do so, you can:

Create a blank PDF document 3-pages long using LibreOffice Writer.

Merge the blank PDF with your PDF document using PDF-Shuffler placing the blank pages at the end.

Follow the steps for printing a 8-page booklet.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/index.page0000644000373100047300000000343312500144152022677 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 <media type="image" src="figures/evince-trail.png"/> Evince Document Viewer Evince Document Viewer Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 <media type="image" src="figures/evincelogo.png">Evince logo</media>Evince document viewer
Reading documents
Presentations and other supported formats
Printing
Annotations and bookmarks
Interactive forms
Frequently asked questions
Advanced
Tips and tricks
SyncTeX
Get involved
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/printing.page0000644000373100047300000000237512500144153023427 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to print, and common questions about printing. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Printing a document

To print a document:

Click FilePrint

Choose your printer from the list

Click Print.

Printing is enabled for the following file formats:

Device Independent file format (.dvi)

DjVu (.djvu, .djv)

Portable Document Format (.pdf)

PostScript (.ps)

Tagged Image File Format (.tiff, .tif)

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/synctex.page0000644000373100047300000000213412500144153023263 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 SyncTeX support is available. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 What is SyncTeX?

SyncTeX is a method that enables synchronization between a TeX source file and the resulting PDF output.

Video Demonstration Press Ctrlclick to sync.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/toolbar.page0000644000373100047300000000440712500144153023235 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Show, hide or edit the toolbar. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Barra d'espleches
Show or hide the toolbar

Click ViewToolbar.

The default toolbar contains only a basic set of tools:

Previous and Next for moving from page to page.

A tool to adjust the zoom level.

The 'page select' tool.

You can modify the toolbar if you prefer a different set.

Add, remove and rearrange the tools in the toolbar.

Show the toolbar.

Click EditToolbar.

The toolbar editor contains the items that are not in the toolbar and the separator item.

To add new items to the toolbar:

drag them from the toolbar editor to the toolbar.

 To remove items from the toolbar:

drag them from the toolbar to the toolbar editor.

 To rearrange items on the toolbar:

drag them to their new position on the toolbar.

When you have finish editing the toolbar, click Close in the toolbar editor window.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/annotations-delete.page0000644000373100047300000000126112500144152025362 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 You can't remove annotations. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Removing annotations

You can't remove an annotation in the document viewer at this time.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/duplex-13pages.page0000644000373100047300000000660112500144153024333 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Print a 13 page booklet. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 13-page booklet

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, select Pages and type: 1

Choose the Page Setup tab.

Under Layout, in the Two-side menu, select Short Edge (Flip).

In the Pages per side option, select 2.

In the Page ordering menu, select Right to left.

Click Print.

Once the page has printed, take the paper and place it back in the printer, taking care to orient it correctly (page 2 will be printed on the other side).

Click FilePrint again.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, select Pages and type: 2

Choose the Page Setup tab and in the Page ordering menu, select Left to right.

Click Print.

To print page 3, click FilePrint again.

In the General tab, enter 3 in the Pages selection.

In the Page Setup tab, set the Page ordering to Right to left.

Click Print.

Once page 3 has printed, place the paper back in the printer taking care to orient it correctly (pages 4 and 13 will be printed on the other side).

Click FilePrint again.

In the General tab enter pages 4, 13 in the Pages selection.

In the Page Setup tab set Page ordering to Left to right.

Click Print.

Click FilePrint again.

Enter pages 8, 9, 10, 7, 6, 11, 12, 5 in the Pages selection menu and set Page ordering to Left to right.

Click Print.

It is easier to print a 16-page booklet. You may wish to add 3 blank pages to your PDF document to make it 16-pages. To do so, you can:

Create a blank PDF document 3-pages long using LibreOffice Writer.

Merge the blank PDF with your PDF document using PDF-Shuffler placing the blank pages at the end.

Follow the steps for printing a 16-page booklet.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/print-booklet.page0000644000373100047300000000203712500144152024360 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to print a booklet. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Printing a booklet

If you are printing a booklet (which will perhaps be bound or stapled in the middle of each page), select the type of printer you will be using for printing from the list below. Then select the number of printed pages your booklet will have.

Printer allows single-sided printing
Printer allows double-sided printing
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/movingaround.page0000644000373100047300000001331612500144153024302 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Navigating, scrolling and zooming. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Moving around a document

You can move around each page of a document by any of the following methods:

Scrolling up and down using the mouse wheel. To move around a page just by moving the mouse:

Right-click the page and select Autoscroll.

Move the mouse pointer towards the bottom of the window to scroll down; it will scroll faster depending on how far down the window you go.

To stop autoscrolling, click anywhere in the document.

Using the scroll bar on the document window.

Using the up and down arrow keys of your keyboard.

Dragging the page around with your mouse, as if you are grabbing it. To do this:

Move the mouse pointer over the page and hold down the middle mouse button to drag it around.

If you don't have a middle mouse button, hold down the left and right mouse buttons at the same time, then drag.

Flipping between pages

You can move between pages of a document using one of the following methods:

Click the Previous or Next buttons on the toolbar.

Use the Go Menu:

GoNext Page

GoPrevious Page

Press the CtrlPage Up or CtrlPage Down buttons on the keyboard.

To go to a specific page:

Type a page number in the 'page select' tool on the toolbar and press Enter.

If you want to go to the beginning or the end of the document:

Click GoFirst Page. You can also press CtrlHome on your keyboard.

Click GoLast Page or press CtrlEnd on your keyboard.

To move ten pages at a time, press ShiftPage Up or ShiftPage Down.

You can only move around one page at a time, by default. If you want to move between pages just by scrolling or dragging, click ViewContinuous.

Zooming in and out

Click ViewZoom In or use the keyboard shortcuts Ctrl+ to zoom in.

Click ViewZoom Out or use the keyboard shortcuts Ctrl- to zoom out.

Alternatively, you can do one of the following:

hold down Ctrl and use your mouse scroll wheel to zoom.

select desired zoom percentage from the drop down menu above the window.

The Best Fit option will make a document page fit the whole height of the window.

The Fit Page Width option will make a document page fill the whole width of the window.

If you want to see two pages at once, side by side, like in a book, click ViewDual.

You can use the whole of your screen to view the document:

Click ViewFullscreen or press F11.

To exit from the full screen mode:

Press F11 or Escape

or click the Leave Fullscreen button at the top of the screen.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/evince/duplex-npages.page0000644000373100047300000000376112500144152024350 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Print a booklet over 16 pages. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 n-page booklet

n is a multiple of 4.

If the number of pages in your PDF document is not a multiple of 4, you should add the appropriate number of blank pages (1,2 or 3) to make it a multiple of 4. To do so, you can:

Create a blank PDF using LibreOffice Writer.

Merge the blank pages with your PDF document using PDF-Shuffler placing the blank pages at the end.

Click FilePrint.

Choose the General tab.

Under Range, choose Pages.

Type the numbers of the pages in this order: n, 1, 2, n-1, n-2, 3, 4, n-3, n-4, 5, 6, n-5, n-6, 7, 8, n-7, n-8, 9, 10, n-9, n-10, 11, 12, n-11... ...until you have typed n-number of pages.

Choose the Page Setup tab.

Under Layout, in the Two-side menu, select Short Edge (Flip).

In the Pages per side option, select 2.

In the Page ordering menu, select Left to right.

Click Print.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/conv-base.page0000644000373100047300000000073612426207655025452 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Number Bases

To convert between number bases enter a number (or solve an equation) and change the result format from the CalculatorPreferences menu.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/complex.page0000644000373100047300000000050512426207655025236 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Complex Numbers

Complex numbers are not supported in Calculator.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/power.page0000644000373100047300000000235412426207655024727 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Powers and Roots

Powers are entered by putting a superscript number after the value.

5²

The inverse of a number can be entered using the inverse symbol ⁻¹ (CtrlI).

3⁻¹

Powers can also be calculated using the ^ symbol. This allows the power to be an equation.

5^(6−2)

If your keyboard does not have a ^ key you can use * twice.

Square roots can be calculated using the symbol (CtrlR).

√2

n-th roots can be calculated by putting a subscript number before the root sign.

₃√2

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/equation.page0000644000373100047300000000226312426207655025417 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 0 Basic Equations

Equations are entered in standard mathematical form. For example to add 7 and 2 enter the following:

7+2

To solve, press the = button with your mouse or the Enter key on your keyboard.

Calculations are performed in mathematical order - multiplication and division are performed before addition and subtraction. The following equation solves to 1 (3×2 = 6, 7−6 = 1).

7−3×2

To change the order of calculation use parenthesis. The following equation solves to 8 (7−3 = 4, 4×2 = 8).

(7−3)×2

To clear the display press the Clr button or Escape.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/percentage.page0000644000373100047300000000151312426207655025704 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Percentages

Percentages are calculated using the % symbol.

When added or subtracted the percentage symbol resolves to one percent of the value being added or subtracted from. The following equation calculates the price of a $140 item with 15% tax (140 + (15÷100)×140).

140+15%

In all other cases the percentage symbol resolves to a fraction out of 100. The following equation calculates one quarter of 80 apples ((25÷100)×80).

25%×80

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/conv-currency.page0000644000373100047300000000124612426207655026367 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Currency

To convert currencies, enter the financial mode, and use the currency controls.

You can also convert currencies using the keyboard and the in operator.

13.65 USD in GBP

Currency information is approximate and should not be used for making financial decisions.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/number-display.page0000644000373100047300000000253612426207655026530 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Result Format

The format used to display results can be changed from the CalculatorPreferences menu.

Decimal

Results are displayed as decimal numbers

Scientific

Results are displayed in scientific notation

Engineering

Results are displayed in scientific notation except the exponent is always a multiple of three

Binari

Results are displayed as binary numbers

Octal

Results are displayed as octal numbers

Hexadecimal

Results are displayed as hexadecimal numbers

The number of decimal places, if trailing zeroes and if thousands separators are shown can also be configured.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/boolean.page0000644000373100047300000000141612426207655025210 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Boolean Algebra

Boolean algebra can be calculated using the AND, OR and XOR operators.

010011₂ AND 110101₂

Buttons for these symbols are available in programming mode.

The NOT function inverts the bits in a number. The word size is set from the CalculatorPreferences menu.

NOT 010011₂

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000101412426207655024533 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 Unported License.

As a special exception, the copyright holders give you permission to copy, modify, and distribute the example code contained in this document under the terms of your choosing, without restriction.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/logarithm.page0000644000373100047300000000160412426207655025556 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Logarithms

Logarithms can be calculated using the log function.

log 100

To calculate a logarithm in a different base use a subscript number after the function.

log₂ 32

To calculate a natural logarithm use the ln function.

ln 1.32

Euler's number can be entered by using the variable e.

e^1.32

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/keyboard.page0000644000373100047300000000211212426207655025363 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using the Keyboard

All mathematical equations can be entered using the keyboard.

The following key combinations can be used to enter keys that may not be available on your keyboard.

×

*

÷

/

^

* twice

√

CtrlR

π

CtrlP

To enter superscript numbers use Ctrlnumber, for subscript use Altnumber.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/conv-length.page0000644000373100047300000000113712426207655026015 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Length/Area/Volume

To convert between length, area and volume units use the in operator.

6 meters in inches

1 acre in cm²

1 pint in mL

Length/Area/Volume conversions must be performed using the keyboard.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/base.page0000644000373100047300000000210312426207655024475 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Number Bases

To enter numbers in a particular number base use subscript numbers. The following numbers are equivalent.

1001011₂

113₈

75

4B₁₆

When in programming mode there are buttons for binary (CtrlB), octal (CtrlO) and hexadecimal (CtrlH).

To set the base that results are shown in change the result format.

To change the base of the current result use a base button or CtrlD to show in decimal form.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/trigonometry.page0000644000373100047300000000233212426207655026331 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Trigonometry

Trigonometry can be performed using the sin, cos, and tan function.

sin 45

The angle units used can be changed from the CalculatorPreferences menu. Trigonometry buttons are visible when in Advanced mode.

Hyperbolic functions are available by adding "h" to the end of a function.

sinh 0.34

Inverse functions are entered either using the inverse symbol ⁻¹ (CtrlI) or the "a" form of the function. The following two equations are equivalent.

sin⁻¹ 0.5

asin 0.5

To enter π with the keyboard use CtrlP.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/conv-weight.page0000644000373100047300000000073712426207655026030 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Mass

To convert between mass use the in operator.

1kg in pounds

Mass conversions must be performed using the keyboard.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/conv-time.page0000644000373100047300000000074012426207655025471 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Time

To convert between time use the in operator.

3 years in hours

Time conversions must be performed using the keyboard.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/mouse.page0000644000373100047300000000175012426207655024722 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Using the Mouse

All equations can be entered using the mouse. To access all buttons there are a number of modes that can be selected from the Mode menu.

Basic

Provides buttons suitable for basic equations

A_vançat

Provides buttons suitable for advanced mathematics such as

Financièr

Provides buttons suitable for financial equations

Programming

Provides buttons suitable for computer programmers
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/absolute.page0000644000373100047300000000070512426207655025407 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Absolute Values

Absolute values are calculated using the | symbol or abs function.

|−1|

abs (−1)

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/factorize.page0000644000373100047300000000065612426207655025564 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Factorization

You can factorize the number currently displayed by pressing the fact button. This button is visible in programming mode.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/superscript.page0000644000373100047300000000212012426207655026145 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 _ Superscript and Subscript

Some equations may require numbers to be entered in superscript or subscript form. e.g.

x³+2x²−5

To enter superscript numbers with the mouse select the number mode using the the ↑n and ↓n buttons. When one of these modes is active clicking the number buttons will enter numbers in superscript or subscript. To return to normal number mode click the active button.

To enter superscript numbers with the keyboard hold down Ctrl while entering the number. Hold Alt for subscript.

The number mode returns to normal when entering the next non-number character (e.g. +).

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/financial.page0000644000373100047300000000543512426207655025522 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Financial Functions

When in financial mode the following buttons are available.

Ctrm

Calculate the number of compounding periods necessary to increase an investment of present value to a future value, at a fixed interest rate per compounding period.

Ddb

Calculate the depreciation allowance on an asset for a specified period of time, using the double-declining balance method.

Fv

Calculate the future value of an investment based on a series of equal payments at a periodic interest rate over the number of payment periods in the term.

Gpm

Calculate the resale price of a product, based on the product cost and the wanted gross profit margin.

Pmt

Calculate the amount of the periodic payment of a loan, where payments are made at the end of each payment period.

Pv

Calculate the present value of an investment based on a series of equal payments discounted at a periodic interest rate over the number of payment periods in the term.

Taus

Calculate the periodic interest necessary to increase an investment to a future value, over the number of compounding periods.

Sln

Calculate the straight-line depreciation of an asset for one period. The straight-line method of depreciation divides the depreciable cost evenly over the useful life of an asset. The useful life is the number of periods, typically years, over which an asset is depreciated.

Syd

Calculate the depreciation allowance on an asset for a specified period of time, using the Sum-of-the-Years'-Digits method. This method of depreciation accelerates the rate of depreciation, so that more depreciation expense occurs in earlier periods than in later ones. The useful life is the number of periods, typically years, over which an asset is depreciated.

Term

Calculate the number of payment periods that are necessary during the term of an ordinary annuity, to accumulate a future value, at a periodic interest rate.

Financial functions cannot be performed using the keyboard.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/modulus.page0000644000373100047300000000057412426207655025265 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Modulus Division

Modulus division is performed using the mod operator.

9 mod 5

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/scientific.page0000644000373100047300000000174312426207655025714 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Scientific Notation

To enter numbers in scientific format use the ×10x button (CtrlE). The number mode automatically changes to superscript. To enter 2×10¹⁰⁰, start by entering the mantissa (2):

2

Then press the scientific notation button (or press CtrlE):

2×10

Then enter the exponent (100):

2×10¹⁰⁰

To show results in scientific form change the result format.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/factorial.page0000644000373100047300000000064112426207655025534 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Factorials

Factorials are entered using the ! symbol. To calculate the factorial of 6 enter the following.

6!

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/conv-character.page0000644000373100047300000000077012426207655026472 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Character Codes

When in programming mode the á button opens a dialog to convert characters to character codes.

Characters cannot be converted using the keyboard.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/index.page0000644000373100047300000000157212426207655024703 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Robert Ancell robert.ancell@gmail.com <media type="image" src="figures/logo32.png"/> Calculator Help
User Interface
Equations
Numbers
Conversions
Financial Calculations
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/variables.page0000644000373100047300000000246612426207655025547 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Variables

To assign a value to a variable use the = symbol or choose the variable to assign to with the x button in advanced mode. A variable name must only contain upper or lower characters.

x=5

value=82

Variables can be used in any equation and are substituted for their assigned value. Variables can be inserted using the x button.

6x+3

xy−3x+7y−21

The following variables are always defined.

ans

Result of previous calculation

e

Euler's Number

π

Pi

rand

Random value in the range [0,1] (changes on each read)
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-calculator/functions.page0000644000373100047300000000427412426207655025606 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Functions

Functions can be used by inserting the name of the function followed by the function argument. If the argument is not a number or variable then use parenthesis around the argument.

sin 30

abs (5−9)

The following functions are defined.

abs

Absolute Value

cos

Cosine

cosh

Hyperbolic Cosine

frac

Fractional Component

int

Integer Component

ln

Natural Logarithm

log

Logarithm

not

Boolean NOT

ones

Ones complement

sin

Sine

sinh

Hyperbolic Sine

sqrt

Square Root

tan

Tangent

tanh

Hyperbolic Tangent

twos

Twos complement

Calculator does not support user-defined functions.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/seahorse/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000717012300434241023101 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/seahorse/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000013664212300434241023753 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 seahorse-daemon"> key"> ]>
Passwords and Keys Manual 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Jacob Perkins and Adam Schreiber Projècte Seahorse Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Jacob Perkins Seahorse Project Adam Schreiber Seahorse Project
sadam@clemson.edu
Paul Cutler GNOME Documentation Project
pcutler@foresightlinux.org
Projècte Seahorse GNOME Documentation Project Passwords and Keys Manual V2.11.0 May 2009 Paul Cutler pcutler@foresightlinux.org Passwords and Keys Manual V0.10.1 August 2008 Adam Schreiber sadam@clemson.edu Passwords and Keys Manual V0.9.1 November 2006 Milo Casagrande milo_casagrande@yahoo.it Passwords and Keys Manual V0.9.0 July 2005 Adam Schreiber sadam@clemson.edu Seahorse Project Passwords and Keys Manual V0.7.0 February 2003 Jacob Perkins Seahorse Project This manual describes version 2.28.x of Passwords and Keys Feedback To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the Passwords and Keys application or this manual, follow the directions in the Gnome Feedback Page. Passwords and Keys is the application for managing encryption keys for the GNOME Desktop Seahorse seahorse Encryption Keys Introduccion You can use Passwords and Keys to create and manage PGP and SSH keys. Passwords and Keys provides a front end to many of the features of Gnu Privacy Guard (GPG) and integrates with multiple components of the GNOME desktop. With Passwords and Keys you can: Create and manage PGP and SSH keys, Export and import PGP and SSH keys, Share your keys with others, Per començar Starting <application>Passwords and Keys</application> You can start Passwords and Keys in the following ways: Menut Applications Choose Accessories Password and Keys . Linha de comanda Type seahorse then press Return. When You Start <application>Passwords and Keys</application> When you start Passwords and Keys, the Password and Keys window is displayed.
The <application>Passwords and Keys</application> Window Show the Passwords and Keys window.
The Passwords and Keys window contains the following elements: Barra de menuts The menus on the menubar contain all of the commands that you need to perform tasks in Passwords and Keys. Barra d'espleches Use the toolbar to quickly access commonly-used commands. Keys and Passwords Tabs Provides access to the keys and passwords in the keyring. First time options Provides fast access to useful actions for first time users. From here you can: Explorar lo sistèma d'ajuda Import keys in the keyring, Crear de claus novèlas. Creating OpenPGP Keys OpenPGP is a non proprietary protocol for encrypting e-mail with the use of public key cryptography based on PGP. It defines standard formats for encrypted messages, signatures, private keys and certificates for exchanging public keys. Public key cryptography is a concept which involves the use of two keys: a public key, that you can give to anyone with whom you would like to communicate, and a private key which is private and must be kept secret. To create OpenPGP keys: Choose FileNew... Select PGP Key and click Continue Enter your full name (first - last), your e-mail address and any additional information. You can also specify advanced options for the key: see below. Click Create to create the new key pair. The Passphrase for New PGP Key dialog will open. Enter the passphrase twice for your new key. Use similar practices to generating a strong password when choosing a passphrase. The main difference between a password and a passphrase is that, in a passphrase, spaces are valid characters. Opcions avançadas Expand the Advanced key options section to specify the following options for a new key: Encryption Type This field specifies the encryption algorithms used to generate your keys. DSA ElGamal This is the suggested choice as it will allow you to encrypt, decrypt, sign and verify as needed. DSA Will allow signing only. RSA Will allow signing only. Key Strength (bits) This is the length of the key in bits. The longer the key, the more secure it will be, provided a strong passphrase is used. Conversely, performing any operation with a longer key will require more time than it would with a shorter key. Acceptable values are between 1024 and 4096 bits. At least 2048 bits is recommended. Expiration Date This is the date at which the key will cease to be usable for performing encryption or signing operations. 6 months is a reasonable time to set it to. You will have to either change the expiration date or generate a new key or subkey after this amount of time passes. Sign your new key with your old one before it expires to preserve your trust status. Creating Secure Shell Keys Secure Shell (SSH) is a way of logging into a remote computer to execute commands on that machine. SSH keys are used in key-based authentication system, as an alternative to the default password authentication system. With key-based authentication there is no need to manually type a password to authenticate. Secure Shell keys are made of two keys: a private key, that must be kept secret, and a public key which can be uploaded to any computer you need to access. To create a Secure Shell key: Choose FileNew... Select Secure Shell Key and click Continue Enter a description of what the key is to be used for. You can use your e-mail address or any other reminder. You can also specify advanced options for the key: see below. Click Just Create Key to create the new key, or Create and Set Up to create the key and set up another computer to use it for authentication. The Passphrase for New Secure Shell Key dialog opens. Enter the passphrase twice for your new key. Use similar practices to generating a strong password when choosing a passphrase. The main difference between a password and a passphrase is that, in a passphrase, spaces are valid characters. Opcions avançadas Expand the Advanced key options section to specify the following options for a new key: Encryption Type This field specifies the encryption algorithms used to generate your key. RSA Use the Rivest-ShamirAdleman (RSA) algorithm to create the SSH key. This is the preferred and more secure choice. DSA Use the Digital Signature Algorithm (DSA) to create the SSH key. Key Strength (bits) This is the length of the key in bits. The longer the key, the more secure it will be, provided a strong passphrase is used. Conversely, performing any operation with a longer key will require more time than it would with a shorter key. Acceptable values are between 1024 and 4096 bits. At least 2048 bits is recommended. OpenPGP Key Properties The descriptions in this section apply to all OpenPGP keys. To view properties of a PGP key: Select the PGP key from the main window, Double click on it or choose Properties from the toolbar, Select the Details tab. Propietats Fingerprint The fingerprint is a unique string of characters that exactly identifies a key. KeyID The KeyID is similar to the Fingerprint. However the KeyID only contains the last 8 characters of the fingerprint. Most of the time it is possible to identify a key with only the KeyID, but occasionally two keys may have the same ID. Type Specifies the encryption algorithm used to generate a key. DSA keys can only sign. ElGamal keys are used to encrypt. Created Indicates the date the key was created. Expires Indicates the date the key can no longer be used. Strength Indicates the length in bits of a key. In general the longer the key, the more security it provides. A long key is not enough to make up for the use of a weak passphrase. Trust Trust is an indication of how sure you are of a person's ability to correctly extend the web of trust. When you are faced with a key you have not signed, the validity of that person's key will be determined based on the signatures they have collected and how well or not you trust the people who have made those signatures. By default, an unknown key will require 3 signatures with marginal trust value or 1 fully trusted signature. Unknown: You are not familiar with the person's ability to sign keys correctly. Never: This person cannot correctly sign keys. Marginal: This person checks for photo ID before signing a key, but does not necessarily scrutinize the IDs. Full: This person scrutinizes each and every person's photo IDs before signing them (e.g. they only sign keys that truely belong to the person asking for the signature). Ultimate: This level of trust should only be assigned to your own keys. Activar e desactivar de claus When a key is enabled, it can be used to perform encryption operations. When a key is disabled, it cannot be used to encrypt to or verify signatures made by it. Expiration Date A key can no longer be used to perform key operations after it has expired. Changing a key's expiration date to a point in the future re-enables it. A good general practice would be to have a master key that never expires and multiple subkeys that do and are signed by the master key. User IDs User IDs allow multiple identities and email addresses to be used with the same key. They usually take the form of: Name (comment) <email address> Adding a User ID Adding a user ID is useful when you want to have an identity for your job and one for your friends. To add a user ID to a key: Select the key from the main window, Double click on it or choose Properties from the toolbar, Select the Names and Signatures tab, Click on Add Name. After following the instructions above, you will be presented with a dialog to fill in. The fields are detailed below. Full Name Enter your full name in the form <first> <last> A middle name or initial is optional. You must enter at least 5 characters in this field. Email Address Your email address is how most people will locate your key on a key server or other key provider. Make sure it is correct before continuing. It should be of the form <username>@<domainname> Key Comment The comment field can be used to place any additional information into the displayed name of your new ID. This information can be searched for on key servers. Photo IDs Photo IDs allow a key owner to embed one or more pictures of themselves in a key. These identities can be signed just like normal user IDs. A photo ID must be in JPEG format and is recommended to be no larger than 240x288 pixels. If the chosen image is not of the required file type or size Passwords and Keys can resize and convert it on the fly from any image format supported by the GDK library. Changing the Passphrase To change the passphrase assigned to a key: Select the key from the main window, Double click on it or choose Properties from the toolbar, Click on Change Passphrase. Enter the new passphrase and click OK. Suprimir una clau To delete a key from your keyring: Select the key from the main window, Right click on it and choose Delete Key or choose Edit Delete Key . You can delete your keys, trusted keys and collected keys. OpenPGP Subkey Properties Each OpenPGP key has a single master key used to sign only. Subkeys are used to encrypt and to sign as well. In this way, if your sub key is compromised, you don't need to revoke your master key. ID This is the identifier of the subkey. Type Specifies the encryption algorithm used to generate a subkey. DSA keys can only sign, ElGamal keys are used to encrypt while RSA keys are used to sign or to encrypt. Created Indicates the date the key was created. Expires Indicates the date the key can no longer be used. Status Indicates the status of the key. Strength Indicates the length in bits of the key. In general the longer the key, the more security it provides. A long key is not enough to make up for the use of a weak passphrase. Adding a Subkey To add a subkey to a key, from the Subkeys section click on Add button. After following the instructions above, you will be presented with a dialog to fill in. The fields are detailed below. Tipe de clau Specifies the encryption algorithm used to generate a subkey. DSA Use the Digital Signature Algorithm (DSA) to create the subkey. This subkey can sign only. ElGamal Use the ElGamal algorithm to create the subkey. This subkey can encrypt only. RSA Use the Rivest-Shamir Adleman (RSA) algorithm to create the subkey. This subkey can be used to sign or encrypt, but you have to create two different subkeys. Longor de clau Indicates the length in bits of the subkey. In general the longer the key, the more security it provides. Expiration Date Indicates the date the subkey can no longer be used. Changing a Subkey Expiration Date To change a subkey expiration date, select the subkey from the Subkeys section, then: Click on the Expire button on the left, From the date dialog choose the new expiration date or select Never expires for no expiration date. Revoking a Subkey To revoke a subkey, select the subkey from the Subkeys section, then: Click on the Revoke button on the left, Choose a reason why to revoke the subkey: No Reason There isn't a specific reason to revoke the key. Compromised The key has been compromised. Superseded The key has been superseded by another one. Not Used The key is not used anymore. Enter a description of why you are revoking the key, Click on Revoke. The effect of revoking a subkey is immediate. Deleting a Subkey To delete a subkey, select the subkey from the Subkeys section, then: Click on the Delete button on the left. Secure Shell Key Properties The descriptions in this section apply to all SSH keys. To view properties of a SSH key: Select the Secure Shell key from the main window, Double click on it or choose Properties from the toolbar, Select the Details tab. Propietats Fingerprint The fingerprint is a unique string of characters that exactly identifies a key. Algorithm Specifies the encryption algorithm used to generate a key. Location This is the location where the private key has been stored. Strength Indicates the length in bits of a key. In general the longer the key, the more security it provides. A long key is not enough to make up for the use of a weak passphrase. Deleting a Secure Shell Key To delete a Secure Shell key: Select the SSH key from the main window, Right click on it and choose Delete key or choose Edit Delete Key . Importacion de claus To import keys choose File Import and select, from the file chooser, a file containing at least one ASCII armored public key. Importing can also be performed by pasting the keys inside Passwords and Keys: Select an ASCII armored public block of text, Copy it to the clipboard, Choose Edit Paste Keys . Exporting Keys To export keys, select the keys in the main window and choose File Export . You can also export keys to the clipboard in an ASCII armored block of text: Select the keys in the main window, Choose Edit Copy Keys . Signing a Key Signing another person's key means you are giving trust to that person. Before signing a key, you have to carefully check the key's fingerprint to be sure that the key really belongs to that person. To sign a key in your keyring: Select the key you want to sign from the Trusted Keys or Other Collected Keys tabs, Choose Sign from the toolbar or File Sign , Select how carefully the key has been checked, Indicate if the signature should be local to your keyring, and if your signature can be revoked, Click on Sign. Preferéncias This section describes the preferences settable in Passwords and Keys by choosing Edit Preferences from within Passwords and Keys. Password Keyrings Creating Keyrings To create a new keyring, from the menu choose FileNew and choose Password Keyring. Enter a name for the new keyring, and press enter. Changing Keyring Passwords To change the unlock password of the keyring, first select the appropriate keyring and then press Change Unlock Password button. You will then be prompted to type the old password in the Old password text box, the new password in the New password text box and confirm it in the Confirm password text box. To apply the settings, press Change. If the old password is correct, you will get a status message indicating the success of the operation. If the old password is not correct you will be asked to check its correctness. Removing Keyrings To remove a keyring, first select the appropriate keyring and then from the menu choose Edit Delete. Servidors de clau Keep your and other's keys up to date by syncing keys periodically with remote keyservers. Syncing will make sure that you have the latest signatures made on all of your keys so that the web of trust will be the most useful. Passwords and Keys provides support for HKP and LDAP keyservers. HKP Servers HKP keyservers are ordinary web based keyservers such as the popular hkp://pool.sks-keyservers.net, also accessible at http://sks-keyservers.net. LDAP Keyservers LDAP keyservers are less common, but use the standard LDAP protocol to serve keys. ldap://keyserver.pgp.com is a good LDAP server. Key Sharing Key Sharing is provided by DNS-SD, also known as Bonjour or Rendevous. Enabling key sharing will add the local Passwords and Keys users' public key rings to the remote search dialog. Using these local "key servers" will most likely be faster than accessing remote servers. About Passwords and Keys Passwords and Keys, its associated plugins, the preferences applet and the panel applet are known collectively as Seahorse. Seahorse was written by Jacob Perkins. The current maintainers are Stef Walter and Adam Schreiber. This manual is by Adam Schreiber. The project's web site was designed by Jim Pharis. To find more information about Seahorse, the project , please visit the Seahorse web page. To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding this application or this manual, follow the directions in the Feedback section of the GNOME User Guide. This program is distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public license as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. A copy of this license is included with this documentation; another can be found in the file COPYING included with the source code of this program.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mahjongg/license.page0000644000373100047300000000356312300405422024640 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Legal information. Licéncia

This work is distributed under a CreativeCommons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 Unported license.

You are free:

<em>To share</em>

To copy, distribute and transmit the work.

 <em>To remix</em>

To adapt the work.

Under the following conditions:

<em>Attribution</em>

You must attribute the work in the manner specified by the author or licensor (but not in any way that suggests that they endorse you or your use of the work).

<em>Share Alike</em>

If you alter, transform, or build upon this work, you may distribute the resulting work only under the same, similar or a compatible license.

For the full text of the license, see the CreativeCommons website, or read the full Commons Deed.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mahjongg/map.page0000644000373100047300000000510012300405422023760 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2012 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2012 Change tile layout

There are 9 different layouts. To select a different tile layout:

Click MahjonggPreferences.

Under Maps select a layout from the drop-down menu.

Click Close

Your new tile layout will take effect immediately unless you have already started a game and chose for the effect to take place after you are finished.

Easy

The Ziggurat

Four Bridges

Cloud

Tic-tac-toe

Red Dragon

Pyramid's Walls

Confounding Cross

Difficult
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mahjongg/documentation.page0000644000373100047300000000214712300405422026064 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Help write documentation

The GNOME Games documentation is maintained by a volunteer community. You are welcome to participate.

To contribute to the Documentation Project, feel free to get in touch with us using irc, or via our mailing list.

Our wiki page contains useful information.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mahjongg/strategy.page0000644000373100047300000000335712300405422025061 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Strategy

Since each tile layout requires a different approach, there is no one universal strategy. However, there are some strategy tips to keep in mind while you play:

The general strategy is to keep removing matching tiles in such a way that each removed tile will expose further tiles. A good strategy would be to expose new tiles with every set of tiles you match and eliminate.

Choosing easily accessible tiles, such as those from the top levels, is not beneficial. This strategy leaves essential tiles under cover, increasing your chances of losing the game.

Since you are scored by how quickly you finish the game, time is the most important factor in the game. It is therefore important to be fast.

Using the hint option adds a 30-second penalty to your time.

Shuffling tiles adds a 60-second penalty to your time.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mahjongg/develop.page0000644000373100047300000000207212300405422024646 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Help develop

The GNOME Games are developed and maintained by a volunteer community. You are welcome to participate.

If you would like to help develop GNOME Games, you can get in touch with the developers using irc, or via our mailing list.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mahjongg/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000050312300405422024155 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported License.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mahjongg/pause.page0000644000373100047300000000224012300405422024322 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Pausing your game

You can pause your current game using one of the following methods:

The Pause button in the toolbar.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mahjongg/hints.page0000644000373100047300000000417712300405422024345 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Hints

Hint highlights two tiles that can be matched. If you have already selected one tile, it will show a match for that piece if one exists.

Hint can be accessed by clicking MahjonggHint. Alternatively, use the Hint button in the toolbar, or press CtrlH.

Hint can make Mahjongg too easy, and should be used sparingly.

There is a 30-second penalty for each use of the "hint" option.
Video demonstration You can use Hints to help you find identical tiles. Press CtrlH. There is a 30 s penalty for each use of this option.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mahjongg/bug-filing.page0000644000373100047300000000401312300405422025230 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Report a Problem

Mahjongg is maintained by a volunteer community. You are welcome to participate. If you notice a problem you can file a bug report. To file a bug, go to .

This is a bug tracking system where users and developers can file details about bugs, crashes and request enhancements.

To participate you need an account which will give you the ability to gain access, file bugs, and make comments. Also, you need to register so you can receive updates by e-mail about the status of your bug. If you don't already have an account, just click on the New Account link to create one.

Once you have an account, log in, click on File a BugApplicationsgnome-mahjongg. Before reporting a bug, please read the bug writing guidelines, and please browse for the bug to see if it already exists.

If you are requesting a new feature, choose enhancement in the Severity menu. Fill in the Summary and Description sections and click Commit.

Your report will be given an ID number, and its status will be updated as it is being dealt with.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mahjongg/shortcuts.page0000644000373100047300000000350212300405422025245 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Keyboard shortcuts

Fullscreen

F11

Ajuda

F1

Hint

CtrlH

New game

CtrlN

Pausa

Pause

Use the toolbar Pause button if your keyboard does not have a Pause key.

Quit

CtrlQ

Tornar far

ShiftCtrlZ

Anullar

CtrlZ
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mahjongg/translate.page0000644000373100047300000000336212300405422025210 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Help translate

The GNOME Games user interface and documentation is being translated by a world-wide volunteer community: you are welcome to participate.

There are many languages for which translations are still needed.

To start translating you will need to create an account and join the translation team for your language. This will give you the ability to upload new translations.

You can chat with GNOME translators using irc: join the #i18n chanel on the irc.gnome.org server. People on the channel are located worldwide, so you may not get an immediate response as a result of timezone differences.

Alternatively, you can contact the Internationalization Team using their mailing list.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mahjongg/gameplay.page0000644000373100047300000000316212300405422025010 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Basic gameplay

Mahjongg is played by matching two identical tiles per turn. A tile is eligible for matching if no part of another tile is lying directly on it, and it has a free long edge on either the left or the right. You win by removing all tiles, and you are scored by the amount of time it takes you to do so.

There are many different tile layouts to choose from.

To match two tiles:

Click on the a tile you want to match. If it is an eligible tile, it will be highlighted.

Click on a matching tile. If it is a truly a matching tile, both tiles will vanish.
Video demonstration

Video of gameplay
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mahjongg/moves.page0000644000373100047300000000173412300405422024345 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Moves left

The Moves Left counter is located on the toolbar. It displays the number of different moves that can be made. It can help you see how far you are from running out of moves, and whether you've seen all possible moves.

Mahjongg counters

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mahjongg/choosing.page0000644000373100047300000000112012300405422025012 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Select a board

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mahjongg/rules.page0000644000373100047300000000260212300405422024341 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Rules

Tiles must be identical to be removed.

Fully and partially covered tiles cannot be matched.

Tiles must have a free long edge in order to be eligible for matching.

You can undo a move without penalty.

Using the hint option adds a 30-second penalty to your time.

If the arrangement does not allow further tiles to be matched, you will be given the option to shuffle the tiles in order to keep playing.

Shuffling tiles adds a 60-second penalty to your time.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mahjongg/scoring.page0000644000373100047300000000201112300405422024645 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Scoring

In Mahjongg, you are scored by how quickly you can complete a board.

To view the highscore board:

Select MahjonggScores

The scores are stored on a per map basis. You can view the highscores for a particular map by selecting it from the drop-down menu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mahjongg/index.page0000644000373100047300000000223012300405422024313 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 <media type="image" src="figures/logo.png"/> Mahjongg Mahjongg GNOME Mahjongg help. Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 <media type="image" src="figures/logo32.png">Mahjongg logo</media> Mahjongg

Mahjongg is a simple pattern recognition game. You score points by matching identical tiles.

Playing Mahjongg
Useful tips
Advanced
Get involved
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-mahjongg/toolbar.page0000644000373100047300000000220012300405422024643 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Show/hide the toolbar

To show or hide the toolbar, click MahjonggToolbar.

The toolbar, located under the menu bar, lets you perform common actions with your mouse. To use a toolbar item, just click on it. The buttons, from left to right, are New Game, Undo Move, Redo Move, Hint and Pause.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-system-log/log-filter.page0000644000373100047300000000645512300453753025610 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Include or exclude shown lines using regular expressions. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Filter log

The log viewer allows you to filter log content based on regular expressions. To set up or manage a new filter:

Open the filter manager dialog by clicking Filters: Manage Filters.

Click Add to add a new filter, or select an existing filter and click Properties to edit it.

Fill in the form or edit the fields that you wish to change:

Name:

The identifier for the filter

 Regular Expression:

What the filter will filter for

 Highlight:

This option emphasizes the line containing the regular expression

Background:

This is the font color

The default font color is black, which does not emphasize the text.

 Foreground:

This is the highlight color

The default highlight color is black, which shows solid black lines as a result, so it would be wise to change it.

 Hide:

This option hides the lines containing the regular expression from the shown log

Click Apply to save the new filter or save changes to an existing one

Back at the filter manager dialog, click Close to apply the changes.

Check the box next to the name of the filter that you want to enable in Filters:. If you want to view only the filters which have Highlight enabled and are checked, check Filters:Show matches only.

If there is a conflict between a hidden and a highlighted filter, the line many show as an empty white line.

If you uncheck a filter while viewing only matches, the log will show the lines without any formatting, regardless of whether they were hidden or highlighted before. The filter should reset when you check a highlighted filter.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-system-log/introduction.page0000644000373100047300000000270212300453753026254 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Introduction to the GNOME System Log. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Introduccion

Log File Viewer is a graphical, menu-driven viewer that you can use to view and monitor your system logs. Log File Viewer comes with a few functions that can help you manage your logs, including a log monitor and log statistics display.

Log File Viewer is useful if you are new to system administration because it provides an easier, more user-friendly display of your logs than a text display of the log file. It is also useful for more experienced administrators, as it contains a monitor to enable you to continuously monitor crucial logs.

Log File Viewer is useful only to those who have access to the system log files, which generally requires root access.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-system-log/log-copy.page0000644000373100047300000000172212300453753025265 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Copy text from the log. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Copy log

Highlight the section of the log that you want to copy with the cursor and press CtrlC, or click EditCopy.

You can press CtrlA, or click EditSelect All, to select all the text in the log which you are currently viewing.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-system-log/log-view.page0000644000373100047300000000214312300453753025263 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Open and view logs. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Open log

Open logs by clicking FileOpen. Your opened logs will be displayed in the side pane, to the left of the main area. You can view a log in the side pane by clicking it.

You can expand some logs. This will show you a list of dates. By clicking one of the dates, you can view only the log lines from that date, instead of the whole log.

The logs you have open when you quit the log viewer will be opened when you start it up again.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-system-log/log-close.page0000644000373100047300000000157212300453753025423 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Remove the log you are currently viewing from the side pane. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Close log

Close the log that you are currently viewing by pressing CtrlW, or by clicking FileClose. This removes it from the side pane until you open the log again.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-system-log/pref-font-size.page0000644000373100047300000000237412300453753026410 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Increase or decrease the size of the text. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Change font size

You can increase, decrease and reset the font size that the log is displayed in:

Increase font size

Click ViewZoom In, or press Ctrl+

 Decrease font size

Click ViewZoom Out, or press Ctrl-

 Reset to default size

Click ViewNormal Size, or press Ctrl0

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-system-log/log-search.page0000644000373100047300000000326012300453753025557 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Search the text in the log that you are currently viewing. Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@googlemail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Search log

To search the log you are currently viewing:

Show the Find bar by pressing CtrlF, or by clicking ViewFind. The bar will be shown below the log.

Enter your search term into the field and press Enter to see the first result.

The search is case sensitive.

Use the Find Previous and Find Next buttons to browse through the results.

If you can not see the result highlighted, try scrolling to the left.

Press Esc to hide the find bar once you are finished with the search.

You can only hide the find bar if you are currently focused on the search field. The bar will hide itself if you view another log.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-system-log/index.page0000644000373100047300000000043612300453753024644 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Log File Viewer Help
Working with the <app>Log File Viewer</app>
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-system-monitor/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000717012300454133025406 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-system-monitor/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000013623312300454133026254 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 ]>
System Monitor Manual V2.2 2009 Paul Cutler 2004 Sun Microsystems 2001 2002 2004 Bill Day Projècte de documentacion de GNOME Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Sun GNOME Documentation Team Sun Microsystems Bill Day
billday@bellatlantic.net
 Paul Cutler GNOME Documentation Project
pcutler@foresightlinux.org
 System Monitor Manual V2.2 March 2009 Paul Cutler pcutler@foresightlinux.org GNOME Documentation Project System Monitor Manual V2.1 February 2004 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project System Monitor Manual V2.0 November 2002 Bill Day billday@bellatlantic.net GNOME Documentation Project Procman Manual V0.11 January 2002 Bill Day billday@bellatlantic.net GNOME Documentation Project This manual describes version 2.24.4 of System Monitor. Feedback To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the System Monitor application or this manual, follow the directions in the GNOME Feedback Page. System Monitor gives users a graphical user interface for monitoring CPU, network, and memory activities as well as a way for viewing and stopping system processes. System Monitor gnome-system-monitor procman Introduccion The System Monitor application enables you to monitor system processes, usage of system resources, and file systems. You can also use System Monitor to modify the behavior of your system. The System Monitor window contains three tabbed sections: Processes Shows active processes, and how processes are related to each other. Provides detailed information about individual processes, and enables you to control active processes. Resources Displays the current usage of the following system resources: CPU (central processing unit) time Memory and swap space Network usage File Systems Lists all mounted file systems along with basic information about each. Per començar To Start System Monitor You can start System Monitor in the following ways: System menu Choose Administration System Monitor. Linha de comanda Execute the following command: gnome-system-monitor When You Start System Monitor When you start System Monitor, the following window is displayed:
System Monitor Window Shows System Monitor main window.
The System Monitor window contains the following elements: Barra de menuts The menus on the menubar contain all of the commands that you need to work with System Monitor. Display area The display area contains the system monitor information. The display area contains the following tabbed sections: Processes Contains a list of processes organized as a table, a list of load averages over the past few minutes, and an End Process button. Resources Contains a CPU History graph, a Memory and Swap History graph, and a Network History graph. File Systems Contains a table of currently mounted file systems. Utilizacion To Display the Process List To display the process list, select the Processes tab. In the Processes tab, the processes are organized as a table. The rows of the table display information about the processes. The columns represent information fields for the processes, such as the name of the user who owns the process, the amount of memory currently being used by the process, and so on. From left to right, the Processes tab displays the following columns by default: Process Name Estatut %CPU Nice ID Memòria For information about how to change the columns displayed in the process list, see . Parent Processes and Child Processes A parent process is a process that spawns another process. The spawned process is a child process of the original parent process. By default, System Monitor does not show process dependencies. For information about how to change the default display behavior, see . Process Priority and Nice Values Processes run in order of priority: high-priority processes run before low-priority processes. Child processes generally inherit their priority from their parent process. The priority of a process is set by the nice value of the process, as follows: A nice value of 0 means that the process has normal priority. The higher the nice value, the lower the priority. The lower the nice value, the higher the priority. For information about how to change the priority of a process, see . To Sort the Process List To sort the process list, perform the following steps: Select the Processes tab to display the process list. By default, the processes are listed by name, in alphabetical order. To list the processes in reverse alphabetical order, click on the Process Name column header. Click on any column header to sort the processes by the information in that column, in alphabetical or numerical order. Click again on the column header to sort the data in reverse alphabetical or reverse numerical order. To Modify the Contents of the Process List You can modify the contents of the process list in several ways. To Show All Processes To show all processes in the process list, perform the following steps: Select the Processes tab to display the process list. Choose View All Processes . To Show Only Processes Owned by the Current User To show only the processes that are owned by the current user, perform the following steps: Select the Processes tab to display the process list. Choose View My Processes . To Show Only Active Processes To show only the active processes in the process list, perform the following steps: Select the Processes tab to display the process list. Choose View Active Processes . To Show Dependencies To show process dependencies in the process list, perform the following steps: Select the Processes tab to display the process list. Choose ViewDependencies. If the Dependencies menu item is selected, the processes are listed as follows: Parent processes are indicated by a triangle symbol to the left of the process name. Click on the triangle symbol to show or hide the associated child processes. Child processes are indented, and listed with their parent process. If the Dependencies menu item is not selected: Parent processes and child processes are not distinguishable. All processes are listed in alphabetical order. To Display Memory Maps for a Process To display memory maps for a process, perform the following steps: Select the Processes tab to display the process list. Select the process in the process list. Choose ViewMemory Maps. The Memory Maps dialog displays the information in tabular format. The name of the process is displayed above the memory-map table. From left to right, the Memory Maps dialog displays the following columns: Filename The location of a shared library that is currently used by the process. If this field is blank, the memory information in this row describes memory that is owned by the process whose name is displayed above the memory-map table. VM Start The address at which the memory segment begins. VM End The address at which the memory segment ends. VM Size The size of the memory segment. Flags The following flags describe the different types of memory-segment access that the process can have: p The memory segment is private to the process, and is not accessible to other processes. r The process has permission to read from the memory segment. s The memory segment is shared with other processes. w The process has permission to write into the memory segment. x The process has permission to execute instructions that are contained within the memory segment. VM Offset The virtual memory offset of the memory segment. Device The major and minor device numbers of the device on which the shared library filename is located. Inode The inode on the device from which the shared library location is loaded into memory. Click on any column header to sort the data by the information in that column, in alphabetical or numerical order. Click again on the column header to sort the data in reverse alphabetical or reverse numerical order. Click Close to close the Memory Maps dialog. To Change the Priority of a Process To change the priority of a process, perform the following steps: Select the Processes tab to display the process list. Select the process for which you want to change the priority. Choose EditChange Priority. The Change Priority dialog is displayed. Use the slider to set the nice value of the process. The nice value sets the priority of the process: the lower the nice value, the higher the priority. To specify a nice value lower than zero, non-root users must enter the root password. Click on the Change Priority button. To End a Process To end a process, perform the following steps: Select the Processes tab to display the process list. Select the process that you want to end. Choose EditEnd Process, or click on the End Process button. By default, a confirmation alert is displayed. For information about how to display or hide the confirmation alert, see . Click on the End Process button to confirm that you want to end the process. System Monitor forces the process to finish normally. This is the preferred way to stop a process. To Terminate a Process To terminate a process, perform the following steps: Select the Processes tab to display the process list. Select the process that you want to terminate. Choose EditKill Process. By default, a confirmation alert is displayed. For information about how to display or hide the confirmation alert, see . Click on the Kill Process button to confirm that you want to terminate the process. System Monitor forces the process to finish immediately. You usually terminate a process only if you cannot end the process normally as described in . To Monitor CPU Usage To monitor CPU usage, select the Resources tab. System Monitor displays the CPU usage history in graphical format. Underneath the graph, System Monitor also displays the current CPU usage, as a percentage. To Monitor Memory and Swap Usage To monitor memory and swap usage, select the Resources tab. System Monitor displays the memory usage history and the swap usage history in graphical format. Underneath the graph, System Monitor also displays the following numerical values: Used memory out of total memory Used swap out of total swap To Monitor Network Activity To monitor network activity, select the Resources tab. System Monitor displays the network history in graphical format. Underneath the graph, System Monitor also displays the following numerical values: Received data per second and total Sent data per second and total To Monitor File Systems To monitor file systems, select the File Systems tab. System Monitor displays mounted file systems in tabular format. From left to right, the table displays the following columns: Periferic Location of block file Repertòri Mount point (directory to access) of device Tipe File system type Total Total capacity Free Amount of space not in use Available Amount of space which can be used Utilisat Amount of space which is used (and percentage of Total) Preferéncias To configure System Monitor, choose EditPreferences. The Preferences dialog contains the following tabbed sections: Processes Behavior Update interval in seconds Use this spin box to specify the interval at which you want to update the process list. Enable smooth refresh Select this option to refresh smoothly. Alert before ending or killing processes Select this option to display a confirmation alert when you end a process or terminate a process. Divide CPU usage by CPU count Select this to divide each process' CPU% in the Processes table by the number of CPUs. Information Fields Use the following options to select which fields are displayed in the process list: Process Name Select this option to display the name of the process. This column may also contain an icon to indicate the application that is associated with the process. User Select this option to display the name of the user who owns the process. Status Select this option to display the current status of the process: sleeping or running. Virtual Memory Select this option to display the amount of virtual memory that is allocated to the process. Resident Memory Select this option to display the amount of physical memory that is allocated to the process. Writable Memory Select this option to display the amount of memory that can be written by the process. Shared Memory Select this option to display the amount of shared memory that is allocated to the process. Shared memory is memory that can be accessed by another process. X Server Memory Select this option to display the amount of X server memory that is used by the process. % CPU Select this option to display the percentage of CPU time currently being used by the process. CPU Time Select this option to display the amount of CPU time that has been used by the process. Started Select this option to display when the process began running. Nice Select this option to display the nice value of the process. The nice value sets the priority of the process: the lower the nice value, the higher the priority. ID Select this option to display the process identifier, also known as the pid. The pid is a number that uniquely identifies the process. You can use the pid to manipulate the process on the command line. Memory Select this option to display the amount of system memory that is currently being used by the process. Security Context Select this option to display the security context in which the process is running. Command Line Select this option to display the command line that was used to start the process, including arguments. Resources Graphs Update interval in seconds Use this spin box to specify how often you want to update the System Monitor graphs. Show network speed in bits Select this option to use bits instead of bytes for displaying network speed in the System Monitor graphs. File Systems Behavior Update interval in seconds Use this spin box to specify how often you want to update the File Systems table. Show all file systems Select this option to show all file systems, including temporary and system ones.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/rhythmbox/fdl-appendix.xml0000644000373100047300000006472512327556460024635 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Version 1.1, March 2000 2000Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. GNU Free Documentation License 0. PREAMBLE The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written document free in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others. This License is a kind of copyleft, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software. We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference. 1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. The Document, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as you. A Modified Version of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language. A Secondary Section is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them. The Invariant Sections are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. The Cover Texts are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. A Transparent copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not Transparent is called Opaque. Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for output purposes only. The Title Page means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, Title Page means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text. 2. VERBATIM COPYING You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3. You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies. 3. COPYING IN QUANTITY If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than 100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects. If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages. If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material, which the general network-using public has access to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public. It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document. 4. MODIFICATIONS You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version: A Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission. B List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the Document (all of its principal authors, if it has less than five). C State on the Title Page the name of the publisher of the Modified Version, as the publisher. D Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document. E Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices. F Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below. G Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice. H Include an unaltered copy of this License. I Preserve the section entitled History, and its title, and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If there is no section entitled History in the Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence. J Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the History section. You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission. K In any section entitled Acknowledgements or Dedications, preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein. L Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles. M Delete any section entitled Endorsements. Such a section may not be included in the Modified Version. N Do not retitle any existing section as Endorsements or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section. If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles. You may add a section entitled Endorsements, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard. You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one. The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version . 5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice. The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work. In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled History in the various original documents, forming one section entitled History; likewise combine any sections entitled Acknowledgements, and any sections entitled Dedications. You must delete all sections entitled Endorsements. 6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects. You may extract a single document from such a collection, and dispbibute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document. 7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a Modified Version of the Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a compilation is called an aggregate, and this License does not apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative works of the Document. If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate. 8. TRANSLATION Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License provided that you also include the original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original English version of this License, the original English version will prevail. 9. TERMINATION You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/. Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License or any later version applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. Addendum To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:
Copyright YEAR YOUR NAME. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled GNU Free Documentation License.
If you have no Invariant Sections, write with no Invariant Sections instead of saying which ones are invariant. If you have no Front-Cover Texts, write no Front-Cover Texts instead of Front-Cover Texts being LIST; likewise for Back-Cover Texts. If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit their use in free software. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/rhythmbox/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000717012327556460023335 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/rhythmbox/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000022527112327556460024204 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 ]>
Legidor de musica Rhythmbox 2002 Mark Finlay 2002 2002 Mark Humphreys 2005 2006 Baptiste Mille-Mathias 2006 Victor Osadci 2008 Dean Sas Projècte de documentacion de GNOME Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Mark Finlay GNOME Documentation Project
sisob@eircom.net
 Mark Humphreys GNOME Documentation Project
marquee@users.sourceforge.net
 Baptiste Mille-Mathias GNOME Documentation Project
baptiste.millemathias@gmail.com
 Victor Osadci GNOME Documentation Project
Victor.Osadci.GNOME@xhtml.md
 Dean Sas Ubuntu Documentation Project
dean@deansas.org
 Rhythmbox Music Player Manual V0.0.2 October 2002 Mark Finlay GNOME Documentation Project Rhythmbox Music Player Manual V0.0.3 August 2003 Mark Humphreys GNOME Documentation Project Rhythmbox Music Player Manual V0.0.4 October 2005 Baptiste Mille-Mathias GNOME Documentation Project Rhythmbox Music Player Manual V2.0.2 April 2006 Luca Ferretti GNOME Documentation Project Rhythmbox Music Player Manual V2.0.3 May 2008 Dean Sas GNOME Documentation Project This manual describes version 0.11.5 of Rhythmbox Music Player. Feedback To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the Rhythmbox Music Player application or this manual, follow the directions in the GNOME Feedback Page. Rhythmbox is the full featured music player for GNOME Desktop. Rhythmbox rhythmbox Music Player Introduccion Rhythmbox Music Player is a music player and library for tagged files that supports various music formats. Current Rhythmbox Music Player features include: Play various format music files from your tagged organized Library. Display information on the songs through meta-data reading. Display songs in an organized view. Create static playlists by dragging and dropping from the Library view. Create automatic playlists from criterias. Search for songs in the sources list like Library or Playlists. Listen to Internet radio stations. Read Audio CDs, and retrieve information like track title from the Internet. Burn Audio CDs from playlists. Transfer music to iPod, MTP and USB Mass Storage music players . Per començar To Launch the <application>Rhythmbox Music Player</application> You can launch the Rhythmbox Music Player in the following ways: Applications menu Choose Sound & Video Rhythmbox Music Player. Command Line Type rhythmbox, then press Return. Running the Assistant The first time you launch the Rhythmbox Music Player, an assistant will help you import your music. On the second panel of the assistant, press the Browse button and select the folder where your music is stored. Rhythmbox Music Player Window Overview The Rhythmbox Music Player window enables you to browse and play your favorite music. shows the interface of the Rhythmbox Music Player with its main components.
The <application>Rhythmbox Music Player</application> Window Show the Rhythmbox Music Player window showing the different parts on the Rhythmbox Music Player interface. Callouts: Menubar, Player area, Browser, Side pane, Statusbar.
Table 1 describes the components of Rhythmbox Music Player window. <application>Rhythmbox Music Player</application> Window Components Id Component Descripcion 1 Barra de menuts Contains menus that you use to perform tasks in Rhythmbox Music Player window. 2 Barra d'espleches Provides access to player functions and details about the currently playing track. 3 Time Slider Displays the position of the read of a track; it enables to jump to another part of a track. 4 Side Pane Displays a list of available sources. 5 Navegador Allows to browse and filter the Library tracks by Genre, Artist or Album name. The Browser also provides a search function to display only tracks that match your criteria. 6 Tracks list Lists the tracks that belong to the selected source. 7 Barra d'estat Displays informations about the source selected in the side pane.
The Side Pane The side pane is where you can access your music library, internet radio, your playlists and audio CDs. The side pane can contain the following sources: The Rhythmbox Music Player library, where all of the imported tracks will appear. The iRadio source, with all internet radio stations. Podcasts. All playlists (normal and smart). Audio CD's inserted into the computer's CD drives. Portable players like iPod plugged to your computer. The DAAP Music shares discovered on the local network. Music stores like Jamendo and Magnatune. The display of the side pane can be toggled on or off by selecting ViewSide Pane . La barra d'espleches del legidor The toolbar area provides access to details about the currently playing track. When no track is being played, this area shows no information. When a track is played, the track name is displayed, and underneath, the artist and the album names. A tracker is also displayed, showing the progress of the playing track. When the tracker has focus, the arrow keys can be used to Fast-Forward or Rewind the playing track. Shows player area If you are using a mouse with a scroll wheel, you can adjust the volume by scrolling up or down while the mouse pointer is over the volume button. The Statusbar The statusbar contains additional information about the number of songs and the duration of the source selected. The display of the statusbar can be toggled on or off by selecting ViewStatusbar. Shows statusbar <application>Rhythmbox Music Player</application> Minimized Window Rhythmbox Music Player comes with a minimized mode. This mode enables access only to the menubar and the player function of Rhythmbox Music Player. To switch to the small display, select View Small Display. Shows the Rhythmbox Music Player in small display mode Using Rhythmbox Music Player Playing Music To play a track, choose Control Play, or select the track and press the Play button on the toolbar, or simply double-click on the track to start playing. When the track ends, Rhythmbox Music Player jumps to play the next track in the list showed in view pane. In the Library you can play all songs from an artist or a single album simply selecting Album or Artist entry in the library browser. Next/Play/Previous The Next and Previous buttons can be used to skip between tracks while playing. If a track is currently playing, the previous button will restart the track. Pressing the Play button will start playing the current track. Shows buttons Previous, Play and Next in toolbar. Repetar The option Repeat makes the Rhythmbox Music Player restart to play tracks from the beginning of the list when it reach the last track. To activate repeat, choose Control Repeat, or press the button Repeat on the toolbar. Shows repeat button in the statusbar. Aleatòri The option Shuffle makes the Rhythmbox Music Player play tracks in a random order. To activate shuffle, choose Control Shuffle, or press the button Shuffle on the toolbar. Shows shuffle button in the statusbar. Contraròtle de volum The volume control is located in the right hand of the toolbar. Pressing the loudspeaker icon will show the volume slider. Sliding this up and down will increase and decrease the volume. The loudspeaker icon will change to reflect the relative volume. Shows volume slider in toolbar. You can adjust the volume by using the mouse scroll wheel over the loudspeaker icon. Library Source The Library is the main source available in the Rhythmbox Music Player, it is the database that contains all the music files that you import in the Rhythmbox Music Player (The Library stores the path to access your music files, not the files themself). The Library can not only contains music files which are physically on your computer (in your HOME Directory for instance), but it can also contains music files available over remote network services. Some examples of supported network services are : Public FTP Authenticated FTP NFS Windows Share The files imported in the Library are displayed in the track list with the information (like the Artist name or the Album name) stored in the tags embedded on the tracks. Rhythmbox Music Player uses these tags to display the tracks in an organized manner. Tags can be modified by choosing MusicProperties and filling in the details on the window that appears. Add tracks in the Library To add tracks to the Library, you can follow these different methods: To import only one track, choose MusicImport File from the menu, then select the file in the file selector and press the Open button. If you want to import several music files located in a folder, choose MusicImport Folder from the menu, then select the folder in the file selector and press the Open button. All the music files located in the folder and its sub-folders will be imported. Drag and drop files from the file manager (like Nautilus) over the Rhythmbox window. If you have enabled the watch directory function (see ), all the music files stored under the chosen directory will be added to the Library. New files added later will be also added. Remove tracks from the Library To remove a track from the library but leave it on the disk, choose menu EditRemove. The track and its properties (like rating or the play count) are removed from the Rhythmbox database. To delete a track from the Library and also from your disk, choose EditMove to Trash. The track will be removed in the same way as previous, but the file will be moved in to the file manager Trash. Find tracks using Search Rhythmbox comes with a search function, which enables you to find and filter tracks by using a search term. Enter some text in the search entry, and as you type, only the tracks that match the text entered will be displayed. The search function does the lookup in all of the tags of the tracks stored in the Library. To perform a more precise search, you can choose to lookup only in specific tags Artists, Albums or Titles. Find tracks using the Browser The Browser is another convenient way to find tracks. The Browser is a two or three pane view which enable to navigate among music genres, artists and albums and display tracks that match the chosen criteria. First, to display the Browser, select View Browser. Select artist, album and genre, and as you choose, only the tracks that match your choice will be displayed in the track list. The criteria on the columns apply from the left to the right. You can choose several criteria of the same category by using the key Ctrl. You can also find from a selected track in the track list, all of the tracks with the same genre, artist or album name. Select a track in the track list, right-click on it, and choose Browse this Genre/Artist/Album. Then the browser will filter the tracks using the criteria chosen. Radio Source The Internet Radio tuner can be used to listen to streamed audio files over a network, local or Internet.
Internet Radio in <application>Rhythmbox Music Player</application>
Adding a station To add a new station to the Internet Radio tuner, choose Music New Internet Radio Station, then enter the URL of the Internet radio, then press the button Add. Viewing and Changing the settings of a station You can view and edit the settings of an Internet Radio station using the menu MusicProperties. You can also change the properties of a station by selecting the station and right-click, then choose Properties. When you access the properties of a radio stream, you can modify its title, its genre; you can also modify the stream location, and set a rating to it. Removing a station To remove a radio station from the radio stations list, choose Edit Remove; you can also right-click on the station and select Remove. Podcast Source Podcasting is a new way to broadcast audio content over the web; when an author publishes an episode, podcast suscribers are informed, through an XML feed. Rhythmbox Music Player enables you to subscribe to podcast feeds, so when a new episode is available you'll be informed, it will download this episode and it will play it. You can find more information about podcasts and podcasting by visiting the definition of Podcast on the site Wikipedia.
The Podcast interface The Podcast interface with some registered podcasts
Podcast Management Apondre un podcast To register to a podcast, choose MusicNew Podcast Feed, then in the new window, enter the URL of the podcast feed. Rhythmbox will retrieve the list of episodes and the latest episode will be downloaded on your hard disk. To add a new podcast feed, you can also right-click over the Podcasts source, and select New Podcast Feed. Suprimir un podcast To delete a podcast, right-click on the podcast feed's name in the browser, and choose Delete Podcast Feed, then choose Delete Feed Only if you want to keep the podcast's episodes, or choose Delete Feed And Item if you want to delete the feed and all its related episodes. Update feeds To know if new episodes have been published for a podcast, right-click over the podcast name in the browser and choose Update Podcast Feed. If new episodes were published, they will appear in the episode list. Rhythmbox Music Player checks regularly, on its own, the podcast feeds list to find out if they were updated. You can also check all podcasts, by right-clicking over the Podcasts source and choose Update All Feeds. Access Podcast Feed properties To access to the Feed properties, right-click on the Feed name, and choose Properties. On the Basic tab you can view the podcast Title, Author , the Last Updated date and the Description. On the Details tab you can view the feed Source, Language and the Copyright properties. You can view the properties, and also edit the rating. Episode Management Download a podcast episode To download an episode on your disk, right-click on the episode, and choose Download Post, Rhythmbox will start to download the episode in the location defined in the preferences. You can see the download progress of an episode in the column Status. By default, podcasts are downloaded in folder Podcasts/ in your home directory. To change location, see . Read a podcast episode To play a podcast episode, select the episode you want to read, and choose ControlPlay; you can also press the button Play. The episode have to downloaded before to read it, see to know how to download a podcast episode. Delete a podcast episode To delete an episode from a podcast, right-click on the episode, and choose Delete, then choose Delete Episode Only if you to keep the episode file on your disk, or choose Delete Episode And File if you want to remove the episode from the list and delete the file from your disk. After you delete an episode, it will no longer be available in the list of episodes, even if you update the podcast. Display Podcast Episode properties To access to the episode properties, right-click on the episode, and choose Properties. On the Basic tab you can view the podcast Title, Feed, the publication Data and the Description. On the Details tab you can view the podcast Source, Duration, the Bitrate, the Last Played Date, the Play count and the Rating. Play Queue Source Play queue is a source designed to temporarily store the next tracks you want to play. When you add a track to the Play Queue, Rhythmbox Music Player will automatically switch to this source, after the track has played. Once a track has been played, it will be automatically removed from the Play Queue Source. Once the Play Queue is empty, Rhythmbox Music Player will play the source which was played before. Add a track to the Play Queue To add a track: Select the track you want to play, in any source. Choose EditAdd to playqueue. Remove a track in Play Queue To remove a track stored in Play Queue: Select the track you want to remove in Play Queue source. Choose EditDelete . Playlists Source Playlists are sources which are created from the tracks available in the Library source. They enable you to gather tracks following a particular 'genre', a specific group of artists, or even tracks that are of a particular 'mood', or whatever you want. Rhythmbox Music Player has 2 kinds of playlists: Static Playlists Smart Playlists Rhythmbox lets you burn the tracks of your playlists to an Audio CD. Static Playlists Static playlists are playlists built from tracks dropped from the Library. Create a static playlist To create a new playlist, choose MusicPlaylistNew Playlist. An empty playlist without name appears in the side pane. Enter a name for the playlist and press Enter. Add tracks to a playlist To add tracks to a playlist, select tracks from the track list from the library and drag and drop your selection over the playlist icon in the side pane. You can also drop over a playlist a genre, an artist, or an album name from the browser, and all the tracks that belongs to the chosen category will be added to the playlist. You can create a playlist with tracks in one action. Select tracks from the Tracks List, or directly one or more categories from the browser (Genre, Artist or Album) and drop the selection over the Side pane. It will automatically create a named playlist. Remove tracks from a playlist To remove tracks from a playlist, first select the tracks to remove, and then you have two methods: Choose EditDelete. Right-click over the selection and choose Delete. This operation deletes the track only from playlist and not from the Library. Suprimir una tièra de lectura estatica To delete a static playlist, select the playlist to delete, then you have two ways to delete it: Choose EditDelete. Right-click over the playlist and choose Delete. This operation deletes only the playlist and not the tracks stored in the playlist deleted. Smart Playlists Smart Playlists are playlists built from criteria, so tracks are added to it dynamically; all of the tracks matching the criteria will be added to the playlist. Create a smart playlist To create a new playlist: Choose MusicPlaylistNew Automatic Playlist. Edit the playlist criteria through the query editor. Once your criteria have been chosen, click New to create the query. Edit a smart playlist Editing a smart playlist lets you modify the criteria set for this playlist. To edit a smart playlist, select the smart playlist, choose MusicPlaylistEdit, and edit the criteria. Once done, choose Close. Delete a smart playlist To delete a smart playlist, select the playlist to delete, then you have two ways to delete it: Choose EditDelete. Right-click over the playlist and choose Delete. Use the query editor Choose the criteria to apply to the rule. If you need one more criteria click on the button Add, a new line appears, and you can set a new criteria. If you want to limit the number of tracks in the playlist, tick Limit to:, and choose how to limit. You can limit by tracks, by total size (in MB or GB), or by duration (expressed in Minutes). Once you finish setting the criteria for the playlist, choose New; the playlist query editor window will close, and the playlist will display the tracks matched by your criteria. Audio CD Source Rhythmbox Music Player can also handle Audio CDs; it can play CDs and also let you burn your own. Lectura When an Audio CD is inserted, it will appear in the side pane, and the tracks on it can be displayed in Rhythmbox Music Player's main window. If you are connected to the Internet, the CD details will be retrieved and displayed. To play and pause playback, or to skip forward or backwards, use the same controls as used for playing from the library. Importing Audio CD If you wish to keep the tracks of your Audio CDs on your computer, you can import them. To import Audio CD tracks, choose Music Import Audio CD, it will start Sound-Juicer, an application dedicated to importing Audio CDs. To know more about Sound-Juicer, you can read the Sound-Juicer manual. To get imported tracks from Sound-Juicer automatically added to you Rhythmbox Library, you will have to configure Sound-Juicer to extract tracks into your Rhythmbox Library location and the Rhythmbox watch library feature has to be activated; refer to Sound-Juicer preferences and Rhythmbox Library preferences. Creating Audio CD Rhythmbox enables you to create you own Audio CDs with the music stored in the Rhythmbox Library. To create an Audio CD: Create a playlist, static or smart (see ) and add tracks. Choose MusicPlaylistCreate Audio CD Insert a blank CD. Click the button Create, the burning process starts. Portable Audio Player Source Rhythmbox can detect when an portable audio player is plugged to your computer, and is able to read tracks stored on it. Rhythmbox Music Player should be able to deal with most portable audio players including Apple iPod, MTP players and Mass Storage players. When you plug in a portable audio player, an icon for the Portable Audio Player is added to the side pane. This source works in the same way as the Library source. If Rhythmbox Music Player does not detect your device as a portable audio player, you can create an empty file named .is_audio_player at the top level hierarchy of the filesystem of your player. DAAP Share Source DAAP is a network protocol that allows you to share the music stored in Rhythmbox. DAAP stands for Digital Audio Access Protocol. As DAAP is a standard protocol for music sharing, you can listen and share music not only with other Rhythmbox users, but also with other users who use DAAP compatible software, like iTunes. When you start Rhythmbox, it will look for all DAAP shares published on your local network (your home or your office, not the whole Internet) by other users and will display them in the side pane. If sharing is enabled, at the same time Rhythmbox will publish your library and your playlists. In this way, you can listen to music stored on your friend's computers and they can listen your music. To disable the Rhythmbox DAAP sharing feature, see in the preferences. Zòna de notificacion Overview The Notification Area is a GNOME feature that adds a small icon to the panel while the program is running; this allows you to control Rhythmbox Music Player from your tray, and receive information when the Rhythmbox Music Player interface is not visible.
<application>Rhythmbox Music Player</application> in the Notification Area
Get information Tooltip information When you move the mouse cursor over the Rhythmbox Music Player icon, you can see the track artist, the track name and the time position. Fenèstra de notificacion Each time the track has changed or a podcast episode was downloaded, the Rhythmbox Music Player can inform you; it displays a notification window on the desktop, containing the information.
The notification window of <application>Rhythmbox Music Player</application>
The notification window can be disabled by deselecting the Show Notifications option from the context menu of the icon in the notification area. Control Rhythmbox Using the Rhythmbox Music Player icon in the notification area, the following commands can be sent to the application:
Notification Area (showing menu)
Play — If selected, plays the currently selected song. Previous — Skip to previous song in the selected source. Next — Skip to next song in the selected source. Show Window Player — Choose whether or not the Rhythmbox Music Player window is visible or not on the desktop. Show Notifications — Choose whether or not the Rhythmbox Music Player will notify you about track changes and various information. Quit — Quit the Rhythmbox Music Player. If you are using a mouse with a scroll wheel, you can adjust the volume by scrolling up or down while the mouse pointer is over the panel applet. You can quickly toggle Play/Pause by pressing the middle mouse button. Customizing Rhythmbox Music Player This section describes how to customize Rhythmbox Music Player to suit your requirements and preferences. Setting Your Preferences Using the Preferences dialog you can customize how you want Rhythmbox Music Player to look and behave. To display the Preferences dialog, choose EditPreferences. General Choose the way the Browser View will be displayed. You can choose to use three or two panes and what the panes should display. Choose the Visible Columns you want to display in Rhythmbox Music Player. This option affects the following sources: Library Audio CD Portable Players Playlists DAAP Music shares Music The Library Location is a folder that Rhythmbox Music Player will monitor to find new songs. When you add new audio files in this folder or its sub-folders with the file browser (like Nautilus), Rhythmbox Music Player will detect them and they will be added automatically in the Library. Avoid to set your Home folder as library location because this feature is CPU consuming. To disable the watch functionality deselect Watch my library for new files. If you want to add more than one folder to watch, use gconf-editor and add it to the list /app/rhythmbox/library_locations Podcasts The Download Location of Podcasts is defined by default to the Podcasts/ folder in your home directory. If this location doesn't fit your needs, select another folder in the drop-down list or choose Other to make the File Selector appear. Choose the frequency that Rhythmbox Music Player will check for new podcast episodes. Sharing The Rhythmbox Music Player can share your Library contents over your Local Area Network, to other Rhythmbox Music Player and Apple iTunes users. Select Share my music to enable the users of your network to see and read your songs. Enter the name of you want to appear of the network in the field Shared music name. Perfil last.fm The Last.fm profile plugin collects information about the songs you listen to and sends it to the Last.fm website, building up a profile of your listening habits. With this profile, you can: consult statistics, such as most played songs or most played artists. receive recommendations about artists that you might like. In order to use the Last.fm profile plugin, you must have a Last.fm account. If you don't already have one, use the Last.fm signup page to create one. Enter your Last.fm account details in the Username and Password fields in the Last.fm profile plugin configuration window. The configuration window for the Last.fm profile plugin also displays status information. If your Last.fm profile page shows that your profile is not being updated, the information displayed here may help you to diagnose the problem. Acorchis Acorchis de clavièr Player Shortcuts Acorchis Accions Ctrl p Lectura / pausa Ctrl Left Jump to the Previous Track / Back to the beginning of the track Ctrl Right Jump to the Next Track Ctrl Up Increase playback volume Ctrl Down Decrease playback volume Ctrl R Enable / Disable Repeat play Ctrl U Enable / Disable Shuffle play
General Shortcuts Acorchis Accions Ctrl A Tot seleccionar Shift Ctrl A Tot deseleccionar Ctrl J Jump to playing song Alt S Jump to search field Alt Return Display the Track Properties
Window Shortcuts Acorchis Accions Ctrl Q Quit the Rhythmbox Music Player Ctrl B Show / Hide the browser F9 Show / Hide the side pane Ctrl K Show / Hide the Queue Sidebar F11 Toggle / Untoggle the Full Screen mode
Multimedia Keys Rhythmbox Music Player supports the keys on multimedia keyboards, if configured in your desktop environment. Window Shortcuts Acorchis Accions Stop Arrestar Pause / Play Pause / Play Prev Previous Played Track Next Pista seguenta
Linux Infrared Remote Control The Rhythmbox Music Player includes a plugin for Linux Infrared Remote Control (LIRC) support. The following command strings are supported, using the program name 'rhythmbox': Window Shortcuts Command string Accion play Start playback pause Pause playback playpause Toggle between playing and paused shuffle Toggle the shuffle play order repeat Toggle the repeat play order next Skip to the next track previous Skip to the previous track seek_forward Skip 10 seconds forward in the playing track seek_backward Skip 10 seconds backward in the playing track volume_up Increase the playback volume by 10% volume_down Decrease the playback volume by 10% mute Mute the playback
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-printing-select.page0000644000373100047300000000264312315065475025634 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Only Printing Certain Pages

You can selectively print only certain pages from the document. For example, if you enter the page numbers "1,3,5-7,9", then only pages 1, 3, 5, 6, 7 and 9 will be printed. To print pages of your choice:

Select File Print….

In the General tab in the Print dialog choose Pages from the Range section.

Type the numbers of the pages you want to print from the document, separated by commas. Use a dash to specify a range of pages.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-change-color-scheme.page0000644000373100047300000000321312315065476026323 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Change the color scheme

gedit includes several different color schemes, allowing you to change the appearance of the main text window.

To change the color scheme, complete the following steps:

Select gedit Preferences Font & Colors.

Choose your desired color scheme.

The new color scheme will be applied immediately.

Use a Custom Color Scheme

You can also use color schemes that have been created by others, or create and use your own color schemes.

Instructions on how to install custom color schemes, as well as examples of color schemes that you can download and use, are available on the gedit wiki.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-undo-recent-action.page0000644000373100047300000000265312315065476026225 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Undo a recent action

If you make a mistake while using gedit, you can undo it by pressing CtrlZ, or by clicking gedit Undo. Doing so will cause gedit to undo one set of similar actions.

Undoing a "set of similar actions" means, for example, that gedit will remove an entire word rather than removing each character in the word one at a time. This makes gedit's undo feature more efficient.

You cannot undo a change after you have saved it.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-open-files-from-sidepane.page0000644000373100047300000000462212315065475027314 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com View and open files from the side pane

The most common way to switch between files in gedit is by using the tabs at the top of the gedit window. In some cases, though, particularly when you are working with a large number of open files, you may find it easier to use the side pane.

To activate the side pane, select View Side Pane, or just press the F9 key.

You can toggle the side pane open or closed by pressing F9 at any time.

Opening files from the side pane

To open files from the side pane, first open the side pane by selecting View Side Pane, then click on the file-browser icon at the bottom of the pane.

This will activate the file-browser mode of the side pane. You can then use the navigation buttons at the top of the pane to locate and open your desired files.

Using the side pane to switch between open files

Once you have several files open, you can use the side pane to switch between open files. To activate the file browser portion of the side pane, click on the file icon at the bottom of the side pane.

Clicking on any file name in the side pane will open that file for editing.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-plugins-external-tools.page0000644000373100047300000000343712315065476027167 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Run scripts on your current files, and interact with other applications External tools

The External Tools plugin can help simplify repetitive tasks. Specifically, it extends gedit by helping you to run scripts on your working files, and by allowing gedit to interact with other programs on your computer. To enable the External Tools plugin, select gedit PreferencesPlugins External Tools.

Configure the external tools plugin

Once you have enabled the plugin, you will need to configure it to suit your needs. The configuration options are available by selecting ToolsManage External Tools.

This plugin is for advanced users, and requires knowledge of scripting to be used effectively. Use this plugin with care, as mistakes with your scripts can affect your work in unintended ways.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-shortcut-keys.page0000644000373100047300000002516612315065476025357 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Paolo Borelli Jesse van den Kieboom Steve Frécinaux Ignacio Casal Quinteiro Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Shortcut keys

Use shortcut keys to perform common tasks more quickly than with the mouse and menus. The following tables list all of gedit's shortcut keys.

Tab-related Shortcut keys

To Do This

Press This

Switch to the next tab to the left

CtrlAlt PageUp

Switch to the next tab to the right

CtrlAlt PageDown

Close tab

CtrlW

Save all tabs

CtrlShift L

Close all tabs

CtrlShift W

Jump to nth tab

Alt n
Shortcut keys for working with files

To Do This

Press This

Create a new document

CtrlN

Open a document

CtrlO

Save the current document

CtrlS

Save the current document with a new filename

CtrlShift S

Print the current document

Ctrl P

Print preview

CtrlShift P

Close the current document

CtrlW

Quit gedit

CtrlQ
Shortcut keys for editing files

To Do This

Press This

Move to the beginning of the current line

Home

Move to the end of the current line

End

Move to the beginning of the document

CtrlHome

Move to the end of the document

CtrlEnd

Move the selected word right one word

AltRight Arrow

Move the selected word left one word

AltLeft Arrow

Undo the last action

CtrlZ

Redo the last undone action

CtrlShift Z

Cut the selected text or region and place it on the clipboard

CtrlX

Copy the selected text or region onto the clipboard

CtrlC

Paste the contents of the clipboard

CtrlV

Select all text in the file

CtrlA

Delete the current line

CtrlD

Move the selected line up one line

AltUp Arrow

Move the selected line down one line

AltDown Arrow

Add a tab stop

Tab

Remove a tab stop

ShiftTab
Shortcut keys for showing and hiding panes

To Do This

Press This

Show / hide the side pane

F9

Show / hide the bottom pane.

CtrlF9
Shortcut keys for searching

To Do This

Press This

Find a string

CtrlF

Find the next instance of the string

CtrlG

Find the previous instance of the string

CtrlShiftG

Search and Replace

CtrlH

Clear highlight

CtrlShift K

Goto line

CtrlI
Shortcut keys for tools

To Do This

Press This

Check spelling

ShiftF7

Remove trailing spaces (with plugin)

AltF12

Run "make" in the current directory (with plugin)

F8

Directory listing (with plugin)

CtrlShift D
Shortcut keys for user help

To Do This

Press This

Open the gedit user guide

F1
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-create-new-file.page0000644000373100047300000000172112315065476025471 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Create a new file

The easiest way to create a new file in gedit, is to click the icon in the toolbar that looks like a blank piece of paper. If you prefer, you may also select FileNew, or press CtrlN.

Any one of these actions will create a new file in the gedit window. If you have other files open in gedit, the new file that you create will appear as a new tab to the right of those files.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-plugins-doc-stats.page0000644000373100047300000000324412315065476026104 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com View document statistics Document statistics

The Document Statistics plugin shows you various statistics about your current document. To enable this plugin, select geditPreferences PluginsDocument Statistics.

Using Document Statistics

Once the plugin is enabled, use it by selecting Tools Document Statistics. A window will display the statistical information of your document, including the number of words, lines, characters, non-space characters, and the size of your file in bytes.

You can also use Document Statistics to show you information about just a portion of your document. To do this, use the mouse pointer to select the portion of text that you want to examine, and then select ToolsDocument Statistics. Gedit will display information for both your entire document, and for the portion of text that you highlighted.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-open-files.page0000644000373100047300000000321612315065476024564 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Open a file or set of files

To open a file in gedit, click the Open button, or press CtrlO.

This will cause the Open Files dialog to appear. Use your mouse or keyboard to select the file that you wish to open, and then click Open. The file that you've selected will open in a new tab.

To close the Open Files dialog without opening a file, click Cancel.

You can use the Ctrl and Shift keys to open more than one file at a time. If you hold down the Ctrl key while you select multiple files, clicking Open will open each of the files that you have selected.

Holding down the Shift while you select multiple files will open the first file that you select, the last file that you select, and all of the files in between.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-save-file.page0000644000373100047300000000214712315065476024400 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Save a file

To save a file in gedit, click on the disk-drive icon with the word Save next to it. You may also select File Save, or just press CtrlS.

If you are saving a new file, the Save File dialog will appear, and you can select a name for the file, as well as the directory where you would like the file to be saved.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-plugins-pyconsole.page0000644000373100047300000000227112315065475026214 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Add an interactive Python console to the bottom pane Python console

You can add a Python console to the bottom pane, allowing you to test Python scripts without leaving gedit. To enable the Python console, select gedit PreferencesPlugins Python Console.

Once the Python console is enabled, you can open it by selecting ViewBottom Pane, or just press ShiftF9.

If you have also enabled the Embeded Terminal plugin, the Python Console will appear as a separate tab in the bottom pane.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-files-basic.page0000644000373100047300000000131512315065476024702 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com File basics: Open, close, and save files

If you are new to gedit, these topics will help you with creating, saving, and opening and closing files.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-change-default-font.page0000644000373100047300000000264312315065475026340 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com 2011 2012 2013 Change the default font

gedit will use the system fixed-width font by default, but you can change the default gedit font to suit your preferences.

To change the default font in <app>gedit</app>:

Select gedit Preferences Font & Colors.

Uncheck the box next to the phrase, "Use the system fixed-width font."

Click on the current font name. gedit will open a font-chooser window, allowing you to see available fonts and choose the one that you prefer.

After you have chosen a new font, use the slider under the list of fonts to set the default font size.

Click Select, and then click Close.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-syntax-highlighting.page0000644000373100047300000000255212315065476026516 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Turn on syntax highlighting
Syntax Highlighting

gedit provides syntax highlighting for a wide range of markup, programming, and scientific languages. If gedit recognizes the syntax being used when you open a file, it will automatically highlight the text.

If your syntax or language is not highlighted upon startup, you can select the appropriate syntax or language by clicking View Highlight Mode, and then choosing the desired syntax. Alternately, you can select the syntax name from a list at the bottom of the gedit window.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-close-file.page0000644000373100047300000000163712315065475024551 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Close a file

To close a file in gedit, select File Close. Alternately, you can click the small "X" that appears on the right-side of the file's tab, or press Ctrl W.

Any one of these actions will close a file in gedit. If your file contains changes that have not been saved, gedit will prompt you to save those changes before closing the file.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-printing-order.page0000644000373100047300000000425512315065476025472 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Getting Copies To Print In The Correct Order
Reverse

Printers usually print the first page first, and the last page last, so the pages end up in reverse order when you pick them up. To reverse the order:

Select File Print.

In the General tab of the Print dialog under Copies, check Reverse.

The last page will be printed first, and so on.

Collate

If you are printing more than one copy of the document, the print outs will be grouped by page number by default. (e.g. The copies of page one come out, then the copies of page two, etc.) Collating will make each copy come out with its pages grouped together.

To Collate:

Click File Print.

In the General tab of the Print dialog under Copies check Collate.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-full-screen.page0000644000373100047300000000376712315065476024755 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Use fullscreen mode

When working with a large document, you may find it helpful to work in gedit's fullscreen mode. Using fullscreen mode will hide the menu bar, tab bar and the tool bar, presenting you with more of your text and allowing you to better focus on your tasks.

Turn on fullscreen mode

To turn on fullscreen mode, select View Fullscreen, or press F11. gedit's menu, title, and tab-bars will hide, and you will only be presented with the text of your current file.

If you need to perform an action from the gedit menu while working in fullscreen mode, move your mouse pointer to the top of the screen. The gedit menu bar will reappear, and you can select your desired action.

To switch between open tabs while in fullscreen mode, press either CtrlAltPgUp or CtrlAltPgDn.
Turn off fullscreen mode

To turn off fullscreen mode and return to the standard gedit window, press F11.

You can also move your mouse cursor to the top of the screen, and wait for the menu bar to appear. When the menu bar appears, select Leave Fullscreen.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000071412315065476022401 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000

This work is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported License. To view a copy of this license, visit http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/ or send a letter to Creative Commons, 444 Castro Street, Suite 900, Mountain View, California, 94041, USA.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-plugin-guide.page0000644000373100047300000000233612315065476025116 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Configure and use gedit Plugins

You can do more with gedit by using plugins. Several plugins are installed by default, but a large number of other plugins are available separately.

Many Linux distributions make a group of these plugins available as a gedit-plugins package. Install the gedit-plugins package to make these extra plugins available to gedit.
Default gedit Plugins
Additional gedit Plugins
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-view-open-files-in-sidepane.page0000644000373100047300000000375512315065476027736 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in View a list of files in the side pane

Keeping track of a large number of files using tabs can be difficult. One way of managing large numbers of files is viewing them in a side pane. Side panes allow you to view more files at a time than is possible using tabs alone.

To view a list of open files in a side pane, click View Side Pane. A pane will appear to the left of the workspace with a listing of all currently open files. Clicking a file in the side pane will display that file in the workspace.

The side pane also contains a File Browser view. If the pane displays a file directory instead of currently open files, click documents icon at the bottom of the pane to switch to the Documents view.

The side pane only displays files that are open in the current window. When multiple windows are open, only the files in the current window will be displayed in the side pane.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-plugins-insert-date-time.page0000644000373100047300000000267212315065476027362 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Insert the current date/time at the cursor position Insert date/time

As this name of this plugin suggests, the Insert Date/Time plugin allows you to insert the date and/or time at the current cursor position. To enable this plugin, select gedit PreferencesPlugins Insert Date/Time. To use the plugin, press EditInsert Date and Time.

By default, the Insert Date/Time plugin will prompt you to choose your preferred date/time format each time that you use the plugin. However, you can choose your own default date and time format by selecting geditPreferences PluginsInsert Date/TimeConfigure.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-open-recent.page0000644000373100047300000000270612315065476024745 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Reopen a recently-used file

By default, gedit provides easy access to five of your most recently-used files. Here is how you can open a recently-used file:

Click the downward-facing arrow to the right of the Open button.

gedit will display a list of the five most-recently used files.

Select the desired file, and it will open in a new tab.

To adjust the number of recently-used files that gedit displays, you will need to use the dconf-editor application.

Launch dconf-editor and select org gnomegeditpreferencesui max-recents.

Double-click on the number next to max-recents and change the number to your desired value.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-edit-as-root.page0000644000373100047300000000246612315065475025037 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Edit a file as the root user

Editing files as the root user is potentially dangerous, and may break your system in bad ways. Take great care when editing files as the root user.

To edit files as the root user, launch gedit from the terminal by entering:

sudo gedit

Using the sudo command, you will need to successfully enter your password before gedit will open.

As an alternative to the sudo command, you may obtain administrative privileges by entering:

su -

You would then launch gedit using the gedit command.

Once you have opened gedit with administrative privileges, gedit will keep those privileges until you close it.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-tabs-moving.page0000644000373100047300000000646412315065476024761 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Move and re-order tabs

Tabs in gedit can be moved, making it easier to work with your files. Tabs can be can re-ordered within the same window, moved outside of gedit (creating a new gedit window), and moved from one window to another.

Change the order of tabs in the gedit window

To change the ordering of tabs in a window:

Click and hold the mouse button on the tab.

Move the tab to the desired position among the other tab.

Release the mouse button.

The tab will be placed in the position closest to where you release the tab, immediately beside other opened tabs.

Move a tab, creating a new gedit window

To create a new window from an existing tab:

Click and hold the mouse button on the tab.

Drag the tab out of the gedit window.

Release the mouse button.

or, while the tab to be moved is open, choose Documents Move to New Window

To move a tab into a new window when gedit is maximized, drag the tab onto the top bar at the top of the screen.
Move a tab to another gedit window

If you want to move a tab from one window to another:

Click and hold the mouse button on the tab.

Drag the tab to the new window.

Place it beside other tabs in the new window.

Release the mouse button.

You may find it easier to move a tab from one window to another by dragging the tab to the Activities hot-corner of GNOME Shell. This will reveal each of the open gedit windows. You can then release the tab on the desired gedit window.

See the tab-related shortcut keys table to make it easier to manage your tabs.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-plugins-modelines.page0000644000373100047300000000652012315065476026162 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Emacs, Kate and Vim-style modelines support for gedit Modelines

The Modelines plugin allows gedit to analyze the lines of text at the start and end of a file, and then apply a set of document preferences to the file. The Modelines plugin supports a subset of the options used by the Emacs, Kate and Vim text editors.

To enable the Modelines plugin, select gedit PreferencesPluginsModelines.

General Modeline Options

The following options can be set using gedit modelines:

Tab width

Indent width

Inserting spaces instead of tabs

Text Wrapping

Right margin width

Preferences set using modelines take precedence over the ones specified in the preference dialog.
Emacs Modelines

The first two lines of a document are scanned for Emacs modelines, and gedit supports the following Emacs modeline options:

Tab-width

Indent-offset

Indent-tabs-mode

Text auto-wrap

For more information on Emacs modelines, visit the GNU Emacs Manual.

Kate Modelines

The first and last ten lines a document are scanned for Kate modelines, and gedit supports the following Kate modeline options:

tab-width

indent-width

space-indent

word-wrap

word-wrap-column

For more information about Kate modelines, visit the Kate website.

Vim Modelines

The first and last three lines a document are scanned for Vim modelines, and gedit supports the following Vim modeline options:

et (expandtab)

ts (tabstop)

sw (shiftwidth)

wrap

textwidth

For more information on Vim modelines, visit the Vim website.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-replace.page0000644000373100047300000000714012315065476024136 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Replace text

Editing text can be time consuming. To save time, gedit includes a Replace function that helps you to find and replace portions of text.

Replace text in <app>gedit</app>

Open the Replace tool by clicking Search Replace or press CtrlH.

Enter the text that you wish to replace into the 'Search for:' field.

Enter the new, replacement text into the 'Replace with:' field.

Once you have entered the original and replacement text, select your desired replacement options:

To replace only the next matching portion of text, click Replace.

To replace all occurrences of the searched-for text, click Replace All.

Use the Replace All function with care. Replace All works on the entirety of your text file, and does not allow you to highlight portions of text where the replace function will be performed.
More options Match case

The Match case option allows you to specify whether you want your search to be case-sensitive. If this option is selected, searches will be case-sensitive. If not, searches will not be case-sensitive.

 Match entire word only

Use this option to search for a specific word without including fragments of other words. For example, if you searched for the word 'and' with this option selected, the word 'and' would be matched, but the words 'sand' and 'commander' would not be matched.

Search backwards

This command behaves identically to the Find Previous command. If you wish to step through search results from end to beginning, select this option.

 Wrap around

With the wrap around option enabled, gedit will re-start the search/replace action at the top of the file after it has reached the bottom of the file. This ensures that your search/replace action is made across your entire file.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-plugins-file-browser.page0000644000373100047300000000343412315065476026604 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Use the side pane to browse and open files File browser pane

Depending on how you use gedit, you may find it helpful to use the File Browser pane plugin. This plugin embeds a file browser in the side pane, giving you easy access to your frequently-used files.

You can enable the Side Pane by selecting geditPreferences PluginsFile Browser Pane.

Opening files from the side pane

To activate and use the side pane, select ViewSide pane (or just press F9), and then click on the file-browser icon at the bottom of the pane.

This will activate the file-browser mode of the side pane. You can then use the navigation buttons at the top of the pane to locate and open your desired files.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-quickstart.page0000644000373100047300000000254012315065476024714 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Get started with gedit

gedit is a full-featured text editor for the GNOME desktop environment. You can use it to prepare simple notes and documents, or you can use some of its advanced features, making it your own software development environment.

Once gedit launches, you can start writing right away. To save your text, just click Save.

To learn about additional gedit features and to get assistance with performing additional tasks, explore the other portions of the gedit help.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-open-on-server.page0000644000373100047300000000417712315065476025411 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Open a file that is located on a server

Prior to opening a file on a server from within gedit, you need to know some technical information about the server. For example, you will need to know the IP Address or URL of the server, and may need to know what kind of server it is (e.g., HTTP, FTP, etc.).

Also, some types of servers impose restrictions on what you can do with files stored on the server. For example, you may be able to open a file from a server, but may need to save any changes to the file locally, on your own computer.

With these caveats in mind, perform the following steps to open a file from a server using gedit:

Choose FileOpen to display the Open Files dialog.

Select the Pencil icon near the top of the Open Files dialog.

Enter the IP Address or URL of the appropriate server.

Find and select the file that you wish to open.

Use the Character coding drop-down list to select the appropriate character coding.

Click Open.

Valid types of URI include http:, ftp:, file:, and all of the methods supported by gvfs.

Files from some types of URI are opened as read-only, and any changes you make must be saved to a different location. For example, HTTP only allows files to be read. Files opened from FTP are read-only because not all FTP servers may correctly work with saving remote files.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-search.page0000644000373100047300000000764712315065476024004 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Shobha Tyagi tyagishobha@gmail.com Search for text

The Find tool can help you find specific sequences of text within in your file.

Finding text

Open the search window by clicking Search Find or pressing CtrlF. This will move your cursor to the start of the search window.

Type the text you wish to search for in the search window.

As you type, gedit will begin highlighting the portions of text that match what you have entered.

To scroll through the search results, do any of the following:

Click on the up or down facing arrows next to the search window.

Press the up arrow or down arrow keys on your keyboard.

Press CtrlG or CtrlShiftG.

Press the Ctrl and use your mouse or touchpad's scroll feature to move up or down through the text.

To close the search window, press either Esc or Enter. Pressing Esc will return the cursor to where it was before you began your search. Pressing Enter will return the cursor to the current position in the search results.

Search tips

If you highlight a portion of text with your mouse, and then press CtrlF, the text you've highlighted will appear in the search window.

For more search options, click on the Magnifying Glass icon in the search window, or right-click anywhere in the search window. You can select one or more of the following search options:

Select Match Case to make the search case sensitive.

Select Match Entire Word Only to search only complete words.

Select Wrap Around to search text from top to bottom and cycle back again.

The text that you've searched for will remain highlighted by gedit, even after you have completed your search. To remove the highlight, click SearchClear Highlight, or press CtrlShiftK.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-plugins-quick-open.page0000644000373100047300000000514112315065476026254 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Shobha Tyagi tyagishobha@gmail.com Quickly open a file or set of files Quick open

As the name of this plugin would imply, the Quick Open plugin helps you to open files more quickly than using the usual ways of opening files. To enable this plugin, select gedit PreferencesPluginsQuick Open.

Once you have enabled the Quick Open plugin you can use it as follows:

Open the Quick Open dialog box by pressing CtrlAltO, or by selecting FileQuick Open.

The Quick Open file dialog will appear.

Use your mouse to select the file or files that you want to open.

To select several individual files, hold down your Ctrl key while you click on the files that you want to open.

To select a group of files, click on the first file that you want to open, hold down the Shift key, and then click on the last file in the list that you want to open.

Click Open.

Quick Open will look for files in:

The directory of the currently opened document

The root directory of the File Browser Pane plugin

Recent documents which are also shown in theRecent folder in Files

Directories which you have bookmarked in Files

Your Desktop directory

Your Home directory

Quick Open displays files in any of the above locations regardless of whether or not you have opened them previously.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-plugins-snippets.page0000644000373100047300000001503412315065476026050 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Use snippets to quickly insert often-used pieces of text Snippets

Snippets provide a convenient way of inserting repetitive portions of code into your files. For example, an HTML snippet for the ]]> tag would insert the opening and closing portions of the tag, as well as fixed places where you can enter image attributes. This can make writing code easier and faster.

Enable Snippets Plugin

To enable the Snippets plugin:

Select gedit Preferences Plugins.

Select Snippets to enable the plugin.
Browse Snippets

To browse available snippets:

Select Tools Manage Snippets.

Make sure the syntax is set appropriately. The status bar at the bottom of the gedit window will show the current language setting. This language setting is what allows gedit to insert the proper snippets. Gedit will normally detect the language or syntax of the file that you're using, but sometimes you may need to set it.

In this example, the language is set to HTML.

Browse the snippets that are available for your language or syntax.
Using Snippets

To insert a snippet into your current document:

Type the desired snippet name anywhere in your current document.

Press Tab to insert the snippet associated with the input term.
Snippet Example Usage

For example, if you have set the syntax to HTML, type head , and press the Tab key. The text would have auto completed into a snippet as:

Page Title ]]>
Adding Snippets

You can add new Snippets that work either globally (that is, they are language agnostic) or only in a particular syntax.

Select Tools Manage Snippets.

From the Manage Snippets sidebar select the desired syntax and click on the "+" button to list existing snippets for the selected syntax.

To add a snippet that works globally (that is, when no particular syntax or language has been set for the document), select Global from the Manage Snippets sidebar.

To add a new snippet, click on the "plus" icon in the Manage Snippets sidebar.

Input a name for the new snippet. The name of the snippet can be different from the snippet you want to add.

Under the Activation section, you must input a term for the Tab trigger: textarea. You will be using this term to insert your snippet.

If you wish to insert a snippet with a keyboard shortcut, then click your mouse pointer on Shortcut key: textarea and press the desired combination of keys. Once you have pressed and released the keys, the keyboard shortcut will be set.

Under the textarea for Edit:, input the desired text for the snippet. You may use ${n} to indicate variables, where n is replaced with a number that represents the numerical order of variables included.
New Snippet Example

Consider you have created a snippet with the term greetings in Tab trigger:. The Edit: textarea contains:

Hello ${1:wonderful}${2:amazing} world! ]]>

You can insert this snippet by typing greetings in the document and pressing the Tab key. The following text snippet will be inserted:

Hello wonderfulamazing world!]]>

The words "wonderful" and "amazing" can be retained or deleted depending on your choice of usage. To do so, press Tab to choose between "wonderful" and "amazing" and press Del to delete the least preferred option.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-spellcheck.page0000644000373100047300000001150412315065476024637 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Enable and use spell-checking feature Spell-check your document
Enable the spell checker

The Spell-check feature is provided as a plugin in gedit which can be enabled as required. To enable the plugin:

Select gedit Preferences Plugins.

Select Spell Checker to enable the plugin.
Spell-check your document

To check for misspelt words in your document:

Select Tools Check Spelling.

To have gedit automatically highlight misspelt words in your document as you type, select ToolsHighlight Misspelled Words.
Using spell-check

You can choose the right substitution for misspelt words using the Check Spelling dialog. The misspelt word being checked by the spell-checker is displayed in bold style next to Misspelled word:. You can choose from the following corrective actions:

Change to: allows you to input a word and use Check Word to check the validity of the spelling.

Suggestions: lists the available substitutions for the word.

Ignore allows you to bypass spell check for a instance of current word.

Ignore All allows you to bypass spell check for all instances of the current word.

Change substitutes the misspelt or unrecognized word with a chosen substitute from the Suggestions: list.

Change all substitutes all misspelt or unrecognized words with the chosen substitute from the Suggestions: list.

Add word allows you to add the current word to the gedit User dictionary. Adding custom words to the User dictionary will allow gedit to recognize the word in documents and thus will not be highlighted as a misspelt word.
Define the language to use for spell checking

By default, gedit will use your current language to spell check your document. If you need to use another language, choose ToolsSet Language…, then choose the language you want to use.

Dictionaries

gedit uses Enchant, a small system utility, for spell checking. Enchant can use several different dictionaries to check your spelling. Two such dictionary back-ends are Hunspell and Aspell.

If the language you want to use is not available in gedit, use your computer's software installer or package manager to install the dictionary back-end that you want.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-printing.page0000644000373100047300000000754612315065476024367 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Printing documents

Printing with gedit requires that you have connected and configured your printer. If you have not done this, please consult the printing help for GNOME.

gedit allows you to print both to a file and to paper.

Printing To Paper

You can print your documents to paper using a local or remote printer. To print a file:

Select File Print General.

Select the desired printer from the list of printers available.

You can preview the file using Print Preview and once you are satisfied with the settings, click Print to send the file to printer.

Additionally, from Page Setup tab: you can choose Layout and Paper options. As these settings are available throughout GNOME programs, please consult Layout and Paper options help.

Print Multiple Copies And Between Specified Ranges

You can set Range and Copies options to help you:

Printing To File

You can also use gedit to print to a file. To print your document to file of a different format:

Select File Print Print to File.

Printing is enabled for the following file formats, you may select from:

Portable Document Format (.pdf)

PostScript (.ps)

Scalable Vector Graphic (.svg)

To print the document to file, click Print.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-plugins-zeitgeist-dataprovider.page0000644000373100047300000000245512315065476030677 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shobha Tyagi tyagishobha@gmail.com Log user activity for documents which are opened in gedit Zeitgeist dataprovider

Zeitgeist is a service that logs user activities and events. Zeitgeist lets other applications access this information in the form of statistics and timelines.The Zeitgeist dataprovider plugin for gedit records user activity for documents used with gedit giving easy access to recently-used and frequently-used files.

Enable Zeitgeist dataprovider

Select gedit Preferences Plugins.

Select Zietgeist Dataprovider.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/index.page0000644000373100047300000000342112315065475022535 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 gedit Text Editor gedit Text Editor Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in <media type="image" mime="image/png" src="figures/gedit-icon.png" its:translate="no"/> gedit Text Editor

Welcome to the gedit help guide. For a quick introduction into both gedit's most basic features, as well as some advanced keyboard shortcuts, visit the Get started with gedit and Shortcut keys pages.

Other help topics are grouped together into sections below. Enjoy using gedit!

Working With Files
Configure gedit
gedit Plugins
Printing with gedit
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-plugins-sort.page0000644000373100047300000000564312315065476025177 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Sort lines of text into alphabetical order Sort

The Sort plugin arranges selected lines of text into alphabetical order.

You cannot use the Undo feature to correct a Sort operation, so we recommend that you save the file immediately before performing the sort. If you make a mistake with the sort, you can revert to the previously-saved version of the file by selecting FileRevert.
Enable Sort Plugin

To enable the Sort plugin:

Select gedit Preferences Plugins.

Select Sort to enable the plugin.
Using Sort Plugin

To use the Sort plugin:

Drag and highlight the desired lines of text.

Select gedit Sort.

The Sort dialog will open, allowing you to choose between several sorting options:

Reverse order will arrange the text in reverse alphabetical order.

Remove duplicates will remove duplicate values from the list.

Ignore case will ignore case sensitivity.

To have the sort ignore the characters at the start of the lines, set the first character that should be used for sorting in the Start at column spin box.

To perform the sort operation, click Sort.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-tabs.page0000644000373100047300000000311312315065475023447 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in Add and remove tabs

Working with tabs in gedit allows you to keep an eye on several files in a single window. The tab that is larger than the other tabs indicates the file that is currently open. The smaller tabs indicate other files that are available to work on.

Adding tabs

To add a new tab, create a new file with Ctrl N. The tab will be added to the right side of any other tabs.

Removing tabs

To remove a tab, click the × on the tab's right side. To remove all open tabs, press Ctrl ShiftW.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-plugins-change-case.page0000644000373100047300000000370312315065476026341 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Change the case of selected text Change case

This plugin helps you to change the case of selected portions of text. You can use it to change text to be all lower case, all upper case, to invert the case, or apply title case. To enable this plugin, select geditPreferences PluginsChange Case.

Once the Change Case plugin is enabled, you can use it by completing the following steps:

Highlight the portion of text that you want to change.

Select geditChange Case

Choose your desired text-formatting option.

The updates to the text formatting will take place immediately.

The Invert Case option will convert all lower case letters to upper case, and will convert all upper case letters to lower case.

The Title Case option will convert the first letter of each word to upper case. All other letters will be converted to lower case.

If you have not highlighted any text, the Change Case feature will be grayed-out. You need to select a portion of text before you use the Change Case feature.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gedit/gedit-plugins-install.page0000644000373100047300000000510612315065476025650 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Daniel Neel dneelyep@gmail.com How to install third-party plugins Additional gedit plugins

Installing third-party plugins gives you extra functionality that isn't available in default gedit plugins, or even the extra plugins that are part of the gedit-plugins package. An online list of third-party plugins is kept here.

Installing a third-party plugin involves downloading the plugin, placing the plugin files in the right directory, and activating the plugin.

You can usually download a plugin from the plugin's website, but may need to use a revision-control program like git, bazaar, or subversion to copy a plugin's software repository from the internet. Refer to the plugin's documentation for information on getting the plugin.

Place the plugin files into the /home/username/.local/share/gedit/plugins directory.

Of course, replace the word username with your own username.

After you have placed the plugin files into the correct directory, the plugin will appear in the Preferences menu. Select Edit PreferencesPlugins [Name of Plugin] to enable the plugin.

Click Close.

After you have enabled the plugin, it should be available for you to use.

The .local directory is hidden by default. To view it and other hidden files, select ViewShow Hidden Files, or press CtrlH.

If the directory .local/share/gedit/plugins/ is not present on your system, you will need to create it.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gpl/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000004677712627615151022752 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000
GNU General Public License 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Free Software Foundation Show the 'Help' button 2 1991-06
Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Version 2, June 1991 The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software - to make sure the software is free for all its users. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software - to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with two steps: copyright the software, and offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations. Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION Seccion 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The Program, below, refers to any such program or work, and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term modification.) Each licensee is addressed as you. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. Seccion 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. Seccion 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. Exception: If the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement. These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. Seccion 3 You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. Seccion 4 You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. Seccion 5 You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it. Seccion 6 Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. Seccion 7 If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. Seccion 8 If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. Seccion 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. Seccion 10 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY Seccion 11 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. Seccion 12 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/lgpl/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000007521112627615151023107 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000
GNU Lesser General Public License 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Free Software Foundation Show the 'Help' button 2.1 1999-02
Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Version 2.1, February 1999 The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software - to make sure the software is free for all its users. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others. Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs. When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library. We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances. For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License. In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system. Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and a work that uses the library. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION Seccion 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called this License). Each licensee is addressed as you. A library means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. The Library, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A work based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term modification.) Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. Seccion 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. Seccion 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: The modified work must itself be a software library. You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. Seccion 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. Seccion 4 You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2 ) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. Seccion 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a work that uses the Library. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a work that uses the library. The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. Seccion 6 As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable work that uses the Library, as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with. Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a , above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. For an executable, the required form of the work that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. Seccion 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. Seccion 8 You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. Seccion 9 You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it. Seccion 10 Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. Seccion 11 If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. Seccion 12 If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. Seccion 13 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. Seccion 14 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY Seccion 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. Seccion 16 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/fdl/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000006567612627615151022734 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000
GNU Free Documentation License Version 1.1, març de 2000 2000Free Software Foundation, Inc. Free Software Foundation Projècte de documentacion de GNOME 1.1 2000-03
Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
. Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written document free in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others. PREAMBLE The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other written document free in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others. This License is a kind of copyleft, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software. We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. The Document, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as you. A Modified Version of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language. A Secondary Section is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them. The Invariant Sections are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. The Cover Texts are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. A Transparent copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. A copy that is not Transparent is called Opaque. Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML designed for human modification. Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word processors for output purposes only. The Title Page means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, Title Page means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text. VERBATIM COPYING You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3. You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies. COPYING IN QUANTITY If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than 100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects. If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages. If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material, which the general network-using public has access to download anonymously at no charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public. It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document. MODIFICACIONS You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version: Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the Document (all of its principal authors, if it has less than five). State on the Title Page the name of the publisher of the Modified Version, as the publisher. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice. Include an unaltered copy of this License. Preserve the section entitled History, and its title, and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If there is no section entitled History in the Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the History section. You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission. In any section entitled Acknowledgements or Dedications, preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles. Delete any section entitled Endorsements. Such a section may not be included in the Modified Version. Do not retitle any existing section as Endorsements or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section. If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles. You may add a section entitled Endorsements, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard. You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one. The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version . COMBINING DOCUMENTS You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice. The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work. In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled History in the various original documents, forming one section entitled History; likewise combine any sections entitled Acknowledgements, and any sections entitled Dedications. You must delete all sections entitled Endorsements. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects. You may extract a single document from such a collection, and dispbibute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a Modified Version of the Document, provided no compilation copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a compilation is called an aggregate, and this License does not apply to the other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document , on account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves derivative works of the Document. If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on covers that surround only the Document within the aggregate. Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole aggregate. REVIRADA Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License provided that you also include the original English version of this License. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original English version of this License, the original English version will prevail. TERMINATION You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/. Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License or any later version applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. Addendum To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:
Copyright © 2007 Yannig Marchegay. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled GNU Free Documentation License.
If you have no Invariant Sections, write with no Invariant Sections instead of saying which ones are invariant. If you have no Front-Cover Texts, write no Front-Cover Texts instead of Front-Cover Texts being LIST; likewise for Back-Cover Texts. If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit their use in free software.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-sudoku/license.page0000644000373100047300000000356112350663227024374 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Legal information. License

This work is distributed under a CreativeCommons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 Unported license.

You are free:

<em>To share</em>

To copy, distribute and transmit the work.

 <em>To remix</em>

To adapt the work.

Under the following conditions:

<em>Attribution</em>

You must attribute the work in the manner specified by the author or licensor (but not in any way that suggests that they endorse you or your use of the work).

<em>Share Alike</em>

If you alter, transform, or build upon this work, you may distribute the resulting work only under the same, similar or a compatible license.

For the full text of the license, see the CreativeCommons website, or read the full Commons Deed.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-sudoku/statistics.page0000644000373100047300000000341112350663227025136 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Statistics

To view the statistics about the current puzzle, click GamePuzzle Statistics.

Very hard puzzle statistics box example

GNOME Sudoku ranks puzzles based on the number of cells that can be rapidly filled.

The puzzle statistics box shows:

the overall difficulty

the number of cells which can be filled by elimination, starting from the blank grid (i.e. only a 2 can go in this box, so it must be a 2)

the number of cells that can be filled by the process of filling, starting from the blank grid (i.e. only one cell in this row can be a 2, so it must be a 2)

the number of times in solving the puzzle that the program used the trial-and-error algorithm to solve the puzzle

All sudoku puzzles can be solved without ever having to guess. When the statistics box says that Sudoku used trial-and-error X number of times, it does not mean that a human would have to use trial-and-error to solve the puzzle.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-sudoku/documentation.page0000644000373100047300000000214712350663227025622 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Help write documentation

The GNOME Games documentation is maintained by a volunteer community. You are welcome to participate.

To contribute to the Documentation Project, feel free to get in touch with us using irc, or via our mailing list.

Our wiki page contains useful information.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-sudoku/strategy.page0000644000373100047300000000715112350663227024613 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Radoslav Asparuhov rasparuhov@gmail.com 2011 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Strategy

There is only one possibility for each cell in a Sudoku puzzle. The following strategies will help you systematically discover the solution for every cell.

Strategy 1:

Choose the row with the most numbers in it.

You should choose the row or column with the most numbers. For simplicity, these instructions are written as if a row had the most numbers in it.

Determine which numbers in the row are missing.

Choose one of the empty cells in this row. Determine which of the missing numbers are in that column or in that 3x3 box.

Using notes, enter the missing numbers which are not in that column or 3x3 box, into the the upper field. These numbers are candidate solutions for that cell.

Go to the next empty cell of the chosen row and repeat the above method. Repeat this for every row and column, starting at those with the most numbers and continuing through to the least. Always look carefully for the numbers and don't forget the 3x3 boxes.

This strategy will help reveal the cells which have only one possible choice. When revealed, you can fill those cells in with that choice, and repeat the strategy again until the entire puzzle is solved.
Example use of strategy 1.
Strategy 2:

Find the number which appears most often.

Now look at the left vertical alignment of the 3x3 boxes and locate the column(s) in which this number appears.

In this alignment, go to a 3x3 box which does not contain this number in any of its cells. Using notes, enter this number in every empty cell of the column in which this number does not appear. If the number appears in the row of one of these cells, do not enter it in that cell's notes.

Repeat the last two steps for the center and right vertical alignments.

Find the next number which appears most, and repeat until you have done this for all 9 numbers.

This strategy will help reveal the cells which have only one possible choice. When revealed, you can fill those cells in with that choice, and repeat the strategy again until the entire puzzle is solved.
Example use of strategy2.

If neither of the above strategies solves the puzzle on its own, you can alternate strategies. You can also combine the strategies.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-sudoku/develop.page0000644000373100047300000000207212350663227024404 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Help develop

The GNOME Games are developed and maintained by a volunteer community. You are welcome to participate.

If you would like to help develop GNOME Games, you can get in touch with the developers using irc, or via our mailing list.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-sudoku/keyboard-shortcuts.page0000644000373100047300000000531412350663227026604 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com 2011 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Keyboard shortcuts

This is a list of the keyboard shortcuts you can use in Sudoku.

Starting and exiting

New game

CtrlN

Reset game

CtrlB

Close the sudoku window

CtrlW
Hints and Notes

Hint

CtrlH

Track Additions

CtrlT

Clear notes from the top of a cell

CtrlJ

Clear notes from the bottom of a cell

CtrlK

Add a number to the top notes of a cell

Ctrl#

Remove a number to the top notes of a cell

Alt#
Other

Print displayed puzzle

CtrlP

Undo

CtrlZ

Redo

CtrlShiftZ

Open Help

F1

Switch to fullscreen mode

F11
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-sudoku/print-inprogress-game.page0000644000373100047300000000220212350663227027175 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Print your game

You can print the sudoku are playing to a file or to a printer.

To print the sudoku you are currently playing:

Click GamePrint.

Select your printer.

Click Print.

If you don't have a printer in the list, see Set up a local printer.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-sudoku/highlighting.page0000644000373100047300000000176312350663227025421 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Enlusiment

You can turn on highlighting to automatically highlight the current row, column and box in different colors. This can make it easier to see which values cannot go into a current square. To toggle highlighting, click SettingsHighlighter.

Sudoku with highlighting.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-sudoku/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000050312350663227023713 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000

This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported License.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-sudoku/basics.page0000644000373100047300000000423012350663227024210 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com 2011 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Basics

Sudoku can be played using the keyboard, the mouse, or any combination of the two.

Using the keyboard

To select a cell, use the arrow keys to move the blue outline onto it.

To put a number in a cell, select the cell, and then press the number.

To remove a number from a cell, select the cell, and then press the Delete key, the Backspace, or the 0 key.
Using the mouse

To select a cell, move your mouse over it and click.

To put a number in a selected cell, click on the center of the cell, and then click on the number you wish to input.

To remove a number from a selected cell, click in the center of the cell and then click Clear.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-sudoku/notes.page0000644000373100047300000000347012350663227024101 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Thomas Hinkle tmhinkle@gmail.com 2011 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Nòtas

Notes, or pencilmarks, can be added to any cell. They allow you to mark possible values for a cell, or store other data that might help you. Notes will store all characters in order, but will remove repetitions of characters.

To add notes to a cell:

Select the cell

Click on the part of a cell that is above the line that appears when you hover over it. Alternatively, type N.

Type your notes

Press Enter or click outside of the text box.

You can also take notes in the bottom of the cell by clicking in the bottom of the cell or by typing M. However, this area is used when you click Show All Possible Numbers. If you plan to use this area, you should not use Show All Possible Numbers.

You can add a number to the notes at the top of the square by typing Ctrl1 through Ctrl9

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-sudoku/hints.page0000644000373100047300000000351612350663227024077 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Hints

To show possible values for all cells click:

SettingsShow Possible Numbers.

To ask Sudoku to show a cell that is easy to fill:

Click ToolsHint, or Hint in the toolbar.

These features work based on the logical possibilities given the current board and not work by looking at the solution. This means that if you made an error in an earlier move, these features may show incorrect possible values.

A cell which usually has only one possible solution based on the current state of the board is outlined with flashing red. In the case of a puzzle that has no cells that have only one possible solution, a cell with two possible solutions or the least amount of possible solutions will be highlighted. Clicking Hint multiple times may not always point you to the same cell.

You can edit the possible numbers by clicking in the bottom of the cell.

These features can make easy puzzles too easy, so you should use this mode sparingly.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-sudoku/bug-filing.page0000644000373100047300000000401312350663227024766 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Report a Problem

GNOME Sudoku is maintained by a volunteer community. You are welcome to participate. If you notice a problem you can file a bug report. To file a bug, go to .

This is a bug tracking system where users and developers can file details about bugs, crashes and request enhancements.

To participate you need an account which will give you the ability to gain access, file bugs, and make comments. Also, you need to register so you can receive updates by e-mail about the status of your bug. If you don't already have an account, just click on the New Account link to create one.

Once you have an account, log in, click on File a BugApplicationsgnome-sudoku. Before reporting a bug, please read the bug writing guidelines, and please browse for the bug to see if it already exists.

If you are requesting a new feature, choose enhancement in the Severity menu. Fill in the Summary and Description sections and click Commit.

Your report will be given an ID number, and its status will be updated as it is being dealt with.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-sudoku/print-blank-puzzles.page0000644000373100047300000000302612350663227026701 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 2011 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Print blank sudokus

To print one or more blank puzzles:

Click GamePrint multiple sudokus.

Select the total number of sudokus to print from the drop down menu.

Select the number of sudokus per page from the next drop down menu.

Select difficult level of the games you would like to print.

Games that have already been played are not printed by default. If you don't care about repeating games, select Include games you've already played in list of games to print in the Details category.

Games that are printed are not marked as played by default. You can choose to Mark games as played once you've printed them. under the Details category.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-sudoku/translate.page0000644000373100047300000000323612350663227024746 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Help translate

The GNOME games user interface and documentation is being translated by a world-wide volunteer community. You are welcome to participate.

There are many languages for which translations are still needed.

To start translating you will need to create an account and join the translation team for your language. This will give you the ability to upload new translations.

You can chat with GNOME translators using irc. People on the channel are located worldwide, so you may not get an immediate response as a result of timezone differences.

Alternatively, you can contact the Internationalization Team using their mailing list.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-sudoku/trackers.page0000644000373100047300000000667612350663227024602 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Track trial-and-error solutions

Trackers can be used to keep track of trial-and-error solutions. Tracked moves are entered in a different color to help make the moves visually distinct from moves made earlier in the game. This feature is particularly useful when solving difficult games.

Using the tracker:

You can toggle the tracker interface in one of the following ways:

Click ToolsTrack Additions.

Click Track Additions in the toolbar. If the toolbar is not visible, click SettingsShow Toolbar.

You can make untracked moves if no tracker is selected.

To create a new tracker click Add. From this point on, any number you enter will be part of the selected tracker.

You can create as many trackers as you want by clicking Add.

You can apply a set of tracked additions by selecting the tracker and clicking Apply.

You can clear a tracker by selecting it and clicking Clear.

Some sudoku players believe you should never use trial-and-error to solve a puzzle. These players should not use this feature.
Video Demonstration Click ToolsTrack Additions. You can make untracked moves if no tracker is selected. To create a new tracker click Add. From this point on, any number you enter will be part of the selected tracker. You can create as many trackers as you want by clicking Add. You can apply a set of tracked additions by selecting the tracker and clicking Apply. You can clear a tracker by selecting it and clicking Clear.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-sudoku/rules.page0000644000373100047300000000207712350663227024105 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Thomas Hinkle tmhinkle@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Game rules

In order to complete the puzzle, you must fill each cell with a number between 1 and 9, inclusive, such that no number is repeated in any row, column or 3x3 box.

In a solved sudoku, each row, column, and 3x3 box contains all the numbers 1 through 9.

Each puzzle has only one solution.

Outline of a row, a column and a 3x3 box using highlighting option.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-sudoku/commandline.page0000644000373100047300000000336612350663227025243 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Commandline

To view commandline options for gnome-sudoku: gnome-sudoku --help

To view the version number of your gnome-sudoku: gnome-sudoku --version

Print debug information

This command may be useful when your are filing a bug and need to post debug information: gnome-sudoku -v

Profile information

This command is useful if you are filing a bug about slow performance. It will show the perfomance of different functions that run, and possibly reveal which specific function(s) may be responsible for poor performance. This information attached to a bug could make it easier to fix the problem, but this command is used mostly by programmers.

gnome-sudoku -p

When you exit the application, the terminal will show you performance statistics.

Step through <app>GNOME Sudoku</app>

This command is mostly used by programmers to step through the code: gnome-sudoku -w

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-sudoku/save-resume.page0000644000373100047300000000271012350663227025201 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Thomas Hinkle tmhinkle@gmail.com 2011 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Save and resume
Saving your game

Your games are saved automatically every few minutes and whenever you change games or close the application.

Resuming your game

Whenever you start Sudoku or click New, your saved games will be listed in the puzzle selection screen. You will see a miniature image of the saved puzzle, the date you last played it, and how long you have played it. To open the puzzle, just double click on it.

If you'd like to stop playing one game and begin another, just select New and begin your new game.

Resuming previous games.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-sudoku/index.page0000644000373100047300000000307112350663227024055 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 <media type="image" src="figures/logo.png"/> GNOME Sudoku GNOME Sudoku Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 <media type="image" src="figures/logo32.png">GNOME Sudoku logo</media> GNOME Sudoku

Gnome Sudoku is based on the popular number-based logic puzzle in which one must fill a 9 X 9 square with the correct digits. The unique puzzles can be played on screen or printed to take along. All games persist across sessions and you can resume any old game at any time, as well as replay any game you've already won.

Game Play
Useful tips
Printing
Advanced
Get Involved
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-sudoku/toolbar.page0000644000373100047300000000163112350663227024410 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chris Beiser ctbeiser@gmail.com 2011

Creative Commons Share Alike 3.0

 Toolbar

To show or hide the toolbar, click SettingsShow Toolbar.

The toolbar, located under the menu bar, lets you perform common actions with your mouse. To use a toolbar item, just click on it. The buttons, from left to right, are New Game, Undo, Redo, Hint, and Track Additions.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-terminal/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000773112253427713024226 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gnome-terminal/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000017264712253427713025102 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 ]>
GNOME Terminal Manual The Terminal gives users the power to communicate with their system using text-based commands through a shell such as Bash. 2002 2003 2004 Sun Microsystems 2000 Miguel de Icaza 2000 Michael Zucchi 2000 Alexander Kirillov 2008 Christian Persch 2009 2010 Paul Cutler Projècte de documentacion de GNOME Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Sun GNOME Documentation Team Sun Microsystems Miguel de Icaza GNOME Documentation Project Michael Zucchi GNOME Documentation Project Alexander Kirillov GNOME Documentation Project Projècte de documentacion de GNOME GNOME Terminal Manual V2.9 January 2010 Paul Cutler pcutler@gnome.org GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Terminal Manual V2.8 March 2009 Paul Cutler GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Terminal Manual V2.7 November 2003 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Terminal Manual V2.6 September 2003 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Terminal Manual V2.5 May 2003 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Terminal Manual V2.4 January 2003 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Terminal Manual V2.3 August 2002 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Terminal Manual V2.2 August 2002 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Terminal Manual V2.1 August 2002 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Terminal Manual V2.0 April 2002 Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project GNOME Terminal User's Guide May 2000 Miguel de Icaza, Michael Zucchi, Alexander Kirollov docs@gnome.org GNOME Documentation Project This manual describes version 2.30 of GNOME Terminal. Feedback To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the GNOME Terminal application or this manual, follow the directions in the GNOME Feedback Page. GNOME Terminal terminal application Introduccion GNOME Terminal is a terminal emulation application that you can use to perform the following tasks: Access a UNIX shell in the GNOME environment A shell is a program that interprets and executes the commands that you type at a command line prompt. When you start GNOME Terminal, the application starts the default shell that is specified in your system account. You can switch to a different shell at any time. Run any application that is designed to run on VT102, VT220, and xterm terminals GNOME Terminal emulates the xterm application developed by the X Consortium. In turn, the xterm application emulates the DEC VT102 terminal and also supports the DEC VT220 escape sequences. An escape sequence is a series of characters that starts with the Esc character. GNOME Terminal accepts all of the escape sequences that the VT102 and VT220 terminals use for functions such as to position the cursor and to clear the screen. Per començar The following sections describe how to start GNOME Terminal. Starting GNOME Terminal You can start GNOME Terminal in the following ways: Menut Applications Choose AccessoriesTerminal. Linha de comanda Execute the following command: gnome-terminal You can use command line options to modify the way in which you run GNOME Terminal. To view the command line options, execute the following command: gnome-terminal --help When You First Start GNOME Terminal When you start GNOME Terminal for the first time, the application opens a terminal window with a group of default settings. The group of default settings is called the Default profile. The profile name appears in the titlebar of the GNOME Terminal window.
Example of a Default GNOME Terminal Window GNOME Terminal default window GNOME Terminal default window
The terminal window displays a command prompt where you can type UNIX commands. The command prompt can be a %, #, >, $, or any other special character. The cursor is positioned at the command prompt. When you type a UNIX command and press Return, the computer executes the command. By default, GNOME Terminal uses the default shell specified for the user who starts the application. GNOME Terminal also sets the following environment variables: TERM Set to xterm by default. COLORTERM Set to gnome-terminal by default. WINDOWID Set to the X11 window identifier by default. Terminal Profiles You can create a new profile, and apply the new profile to the terminal to modify characteristics such as font, color and effects, scroll behavior, window title, and compatibility. You can also specify a command that runs automatically when you start GNOME Terminal in the profile. You define each terminal profile in the Profiles dialog, which you access from the Edit menu. You can define as many different profiles as you require. When you start a terminal, you can choose the profile that you want to use for the terminal. Alternatively, you can change the terminal profile while you use the terminal. To specify an initial profile for a terminal when you start the application from a command line, use the following command: gnome-terminal --window-with-profile=profilename The name of the current profile appears in the titlebar of the GNOME Terminal, unless you specify a different titlebar name in the Editing Profile dialog. See for information about how to define and use a new terminal profile. Working With Multiple Terminals GNOME Terminal provides a tab feature that enables you to open several terminals in a single window. Each terminal opens in a separate tab. Click on the appropriate tab to display the terminal in the window. Each tabbed terminal in a window is a separate subprocess, so you can use each terminal for different tasks. You can apply a different profile to each tabbed terminal in the window. The titlebar of the terminal window shows either the name of the current profile, or the name specified by the current profile. shows a GNOME Terminal window with four tabs. In this case, each of the four tabs has a different profile. The name of the profile in the active tab, Profile 1, appears in the titlebar.
Example of a Terminal Window With Tabs GNOME Terminal default window GNOME Terminal default window
See for information about how to open a new tabbed terminal. Utilizacion Opening and Closing Terminals To open a new terminal window: Choose FileOpen Terminal. The new terminal inherits the application settings and default shell from the parent terminal. To close a terminal window: Choose FileClose Window. This action closes the terminal and any subprocesses that you opened from the terminal. If you close the last terminal window, the GNOME Terminal application exits. To add a new tabbed terminal to a window: Choose FileOpen TabDefault or just FileOpen Tab if there is no submenu. To display a tabbed terminal: Click on the tab of the tabbed terminal that you want to display, or select a tab title from the Tabs menu. Alternatively, choose TabsNext Tab or TabsPrevious Tab to navigate between tabs. To close a tabbed terminal: Display the tabbed terminal that you want to close. Choose FileClose Tab. Managing Profiles To add a new profile: Choose FileNew Profile to display the New Profile dialog. Type the new profile name in the Profile name text box. Use the Base on drop-down list to select the profile on which you want to base the new profile. Click Create to display the Editing Profile dialog. Click Close. GNOME Terminal adds the profile to the TerminalChange Profile submenu. To change the profile of a tabbed terminal: Click on the tab of the tabbed terminal for which you want to change the profile. Choose TerminalChange Profileprofilename. Modificar un perfil : You edit profiles in the Editing Profile dialog. You can access the Editing Profile dialog in the following ways: Choose EditCurrent Profile. Right-click in the terminal window, then choose Profiles Profile Preferences from the popup menu. Choose EditProfiles, select the profile you want to edit, then click Edit. For information on the options you can set for profiles, see . Suprimir un perfil : Choose EditProfiles. Select the name of the profile that you want to delete in the Profiles list, then click Delete. The Delete Profile dialog is displayed. Click Delete to confirm the deletion. Click Close to close the Edit Profiles dialog. Modifying a Terminal Window To hide the menubar: Choose ViewShow Menubar. To show a hidden menubar: Right-click on the terminal window, then choose Show Menubar from the popup menu. To display the GNOME Terminal window in full-screen mode: Choose ViewFull Screen. Full-screen mode displays the text in a window that fills the full screen. The window does not contain a window frame or titlebar. To exit from this mode, choose ViewFull Screen again. To change the appearance of the terminal window: See for information about the options that you can choose in the Editing Profile dialog to change the appearance of the terminal window. For example, you can change the background color, or the location of the scrollbar. Working with the Contents of Terminal Windows To scroll through previous commands and output: Perform one of the following actions: Use the scrollbar, which is usually displayed on the right of the terminal window. Press the ShiftPage Up, ShiftPage Down, ShiftHome, or ShiftEnd keys. The number of lines that you can scroll back to in the terminal window is determined by the Scrollback setting in the Scrolling tabbed section of the Editing Profile dialog. You can also scroll up or down one line at a time by pressing ControlShiftUp or ControlShiftDown. To select and copy text: You can select text in any of the following ways: To select a character at a time, click on the first character that you want to select and drag the mouse to the last character that you want to select. To select a word at a time, double-click on the first word that you want to select and drag the mouse to the last word that you want to select. Symbols are selected individually. To select a line at a time, triple-click on the first line that you want to select and drag the mouse to the last line that you want to select. These actions select all text between the first and last items. For all text selections, GNOME Terminal copies the selected text into the clipboard when you release the mouse button. To explicitly copy the selected text, choose EditCopy. To paste text into a terminal: If you previously copied text to the clipboard, you can paste the text into a terminal by performing one of the following actions: To paste text that you copied by selection only, middle-click at the command prompt. If you do not have a middle mouse button, refer to the X Server documentation for information about how to emulate the middle mouse button. To paste text that you explicitly copied, choose EditPaste. To drag a file name into a terminal window: You can drag a file name to a terminal from another application such as a file manager. The terminal displays the path and the full name of the file. To access a link: To access a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) that is displayed in a terminal, perform the following steps: Move the mouse over the URL until the URL is underlined. Right-click on the URL to open a popup menu. Choose Open Link to start a link application and display the file located at the URL. Viewing the Keyboard Shortcut Settings To view the keyboard shortcut settings that are defined for GNOME Terminal, choose EditKeyboard Shortcuts. The Keyboard Shortcuts dialog contains the following items: Disable all menu access keys (such as Alt+f to open File menu) Deselect this option to disable the access keys that are defined to enable you to use the keyboard instead of the mouse to select a menu item. Each access key is identified by an underlined letter on a menu or dialog option. In some cases, you must press the Alt key in combination with the access key to perform the action. Disable menu shortcut key (F10 by default) Deselect this option to disable the shortcut key that is defined to enable you to access the GNOME Terminal menus. The default shortcut key to access the menus is F10. Shortcut Keys The Shortcut Keys section of the dialog lists the shortcut keys that are defined for each menu item. Not all keys can be used as shortcut keys, such as Tab. Text Size You can use the following methods to resize the text in the GNOME Terminal window: To increase the size of the text, choose ViewZoom In. To decrease the size of the text, choose ViewZoom Out. To view the text at actual size, choose ViewNormal Size. To Change the Terminal Title To change the title of the currently displayed terminal, perform the following steps: Choose TerminalSet Title. Type the new title in the Title text box. GNOME Terminal applies the change immediately. Click Close to close the Set Title dialog. To Change the Character Encoding To change the character encoding, choose TerminalSet Character Encoding, then select the appropriate encoding. To Change the List of Character Encodings To change the list of character encodings displayed in the Set Character Encoding menu, perform the following steps: Choose TerminalSet Character EncodingAdd or Remove. To add an encoding to the Set Character Encoding menu, select the encoding in the Available encodings list box, then click the right arrow button. To remove an encoding from the Set Character Encoding menu, select the encoding in the Encodings shown in menu list box, then click the left arrow button. Click Close to close the Add or Remove Terminal Encodings dialog. To Recover Your Terminal This section provides some advice if you have problems with terminals. To reset the state of the terminal: Choose TerminalReset. To reset the terminal and clear the screen: Choose TerminalReset and Clear. Preferéncias To configure GNOME Terminal, choose EditCurrent Profile. To configure another profile that you set up choose EditProfiles, select the profile you want to edit, then click Edit. The Editing Profile dialog contains the following tabbed sections that you can use to configure GNOME Terminal: General Profile name Use this text box to specify the name of the current profile. Use the system fixed width font Select this option to use the standard fixed width font that is specified in the Font tab of the Appearance preference tool. Font Click on this button to select a font type and font size for the terminal. This button is only enabled if the Use the system terminal font option is unselected. Allow bold text Select this option to enable the terminal to display bold text. Show menubar by default in new terminals Select this option to show the menubar on new terminal windows. Terminal bell Select this option to enable the terminal bell. Cursor shape Use this drop down-list to specify the shape of the cursor. Select-by-word characters Use this text box to specify characters or groups of characters that GNOME Terminal considers to be words when you select text by word. See for more information about how to select text by word. Títol e comanda Initial title Use this text box to specify the initial title of terminals that use the profile. New terminals that are started from the current terminal have the new initial title. When terminal commands set their own titles Use this drop-down list to specify how to handle dynamically-set titles, that is, terminal titles set by commands that run in the terminal. Run command as a login shell Select this option to force the command that currently runs inside the terminal to run as a login shell. If the command is not a shell, the setting has no effect. Update login records when command is launched Select this option to insert a new entry in the login records when a new shell is opened. Run a custom command instead of my shell Select this option to run a specified command, other than the normal shell, in the terminal. Specify the custom command in the Custom command text box. When command exits Use this drop-down list to specify what action to perform when the command exits. Colours Foreground and Background Select the Use colours from system theme option to use the colors that are specified in the GNOME Desktop theme that is selected in the Theme tab of the Appearance preference tool. Use the Built-in schemes drop-down list to specify the foreground and background colors for the terminal. GNOME Terminal supports the following foreground and background color combinations: Black on light yellow Black on white Gray on black Green on black White on black Custom This option enables you to select colors that are not in the selected color scheme. The actual display of the foreground and background colors can vary depending on the color scheme that you choose. For example, if you choose White on black and the Linux console color scheme, the application displays the foreground and background colors as light gray on black. The Built-in schemes drop-down list is only enabled if the Use colours from system theme option is unselected. Click on the Text colour button to display the Choose terminal text colour dialog. Use the color wheel or the spin boxes to customize the color that you want to use as the text color, then click OK. The Text colour button is only enabled if the Use colours from system theme option is unselected. Click on the Background colour button to display the Choose terminal background colour dialog. Use the color wheel or the spin boxes to customize the color that you want to use as the background color, then click OK. The Background colour button is only enabled if the Use colours from system theme option is unselected. Palette The terminal emulation can only use 16 colors at a time to draw text. The color palette specifies these 16 colors. Applications that run in the terminal use an index number to specify a color from this palette. Use the Built-in schemes drop-down list to choose a preset color schemes. The color palette below and the contents of the terminal window both update to show the scheme. Use the Colour palette to customize the 16 default colors in the custom color palette. To customize a color, click on the color to display the Palette entry dialog. Use the color wheel or the spin boxes to customize the color, then click OK. Fons Background Select a background for the terminal window. The options are as follows: Solid color Select this option to use the background color that is specified in the Colors tabbed section as the background color for the terminal. Background image Select this option to use an image file as the background for the terminal. Use the Image file drop-down combination box to specify the location and name of the image file. Alternatively, click Browse to search for and select the image file. Select the Background image scrolls option to enable the background image to scroll with the text when you scroll through the terminal. If you do not select this option, the background image remains fixed on the terminal background and only the text scrolls. This option is only enabled if you select the Background image option. Transparent background Select this option to use a transparent background for the terminal. Shade transparent or image background Use this slider to shade or dim the background of the terminal. This option is only enabled if you select the Background image or Transparent background options. Scrolling Scrollbar is Use this drop-down list to specify the position of the scrollbar on the terminal window. Scrollback ... lines Use this spin box to specify the number of lines that you can scroll back using the scrollbar. For example, if you specify 100 you can scroll back the last 100 lines displayed in the terminal. Select the Unlimited option to remove the limit on the number of lines you can scroll back using the scrollbar. Scroll on output Select this option to enable you to scroll the output on the terminal while the terminal continues to display more output from a command. Scroll on keystroke Select this option to enable you to press any key on the keyboard to scroll down the terminal window to the command prompt. This action only applies if you scrolled up the terminal window and you want to return to the command prompt. Compatibilitat Backspace key generates Use the drop-down list to select the function that you want the Backspace key to perform. Delete key generates Use the drop-down list to select the function that you want the Delete key to perform. Reset compatibility options to defaults Click on this button to reset the options on the Compatibility tabbed section to the default settings.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/shell-windows-maximize.page0000644000373100047300000000342512467343070027224 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Double-click or drag a titlebar to maximize or restore a window. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Maximize and unmaximize a window

You can maximize a window to take up all of the space on your desktop and unmaximize a window to restore it to its normal size. You can also maximize windows vertically along the left and right sides of the screen, so you can look at two windows at once. See for details.

To maximize a window, grab the titlebar and drag it to the top of the screen, or double-click the titlebar. To maximize a window using the keyboard, hold down Ctrl and Super and press ↑.

To restore a window to its unmaximized size, drag it away from the edges of the screen. If the window is fully maximized, you can double-click the titlebar to restore it. You can also use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl Super ↓.

Hold down the Alt key and drag anywhere in a window to move it.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-what-is-ip-address.page0000644000373100047300000000323312467343075026777 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com An IP Address is like a phone number for your computer. What is an IP address?

"IP address" stands for Internet Protocol address, and each device that is connected to a network (like the internet) has one.

An IP address is similar to your phone number. Your phone number is a unique set of numbers that identifies your phone so that other people can call you. Similarly, an IP address is a unique set of numbers that identifies your computer so that it can send and receive data with other computers.

Currently, most IP addresses consist of four sets of numbers, each separated by a period. 192.168.1.42 is an example of an IP address.

An IP address can either be dynamic or static. Dynamic IP addresses are temporarily assigned each time your computer connects to a network. Static IP addresses are fixed, and do not change. Dynamic IP addresses are more common that static addresses - static addresses are typically only used when there is a special need for them, such as administering a server.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/nautilus-views.page0000644000373100047300000001302212467343063025577 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Specify the default view, sort order, and zoom levels for the file manager. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Views preferences in <app>Files</app>

You can change the default view for new folders, how files and folders are sorted by default, the zoom level for the icon and compact views, and whether files are displayed in the tree sidebar. Select Files Preferences in the top bar while Files is open and select the Views tab.

Default view <gui>View new folders using</gui>

By default, new folders are shown in icon view. If you prefer the list view, you can set it here as the default. Alternatively, you can select a different view for each folder as you browse by clicking the View items as a list or View items as a grid of icons button in the toolbar.

 <gui>Arrange items</gui>

You can change the default sort order that is used in folders using the Arrange items drop-down list in the preferences to sort by name, file size, file type, when they were last modified, when they were last accessed or when they were trashed.

You can change how files are sorted in an individual folder by clicking the View options button in the toolbar and choosing By Name, By Size, By Type or By Modification Date, or by clicking the list column headers in list view. This menu only affects the current folder.

 <gui>Sort folders before files</gui>

By default, the file manager no longer shows all folders before files. To see all folders listed before files, enable this option.

 <gui>Show hidden and backup files</gui>

The file manager does not display hidden files and folders by default. You can always show hidden files by selecting this option.

You can also show hidden files in an individual window by selecting Show Hidden Files, from the View options menu in the toolbar.
Icon view defaults <gui>Default zoom level</gui>

You can make the icons and text larger or smaller by default in icon view using this option. You can also change this setting in an individual folder by clicking the View options button in the toolbar and selecting Zoom In, Zoom Out or Normal Size. If you frequently use a larger or smaller zoom level, you can set the default with this option.

In icon view, more or fewer captions are shown based on your zoom level.
List view defaults <gui>Default zoom level</gui>

You can make the icons and text larger or smaller in list view using this option. You can also do this in an individual folder by clicking the View options button in the toolbar and selecting Zoom In, Zoom Out or Normal Size.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/documents-print.page0000644000373100047300000000223712467343074025743 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Print documents that are stored locally or online. Print a document

To print a document:

Click the ✓ button.

In selection mode, check the document to be printed.

Click the Print button in the button bar. The Print dialog opens.

Printing is not available when more than one document is selected, or when a collection is selected.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/files-search.page0000644000373100047300000000712212467343070025147 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Locate files based on file name and type. Save your searches for later use. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Search for files

You can search for files based on their name or file type directly within the file manager. You can even save common searches, and they will appear as special folders in your home folder.

Other search applications Search

Open the file manager

If you know the files you want are under a particular folder, go to that folder.

Click the magnifying glass in the toolbar, or press CtrlF.

Type a word or words that you know appear in the file name. For example, if you name all your invoices with the word "Invoice", type invoice. Press Enter. Words are matched regardless of case.

You can narrow your results by location and file type.

Click Home to restrict the search results to your Home folder, or All Files to search everywhere.

Click + and pick a File Type from the drop-down list to narrow the search results based on file type. Click the x button to remove this option and widen the search results.

You can open, copy, delete, or otherwise work with your files from the search results, just as you would from any folder in the file manager.

Click the magnifying glass in the toolbar again to exit the search and return to the folder.

If you perform certain searches often, you can save them to access them quickly.

Save a search

Start a search as above.

When you're happy with the search parameters, click the ⚙ gear button and select Save Search As.

Give the search a name and click Save. If you like, select a different folder to save the search in. When you view that folder, you will see your saved search as an orange folder icon with a magnifying glass on it.

To remove the search file when you are done with it, simply delete the search as you would any other file. When you delete a saved search, it does not delete the files that the search matched.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/bluetooth-remove-connection.page0000644000373100047300000000346012467343071030241 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Remove a device from the list of Bluetooth devices. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Remove a connection between Bluetooth devices

If you don't want to be connected to a Bluetooth device anymore, you can remove the connection. This is useful if you no longer want to use a device like a mouse or headset, or if you no longer wish to transfer files to or from a device.

Click the Bluetooth icon in the menu bar and select Bluetooth Settings.

Click the Bluetooth icon on the top bar and select Bluetooth Settings.

Select the device you want to disconnect in the left pane, then click the - icon underneath the list.

Click Remove in the confirmation window.

You can reconnect a Bluetooth device later if desired.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/files-preview.page0000644000373100047300000000245012467343072025364 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Quickly show and hide previews for documents, images, videos, and more. Preview files and folders

You can quickly preview files without opening them in a full-blown application. Select any file and press the space bar. The file will open in a simple preview window. Press the space bar again to dismiss the preview.

The built-in preview supports most file formats for documents, images, video, and audio. In the preview, you can scroll through your documents or seek through your video and audio.

To view a preview full-screen press f. Press f again to leave full-screen, or press the space bar to exit the preview completely.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/color.page0000644000373100047300000000177612467343074023735 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Why is this important, Color profiles, How to calibrate a device… Color management
Color profiles
Calibration
Problèmas
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/app-cheese.page0000644000373100047300000000326112467343065024620 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com It is like your own personal photo booth. Create fun photos and videos with your webcam

With the Cheese application and your webcam, you can take photos and videos, apply fun special effects and share the fun with others.

Cheese is not installed by default in Ubuntu. To install Cheese:

Click this link to launch the Software Center.

Read the information and reviews about Cheese to make sure you want to install it.

If you choose to install it, click Install from the Software Center window.

You may need to provide the administrative password to complete the installation.

For help with using Cheese, read the Cheese user guide.

You need to install Cheese before you can read the Cheese user guide.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/video-dvd-restricted.page0000644000373100047300000000421512467343065026635 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Most commercial DVDs are encrypted and will not play without decryption software. Projècte de documentacion d'Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com How do I enable restricted codecs to play DVDs?

DVD support cannot be provided by default in Ubuntu due to legal and technical restrictions. Most commercial DVDs are encrypted and so require the use of decryption software in order to play them.

Use Fluendo to legally play DVDs

You can buy a commercial DVD decoder that can handle copy protection from Fluendo. It works with Linux and should be legal to use in all countries.

Use alternative decryption software

In some countries, the use of the below unlicensed decryption software is not permitted by law. Verify that you are within your rights to use it.

Install libdvdnav4, libdvdread4, gstreamer0.10-plugins-bad, and gstreamer0.10-plugins-ugly.

If you would like to play encrypted DVDs (see the legal note above), open the Dash and launch a Terminal.

Type the following into the screen which appears, then press Enter:

sudo /usr/share/doc/libdvdread4/install-css.sh

Enter your password to complete the installation.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/documents-filter.page0000644000373100047300000000244512467343072026073 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Choose which documents to display. Filter documents

Click the down button next to the search bar to limit the scope of the search in these categories:

Sources: Local, Google, SkyDrive, or All.

Type: Collections, PDF Documents, Presentations, Spreadsheets, Text Documents, or All.

Title, Author, or All.

In order for Google or SkyDrive to appear in the filter list, it is necessary to configure Google or Windows Live as an online account.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-troubleshooting.page0000644000373100047300000000433412467343067030460 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Contributors to the Ubuntu documentation wiki Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Identify and fix problems with wireless connections Wireless network troubleshooter

This is a step-by step troubleshooting guide to help you identify and fix wireless problems. If you cannot connect to a wireless network for some reason, try following the instructions here.

We will proceed through the following steps to get your computer connected to the internet:

Performing an initial check

Gathering information about your hardware

Checking your hardware

Attempting to create a connection to your wireless router

Performing a check of your modem and router

To get started, click on the Next link at the top right of the page. This link, and others like it on following pages, will take you through each step in the guide.

Using the command line

Some of the instructions in this guide ask you to type commands into the command line (Terminal). You can find the Terminal application in the Dash.

If you are not familiar with using a command line, don't worry - this guide will direct you at each step. All you need to remember is that commands are case-sensitive (so you must type them exactly as they appear here), and to press Enter after typing each command to run it.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-chat-video.page0000644000373100047300000000220612467343063025411 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu What applications can I use to make video calls? Video calls

You can make video calls from Ubuntu without installing any additional software using Empathy - via the Google Talk, MSN , Jabber , and SIP networks. See the Empathy manual for help on making video calls with Empathy.

Other applications which support video calls include

Skype

Ekiga

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/unity-scrollbars-intro.page0000644000373100047300000000603612467343072027254 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Overlay scrollbars are the thin orange strips on long documents. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com What are overlay scrollbars?

Ubuntu includes overlay scrollbars which take up less screen space than traditional scrollbars, giving you more room for your content. While inspired by mobile devices where traditional scrollbars aren't needed, Ubuntu's overlay scrollbars are designed to work just as well with a mouse.

Some apps like Firefox and LibreOffice don't support the new scrollbars yet.

Use the scrollbars

The overlay scrollbar appears as a thin orange strip at the edge of a scrollable area. The position of the scrollbar corresponds with your screen's position in the scrollable content. The strip length corresponds with the content length; the shorter the strip, the longer the content.

Move your mouse pointer over any point on the scrollable edge of the content to reveal the thumb slider.

Ways to use the scrollbars:

Click the top half of the thumb slider to scroll one page up. Click the bottom half to scroll one page down.

Drag the thumb slider up or down to move the screen's position exactly where you want it.

on the thumb slider to move the screen's position without needing to drag or scroll page by page. This is especially useful in long documents.

Disable the scrollbars

You can disable the new scrollbars if you prefer the traditional style:

Open the Terminal by pressing CtrlAltt or by searching for terminal in the Dash.

Type the following command and press Enter:

gsettings set com.canonical.desktop.interface scrollbar-mode normal

If you change your mind and want to re-enable the scrollbars, run this command:

gsettings reset com.canonical.desktop.interface scrollbar-mode

Setting your theme to High Contrast will also disable the overlay scrollbars.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/shell-workspaces-movewindow.page0000644000373100047300000000416312467343065030272 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Open the workspace switcher and drag the window to a different workspace. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Move a window to a different workspace

Using the mouse:

Open the Launcher and click the workspace switcher button near the bottom.

Drag the window to the workspace you choose.

Using the keyboard:

Select the window you want to move.

Press CtrlAltShift→ to move the window to a workspace which is to the right of the current workspace on the workspace switcher.

Press CtrlAltShift← to move the window to a workspace which is to the left of the current workspace on the workspace switcher.

Press CtrlAltShift↓ to move the window to a workspace which is below the current workspace on the workspace switcher.

Press CtrlAltShift↑ to move the window to a workspace which is above the current workspace on the workspace switcher.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/color-calibrationdevices.page0000644000373100047300000000431312467343073027552 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 We support a large number of calibration devices. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com What color measuring instruments are supported?

GNOME relies on the Argyll color management system to support color instruments. Thus the following display measuring instruments are supported:

Gretag-Macbeth i1 Pro (spectrometer)

Gretag-Macbeth i1 Monitor (spectrometer)

Gretag-Macbeth i1 Display 1, 2 or LT (colorimeter)

X-Rite i1 Display Pro (colorimeter)

X-Rite ColorMunki Design or Photo (spectrometer)

X-Rite ColorMunki Create (colorimeter)

X-Rite ColorMunki Display (colorimeter)

Pantone Huey (colorimeter)

MonacoOPTIX (colorimeter)

ColorVision Spyder 2 and 3 (colorimeter)

Colorimètre HCFR (colorimeter)

The Pantone Huey is currently the cheapest and best supported hardware in Linux.

Thanks to Argyll there's also a number of spot and strip reading reflective spectrometers supported to help you calibrating and characterizing your printers:

X-Rite DTP20 "Pulse" ("swipe" type reflective spectrometer)

X-Rite DTP22 Digital Swatchbook (spot type reflective spectrometer)

X-Rite DTP41 (spot and strip reading reflective spectrometer)

X-Rite DTP41T (spot and strip reading reflective spectrometer)

X-Rite DTP51 (spot reading reflective spectrometer)

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/color-why-calibrate.page0000644000373100047300000000263112467343076026457 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Calibrating is important if you care about the colors you display or print. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Why do I need to do calibration myself?

Generic profiles are usually bad. When a manufacturer creates a new model, they just take a few items from the production line and average them together:

Averaged profiles

Display panels differ quite a lot from unit to unit and change substantially as the display ages. It is also more difficult for printers, as just changing the type or weight of paper can invalidate the characterization state and make the profile inaccurate.

The best way of ensuring the profile you have is accurate is by doing the calibration yourself, or by letting an external company supply you with a profile based on your exact characterization state.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/disk-partitions.page0000644000373100047300000000632012467343064025730 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Understand what volumes and partitions are and use the disk utility to manage them. Manage volumes and partitions

The word volume is used to describe a storage device, like a hard disk. It can also refer to a part of the storage on that device, because you can split the storage up into chunks. The computer makes this storage accessible via your file system in a process referred to as mounting. Mounted volumes may be hard drives, USB drives, DVD-RWs, SD cards, and other media. If a volume is currently mounted, you can read (and possibly write) files on it.

Often, a mounted volume is called a partition, though they are not necessarily the same thing. A “partition” refers to a physical area of storage on a single disk drive. Once a partition has been mounted, it can be referred to as a volume because you can access the files on it. You can think of volumes as the labeled, accessible “storefronts” to the functional “back rooms” of partitions and drives.

View and manage volumes and partitions using the disk utility

You can check and modify your computer's storage volumes with the disk utility.

Open the Dash and start the Disk Utility application.

In the pane marked Storage Devices, you will find hard disks, CD/DVD drives, and other physical devices. Click the device you want to inspect.

In the right pane, the area labeled Volumes provides a visual breakdown of the volumes and partitions present on the selected device. It also contains a variety of tools used to manage these volumes.

Be careful: it is possible to completely erase the data on your disk with these utilities.

Your computer most likely has at least one primary partition and a single swap partition. The swap partition is used by the operating system for memory management, and is rarely mounted. The primary partition contains your operating system, applications, settings, and personal files. These files can also be distributed among multiple partitions for security or convenience.

One primary partition must contain information that your computer uses to start up, or boot. For this reason it is sometimes called a boot partition, or boot volume. To determine if a volume is bootable, look at its Partition Flags in the disk utility. External media such as USB drives and CDs may also contain a bootable volume.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/clock-set.page0000644000373100047300000000550612467343073024475 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Update the time/date displayed at the top of the screen. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Projècte de documentacion d'Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Change the date and time

If the date and time displayed on the menu bar are incorrect or in the wrong format, you can change them:

If the date and time displayed on the top bar are incorrect or in the wrong format, you can change them:

To adjust the time and date, click on the clock located in the menu bar and select Date & Time Settings.

Change the system time zone by clicking on the map or entering your city into the Location box.

By default, Ubuntu periodically synchronizes the clock with a very accurate clock on the Internet so you don't have to set your clock manually.

Click on the clock at the right side of the top bar and select Date and Time Settings.

You may need to click Unlock and type the admin password.

Adjust the date and time by clicking on the arrows to choose the hour and minute. You can choose the year, month and day from the drop-down lists.

If you like, you can have the clock update itself automatically by switching Network Time on.

When Network Time is switched on, the computer will periodically synchronize its clock with a very accurate clock on the internet, so you don't have to do it manually. This will only work if you are connected to the internet.

You can also change how the hour is displayed by selecting 24-hour or AM/PM format.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/sound-crackle.page0000644000373100047300000000370412467343074025342 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Check your audio cables and sound card drivers. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org I hear crackling or buzzing when sounds are playing

If you hear crackling or buzzing when sounds are playing on your computer, you may have a problem with the audio cables or connectors, or a problem with the drivers for the sound card.

Check that the speakers are plugged in correctly.

If the speakers aren't fully plugged in, or if they are plugged into the wrong socket, you might hear a buzzing sound.

Make sure the speaker/headphone cable isn't damaged.

Audio cables and connectors can gradually wear with use. Try plugging the cable or headphones into another audio device (like an MP3 player or a CD player) to check if there is still a crackling sound. If there is, you may need to replace the cable or headphones.

Check if the sound drivers aren't very good.

Some sound cards don't work very well on Linux because they don't have very good drivers. This problem is more difficult to identify. Try searching for the make and model of your sound card on the internet, plus the search term "Ubuntu", to see if other people are having the same problem.

You can run sudo lspci -v in the Terminal to get more information about your sound card.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/nautilus-bookmarks-edit.page0000644000373100047300000000424212467343073027362 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add, delete, and rename bookmarks in the file manager. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Edit folder bookmarks

Your bookmarks are listed in the sidebar of the file manager.

Add a bookmark:

Open the folder (or location) that you want to bookmark.

Click the gear button in the toolbar and pick Bookmark this Location.

 Delete a bookmark:

Click on Files in the top bar and pick Bookmarks from the app menu.

In the Bookmarks window, select the bookmark you wish to delete and click the - button.

 Rename a bookmark:

Click on Files in the top bar and pick Bookmarks from the app menu.

In the Bookmarks window, select the bookmark you wish to rename.

In the Name text box, type the new name for the bookmark.

Renaming a bookmark does not rename the folder. If you have bookmarks to two different folders in two different locations, but which each have the same name, the bookmarks will have the same name, and you won't be able to tell them apart. In these cases, it is useful to give a bookmark a name other than the name of the folder it points to.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/a11y-right-click.page0000644000373100047300000000632712467343071025562 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Press and hold the left mouse button to right-click. Simulacion d'un clic drech de la mirga

You can right-click by holding down the left mouse button. This is useful if you find it difficult to move your fingers individually on one hand, or if your pointing device only has a single button.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Click your name on the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Universal Access and select the Pointing and Clicking tab.

Activatz la Simulacion del clic segondari.

You can change how long you must hold down the left mouse button before it is registered as a right click. On the Pointing and Clicking tab, change the Acceptance delay under Simulated Secondary Click.

To right-click with simulated secondary click, hold down the left mouse button where you would normally right-click, then release. The pointer fills with blue as you hold down the left mouse button. Once it is entirely blue, release the mouse button to right-click.

Some special pointers, such as the resize pointers, do not change colors. You can still use simulated secondary click as normal, even if you don't get visual feedback from the pointer.

If you use Mouse Keys, this also allows you to right-click by holding down the 5 key on your keypad.

In the Activities overview, you are always able to long-press to right-click, even with this feature disabled. Long-press works slightly differently in the overview: You do not have to release the button to right-click.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/clock-calendar.page0000644000373100047300000000467512467343074025462 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Display your appointments on the calendar at the top of the screen. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Calendar appointments

You can organize your calendar appointments by clicking on the clock in the panel, if you're using a mail and calendar application called Evolution.

If you have already set up Evolution, click the clock on the menu bar and then click the Add Event to start adding appointments. As appointments are added, they will appear below the calendar when you click on the clock.

To quickly get to the full Evolution calendar, click on the clock and click the first line where today's date is.

This will work only if you have an existing Evolution account. Otherwise, a window will appear with the necessary steps for adding your first account.
Turn off Evolution calendar integration

You can also turn off this feature if you like.

Click on the clock and select Time & Date Settings.

Now, switch to the Clock tab.

Uncheck Coming events from Evolution Calendar.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/mouse-sensitivity.page0000644000373100047300000000442012467343066026325 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Change how quickly the pointer moves when you use your mouse or touchpad. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Adjust speed of the mouse and touchpad

If your pointer moves too fast or slow when you move your mouse or use your touchpad, you can adjust the pointer speed for these devices.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Mouse & Touchpad.

Adjust the Pointer Speed slider until the pointer motion is comfortable for you.

You can set the pointer speed differently for your mouse and touchpad. Sometimes the most comfortable settings for one type of device aren't the most comfortable for another. Just set the sliders on both the Mouse and Touchpad sections.

The Touchpad section only appears if your system has a touchpad.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-firewall-ports.page0000644000373100047300000000475312467343071026350 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 You need to specify the right network port to enable/disable network access for a program with your firewall. Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Commonly-used network ports

This is a list of network ports commonly used by applications that provide network services, like file sharing or remote desktop viewing. You can change your system's firewall to block or allow access to these applications. There are thousands of ports in use, so this table isn't complete.

Port

Name

Description

5353/udp

mDNS, Avahi

Allows systems to find each other, and describe which services they offer, without you having to specify the details manually.

631/udp

Printing

Allows you to send print jobs to a printer over the network.

631/tcp

Printing

Allows you to share your printer with other people over the network.

5298/tcp

Presence

Allows you to advertise your instant messaging status to other people on the network, such as "online" or "busy".

5900/tcp

Remote desktop

Allows you to share your desktop so other people can view it or provide remote assistance.

3689/tcp

Music sharing (DAAP)

Allows you to share your music library with others on your network.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-firewall-on-off.page0000644000373100047300000000557412467343075026373 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 You can control which programs can access the network. This helps to keep your computer secure. Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Enable or block firewall access

Ubuntu comes equipped with the Uncomplicated Firewall (ufw) but the firewall is not enabled by default. Because Ubuntu does not have any open network services (except for basic network infrastructure) in the default installation, a firewall is not needed to block incoming attempted malicious connections.

For more information about how to use ufw, see the online documentation.

Turn the firewall on or off

To turn on the firewall, enter sudo ufw enable in a terminal. To turn off ufw, enter sudo ufw disable.

Allow or block specific network activity

Many programs are built to offer network services. For instance, you can share content, or let someone view your desktop remotely. Depending on which additional programs you install, you may need to adjust the firewall to allow these services to work as intended. UfW comes with a number of rules already pre-configured. For instance, to allow SSH connections, enter sudo ufw allow ssh in a terminal. To block ssh, enter sudo ufw block ssh.

Each program that provides services uses a specific network port. To enable access to that program's services, you may need to allow access to its assigned port on the firewall. To allow connections on port 53, enter sudo ufw allow 53 in a terminal. To block port 53, enter sudo ufw block 53.

To check the current status of ufw, enter sudo ufw status in a terminal.

Use ufw without a terminal

You can also install gufw if you prefer to set up the firewall without using a terminal. To install, click this link.

You can launch this program by searching for Firewall Configuration in the Dash. The program does not need to be kept open for the firewall to work.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/power-othercountry.page0000644000373100047300000000411212467343061026475 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Your computer will work, but you might need a different power cable or a travel adapter. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Will my computer work with a power supply in another country?

Different countries use power supplies at different voltages (usually 110V or 220-240V) and AC frequencies (usually 50 Hz or 60 Hz). Your computer should work with a power supply in a different country as long as you have an appropriate power adapter. You may also need to flip a switch.

If you have a laptop, all you should need to do is get the right plug for your power adapter. Some laptops come packaged with more than one plug for their adapter, so you may already have the right one. If not, plugging your existing one into a standard travel adapter will suffice.

If you have a desktop computer, you can also get a cable with a different plug, or use a travel adapter. In this case, however, you may need to change the voltage switch on the computer's power supply, if there is one. Many computers don't have a switch like this, and will happily work with either voltage. Look at the back of the computer and find the socket that the power cable plugs into. Somewhere nearby, there may be a small switch marked "110V" or "230V" (for example). Switch it if you need to.

Be careful when changing power cables or using travel adapters. Switch everything off first if you can.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-hidden.page0000644000373100047300000000412312467343075026457 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Click the network menu on the menu bar and select Connect to Hidden Wireless Network. Connect to a hidden wireless network

It is possible to set up a wireless network so that it is "hidden." Hidden networks won't show up in the list of networks that are displayed when you click the network menu in the menu bar (or the list of wireless networks on any other computer). To connect to a hidden wireless network:

Click the network menu on the menu bar and select Connect to Hidden Wireless Network.

In the window that appears, type the network name, choose the type of wireless security, and click Connect.

You may have to check the settings of the wireless base station or router to see what the network name is. It is sometimes called the BSSID (Basic Service Set Identifier), and looks something like this: 02:00:01:02:03:04.

You should also check the wireless base station's security settings. Look for terms like WEP and WPA.

You may think that hiding your wireless network will improve security by preventing people who don't know about it from connecting. In practice, this is not the case; the network is slightly harder to find but it is still detectable.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/files-browse.page0000644000373100047300000000616312467343067025215 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Manage and organize files with the file manager. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Browse files and folders

Use the Files file manager to browse and organize the files on your computer. You can also use it to manage files on storage devices (like external hard disks), on file servers, and on network shares.

To start the file manager, open Files in the Launcher. You can also search for files and folders with the Dash in the same way you would search for applications. They will appear under the heading Files and Folders.

Exploring the contents of folders

In the file manager, double-click any folder to view its contents, and double-click any file to open it with the default application for that file. You can also right-click a folder to open it in a new tab or new window.

The path bar above the list of files and folders shows you which folder you're viewing, including the parent folders of the current folder. Click a parent folder in the path bar to go to that folder. Right-click any folder in the path bar to open it in a new tab or window, copy or move it, or access its properties.

If you want to quickly skip to a file in the folder you're viewing, start typing its name. A search box will appear at the top of the window and the first file which matches your search will be highlighted. Press the down arrow key, or scroll with the mouse, to skip to the next file that matches your search.

You can quickly access common places from the sidebar. If you do not see the sidebar, click the down button in the toolbar and pick Show Sidebar. You can add bookmarks to folders that you use often and they will appear in the sidebar. Use the Bookmarks menu to do this, or simply drag a folder into the sidebar.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/backup-check.page0000644000373100047300000000331112467343064025121 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Verify your backup was successful. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Check your backup

After you have backed up your files, you should make sure that the backup was successful. If it didn't work properly, you could lose important data since some files could be missing from the backup.

When you use the file manager to copy or move files, the computer checks to make sure that all of the data transferred correctly. However, if you are transferring data that is very important to you, you may want to perform additional checks to confirm that your data has been transferred properly.

You can do an extra check by looking through the copied files and folders on the destination media. By checking to make sure that the files and folders you transferred are actually there in the backup, you can have extra confidence that the process was successful.

If you find that you do regular backups of large amounts of data, you may find it easier to use a dedicated backup program, such as Déjà Dup. Such a program is more powerful and more reliable than just copying and pasting files.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/sound-alert.page0000644000373100047300000000277512467343073025053 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Choose the sound to play for messages, set the alert volume, or disable alert sounds. Choose or disable the alert sound

Your computer will play a simple alert sound for certain types of messages and events. You can choose different sound clips for alerts, set the alert volume independently of your system volume, or disable alert sounds entirely.

Click the sound menu in the menu bar and click Sound Settings.

On the Sound Effects tab, select an alert sound. Each sound will play when you click on it so you can hear how it sounds.

Use the volume slider on the Sound Effects tab to set the volume of the alert sound. This won't affect the volume of your music, movies, or other sound files.

To disable alert sounds entirely, just select Mute next to Alert volume.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/shell-windows.page0000644000373100047300000000446612467343067025417 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Move and organize your windows. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Windows and workspaces

Like other desktops, Unity uses windows to display your running applications. Using both the Dash and the Launcher, you can launch new applications and control which window is active.

In addition to windows, you can also group your applications together within workspaces. Visit the window and workspace help topics below to better learn how to use these features.

Windows Working with windows
Workspaces Working with workspaces
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/user-forgottenpassword.page0000644000373100047300000001704312467343074027357 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Advanced techniques for resetting your password Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org I forgot my password!

It is important to choose not only a good and secure password, but also one that you can remember. If you have forgotten the password to log in to your computer account, you can follow the following steps to reset it.

If you have an encrypted home directory, you will not be able to reset a forgotten password.

If you simply want to change your password, see .

Reset password using Grub

Restart your computer, and hold down Shift during bootup to get into the Grub menu.

If you have a dual-boot machine and you choose at boot time which operating system to boot into, the Grub menu should appear without the need to hold down Shift.

If you are unable to get into the Grub boot menu, and therefore cannot choose to boot into recovery mode, you can use a live CD to reset your user password.

Press the down arrow on your keyboard to highlight the line that ends with the words 'recovery mode', then press Enter.

Your computer will now begin the boot process. After a few moments, a Recovery Menu will appear. Use your down arrow key to highlight root and press Enter.

At the # symbol, type:

passwd username, where username is the username of the account you're changing the password for.

You will be prompted to enter a new UNIX password, and to confirm the new password.

Then type:

# reboot

After you successfully log in, you will not be able to access your keyring (since you don't remember the old password). This means that all your saved passwords for wireless networks, jabber accounts, etc. will no longer be accessible. You will need to delete the old keyring and start a new one.

Reset password using a Live CD or USB

Boot the Live CD or USB.

Mount your drive.

Press AltF2 to get the Run Application window.

Type gksu nautilus to launch the file manager with system-wide privileges.

Within the drive you just mounted, you can check that it is the right drive by clicking home and then your username.

Go to the top-level directory of the mounted drive. Then go into the etc directory.

Locate the 'shadow' file and make a backup copy:

Right-click on the shadow file and select copy.

Then right-click in the empty space and select paste.

Rename the backup "shadow.bak".

Edit the original "shadow" file with a text editor.

Find your username for which you have forgotten the password. It should look something like this (the characters after the colon will be different):

username:$1$2abCd0E or

username:$1$2abCd0E:13721a:0:99999:7:::

Delete the characters after the first colon and before the second colon. This will remove the password for the account.

Save the file, exit out of everything and reboot your computer without the live CD or USB.

When you boot back into your installation, click your name in the menu bar. Open My Account and reset your password.

For Current password do not enter anything, as your current password is blank. Just click Authenticate and enter a new password.

After you successfully log in, you will not be able to access your keyring (since you don't remember the old password). This means that all your saved passwords for wireless networks, jabber accounts, etc. will no longer be accessible. You will need to delete the old keyring and start a new one.

Get rid of the keyring

This will delete all your saved passwords for wireless networks, instant messaging accounts, etc. Only do this if you can't remember the password you used for your keyring.

Go to your Home folder by typing 'home' in the Dash.

Press Ctrlh (or click ViewShow Hidden Files.)

Double click on the folder ~/.local/share.

Double click on the folder called keyrings.

Delete any files you find in the keyrings folder.

Restart the computer.

After you restart and log in you will be asked to enter your wireless networks password.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/bluetooth-problem-connecting.page0000644000373100047300000000530212467343062030371 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 The adapter could be turned off or may not have drivers, or Bluetooth might be disabled or blocked. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com I can't connect my Bluetooth device

There are a number of reasons why you may not be able to connect to a Bluetooth device, such as a phone or headset.

Connection blocked or untrusted

Some Bluetooth devices block connections by default, or require you to change a setting to allow connections to be made. Make sure that your device is set up to allow connections.

 Bluetooth hardware not recognized

Your Bluetooth adapter/dongle may not have been recognized by the computer. This could be because drivers for the adapter aren't installed. Some Bluetooth adapters aren't supported on Linux, so you may not be able to get the right drivers for them. In this case, you will probably have to get a different Bluetooth adapter.

 Adapter not switched on

Make sure that your Bluetooth adapter is switched on. Click the Bluetooth icon in the menu bar and check that it's not disabled.

Make sure that your Bluetooth adapter is switched on. Click the Bluetooth icon on the top bar and check that it's not disabled.

 Device Bluetooth connection switched off

Check that Bluetooth is turned on on the device you're trying to connect to. For example, if you're trying to connect to a phone, make sure that it's not in airplane mode.

 No Bluetooth adapter in your computer

Many computers do not have Bluetooth adapters. You can buy an adapter if you want to use Bluetooth.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/look-background.page0000644000373100047300000000557312467343076025701 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Set an image, color, or gradient as your desktop background. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org April Gonzales loonycookie@gmail.com Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Change the desktop background

You can change the image used for your desktop background, or set it to a simple color or gradient.

Right click on the desktop and select Change Desktop Background.

Select an image or color. The settings are applied immediately. Switch to an empty workspace to view your entire desktop.

There are three choices in the drop-down list on the top right.

Select Wallpapers to use one of the many professional background images that ship with Ubuntu. With the exception of the Ubuntu wallpaper, all of the default wallpaper choices were created by winners of a Community Wallpaper Contest.

Some wallpapers are partially transparent and allow a background color to show through. For these wallpapers, there will be a color selector button in the bottom-right corner.

Select Pictures Folder to use one of your own photos from your Pictures folder. Most photo management applications store photos there.

Select Colors & Gradients to just use a flat color or a linear gradient. Color selector buttons will appear in the bottom right corner.

You can also browse for any picture on your computer by clicking the + button. Any picture you add this way will show up under Pictures Folder. You can remove it from the list by selecting it and clicking the - button. Removing a picture from the list will not delete the original file.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/unity-launcher-shapes.page0000644000373100047300000000400512467343060027026 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com The triangles show you your currently running apps. What do the different shapes and colors in Launcher icons mean?

When you start an app, the Launcher icon pulses to let you know that Ubuntu is starting your app. This is useful because while some apps start immediately, others may take a minute to load.

Once the app has finished starting, a small white triangle will show to the left of the Launcher square. Two triangles means that you have two windows of the same app open. If you have three or more windows of the same app open, three triangles will show.

Apps that aren't currently running have translucent Launcher icon squares. When an app is running, the Launcher icon square is full of color.
Notifications

If an app wants your attention to notify you of something (like a finished download), the Launcher icon will wiggle and glow and the white triangle will become blue. Click the Launcher icon to dismiss the notification.

Apps can also show a number on their Launcher icon. Messaging apps use the number to tell you how many unread messages you have. Software Updater uses it to tell you how many updates are available.

Finally, apps can use a progress bar to let you know how long a process is taking without you needing to keep the app window in view.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/about-this-guide.page0000644000373100047300000000410012467343071025746 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu A few tips on using the Ubuntu Desktop Guide. A prepaus d'aqueste guida

This guide gives you a tour of Ubuntu desktop features, answers your computer-related questions, and provides tips on using your computer effectively.

The guide is divided into small, task-oriented topics - not chapters. This means that you don't need to skim through an entire manual to find answers to your questions.

Related items are linked together. "See Also" links at the bottom of some pages direct you to related topics.

The text input box at the top of this guide acts as a search bar, and relevant results will appear beneath it as soon as you start typing. Left-click on any result to open its page.

The guide is constantly being improved. Although we attempt to provide you with a comprehensive collection of helpful information, we know we won't answer all of your questions here. We will keep adding more information to make things more helpful, though.

Thank you for taking the time to read the Ubuntu Desktop Guide.

-- The Ubuntu Documentation team

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/a11y-bouncekeys.page0000644000373100047300000000404012467343066025523 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ignorar las quichadas de tòcas rapidas e identicas. Activacion de las tòcas rebomb

Turn on bounce keys to ignore key presses that are rapidly repeated. For example, if you have hand tremors which cause you to press a key multiple times when you only want to press it once, you should turn on bounce keys.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Universal Access and select the Typing tab.

Activatz los Rebombs de tòcas.

Use the Acceptance delay slider to change how long bounce keys waits before it registers another key press after you pressed the key for the first time. Select Beep when a key is rejected if you want the computer to make a sound each time it ignores a key press because it happened too soon after the previous key press.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/video-dvd.page0000644000373100047300000000435612467343067024477 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 You might not have the right codecs installed, or the DVD might be the wrong region. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Why won't DVDs play?

If you insert a DVD into your computer and it doesn't play, you may not have the right DVD codecs installed, or the DVD might be from a different region.

Installing the right codecs for DVD playback

In order to play DVDs, you need to have the right codecs installed. A codec is a piece of software that allows applications to read a video or audio format. If you try to play a DVD and don't have the right codecs installed, the Movie Player should tell you about this and offer to install them for you.

DVDs are also copy-protected using a system called CSS. This prevents you from copying DVDs, but it also prevents you from playing them unless you have extra software to handle the copy protection.

Checking the DVD region

DVDs have a region code, which tells you in which region of the world they are allowed to be played. If the region of your computer's DVD player doesn't match the region of the DVD you are trying to play, you won't be able to play the DVD. For example, if you have a Region 1 DVD player, you will only be allowed to play DVDs from North America.

It is often possible to change the region used by your DVD player, but it can only be done a few times before it locks into one region permanently. To change the DVD region of your computer's DVD player, use regionset.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/files-copy.page0000644000373100047300000000770112467343072024661 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Copy or move items to a new folder. Cristopher Thomas crisnoh@gmail.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Copy or move files and folders

A file or folder can be copied or moved to a new location by dragging and dropping with the mouse, using the copy and paste commands, or using keyboard shortcuts.

For example, you might want to copy a presentation onto a memory stick so you can take it to work with you. Or, you could make a back-up copy of a document before you make changes to it (and then use the old copy if you don't like your changes).

These instructions apply to both files and folders. You copy and move files and folders in exactly the same way.

Copy and paste files

Select the file you want to copy by clicking on it once.

Right-click and pick Copy, or press CtrlC.

Navigate to another folder, where you want to put the copy of the file.

Click the gear icon and pick Paste to finish copying the file, or press CtrlV. There will now be a copy of the file in the original folder and the other folder.

 Cut and paste files to move them

Select the file you want to move by clicking on it once.

Right-click and pick Cut, or press CtrlX.

Navigate to another folder, where you want to move the file.

Click the gear button in the toolbar and pick Paste to finish moving the file, or press CtrlV. The file will be taken out of its original folder and moved to the other folder.

 Drag files to copy or move

Open the file manager and go to the folder which contains the file you want to copy.

Click Files in the top bar, select New Window (or press CtrlN) to open a second window. In the new window, navigate to the folder where you want to move or copy the file.

Click and drag the file from one window to another. This will move it if the destination is on the same device, or copy it if the destination is on a different device.

For example, if you drag a file from a USB memory stick to your Home folder, it will be copied because you're dragging from one device to another.

You can force the file to be copied by holding down the Ctrl key while dragging, or force it to be moved by holding down the Shift key while dragging.

You can't copy or move a file into a folder that is read-only. Some folders are read-only to prevent you from making changes to their contents. You can change things from being read-only by changing file permissions .

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net.page0000644000373100047300000000235512467343063023375 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Wireless, wired, connection problems, web browsing, email accounts, instant messaging… Networking, web, email & chat usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-email-virus.page0000644000373100047300000000352112467343075025627 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Viruses are unlikely to infect your computer, but could infect the computers of people you email. Do I need to scan my emails for viruses?

Viruses are programs that cause problems if they manage to find their way onto your computer. A common way of them getting onto your computer is through email messages.

Viruses that can affect computers running Linux are quite rare, so you are unlikely to get a virus through email or otherwise. If you receive an email with a virus hidden in it, it will probably have no effect on your computer. As such, you probably don't need to scan your email for viruses.

You may, however, wish to scan your email for viruses in case you happen to forward a virus from one person to another. For example, if one of your friends has a Windows computer with a virus and sends you a virus-infected email, and you then forward that email to another friend with a Windows computer, then the second friend might get the virus too. You could install an anti-virus application to scan your emails to prevent this, but it's unlikely to happen and most people using Windows and Mac OS have anti-virus software of their own anyway.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/files-rename.page0000644000373100047300000001041312467343074025152 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Change file or folder name. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Rename a file or folder

You can use the file manager to change the name of a file or folder.

To rename a file or folder:

Right-click on the item and select Rename, or select the file and press F2.

Type the new name and press Enter.

You can also rename a file from the properties window.

When you rename a file, only the first part of the name of the file is selected, not the file extension (the part after the "."). The extension normally denotes what type of file it is (e.g. file.pdf is a PDF document), and you usually do not want to change that. If you need to change the extension as well, select the entire file name and change it.

If you renamed the wrong file, or named your file improperly, you can undo the rename. To revert the action, immediately click the gear button in the toolbar and select Undo to restore the former name.
Valid characters for file names

You can use any character except the / (slash) character in file names. Some devices, however, use a file system that has more restrictions on file names. Therefore, it is a best practice to avoid the following characters in your file names: |, \, ?, *, <, ", :, >, /.

If you name a file with a . as the first character, the file will be hidden when you attempt to view it in the file manager.
Common problems The file name is already in use

You can't have two files or folders with the same name in the same folder. If you try to rename a file to a name that already exists in the folder you are working in, the file manager will not allow it.

File and folder names are case sensitive, so the file name File.txt is not the same as FILE.txt. Using different file names like this is allowed, though it is not recommended.

 The file name is too long

On some file systems, file names can have no more than 255 characters in their names. This 255 character limit includes both the file name and the path to the file (e.g., /home/wanda/Documents/work/business-proposals/… ), so you should avoid long file and folder names where possible.

 The option to rename is grayed out

If Rename is grayed out, you do not have permission to rename the file. You should use caution with renaming such files, as renaming some protected files may cause your system to become unstable. See for more information.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/keyboard-shortcuts-set.page0000644000373100047300000000545612467343066027244 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Define or change keyboard shortcuts in Keyboard settings. Set keyboard shortcuts

To change the key or keys to be pressed for a keyboard shortcut:

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Keyboard and select the Shortcuts tab.

Select a category in the left pane, and the row for the desired action on the right. The current shortcut definition will change to New accelerator…

Hold down the desired key combination, or press Backspace to clear.
Custom shortcuts

To create your own keyboard shortcut:

Select Custom Shortcuts in the left pane, and click the + button (or click the + button in any category). The Custom Shortcut window will appear.

Type a Name to identify the shortcut, and a Command to run an application, then click Apply. For example, if you wanted the shortcut to open Rhythmbox, you could name it Music and use the rhythmbox command.

Click Disabled in the row that was just added. When it changes to New accelerator…, hold down the desired shortcut key combination.

The command name that you type should be a valid system command. You can check that the command works by opening a Terminal and typing it in there. The command that opens an application may not have exactly the same name as the application itself.

If you want to change the command that is associated with a custom keyboard shortcut, double-click the name of the shortcut. The Custom Shortcut window will appear, and you can edit the command.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/bluetooth.page0000644000373100047300000000236512467343064024616 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Connect, send files, turn on and off… Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a wireless protocol that allows you to connect many different types of devices to your computer. Bluetooth is commonly used for headsets and input devices like mice and keyboards. You can also use Bluetooth to send files between devices, such as from your computer to your cell phone.

Bluetooth problems Problèmas
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/hardware-driver.page0000644000373100047300000000331712467343071025673 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 A hardware/device driver allows your computer to use devices that are attached to it. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org What is a driver?

Devices are the physical "parts" of your computer. They may be external like printers and monitor or internal like graphics and audio cards.

In order for your computer to be able to use these devices, it needs to know how to communicate with them. This is done by a piece of software called a device driver.

When you attach a device to your computer, you must have the correct driver installed for that device to work. For example, if you plug in a printer but the correct driver isn't available, you won't be able to use the printer. Normally, each model of device uses a driver that is not compatible with any other model.

On Linux, the drivers for most devices are installed by default, so everything should work when you plug it in. However, the drivers may need to be installed manually or may not be available at all.

In addition, some existing drivers are incomplete or partially non-functional. For example, you might find that your printer can't do double-sided printing, but is otherwise completely functional.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/mouse-mousekeys.page0000644000373100047300000000662712467343066025772 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Enable mouse keys to control the mouse with the keypad. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Click and move mouse pointer using the keypad

If you have difficulties using a mouse or other pointing device, you can control the mouse pointer using the numeric keypad on your keyboard. This feature is called mouse keys.

Tap the Super key to open the Dash.

Type Universal Access and press Enter to open the Universal Access settings.

Press Tab once to select the Seeing tab.

Press ← once to switch to the Pointing and Clicking tab.

Press ↓ once to select the Mouse Keys switch then press Enter to switch it on.

Make sure that Num Lock is turned off. You will now be able to move the mouse pointer using the keypad.

These instructions provide the shortest way to enable mouse keys using only the keyboard. Select Universal Access Settings to see more accessibility options.

The keypad is a set of numerical buttons on your keyboard, usually arranged into a square grid. If you have a keyboard without a keypad (such as a laptop keyboard), you may need to hold down the function (Fn) key and use certain other keys on your keyboard as a keypad. If you use this feature often on a laptop, you can purchase external USB keypads.

Each number on the keypad corresponds to a direction. For example, pressing 8 will move the pointer upwards and pressing 2 will move it downwards. Press the 5 key to click once with the mouse, or quickly press it twice to double-click.

Most keyboards have a special key which allows you to right-click; it is often near to the space bar. Note, however, that this key responds to where your keyboard focus is, not where your mouse pointer is. See for information on how to right-click by holding down 5 or the left mouse button.

If you want to use the keypad to type numbers while mouse keys is enabled, turn Num Lock on. The mouse cannot be controlled with the keypad when Num Lock is turned on, though.

The normal number keys, in a line at the top of the keyboard, will not control the mouse pointer. Only the keypad number keys can be used.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/backup-what.page0000644000373100047300000000500512467343071025007 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Back up anything that you can't bear to lose if something goes wrong. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com What to back up

Your priority should be to back up your most important files as well as those that are difficult to recreate. For example, ranked from most important to least important:

Vòstres fichièrs personals

This may include documents, spreadsheets, email, calendar appointments, financial data, family photos, or any other personal files that you would consider irreplaceable.

 Your personal settings

This includes changes you may have made to colors, backgrounds, screen resolution and mouse settings on your desktop. This also includes application preferences, such as settings for LibreOffice, your music player, and your email program. These are replaceable, but may take a while to recreate.

 Paramètres del sistèma

Most people never change the system settings that are created during installation. If you do customize your system settings for some reason, or if you use your computer as a server, then you may wish to back up these settings.

 Installed software

The software you use can normally be restored quite quickly after a serious computer problem by reinstalling it.

In general, you will want to back up files that are irreplaceable and files that require a great time investment to replace without a backup. If things are easy to replace, on the other hand, you may not want to use up disk space by having backups of them.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/power-nowireless.page0000644000373100047300000000410512467343062026125 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Some wireless devices have problems handling when your computer is suspended and doesn't resume properly. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com I have no wireless network when I wake up my computer

If you have suspended your computer, or it has hibernated, you may find that your wireless internet connection does not work when you resume it again. This happens when the driver for the wireless device does not fully support certain power saving features. Typically, the wireless connection fails to turn on properly when the computer is resumed.

If this happens, try switching your wireless off and then back on again:

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings

Open Network and select the Wireless tab

Switch the wireless off and then on again

If the wireless still does not work, switch on Airplane Mode and then switch it off again

If this doesn't work, restarting your computer should make the wireless work again.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/nautilus-list.page0000644000373100047300000000675112467343063025430 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Control what information is displayed in columns in list view. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com File manager list columns preferences

There are nine columns of information that you can display in the file manager's list view. Click Files in the menu bar, pick Preferences and choose the List Columns tab to select which columns will be visible.

Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to choose the order in which the selected columns will appear.

<gui>Name</gui>

The name of folders and files in the folder being viewed.

 <gui>Size</gui>

The size of a folder is given as the number of items contained in the folder. The size of a file is given as bytes, KB, or MB.

 <gui>Type</gui>

Displayed as folder, or file type such as PDF document, JPEG image, MP3 audio, and more.

 <gui>Modified</gui>

Gives the date and time of the last time the file was modified.

 <gui>Owner</gui>

The name of the user the folder or file is owned by.

 <gui>Group</gui>

The group the file is owned by. On my home computers, each user is in their own group. Groups are sometimes used in corporate environments, where users might be in groups according to department or project.

 <gui>Permissions</gui>

Displays the file access permissions e.g. drwxrw-r--

The first character - is the file type. - means regular file and d means directory (folder).

The next three characters rwx specify permissions for the user who owns the file.

The next three rw- specify permissions for all members of the group that owns the file.

The last three characters in the column r-- specify permissions for all other users on the system.

Each character has the following meanings:

r : Read permission.

w : Write permission.

x : Execute permission.

- : No permission.

<gui>MIME Type</gui>

Displays the MIME type of the item.

 <gui>Location</gui>

The path to the location of the file.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/a11y-dwellclick.page0000644000373100047300000000633412467343066025501 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com The Hover Click (Dwell Click) feature allows you to click by holding the mouse still. Simulacion d'un clic al moment del susvòl pel puntador

You can click or drag simply by hovering your mouse pointer over a control or object on the screen. This is useful if you find it difficult to move the mouse and click at the same time. This feature is called Hover Click or Dwell Click.

When Hover Click is enabled, you can move your mouse pointer over a control, let go of the mouse, and then wait for a while before the button will be clicked for you.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Click your name on the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Universal Access and select the Pointing and Clicking tab.

Activatz Clic per susvòl.

The Hover Click window will open, and will stay above all of your other windows. You can use this to choose what sort of click should happen when you hover. For example, if you select Secondary Click, you will right-click when you hover. After you double-click, right-click, or drag, you will be automatically returned to clicking.

When you hover your mouse pointer over a button and don't move it, it will gradually change color. When it has fully changed color, the button will be clicked.

Adjust the Delay setting to change how long you have to hold the mouse pointer still before clicking.

You don't need to hold the mouse perfectly still when hovering to click. The pointer is allowed to move a little bit and will still click after a while. If it moves too much, however, the click will not happen.

Adjust the Motion threshold setting to change how much the pointer can move and still be considered to be hovering.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/color-calibrationcharacterization.page0000644000373100047300000000523412467343074031466 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Calibration and characterization are different things entirely. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com What's the difference between calibration and characterization?

Many people are initially confused about the difference between calibration and characterization. Calibration is the process of modifying the color behavior of a device. This is typically done using two mechanisms:

Changing controls or internal settings that it has

Applying curves to its color channels

The idea of calibration is to put a device in a defined state with regard to its color response. Often this is used as a day to day means of maintaining reproducible behavior. Typically calibration will be stored in device or systems specific file formats that record the device settings or per-channel calibration curves.

Characterization (or profiling) is recording the way a device reproduces or responds to color. Typically the result is stored in a device ICC profile. Such a profile does not in itself modify color in any way. It allows a system such as a CMM (Color Management Module) or a color aware application to modify color when combined with another device profile. Only by knowing the characteristics of two devices, can a way of transferring color from one device representation to another be achieved.

Note that a characterization (profile) will only be valid for a device if it's in the same state of calibration as it was when it was characterized.

In the case of display profiles there is some additional confusion because often the calibration information is stored in the profile for convenience. By convention it is stored in a tag called the vcgt tag. Although it is stored in the profile, none of the normal ICC based tools or applications are aware of it, or do anything with it. Similarly, typical display calibration tools and applications will not be aware of, or do anything with the ICC characterization (profile) information.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/power.page0000644000373100047300000000226212467343071023737 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Natalia Ruz nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Suspend, energy savings, power off, screen dimming… Power & battery
Battery settings
Power problems Troubleshoot problems with power and batteries. Problèmas
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-mobile.page0000644000373100047300000000552412467343065024645 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Connect to the internet using mobile broadband Connect to mobile broadband

Mobile Broadband refers to any kind of high speed Internet connection which is provided by an external device such as a 3G USB stick or mobile phone with built-in HSPA/UMTS/GPRS data connection. Some laptops have recently been produced with mobile broadband devices already inside them.

Most mobile broadband devices should be recognized automatically when you connect them to your computer. Ubuntu will prompt you to configure the device.

The New Mobile Broadband Connection wizard will open automatically when you connect the device.

Click Forward and enter your details, including the country where your Mobile Broadband device was issued, the network provider and type of connection (for example, Contract or pre-pay).

Give your connection a name and click Apply.

Your connection is now ready to use. To connect, click the network menu in the menu bar and select your new connection.

To disconnect, click the network menu in the menu bar and click Disconnect.

If you are not prompted to configure the device when you connect it, it may still be recognized by Ubuntu. In such cases you can add the connection manually.

Click the network menu in the menu bar and select Edit Connections...

Switch to the Mobile Broadband tab.

Click Add.

This should open the New Mobile Broadband Connection wizard. Enter your details as described above.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/files-templates.page0000644000373100047300000000412212467343064025700 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Quickly create new documents from custom file templates. Anita Reitere nitalynx@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Templates for commonly-used document types

If you often create documents based on the same content, you might benefit from using file templates. A file template can be a document of any type with the formatting or content you would like to reuse. For example, you could create a template document with your letterhead.

Make a new template

Create a document that you are going to use as a template. For example, you could make your letterhead in a word processing application.

Save the file with the template content in the Templates folder in your Home folder. If the Templates folder doesn't exist, you will need to create it first.

 Use a template to create a document

Open the folder where you want to place the new document.

Right-click anywhere in the empty space in the folder, then choose New Document. The names of available templates will be listed in the submenu.

Choose your desired template from the list.

Enter a filename for the newly-created document.

Double-click the file to open it and start editing.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/shell-windows-switching.page0000644000373100047300000000604412467343065027404 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Press AltTab. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Projècte de documentacion d'Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Switch between windows
From the Launcher

Show the Launcher by moving your mouse to the top left corner of your screen.

Applications that are running have a small white triangle arrow on the left. Click on a running application icon to switch to it.

If a running application has multiple windows open, there will be multiple white arrows on the left. Click the application icon a second time to show all open windows zoomed out. Click the window you want to switch to.

From the keyboard

Press AltTab to bring up the window switcher.

Release Alt to select the next (highlighted) window in the switcher.

Otherwise, still holding down the Alt key, press Tab to cycle through the list of open windows, or ShiftTab to cycle backwards.

Windows in the window switcher are grouped by application. Previews of applications with multiple windows pop up as you click through.

You can also move between the application icons in the window switcher with the → or ← keys, or select one by clicking it with the mouse.

Previews of applications with a single window can be displayed with the ↓ key.

Only windows from the current workspace will be shown. To show windows from all workspaces, hold down the Ctrl and Alt keys and press Tab or ShiftTab.

Press SuperW to show all open windows zoomed out.

Click the window you want to switch to.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-troubleshooting-hardware-info.page0000644000373100047300000000507112467343066033202 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Contributors to the Ubuntu documentation wiki Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org You may need details such as the model number of your wireless adapter in subsequent troubleshooting steps. Wireless network troubleshooter Gather information about your network hardware

In this step, you will collect information about your wireless network device. The way you fix many wireless problems depends on the make and model number of the wireless adapter, so you will need to make a note of these details. It can also be helpful to have some of the items that came with your computer too, like device driver installation discs. Look for the following items, if you still have them:

The packaging and instructions for your wireless devices (especially the user guide for your router)

The disc containing drivers for your wireless adapter (even if it only contains Windows drivers)

The manufacturers and model numbers of your computer, wireless adapter and router. This information can usually be found on the underside/reverse of the device.

Any version/revision numbers that may be printed on your wireless network devices or their packaging. These can be especially helpful, so look carefully.

Anything on the driver disc that identifies either the device itself, its "firmware" version, or the components (chipset) it uses.

If possible, try to get access to an alternative working internet connection so that you can download software and drivers if necessary. (Plugging your computer directly into the router with an Ethernet network cable is one way of providing this, but only plug it in when you need to.)

Once you have as many of these items as possible, click Next.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/color-calibrate-screen.page0000644000373100047300000000446412467343060027126 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Calibrating your screen is important to display accurate colors. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com How do I calibrate my screen?

Calibrating your screen should be a requirement if you're involved in computer design or artwork.

By using a device called colorimeter you accurately measure the different colors that your screen is able to display. By running System SettingsColor you can create a profile, and the wizard will show you how to attach the colorimeter device and what settings to adjust.

By using a device called colorimeter you accurately measure the different colors that your screen is able to display. By running System SettingsColor you can create a profile, and the wizard will show you how to attach the colorimeter device and what settings to adjust.

Screens change all the time - the backlight in a TFT will half in brightness approximately every 18 months, and will get yellower as it gets older. This means you should recalibrate your screen when the [!] icon appears in the color control panel.

LED screens also change over time, but a much slower rate than TFTs.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/nautilus-connect.page0000644000373100047300000001467612467343075026116 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 View and edit files on another computer over FTP, SSH, Windows shares, or WebDAV. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Browse files on a server or network share

You can connect to a server or network share to browse and view files on that server, exactly as if they were on your own computer. This is a convenient way to download or upload files on the internet, or to share files with other people on your local network.

To browse files over the network, open the Files application from the Dash, and click Browse Network in the sidebar. The file manager will find any computers on your local area network that advertise their ability to serve files. If you want to connect to a server on the internet, or if you do not see the computer you're looking for, you can manually connect to a server by typing in its internet/network address.

Connect to a file server

In the file manager, click Files in the menu bar and pick Connect to Server from the app menu.

Enter the address of the server, in the form of a URL. Details on supported URLs are listed below.

If you have connected to the server before, you can click on it in the Recent Servers list.

Click Connect. A new window will open showing you the files on the server. You can browse the files just as you would for those on your own computer. The server will also be added to the sidebar so you can access it quickly in the future
Writing URLs

A URL, or uniform resource locator, is a form of address that refers to a location or file on a network. The address is formatted like this:

scheme://servername.example.com/folder

The scheme specifies the protocol or type of server. The example.com portion of the address is called the domain name. If a username is required, it is inserted before the server name:

scheme://username@servername.example.com/folder

Some schemes require the port number to be specified. Insert it after the domain name:

scheme://servername.example.com:port/folder

Below are specific examples for the various server types that are supported.

Types of servers

You can connect to different types of servers. Some servers are public, and allow anybody to connect. Other servers require you to log in with a username and password.

You may not have permissions to perform certain actions on files on a server. For example, on public FTP sites, you will probably not be able to delete files.

The URL you enter depends on the protocol that the server uses to export its file shares.

SSH

If you have a secure shell account on a server, you can connect using this method. Many web hosts provide SSH accounts to members so they can securely upload files. SSH servers always require you to log in.

A typical SSH URL looks like this:

ssh://username@servername.example.com/folder

When using SSH, all the data you send (including your password) is encrypted so that other users on your network can't see it.

 FTP (with login)

FTP is a popular way to exchange files on the Internet. Because data is not encrypted over FTP, many servers now provide access through SSH. Some servers, however, still allow or require you to use FTP to upload or download files. FTP sites with logins will usually allow you to delete and upload files.

A typical FTP URL looks like this:

ftp://username@ftp.example.com/path/

 Public FTP

Sites that allow you to download files will sometimes provide public or anonymous FTP access. These servers do not require a username and password, and will usually not allow you to delete or upload files.

A typical anonymous FTP URL looks like this:

ftp://ftp.example.com/path/

Some anonymous FTP sites require you to log in with a public username and password, or with a public username using your email address as the password. For these servers, use the FTP (with login) method, and use the credentials specified by the FTP site.

 Windows share

Windows computers use a proprietary protocol to share files over a local area network. Computers on a Windows network are sometimes grouped into domains for organization and to better control access. If you have the right permissions on the remote computer, you can connect to a Windows share from the file manager.

A typical Windows share URL looks like this:

smb://servername/Share

 WebDAV and Secure WebDAV

Based on the HTTP protocol used on the web, WebDAV is sometimes used to share files on a local network and to store files on the internet. If the server you're connecting to supports secure connections, you should choose this option. Secure WebDAV uses strong SSL encryption, so that other users can't see your password.

A typical WebDAV URL looks like this:

http://example.hostname.com/path
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/accounts-remove.page0000644000373100047300000000330312467343060025710 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Greg Beam ki7mt@yahoo.com Remove online account services Remove an account

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Select Online Accounts.

From the left windowpane, select the account you wish to remove.

Click the Remove Account button in the lower-right portion of the window.

Removing the selection from Online Accounts in no way affects the account from your service provider.

Click Remove.

Instead of deleting the account completely, you can restrict the service from being accessed by your desktop.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/video-sending.page0000644000373100047300000000545412467343063025345 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Check that they have the right video codecs installed. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Other people can't play the videos I made

If you made a video on your Linux computer and sent it to someone using Windows or Mac OS, you may find that they have problems playing the video.

To be able to play your video, the person you sent it to must have the right codecs installed. A codec is a little piece of software that knows how to take the video and display it on the screen. There are lots of different video formats and each requires a different codec to play it back. You can check which format your video is by doing:

Open the file manager.

Right-click on video file and select Properties.

Go to the Audio/Video tab and look at which codec is listed under Video.

Ask the person having problems with playback if they have the right codec installed. They may find it helpful to search the web for the name of the codec plus the name of their video playback application. For example, if your video uses the Theora format and you have a friend using Windows Media Player to try and watch it, search for "theora windows media player". You will often be able to download the right codec for free if it's not installed.

If you can't find the right codec, try the VLC media player. It works on Windows and Mac OS as well as Linux, and supports a lot of different video formats. Otherwise, try converting your video into a different format. Most video editors are able to do this, and specific video converter applications are available. Check the Ubuntu Software Center to see what's available.

There are a few other problems which might prevent someone from playing your video. The video could have been damaged when you sent it to them (sometimes big files aren't copied across perfectly), they could have problems with their video playback application, or the video may not have been created properly (there could have been some errors when you saved the video).

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/power-batterywindows.page0000644000373100047300000000365612467343063027033 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tweaks from the manufacturer and differing battery life estimates may be the cause of this problem. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Why do I have less battery life than I did on Windows/Mac OS?

Some computers appear to have a shorter battery life when running on Linux than they do when running Windows or Mac OS. One reason for this is that computer vendors install special software for Windows/Mac OS that optimizes various hardware/software settings for a given model of computer. These tweaks are often highly specific, and may not be documented, so including them in Linux is difficult.

Unfortunately, there is not an easy way of applying these tweaks yourself without knowing exactly what they are. You may find that using some power-saving methods helps, though. If your computer has a variable-speed processor, you might find that changing its settings is also useful.

Another possible reason for the discrepancy is that the method of estimating battery life is different on Windows/Mac OS than on Linux. The actual battery life could be exactly the same, but the different methods give different estimates.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/accounts-whyadd.page0000644000373100047300000000245012467343065025702 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Susanna Huhtanen ihmis.suski@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Greg Beam ki7mt@yahoo.com Why add your email or social media accounts to your desktop? Why should I add an account?

Adding your accounts brings a choice of services like calendar, chat, and e-mail straight to your desktop, making services a seamless part of your user experience. By adding accounts, you can keep in touch with services of different accounts, like chats, at the same time. Just set your account once and every time you start your computer all the accounts and services you've added will be ready for you.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/power-lowpower.page0000644000373100047300000000374512467343075025626 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Allowing the battery to completely discharge is bad for it. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Why did my computer turn off/suspend when the battery got to 10%?

When the charge level of the battery gets too low, your computer will automatically suspend. It does this to make sure that the battery doesn't completely discharge, since this is bad for the battery. If the battery just ran out, the computer wouldn't have time to shut down properly either.

You can change what happens when the battery level gets too low. First, click the battery menu in the menu bar and select Power Settings. At the 'When power is critically low' setting, you can choose for the computer to suspend, hibernate, or shut down. If you choose shut down, your applications and documents will not be saved when the computer turns off.

Some computers have problems suspending, and may not be able to recover the applications and documents you had open when you turn on the computer again. In this case, it is possible that you could lose some of your work if you didn't save it before the computer suspended. You may be able to fix problems with suspend though.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-antivirus.page0000644000373100047300000000354112467343062025414 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 There are few Linux viruses, so you probably don't need anti-virus software. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Do I need anti-virus software?

If you are used to Windows or Mac OS, you are probably also used to having anti-virus software running all of the time. Anti-virus software runs in the background, constantly checking for computer viruses that might find their way onto your computer and cause problems.

Anti-virus software does exist for Linux, but you probably don't need to use it. Viruses that affect Linux are still very rare. Some argue that this is because Linux is not as widely used as other operating systems, so no-one writes viruses for it. Others argue that Linux is intrinsically more secure, and security problems that viruses could make use of are fixed very quickly.

Whatever the reason, Linux viruses are so rare that you don't really need to worry about them at the moment.

If you want to be extra-safe, or if you want to check for viruses in files that you are passing between yourself and people using Windows and Mac OS, you can still install anti-virus software. Check in the Ubuntu Software Center where a number of applications are available.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-chat.page0000644000373100047300000000141612467343067024313 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chat on any network using Empathy, make video calls, install skype, social networking apps The Ubuntu Documentation Team Chat & Social Networking usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/sharing.page0000644000373100047300000000142312467343062024234 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Desktop sharing, Share files… Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Sharing usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/unity-dash-friends.page0000644000373100047300000000272712467343070026325 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Browse messages from your online social media accounts. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Friends scope

The Friends scope is the sixth lens after the Dash home in the lens bar and is represented by a speaking bubble. The Friends scope gives you access to your social media accounts.

You can use SuperG to open the Dash directly at the Friends Scope icon.

The lens will be blank until you enter your credentials in Online Accounts.
Previews

Right click on a search result to open a preview. The preview gives you more information and allows you to "like" or reshare posts.

Filters

Click Filter results to filter by account.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/disk-benchmark.page0000644000373100047300000000545212467343066025475 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Run benchmarks on your hard disk to check how fast it is. Test the performance of your hard disk

To test the speed of your hard disk:

Open the Disks application from the Dash.

Open the Disks application from the activities overview.

Choose the hard disk from the Disk Drives list.

Click the gear button and select Benchmark Drive.

Click Start Benchmark and adjust the Transfer Rate and Access Time parameters as desired.

Click Start Benchmarking to test how fast data can be read from the disk. Administrative privileges may be required. Enter your password, or the password for the requested administrator account.

If Also perform write-benchmark is checked, the benchmark will test how fast data can be read from and written to the disk. This will take longer to complete.

When the test is finished, the results will appear on the graph. The green points and connecting lines indicate the samples taken; these correspond to the right axis, showing access time, plotted against the bottom axis, representing percentage time elapsed during the benchmark. The blue line represents read rates, while the red line represents write rates; these are shown as access data rates on the left axis, plotted against percentage of the disk traveled, from the outside to the spindle, along the bottom axis.

Below the graph, values are displayed for minimum, maximum and average read and write rates, average access time and time elapsed since the last benchmark test.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-macaddress.page0000644000373100047300000000400612467343061025472 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com The unique identifier assigned to network hardware. What is a MAC address?

A MAC address is the unique identifier that is assigned by the manufacturer to a piece of network hardware (like a wireless card or an Ethernet card). MAC stands for Media Access Control, and each identifier is intended to be unique to a particular device.

A MAC address consists of six sets of two characters, each separated by a colon. 00:1B:44:11:3A:B7 is an example of a MAC address.

To identify the MAC address of your own network hardware:

Click the network menu on the menu bar.

Select Connection Information.

Your MAC address will be displayed as the Hardware Address.

In practice, you may need to modify or "spoof" a MAC address. For example, some internet service providers may require that a specific MAC address be used to access their service. If the network card stops working, and you need to swap a new card in, the service won't work anymore. In such cases, you would need to spoof the MAC address.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/printing-select.page0000644000373100047300000000241112467343062025706 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Print only specific pages, or only a range of pages. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Print only certain pages

To only print certain pages from the document:

Click FilePrint

In the General tab in the Print window choose Pages from the Range section.

Type the numbers of the pages you want to print in the text box, separated by commas. Use a dash to denote a range of pages.

For example, if you enter "1,3,5-7,9" in the Pages text box, pages 1,3,5,6,7 and 9 will be printed.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/power-batteryoptimal.page0000644000373100047300000000415512467343064027002 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tips such as "Do not let the battery charge get too low" Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Get the most out of your laptop battery

As laptop batteries age, they get worse at storing charge and their capacity gradually decreases. There are a few techniques that you can use to prolong their useful lifetime, although you should not expect a big difference.

Do not let the battery run all the way down. Always recharge before the battery gets very low, although most batteries have built-in safeguards to prevent the battery running too low. Recharging when it is only partially discharged is more efficient, but recharging when it is only slightly discharged is worse for the battery.

Heat has a detrimental effect on the charging efficiency of the battery. Do not let the battery get any warmer than it has to.

Batteries age even if you leave them in storage. There is little advantage in buying a replacement battery at the same time as you get the original battery - always buy replacements when you need them.

This advice applies specifically to Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) batteries, which are the most common type. Other types of battery may benefit from different treatment.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-adhoc.page0000644000373100047300000000351412467343071026301 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Use an ad-hoc network to allow other devices to connect to your computer and its network connections. Create a wireless hotspot

You can use your computer as a wireless hotspot. This allows other devices to connect to you without a separate network, and allows you to share an internet connection you've made with another interface, such as to a wired network or over the cellular network.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Network and select Wireless on the left.

Click the Use as Hotspot button.

If you are already connected to a wireless network, you will be asked if you want to disconnect from that network. A single wireless adapter can only connect to or create one network at a time. Click Create Hotspot to confirm.

A network name (SSID) and security key are automatically generated. The network name will be based on the name of your computer. Other devices will need this information to connect to the hotspot you've just created.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/power-batteryestimate.page0000644000373100047300000000471612467343065027154 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 The battery life displayed when you click on the battery icon is an estimate. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com The estimated battery life is wrong

When you check the remaining battery life, you may find that the time remaining that it reports is different to how long the battery actually lasts. This is because the amount of remaining battery life can only be estimated. Normally, the estimates improve over time.

In order to estimate the remaining battery life, a number of factors must be taken into account. One is the amount of power currently being used by the computer: power consumption varies depending on how many programs you have open, which devices are plugged in, and whether you are running any intensive tasks (like watching a DVD or converting music files, for example). This changes from moment to moment, and is difficult to predict.

Another factor is how the battery discharges. Some batteries lose charge faster the emptier they get. Without precise knowledge of how the battery discharges, only a rough estimate of remaining battery life can be made.

As the battery discharges, the power manager will figure out its discharge properties and will learn how to make better estimates of battery life. They will never be completely accurate, though.

If you get a completely ridiculous battery life estimate (say, hundreds of days), the power manager is probably missing some of the data it needs to make a sensible estimate.

If you unplug the power and run the laptop on battery for a while, then plug it in and let it recharge again, the power manager should be able to get the data it needs.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/keyboard-repeat-keys.page0000644000373100047300000000377112467343075026644 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Make the keyboard not repeat letters when you hold down a key, or change the delay and speed of repeat keys. Turn off repeated key presses

By default, when you hold down a key on your keyboard, the letter or symbol will be repeated until you release the key. If you have difficulty picking your finger back up quickly enough, you can disable this feature, or change how long it takes before key presses start repeating.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

In the Hardware section, click Keyboard.

Turn off Key presses repeat when key is held down to disable repeated keys entirely.

Alternatively, adjust the Delay slider to control how long you have to hold a key down to begin repeating it, and adjust the Speed slider to control how quickly key presses repeat.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/shell-windows-states.page0000644000373100047300000000767412467343070026716 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Restore, resize, arrange and hide. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org 2012 Window operations

Windows can be resized or concealed to suit workflow.

Minimize, restore and close

To minimize or hide a window:

Click the - in the top left hand corner of the application's menu bar. If the application is maximized (taking up your whole screen), the menu bar will appear at the very top of the screen. Otherwise, the minimize button will appear at the top of the application window.

Or press AltSpace to bring up the window menu. Then press n. The window 'disappears' into the Launcher.

To restore the window:

Click on it in the Launcher or retrieve it from the window switcher by pressing AltTab.

To close the window:

Click the x in the top left hand corner of the window, or

Press AltF4, or

Press AltSpace to bring up the window menu. Then press c.
Resize

A window cannot be resized if it is maximized.

To resize your window horizontally and/or vertically:

Move the mouse pointer into any corner of the window until it changes into a 'corner-pointer'. Click+hold+drag to resize the window in any direction.

To resize only in the horizontal direction:

Move the mouse pointer to either side of the window until it changes into a 'side-pointer'. Click+hold+drag to resize the window horizontally.

To resize only in the vertical direction:

Move the mouse pointer to the top or bottom of the window until it changes into a 'top-pointer' or 'bottom-pointer' respectively. Click+hold+drag to resize the window vertically.
Arranging windows in your workspace

To place two windows side by side:

Click on the title bar of a window and drag it toward the left edge of the screen. When the mouse pointer touches the edge, the left half of the screen becomes highlighted. Release the mouse button and the window will fill the left half of the screen.

Drag another window to the right side: when the right half of the screen is highlighted, release. Each of the two windows fills half the screen.

Pressing Alt + click anywhere in a window will allow you to move the window. Some people may find this easier than clicking on the title bar of an application.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/addremove-ppa.page0000644000373100047300000000450112467343062025325 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Add PPAs to help test pre-release or specialty software. Apondre un depaus personal de logicials (PPA)

Personal Package Archives (PPAs) are software repositories designed for Ubuntu users and are easier to install than other third-party repositories.

Only add software repositories from sources that you trust!

Third-party software repositories are not checked for security or reliability by Ubuntu members, and may contain software which is harmful to your computer.

Installar un PPA

On the PPA's overview page, look for the heading Adding this PPA to your system. Make a note of the PPA's location, which should look similar to: ppa:mozillateam/firefox-next.

Click the Ubuntu Software Center icon in the Launcher, or search for Software Center in the Dash.

When the Software Center launches, click Edit Software Sources

Bascuolar cap a l'onglet Autres logicials.

Click Add and enter the ppa: location.

Click Add Source. Enter your password in the Authenticate window.

Close the Software Sources window. Ubuntu Software Center will then check your software sources for new software.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/color-calibrate-camera.page0000644000373100047300000000320312467343072027070 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Calibrating your camera is important to capture accurate colors. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com How do I calibrate my camera?

Camera devices are calibrated by taking a photograph of a target under the desired lighting conditions. By converting the RAW file to a TIFF file, it can be used to calibrate the camera device in the color control panel.

You will need to crop the TIFF file so that just the target is visible. Ensure the white or black borders are still visible. Calibration will not work if the image is upside-down or is distorted by a large amount.

The resulting profile is only valid under the lighting condition that you acquired the original image from. This means you might need to profile several times for studio, bright sunlight and cloudy lighting conditions.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/user-delete.page0000644000373100047300000000365712467343070025031 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Remove users that no longer use your computer. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Delete a user account

You can add multiple user accounts to your computer. See to learn how. If somebody is no longer using your computer, you can delete that user's account.

Click the icon at the far right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open User Accounts.

Click Unlock in the top right corner and type your password to make changes. You must be an administrative user to delete user accounts.

Select the user you want to delete and click the - button.

Each user has their own home folder for their files and settings. You can choose to keep or delete the user's home folder. Click Delete Files if you're sure they won't be used anymore and you need to free up disk space. These files are permanently deleted. They can't be recovered. You may want to back up the files to an external drive or CD before deleting them.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/power-suspend.page0000644000373100047300000000340112467343067025417 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Suspend sends your computer to sleep so it uses less power. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com What happens when I suspend my computer?

When you suspend the computer, you send it to sleep. All of your applications and documents remain open, but the screen and other parts of the computer switch off to save power. The computer is still switched on though, and it will still be using a small amount of power. You can wake it up by pressing a key or clicking the mouse. If that does not work, try pressing the power button.

Some computers have problems with hardware support which mean that they may not be able to suspend or hibernate properly. It is a good idea to test suspend on your computer to see if it does work before relying on it.

Always save your work before suspending

You should save all of your work before suspending the computer, just in case something goes wrong and your open applications and documents cannot be recovered when you resume the computer again.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/disk.page0000644000373100047300000000141012467343063023530 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Disk space, performance, problems, volumes and partitions… Disks & storage usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/prefs.page0000644000373100047300000000154512467343071023725 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Settings Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Keyboard, mouse, display, languages, user accounts… User & system settings usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/contacts.page0000644000373100047300000000127712467343071024426 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Access your contacts. Contacts

Use Contacts to store, access or edit information for your contacts, locally or in your Online Accounts.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/color-gettingprofiles.page0000644000373100047300000000310212467343062027116 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Color profiles are provided by vendors and can be generated yourself. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Where do I get color profiles?

The best way to get profiles is to generate them yourself, although this does require some initial outlay.

Many manufacturers do try to provide color profiles for devices, although sometimes they are wrapped up in driver bundles which you may need to download, extract and then search for the color profiles.

Some manufacturers do not provide accurate profiles for the hardware and the profiles are best avoided. A good clue is to download the profile, and if the creation date is more than a year before the date you bought the device then it's likely dummy data generated that is useless.

See for information on why vendor-supplied profiles are often worse than useless.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/nautilus-file-properties-permissions.page0000644000373100047300000001043412467343064032131 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Control who can view and edit your files and folders. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Set file permissions

You can use file permissions to control who can view and edit files that you own. To view and set the permissions for a file, right click it and select Properties, then select the Permissions tab.

See and below for details on the types of permissions you can set.

Files

You can set the permissions for the file owner, the group owner, and all other users of the system. For your files, you are the owner, and you can give yourself read-only or read-and-write permission. Set a file to read-only if you don't want to accidentally change it.

Every user on your computer belongs to a group. On home computers, it is common for each user to have their own group, and group permissions are not often used. In corporate environments, groups are sometimes used for departments or projects. As well as having an owner, each file belongs to a group. You can set the file's group and control the permissions for all users in that group. You can only set the file's group to a group you belong to.

You can also set the permissions for users other than the owner and those in the file's group.

If the file is a program, such as a script, you must select Allow executing file as program to run it. Even with this option selected, the file manager may still open the file in an application or ask you what to do. See for more information.

Folders

You can set permissions on folders for the owner, group, and other users. See the details of file permissions above for an explanation of owners, groups, and other users.

The permissions you can set for a folder are different from those you can set for a file.

<gui>None</gui>

The user will not even be able to see what files are in the folder.

 <gui>List files only</gui>

The user will be able to see what files are in the folder, but will not be able to open, create, or delete files.

 <gui>Access files</gui>

The user will be able to open files in the folder (provided they have permission to do so on the particular file), but will not be able to create new files or delete files.

 <gui>Create and delete files</gui>

The user will have full access to the folder, including opening, creating, and deleting files.

You can also quickly set the file permissions for all the files in the folder by clicking Change Permissions for Enclosed Files. Use the drop-down lists to adjust the permissions of contained files or folders, and click Change. Permissions are applied to files and folders in subfolders as well, to any depth.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/documents-search.page0000644000373100047300000000236612467343065026057 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Find your documents by title or author. Search for files

To start a search in Documents:

Press CtrlF.

Click the magnifying glass icon.

Start typing. Documents will match by title or author.

You can restrict or filter the search results by clicking the down button and selecting various filters.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-othersconnect.page0000644000373100047300000000415212467343070026244 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com You can save settings (like the password) for a network connection so that everyone who uses the computer will be able to connect to it. Other users can't connect to the internet

If you have set up a network connection but other users on your computer can't connect to it, they probably aren't entering the right settings when they try to connect. For example, if you have a wireless connection, they may not be entering the right wireless security password.

You can make it so that everyone can share the settings for a network connection once you have set it up. This means that you only need to set it up once, and everyone else on the computer will be able to connect to it without being asked any questions. To do this:

Click the network menu on the menu bar and click Edit Connections.

Find the connection you want everyone to be able to use. You will probably need to switch to the Wireless tab. Select the network name and then click Edit.

Check Available to all users and click Save. You will have to enter your admin password to save the changes. Only admin users can do this.

Other users of the computer will now be able to use this connection without entering any further details.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/music-player-newipod.page0000644000373100047300000000250712467343066026666 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Brand-new iPods need to be set-up using the iTunes software before you can use them. My new iPod won't work

If you have a new iPod that has never been connected to a computer before, it won't be recognized properly when you connect it to a Linux computer. This is because iPods need to be set up and updated using the iTunes software, which only runs on Windows and Mac OS X.

To set up your iPod, install iTunes on a Windows or Mac computer and plug it in. You will be led through a few steps to set it up. If asked for the Volume Format, choose MS-DOS (FAT), Windows or similar. The other format (HFS/Mac) does not work as well with Linux.

Once you have finished setup, the iPod should work normally when you plug it into a Linux computer.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-vpn-connect.page0000644000373100047300000000652012467343063025623 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org VPNs allow you to connect to a local network over the internet. Learn how to set up a VPN connection. Connect to a VPN

A VPN (or Virtual Private Network) is a way of connecting to a local network over the internet. For example, say you want to connect to the local network at your workplace while you're on a business trip. You would find an internet connection somewhere (like at a hotel) and then connect to your workplace's VPN. It would be as if you were directly connected to the network at work, but the actual network connection would be through the hotel's internet connection. VPN connections are usually encrypted to prevent people from accessing the local network you're connecting to without logging in.

There are a number of different types of VPN. You may have to install some extra software depending on what type of VPN you're connecting to. Find out the connection details from whoever is in charge of the VPN and see which VPN client you need to use. Then, open Ubuntu Software Center and search for the network-manager package which works with your VPN (if there is one) and install it. You will need to click the Show technical items link at the bottom of Ubuntu Software Center.

If there isn't a NetworkManager package for your type of VPN, you will probably have to download and install some client software from the company that provides the VPN software. You'll probably have to follow some different instructions to get that working.

Once that's done, you can set up the VPN connection:

Click the network menu on the menu bar and, under VPN Connections, select Configure VPN.

Click Add and choose which kind of VPN connection you have.

Click Create and follow the instructions on the screen, entering details like your username and password as you go.

When you've finished setting-up the VPN, click the network menu on the menu bar, go to VPN Connections and click on the connection you just created. It will try to establish a VPN connection - the network icon will change as it tries to connect.

Hopefully, you will successfully connect to the VPN. If not, you may need to double-check the VPN settings you entered. You can do this by clicking the network menu, selecting Edit Connections and going to the VPN tab.

To disconnect from the VPN, click the network menu and select Disconnect under the name of your VPN connection.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-othersedit.page0000644000373100047300000000457512467343072025553 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com You need to uncheck the Available to all users option in the network connection settings. Other users can't edit the network connections

If you can edit a network connection but other users on your computer can't, you may have set the connection to be available to all users. This makes it so that everyone on the computer can connect using that connection, but only users with administrative rights are allowed to change its settings.

The reason for this is that, since everyone is affected if the settings are changed, only highly-trusted (admin) users should be allowed to modify the connection.

If other users really need to be able to change the connection themselves, make it so the connection is not set to be available to everyone on the computer. This way, everyone will be able to manage their own connection settings rather than relying on one set of shared, system-wide settings for the connection.

Make it so that the connection isn't shared any more

Click the network menu on the menu bar and click Edit Connections.

Find the connection you want everyone to be able to manage/edit themselves. Click to select it and then click Edit.

You will have to enter your admin password to change the connection. Only admin users can do this.

Uncheck Available to all users and click Save. Other users of the computer will now be able to manage the connection themselves.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/look-display-fuzzy.page0000644000373100047300000000517412467343073026406 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 The screen resolution may be set incorrectly. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Why do things look fuzzy/pixelated on my screen?

This can happen because the display resolution that you have set it is not the right one for your screen.

To solve this, click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and go to System Settings. In the Hardware section, choose Displays. Try some of the Resolution options and set the one that makes the screen look better.

When multiple displays are connected

If you have two displays connected to the computer (for example, a normal monitor and a projector), the displays might have different resolutions. However, the computer's graphics card can only display the screen in one resolution at a time, so at least one of the displays might look fuzzy.

You can set it so that the two displays have different resolutions, but you won't be able to display the same thing on both screens simultaneously. In effect, you will have two independent screens connected at the same time. You can move windows from one screen to another, but you can't show the same window on both screens at once.

To set up the displays so that they each have their own resolution:

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings. Open Displays.

Uncheck Mirror Displays.

Select each display in turn from the gray box at the top of the Displays window. Change the Resolution until that display looks right.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/accounts-disable-service.page0000644000373100047300000000400712467343076027465 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Greg Beam ki7mt@yahoo.com Some online accounts allow you to use multiple services (like calendar and email). You can control which of these services can be used by local applications. Disable account services

Some types of online accounts allow access to several services from a single user account. For example, Google accounts provide access to email, calendar, code, contacts, among others. You can choose Google for email and Yahoo! for chat, or any combination the service provider allows.

To disable services:

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Select Online Accounts.

Select the account you want to change from left windowpane.

Services available for this account are listed in the right windowpane.

Switch off the services you do not want used.

Once a service has been disabled, local applications no longer have access to it. To regain access, go back into Online Accounts and switch it on.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-nonm.page0000644000373100047300000000310712467343061024334 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Press AltF2. Type nm-applet There's no network menu in the menu bar

If the network menu has disappeared from the menu bar, your Network Manager may not be running. To start it up again:

Press AltF2

Type nm-applet and press Enter.

The Wireless Network Authentication box may pop up. Enter your password in the appropriate box and click Connect.

If this doesn't work, there could be a problem with the Network Manager. To see if this is the case, go to the Dash and open the Terminal. Type nm-applet and press Enter and see if the network menu appears. If it doesn't, you should see some error messages appear in the Terminal. These should tell you what is going wrong, but they may be quite technical in nature. If so, ask for help on a support forum and quote these error messages.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/windows-key.page0000644000373100047300000000435712467343070025071 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 The Super key provides access to the Dash and the Launcher. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Qu'es aquò la tòca « Super » ?

This key can usually be found on the bottom-left of your keyboard, next to the Alt key, and usually has a window/squares icon on it. It is sometimes called the Windows key, logo key, or system key.

If you have an Apple keyboard, there will not be a Windows key on your keyboard. The ⌘ (Command) key can be used instead.

The Super key serves a special function in Unity. If you press the Super key, the Dash is displayed. If you press and hold the Super key, an overlay showing many of Unity's keyboard shortcuts appears until you release the Super key.

The Super key can help you do even more than that, though. To learn about more uses for the Super key, see the keyboard shortcuts page.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/wacom.page0000644000373100047300000000104012467343074023705 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adjust the settings of your Wacom tablet. Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Wacom Graphics Tablet usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/files.page0000644000373100047300000000347112467343060023706 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Files Searching, delete files, backups, removable drives, documents… Files, folders & search

Nautilus file manager

 Common tasks More topics
Removable drives and external disks
Backing up
Documents
Tips and questions
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/mouse-doubleclick.page0000644000373100047300000000430612467343072026213 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Control how quickly you need to press the mouse button a second time to double-click. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Adjust the double-click speed

Double-clicking only happens when you press the mouse button twice quickly enough. If the second press is too long after the first, you'll just get two separate clicks, not a double click. If you have difficulty pressing the mouse button quickly, you should increase the timeout.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Mouse & Touchpad.

Under General, adjust the Double-click slider to a value you find comfortable.

Click the Test Your Settings button to test. A single click in the window will highlight the outer circle. A double-click will highlight the inside circle.

If your mouse double-clicks when you want it to single-click even though you have increased the double-click timeout, your mouse may be faulty. Try plugging a different mouse into your computer and see if that works properly. Alternatively, plug your mouse into a different computer and see if it still has the same problem.

This setting will affect both your mouse and touchpad, as well as any other pointing device.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/tips.page0000644000373100047300000000117612467343066023571 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Special characters, middle click shortcuts… Tips & tricks usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/sound-nosound.page0000644000373100047300000001227712467343061025424 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Check that it's not muted, that cables are plugged in properly, and that the sound card is detected. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org I can't hear any sounds on the computer

If you can't hear any sounds on your computer, for example when you try to play music, try these troubleshooting steps to see if you can fix the problem.

Make sure that the sound is not muted

Click the sound menu on the menu bar (it looks like a speaker) and make sure that the sound is not muted or turned down.

Some laptops have mute switches or keys on their keyboards—try pressing that key to see if it unmutes the sound.

You should also check that you haven't muted the application that you're using to play sound (e.g. your music player or movie player). The application may have a mute or volume button in its main window, so check that. Also, click the sound menu on the menu bar and choose Sound Settings. When the Sound window appears, go to the Applications tab and check that your application is not muted.

Check that the speakers are turned on and connected properly

If your computer has external speakers, make sure that they are turned on and that the volume is turned up. Make sure that the speaker cable is securely plugged into the "output" audio socket on the back of the computer. This socket is usually light green in color.

Some sound cards are able to switch which socket they use for output (to the speakers) and input (from a microphone, for instance). The output socket may be different when running Linux than on Windows or Mac OS. Try connecting the speaker cable to the different audio sockets on the computer in turn to see if that works.

A final thing to check is that the audio cable is securely plugged into the back of the speakers. Some speakers have more than one input too.

Check that the right sound device is selected

Some computers have multiple "sound devices" installed. Some of these are capable of outputting sound and some are not, so you should check that you have the correct one selected. This might involve some trial-and-error to choose the right one.

Click the sound menu in the menu bar and click Sound Settings.

In the Sound window that appears, try selecting a different output from the Play sound through list.

For the selected device, click Test Sound. In the pop-up window, click the button for each speaker. Each button will speak its position only to the channel corresponding to that speaker.

If that doesn't work, you might want to try doing the same for any other devices that are listed.
Check that the sound card was detected properly

Your sound card may not have been detected properly. If this has happened, your computer will think that it isn't able to play sound. A possible reason for the card not being detected properly is that the drivers for the card are not installed.

Go to the Dash and open the Terminal.

Type aplay -l and press Enter.

A list of devices will be shown. If there are no playback hardware devices, your sound card has not been detected.

If your sound card is not detected, you may need to manually install the drivers for it. How you do this will depend on the card you have.

You can see what sound card you have by using the lspci command in the Terminal. You can get more complete results if you run lspci as superuser; enter sudo lspci and type your password. See if an audio controller or audio device is listed—it should have the sound card's make and model number. sudo lspci -v will show a list with more detailed information.

You may be able to find and install drivers for your card by searching the Internet. Otherwise, you can file a bug.

If you can't get drivers for your sound card, you might prefer to buy a new sound card. You can get sound cards that can be installed inside the computer and external USB sound cards.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/accounts-add.page0000644000373100047300000000555112467343065025157 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Greg Beam ki7mt@yahoo.com Connect to online accounts Apondre un compte

Adding an account will help link your online accounts with your Ubuntu desktop. Thus, your email, chat, and other related applications will be set up for you.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Select Online Accounts.

Select an Account Type from the right hand windowpane.

If you want to configure more accounts, you can repeat this process afterwards.

A small web user interface will open where you can enter your online account credentials. For example, if you are setting up a Google account, enter your Google username, password and sign in.

If you entered your credentials correctly, you will be prompted to accept the terms. Select Accept to continue. Once accepted, Ubuntu needs permission to access your account. To allow access, click on the Grant Access button. When prompted, enter the current users password.

Now you can select the applications you want linked to your online account. For example, if you want to use an online account for chat, but do not want the calendar, turn the calendar option off.

After you have added the accounts, each application you have selected will automatically use those credentials when you log into your account.

For security reasons, Ubuntu will not store your password on your computer. Instead, it stores a token that is provided by the online service. If you want to fully revoke the link between your desktop and the online service, remove it.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/files-recover.page0000644000373100047300000000366012467343073025355 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Deleted files are normally sent to the Trash, but can be recovered. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Recover a file from the Trash

If you delete a file with the file manager, the file is normally placed into the Trash, and should be able to be restored.

To restore a file from the Trash:

Open the Launcher and then click the Trash shortcut which is located at the bottom of the Launcher.

If your deleted file is there, right-click on it and select Restore. It will be restored to the folder it was deleted from.

If you deleted the file by pressing ShiftDelete , or by using the command line, the file has been permanently deleted. Files that have been permanently deleted can't be recovered from the Trash.

There are a number of recovery tools available that are sometimes able to recover files that were permanently deleted. These tools are generally not very easy to use, however. If you accidentally permanently deleted a file, it's probably best to ask for advice on a support forum to see if you can recover it.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/sharing-bluetooth.page0000644000373100047300000000263312467343061026242 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Bluetooth file sharing and receiving options. Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Control sharing over Bluetooth

You can allow access to your Public and Downloads folders for Bluetooth file sharing, and also restrict that access to only trusted devices. Configure Personal File Sharing Preferences to control access to the shared folders on your computer.

A Bluetooth device is trusted if you have paired, or connected your computer to it. See .

 Share your <file>Public</file> folder over Bluetooth

In the Dash, open Personal File Sharing.

Select the desired Bluetooth file sharing and receiving options options from the list.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/color-virtualdevice.page0000644000373100047300000000405712467343072026572 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 A virtual device is a color managed device that is not connected to the computer. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com What's a virtual color managed device?

A virtual device is a color managed device that is not connected to the computer. Examples of this might be:

An online print-shop where photos are uploaded, printed and sent to you

Photos from a digital camera stored on a memory card

To create a virtual profile for a digital camera just drag and drop one of the image files onto the System Settings Color dialog. You can then assign profiles to it like any other device or even calibrate it.

To create a virtual profile for a digital camera just drag and drop one of the image files onto the System Settings Color dialog. You can then assign profiles to it like any other device or even calibrate it.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/display-lock.page0000644000373100047300000000367612467343061025207 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Prevent other people from using your desktop when you go away from your computer. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Automatically lock your screen

When you leave your computer, you should lock the screen to prevent other people from using your desktop and accessing your files. You will still be logged in and all your applications will keep running, but you will have to enter your password to use your computer again. You can lock the screen manually, but you can also have the screen lock automatically.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Select Brightness & Lock.

Make sure Lock is switched on, then select a timeout from the drop-down list below. The screen will automatically lock after you have been inactive for this long. You can also select Screen turns off to lock the screen after the screen is automatically turned off, controlled with the Turn screen off when inactive for drop-down list above.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/color-whatisprofile.page0000644000373100047300000000257112467343064026604 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 A color profile is a simple file that expresses a color space or device response. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com What is a color profile?

A color profile is a set of data that characterizes either a device such as a projector or a color space such as sRGB.

Most color profiles are in the form of an ICC profile, which is a small file with a .ICC or .ICM file extension.

Color profiles can be embedded into images to specify the gamut range of the data. This ensures that users see the same colors on different devices.

Every device that is processing color should have it's own ICC profile and when this is achieved the system is said to have an end-to-end color-managed workflow. With this kind of workflow you can be sure that colors are not being lost or modified.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/display-dimscreen.page0000644000373100047300000000521612467343066026225 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Dim the screen to save power or increase the brightness to make it more readable in bright light. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Set screen brightness

You can change the brightness of your screen to save power or to make the screen more readable in bright light. You can also have the screen dim automatically when on battery power and have it turn off automatically when not in use.

Set the brightness

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Select Brightness & Lock.

Adjust the Brightness slider to a comfortable value.

Many laptop keyboards have special keys to adjust the brightness. These have a picture that looks like the sun and are located on the function keys at the top. Hold down the Fn key to use these keys.

Select Dim screen to save power to have the brightness automatically lowered when you're on battery power. The backlight of your screen can take a lot of power and significantly reduce how long your battery will last before it needs to be recharged.

The screen will automatically turn off after you haven't used it for a while. This only affects the display, and doesn't turn off your computer. You can adjust how long you have to be inactive with the Turn screen off when inactive for option.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/user-add.page0000644000373100047300000000656212467343061024315 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add new users so that other people can log in to the computer. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Add a new user account

You can add multiple user accounts to your computer. Give one account to each person in your household or company. Every user has their own home folder, documents, and settings.

Click the icon at the far right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open User Accounts.

You need administrator privileges to add user accounts. Click Unlock in the top right corner and type your password.

In the list of accounts on the left, click the + button to add a new user account.

If you want the new user to have administrative access to the computer, select Administrator for the account type. Administrators can do things like add and delete users, install software and drivers, and change the date and time.

Enter the new user's full name. The username will be filled in automatically based on the full name. The default is probably OK, but you can change it if you like.

Click Create.

The account is initially disabled until you choose what to do about the user's password. Under Login Options click Account disabled next to Password. Select Set a password now from the Action drop-down list, and have the user type their password in the New password and Confirm password fields. See .

You can also click the button next to the New password field to select a randomly generated secure password. These passwords are hard for others to guess, but they can be hard to remember, so be careful.

Click Change.

In the User Accounts window you can click the image next to the user's name on the right to set an image for the account. This image will be shown in the login window. GNOME provides some stock photos you can use, or you can select your own or take a picture with your webcam.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/accounts-provider-not-available.page0000644000373100047300000000335012467343070030764 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org Kevin M. Godby kevin@godby.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Greg Beam ki7mt@yahoo.com Why aren't service providers listed? Why is my account type not on the list?

Support for your favorite online service provider needs someone to develop it. Currently, the following types of online accounts are supported:

Facebook

Flickr

Google

Twitter

AIM

Windows Live

Salut

Jabber

Yahoo

If you're interested in adding support for other services, contact the developers on the bug tracker.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/power-hotcomputer.page0000644000373100047300000000523212467343066026312 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Computers usually get warm, but if they get too hot they can overheat, which can be damaging. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org My computer gets really hot

Most computers get warm after a while, and some can get quite hot. This is normal: it's simply part of the way that the computer cools itself. However, if your computer gets very warm it could be a sign that it is overheating, which can potentially cause damage.

Most laptops get reasonably warm once you have been using them for a while. It's generally nothing to worry about - computers produce a lot of heat and laptops are very compact, so they need to remove their heat rapidly and their outer casing warms up as a result. Some laptops do get too hot, however, and may be uncomfortable to use. This is normally the result of a poorly-designed cooling system. You can sometimes get additional cooling accessories which fit to the bottom of the laptop and provide more efficient cooling.

If you have a desktop computer which feels hot to the touch, it may have insufficient cooling. If this concerns you, you can buy extra cooling fans or check that the cooling fans and vents are free from dust and other blockages. You might want to consider putting the computer in a better-ventilated area too - if kept in confined spaces (e.g. in a cupboard), the computer's cooling system may not be able to remove heat and circulate cool air fast enough.

Some people are concerned about the health risks of using hot laptops. There are suggestions that prolonged use of a hot laptop on your lap might possibly reduce (male) fertility, and there are reports of minor burns being suffered too (in extreme cases). If you are concerned about these potential problems, you may wish to consult a medical practitioner for advice. Of course, you can simply choose not to rest the laptop on your lap.

Most modern computers will shut themselves down if they get too hot, to prevent themselves from becoming damaged. If your computer keeps shutting down, this might be the reason. If your computer is overheating, you will probably need to get it repaired.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/shell-workspaces.page0000644000373100047300000000452312467343076026100 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Workspaces are a way of grouping windows on your desktop. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org What is a workspace, and how will it help me?

Workspace switcher button

Workspaces refer to the grouping of windows on your desktop. These virtual desktops increase the size of your working area. Workspaces are meant to reduce clutter and make the desktop easier to navigate.

Workspaces can be used to organize your work. For example, you could have all your communication windows, such as e-mail and your chat program, on one workspace, and the work you are doing on a different workspace. Your music manager could be on a third workspace.

Open the Launcher and click the workspace switcher icon near the bottom. By default, Ubuntu shows 4 workspaces, arranged in 2 rows and 2 columns. You can change the number of workspaces:

Change the number of workspaces

Go to the Dash and open the Terminal.

To change the number of rows, type the following command, changing the final number to the number you wish. Press Enter.

gsettings set org.compiz.core:/org/compiz/profiles/unity/plugins/core/ vsize 2

To change the number of columns, type the following command, changing the final number to the number you wish. Press Enter.

gsettings set org.compiz.core:/org/compiz/profiles/unity/plugins/core/ hsize 3 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/keyboard-layouts.page0000644000373100047300000001313412467343070026100 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org 2012 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Juanjo Marín juanj.marin@juntadeandalucia.es Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Add input sources and switch between them. Use alternative input sources

Keyboards come in hundreds of different layouts for different languages. Even for a single language, there are often multiple keyboard layouts, such as the Dvorak layout for English. You can make your keyboard behave like a keyboard with a different layout, regardless of the letters and symbols printed on the keys. This is useful if you often switch between multiple languages.

Some languages, such as Chinese or Korean, require a more complex input method than just a simple key to character mapping. Consequently some of the input sources you can choose between enable such a method.

Options with input methods are only available if respective input method (IM) engine is installed. When you install a language, a suitable IM engine is automatically installed if applicable. For example, if you install Korean, the package ibus-hangul is installed, and the input source option Korean (Hangul) is made available next time you log in. You can also install the IBus IM engine of your choice separately.
Add input sources

You can preview an image of any layout by selecting it in the list and clicking preview.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

In the Personal section, click Text Entry.

Click the + button, select an input source, and click Add.

The default source is the source at the top of the list. Use the ↑ and ↓ buttons to move sources up and down in the list.

If you select a source with an input method, you can click preferences to access that method's preferences dialog if any.
Input source indicator

You can quickly switch between selected sources using the input source indicator in the menu bar. The menu will display a short identifier for the current source, such as En for the standard English layout or a symbol in case of a source that uses a special input method, e.g. Chinese (Chewing). Click the input source indicator and select from the menu the source you want to use.

Keyboard shortcuts

You can also use keyboard shortcuts to quickly switch between your selected input sources. By default the shortcut for switching to next source is SuperSpace, but you can change it:

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

In the Personal section, click Text Entry.

Click the current shortcut definition below the label Switch to next source using.

When the shortcut definition has changed to New accelerator..., press the keys you want to use as the new shortcut.
Set input source for all windows or individually for each window

When you use multiple sources, you can choose to have all windows use the same source or to set a different source for each window. Using a different source for each window is useful, for example, if you're writing an article in another language in a word processor window. Your input source selection will be remembered for each window as you switch between windows.

By default, new windows will use the default input source. You can instead choose to have them use the source of the window you were last using.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/sharing-desktop.page0000644000373100047300000000735712467343063025720 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Let other people view and interact with your desktop using VNC. Share your desktop

You can let other people view and control your desktop from another computer with a desktop viewing application. Configure Desktop Sharing to allow others to access your desktop and set the security preferences.

In the Dash, open Desktop Sharing.

To let others view your desktop, select Allow other users to view your desktop. This means that other people will be able to attempt to connect to your computer and view what's on your screen.

To let others interact with your desktop, select Allow other users to control your desktop. This may allow the other person to move your mouse, run applications, and browse files on your computer, depending on the security settings which you are currently using.
Security

It is important that you consider the full extent of what each security option means before changing it.

Confirm access to your machine

If you want to be able to choose whether to allow someone to access your desktop, select You must confirm each access to this machine. If you disable this option, you will not be asked whether you want to allow someone to connect to your computer.

This option is enabled by default.

 Enable password

To require other people to use a password when connecting to your desktop, select Require the user to enter this password. If you do not use this option, anyone can attempt to view your desktop.

This option is disabled by default, but you should enable it and set a secure password.

 Allow access to your desktop over the Internet

If your router supports UPnP Internet Gateway Device Protocol and it is enabled, you can allow other people who are not on your local network to view your desktop. To allow this, select Automatically configure UPnP router to open and forward ports. Alternatively, you can configure your router manually.

This option is disabled by default.
Show notification area icon

To be able to disconnect someone who is viewing your desktop, you need to enable this option. If you select Always, this icon will be visible regardless of whether someone is viewing your desktop or not.

If this option is disabled, it is possible for someone to connect to your desktop without your knowledge, depending on the security settings.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/power-batterybroken.page0000644000373100047300000000314612467343067026617 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Your battery is probably not broken; it's more likely that it's just old. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org An error reports my battery has low capacity

When you first log in, you might see a message that says:

Battery may be broken. Your battery has a very low capacity which means that it may be old or broken.

This message is displayed when the computer detects that your battery is not capable of storing much charge. The most likely reason for this is that your battery is old; it's probably not broken, so there's no need to worry.

Over time, all laptop batteries lose their ability to store charge. After a while (normally a year or more), the battery will only be able to store a fraction of the charge that it could when it was new. The message above is shown when this happens.

If your computer or battery is relatively new, it should be capable of holding a high percentage of its design charge. If it can't, then your battery may be broken and you might need to seek a replacement.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-install-moonlight.page0000644000373100047300000000301012467343070027022 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Some websites use Silverlight to display web pages. The Moonlight plug-in lets you view these pages. Install the Silverlight plug-in

Silverlight is a plug-in for your web browser which allows you to watch videos and use interactive web pages on some websites. Some websites won't work without Silverlight.

If you view a Silverlight-enabled website but don't have the plug-in installed, you will probably see a message telling you so. This message should have instructions telling you how to get the plug-in, but these instructions might not be suitable for your web browser or version of Linux.

If you want to view Silverlight-enabled websites, you should install the Moonlight plug-in instead. This is a free, open-source version of Silverlight which runs on Linux.

Please see the Moonlight website for more information and installation instructions.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000054412467343072023555 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000

Aqueste trabalh es publicat jos la Creative Commons Attribution - Partiment dins las Meteissas Condicions 3.0 pas transpausat.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/hardware-driver-proprietary.page0000644000373100047300000000331412467343064030250 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Proprietary device drivers are not freely available or open source. Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com What are proprietary drivers?

Most of the devices (hardware) attached to your computer should function properly in Ubuntu. These devices are likely to have open source drivers, which means that the drivers can be modified by the Ubuntu developers and problems with them can be fixed.

Some hardware does not have open source drivers, usually because the hardware manufacturer has not released details of their hardware which would make it possible to create such a driver. These devices may have limited functionality or may not work at all.

If a proprietary driver is available for a certain device, you can install it in order to allow your device to function properly, or to add new features. For example, installing a proprietary driver for certain graphics cards may allow you to use more advanced visual effects.

Many computers do not need proprietary drivers at all because the open source drivers fully support the hardware.

Most problems with proprietary drivers cannot be fixed by Ubuntu developers.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/shell-workspaces-switch.page0000644000373100047300000000357312467343072027377 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Open the workspace switcher and double-click one of the workspaces. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Switch between workspaces Using the mouse:

Open the Launcher and click the workspace switcher button near the bottom. Double-click on any window or workspace to switch to it, or press the workspace switcher button again to return to your previous workspace.

 Using the keyboard:

Press CtrlAlt→ to move to a workspace which is to the right of the current workspace.

Press CtrlAlt← to move to a workspace which is to the left of the current workspace.

Press CtrlAlt↓ to move to a workspace which is below the current workspace.

Press CtrlAlt↑ to move to a workspace which is above the current workspace.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-wepwpa.page0000644000373100047300000000262512467343075026534 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org WEP and WPA are ways of encrypting data on wireless networks. What do WEP and WPA mean?

WEP and WPA (along with WPA2) are names for different encryption tools used to secure your wireless connection. Encryption scrambles the network connection so that no one can "listen in" to it and look at which web pages you are viewing, for example. WEP stands for Wired Equivalent Privacy, and WPA stands for Wireless Protected Access. WPA2 is the second version of the WPA standard.

Using some encryption is always better than using none, but WEP is the least secure of these standards, and you should not use it if you can avoid it. WPA2 is the most secure of the three. If your wireless card and router support WPA2, that is what you should use when setting up your wireless network.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/display-dual-monitors.page0000644000373100047300000000565212467343065027054 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Set up dual monitors on your laptop. Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Connect an external monitor to your laptop
Set up an external monitor

To set up an external monitor with your laptop, connect the monitor to your laptop. If your system doesn't recognize it immediately, or you would like to adjust the settings:

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Displays.

Click on the image of the monitor you would like to activate or deactivate, then switch it ON/OFF.

By default, the Launcher only shows on the primary monitor. To change which monitor is "primary", change the monitor in the Launcher Placement drop-down box. You could also drag the Launcher in the preview to the monitor you want to set as the "primary" monitor.

If you want the Launcher to show on all monitors, change Launcher Placement to All Displays.

To change the "position" of a monitor, click on it and drag it to the desired position.

If you would like both monitors to display the same content, check the Mirror displays box.

When you are happy with your settings, click Apply and then click Keep This Configuration.

To close the Displays click on the x in the top corner.

Sticky Edges

A typical problem with dual monitors is that it's easy for the mouse pointer to "slip" to the other monitor when you don't want it to. Unity's Sticky Edges feature helps with that problem by requiring you to push a little bit harder to move the mouse pointer from one monitor to the other.

You can switch Sticky Edges off if you don't like this feature.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/report-ubuntu-bug.page0000644000373100047300000000576212467343071026221 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How and where to report problems with Ubuntu. Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Report a problem in Ubuntu

If you notice a problem in Ubuntu, you can file a bug report.

Type AltF2 and type ubuntu-bug nameofprogram

If you have a hardware issue or don't know the name of the program affected, just type ubuntu-bug

After running one of the above commands, Ubuntu will gather information about the bug. This may take a few minutes. Review the collected information if you wish. Click Send to continue.

A new web browser tab will open to continue processing the bug data. Ubuntu uses the website Launchpad to manage its bug reports. If you do not have a Launchpad account, you will need to register for one to file a bug and receive email updates about its status. You can do this by clicking Create a new account.

After logging in to Launchpad, enter a description of the problem in the summary field.

After clicking Next Launchpad will search for similar bugs in case the bug you are reporting has already been reported. If the bug has already been reported, you can mark that bug as also affecting you. You can also subscribe to the bug report to receive updates about progress with fixing it. If the bug has not already been reported, click No, I need to report a new bug.

Fill in the description field with as much information as you can. It's important that you specify three things:

What you expected to happen

What actually happened

If possible, a minimal series of steps necessary to make it happen, where step 1 is "start the program"

Your report will be given an ID number, and its status will be updated as it is being dealt with. Thanks for helping make Ubuntu better!

If you get the "This is not a genuine Ubuntu package" error, it means that the software you are trying to report a bug about is not from the official Ubuntu repositories. In this case, you cannot use Ubuntu's built-in bug reporting tool.

For more information about reporting bugs in Ubuntu, please read the extensive online documentation.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/files-removedrive.page0000644000373100047300000000553112467343071026234 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Eject or unmount a USB flash drive, CD, DVD, or other device. Safely remove an external drive

When you use external storage devices like USB flash drives, you should safely remove them before unplugging them. If you just unplug a device, you run the risk of unplugging while an application is still using it. This could result in some of your files being lost or damaged. When you use an optical disc like a CD or DVD, you can use the same steps to eject the disc from your computer.

To eject a removable device:

Open the file manager.

Locate the device in the sidebar. It should have a small eject icon next to the name. Click the eject icon to safely remove or eject the device.

Alternately, you can right-click the name of the device in the sidebar and select Eject.
Safely remove a device that is in use

If any of the files on the device are open and in use by an application, you will not be able to safely remove the device. You will be prompted with a window telling you that "the volume is busy," and listing all the open files on the device. Once you close all the files on the device, the device will automatically be safe to remove. At that time you can unplug or eject it.

If you can't close one of the files, for example if the application using the file is locked up, you can right-click the file in the Volume is busy window and select End Process. This will force the entire locked up application to close, which could close other files you have open with that application.

You can also choose Eject Anyway to remove the device without closing the files. This may cause errors in applications that have those files open.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/screen-shot-record.page0000644000373100047300000000374712467343075026326 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Take a picture of what's happening on your screen. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com 2011 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org 2012 Screenshots

You can take a picture of your screen (a screenshot). This is useful if you want to show someone how to do something on the computer, for example. Screenshots are just normal picture files, so you can email them and share them on the web.

Take a screenshot

To take a picture of what's on your screen:

Go to the Dash and open the Screenshot tool.

In the Take Screenshot window, select whether to grab the entire desktop, a single window, or an area of the screen. Set a delay if you need to select a window or otherwise set up your desktop for the screenshot. Then choose any effects you want.

Click Take Screenshot.

If you selected Select area to grab, the pointer changes into a crosshair. Click and drag the area you want for the screenshot.

In the Save Screenshot window, enter a file name and choose a folder, then click Save.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/color-calibrate-scanner.page0000644000373100047300000000346212467343071027277 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Calibrating your scanner is important to capture accurate colors. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com How do I calibrate my scanner?

You scan in your target file and save it as an uncompressed TIFF file. You can then click Calibrate… from System SettingsColor to create a profile for the device.

You scan in your target file and save it as an uncompressed TIFF file. You can then click Calibrate… from System SettingsColor to create a profile for the device.

Scanner devices are incredibly stable over time and temperature and do not usually need to be recalibrated.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/nautilus-behavior.page0000644000373100047300000001065512467343076026256 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Single-click to open files, run or view executable text files, and specify trash behavior. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Sindhu S sindhus@live.in File manager behavior preferences

You can control whether you single-click or double-click files, how executable text files are handled, and the trash behavior. Click Files in the menu bar, pick Preferences and select the Behavior tab.

Behavior <gui>Single click to open items</gui> <gui>Double click to open items</gui>

By default, clicking selects files and double-clicking opens them. You can instead choose to have files and folders open when you click on them once. When you use single-click mode, you can hold down the Ctrl key while clicking to select one or more files.
Executable text files

An executable text file is a file that contains a program that you can run (execute). The file permissions must also allow for the file to run as a program. The most common are Shell, Python and Perl scripts. These have extensions .sh, .py and .pl, respectively.

When you open an executable text file, you can select from:

Run executable text files when they are opened

View executable text files when they are opened

Ask each time

If Ask each time is selected, a dialog will pop up asking if you wish to run or view the selected text file.

Executable text files are also called scripts. All scripts in ~/.local/share/nautilus/scripts folder will appear in the context menu for a file under the Scripts submenu. When a script is executed from a local folder, all selected files will be pasted to the script as parameters. To execute a script on a file:

Navigate to the desired folder.

Select the desired file.

Right click on the file to open the context menu and select the desired script to execute from the Scripts menu.

A script will not be passed any parameters when executed from a remote folder such as a folder showing web or ftp content.
File manager trash preferences Trash <gui>Ask before emptying the Trash or deleting files</gui>

This option is selected by default. When emptying the trash, a message will be displayed confirming that you would like to empty the trash or delete files.

 <gui>Include a Delete command that bypasses Trash</gui>

Selecting this option will add a Delete item to the menu that pops up when you right-click on an item in the Files application.

Deleting an item using the Delete menu option bypasses the Trash altogether. The item is removed from the system completely. There is no way to recover the deleted item.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/backup-frequency.page0000644000373100047300000000376712467343067026067 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Learn how often you should backup your important files to make sure that they're safe. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Frequency of backups

How often you make backups will depend on the type of data to be backed up. For example, if you are running a network environment with critical data stored on your servers, then even nightly backups may not be enough.

On the other hand, if you are backing up the data on your home computer then hourly backups would likely be unnecessary. You may find it helpful to consider the following points when planning your backup schedule:

The amount of time you spend on the computer.

How often and by how much the data on the computer changes.

If the data you want to back up is lower priority, or subject to few changes, like music, e-mails and family photos, then weekly or even monthly backups may suffice. However, if you happen to be in the middle of a tax audit, more frequent backups may be necessary.

As a general rule, the amount of time in between backups should be no more than the amount of time you are willing to spend re-doing any lost work. For example, if spending a week re-writing lost documents is too long for you, you should back up at least once per week.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/printing-envelopes.page0000644000373100047300000000427212467343071026436 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Make sure that you have the envelope/label the right way up, and have chosen the correct paper size. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Print envelopes and labels

Most printers will allow you to print directly onto an envelope or sheet of labels. This is especially useful if you have a lot of letters to send, for example.

Printing onto envelopes

There are two things you need to check when trying to print onto an envelope. The first is that your printer knows what size the envelope is. After you click Print and the Print window appears, go to the Page Setup tab and choose the Paper type as "Envelope" if you can. If you can't do this, see if you can change the Paper size to an envelope size (e.g. "C5"). The pack of envelopes will say what size they are; most envelopes come in standard sizes.

Secondly, you need to make sure that the envelopes are loaded with the right side up in the printer's in-tray. Check the printer's manual for this, or try to print a single envelope and check which side is printed on to see which way is the right way up.

Some printers are not designed to be able to print envelopes, especially some laser printers. Check your printer's manual to see if it accepts envelopes; otherwise, you could damage the printer by feeding an envelope in.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/files-autorun.page0000644000373100047300000001275712467343062025412 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Automatically run applications for CDs and DVDs, cameras, audio players, and other devices and media. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Open applications for devices or discs

You can have an application automatically start when you plug in a device or insert a disc or media card. For example, you might want your photo organizer to start when you plug in a digital camera. You can also turn this off, so that nothing happens when you plug something in.

To decide which applications should start when you plug in various devices:

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Select DetailsRemovable Media.

Find your desired device or media type, and then choose an application or action for that media type. See below for a description of the different types of devices and media.

Instead of starting an application, you can also set it so that the device will be shown in the file manager. When that happens, you will be asked what to do, or nothing will happen automatically.

The Software option is slightly different from the others - if the computer detects that there is software on a disk that you inserted, it can try to automatically run the software if you like. This is good if you have an application installed on a CD and want it to start when the disc is inserted (for example, a slideshow).

If you don't see the device or media type that you want to change in the list (such as Blu-ray discs or E-book readers), click Other Media to see a more detailed list of devices. Select the type of device or media from the Type drop-down and the application or action from the Action drop-down.

If you don't want any applications to be opened automatically, whatever you plug in, select Never prompt or start programs on media insertion at the bottom of the Removable Media window.
Types of devices and media Audio discs

Choose your favorite music application or CD audio extractor to handle audio CDs. If you use audio DVDs (DVD-A), select how to open them under Other Media. If you open an audio disc with the file manager, the tracks will appear as WAV files that you can play in any audio player application.

 Video discs

Choose your favorite video application to handle video DVDs. Use the Other Media button to set an application for Blu-ray, HD DVD, video CD (VCD), and super video CD (SVCD). If DVDs or other video discs do not work correctly when you insert them, see .

Blank discs

Use the Other Media button to select a disc-writing application for blank CDs, blank DVDs, blank Blu-ray discs, and blank HD DVDs.

 Cameras and photos

Use the Photos drop-down to choose a photo-management application to run when you plug in your digital camera, or when you insert a media card from a camera, such as a CF, SD, MMC, or MS card. You can also simply browse your photos using the file manager.

Under Other Media, you can select an application to open Kodak picture CDs, such as those you might have made in a store. These are regular data CDs with JPEG images in a folder called PICTURES.

 Music players

Choose an application to manage the music library on your portable music player, or manage the files yourself using the file manager.

 E-book readers

Use the Other Media button to choose an application to manage the books on your e-book reader, or manage the files yourself using the file manager.

 Software

Some discs and removable media contain software that is supposed to be run automatically when the media is inserted. Use the Software option to control what to do when media with autorun software is inserted. You will always be prompted for a confirmation before software is run.

Never run software from media you don't trust.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/contacts-setup.page0000644000373100047300000000253412467343065025564 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Store your contacts in a local address book or in an online account. Starting Contacts for the first time

When you run Contacts for the first time, the Contacts Setup window opens.

If you have online accounts configured, they are listed with Local Address Book. Select an item from the list and click Select.

Click the Online Account Settings to edit existing account settings.

If you have no online accounts configured, click Online Accounts to begin the setup. If you don't wish to set up online accounts at this time, click Local Address Book.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/documents-tracker.page0000644000373100047300000000217212467343062026235 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Local or remote documents do not appear. My documents cannot be seen

If your documents fail to display in Documents, Tracker may not be running or properly configured. Make sure Tracker is running in your session. The default configuration, set to index files in your home directory (non-recursively) and XDG folders (recursively), should be adequate. Ensure that your documents are in one of these paths.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/addremove-install.page0000644000373100047300000000526412467343065026225 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Use the Ubuntu Software Center to add programs and make Ubuntu more useful. Installar de logicials suplementaris

The Ubuntu development team has chosen a default set of applications that we think makes Ubuntu very useful for most day-to-day tasks. However, you will certainly want to install more software to make Ubuntu more useful to you.

To install additional software, complete the following steps:

Connect to the Internet using a wireless or wired connection.

Click the Ubuntu Software Center icon in the Launcher, or search for Software Center in the Dash.

When the Software Center launches, search for an application, or select a category and find an application from the list.

Select the application that you are interested in and click Install.

You will be asked to enter your password. Once you have done that the installation will begin.

The installation usually finishes quickly, but could take a while if you have a slow Internet connection.

A shortcut to your new app will be added to the Launcher. To disable this feature, uncheck ViewNew Applications in Launcher.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/music-player-notrecognized.page0000644000373100047300000000447012467343064030072 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Add a .is_audio_player file to tell your computer that it's an audio player. Why isn't my audio player recognized when I plug it in?

If your audio player (MP3 player etc.) is plugged in to the computer but you can't see it in your music organizer application, it may not have been properly recognized as an audio player.

Try unplugging the player and then plugging it in again. If that doesn't help, open the file manager. You should see the player listed under Devices in the sidebar - click it to open the folder for the audio player. Now, click FileNew DocumentEmpty Document, type .is_audio_player and press Enter (the period and underscores are important, and it should be all lower-case). This file tells your computer to recognize the device as an audio player.

Now, find the audio player in the file manager sidebar and eject it (right-click and click Eject). Unplug it, then plug it back in. This time it should have been recognized as an audio player by your music organizer. If not, try closing the music organizer and then re-opening it.

These instructions won't work for iPods and some other audio players. They should work if your player is a USB Mass Storage device, though; it should say in its manual if it is.

When you look in the audio player folder again, you won't see the .is_audio_player file. This is because the period in the file's name tells the file manager to hide the file. You can check that it is still there by clicking ViewShow Hidden Files.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/bluetooth-turn-on-off.page0000644000373100047300000000536612467343070026767 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Enable or disable the Bluetooth device on your computer. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Turn Bluetooth on or off

The Bluetooth icon in the menu bar

You can turn Bluetooth on to use Bluetooth devices and send and receive files, but turn it off to conserve power. To turn Bluetooth on, click the Bluetooth icon in the menu bar and click Turn On Bluetooth.

You can turn Bluetooth on to use Bluetooth devices and send and receive files, but turn it off to conserve power. To turn Bluetooth on, click the Bluetooth icon on the top bar and switch Bluetooth on.

Many laptop computers have a hardware switch or key combination to turn Bluetooth on and off. If the Bluetooth hardware is turned off, you will not see a Bluetooth icon in the menu bar. Look for a switch on your computer or a key on your keyboard. The keyboard key is often accessed with the help of the Fn key.

Many laptop computers have a hardware switch or key combination to turn Bluetooth on and off. If the Bluetooth hardware is turned off, you will not see a Bluetooth icon in the top bar. Look for a switch on your computer or a key on your keyboard. The keyboard key is often accessed with the help of the Fn key.

To turn Bluetooth off, click the Bluetooth icon and click Turn Off Bluetooth.

To turn Bluetooth off, click the Bluetooth icon and switch Bluetooth off.

You only need to switch Visibility on if you are connecting to this computer from another device. See for more information.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/mouse-middleclick.page0000644000373100047300000000703112467343063026175 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the middle mouse button to open applications, paste text, open tabs, and more. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Middle-click

Many mice and some touchpads have a middle mouse button. On a mouse with a scroll wheel, you can usually press directly down on the scroll wheel to middle-click. If you don't have a middle mouse button, you can press the left and right mouse buttons at the same time to middle-click. If you find you are unable to middle-click this way you can try following these instructions.

On touchpads that support multi-finger taps, you can tap with three fingers at once to middle-click. You have to enable tap clicking in the touchpad settings for this to work.

Many applications use middle-click for advanced click shortcuts.

One common shortcut is to paste selected text. (This is sometimes called primary selection paste.) Select the text you want to paste, then go to where you want to paste it and middle-click. The selected text is pasted at the mouse position.

Pasting text with your middle mouse button is completely separate from the normal clipboard. Selecting text does not copy it to your clipboard. This quick method of pasting only works with the middle mouse button.

On scrollbars and sliders, a regular click in the empty space moves by a set amount (such as one page) in the direction you clicked. You can also middle-click in the empty space to move to exactly the location you clicked.

You can quickly open a new window for an application with middle-click. Simply middle-click on the application's icon, either in the Launcher on the left, or in the Dash.

Most web browsers allow you to open links in tabs quickly with the middle mouse button. Just click any link with your middle mouse button, and it will open in a new tab. Be careful clicking the link in the Firefox web browser, though. In Firefox, if you middle-click anywhere except on a link, it will try to load your selected text as a URL, as if you used middle-click to paste it to the location bar and pressed Enter.

In the file manager, middle-click serves two roles. If you middle-click a folder, it will open in a new tab. This mimics the behavior of popular web browsers. If you middle-click a file, it will open the file, just as if you had double-clicked.

Some specialized applications allow you to use the middle mouse button for other functions. Search your application's help for middle-click or middle mouse button.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/mouse-lefthanded.page0000644000373100047300000000266412467343073026037 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Reverse the left and right mouse buttons in the mouse settings. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Use your mouse left-handed

You can swap the behavior of the left and right buttons on your mouse or touchpad to make it more comfortable for left-handed use.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Mouse & Touchpad.

In the General section, switch Primary button to Right.

This setting will affect both your mouse and touchpad, as well as any other pointing device.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/files-open.page0000644000373100047300000000635412467343074024655 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Open files using an application that isn't the default one for that type of file. You can change the default too. Cristopher Thomas crisnoh@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Open files with other applications

When you double-click a file in the file manager, it will be opened with the default application for that file type. You can open it in a different application, search online for applications, or set the default application for all files of the same type.

To open a file with an application other than the default, right-click the file and select the application you want from the top of the menu. If you don't see the application you want, click Open With Other Application. By default, the file manager only shows applications it knows can handle the file. To look through all the applications on your computer, click Show other applications.

If you still can't find the application you want, you can search for more applications by clicking Find applications online. The file manager will search online for packages containing applications that are known to handle files of that type.

Change the default application

You can change the default application that is used to open files of a given type. This will allow you to open your preferred application when you double-click to open a file. For example, you might want your favorite music player to open when you double-click an MP3 file.

Select a file of the type whose default application you want to change. For example, to change which application is used to open MP3 files, select a .mp3 file.

Right-click the file and select Properties.

Select the Open With tab.

Select the application you want and click Set as default. By default, the file manager only shows applications it knows can handle the file. To look through all the applications on your computer, click Show other applications.

If Other Applications contains an application you sometimes want to use, but don't want to make the default, select that application and click Add. This will add it to Recommended Applications. You will then be able to use this application by right-clicking the file and selecting it from the list.

This changes the default application not just for the selected file, but for all files with the same type.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/media.page0000644000373100047300000000306112467343070023657 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Digital cameras, iPods, playing videos… Sound, video & pictures
Sound Sound Sound Volume, speakers and headphones, microphones… Basic sound
Music and players Music and portable audio players
Photos Photos and digital cameras
Videos Videos and video cameras
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/keyboard.page0000644000373100047300000000232112467343067024404 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Input sources, cursor blinking, super key, keyboard accessibility… Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Keyboard Region & Language Accès universal Autres tèmas usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/color-howtoimport.page0000644000373100047300000000302412467343065026312 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Color profiles can be imported by opening them. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com How do I import color profiles?

The profile can be imported by double clicking on the .ICC or .ICM file in the file browser.

Alternatively you can select Import profile… from System SettingsColor when selecting a profile for a device.

Alternatively you can select Import profile… from System SettingsColor when selecting a profile for a device.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/unity-dash-music.page0000644000373100047300000000264512467343074026016 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Find and play music from your computer or the internet. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Music lens

The music lens is the fourth lens after the Dash home in the lens bar and is represented by a music note. The music lens gives you access to your music or music available online.

You can use SuperM to open the Dash directly at the music lens.

Previews

Right click on a search result to open a preview. The preview shows the cover art and the tracks.

Click the track number to play the song right from the preview. Click the track number again to pause the song.

Filters

Click Filter results to filter by decade or genre.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/hardware.page0000644000373100047300000000235412467343072024403 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Hardware Hardware problems, printers, power settings, color management, Bluetooth, disks… Hardware & drivers More topics
Problems Hardware problems Common problems
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/accounts.page0000644000373100047300000000223512467343075024426 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Greg Beam ki7mt@yahoo.com Add accounts, Remove accounts, Disable services Online accounts

You can enter your login details for online services, such as Google and Facebook, into the Online Accounts application. This will let you access your calendar, mail, chat accounts, and similar applications without having to enter your account details again.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-default-browser.page0000644000373100047300000000337412467343066026505 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Change the default web browser by going to Details in the System Settings. Change which web browser websites are opened in

When you click a link to a web page in any application, a web browser will automatically open up to that page. If you have more than one browser installed, however, the page may not open up in the browser you wanted it to open in. To fix this, change the default web browser:

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Details and choose Default Applications from the list on the left side of the window.

Choose which web browser you would like links to be opened in by changing the Web option.

When you open up a different web browser, it might tell you that it's not the default browser any more. If this happens, click the Cancel button (or similar) so that it doesn't try to set itself as the default browser again.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/user-changepicture.page0000644000373100047300000000302312467343073026376 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add your photo to the login and user screens. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Change your login screen photo

When you log in or switch users, you will see a list of users with their login photos. You can change your photo to a stock image or an image of your own. You can even take a new login photo with your webcam.

Click the icon at the far right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open User Accounts.

Click the picture next to your name. A drop-down gallery will be shown with some stock login photos. If you like one of them, click it to use it for yourself.

If you'd rather use a picture you already have on your computer, click Browse for more pictures.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/backup-thinkabout.page0000644000373100047300000000603312467343072026217 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 A list of folders where you can find documents, files and settings that you may want to back up. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Where can I find the files I want to back up?

Listed below are the most common locations of important files and settings that you may want to back up.

Personal files (documents, music, photos and videos)

These are usually stored in your home folder (/home/your_name). They could be in subfolders such as Desktop, Documents, Pictures, Music, and Videos.

If your backup medium has sufficient space (if it's an external hard disk, for example), consider backing up the entire Home folder. You can find out how much disk space your Home folder takes up by using the Disk Usage Analyzer.

Hidden files

Any file or folder name that starts with a period (.) is hidden by default. To view hidden files, click ViewShow Hidden Files or press CtrlH. You can copy these to a backup location like any other file.

Personal settings (desktop preferences, themes, and software settings)

Most applications store their settings in hidden folders inside your Home folder (see above for information on hidden files).

Most of your application settings will be stored in the hidden folders .config, .gconf, .gnome2, and .local in your Home folder.

System-wide settings

Settings for important parts of the system aren't stored in your Home folder. There are a number of locations that they could be stored, but most are stored in the /etc folder. In general, you won't need to back up these files on a home computer. If you are running a server, however, you should back up the files for the services that it is running.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/whats-new.page0000644000373100047300000000650512467343062024524 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Improvements in the latest version of Ubuntu. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Qué de nòu dins Ubuntu 14.04 ?

Ubuntu 14.04 LTS continues the evolution of the Unity interface. Below are a few highlights of changes since Ubuntu 12.04 LTS.

Foncionalitats novèlas e melhoradas

The menus of the currently focused application are by default available in Ubuntu's integrated menu bar. However, if you want you can switch to the conventional style and show the app menus in the window title bar of respective application instead (this latter option is new since Ubuntu 13.10).

Support added for scaling Unity on a per-monitor basis, which allows for a better experience on high-DPI displays. Similar scaling support is also available in LibreOffice and Chromium.

Improved look and style including rounded window decorations, a new interface for screen unlock, and other tweaks to the theme.

The integrated Text Entry interface and the related input source status menu are designed to set both keyboard layout and IBus input methods.

A number of improvements have been made to the Dash:

The Dash may now search dozens of different online sources simultaneously. The Internet-based searches may be disabled.

The Dash search results may be filtered by category and source..

Right-clicking on a search result in the Dash will display a full-screen preview with more information.

Use the photos lens to view photos from your computer or from your social networks.

Add or remove scopes from the Dash to customize your experience.

Browse messages from your social networks with the new Friends scope.

Enter your credentials in Online Accounts to easily set up online integration for the Dash, Empathy, and more.

Keep track of contact information for your friends and colleagues with Contacts, your personal address book.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/clock.page0000644000373100047300000000136712467343062023703 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Set time and date, timezone, calendar and appointments… Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Time & date usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-browser.page0000644000373100047300000000151512467343063025053 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Change the default browser, install Flash, install the java plugin, Silverlight support… The Ubuntu Documentation Team Web Browsers usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-slow.page0000644000373100047300000000657712467343064024372 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Other things might be downloading, you could have a poor connection, or it could be a busy time of day. The internet seems slow

If you are using the internet and it seems slow, there are a number of things that could be causing the slow down.

Try closing your web browser and then re-opening it, and disconnecting from the internet and then reconnecting again. (Doing this resets a lot of things that might be causing the internet to run slowly.)

Busy time of day

Internet service providers commonly setup internet connections so that they are shared between several households. Even though you connect separately, through your own phone line or cable connection, the connection to the rest of the internet at the telephone exchange might actually be shared. If this is the case and lots of your neighbors are using the internet at the same time as you, you might notice a slow-down. You're most likely to experience this at times when your neighbors are probably on the internet (in the evenings, for example).

Downloading lots of things at once

If you or someone else using your internet connection are downloading several files at once, or watching videos, the internet connection might not be fast enough to keep up with the demand. In this case, it will feel slower.

Unreliable connection

Some internet connections are just unreliable, especially temporary ones or those in high demand areas. If you are in a busy coffee shop or a conference center, the internet connection might be too busy or simply unreliable.

Low wireless connection signal

If you're connected to the internet by wireless (wifi), check the network menu on the menu bar to see if you have good wireless signal. If not, the internet may be slow because you don't have a very strong signal.

Using a slower mobile internet connection

If you have a mobile internet connection and notice that it is slow, you may have moved into an area where signal reception is poor. When this happens, the internet connection will automatically switch from a fast "mobile broadband" connection like 3G to a more reliable, but slower, connection like GPRS.

Web browser has a problem

Sometimes web browsers encounter a problem that makes them run slow. This could be for any number of reasons - you could have visited a website that the browser struggled to load, or you might have had the browser open for a long time, for example. Try closing all of the browser's windows and then opening the browser again to see if this makes a difference.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/documents-collections.page0000644000373100047300000000413712467343060027121 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Group related documents in a collection. Make collections of documents

Documents lets you put together documents of different types in one place called a collection. If you have documents that are related, you can group them to make them easier to find. For example, if you had a business trip where you made a presentation, your slides, your flight itinerary (a PDF file), your budget spreadsheet, and other hybrid PDF/ODF documents, can be grouped in one collection.

To create or add to a collection:

Click the ✓ button.

In selection mode, check the documents to be collected.

Click the + button in the button bar.

In the collection list, click Add and type a new collection name, or select an existing collection. The selected documents will be added to the collection.

Collections do not behave like folders and their hierarchy: you cannot put collections inside collections.

To delete a collection:

Click the ✓ button.

In selection mode, check the collection to be deleted.

Click the Trash button in the button bar. The collection will be deleted, leaving the original documents.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/unity-dash-photos.page0000644000373100047300000000301312467343067026202 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 View photos from your computer or your online social media accounts. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Photos lens

The photos lens is the fifth lens after the Dash home in the lens bar and is represented by a camera. The photos lens gives you access to photos on your computer or from Online Accounts such as Facebook or Google Picasa.

You can use SuperC to open the Dash directly at the photos lens.

Previews

Right click on a search result to open a preview with more information about the photo and a larger thumbnail.

For photos stored on your computer, you can open, print, view, or email them.

Filters

Click Filter results to filter by date the photo was taken or the source.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/a11y-screen-reader.page0000644000373100047300000000167712467343076026111 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Use the Orca screen reader to speak the user interface. Lectura de l'ecran a nauta votz

GNOME provides the Orca screen reader to speak the user interface. Depending on how you installed GNOME, you might not have Orca installed. Install Orca, and then refer to the Orca Help for more information.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/power-suspendfail.page0000644000373100047300000000777612467343074026274 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Some computer hardware causes problems with suspend or hibernate. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Why won't my computer turn back on after I suspended it?

If you suspend or hibernate your computer, then try to resume it or turn it back on, you may find that it does not work as you expected. This could be because suspend and hibernate aren't supported properly by your hardware.

My computer is suspended and isn't resuming

If you suspend your computer and then press a key or click the mouse, it should wake up and display a screen asking for your password. If this doesn't happen, try pressing the power button (don't hold it in, just press it once).

If this still doesn't help, make sure that your computer's monitor is switched on and try pressing a key on the keyboard again.

As a last resort, turn off the computer by holding in the power button for 5-10 seconds, although you will lose any unsaved work by doing this. You should then be able to turn on the computer again.

If this happens every time you suspend your computer, the suspend feature may not work with your hardware.

If your computer loses power and doesn't have an alternative power supply (such as a working battery), it will switch off.
None of my applications/documents are open when I turn on the computer again

If you hibernated your computer and switched it on again, but none of your documents or applications are open, it probably failed to hibernate properly. Sometimes this happens because of a minor problem, and the computer will be able to hibernate properly the next time you do it. It might also happen because you had installed a software update which required the computer to be restarted; in this case, the computer may have shut down instead of hibernating.

It is also possible that the computer is not capable of hibernating because the hardware doesn't support it properly. This might be because of a problem with Linux drivers for your hardware, for example. You can test this by hibernating again and seeing if it works the second time. If it doesn't, it is probably a problem with your computer's drivers.

My wireless connection (or other hardware) doesn't work when I wake up my computer

If you suspend or hibernate your computer and then resume it again, you may find that your internet connection, mouse, or some other device doesn't work properly. This could be because the device's driver doesn't properly support suspend or hibernate. This is a problem with the driver and not the device itself.

If the device has a power switch, try turning it off and then on again. In most cases, the device will start working again. If it connects via a USB cable or similar, unplug the device and then plug it in again and see if it works.

If you cannot turn off/unplug the device, or if this does not work, you may need to restart your computer for the device to start working again.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/files-tilde.page0000644000373100047300000000316112467343063025004 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 These are backup files. They are hidden by default. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com What is a file with a "~" at the end of its name?

Files with a "~" at the end of their names (for example, example.txt~) are automatically created backup copies of documents edited in the gedit text editor or other applications. It is safe to delete them, but there's no harm to leave them on your computer.

These files are hidden by default. If you are seeing them, that is because you either selected Show Hidden Files (in the down menu of the Files toolbar) or pressed CtrlH. You can hide them again by repeating either of these steps.

These files are treated in the same way as normal hidden files. See for advice on dealing with hidden files.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/user-changepassword.page0000644000373100047300000000614112467343073026571 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Keep your account secure by changing your password often in your account settings. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Change your password

It is a good idea to change your password from time to time, especially if you think someone else knows what your password is.

Click the icon at the far right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open User Accounts.

Click the label next to Password.

The label should look like a series of dots or boxes if you already have a password set.

Enter your current password, then a new password. Enter your new password again in the Confirm password field.

You can also click the button next to the New password field to select a randomly generated secure password. These passwords are hard for others to guess, but they can be hard to remember, so be careful.

Click Change.

Make sure you choose a good password. This will help to keep your user account safe.

Change the keyring password

If you change your login password, it may become out of sync with the keyring password. The keyring keeps you from having to remember lots of different passwords by just requiring one master password to access them all. If you change your user password (see above), your keyring password will remain the same as your old password. To change the keyring password (to match your login password):

Open the Passwords and Keys application from the Dash.

In the View menu, ensure By keyring is checked.

In the sidebar under Passwords, right-click on Login keyring and select Change Password.

Enter your Old Password, followed by your new Password, and Confirm your new password by entering it again.

Click OK.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/get-involved.page0000644000373100047300000000252112467343063025205 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How and where to report problems with these help topics. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Participate to improve this guide

This help system is created by a volunteer community. You are welcome to participate. If you notice a problem with these help pages (like typos, incorrect instructions or topics that should be covered but aren't), you can file a bug report.

To file a bug, press AltF2 and type ubuntu-bug ubuntu-docs. Press Enter to begin the bug collection process.

See the Ubuntu bug reporting instructions for more information about how to file your bug.

Thanks for helping make the Ubuntu Help better!

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-problem.page0000644000373100047300000000134412467343064025031 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Troubleshooting wireless connections, finding your wifi network… The Ubuntu Documentation Team Network problems usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-troubleshooting-initial-check.page0000644000373100047300000000603512467343061033154 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Contributors to the Ubuntu documentation wiki Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Make sure that simple network settings are correct and prepare for the next few troubleshooting steps. Wireless network troubleshooter Perform an initial connection check

In this step you will check some basic information about your wireless network connection. This is to make sure that your networking problem isn't caused by a relatively simple issue, like the wireless connection being turned off, and to prepare for the next few troubleshooting steps.

Make sure that your laptop is not connected to a wired internet connection.

If you have an external wireless adapter (such as a USB adapter, or a PCMCIA card that plugs into your laptop), make sure that it is firmly inserted into the proper slot on your computer.

If your wireless card is inside your computer, make sure that the wireless switch is turned on (if it has one). Laptops often have wireless switches that you can toggle by pressing a combination of keyboard keys.

Click the network menu on the menu bar and make sure that the Enable Wireless setting is checked.

Open the Terminal, type nm-tool and press Enter.

This will display information about your network hardware and connection status. Look down the list of information and see if there is a section related to the wireless network adapter. The information for each network device is separated by a row of dashes. If you find the line State: connected in the section for your wireless adapter, it means that it is working and connected to your wireless router.

If you are connected to your wireless router, but you still cannot access the internet, your router may not be set up correctly, or your Internet Service Provider (ISP) maybe experiencing some technical problems. Review your router and ISP setup guides to make sure the settings are correct, or contact your ISP for support.

If the information from nm-tool did not indicate that you were connected to the network, click Next to proceed to the next portion of the troubleshooting guide.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-troubleshooting-hardware-check.page0000644000373100047300000001524512467343075033330 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Contributors to the Ubuntu documentation wiki Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Even though your wireless adapter is connected, it may not have been recognized properly by the computer. Wireless connection troubleshooter Check that the wireless adapter was recognized

Even though the wireless adapter is connected to the computer, it may not have been recognized as a network device by the computer. In this step, you will check whether the device was recognized properly.

Open a Terminal window, type sudo lshw -C network and press Enter. If this gives an error message, you can install the lshw program on your computer by typing sudo apt-get install lshw into the terminal.

Look through the information that appeared and find the Wireless interface section. If your wireless adapter was detected properly, you should see something similar (but not identical) to this:

If a wireless device is listed, continue on to the Device Drivers step.

If a wireless device is not listed, the next steps you take will depend on the type of device that you use. Refer to the section below that is relevant to the type of wireless adapter that your computer has (internal PCI, USB, or PCMCIA).
PCI (internal) wireless adapter

Internal PCI adapters are the most common, and are found in most laptops made within the past few years. To check if your PCI wireless adapter was recognized:

Open a Terminal, type lspci and press Enter.

Look through the list of devices that is shown and find any that are marked Network controller or Ethernet controller. Several devices may be marked in this way; the one corresponding to your wireless adapter might include words like wireless, WLAN, wifi or 802.11. Here is an example of what the entry might look like:

Network controller: Intel Corporation PRO/Wireless 3945ABG [Golan] Network Connection

If you found your wireless adapter in the list, proceed to the Device Drivers step. If you didn't find anything related to your wireless adapter, see the instructions below.
USB wireless adapter

Wireless adapters that plug into a USB port on your computer are less common. They can plug directly into a USB port, or may be connected by a USB cable. 3G/mobile broadband adapters look quite similar to wireless (wifi) adapters, so if you think you have a USB wireless adapter, double-check that it is not actually a 3G adapter. To check if your USB wireless adapter was recognized:

Open a Terminal, type lsusb and press Enter.

Look through the list of devices that is shown and find any that seem to refer to a wireless or network device. The one corresponding to your wireless adapter might include words like wireless, WLAN, wifi or 802.11. Here is an example of what the entry might look like:

If you found your wireless adapter in the list, proceed to the Device Drivers step. If you didn't find anything related to your wireless adapter, see the instructions below.
Checking for a PCMCIA device

PCMCIA wireless adapters are typically rectangular cards which slot into the side of your laptop. They are more commonly found in older computers. To check if your PCMCIA adapter was recognized:

Start your computer without the wireless adapter plugged in.

Open a Terminal and type the following, then press Enter:

tail -f /var/log/dmesg

This will display a list of messages related to your computer's hardware, and will automatically update if anything to do with your hardware changes.

Insert your wireless adapter into the PCMCIA slot and see what changes in the Terminal window. The changes should include some information about your wireless adapter. Look through them and see if you can identify it.

To stop the command from running in the Terminal, press CtrlC. After you have done that, you can close the Terminal if you like.

If you found any information about your wireless adapter, proceed to the Device Drivers step. If you didn't find anything related to your wireless adapter, see the instructions below.
Wireless adapter was not recognized

If your wireless adapter was not recognized, it might not be working properly or the correct drivers may not be installed for it.

To get specific help, look at the support options on your distribution's website. These might include mailing lists and web chats where you can ask about your wireless adapter, for example.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/sound-usespeakers.page0000644000373100047300000000502412467343070026261 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Connect speakers or headphones and select a default audio output device. Use different speakers or headphones

You can use external speakers or headphones with your computer. Speakers usually either connect using a circular TRS (tip, ring, sleeve) plug or with USB.

If your speakers or headphones have a TRS plug, plug it into the appropriate socket on your computer. Most computers have two sockets: one for microphones and one for speakers. Look for a picture of headphones next to the socket. Speakers or headphones plugged into a TRS socket will usually be used by default. If not, see the instructions below for selecting the default device.

Some computers support multi-channel output for surround sound. This usually uses multiple TRS jacks, which are often color-coded. If you are unsure which plugs go in which sockets, you can test the sound output in the sound settings. Click the sound menu on the menu bar then click Sound Settings. Select your speakers in the list of devices, then click Test Sound. In the pop-up window, click the button for each speaker. Each button will speak its position only to the channel corresponding to that speaker.

If you have USB speakers or headphones, or analog headphones plugged into a USB sound card, plug them into any USB port. USB speakers act as separate audio devices, and you may have to specify which speakers to use by default.

Select a default audio input device

Click the sound menu on the menu bar and select Sound Settings.

On the Output tab, select the device in the list of devices.

If you don't see your device on the Output tab, check the Hardware tab. Select your device and try different profiles.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/a11y-stickykeys.page0000644000373100047300000000673712467343072025572 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Type keyboard shortcuts one key at a time rather than having to hold down all of the keys at once. Activacion de las tòcas remanentas

Sticky keys allows you to type keyboard shortcuts one key at a time rather than having to hold down all of the keys at once. For example, the AltTab shortcut switches between windows. Without sticky keys turned on, you would have to hold down both keys at the same time; with sticky keys turned on, you would press Alt and then Tab to do the same.

You might want to turn on sticky keys if you find it difficult to hold down several keys at once.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Universal Access and select the Typing tab.

Activatz las Tòcas remanentas.

 Quickly turn sticky keys on and off

Under Enable by Keyboard, select Turn on accessibility features from the keyboard to turn sticky keys on and off from the keyboard. When this option is selected, you can press Shift five times in a row to enable or disable sticky keys.

If you press two keys at once, you can have sticky keys turn itself off temporarily to let you enter a keyboard shortcut in the normal way.

For example, if you have sticky keys turned on but press Alt and Tab simultaneously, sticky keys would not wait for you to press another key if you had this option turned on. It would wait if you only pressed one key, however. This is useful if you are able to press some keyboard shortcuts simultaneously (for example, keys that are close together), but not others.

Select Disable if two keys are pressed together to enable this.

You can have the computer make a "beep" sound when you start typing a keyboard shortcut with sticky keys turned on. This is useful if you want to know that sticky keys is expecting a keyboard shortcut to be typed, so the next key press will be interpreted as part of a shortcut. Select Beep when a modifier key is pressed to enable this.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-install-java-plugin.page0000644000373100047300000000147212467343075027256 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Help your browser work with websites that require Java. Install the Java browser plug-in

Some websites use small Java programs, which require a Java plugin to be installed in order to run.

Install the icedtea6-plugin package to view Java programs in your browser.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-wired.page0000644000373100047300000000127512467343063024505 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Wired internet connections, Fixed IP addresses… The Ubuntu Documentation Team Wired Networking usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/prefs-language-install.page0000644000373100047300000000404212467343076027152 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Install more translations and related language support packages. Gunnar Hjalmarsson gunnarhj@ubuntu.com Install languages

When you install Ubuntu, the language you select at installation gets installed together with English, but you can add further languages.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

In the Personal section, click Language Support.

Click Install / Remove Languages.... The Installed Languages window lists all the available languages, with the currently installed languages checked.

Check the languages you want to install, and uncheck those currently installed languages you want to remove.

Click Apply Changes.

Administrative privileges are required. Enter your password, or the password for the requested administrator account.

In addition to the translations used to display menus and messages, with a new language may follow various language support components such as dictionaries for spell checking, fonts and input methods.

Some translations may be incomplete, and certain applications may not support your language at all.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/color-calibrationtargets.page0000644000373100047300000000250712467343063027603 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Calibration targets are needed to do scanner and camera profiling. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Which target types are supported?

The following types of targets are supported:

CMP DigitalTarget

ColorChecker 24

ColorChecker DC

ColorChecker SG

i1 RGB Scan 14

LaserSoft DC Pro

QPcard 201

IT8.7/2

You can purchase targets from well-known vendors like KODAK, X-Rite and LaserSoft in various online shops.

Alternatively you can buy targets from Wolf Faust at a very fair price.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/printing-cancel-job.page0000644000373100047300000000606612467343067026443 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Cancel a pending print job and remove it from the queue. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Jana Svarova jana.svarova@gmail.com 2013 Cancel, pause or release a print job

You can cancel a pending print job and remove it from the queue in the printer settings.

Cancel a print job

If you accidentally started printing a document, you can cancel the print so that you do not need to waste any ink or paper.

How to cancel a print job:

Click the icon at the far right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Click Printers.

Click the Show Jobs button on the right-hand side of the Printers dialog.

Cancel the print job by clicking the stop button on the play-pause-stop symbols.

If this does not cancel the print job like you expected, try holding down the Cancel button on your printer.

As a last resort, especially if you have a big print job with a lot of pages that won't cancel, remove the paper from the printer's paper input tray. The printer should realize that there is no paper and will stop printing. You can then try canceling the print job again, or try turning the printer off and then on again.

Be careful that you don't damage the printer when removing the paper, though - if you would have to pull hard on the paper to remove it, you should probably just leave it where it is.
Pause and release a print job

If you want to pause or release a print job, you can do so by going to the jobs dialog in the printer settings and click the appropriate button.

Click the icon at the far right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Click Printers.

Click the Show Jobs button on the right-hand side of the Printers dialog and either pause or release the print job based on your needs.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/disk-capacity.page0000644000373100047300000000642712467343077025345 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Use Disk Usage Analyzer or System Monitor to check space and capacity. Check how much disk space is left

You can check how much disk space is left with Disk Usage Analyzer or System Monitor.

Check with Disk Usage Analyzer

To check the free disk space and disk capacity using Disk Usage Analyzer:

Open the Disk Usage Analyzer application from the Dash. The window will display the Total file system capacity and Total file system usage.

Open the Disks application from the Activities overview. The window will display the Total file system capacity and Total file system usage.

Click one of the toolbar buttons to choose to Scan Home, Scan filesystem, Scan a folder, or Scan a remote folder.

The information is displayed according to Folder, Usage, Size and Contents. See more details in Disk Usage Analyzer.

Check with System Monitor

To check the free disk space and disk capacity with System Monitor:

Open the System Monitor application from the Dash.

Open the System Monitor application from the Activities overview.

Select the File Systems tab to view the system's partitions and disk space usage. The information is displayed according to Total, Free, Available and Used.
What if the disk is too full?

If the disk is too full you should:

Delete files that aren't important or that you won't use anymore.

Make backups of the important files that you won't need for a while and delete them from the hard drive.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/power-hibernate.page0000644000373100047300000000722512467343071025702 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Hibernate is disabled by default since it's not well supported. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com How do I hibernate my computer?

When the computer hibernates, all of your applications and documents are stored and the computer completely switches off so it does not use any power, but the applications and documents will still be open when you switch on the computer again.

Unfortunately, hibernate doesn't work in many cases, which can cause you to lose data if you expect your documents and applications to re-open when you switch your computer back on. Therefore, hibernate is disabled by default.

Test if hibernate works Always save your work before hibernating

You should save all of your work before hibernating the computer, just in case something goes wrong and your open applications and documents cannot be recovered when you switch on the computer again.

You can use the command line to test if hibernate works on your computer.

Open the Terminal by pressing Ctrl Altt or by searching for terminal in the Dash.

Open the Terminal by searching for terminal in the Activities overview.

Type sudo pm-hibernate into the terminal and press Enter.

Enter your password when prompted.

After you computer turns off, switch it back on. Did your open applications re-open?

If hibernate doesn't work, check if your swap partition is at least as large as your available RAM.
Enable hibernate

If the hibernate test works, you can continue to use the sudo pm-hibernate command when you want to hibernate.

You can also enable the hibernate option in the menus. To do that, use your favorite text editor to create /etc/polkit-1/localauthority/50-local.d/com.ubuntu.enable-hibernate.pkla. Add the following to the file and save:

[Re-enable hibernate by default in upower] Identity=unix-user:* Action=org.freedesktop.upower.hibernate ResultActive=yes [Re-enable hibernate by default in logind] Identity=unix-user:* Action=org.freedesktop.login1.hibernate;org.freedesktop.login1.hibernate-multiple-sessions ResultActive=yes
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/tips-specialchars.page0000644000373100047300000000574012467343076026232 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Type characters not found on your keyboard, including foreign alphabets, mathematical symbols, and dingbats. Enter special characters

You can enter and view thousands of characters from most of the world's writing systems, even those not found on your keyboard. This page lists some different ways you can enter special characters.

Methods to enter characters
Character map

GNOME comes with a character map application that allows you to browse all the characters in Unicode. Use the character map to find the character you want, and then copy and paste it to wherever you need it.

You can find Character Map in the Dash. For more information on the character map, see the Character Map Manual.

Code points

You can enter any Unicode character using only your keyboard with the numeric code point of the character. Every character is identified by a four-character code point. To find the code point for a character, find the character in the character map application and look in the status bar or the Character Details tab. The code point is the four characters after U+.

To enter a character by its code point, hold down Ctrl and Shift, type u followed by the four-character code point, then release Ctrl and Shift. If you often use characters that you can't easily access with other methods, you might find it useful to memorize the code point for those characters so you can enter them quickly.

Input sources

You can make your keyboard behave like the keyboard for another language, regardless of the letters printed on the keys. You can even switch between different input sources using an icon in the menu bar. To learn how, see .

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/color-whatisspace.page0000644000373100047300000000740312467343070026233 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 A color space is a defined range of colors. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com What is a color space?

A color space is a defined range of colors. Well known color spaces include sRGB, AdobeRGB and ProPhotoRGB.

The human visual system is not a simple RGB sensor, but we can approximate how the eye responds with a CIE 1931 chromaticity diagram that shows the human visual response as a horse-shoe shape. You can see that in human vision there are many more shades of green detected than blue or red. With a trichromatic color space like RGB we represent the colors on the computer using three values, which restricts up to encoding a triangle of colors.

Using models such as a CIE 1931 chromaticity diagram is a huge simplification of the human visual system, and real gamuts are expressed as 3D hulls, rather than 2D projections. A 2D projection of a 3D shape can sometimes be misleading, so if you want to see the 3D hull, install gnome-color-manager and then run gcm-viewer.

sRGB, AdobeRGB and ProPhotoRGB represented by white triangles

First, looking at sRGB, which is the smallest space and can encode the least number of colors. It is an approximation of a 10 year old CRT display, and so most modern monitors can display more colors than this. sRGB is a least-common-denominator standard and is used in a large number of applications (including the Internet).

AdobeRGB is frequently used as an editing space. It can encode more colors than sRGB, which means you can change colors in a photograph without worrying too much that the most vivid colors are being clipped or the blacks crushed.

ProPhoto is the largest space available and is frequently used for document archival. It can encode nearly the whole range of colors detected by the human eye, and even encode colors that the eye cannot detect!

Now, if ProPhoto is clearly better, why don't we use it for everything? The answer is to do with quantization. If you only have 8 bits (256 levels) to encode each channel, then a larger range is going to have bigger steps between each value.

Bigger steps mean a larger error between the captured color and the stored color, and for some colors this is a big problem. It turns out that key colors, like skin colors are very important, and even small errors will make untrained viewers notice that something in a photograph looks wrong.

Of course, using a 16 bit image is going to leave many more steps and a much smaller quantization error, but this doubles the size of each image file. Most content in existence today is 8bpp, i.e. 8 bits-per-pixel.

Color management is a process for converting from one color space to another, where a color space can be a well known defined space like sRGB, or a custom space such as your monitor or printer profile.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/color-testing.page0000644000373100047300000000405212467343061025372 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Testing color management isn't hard, and we even supply some test profiles. How do I test if color management is working correctly?

The effects of a color profile are sometimes subtle and it may be hard to see if anything much has changed.

In GNOME we ship several profiles for testing that make it very clear when the profiles are being applied:

Bluish Test: This will turn the screen blue and tests if the calibration curves are being sent to the display

ADOBEGAMMA-test: This will turn the screen pink and tests different features of a screen profile

FakeBRG: This will not change the screen, but will swap around the RGB channels to become BGR. This will make all the colors gradients look mostly correct, and there won't be much difference on the whole screen, but images will look very different in applications that support color management.

Add one of the test profiles to your display device using the System SettingsColor preferences.

Using these profiles you can clearly see when an application supports color management.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/documents-formats.page0000644000373100047300000000155312467343063026260 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhill@src.gnome.org 2012 Documents displays a number of popular document types. Formats supported

Documents displays PDF, DVI, XPS, PostScript and the formats supported by Document Viewer (Evince), Microsoft Office, LibreOffice and Google Docs.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-wired-connect.page0000644000373100047300000000340612467343062026131 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org To set up most wired network connections, all you need to do is plug in a network cable. Connect to a wired (Ethernet) network

To set up most wired network connections, all you need to do is plug in a network cable. The network icon on the menu bar should pulse for a few seconds and then will change to a "socket" icon when you are connected.

If this does not happen, you should first of all make sure that your network cable is plugged in. One end of the cable should be plugged into the rectangular Ethernet (network) port on your computer, and the other end should be plugged into a switch, router, network wall socket or similar (depending on the network setup you have). Sometimes, a light beside the Ethernet port will indicate that it is plugged in and active.

You can't plug one computer directly into another one with a network cable (at least, not without some extra setting-up). To connect two computers, you should plug them both into a network hub, router or switch.

If you are still not connected, your network may not support automatic setup (DHCP). In this case you'll have to configure it manually.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/shell-exit.page0000644000373100047300000000704612467343076024673 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Learn how to leave your user account, by logging out, switching users, and so on. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Alexandre Franke afranke@gnome.org Log out, power off, switch users

When you've finished using your computer, you can turn it off, suspend it (to save power), or leave it powered on and log out.

Log out or switch users

To let other users use your computer, you can either log out, or leave yourself logged in and just switch users. If you switch users, all of your applications will continue running, and everything will be where you left it when you log back in.

To log out or switch users, click the system menu at the very right of the menu bar and select the appropriate option.

Lock the screen

If you're leaving your computer for a short time, you should lock your screen to prevent other people from accessing your files or running applications. When you return, simply enter your password to log back in. If you don't lock your screen, it will lock automatically after a certain amount of time.

To lock your screen, click the system menu in the menu bar and select Lock Screen.

When your screen is locked, other users can log in to their own accounts by clicking Switch User on the password screen. You can switch back to your desktop when they are finished.

Suspend

To save power, suspend your computer when you aren't using it. If you use a laptop, Ubuntu suspends your computer automatically when you close the lid. This saves your state to your computer's memory and powers off most of the computer's functions. A very small amount of power is still used during suspend.

To suspend your computer manually, click the system menu in the menu bar and select Suspend.

Power off or restart

If you want to power off your computer entirely, or do a full restart, click the system menu and select Shut Down.

If there are other users logged in, you may not be allowed to power off or restart the computer, because this will end their sessions. If you are an administrative user, you may be asked for your password to power off.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-findip.page0000644000373100047300000000406612467343073024646 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Knowing your IP address can help you troubleshoot network problems. Find your IP address

Knowing your IP address can help you troubleshoot problems with your internet connection. You may be surprised to learn that you have two IP addresses: an IP address for your computer on the internal network and an IP address for your computer on the internet.

Find your internal (network) IP address

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Network and select Wired or Wireless from the list on the left, depending on which network connection you want to find the IP address for.

Your internal IP address will be displayed in the list of information.

 Find your external (internet) IP address

Visit whatismyipaddress.com.

The site will display your external IP address for you.

Depending on how your computer connects to the internet, these addresses may be the same.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/documents-viewgrid.page0000644000373100047300000000305712467343073026427 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Greg Beam ki7mt@yahoo.com 2014 Change the way documents are displayed. View files in a list or grid

Documents and collections are presented in Grid format by default. To view in List format:

Go to the top bar and click Documents to display the app menu.

Click List from the View as section.

List view has columns displaying the document type and date modified, and whether it's stored locally, or in Google Docs or SkyDrive.

Click Grid in the app menu to return to the default format.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/backup-where.page0000644000373100047300000000441112467343066025162 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Advice on where to store your backups and what type of storage device to use. c Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Where to store your backup

You should store backup copies of your files somewhere separate from your computer - on an external hard disk, for example. That way, if the computer breaks, the backup will still be intact. For maximum security, you shouldn't keep the backup in the same building as your computer. If there is a fire or theft, both copies of the data could be lost if they are kept together.

It is important to choose an appropriate backup medium, too. You need to store your backups on a device that has sufficient disk capacity for all of the backed-up files.

Local and remote storage options

USB memory key (low capacity)

Writable CDs or DVDs (low/medium capacity)

External hard disk (typically high capacity)

Internal disk drive (high capacity)

Network-connected drive (high capacity)

File/backup server (high capacity)

Online backup service (Amazon S3, for example; capacity depends on price)

Some of these options have sufficient capacity to allow for a backup of every file on your system, which is also known as a complete system backup.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/prefs-display.page0000644000373100047300000000127112467343076025371 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Background, size and rotation, brightness… Display & screen usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/keyboard-osk.page0000644000373100047300000000270212467343066025200 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Use an on-screen keyboard to enter text by clicking buttons with the mouse. Use a screen keyboard

If you don't have a keyboard attached to your computer or prefer not to use it, you can turn on the screen keyboard to enter text.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Universal Access and select the Typing tab.

Switch on Typing Assistant to show the screen keyboard.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/unity-launcher-change-autohide.page0000644000373100047300000000263312467343060030575 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Show the Launcher only when you need it. Auto-hide the Launcher

You can hide the Launcher if you only want to see it when you move your mouse or touchpad pointer to the left side of the screen.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

In the Personal section, click Appearance.

Switch to the Behavior tab.

Switch Auto-hide the Launcher on.

To help prevent you from accidentally showing the Launcher, Ubuntu requires you to push a little bit harder with your mouse or touchpad pointer to make the Launcher show. You can adjust the force needed by setting the Reveal sensitivity lower or higher.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/shell-overview.page0000644000373100047300000000211012467343071025546 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Desktop Introduction, keyboard shortcuts, windows… Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Desktop, apps & windows
The Desktop
Applications and windows
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/unity-launcher-intro.page0000644000373100047300000000326212467343066026710 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 The Launcher is at the left of your screen. Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Use the Launcher to start applications

Launcher icons

The Launcher is one of the key components of the Unity desktop. When you log in to your desktop, it will appear along the left-hand side of the screen. The Launcher provides you with quick access to applications, workspaces, removable devices and the trash.

If an application that you want to start using is present in the Launcher, you can click on that application's icon, and it will start up, ready for you to use.

To learn more about the Launcher, explore any of the Launcher help topics below.

Use the Launcher
Customize the Launcher
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-proxy.page0000644000373100047300000000502412467343072024550 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com A proxy filters websites that you look at, usually for control or security purposes. Define proxy settings
What is a proxy?

A web proxy filters websites that you look at, it receipts requests from your web browser to fetches the web pages and their elements, and following a policy will decide to pass them you back. They are commonly used in businesses and at public wireless hotspots to control what websites you can look at, prevent you from accessing the internet without logging in, or to do security checks on websites.

Change proxy method

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Network and choose Network Proxy from the list on the left side of the window.

Choose which proxy method you want to use among the following methods.

None

The applications will use a direct connection to fetch the content on the web.

 Manual

For each proxied protocol, define the address of a proxy and port for the protocols. The protocols are HTTP, HTTPS, FTP and SOCKS.

 Automatic

An URL points to a resource, which contains the appropriate configuration for your system.

The proxy settings will be applied to applications that use network connection to use the chosen configuration.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/color-calibrate-printer.page0000644000373100047300000000326512467343073027334 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Calibrating your printer is important to print accurate colors. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com How do I calibrate my printer?

There are two ways to profile a printer device:

Using a photospectrometer device like the Pantone ColorMunki

Downloading a printing a reference file from a color company

Using a color company to generate a printer profile is usually the cheapest option if you only have one or two different paper types. By downloading the reference chart from the companies website you can then send them back the print in a padded envelope where they will scan the paper, generate the profile and email you back an accurate ICC profile.

Using an expensive device such as a ColorMunki works out cheaper only if you are profiling a large number of ink sets or paper types.

If you change your ink supplier, make sure you recalibrate the printer!

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-edit-connection.page0000644000373100047300000002173612467343067030320 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Learn what the options on the wireless connection editing screen mean. Edit a wireless connection

This topic describes all of the options that are available when you edit a wireless network connection. To edit a connection, click the network menu in the menu bar and select Edit Connections.

Most networks will work fine if you leave these settings at their defaults, so you probably don't need to change any of them. Many of the options here are provided to give you greater control over more advanced networks.
Available to all users / Connect automatically <gui>Connect automatically</gui>

Check this option if you would like the computer to try to connect to this wireless network whenever it is in range.

If several networks which are set to connect automatically are in range, the computer will connect to the first one shown in the Wireless tab in the Network Connections window. It won't disconnect from one available network to connect to a different one that has just come in range.

 <gui>Available to all users</gui>

Check this if you would like all of the users on the computer to have access to this wireless network. If the network has a WEP/WPA password and you have checked this option, you will only need to enter the password once. All of the other users on your computer will be able to connect to the network without having to know the password themselves.

If this is checked, you need to be an administrator to change any of the settings for this network. You may be asked to enter your admin password.
Wireless <gui>SSID</gui>

This is the name of the wireless network you are connecting to, otherwise known as the Service Set Identifier. Don't change this unless you have changed the name of the wireless network (for example, by changing the settings of your wireless router or base station).

 <gui>Mode</gui>

Use this to specify whether you are connecting to an Infrastructure network (one where computers wirelessly connect to a central base station or router) or an Ad-hoc network (where there is no base station, and the computers in the network connect to one another). Most networks are infrastructure ones; you may wish to set-up your own ad-hoc network though.

If you choose Ad-hoc, you will see two other options, Band and Channel. These determine which wireless frequency band the ad-hoc wireless network will operate on. Some computers are only able to work on certain bands (for example, only A or only B/G), so you might want to pick a band that all of the computers in the ad-hoc network can use. In busy places, there might be several wireless networks sharing the same channel; this might slow-down your connection, so you can change which channel you are using too.

 <gui>BSSID</gui>

This is the Basic Service Set Identifier. The SSID (see above) is the name of the network which humans are intended to read; the BSSID is a name which the computer understands (it's a string of letters and numbers that is supposed to be unique to the wireless network). If a network is hidden, it will not have an SSID but it will have a BSSID.

 <gui>Device MAC address</gui>

A MAC address is a code which identifies a piece of network hardware (for example, a wireless card, an Ethernet network card or a router). Every device that you can connect to a network has a unique MAC address which was given to it in the factory.

This option can be used to change the MAC address of your network card.

 <gui>Cloned MAC address</gui>

Your network hardware (wireless card) can pretend to have a different MAC address. This is useful if you have a device or service which will only communicate with a certain MAC address (for example, a cable broadband modem). If you put that MAC address into the cloned MAC address box, the device/service will think that your computer has the cloned MAC address rather than its real one.

 <gui>MTU</gui>

This setting changes the Maximum Transmission Unit, which is the maximum size of a chunk of data that can be sent over the network. When files are sent over a network, data is broken up into small chunks (or packets). The optimal MTU for your network will depend on how likely it is for packets to be lost (due to a noisy connection) and how fast the connection is. In general, you should not need to change this setting.
Wireless Security <gui>Security</gui>

This defines what sort of encryption your wireless network uses. Encrypted connections help protect your wireless connection from being intercepted, so other people can't "listen in" and see what websites you're visiting and so on.

Some types of encryption are stronger than others, but may not be supported by older wireless networking equipment. You'll normally need to type a password for the connection; more sophisticated types of security may also require a username and a digital "certificate". See for more information on popular types of wireless encryption.
IPv4 Settings

Use this tab to define information like the IP address of your computer and which DNS servers it should use. Change the Method to see different ways of getting/setting that information.

The following methods are available:

<gui>Automatic (DHCP)</gui>

Get information like the IP address and DNS server to use from a DHCP server. A DHCP server is a computer (or other device, like a router) connected to the network which decides which network settings your computer should have - when you first connect to the network, you will automatically be assigned the correct settings. Most networks use DHCP.

 <gui>Automatic (DHCP) addresses only</gui>

If you choose this setting, your computer will get its IP address from a DHCP server, but you will have to manually define other details (like which DNS server to use).

 <gui>Manual</gui>

Choose this option if you would like to define all of the network settings yourself, including which IP address the computer should use.

 <gui>Link-Local Only</gui>

Link-Local is a way of connecting computers together on a network without requiring a DHCP server or manually defining IP addresses and other information. If you connect to a Link-Local network, the computers on the network will decide amongst themselves which IP addresses to use and so on. This is useful if you want to temporarily connect a few computers together so they communicate with each other.

 <gui>Disabled</gui>

This option will disable the network connection and prevent you from connecting to it. Note that IPv4 and IPv6 are treated as separate connections even though they are for the same network card. If you have one enabled, you may wish to set the other to disabled.
IPv6 Settings

This is similar to the IPv4 tab except it deals with the newer IPv6 standard. Very modern networks use IPv6, but IPv4 is still more popular at the moment.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/addremove-install-synaptic.page0000644000373100047300000000542112467343061030044 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Greg Beam ki7mt@yahoo.com

Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 (CC BY-SA 3.0).

Synaptic is a powerful but complicated software management alternative to Ubuntu Software Center. Use Synaptic for more advanced software management

Synaptic Package Manager is more powerful and can do some software management tasks which Ubuntu Software Center can't. Synaptic's interface is more complicated and doesn't support newer Software Center features like ratings and reviews and therefore isn't recommended for use by those new to Ubuntu.

Synaptic isn't installed by default, but you can install it with Software Center.

Installar de logicials amb Synaptic

Open Synaptic from the Dash or the Launcher. You will need to enter your password in the Authenticate window.

Click Search to search for an application, or click Sections and look through the categories to find one.

Right-click the application that you want to install and select Mark for Installation.

If you are asked to mark additional changes, click Mark.

Seleccionatz totas las autras aplicacions que volètz installar.

Click Apply, and then click Apply in the window that appears. The applications that you chose will be downloaded and installed.

For more information about using Synaptic, consult the Synaptic How To.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-general.page0000644000373100047300000000161312467343061025002 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Find your IP address, WEP & WPA security, MAC addresses, proxies… The Ubuntu Documentation Team The GNOME Documentation Project Networking terms & tips usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/contacts-connect.page0000644000373100047300000000251412467343066026054 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com 2013 Email, chat with, or phone a contact. Connect with your contact

To email, chat with, or phone someone in Contacts:

Select the contact from your contact list.

Press on the Detail that you want to use. For example, to email your contact, press the email address.

The corresponding application will be launched using the contact's details.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-troubleshooting-device-drivers.page0000644000373100047300000001406112467343063033363 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Contributors to the Ubuntu documentation wiki Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Some device drivers don't work very well with certain wireless adapters, so you may need to find a better one. Wireless network troubleshooter Make sure that working device drivers are installed

In this step you can check to see if you can get working device drivers for your wireless adapter. A device driver is a piece of software which tells the computer how to make a hardware device work properly. Even though the wireless adapter has been recognized by the computer, it may not have drivers which work very well. You may be able to find different drivers for the wireless adapter which do work. Try some of the options below:

Check to see if your wireless adapter is on a list of supported devices

Most Linux distributions keep a list of wireless devices that they have support for. Sometimes, these lists provide extra information on how to get the drivers for certain adapters working properly. Go to the list for your distribution (for example, Ubuntu, Fedora or openSuSE) and see if your make and model of wireless adapter is listed. You may be able to use some of the information there to get your wireless drivers working.

Look for additional open or proprietary drivers

Although Ubuntu includes support for a large amount of devices, some drivers need to be installed separately. Use the Additional Drivers tool to check for these extra open or proprietary drivers.

Click the button at the far right side of the menu bar and select System Settings.

In the System section, click Software Sources.

Switch to the Additional Drivers tab.

Use the Windows drivers for your adapter

In general, you cannot use a device driver designed for one operating system (like Windows) on another operating system (like Linux). This is because they have different ways of handling devices. For wireless adapters, however, you can install a compatibility layer called NDISwrapper which lets you use some Windows wireless drivers on Linux. This is useful because wireless adapters almost always have Windows drivers available for them, whereas Linux drivers are sometimes not available. You can learn more about how to use NDISwrapper here. Note that not all wireless drivers can be used through NDISwrapper.

Full information on ndiswrapper kept on this page including troubleshooting help specific to ndiswrapper.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/files-select.page0000644000373100047300000000403612467343073025165 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Press CtrlS to select multiple files which have similar names. Select files by pattern

You can select files in a folder using a pattern on the file name. Press CtrlS to bring up the Select Items Matching window. Type in a pattern using common parts of the file names plus wild card characters. There are two wild card characters available:

* matches any number of any characters, even no characters at all.

? matches exactly one of any character.

For example:

If you have an OpenDocument Text file, a PDF file, and an image that all have the same base name Invoice, select all three with the pattern

Invoice.*

If you have some photos that are named like Vacation-001.jpg, Vacation-002.jpg, Vacation-003.jpg; select them all with the pattern

Vacation-???.jpg

If you have photos as before, but you've edited some of them and added -edited to the end of the file name of the photos you've edited, select the edited photos with

Vacation-???-edited.jpg

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-wrongnetwork.page0000644000373100047300000000326612467343060026140 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Edit your connection settings, and remove the unwanted connection option. My computer connects to the wrong network

When you turn your computer on or move to a different location, your computer will automatically try to connect to wireless networks that you have connected to in the past. If it tries to connect to the wrong network each time (that is, not the one that you want it to connect to), do the following:

Click the network menu on the menu bar and select Edit Connections.

Go to the Wireless tab and find the network that you don't want it to keep connecting to.

Click that network once to select it and click Delete. Your computer won't try to connect to that network any more.

If you later want to connect to the network you just deleted, simply select it from the list of wireless networks that appears when you click the network menu on the menu bar - just as you would connect to any other wireless network.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/mouse-disabletouchpad.page0000644000373100047300000000273412467343066027074 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Turn the touchpad off while typing to prevent accidental clicks. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Disable touchpad while typing

Touchpads on laptops are often located where you rest your wrist while typing, which can sometimes cause accidental clicks while you type. You can disable the touchpad while you type. It will only work again a short time after your last key stroke.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Mouse & Touchpad.

In the Touchpad section, check Disable while typing.

The Touchpad section only appears if your system has a touchpad.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/contacts-edit-details.page0000644000373100047300000000354512467343076027001 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Edit the information for each contact. Edit contact details

Editing contact details helps you keep the information in your address book up to date and complete.

Select the contact from your contact list.

Press Edit in the top-right corner of Contacts.

Edit the contact details.

To add a detail such as a new phone number or email address, press New Detail and select the field that you want to add.

Press Done to finish editing the contact.

In the case of linked contacts, you can edit a profile by clicking on the profile's avatar.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/files-share.page0000644000373100047300000000532412467343061025006 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Transfer files to your email contacts from the file manager. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Share and transfer files

You can share files with your contacts or transfer them to external devices or network shares directly from the file manager.

Open the file manager.

Locate the file you want to transfer.

Right-click the file and select Send To.

The Send To window will appear. Choose where you want to send the file and click Send. See the list of destinations below for more information.

You can send multiple files at once. Select multiple files by holding down Ctrl, then right-click any selected file. You can have the files automatically compressed into a zip or tar archive.

 Destinations

To email the file, select Email and enter the recipient's email address.

To send the file to an instant messaging contact, select Instant Message, then select contact from the drop-down list. Your instant messaging application may need to be started for this to work.

To write the file to a CD or DVD, select CD/DVD Creator. See to learn more.

To transfer the file to a Bluetooth device, select Bluetooth (OBEX Push) and select the device to send the file to. You will only see devices you have already paired with. See for more information.

To copy a file to an external device like a USB flash drive, or to upload it to a server you've connected to, select Removable disks and shares, then select the device or server you want to copy the file to.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/nautilus-file-properties-basic.page0000644000373100047300000001167012467343072030641 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 View basic file information, set permissions, and choose default applications. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany@antopolski.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org File properties

To view information about a file or folder, right-click it and select Properties. You can also select the file and press AltEnter.

The file properties window shows you information like the type of file, the size of the file, and when you last modified it. If you need this information often, you can have it displayed in list view columns or icon captions.

The information given on the Basic tab is explained below. There are also Permissions and Open With tabs. For certain types of files, such as images and videos, there will be an extra tab that provides information like the dimensions, duration, and codec.

Basic properties <gui>Name</gui>

You can rename the file by changing this field. You can also rename a file outside the properties window. See .

 <gui>Type</gui>

This helps you identify the type of the file, such as PDF document, OpenDocument Text, or JPEG image. The file type determines which applications can open the file, among other things. For example, you can't open a picture with a music player. See for more information on this.

The MIME type of the file is shown in parentheses; MIME type is a standard way that computers use to refer to the file type.

 Contents

This field is displayed if you are looking at the properties of a folder rather than a file. It helps you see the number of items in the folder. If the folder includes other folders, each inner folder is counted as one item, even if it contains further items. Each file is also counted as one item. If the folder is empty, the contents will display nothing.

 Size

This field is displayed if you are looking at a file (not a folder). The size of a file tells you how much disk space it takes up. This is also an indicator of how long it will take to download a file or send it in an email (big files take longer to send/receive).

Sizes may be given in bytes, KB, MB, or GB; in the case of the last three, the size in bytes will also be given in parentheses. Technically, 1 KB is 1024 bytes, 1 MB is 1024 KB and so on.

 Location

The location of each file on your computer is given by its absolute path. This is a unique "address" of the file on your computer, made up of a list of the folders that you would need to go into to find the file. For example, if Jim had a file called Resume.pdf in his Home folder, its location would be /home/jim/Resume.pdf.

 Volume

The file system or device that the file is stored on. This shows you where the file is physically stored, for example if it is on the hard disk or on a CD, or a network share or file server. Hard disks can be split up into several disk partitions; the partition will be displayed under Volume too.

 Free Space

This is only displayed for folders. It gives the amount of disk space which is available on the disk that the folder is on. This is useful for checking if the hard disk is full.

 Accessed

The date and time when the file was last opened.

 Modified

The date and time when the file was last changed and saved.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/user-admin-explain.page0000644000373100047300000000725412467343060026311 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 You need admin privileges to change important parts of your system. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org How do administrative privileges work?

As well as the files that you create, your computer has a number of files which are needed by the system for it to work properly. If these important system files are changed improperly they can cause various things to break, so they are protected from changes by default. Certain applications also modify important parts of the system, and so are also protected.

The way that they are protected is by only allowing users with administrative privileges to change the files or use the applications. In day-to-day use, you won't need to change any system files or use these applications, so by default you do not have admin privileges.

Sometimes you need to use these applications, so you may be able to temporarily get admin privileges to allow you to make the changes. If an application needs admin privileges, it will ask for your password. For example, if you want to install some new software, the software installer (package manager) will ask for your admin password so it can add the new application to the system. Once it has finished, your admin privileges will be taken away again.

Admin privileges are associated with your user account. Some users are allowed to have admin privileges and some are not. Without admin privileges you will not be able to install software. Some user accounts (for example, the "root" account) have permanent admin privileges. You shouldn't use admin privileges all of the time, because you might accidentally change something you did not intend to (like delete a needed system file, for example).

In summary, admin privileges allow you to change important parts of your system when needed, but prevent you from doing it accidentally.

What does "super user" mean?

A user with admin privileges is sometimes called a super user. This is simply because that user has more privileges than normal users. You might see people discussing things like su and sudo; these are programs for temporarily giving you "super user" (admin) privileges.
Why are admin privileges useful?

Requiring users to have admin privileges before important system changes are made is useful because it helps to prevent your system from being broken, intentionally or unintentionally.

If you had admin privileges all of the time, you might accidentally change an important file, or run an application which changes something important by mistake. Only getting admin privileges temporarily, when you need them, reduces the risk of these mistakes happening.

Only certain trusted users should be allowed to have admin privileges. This prevents other users from messing with the computer and doing things like uninstalling applications that you need, installing applications that you don't want, or changing important files. This is useful from a security standpoint.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/user-admin-problems.page0000644000373100047300000000250612467343076026476 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 You can only do some things, like installing applications, if you have admin privileges. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Problems caused by administrative restrictions

You may experience a few problems if you don't have administrative privileges. Some tasks require admin privileges in order to work, such as:

Connecting to networks or wireless networks

Viewing the contents of a removable disk connected to the computer, or the contents of a different disk partition (e.g. a Windows partition)

Installing new applications

You can change who has admin privileges.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/color-whyimportant.page0000644000373100047300000000706012467343060026463 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Color management is important for designers, photographers and artists. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Why is color management important?

Color management is the process of capturing a color using an input device, displaying it on a screen, and printing it all whilst managing the exact colors and the range of colors on each medium.

The need for color management is probably explained best with a photograph of a bird on a frosty day in winter.

A bird on a frosty wall as seen on the camera view-finder

Displays typically over-saturate the blue channel, making the images look cold.

This is what the user sees on a typical business laptop screen

Notice how the white is not 'paper white' and the black of the eye is now a muddy brown.

This is what the user sees when printing on a typical inkjet printer

The basic problem we have here is that each device is capable of handling a different range of colors. So while you might be able to take a photo of electric blue, most printers are not going to be able to reproduce it.

Most image devices capture in RGB (Red, Green, Blue) and have to convert to CMYK (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black) to print. Another problem is that you can't have white ink, and so the whiteness can only be as good as the paper color.

Another problem is units. Without specifying the scale on which a color is measured, we don't know if 100% red is near infrared or just the deepest red ink in the printer. What is 50% red on one display is probably something like 62% on another display. It's like telling a person that you've just driven 7 units of distance, without the unit you don't know if that's 7 kilometers or 7 meters.

In color, we refer to the units as gamut. Gamut is essentially the range of colors that can be reproduced. A device like a DSLR camera might have a very large gamut, being able to capture all the colors in a sunset, but a projector has a very small gamut and all the colors are going to look "washed out".

In some cases we can correct the device output by altering the data we send to it, but in other cases where that's not possible (you can't print electric blue) we need to show the user what the result is going to look like.

For photographs it makes sense to use the full tonal range of a color device, to be able to make smooth changes in color. For other graphics, you might want to match the color exactly, which is important if you're trying to print a custom mug with the Red Hat logo that has to be the exact Red Hat Red.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/a11y-braille.page0000644000373100047300000000202712467343060024763 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Use the Orca screen reader with a refreshable Braille display. Lectura en Braille d'un ecran

GNOME provides the Orca screen reader to display the user interface on a refreshable Braille display. Depending on how you installed GNOME, you might not have Orca installed. Install Orca, then refer to the Orca Help for more information.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/sound-usemic.page0000644000373100047300000000363112467343075025223 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Use an analog or USB microphone and select a default input device. Use a different microphone

You can use an external microphone for chatting with friends, speaking with colleagues at work, making voice recordings, or using other multimedia applications. Even if your computer has a built-in microphone or a webcam with a microphone, a separate microphone usually provides better audio quality.

If your microphone has a circular plug, just plug it into the appropriate adapter on your computer. Most computers have two adapters: one for microphones and one for speakers. Look for a picture of a microphone next to the adapter. Microphones plugged into the appropriate adapter will usually be used by default. If not, see the instructions below for selecting a default input device.

If you have a USB microphone, plug it into any USB port on your computer. USB microphones act as separate audio devices, and you may have to specify which microphone to use by default.

Select a default audio input device

Click the sound menu on the menu bar and select Sound Settings.

On the Input tab, select the device in the list of devices. The input level indicator should respond when you speak.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/power-closelid.page0000644000373100047300000000510512467343077025540 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Laptops go to sleep when you close the lid, in order to save power. Why does my computer turn off when I close the lid?

When you close the lid of your laptop, your computer will suspend in order to save power. This means that the computer isn't actually turned off - it has just gone to sleep. You can resume it by opening the lid. If it doesn't resume, try clicking the mouse or pressing a key. If that still doesn't work, press the power button.

Some computers are unable to suspend properly, normally because their hardware isn't completely supported by the operating system (for example, the Linux drivers are incomplete). In this case, you may find that you are unable to resume your computer after you've closed the lid. You can try to fix the problem with suspend, or you can prevent the computer from trying to suspend when you close the lid.

Stop the computer from suspending when the lid is closed

If you don't want the computer to suspend when you close the lid, you can change the settings for that behavior:

Be very careful if you change this setting. Some laptops can overheat if they are left running with the lid closed, especially if they are in a confined place like a backpack.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

In the Hardware section, click Power.

Set the drop-down menus next to When the lid is closed to Do nothing.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/files-sort.page0000644000373100047300000000700712467343072024675 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Arrange files by name, size, type, or when they were changed. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Sort files and folders

You can sort files in different ways in a folder, for example by sorting them in order of date or file size. See below for a list of common ways to sort files. See for information on how to change the default sort order.

The way that you can sort files depends on the folder view that you are using. You can change the current view using the list or icon buttons in the toolbar.

Icon view

To sort files in a different order, click the down button in the toolbar and choose By Name, By Size, By Type or By Modification Date.

As an example, if you select By Name, the files will be sorted by their names, in alphabetical order. See for other options.

You can sort in the reverse order by selecting Reversed Order from the pull-down menu.

List view

To sort files in a different order, click one of the column headings in the file manager. For example, click Type to sort by file type. Click the column heading again to sort in the reverse order.

In list view, you can show columns with more attributes and sort on those columns. Click the down button in the toolbar, pick Visible Columns and select the columns that you want to be visible. You will then be able to sort by those columns. See for descriptions of available columns.

Ways of sorting files By Name

Sorts alphabetically by the name of the file.

 By Size

Sorts by the size of the file (how much disk space it takes up). Sorts from smallest to largest by default.

 By Type

Sorts alphabetically by the file type. Files of the same type are grouped together, then sorted by name.

 By Modification Date

Sorts by the date and time that a file was last changed. Sorts from oldest to newest by default.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-noconnection.page0000644000373100047300000000577012467343074027730 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Double-check the password, try using the pass key instead of the password, turn the wireless card off and on again… I've entered the correct password, but I still can't connect

If you're sure that you entered the correct wireless password but you still can't successfully connect to a wireless network, try some of the following:

Double-check that you have the right password

Passwords are case-sensitive (it matters whether they have capital or lower-case letters), so check that you didn't get the case of one of the letters wrong.

Try the hex or ASCII pass key

The password you enter can also be represented in a different way - as a string of characters in hexadecimal (numbers 0-9 and letters a-f) called a pass key. Each password has an equivalent pass key. If you have access to the pass key as well as the password/passphrase, try typing the pass key instead. Make sure you select the correct wireless security option when asked for your password (for example, select WEP 40/128-bit Key if you're typing the 40-character pass key for a WEP-encrypted connection).

Try turning your wireless card off and then on again

Sometimes wireless cards get stuck or experience a minor problem that means they won't connect. Try turning the card off and then on again to reset it - see for more information.

Check that you're using the right type of wireless security

When prompted for your wireless security password, you can choose which type of wireless security to use. Make sure you choose the one that is used by the router or wireless base station. This should be selected by default, but sometimes it will not be for some reason. If you don't know which one it is, use trial and error to go through the different options.

Check that your wireless card is properly supported

Some wireless cards aren't supported very well. They show up as a wireless connection, but they can't connect to a network because their drivers lack the ability to do this. See if you can get an alternative wireless driver, or if you need to perform some extra set-up (like installing a different firmware). See for more information.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/wacom-stylus.page0000644000373100047300000000427412467343072025260 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Define the button functions and pressure feel of the Wacom stylus. Configure the stylus

Click the icon at the far right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Wacom Graphics Tablet.

If no tablet is detected, you'll be asked to Please plug in or turn on your Wacom tablet.

The lower part of the panel contains details and settings specific to your stylus, with the device name (the stylus class) and diagram to the left. These settings can be adjusted:

Eraser Pressure Feel: use the slider to adjust the "feel" (how physical pressure is translated to digital values) between Soft and Firm.

Button/Scroll Wheel configuration (these change to reflect the stylus). Click the menu next to each label to select one of these functions: No Action, Left Mouse Button Click, Middle Mouse Button Click, Right Mouse Button Click, Scroll Up, Scroll Down, Scroll Left, Scroll Right, Back, Forward.

Tip Pressure Feel: use the slider to adjust the "feel" between Soft and Firm.

If you have more than one stylus, when the additional stylus gets close to the tablet, a pager will be displayed next to the stylus device name. Use the pager to choose which stylus to configured.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/printing-streaks.page0000644000373100047300000000342012467343066026110 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 If print-outs are streaky, fading, or missing colors, check your ink levels or clean the print head. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Why are there streaks, lines or the wrong colors on my print-outs?

If your print-outs are streaky, faded, have lines on them that shouldn't be there, or are otherwise poor in quality, this may be due to a problem with the printer or a low ink/toner supply.

Fading text or images

You may be running out of ink or toner. Check your ink/toner supply and buy a new cartridge if necessary.

Streaks and lines

If you have an inkjet printer, the print head may be dirty or partially blocked. Try cleaning the print head (see the printer's manual for instructions).

Wrong colors

The printer may have run out of one color of ink or toner. Check your ink/toner supply and buy a new cartridge if necessary.

Jagged lines, or lines aren't straight

If lines on your print-out that should be straight turn out jagged, you may need to align the print head. See the printer's instruction manual for details on how to do this.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/hardware-problems-graphics.page0000644000373100047300000000140112467343060030007 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Troubleshoot screen and graphics problems. Screen problems

Most problems with the display are caused by issues with graphics drivers or configuration. Which of the topics below best describes the problem you are experiencing?

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/nautilus-preview.page0000644000373100047300000000467612467343060026137 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Control when thumbnails are used for files. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com File manager preview preferences

The file manager creates thumbnails to preview image, video, and text files. Thumbnail previews can be slow for large files or over networks, so you can control when previews are made. Click Files in the menu bar, pick Preferences and select the Preview tab.

<gui>Files</gui>

By default, all previews are done for Local Files Only, those on your computer or connected external drives. You can set this feature to Always or Never. The file manager can browse files on other computers over a local area network or the internet. If you often browse files over a local area network, and the network has high bandwidth, you may want to set the preview option to Always.

In addition, you can use the Only for files smaller than setting to limit the size of files previewed.

 <gui>Folders</gui>

If you show file sizes in list view columns or icon captions, folders will be shown with a count of how many files and folders they contain. Counting items in a folder can be slow, especially for very large folders, or over a network. You can turn this feature on or off, or turn it on only for files on your computer and local external drives.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/mouse.page0000644000373100047300000000235312467343067023741 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Left-handed, speed and sensitivity, touchpad clicking and scrolling… Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Mouse
Common mouse problems Common problems Common problems
Mouse tips Tips Tips
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/user-accounts.page0000644000373100047300000000303712467343071025377 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Users Add user or guest user, change password, administrators… Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org User accounts

Each person that uses the computer should have a different user account. This allows them to keep their files separate from yours and to choose their own settings. It's also more secure. You can only access a different user account if you know the password.

Accounts Manage user accounts
Passwords
Privileges User privileges
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/documents-info.page0000644000373100047300000000420412467343067025540 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Greg Beam ki7mt@yahoo.com 2014 See a document's name, location, date modified, or type. Find information about documents

When a document is created, it comes with metadata. Documents displays the following metadata for each document:

Title: the name of the document, which can be edited;

Source: the path of the folder containing the document;

Date Modified;

Type: the file format of the document.

To see a document's properties:

Click the Check button to switch to selection mode.

Select a document.

Click the Properties button at the right end of the button bar.

Some types of documents (e.g. PDF files) can be password protected, preventing access to their metadata or content.

Files does not currently offer any mechanism to add privacy to a document. You may be able to do this from the application you used to create the document (e.g. LibreOffice or Adobe Acrobat ).

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/music-cantplay-drm.page0000644000373100047300000000402012467343076026313 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Support for that file format might not be installed or the songs could be "copy protected". I can't play the songs I bought from an online music store

If you downloaded some music from an online store you may find that it won't play on your computer, especially if you bought it on a Windows or Mac OS X computer and then copied it over.

This could be because the music is in a format that is not recognized by your computer. To be able to play a song you need to have support for the right audio formats installed - for example, if you want to play MP3 files, you need MP3 support installed. If you don't have support for a given audio format, you should see a message telling you so when you try to play a song. The message should also provide instructions for how to install support for that format so that you can play it.

If you do have support installed for the song's audio format but still can't play it, the song might be copy protected (also known as being DRM restricted). DRM is a way of restricting who can play a song and on what devices they can play it. The company that sold the song to you is in control of this, not you. If a music file has DRM restrictions, you will probably not be able to play it - you generally need special software from the vendor to play DRM restricted files, but this software is often not supported on Linux.

You can learn more about DRM from the Electronic Frontier Foundation.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/keyboard-nav.page0000644000373100047300000001521112467343070025162 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Use applications and the desktop without a mouse. Keyboard navigation

This page details keyboard navigation for people who cannot use a mouse or other pointing device, or who want to use a keyboard as much as possible. For keyboard shortcuts that are useful to all users, see instead.

If you cannot use a pointing device like a mouse, you can control the mouse pointer using the numeric keypad on your keyboard. See for details.

 Navigate user interfaces

Tab and CtrlTab

Move keyboard focus between different controls. Ctrl Tab moves between groups of controls, such as from a sidebar to the main content. CtrlTab can also break out of a control that uses Tab itself, such as a text area.

Hold down Shift to move focus in reverse order.

Arrow keys

Move selection between items in a single control, or among a set of related controls. Use the arrow keys to focus buttons in a toolbar, select items in a list or icon view, or select a radio button from a group.

In a tree view, use the left and right arrow keys to collapse and expand items with children.

CtrlArrow keys

In a list or icon view, move the keyboard focus to another item without changing which item is selected.

ShiftArrow keys

In a list or icon view, select all items from the currently selected item to the newly focused item.

Space

Activate a focused item such as a button, check box, or list item.

CtrlSpace

In a list or icon view, select or deselect the focused item without deselecting other items.

Alt

Hold down the Alt key to reveal accelerators: underlined letters on menu items, buttons, and other controls. Press Alt plus the underlined letter to activate a control, just as if you had clicked on it.

Esc

Exit a menu, popup, switcher, or dialog window.

F10

Open the first menu on the menu bar of a window. Use the arrow keys to navigate the menus.

ShiftF10 or the Menu key

Pop up the context menu for the current selection, as if you had right-clicked.

CtrlF10

In the file manager, pop up the context menu for the current folder, as if you had right-clicked on the background and not on any item.

CtrlPageUp and CtrlPageDown

In a tabbed interface, switch to the tab to the left or right.
Navigate the desktop
Navigate windows

AltF4

Close the current window.

CtrlSuper↓

Restore a maximized window to its original size.

AltF7

Move the current window. Press AltF7, then use the arrow keys to move the window. Press Enter to finish moving the window, or Esc to return it to its original place.

AltF8

Resize the current window. Press AltF8, then use the arrow keys to resize the window. Press Enter to finish resizing the window, or Esc to return it to its original size.

CtrlSuper↑

Maximize a window.

CtrlSuper←

Maximize a window vertically along the left side of the screen.

CtrlSuper→

Maximize a window vertically along the right side of the screen.

AltSpace

Pop up the window menu, as if you had right-clicked on the titlebar.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/power-batterylife.page0000644000373100047300000000770012467343062026251 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tips to reduce the power consumption of your computer. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Use less power and improve battery life

Computers can use a lot of power. By using some simple energy-saving strategies, you can reduce your energy bill and help the environment. If you have a laptop, this will also help to increase the amount of time it can run on battery power.

General tips

Suspend your computer when you are not using it. This significantly reduces the amount of power it uses, and it can be woken up very quickly.

Turn off the computer when you will not be using it for longer periods. Some people worry that turning off a computer regularly may cause it to wear out faster, but this is not the case.

Use the Power preferences in System Settings to change your power settings. There are a number of options that will help to save power: you can automatically dim the display after a certain time; reduce the display brightness (for laptops); and have the computer automatically suspend if you have not used it for a certain period of time.

Turn off any external devices (like printers and scanners) when you are not using them.
Laptops, netbooks, and other devices with batteries

Reduce the screen brightness; powering the screen accounts for a significant fraction of a laptop's power consumption.

Most laptops have buttons on the keyboard (or a keyboard shortcut) that you can use to reduce the brightness.

If you do not need an Internet connection for a little while, turn off the wireless/Bluetooth card. These devices work by broadcasting radio waves, which takes quite a bit of power.

Some computers have a physical switch that can be used to turn it off, whereas others have a keyboard shortcut that you can use instead. You can turn it on again when you need it.
More advanced tips

Reduce the number of tasks that are running in the background. Computers use more power when they have more work to do.

Most of your running applications do very little when you are not actively using them. However, applications that frequently grab data from the internet, play music or movies can impact your power consumption.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/shell-apps-favorites.page0000644000373100047300000000334612467343070026656 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add, move, or remove frequently-used program icons on the Launcher. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Projècte de documentacion d'Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@list.ubuntu.com Change which applications show in the Launcher

To add an application to the Launcher for quick access:

Drag the application's icon from the Dash onto the Launcher.

Alternatively, when an application is running, right click on the application icon and select Lock to Launcher.

The Launcher icon order can be changed by dragging an icon off of the Launcher, and then back onto it in the desired location.

To remove an application icon from the Launcher, right click on the application icon and select Unlock from Launcher.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/addremove.page0000644000373100047300000000143712467343074024557 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add/remove software Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Install, remove, extra repositories… Add & remove software usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-chat-skype.page0000644000373100047300000000374012467343070025440 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Skype is proprietary software and must be installed manually on Ubuntu How can I use Skype on Ubuntu?

Skype is proprietary software that allows you to make calls over the Internet using your computer.

Skype uses decentralized peer-to-peer technologies, so your calls do not go through a central server, but through distributed servers and other users.

The Skype software is free to use, but it is not free software; the source code is proprietary and not available for modification.

Skype is not installed by default on Ubuntu. Install the skype package to use it.

You need to activate the Canonical Partner Repository to install Skype

Additional resources for help with <app>Skype</app>

How to record Skype conversations

A list of webcams which are compatible with Skype

Troubleshooting Skype - for advanced users

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/documents-select.page0000644000373100047300000000341012467343075026061 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Use selection mode to select more than one document or collection. Selecting documents

From Documents selection mode you can open, print, view or make collections of your documents. To use selection mode:

Click the ✓ button.

Select one or more documents or collections. The button bar appears with the actions that are valid for your selection.
Selection mode actions

After selecting one or more documents you can:

Open with Document Viewer (folder icon).

Print (printer icon): print a document (only available when a single document is selected).

Organize (plus icon): create a collection of documents.

Properties (wrench icon): display the properties of a document (only available when a single document is selected).

Delete (trash icon): delete one or more collections.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/mouse-problem-notmoving.page0000644000373100047300000001132112467343061027402 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How to check your mouse if it is not working. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Mouse pointer is not moving
Check that the mouse is plugged in

If you have a mouse with a cable, check that it is firmly plugged in to your computer.

If it is a USB mouse (with a rectangular connector), try plugging it in to a different USB port. If it is a PS/2 mouse (with a small, round connector with six pins), make sure that it is plugged in to the green mouse port rather than the purple keyboard port. You may need to restart the computer if it was not plugged in.

Check that the mouse was recognized by your computer

Type CtrlAltT to open the Terminal.

In the terminal window, type xsetpointer -l | grep Pointer, exactly as it appears here, and press Enter.

A short list of mouse devices will appear. Check that at least one of the items says [XExtensionPointer] next to it, and that one of the [XExtensionPointer] items has the name of the mouse to the left of it.

If there is no entry that has the name of the mouse followed by [XExtensionPointer], then the mouse was not recognized by your computer. If the entry exists, your mouse was recognized by your computer. In this case you should check that the mouse is plugged in and in working condition.

If your mouse has a serial (RS-232) connector, you may need to perform some extra steps to get it working. The steps might depend on the make or model of your mouse.

It can be complicated to fix problems with mouse detection. Ask for support from your distribution or vendor if you think that your mouse has not been detected properly.

Check that the mouse actually works

Plug the mouse in to a different computer and see if it works.

If the mouse is an optical or laser mouse, a light should be shining out of the bottom of the mouse if it is turned on. If there is no light, check that it is turned on. If it is and there is still no light, the mouse may be broken.

Checking wireless mice

Make sure the mouse is turned on. There is often a switch on the bottom of the mouse to turn the mouse off completely, so you can move it from place to place without it constantly waking up.

If you are using a Bluetooth mouse, make sure you have actually paired the mouse with your computer. See .

Click a button and see if the mouse pointer moves now. Some wireless mice go to sleep to save power, so might not respond until you click a button. See .

Check that the battery of the mouse is charged.

Make sure that the receiver (dongle) is firmly plugged in to the computer.

If your mouse and receiver can operate on different radio channels, make sure that they are both set to the same channel.

You may need to press a button on the mouse, receiver or both to establish a connection. The instruction manual of your mouse should have more details if this is the case.

Most RF (radio) wireless mice should work automatically when you plug them into your computer. If you have a Bluetooth or IR (infrared) wireless mouse, you may need to perform some extra steps to get it working. The steps might depend on the make or model of your mouse.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/documents.page0000644000373100047300000000234612467343066024613 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Organize the documents stored locally on your computer or created online. Documents

Documents is a GNOME application that lets you display, organize, and print the documents on your computer or those created remotely using Google Docs or SkyDrive.

View, Sort and Search
Select, Organize, Print
Questions
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/contacts-add-remove.page0000644000373100047300000000345012467343062026442 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Lucie Hankey ldhankey@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Add or remove a contact in the local address book. Add or remove a contact

To add a contact:

Press New.

In the New contact window, enter the contact name and the desired information. Click on the menu next to each field to choose Work, Home or Other.

Press Create Contact.

To remove a contact:

Select the contact from your contact list.

Press Edit in the top-right corner of Contacts.

Press Remove Contact.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-email.page0000644000373100047300000000122612467343065024460 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Default email apps The Ubuntu Documentation Team The GNOME Documentation Project Email & email software usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-airplane.page0000644000373100047300000000313612467343061027015 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Click the network menu on the menu bar and uncheck Enable Wireless. Turn off wireless (airplane mode)

If you have your computer on an airplane (or some other area where wireless connections are not allowed), you should switch off your wireless. You may also want to switch off your wireless for other reasons (to save battery power, for example). To do this:

To do this, click the network menu on the menu bar and uncheck Enable Wireless. This will turn off your wireless connection until you switch it back on again.

To turn wireless back on, click the network menu on the menu bar and select Enable Wireless so that it has a checkmark in front of it.

Your laptop may still be broadcasting if you have not turned off Bluetooth.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-security-tips.page0000644000373100047300000000552712467343073026224 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 General tips to keep in mind when using the internet Steven Richards steven.richardspc@gmail.com Staying safe on the internet

A possible reason for why you are using Ubuntu is the robust security that Linux based systems are known for. One reason that Linux is relatively safe from malware and viruses is due to the lower number of people who use it. Viruses are targeted at popular operating systems like Windows, that have an extremely large user base. Linux based systems are also very secure due to their open source nature, which allows experts to modify and enhance the security features included with each distribution.

Despite the measures taken to ensure that your installation of Ubuntu is secure, there are always vulnerabilities. As an average user on the internet you can still be susceptible to:

Phishing Scams (websites and emails that try to obtain sensitive information through deception)

Forwarding malicious emails

Applications with malicious intent (viruses)

Unauthorized remote/local network access

To stay safe online, keep in mind the following tips:

Be wary of emails, attachments, or links that were sent from people you do not know.

If a website's offer is too good to be true, or asks for sensitive information that seems unnecessary, then think twice about what information you are submitting and the potential consequences if that information is compromised by identity thieves or other criminals.

Be careful in providing any application root level permissions, especially ones that you have not used before or apps that are not well-known. Providing anyone/anything with root level permissions puts your computer at high risk to exploitation.

Make sure you are only running necessary remote-access services. Having SSH or VNC running can be useful, but also leaves your computer open to intrusion if not secured properly. Consider using a firewall to help protect your computer from intrusion.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/printing-setup.page0000644000373100047300000000621112467343073025573 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Set up a printer that is connected to your computer. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Steven Richards steven.richardspc@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Set up a local printer

Your system can recognize many types of printers automatically once they're connected. Most printers are connected with a USB cable that attaches to your computer.

You do not need to select whether you want to install network or local printer now. They are listed in one window.

Make sure the printer is turned on.

Connect the printer to your system via the appropriate cable. You may see activity on the screen as the system searches for drivers, and you may be asked to authenticate to install them.

A message will appear when the system is finished installing the printer. Select Print Test Page to print a test page, or Options to make additional changes in the printer setup.

If your printer was not set up automatically, you can add it in the printer settings.

Click the icon at the far right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Printers.

Click Add and select the printer from the Devices window.

Click Forward and wait while it searches for drivers.

You can customize the printer's name, description, and location if you like. When finished, click Apply.

You can now print a test page or click Cancel to skip that step.

If there are multiple drivers available for your computer, you may be asked to select a driver. To use the recommended driver, just click Forward on the make and model screens.

After you install the printer, you may wish to change your default printer.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/a11y-slowkeys.page0000644000373100047300000000511012467343064025231 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Have a delay between a key being pressed and that letter appearing on the screen. Activacion de las tòcas lentas

Turn on slow keys if you would like there to be a delay between pressing a key and that letter being displayed on the screen. This means that you have to hold down each key you want to type for a little while before it appears. Use slow keys if you accidentally press several keys at a time when you type, or if you find it difficult to press the right key on the keyboard first time.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Universal Access and select the Typing tab.

Activatz las Tòcas lentas.

 Quickly turn slow keys on and off

Under Enable by Keyboard, select Turn on accessibility features from the keyboard to turn slow keys on and off from the keyboard. When this option is selected, you can press and hold Shift for eight seconds to enable or disable slow keys.

Use the Acceptance delay slider to control how long you have to hold a key down for it to register.

You can have your computer make a sound when you press a key, when a key press is accepted, or when a key press is rejected because you didn't hold the key down long enough.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-connect.page0000644000373100047300000000641612467343063026661 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org The Ubuntu Documentation Team Get on the internet - wirelessly. Connect to a wireless network

If you have a wireless-enabled computer, you can connect to a wireless network that is within range to get access to the internet, view shared files on the network, and so on.

If you have a wireless hardware switch on your computer, make sure that it is turned on.

Click the network menu in the menu bar, and click the name of the network you want to connect to.

If the name of the network isn't in the list, select More Networks to see if the network is further down the list. If you still don't see the network, you may be out of range or the network might be hidden.

If the network is protected by a password (encryption key), enter the password when prompted and click Connect.

If you do not know the key, it may be written on the underside of the wireless router or base station, in its instruction manual, or you may have to ask the person who administers the wireless network.

The network icon will change appearance as the computer attempts to connect to the network.

If the connection is successful, the icon will change to a dot with several bars above it. More bars indicate a stronger connection to the network. If there aren't many bars, the connection is weak and might not be very reliable.

If the connection is not successful, you may be asked for your password again or it might just tell you that the connection has been disconnected. There are a number of things that could have caused this to happen. You could have entered the wrong password, the wireless signal could be too weak, or your computer's wireless card might have a problem, for example. See for more help.

A stronger connection to a wireless network does not necessarily mean that you have a faster internet connection, or that you will have faster download speeds. The wireless connection connects your computer to the device which provides the internet connection (like a router or modem), but the two connections are actually different, and so will run at different speeds.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/files-hidden.page0000644000373100047300000000640612467343065025145 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Make a file invisible, so you can't see it in the file manager. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Hide a file

The GNOME file manager gives you the ability to hide and unhide files at your discretion. When a file is hidden, it isn't displayed by the file manager, but it's still there in its folder.

To hide a file, rename it with a . at the beginning of its name. For example, to hide a file named example.txt, you should rename it to .example.txt.

You can hide folders in the same way that you can hide files. Hide a folder by placing a . at the beginning of the folder's name.
Show all hidden files

If you want to see all hidden files in a folder, go to that folder and either click the down button in the toolbar and pick Show Hidden Files, or press CtrlH. You will see all hidden files, along with regular files that are not hidden.

To hide these files again, either click the down button in the toolbar and pick Show Hidden Files, or press CtrlH again.

Unhide a file

To unhide a file, go to the folder containing the hidden file and click the down button in the toolbar and pick Show Hidden Files. Then, find the hidden file and rename it so that it doesn't have a . in front of its name. For example, to unhide a file called .example.txt, you should rename it to example.txt.

Once you have renamed the file, you can either click the down button in the toolbar and pick Show Hidden Files, or press CtrlH to hide any other hidden files again.

By default, you will only see hidden files in the file manager until you close the file manager. To change this setting so that the file manager will always show hidden files, see .

Most hidden files will have a . at the beginning of their name, but others might have a ~ at the end of their name instead. These files are backup files. See for more information.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-default-email.page0000644000373100047300000000315412467343064026103 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Change the default email client by going to Details in the System Settings. Change which mail application is used to write emails

When you click a button or link to send a new email (for example, in your word processing application), your default mail application will open up with a blank message, ready for you to write. If you have more than one mail application installed, however, the wrong mail application might open up. You can fix this by changing which one is the default email application:

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Details and choose Default Applications from the list on the left side of the window.

Choose which email client you would like to be used by default by changing the Mail option.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/backup-restore.page0000644000373100047300000000263012467343071025530 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Retrieve your files from a backup. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Restore a backup

If you lost or deleted some of your files, but you have a backup of them, you can restore them from the backup:

To restore your backup from a device such as an external hard drive, USB drive or another computer on the network, you can copy the files back to your computer.

If you created your backup using a backup application such as Déjà Dup, it is recommended that you use the same application to restore your backup. Review the application help for your backup program: it will provide specific instructions on how to restore your files.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/unity-shopping.page0000644000373100047300000000367512467343073025613 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Online results make the Dash more useful and help fund Ubuntu development. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Why are there shopping links in the Dash?

In addition to helping you find apps or files on your computer, the Dash also shows you related online results for your searches. Online sources include Amazon.com and dozens of other online sources.

When you purchase music or products from these sources, Canonical receives a small portion of the profits in exchange for directing more business to these stores. Canonical, the company that created and continues to support the Ubuntu project, then uses this money to make Ubuntu better.

Turn off online search results

If you don't want to receive online search suggestions, you can disable this feature.

Click the icon at the far right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Security & Privacy and select the Search tab.

Switch off Include online search results.

Log out and log back in for the change to take effect.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/power-constantfan.page0000644000373100047300000000364612467343064026264 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Some fan-control software could be missing, or your laptop may be running hot. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org The laptop fan is always running

If your laptop's cooling fan is always running, it could be that the hardware that controls the laptop's cooling system isn't very well supported in Linux. Some laptops need extra software to control their cooling fans efficiently, but this software may not be installed (or available for Linux at all) and so the fans just run at full speed all of the time.

If this is the case, you may be able to change some settings or install extra software that allows full control of the fan. For example, vaiofand can be installed to control the fans of some Sony VAIO laptops. Installing this software is quite a technical process which is highly dependent on the make and model of your laptop, so you may wish to seek specific advice on how to do it for your computer.

It is also possible that your laptop just produces a lot of heat. This does not necessarily mean that it is overheating; it might just need the fan to run at full speed all of the time to allow it to stay cool enough. If this is the case, you have little option but to let the fan run at full speed all of the time. You can sometimes buy additional cooling accessories for your laptop which may help.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-chat-empathy.page0000644000373100047300000000313512467343071025753 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com With Empathy you can chat, call and video call with friends and colleagues on a variety of networks Instant messaging on Ubuntu

With the Empathy application, you can chat with people online and with friends and colleagues who use Google Talk, AIM, Windows Live and many other chat programs. With a microphone or a webcam you can also have audio or video calls.

Empathy is installed by default in Ubuntu. Start Empathy Instant Messaging from the Dash, the Launcher or choose Chat from the Messaging menu.

You can change your instant messaging status (Available, Away, Busy, etc.) from the Messaging menu.

For help with using Empathy, read the Empathy manual.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/disk-format.page0000644000373100047300000000547712467343067025043 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Remove all of the files and folders from an external hard disk or USB flash drive by formatting it. Wipe everything off a removable disk

If you have a removable disk, like a USB memory stick or an external hard disk, you may sometimes wish to completely remove all of its files and folders. You can do this by formatting the disk - this deletes all of the files on the disk and leaves it empty.

Format a removable disk

Open the Disks application from the Dash.

Open the Disks application from the Activities overview.

Select the disk you want to wipe from the Storage Devices list.

Make sure that you have selected the correct disk! If you choose the wrong disk, all of the files on the other disk will be deleted!

In the Volumes section, click Unmount Volume. Then click Format Volume.

In the window that pops up, choose a filesystem Type for the disk.

If you use the disk on Windows and Mac OS computers in addition to Linux computers, choose FAT. If you only use it on Windows, NTFS may be a better option. A brief description of the file system type will be presented as a label.

Give the disk a name and click Format to begin wiping the disk.

Once the formatting has finished, safely remove the disk. It should now be blank and ready to use again.

 Formatting a disk does not securely delete your files

Formatting a disk is not a completely secure way of wiping all of its data. A formatted disk will not appear to have files on it, but it is possible that special recovery software could retrieve the files. If you need to securely delete the files, you will need to use a command-line utility, such as shred.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/backup-why.page0000644000373100047300000000243212467343072024655 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Why, what, where and how of backups. Salvaments Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Back up your important files

Backing up your files simply means making a copy of them for safekeeping. This is done in case the original files become unusable due to loss or corruption. These copies can be used to restore the original data in the event of loss. Copies should be stored on a different device from the original files. For example, you may use a USB drive, an external hard drive, a CD/DVD, or an off-site service.

The best way to back up your files is to do so regularly, keeping the copies off-site and (possibly) encrypted.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/look-resolution.page0000644000373100047300000000633412467343067025761 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Change the resolution of the screen and its orientation (rotation). Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Change the size or rotation of the screen

You can change how big (or how detailed) things appear on the screen by changing the screen resolution. You can change which way up things appear (for example, if you have a rotating display) by changing the rotation.

Click the icon on the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Displays.

If you have multiple displays and they are not mirrored, you can have different settings on each display. Select a display in the preview area.

Select your desired resolution and rotation.

Click Apply. The new settings will be applied for 30 seconds before reverting back. That way, if you cannot see anything with the new settings, your old settings will be automatically restored. If you are happy with the new settings, click Keep This Configuration.

When you use another display, like a projector, it should be detected automatically so you can change its settings in the same way as your usual display. If this does not happen, just click Detect Displays.
Resolution

The resolution is the number of pixels (dots on the screen) in each direction that can be displayed. Each resolution has an aspect ratio, the ratio of the width to the height. Wide-screen displays use a 16:9 aspect ratio, while traditional displays use 4:3. If you choose a resolution that does not match the aspect ratio of your display, the screen will be letterboxed to avoid distortion.

You can choose the resolution you prefer from the Resolution drop-down list. If you choose one that is not right for your screen it may look fuzzy or pixelated.

Rotation

On some laptops, you can physically rotate the screen in many directions. It is useful to be able to change the display rotation. You can choose the rotation you want for your display from the Rotation drop-down list.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/documents-view.page0000644000373100047300000000265012467343074025560 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 View documents full-screen. Display documents stored locally or online

When you open Documents, all of your documents, those stored locally as well as online, are displayed as thumbnails.

In order for your Google Docs or SkyDrive documents to appear, it is necessary to configure Google or Windows Live, respectively, as an online account.

To view the contents of a document:

Click the thumbnail. The document is displayed full-width in the Documents window (or full-screen if maximized).

To exit the document, click the back arrow button.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/unity-dash-apps.page0000644000373100047300000000360212467343061025627 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Run, install, or uninstall apps. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Applications lens

The applications lens is the first lens after the Dash home in the lens bar. The applications lens gives you access to your apps or apps available for install.

You can use SuperA to open the Dash directly at the applications lens.

Previews

Right click on a search result to open a preview. The preview shows a short description of the app, a screenshot, its Software Center rating, and what version is available.

For installed apps, you can see when the app was installed and either launch the app or uninstall it. Certain essential apps cannot be uninstalled from the preview.

For apps that haven't been installed, you can install them right from the preview.

Filters

Click Filter results if you'd like to only see results for a certain type of application. You can also click SourcesLocal Apps to only view installed apps or SourcesSoftware Center to only show apps available for install.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/power-whydim.page0000644000373100047300000000265012467343070025236 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 When your laptop is running on battery, the screen will dim when the computer is idle in order to save power. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Why does my screen go dim after a while?

When your laptop computer is running on battery, the screen will dim when the computer is idle in order to save power. When you start using the computer again, the screen will brighten.

You can stop the screen from dimming itself:

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Brightness & Lock and uncheck Dim screen to save power.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/printing-differentsize.page0000644000373100047300000000334212467343066027300 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Print a document on a different paper size or orientation. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Change the paper size when printing

If you want to change the paper size of your document (for example, print a US Letter-sized PDF on A4 paper), you can change the printing format for the document.

Click FilePrint

Select the Page Setup tab.

Under the Paper column, choose your Paper size from the drop-down list.

Click Print and your document should print.

You can also use the Orientation menu to choose a different orientation:

Portrait

Landscape

Reverse portrait

Reverse landscape

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/a11y-font-size.page0000644000373100047300000000316312467343066025277 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Use larger fonts to make text easier to read. Cambiament de la talha del tèxte a l'ecran

If you have difficulty reading the text on your screen, you can change the size of the font.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Universal Access and select the Seeing tab.

Switch Large Text to ON.

In many apps, you can increase the text size at any time by pressing Ctrl+. To reduce the text size, press Ctrl-.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/unity-hud-intro.page0000644000373100047300000000400512467343062025657 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the HUD to search menus of the apps you use. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com What is the HUD?

The HUD or Heads Up Display is a search-based alternative to traditional menus and was introduced in Ubuntu 12.04 LTS.

Some apps like Gimp or Inkscape have hundreds of menu items. If you're using apps like these, you may remember the name of a menu option, but you might not remember how to find it in the menus.

Using a search box can be quite a bit faster than navigating extended menu hierarchies. The HUD also can be more accessible than normal menus as some people are unable to precisely control a mouse pointer.

Use the HUD

To try the HUD:

Tap Alt to open the HUD.

Start typing.

When you see a result that you want to run, use the up and down keys to select the result, then press Enter, or click your desired search result.

If you change your mind and want to exit the HUD, tap the Alt again or the Esc. You can also click anywhere outside the HUD to close the HUD.

The HUD keeps track of your search history and adjusts the search results to be even more useful the more you use it.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-manual.page0000644000373100047300000000456312467343073024654 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com If network settings don't get assigned automatically, you may have to enter them yourself. Manually set network settings

If your network doesn't automatically assign network settings to your computer, you may have to manually enter the settings yourself. This topic assumes that you already know the correct settings to use. If not, you may need to ask your network administrator or look at the settings of your router or network switch.

To manually set your network settings:

Click the network menu on the menu bar and click Edit Connections.

Select the network connection that you want to set up manually. For example, if you plug in to the network with a cable, look at the Wired tab.

Click the connection you want to edit to select it, then click Edit.

Go to the IPv4 Settings tab and change the Method to Manual.

Click Add and type the IP address, network mask and default gateway IP address into the corresponding columns of the Addresses list. Press Enter or Tab after typing each address.

These three addresses must be IP addresses; that is, they must be four numbers separated by periods (e.g., 123.45.6.78).

Type the IP addresses of the DNS servers you want to use, separated by commas.

Click Save. If you are not connected to the network, click the network icon on the menu bar and connect. Test the network settings by trying to visit a website or look at shared files on the network, for example.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/shell-guest-session.page0000644000373100047300000000514412467343074026525 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Let a friend or colleague borrow your computer in a secure manner. Gunnar Hjalmarsson gunnarhj@ubuntu.com Launch a restricted guest session
Temporary session with restricted privileges

Once in a while a friend, family member, or colleague may want to borrow your computer. The Ubuntu Guest Session feature provides a convenient way, with a high level of security, to lend your computer to someone else. A guest session can be launched either from the login screen or from within a regular session. If you are currently logged in, click the icon at the far right of the menu bar and select Guest Session. This will lock the screen for your own session and start the guest session.

A guest cannot view the home folders of other users, and by default any saved data or changed settings will be removed/reset at logout. It means that each session starts with a fresh environment, unaffected by what previous guests did.

Customization

The Customize Guest Session online tutorial explains how to customize the appearance and behavior.

Disabling the feature

If you prefer to not allow guest access to your computer, you can disable the Guest Session feature. To do so, press CtrlAltT to open a terminal window, and then run this command (it's one long command, even if it may be shown wrapped on the screen - copy and paste to get it right):

sudo sh -c 'printf "[SeatDefaults]\nallow-guest=false\n" >/usr/share/lightdm/lightdm.conf.d/50-no-guest.conf'

The command creates a small configuration file. To re-enable Guest Session, simply remove that file:

sudo rm /usr/share/lightdm/lightdm.conf.d/50-no-guest.conf

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/clock-timezone.page0000644000373100047300000000356612467343070025535 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Add other timezones so you can see what time it is in other cities. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Show other timezones

If you want to know what time it is in different cities around the world, you can add additional timezones to the clock menu. These additional cities will show up below the calendar when you click on the clock.

Click on the clock and select Date & Time Settings.

Switch to the Clock tab and select Time in other locations.

Click Choose locations.

Click + to add a location.

Fill in the Location blank with the city name you want to add. Wait a moment for a list of possible cities to show up in the drop-down list.

Select the city you want and the current time in that location will fill in automatically.

Click - to delete a city from the list.

You can also drag and drop the cities in this Locations window to change the order in which they will show up in the clock menu.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/files-disc-write.page0000644000373100047300000000647512467343063025770 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Put files and documents onto a blank CD or DVD using a CD/DVD burner. Write files to a CD or DVD

You can put files onto a blank disc by using CD/DVD Creator. The option to create a CD or DVD will appear in the file manager as soon as you place the CD into your CD/DVD writer. The file manager lets you transfer files to other computers or perform backups by putting files onto a blank disc. To write files to a CD or DVD:

Place an empty disc into your CD/DVD writable drive.

In the Blank CD/DVD-R Disc window that appears, select CD/DVD Creator and click OK. The CD/DVD Creator folder window will open.

(You can also click on Blank CD/DVD-R Disc under Devices in the file manager sidebar.)

In the Disc Name field, type a name for the disc.

Drag or copy the desired files into the window.

Click Write to Disc.

Under Select a disc to write to, choose the blank disc.

(You could choose Image file instead. This will put the files in a disc image, which will be saved on your computer. You can then burn that disc image onto a blank disc at a later date.)

Click Properties if you want to adjust burning speed, the location of temporary files, and other options. The default options should be fine.

Click the Burn button to begin recording.

If Burn Several Copies is selected, you will be prompted for additional discs.

When the disc burning is complete, it will eject automatically. Choose Make More Copies or Close to exit.

For more advanced CD/DVD burning projects, try Brasero.

For help with using Brasero, read the user guide.
If the disc wasn't burned properly

Sometimes the computer doesn't record the data correctly, and you won't be able to see the files you put onto the disc when you insert it into a computer.

In this case, try burning the disc again but use a lower burning speed, e.g. 12x rather than 48x. Burning at slower speeds is more reliable. You can choose the speed by clicking the Properties button in the CD/DVD Creator window.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/disk-check.page0000644000373100047300000000602112467343070024604 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Test your hard disk for problems to make sure that it's healthy. Check your hard disk for problems
Checking the hard disk

Hard disks have a built-in health-check tool called SMART (Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology), which continually checks the disk for potential problems. SMART also warns you if the disk is about to fail, helping you avoid loss of important data.

Although SMART runs automatically, you can also check your disk's health by running the Disks application:

Check your disk's health using the Disks application

Open the Disks application from the Dash.

Open the Disks application from the Activities overview.

Select the disk you want to check from the Storage Devices list. Information and status of the disk will appear under Drive.

SMART Status should say "Disk is healthy".

Click the SMART Data button to view more drive information, or to run a self-test.
What if the disk isn't healthy?

Even if the SMART Status indicates that the disk isn't healthy, there may be no cause for alarm. However, it's better to be prepared with a backup to prevent data loss.

If the status says "Pre-fail", the disk is still reasonably healthy but signs of wear have been detected which mean it might fail in the near future. If your hard disk (or computer) is a few years old, you are likely to see this message on at least some of the health checks. You should backup your important files regularly and check the disk status periodically to see if it gets worse.

If it gets worse, you may wish to take the computer/hard disk to a professional for further diagnosis or repair.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-wireless.page0000644000373100047300000000170212467343075025226 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Connect to wifi, Hidden networks, Edit connection settings, Disconnecting… The Ubuntu Documentation Team Wireless Networking usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/session-screenlocks.page0000644000373100047300000000336412467343074026606 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Change how long to wait before locking the screen in the Brightness & Lock settings. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com The screen locks itself too quickly

If you leave your computer for a few minutes, the screen will automatically lock itself so you have to enter your password to start using it again. This is done for security reasons (so no one can mess with your work if you leave the computer unattended), but it can be annoying if the screen locks itself too quickly.

To wait a longer period before the screen is automatically locked:

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Click Brightness & Lock.

Change the value in the Lock screen after drop-down list.

If you don't ever want the screen to lock itself automatically, switch Lock off.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/files-delete.page0000644000373100047300000000627212467343075025156 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Remove files or folders you no longer need. Cristopher Thomas crisnoh@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Delete files and folders

If you don't want a file or folder any more, you can delete it. When you delete an item it is moved to the Trash folder, where it is stored until you empty the trash. You can restore items in the Trash folder to their original location if you decide you need them, or if they were accidentally deleted.

To send a file to the trash:

Select the item you want to place in the trash by clicking it once.

Press Delete on your keyboard. Alternatively, drag the item to the Trash in the sidebar.

To delete files permanently, and free up disk space on your computer, you need to empty the trash. To empty the trash, right-click Trash in the sidebar and select Empty Trash.

Permanently delete a file

You can immediately delete a file permanently, without having to send it to the trash first.

To permanently delete a file:

Select the item you want to delete.

Press and hold the Shift key, then press the Delete key on your keyboard.

Because you cannot undo this, you will be asked to confirm that you want to delete the file or folder.

If you frequently need to delete files without using the trash (for example, if you often work with sensitive data), you can add a Delete entry to the right-click menu for files and folders. Click Files in the menu bar, pick Preferences and select the Behavior tab. Select Include a Delete command that bypasses Trash.

Deleted files on a removable device may not be visible on other operating systems, such Windows or Mac OS. The files are still there, and will be available when you plug the device back into your computer.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/contacts-search.page0000644000373100047300000000346412467343076025676 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Search for a contact. Search for a contact

You can search for an online contact in one of two ways:

In the Activities overview, start typing the name of the contact.

Matching contacts will appear in the overview instead of the usual list of applications.

Press Enter to select the contact at the top of the list or click the contact that you want to select if they are not at the top.

To search from inside Contacts:

Click inside the search field.

Start typing the name of the contact.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-find.page0000644000373100047300000000421212467343075026143 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org The wireless could be turned off or broken, there might be too many wireless networks nearby, or you might be out of range. I can't see my wireless network in the list

There are a number of reasons why you might not be able to see your wireless network on the list of networks which appears when you click the network icon on the menu bar.

If no networks are shown in the list, your wireless hardware could be turned off, or it may not be working properly. Make sure it is turned on.

If there are lots of wireless networks nearby, the network you are looking for might not be on the first page of the list. If this is the case, look at the bottom of the list for an arrow pointing towards the right and hover your mouse over it to display the rest of the wireless networks.

You could be out of range of the network. Try moving closer to the wireless base station/router and see if the network appears in the list after a while.

The list of wireless networks takes time to update. If you have just turned on your computer or moved to a different location, wait for a minute or so and then check if the network has appeared in the list.

The network could be hidden. You need to connect in a different way if it is a hidden network.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/clock-more-info.page0000644000373100047300000000364712467343076025604 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Choose to show additional information such as the date or day of the week. Projècte de documentacion d'Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com Change how much information is shown in the clock

By default, Ubuntu only shows the time in the clock. You can set the clock to show additional information if you choose.

Click on the clock and select Date & Time Settings. Switch to the Clock tab. Select the time and date options you want to display.

You can also turn the clock off entirely by unchecking Show a clock in the menu bar.

If you later change your mind, you can get the clock back by clicking the icon in the very right of the menu bar and selecting System Settings. In the System section, click Time & Date.
Change the date format

You can also change the clock's date format to match the preferred standard for your location.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

In the Personal section, click Language Support.

Switch to the Regional Formats tab.

Select your preferred location in the dropdown list.

You will need to log out and log back in for this change to take effect.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/wacom-left-handed.page0000644000373100047300000000237312467343061026064 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Switch the Wacom tablet to Left-Handed Orientation. Use the tablet left-handed

Some tablets have hardware buttons on one side. The tablet can be rotated 180 degrees to position these buttons for left-handed people. To switch the orientation to left-handed:

Click the icon at the far right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Wacom Graphics Tablet.

If no tablet is detected, you'll be asked to Please plug in or turn on your Wacom tablet.

Switch Left-Handed Orientation to ON.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/display-dual-monitors-desktop.page0000644000373100047300000000417212467343064030516 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2013 Set up dual monitors on your desktop computer. Connect an extra monitor

To set up a second monitor with your desktop computer, connect the monitor. If your system doesn't recognize it immediately, or you would like to adjust the settings:

Click your name on the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Displays.

Click on the image of the monitor you would like to activate or deactivate, then switch it ON/OFF.

The monitor with the menu bar is the main monitor. To change which monitor is "main", click on the top bar and drag it over to the monitor you want to set as the "main" monitor.

To change the "position" of a monitor, click on it and drag it to the desired position.

If you would like both monitors to display the same content, check the Mirror displays box.

When you are happy with your settings, click Apply and then click Keep This Configuration.

To close the Displays click on the x in the top corner.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/bluetooth-visibility.page0000644000373100047300000000266212467343067027006 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Whether or not other devices can discover your computer. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org What is Bluetooth visibility?

Bluetooth visibility simply refers to whether other devices can discover your computer when searching for Bluetooth devices. When Bluetooth visibility is turned on, your computer will advertise itself to all other devices within range, allowing them to attempt to connect to you.

Your computer does not need to be visible to search for other devices, but those devices need to be visible for your computer to discover them.

After you have connected to a device, neither your computer nor the device needs to be visible to communicate with each other.

Unless you or someone you trust needs to connect to your computer from another device, you should leave visibility off.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/mouse-wakeup.page0000644000373100047300000000236212467343076025233 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 If you have to wiggle or click the mouse before it responds. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Mouse reacts with delay before it starts working

Wireless and optical mice, as well as touchpads on laptops, may need to "wake up" before they start working. They automatically go to sleep when not in use to save battery power. To wake up your mouse or touchpad, you can click on a mouse button or wiggle the mouse.

Laptop touchpads sometimes react with delay after you stop typing before they start working. This is to prevent you from accidentally touching the touchpad with your palm while typing. See for details.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/unity-introduction.page0000644000373100047300000000520712467343074026477 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 A visual introduction to the Unity desktop. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Welcome to Ubuntu

Ubuntu features Unity, a reimagined way to use your computer. Unity is designed to minimize distractions, give you more room to work, and help you get things done.

This guide is designed to answer your questions about using Unity and your Ubuntu desktop. First we will take a moment to look at some of Unity's key features, and how you can use them.

Getting started with Unity

The Unity desktop
The Launcher

The Launcher

The Launcher appears automatically when you log in to your desktop, and gives you quick access to the applications you use most often.

Learn more about the Launcher.
The Dash

The Ubuntu Button sits near the top left corner of the screen and is always the top item in the Launcher. If you click the Ubuntu Button, Unity will present you with an additional feature of the desktop, the Dash.

The Unity Dash

The Dash is designed to make it easier to find, open, and use apps, files, music, and more. For example, if you type the word "document" into the Search Bar, the Dash will show you applications that help you write and edit documents. It will also show you relevant folders and documents that you have been working on recently.

Learn more about the Dash.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/color-canshareprofiles.page0000644000373100047300000000334312467343061027247 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sharing color profiles is never a good idea as hardware changes over time. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Can I share my color profile?

Color profiles that you have created yourself are specific to the hardware and lighting conditions that you calibrated for. A display that has been powered for a few hundred hours is going to have a very different color profile to a similar display with the next serial number that has been lit for a thousand hours.

This means if you share your color profile with somebody, you might be getting them closer to calibration, but it's misleading at best to say that their display is calibrated.

Similarly, unless everyone has recommended controlled lighting (no sunlight from windows, black walls, daylight bulbs etc.) in a room where viewing and editing images takes place, sharing a profile that you created in your own specific lighting conditions doesn't make a lot of sense.

You should carefully check the redistribution conditions for profiles downloaded from vendor websites or that were created on your behalf.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/session-language.page0000644000373100047300000000642712467343073026060 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Switch to a different language for user interface and help text. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Change which language you use

You can use your desktop and applications in any of dozens of languages, provided you have the proper language packs installed on your computer.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Click Language Support.

Select your desired language on the Language tab. Drag the language to the top of the list.

You have to log out and back in for language changes to take effect. Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select Log Out to log out.

Some translations may be incomplete, and certain applications may not support your language at all.

There are some special folders in your home folder where applications can store things like music, pictures, and documents. These folders use standard names according to your language. When you log back in, you will be asked if you want to rename these folders to the standard names for your selected language. If you plan to use the new language all the time, you should update the folder names.

Change the system language

When you change your language, you only change it for your account after you log in. You can also change the system language, the language used in places like the login screen.

Change your language, as described above.

Click Apply System-Wide.

Administrative privileges are required. Enter your password, or the password for the requested administrator account.

You can find more detailed guidance on languages and regional formats in Language Support Help.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/user-goodpassword.page0000644000373100047300000001041112467343062026265 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Use longer, more complicated passwords. Choose a secure password

Make your passwords easy enough for you to remember, but very difficult for others (including computer programs) to guess.

Choosing a good password will help to keep your computer safe. If your password is easy to guess, someone may figure it out and gain access to your personal information.

People could even use computers to systematically try to guess your password, so even one that would be difficult for a human to guess might be extremely easy for a computer program to crack. Here are some tips for choosing a good password:

Use a mixture of upper-case and lower-case letters, numbers, symbols, and spaces in the password. This makes it more difficult to guess. There are more symbols to choose from, so more possible passwords would have to be checked by someone when trying to guess yours.

A good method for choosing a password is to take the first letter of each word in a phrase that you can remember. The phrase could be the name of a movie, a book, a song, or an album. For example, "Flatland: A Romance of Many Dimensions" would become F:ARoMD or faromd or f: aromd.

Make your password as long as possible. The more characters it contains, the longer it should take for a person or computer to guess it.

Do not use any words that appear in a standard dictionary in any language. Password crackers will try these first. The most common password is "password" -- people can guess passwords like this very quickly!

Do not use any personal information, such as a date, license plate number, or any family member's name.

Do not use any nouns.

Choose a password that can be typed quickly, to reduce the chance of someone being able to make out what you have typed if they happen to be watching you.

Never write your passwords down anywhere. They can be found!

Use different passwords for different things.

Use different passwords for different accounts.

If you use the same password for all of your accounts, anyone who guesses it will be able to access all of your accounts immediately.

It can be difficult to remember lots of passwords. Though not as secure as using a different passwords for everything, it may be easier to use the same one for things that don't matter (like websites), and different ones for important things (like your online banking account and your email).

Change your passwords regularly.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/unity-launcher-menu.page0000644000373100047300000000317212467343075026521 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Stephen M. Webb stephen@ubuntu.com Right clicking a Launcher Icon reveals a menu of actions. The Launcher Icon Menus

Right clicking on a Launcher icon will reveal a menu of actions. The actions available depend on whether the icon is locked to the launcher or not, if the icons is for an application whether it's running or not, and on the specific icon itself. Available actions can include the following.

launching the application or opening the document, folder, or device

unlocking the icon from the Launcher if it was previously locked (see )

locking the icon to the Launcher if it was previously not locked (see )

quitting the application if it's running

switching between application instances or windows if there is more than one instance or window

application-specific shortcuts such as open a new document or window

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/nautilus-display.page0000644000373100047300000000456612467343065026126 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Control icon captions used in the file manager. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com File manager display preferences

You can control how the file manager displays captions under icons. Click Edit in the menu bar, pick Preferences and select the Display tab.

Icon captions

File manager icons with captions

When you use icon view, you can choose to have extra information about files and folders displayed in a caption under each icon. This is useful, for example, if you often need to see who owns a file or when it was last modified.

You can zoom in a folder by clicking the View Zoom In or press Ctrl+. As you zoom in, the file manager will display more and more information in captions. You can choose up to three things to show in captions. The first will be displayed at most zoom levels. The last will only be shown at very large sizes.

If you have a file manager window open, you may have to reload for icon caption changes to take effect. Click ViewReload or press CtrlR.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/nautilus-prefs.page0000644000373100047300000000116612467343061025565 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org File manager preferences usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/bluetooth-send-file.page0000644000373100047300000001133112467343060026447 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Share files to Bluetooth devices such as your phone. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Send a file to a Bluetooth device

You can send files to connected Bluetooth devices, such as some mobile phones or other computers. Some types of devices don't allow the transfer of files, or specific types of files. You can send files in one of three ways: using the Bluetooth icon in the menu bar, from the Bluetooth settings window, or directly from the file manager.

You can send files to connected Bluetooth devices, such as some mobile phones or other computers. Some types of devices don't allow the transfer of files, or specific types of files. You can send files using the Bluetooth icon on the top bar, or from the Bluetooth settings window.

To send files directly from the file manager, see .

Before you begin, make sure Bluetooth is enabled on your computer. See .

 Send files using the Bluetooth icon

Click the Bluetooth icon in the menu bar and select Send Files to Device.

Click the Bluetooth icon on the top bar and select Send Files to Device.

Choose the file you want to send and click Select.

To send more than one file in a folder, hold down Ctrl as you select each file.

Select the device which you want to send the files to and click Send.

The list of devices will show both devices you are already connected to as well as visible devices within range. If you have not already connected to the selected device, you will be prompted to pair with the device after clicking Send. This will probably require confirmation on the other device.

If there are many devices, you can limit the list to only specific device types using the Device type drop-down.

The owner of the receiving device usually has to press a button to accept the file. Once the owner accepts or declines, the result of the file transfer will be shown on your screen.

 Send files from the Bluetooth settings

Click the Bluetooth icon in the menu bar and select Bluetooth Settings.

Click the Bluetooth icon on the top bar and select Bluetooth Settings.

Select the device to send files to from the list on the left. The list only shows devices you've already connected to. See .

In the device information on the right, click Send Files.

Choose the file you want to send and click Select.

To send more than one file in a folder, hold down Ctrl as you select each file.

The owner of the receiving device usually has to press a button to accept the file. Once the owner accepts or declines, the result of the file transfer will be shown on your screen.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/contacts-link-unlink.page0000644000373100047300000000516712467343060026657 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Combine information for a contact from multiple sources. Link and unlink contacts usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/wacom-multi-monitor.page0000644000373100047300000000252412467343074026532 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Map the Wacom tablet to a specific monitor. Choose a monitor

Click the icon at the far right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Wacom Graphics Tablet.

If no tablet is detected, you'll be asked to Please plug in or turn on your Wacom tablet.

Click Map to Monitor…

Check Map to single monitor.

Next to Output, select the monitor you wish to receive input from your graphics tablet.

Only the monitors that are configured will be selectable.

Click Close.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/keyboard-cursor-blink.page0000644000373100047300000000317012467343064027014 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Make the insertion point blink and control how quickly it blinks. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Natalia Ruz Leiva nruz@alumnos.inf.utfsm.cl Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Make the keyboard cursor blink

If you find it difficult to see the keyboard cursor in a text field, you can make it blink to make it easier to locate.

Click the icon at the far right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

In the Hardware section, click Keyboard.

Select Cursor blinks in text fields.

Use the Speed slider to adjust how quickly the cursor blinks.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/printing-paperjam.page0000644000373100047300000000243512467343067026241 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 How you clear a paper jam will depend on the make and model of printer that you have. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Clearing a paper jam

Sometimes printers incorrectly feed sheets of paper and get jammed.

The manual for your printer will usually provide detailed instructions on how to clear paper jams. Usually, you will need to open one of the printer's panels to find the jam inside and then firmly (but carefully!) pull the jammed paper out of the printer's feeding mechanism.

Once the jam has been cleared you may need to press the printer's Resume button to start printing again. With some printers, you may even need to turn the printer off and then on again, and then start the print job again.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/hardware-cardreader.page0000644000373100047300000000517712467343063026503 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Troubleshoot media card readers Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Media card reader problems

Many computers contain readers for SD (Secure Digital), MMC (MultiMediaCard), SmartMedia, Memory Stick, CompactFlash, and other storage media cards. These should be automatically detected and mounted. Here are some troubleshooting steps if they are not:

Make sure that the card is put in correctly. Many cards look as though they are upside down when correctly inserted. Also make sure that the card is firmly seated in the slot; some cards, especially CompactFlash, require a small amount of force to insert correctly. (Be careful not to push too hard! If you come up against something solid, do not force it.)

Open Files by using the Dash. Does the inserted card appear in the Devices list in the left sidebar? Sometimes the card appears in this list but is not mounted; click it once to mount. (If the sidebar is not visible, press F9 or click View Sidebar Show Sidebar.)

If your card does not show up in the sidebar, click GoComputer. If your card reader is correctly configured, the reader should come up as a drive when no card is present, and the card itself when the card has been mounted (see the picture below).

If you see the card reader but not the card, the problem may be with the card itself. Try a different card or check the card on a different reader if possible.

If no cards or drives are available in the Computer folder, it is possible that your card reader does not work with Linux due to driver issues. If your card reader is internal (inside the computer instead of sitting outside) this is more likely. The best solution is to directly connect your device (camera, cell phone, etc.) to a USB port on the computer. USB external card readers are also available, and are far better supported by Linux.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/unity-dash-video.page0000644000373100047300000000252612467343065026002 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Find and play videos from your computer or the internet. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Video lens

The video lens is the third lens after the Dash home on the lens bar and is represented by a film strip. The video lens gives you access to your videos or videos available online.

You can even buy or rent videos from the Dash.

You can use SuperV to open the Dash directly at the video lens.

Previews

Right click on a search result to open a preview with more information about the video.

Filters

Click Filter results to filter by video source.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/wacom-mode.page0000644000373100047300000000331112467343062024627 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 Switch the tablet between tablet mode and mouse mode. Set the Wacom tablet's tracking mode

Tracking Mode determines how the pointer is mapped to the screen.

Click the icon at the far right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Wacom Graphics Tablet.

If no tablet is detected, you'll be asked to Please plug in or turn on your Wacom tablet.

Next to Tracking Mode, select Tablet (absolute) or Touchpad (relative).

In absolute mode, each point on the tablet maps to a point on the screen. The top left corner of the screen, for instance, always corresponds to the same point on the tablet.

In relative mode, if you lift the pointer off the tablet and put it down in a different position, the cursor on the screen doesn't move. This is the way a mouse operates, allowing you to cover distances on the screen with less hand movement.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/prefs-language.page0000644000373100047300000000226412467343076025512 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Install languages, change language, region and formats, input sources… Region & Language
Language Support
Text Entry
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/shell-keyboard-shortcuts.page0000644000373100047300000001235212467343072027546 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Get around the desktop using the keyboard. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org 2012 Useful keyboard shortcuts

This page provides an overview of keyboard shortcuts that can help you use your desktop and applications more efficiently. If you cannot use a mouse or pointing device at all, see for more information on navigating user interfaces with only the keyboard.

Getting around the desktop

AltF4

Close the current window.

AltF2

Pop up command window (for quickly running commands)

AltTab

Quickly switch between windows. Hold down Shift for reverse order.

Alt`

Switch between windows from the same application, or from the selected application after AltTab.

This shortcut uses ` on US keyboards, where the ` key is above Tab. On all other keyboards, the shortcut is Alt plus whatever key is above Tab.

SuperS

Activate the workspace switcher. Zoom out on all workspaces.

SuperW

Activate "Expo" mode. Show all windows from current workspace.

CtrlAltArrow keys

Switch between workspaces.

CtrlAltShiftArrow keys

Move the current window to a different workspace.

CtrlAltDelete

Log out.

CtrlSuperD

Hide all windows and show the desktop. Press the keys again to restore your windows.

CtrlAltL

Lock the screen.
Common editing shortcuts

CtrlA

Select all text or items in a list.

CtrlX

Cut (remove) selected text or items and place it on the clipboard.

CtrlC

Copy selected text or items to the clipboard.

CtrlV

Paste the contents of the clipboard.

CtrlZ

Undo the last action.
Capturing from the screen

Print Screen

Take a screenshot.

AltPrint Screen

Take a screenshot of a window.

ShiftPrint Screen

Take a screenshot of an area of the screen. The pointer changes to a crosshair. Click and drag to select an area.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/bluetooth-connect-device.page0000644000373100047300000000745212467343067027507 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pair Bluetooth devices. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Connect your computer to a Bluetooth device

Before you can use a Bluetooth device like a mouse or a headset, you first need to connect your computer to the device. This is also called pairing the Bluetooth devices.

Before you begin, make sure Bluetooth is enabled on your computer. See .

Click the Bluetooth icon in the menu bar and select Set Up New Device.

Click the Bluetooth icon on the top bar and select Set up a New Device.

Make the other Bluetooth device discoverable or visible and place it within 10 meters (about 33 feet) of your computer. Click Continue. Your computer will begin searching for devices.

If there are too many devices listed, use the Device type drop-down to display only a single type of device in the list.

Click PIN options to set how a PIN will be delivered to the other device.

The automatic PIN setting will use a six-digit numerical code. A device with no input keys or screen, such as a mouse or headset, may require a specific PIN such as 0000, or no PIN at all. Check your device's manual for the proper setting.

Choose an appropriate PIN setting for your device, then click Close.

Click Continue to proceed. If you did not choose a preset PIN, the PIN will be displayed on the screen.

If required, confirm the PIN on your other device. The device should show you the PIN you see on your computer screen, or may prompt you to enter the PIN. Confirm the PIN on the device, then click Matches.

You need to finish your entry within about 20 seconds on most devices, or the connection will not be completed. If that happens, return to the device list and start again.

A message appears when the connection successfully completes. Click Close.

You can remove a Bluetooth connection later if desired.

To control access to your shared files, refer to the Bluetooth Sharing settings. See .

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/music-player-ipodtransfer.page0000644000373100047300000000407112467343071027713 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Use a media player to copy the songs and safely remove the iPod afterward. Songs don't appear on my iPod when I copy them onto it

When you plug an iPod into your computer, it will appear in your music player application and also in the file manager (the Files application in the Launcher). You must copy songs onto the iPod using the music player - if you copy them across using the file manager, it won't work because the songs won't be put into the right location. iPods have a special location for storing songs that music player applications know how to get to but the file manager does not.

You also need to wait for the songs to finish copying to the iPod before you unplug it. Before unplugging the iPod, make sure you choose to safely remove it. This will make sure that all of the songs have been copied across properly.

A further reason why songs might not be appearing on your iPod is that the music player application you're using does not support converting the songs from one audio format to another. If you copy a song which is saved in an audio format that is not supported by your iPod (for example, an Ogg Vorbis (.oga) file), the music player will try to convert it to a format that the iPod does understand, such as MP3. If the appropriate conversion software (also called a codec or encoder) is not installed, the music player will not be able to do the conversion and so will not copy the song. Look in the software installer for an appropriate codec.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/a11y-contrast.page0000644000373100047300000000315112467343065025212 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Make windows and buttons on the screen more (or less) vivid, so they're easier to see. Reglatge del contraste

You can adjust the contrast of windows and buttons so that they're easier to see. This is not the same as changing the brightness of the whole screen; only parts of the user interface will change.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Universal Access and select the Seeing tab.

Switch High Contrast to ON.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/addremove-sources.page0000644000373100047300000000706312467343076026243 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Add other repositories to extend the software sources Ubuntu uses for installation and upgrades. Add additional software repositories

Software is available from third-party sources, as well as from the default Ubuntu software repositories. If you want to install software from a third-party software repository, you must add it to Ubuntu's list of available repositories.

Only add software repositories from sources that you trust!

Third-party software repositories are not checked for security or reliability by Ubuntu members, and may contain software which is harmful to your computer.

Installar d'autres depauses

Click on the Ubuntu Software Center icon in the Launcher, or search for Ubuntu Software Center in the search bar of the Dash.

When the Software Center launches, click Edit Software Sources

You will be asked to enter your password. Once you have done that, switch to the Other Software tab.

Click Add and enter the APT line for the repository. This should be available from the website of the repository, and should look similar to:

deb http://archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu/ trusty main

Click Add Source then close the Software Sources window. Ubuntu Software Center will then check your software sources for new updates.

Activar lo depaus dels partenaris de Canonical

The Canonical Partner repository offers some proprietary applications that don't cost any money to use but are closed source. They include software like Skype, Adobe Reader and Adobe Flash Plugin. Software in this repository will appear in Ubuntu Software Center search results but won't be installable until this repository is enabled.

To enable the repository, follow the steps above to open the Other Software tab in Software Sources. If you see the Canonical Partners repository in the list, make sure it is checked then close the Software Sources window. If you don't see it, click Add and enter:

deb http://archive.canonical.com/ubuntu trusty partner

Click Add Source then close the Software Sources window. Wait a moment for Ubuntu Software Center to download the repository information.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/more-help.page0000644000373100047300000000146712467343072024502 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Tips on using this guide, help improve this guide… Get more help

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-fixed-ip-address.page0000644000373100047300000000452412467343075026526 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Using a static IP address can make it easier to provide some network services from your computer. Create a connection with a fixed IP address

Most networks will automatically assign an IP address and other details to your computer when you connect to the network. These details can change periodically, but you might want to have a fixed IP address for the computer so you always know what its address is (for example, if it is a file server).

To give your computer a fixed (static) IP address:

Click the network menu on the menu bar and select Edit Connections.

Select the Wired connection on the Wired tab or your WiFi network on the Wireless tab and click Edit.

Click on the IPv4 Settings tab and change the Method to Manual.

If no connection information is listed in the Addresses list, or if you want to set up a new connection, click Add.

Enter the IP Address, Netmask, and Gateway information into the appropriate boxes. How you choose these will depend on your network setup; there are specific rules governing which IP addresses and netmasks are valid for a given network.

If necessary, enter a Domain Name Server address into the DNS servers box. This is the IP address of a server which looks up domain names; most corporate networks and internet providers have dedicated DNS servers.

Click Save. The network connection should now have a fixed IP address.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/user-admin-change.page0000644000373100047300000000407612467343064026101 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 You can change which users are allowed to make changes to the system by giving them administrative privileges. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Change who has administrative privileges

Administrative privileges are a way of deciding who can make changes to important parts of the system. You can change which users have admin privileges and which ones don't. They are a good way of keeping your system secure and preventing potentially damaging unauthorized changes.

Click the icon at the far right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open User Accounts.

Click Unlock and enter your password to unlock the account settings. (To give a user admin privileges, you must have admin privileges yourself.)

Select the user whose privileges you want to change.

Click the label Standard next to Account type and select Administrator.

Close the User Accounts window. The user's privileges will be changed when they next log in.

The first user account on the system has admin privileges. This is the user account that was created when you first installed the system.

It is unwise to have too many users with Administrator privileges on one system.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-chat-social.page0000644000373100047300000000352712467343067025570 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Post to Twitter, Facebook and other social networking sites directly from your desktop Social networking from the desktop

With Ubuntu you can post to your favorite social networking sites from your desktop. Ubuntu uses the Friends scope to allow you to organize your social networking sites in one place, and to post updates from the Me Menu without opening any website.

To set up your social networking accounts:

Open the System menu on the right hand side of the menu bar and select "System Settings...".

Choose Online accounts

Choose the social networking site you want to set up and click Add Account...

Click Authorize and insert your account settings for that site, and follow the instructions

You can now view your social networking messages from the Messaging menu on the right hand side of the menu bar, in the Broadcast section. Click on any of the items in that section to open Friends scope and to read or post messages to your social network.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/power-batteryslow.page0000644000373100047300000000202512467343064026313 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Some laptops intentionally slow down when they are running on battery. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Why is my laptop slow when it is on battery?

Some laptops intentionally slow down when they are running on battery in order to conserve power. The processor (CPU) in the laptop switches to a slower speed, and processors use less power when running slower, so the battery should last longer.

This feature is called CPU frequency scaling.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/documents-previews.page0000644000373100047300000000261212467343062026445 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com 2012 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com 2012 You can only preview files stored locally. Why don't some files have previews?

When you open Documents, a preview thumbnail is displayed for documents that are stored locally. Those stored on a remote server like Google Docs or SkyDrive show as missing (or blank) preview thumbnails.

If you download a Google Docs or SkyDrive document to local storage, a thumbnail will be generated.

The local copy of a document downloaded from Google Docs or SkyDrive will lose its ability to be updated online. If you want to continue to edit it online, it is better not to download it.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/accounts-which-application.page0000644000373100047300000000643512467343073030033 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Baptiste Mille-Mathias baptistem@gnome.org 2012-2013 Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Andre Klapper ak-47@gmx.net Greg Beam ki7mt@yahoo.com Applications can use the accounts created in Online Accounts and the services they exploit. Which applications take advantage of online accounts?

Online Accounts can be used by external applications to automatically configure themselves.

With a Google account

Evolution, the email application. Your email account will be added to Evolution automatically, so it will retrieve your mail, give you access to your contacts, and display your calendar items in your Google agenda.

Empathy, the instant messaging application. Your online account will be added and you will be able to communicate with your friends.

Contacts, which will allow to see and edit your contacts.

Documents can access your online documents and display them.

With Windows Live, Facebook or Twitter accounts

Empathy can use these accounts to connect you online and chat with your contacts, friends, and followers.

With a SkyDrive account

Documents can access your online documents in Microsoft SkyDrive and display them.

With a Exchange account

Once you have created an Exchange account, Evolution will start retrieving mails from this account.

With a ownCloud account

When an ownCloud account is set up, Evolution is able to access and edit contacts and calendar appointments.

Files and other applications will be able to list and access your online files stored in the ownCloud installation.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/index.page0000644000373100047300000000353712467343064023722 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ubuntu Desktop Guide Ubuntu Desktop Guide <media type="image" mime="image/png" width="16" height="16" src="figures/ubuntu-logo.png">Help</media> Ubuntu Desktop Guide <media type="image" src="figures/ubuntu-logo.png">Ubuntu Logo</media> Ubuntu Desktop Guide usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/printing.page0000644000373100047300000000260512467343063024437 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Local setup, order and collate, two-sided and multi-page… Printing
Setup Set up a printer
Sizes and layouts Different paper sizes and layouts
Undetected printers, paper jams, print-outs that look wrong… Printer problems
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/addremove-remove.page0000644000373100047300000000346112467343062026046 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Suprimir de logicials qu'utilizatz pas mai. Suprimir una aplicacion

The Ubuntu Software Center helps you to remove software that you no longer use.

Click the Ubuntu Software Center icon in the Launcher or search for Software Center in the Dash.

When the Software Center opens, click the Installed button at the top.

Find the application that you want to remove by using the search box or by looking through the list of installed applications.

Select the application and click Remove.

You may be asked to enter your password. After you have done that, the application will be removed.

Some applications depend on other applications to work properly. If you try to remove an application that is needed by another application, both will be removed. You will be asked to confirm whether you want this to happen before the applications are removed.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/unity-menubar-intro.page0000644000373100047300000001305512467343076026542 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 The menu bar is the dark strip on the top of your screen. Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Manage apps & settings with the menu bar

The menu bar is the dark strip on the top of your screen. It contains the window management buttons, the app menus, and the status menus.

Window management buttons

The window management buttons are on the top left corner of windows. When maximized, the buttons are in the top left of the screen. Click the buttons to close, minimize, maximize or restore windows.

App menus

The app menus are by default located to the right of the window management buttons. Unity hides the app menus and the window management buttons unless you move your mouse pointer to the top left of the screen or press AltF10. This feature enables you to see more of your content at once, which is especially valuable on small screens like netbooks.

If you want, you can change the default behavior, and have your menus attached to the window title bar of respective application instead of the menu bar.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

In the Personal section, click Appearance and choose the Behavior tab.

Under Show the menus for a window, select In the window's title bar.
Status menus

Ubuntu has several different status menus (sometimes referred to as indicators) on the right side of the menu bar. The status menus are a convenient place where you can check and modify the state of your computer and applications.

List of status menus and what they do

Network menu Offline network icon

Connect to wired, wireless, mobile, and VPN networks.

Input source menu Input source icon

Select keyboard layout/input source, configure input sources.

Bluetooth menu Bluetooth icon

Send or receive files by Bluetooth. This menu is hidden if a supported Bluetooth device isn't detected.

Messaging menu Message icon

Easily launch and receive incoming notifications from messaging applications including email, social networking, and Internet chat.

Battery menu Battery icon

Check your laptop battery's charging status. This menu is hidden if a battery isn't detected.

Sound menu Volume icon

Set the volume, configure sound settings, and control media players like Rhythmbox.

Clock

Access the current time and date. Appointments from your Evolution calendar can also display here.

System menu Power cog icon

Access details about your computer, this help guide, and system settings. Switch users, lock screen, log out, suspend, restart or shutdown your computer.

Some of the icons used by the indicator menus change according to the status of the application.

Other programs such as Tomboy or Transmission can also add indicator menus to the panel.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/color-assignprofiles.page0000644000373100047300000000420212467343061026742 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Look in System SettingsColor for the option to change this. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com How do I assign profiles to devices?

Open System SettingsColor, and click the device that you wish to add a profile to.

Open System SettingsColor, and click the device that you wish to add a profile to.

By clicking Add profile you can select an existing profile or import a new file.

Each device can have multiple profiles assigned to it, but only one profile can be the default profile. The default profile is used when there is no extra information to allow the profile to be chosen automatically. An example of this automatic selection would be if one profile was created for glossy paper and another plain paper.

You can make a profile default by changing it with the radio button.

If calibration hardware is connected the Calibrate… button will create a new profile.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/unity-dash-files.page0000644000373100047300000000320312467343062025764 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Find files, folders, and downloads. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Files lens

The files lens is the second lens after the Dash home in the lens bar and is represented by a document. The files lens gives you access to recently used files, folders, or downloads.

You can use SuperF to open the Dash directly at the files lens.

If you use Google Drive, be sure to add your Google credentials to Online Accounts to see search results from Google Drive.
Previews

Right click on a search result to open a preview. The preview shows the file format, file size, and when it was last saved.

You can open a file, email it, or open the folder that contains the file.

Filters

Click Filter results to filter by file type, file size, or the last time the file was saved.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/unity-launcher-change-size.page0000644000373100047300000000235612467343065027754 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Make the icons in the Launcher larger or smaller. Change the size of icons in the Launcher

You can make the Launcher icons smaller to allow more items to fit in the Launcher. Or you might want to make the Launcher icons larger so they are easier to click.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Click Appearance.

Move the Launcher icon size slider to increase or decrease the size of the Launcher icons.

The default Launcher icon size is 48.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/shell-windows-tiled.page0000644000373100047300000000276512467343076026516 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Maximize two windows side-by-side. Tile windows

You can maximize a window on only the left or right side of the screen, allowing you to place two windows side-by-side to quickly switch between them.

To maximize a window along a side of the screen, grab the titlebar and drag it to the left or right side until half of the screen is highlighted. Using the keyboard, hold down Ctrl and Super and press the Left or Right key.

Hold down the Alt key and drag anywhere in a window to move it.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/a11y-visualalert.page0000644000373100047300000000360212467343063025707 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Enable visual alerts to flash the screen or window when an alert sound is played. Flash the screen for alert sounds

Your computer will play a simple alert sound for certain types of messages and events. If you have a hard time hearing these sounds, you can have either the entire screen or your current window visually flash whenever the alert sound is played.

This can also be useful if you're in an environment where you need your computer to be silent, such as in a library (see to learn how to mute the alert sound).

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Universal Access and select the Hearing tab.

Switch Visual Alerts on. Select whether you want the entire screen or just your current window title to flash.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-wireless-disconnecting.page0000644000373100047300000000657712467343074030071 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com You might have low signal, or the network might not be letting you connect properly. Why does my wireless network keep disconnecting?

You may find that you have been disconnected from a wireless network even though you wanted to stay connected. Your computer will normally try to reconnect to the network as soon as this happens (the network icon on the menu bar will pulse if it is trying to reconnect), but it can be annoying, especially if you were using the internet at the time.

Weak wireless signal

A common reason for being disconnected from a wireless network is that you have low signal. Wireless networks have a limited range, so if you are too far away from the wireless base station you may not be able to get a strong enough signal to maintain a connection. Walls and other objects between you and the base station can also weaken the signal.

The network icon on the menu bar displays how strong your wireless signal is. If the signal looks low, try moving closer to the wireless base station.

Network connection not being established properly

Sometimes, when you connect to a wireless network, it may appear that you have successfully connected at first, but then you will be disconnected soon after. This normally happens because your computer was only partially successful in connecting to the network - it managed to establish a connection, but was unable to finalize the connection for some reason and so was disconnected.

A possible reason for this is that you entered the wrong wireless passphrase, or that your computer was not allowed on the network (because the network requires a username to log in, for example).

Unreliable wireless hardware/drivers

Some wireless network hardware can be a little unreliable. Wireless networks are complicated, so wireless cards and base stations occasionally run into minor problems and may drop connections. This is annoying, but it happens quite regularly with many devices. If you are disconnected from wireless connections from time to time, this may be the only reason. If it happens very regularly, you may want to consider getting some different hardware.

Busy wireless networks

Wireless networks in busy places (in universities and coffee shops, for example) often have many computers trying to connect to them at once. Sometimes these networks get too busy and may not be able to handle all of the computers that are trying to connect, so some of them get disconnected.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/a11y.page0000644000373100047300000000533512467343064023364 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Seeing, hearing, mobility, braille… Accès universal

The Unity desktop includes assistive technologies to support users with various impairments and special needs, and to interact with common assistive devices. Many accessibility features can be accessed from the Universal Access section of System Settings.

The GNOME desktop includes assistive technologies to support users with various impairments and special needs, and to interact with common assistive devices. Many accessibility features can be accessed from the accessibility menu in the top bar.

Vision defalhenta Ceguesa Marrida vista Daltonisme Autres tèmas
Audicion defalhenta
Mobilitat defalhenta Movement de la mirga Clic e lisament Utilizacion del clavièr Autres tèmas
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/session-formats.page0000644000373100047300000000562112467343076025746 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Còla de documentacion d'Ubuntu Choose a region used for date and time, numbers, currency, and measurement. Change date and measurement formats

You can control the formats that are used for dates, times, numbers, currency, and measurement to match the local customs of your region.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Language Support and select the Regional Formats tab.

Select the region that most closely matches the formats you'd like to use. By default, the list only shows regions that use the language set on the Language tab.

You have to log out and back in for these changes to take effect. Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select Log Out to log out.

After you've selected a region, the area below the list shows various examples of how dates and other values are shown. Although not shown in the examples, your region also controls the starting day of the week in calendars.

Change the system formats

When you change your region for formats, you only change it for your account after you log in. You can also change the system formats, the formats used in places like the login screen.

Change your formats, as described above.

Click Apply System-Wide.

Administrative privileges are required. Enter your password, or the password for the requested administrator account.

You can find more detailed guidance on languages and regional formats in Language Support Help.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/power-willnotturnon.page0000644000373100047300000000535312467343073026701 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Loose cables and hardware problems are possible reasons. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org My computer will not turn on

There are a number of reasons why your computer will not turn on. This topic gives a brief overview of some of the possible reasons.

Computer not plugged in, empty battery, or loose cable

Make sure that the power cables of the computer are firmly plugged in and the power outlets are switched on. Make sure that the monitor is plugged in and switched on too. If you have a laptop, connect the charging cable (in case it has run out of battery). You may also want to check that the battery is correctly fitted in place (check the underside of the laptop) if it's removable.

Problem with the computer hardware

A component of your computer may be broken or malfunctioning. If this is the case, you will need to get your computer repaired. Common faults include a broken power supply unit, incorrectly-fitted components (such as the memory/RAM) and a faulty motherboard.

The computer beeps and then switches off

If the computer beeps several times when you turn it on and then turns off (or fails to start), it may be indicating that it has detected a problem. These beeps are sometimes referred to as beep codes, and the pattern of beeps is intended to tell you what the problem with the computer is. Different manufacturers use different beep codes, so you will have to consult the manual for your computer's motherboard, or take your computer in for repairs.

The computer fans are spinning but nothing is on the screen

The first thing to check is that your monitor is plugged in and turned on.

This problem could also be due to a hardware fault. The fans might turn on when you press the power button, but other essential parts of the computer might fail to turn on. In this case, take your computer in for repairs.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/backup-how.page0000644000373100047300000000456712467343071024655 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use Déjà Dup (or some other backup application) to make copies of your valuable files and settings to protect against loss. Tiffany Antopolski tiffany.antopolski@gmail.com Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com How to back up

The recommended way of backing up your files and settings is to let a backup application manage the backup process for you. A number of different backup applications are available, like Déjà Dup.

The help for your chosen backup application will walk you through setting your preferences for the backup, as well as how to restore your data.

An alternative option is to copy your files to a safe location, such as an external hard drive, another computer on the network, or a USB drive. Your personal files and settings are usually in your Home folder, so you can copy them from there.

The amount of data you can back up is limited by the size of the storage device. If you have the room on your backup device, it is best to back up the entire Home folder with the following exceptions:

Files that are already backed up somewhere else, such as to a CD, DVD, or other removable media.

Files that you can recreate easily. For example, if you are a programmer, you don't have to back up the files that get produced when you compile your programs. Instead, just make sure that you back up the original source files.

Any files in the Trash folder. Your Trash folder can be found in ~/.local/share/Trash.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/printing-setup-default-printer.page0000644000373100047300000000401512467343060030672 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pick the printer that you use most often. Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Paul W. Frields stickster@gmail.com Jana Svarova jana.svarova@gmail.com 2013 Set the default printer

If you have more than one printer available, you can select which will be your default printer. You may want to pick the printer you use most often.

Click the icon at the far right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Printers.

Right click your desired default printer from the list of available printers, and click Set as Default.

When choosing from the list of available printers, you can filter the printer search results by specifying a name or location of the printer (for example, 1st floor or entrance).

The search results filtering is available only in the dialog for addition of new printers.

When you print in an application, the default printer is automatically used, unless you choose a different printer for that specific print job.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/color-notifications.page0000644000373100047300000000364012467343075026575 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com You can be notified if your color profile is old and inaccurate. Can I get notified when my color profile is inaccurate?

Unfortunately we can't tell without recalibrating whether a device profile is accurate. We can use a simple metric of the amount of time since calibration to determine if a recalibrate is recommended.

Some companies have very specific timeout policies for profiles, as an inaccurate color profile can make a huge difference to an end product.

If you set the timeout policy and a profile is older than the policy then a red warning triangle will be shown in the System SettingsColor dialog next to the profile. A warning notification will also be shown every time you log into your computer.

To set the policy for display and printer devices, you specify the maximum age of the profile in days:

[rupert@gnome] gsettings set org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.color recalibrate-printer-threshold 180 [rupert@gnome] gsettings set org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.color recalibrate-display-threshold 180 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/sound-broken.page0000644000373100047300000000162612467343074025217 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Troubleshoot problems like having no sound or having poor sound quality. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Sound problems

There are a number of ways for sound playback to break on your computer. Which of the topics below best describes the problem you are experiencing?

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/mouse-touchpad-click.page0000644000373100047300000001010612467343065026622 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Click, drag, or scroll using taps and gestures on your touchpad. Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Click, drag, or scroll with the touchpad

You can click, double-click, drag, and scroll using only your touchpad, without separate hardware buttons.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Mouse & Touchpad.

In the Touchpad section, check Tap to click.

The Touchpad section only appears if your system has a touchpad.

To click, tap on the touchpad.

To double-click, tap twice.

To drag an item, double-tap but don't lift your finger after the second tap. Drag the item where you want it, then lift your finger to drop.

If your touchpad supports multi-finger taps, right-click by tapping with two fingers at once. Otherwise, you still need to use hardware buttons to right-click. See for a method of right-clicking without a second mouse button.

If your touchpad supports multi-finger taps, middle-click by tapping with three fingers at once.

When tapping or dragging with multiple fingers, make sure your fingers are spread far enough apart. If your fingers are too close, your computer may think they're a single finger.
Two finger scroll

You can scroll using your touchpad using two fingers.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Mouse & Touchpad.

In the Touchpad section, check Two finger scroll.

When this is selected, tapping and dragging with one finger will work as normal, but if you drag two fingers across any part of the touchpad, it will scroll instead. If you also select Enable horizontal scrolling, you can move your fingers left and right to scroll horizontally. Be careful to space your fingers a bit apart. If your fingers are too close together, they just look like one big finger to your touchpad.

Two-finger scrolling may not work on all touchpads.
Content sticks to fingers

You can drag content as if sliding a physical piece of paper using the touchpad.

Click the icon at the very right of the menu bar and select System Settings.

Open Mouse & Touchpad.

In the Touchpad section, check Content sticks to fingers.

This feature is also known as Natural Scrolling or Reverse Scrolling.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/sound-volume.page0000644000373100047300000000462212467343075025246 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Set the sound volume for the computer and control the loudness of each application. Change the sound volume

To change the sound volume, click the sound menu on the menu bar and move the volume slider left or right. You can completely turn off sound by checking Mute.

Some keyboards have keys that let you control the volume. They normally look like stylized speakers with waves coming out of them. They are often near the "F" keys at the top. On laptop keyboards, they are usually on the "F" keys. Hold down the Fn key on your keyboard to use them.

Of course, if you have external speakers, you can also change the volume using the volume control on the speakers themselves. Some headphones have a volume control too.

Changing the sound volume for individual applications

You can change the volume for one application, but leave the volume for others unchanged. This is useful if you're listening to music and browsing the web, for example. You might want to turn off the volume in the web browser so sounds from websites don't interrupt the music.

Some applications have volume controls in their main windows. If your application has one of these, use that to change the volume. Otherwise, click the sound menu on the menu bar and click Sound Settings. Go to the Applications tab and change the volume of the application there.

Only applications that are playing sounds will be listed. If an application is playing sounds but isn't listed, it might not support the feature that lets you control its volume in this way. In that case, you can't change its volume.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/files-lost.page0000644000373100047300000000405712467343077024676 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Follow these tips if you can't find a file you created or downloaded. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME gnome-doc-list@gnome.org Shaun McCance shaunm@gnome.org Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Find a lost file

If you created or downloaded a file, but now you can't find it, follow these tips.

If you don't remember where you saved the file, but you have some idea of how you named it, you can search for the file by name. See to learn how.

If you just downloaded the file, your web browser might have automatically saved it to a common folder. Check the Desktop and Downloads folders in your home folder.

You might have accidentally deleted the file. When you delete a file, it gets moved to the trash, where it stays until you manually empty the trash. See to learn how to recover a deleted file.

You might have renamed the file in a way that made the file hidden. Files that start with a . or end with a ~ are hidden in the file manager. Click the down button in the file manager toolbar and pick Show Hidden Files to display them. See to learn more.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/unity-dash-intro.page0000644000373100047300000000604212467343060026017 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 The Dash is the top button in the Launcher. Jeremy Bicha jbicha@ubuntu.com Find apps, files, music, and more with the Dash

Unity Search

The Dash allows you to search for applications, files, music, and videos, and shows you items that you have used recently. If you have ever worked on a spreadsheet or edited an image and forgot where you saved it, you will surely find this feature of the Dash to be useful.

To start using the Dash, click the top icon in the Launcher. This icon has the Ubuntu logo on it. For faster access, you can just press the Super key.

To hide the Dash, click the top icon again or press Super or Esc.

Search everything from the Dash home

The first thing you'll see when opening the Dash is the Dash Home. Without typing or clicking anything, the Dash Home will show you apps and files you've used recently.

Only one row of results will show for each type. If there are more results, you can click See more results to view them.

To search, just start typing and related search results will automatically appear from the different installed lenses.

Click on a result to open it, or you can press Enter to open the first item in the list.

Lenses

Lenses allow you to focus the Dash results and exclude results from other lenses.

You can see the available lenses in the lens bar, the darker strip at the bottom of the Dash.

To switch to a different lens, click the appropriate icon or press CtrlTab.

Filters

Filters allow you to narrow down your search even further.

Click Filter results to choose filters. You may need to click a filter heading such as Sources to see the available choices.

Previews

If you right click on a search result, a preview will open with more information about the result.

To close the preview, click any empty space or press Esc.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/color-missingvcgt.page0000644000373100047300000000230712467343070026253 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Whole-screen color correction modifies all the screen colors on all windows. Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Missing information for whole-screen color correction?

Unfortunately, many vendor-supplied ICC profiles do not include the information required for whole-screen color correction. These profiles can still be useful for applications that can do color compensation, but you will not see all the colors of your screen change.

In order to create a display profile, which includes both calibration and characterization data, you will need to use a special color measuring instruments called a colorimeter or a spectrometer.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/printing-2sided.page0000644000373100047300000000320512467343067025610 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Print on both sides of the paper, or multiple pages per sheet. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Print two-sided and multi-page layouts

To print on both sides of each sheet of paper:

Click FilePrint.

Go to the Page Setup tab of the Print window and choose an option from the Two-sided drop-down list. If the option is disabled, two-sided printing is not available for your printer.

Printers handle two-sided printing in different ways. It's a good idea to experiment with your printer to see how it works.

You can print more than one page of the document per side of paper too. Use the Pages per side option to do this.

The availability of these options may depend on the type of printer you have, as well as the application you are using. This option may not always be available.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-security.page0000644000373100047300000000127412467343061025237 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Antivirus software, basic firewalls… The Ubuntu Documentation Team Keeping safe on the internet usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/printing-inklevel.page0000644000373100047300000000321712467343061026244 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Check the amount of ink or toner left in printer cartridges. Anita Reitere nitalynx@gmail.com How can I check my printer's ink/toner levels?

How you check how much ink or toner is left in your printer depends on the model and manufacturer of your printer, and the drivers and applications installed on your computer.

Some printers have a built-in screen to display ink levels and other information.

The drivers and status tools for most HP printers are provided by the HP Linux Imaging and Printing (HPLIP) project. Other manufacturers might supply proprietary drivers with similar features.

Alternatively, you can install an application to check or monitor ink levels. Inkblot shows ink status for many HP, Epson and Canon printers. See if your printer is on the list of supported models. Another ink levels application for Epson and some other printers is mktink.

Some printers are not yet well supported on Linux, and others are not designed to report their ink levels.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/printing-order.page0000644000373100047300000000375212467343074025556 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Collate and reverse the print order. Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com Jim Campbell jwcampbell@gmail.com Make pages print in a different order
Reverse

Printers usually print the first page first, and the last page last, so the pages end up in reverse order when you pick them up. If needed, you can reverse this printing order.

To reverse the order:

Click FilePrint.

In the General tab of the Print window under Copies, check Reverse. The last page will be printed first, and so on.
Collate

If you are printing more than one copy of the document, the print-outs will be grouped by page number by default (i.e. all of the copies of page one come out, then the copies of page two, and so on). Collating will make each copy come out with its pages grouped together in the right order instead.

To Collate:

Click FilePrint.

In the General tab of the Print window under Copies check Collate.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/net-install-flash.page0000644000373100047300000000474512467343065026143 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Phil Bull philbull@gmail.com You may need to install Flash to be able to view websites like YouTube, which display videos and interactive web pages. Install the Flash plug-in

Flash is a plug-in for your web browser that allows you to watch videos and use interactive web pages on some websites. Some websites won't work without Flash.

If you do not have Flash installed, you will probably see a message telling you so when you visit a website that needs it. Flash is available as a free (but not open-source) download for most web browsers.

How to install Flash

Click this link to launch the Software Center.

Read the information and reviews to make sure you want to install Flash.

If you choose to install Flash, click Install from the Software Center window.

If you have any web browser windows open, close them and then re-open them. The web browser should detect that Flash is installed when you open it again, and you should now be able to view websites using Flash.
Open-source alternatives to Flash

A handful of free, open-source alternatives to Flash are available. These tend to work better than the Flash plug-in in some ways (for example, by handling sound playback better), but worse in others (for example, by not being able to display some of the more complicated Flash pages on the web).

You might like to try one of these if you are dissatisfied with the Flash player, or if you would like to use as much open-source software as possible on your computer. Here are a few of the options:

Gnash

LightSpark
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/ubuntu-help/color-notspecifiededid.page0000644000373100047300000000273412467343073027227 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Richard Hughes richard@hughsie.com Default monitor profiles do not have a calibration date. Why don't the default monitor profiles have a calibration expiry?

The default color profile used for each monitor is generated automatically based on the display EDID which is stored in a memory chip inside the monitor. The EDID only gives us a snapshot of the available colors the monitor was capable of displaying when it was manufactured, and does not contain much other information for color correction.

As the EDID cannot be updated, it has no expiry date.

Getting a profile from the monitor vendor or creating a profile yourself would lead to more accurate color correction.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/totem/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000717012316541441022430 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/totem/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000017106012316541441023273 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 ]>
Manual de <application>Totem Movie Player</application> 2003 Chee Bin HOH 2009 Philip Withnall Totem Movie Player is a media player for GNOME that runs on GStreamer by default, but can also be run on xine. It has support for most audio and video codecs including DVDs among many others. Features include TV-out, fullscreen, subtitles, and more. Projècte de documentacion de GNOME Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Chee Bin HOH GNOME Documentation Project cbhoh@gnome.org Baptiste Mille-Mathias GNOME Documentation project Update documentation baptiste.millemathias@gmail.org Philip Withnall Update documentation philip@tecnocode.co.uk Totem Movie Player Manual V2.0 August 2006 Chee Bin HOH cbhoh@gnome.org GNOME Documentation Project Totem Movie Player Manual V3.0 February 2009 Philip Withnall philip@tecnocode.co.uk GNOME Documentation Project This manual describes version 2.26 of Totem Movie Player. Feedback To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the Totem Movie Player application or this manual, follow the directions in the GNOME Feedback Page. Totem Movie Player totem Introduccion The Totem Movie Player application is a movie player for the GNOME desktop based on the GStreamer framework and xine library, and enables you to play movies or songs. Totem Movie Player provides the following features: Support for a variety of video and audio files. A variety of zoom levels and aspect ratios, and a fullscreen view. Seek and volume controls. Una tièra de lectura. Subtitle support. Complete keyboard navigation. Comprehensive set of plugins, including a subtitle downloader, YouTube browser, and disc burner. Totem Movie Player also comes with additional functionality such as: Video thumbnailer for GNOME. Audio preview application for GNOME. Nautilus properties tab. Per començar To Start <application>Totem Movie Player</application> You can start Totem Movie Player in the following ways: Menut Applications Choose Sound & Video Movie Player . Linha de comanda To start Totem Movie Player from a command line, type the following command, then press Return: totem To view other command line options that are available, type totem --help, then press Return. When You Start <application>Totem Movie Player</application> When you start Totem Movie Player, the following window is displayed.
<application>Totem Movie Player</application> Start Up Window Shows Totem Movie Player main window with sidebar opened on playlist. Contains menubar, display area, sidebar, elapsed time slider, seek control buttons, volume slider and statusbar.
The Totem Movie Player window contains the following elements: Barra de menuts. The menus on the menubar contain all of the commands you need to use in Totem Movie Player. Display area. The display area displays the movie or a visualization of the current song. Barra laterala. The sidebar displays properties of the file played and acts as playlist. It can also be used by various plugins, such as the MythTV, YouTube and Video Search plugins. They can be selected by clicking on the drop-down list at the top of the sidebar. Elapsed time slider. The elapsed time slider displays the elapsed time of the movie or song that is playing. It also enables you to skip forward or backward in a movie or song by dragging the slider's handle along the bar, or by clicking on a point on the bar. Seek control buttons. The seek control buttons enable you to move to the next or previous track, and to pause or play a movie or song. Volume button. The volume button enables you to adjust the volume. Statusbar. The statusbar displays status information about the movie or song that is playing. Utilizacion Dobrir un fichièr To open a video or an audio file, choose CtrlO Movie Open . The Select Movies or Playlists dialog is displayed. Select the file or files you want to open, then click OK. You can drag a file from another application such as a file manager to the Totem Movie Player window. If you drag the file to the display area, the file will replace the current playlist and will start playing immediately. If you drag the file to the playlist in the sidebar, the file will be appended to the current playlist. The Totem Movie Player application will open the file and play the movie or song. Totem Movie Player displays the title of the movie or song in the titlebar of the window and in the playlist in the sidebar. If you try to open a file format that Totem Movie Player does not recognize, the application displays an error message. This error is most often encountered if you do not have the correct codecs installed. Information on getting codecs working can be found on the Totem Movie Player website. You can double-click on a video or an audio file in the Nautilus file manager to open it in the Totem Movie Player window. Dobrir un emplaçament To open a file by URI (location), choose CtrlL Movie Open Location . The Open Location dialog is displayed. Use the drop-down combination box to specify the URI you would like to open (it lists URIs which have previously been opened) – or type one in directly – then click on the Open button. If you have a URI in the clipboard already, it will automatically be pasted into the combination box. To Play a Movie (DVD or VCD) Insert the disc in the optical device of your computer, then choose MoviePlay Disc . To eject a DVD or VCD, choose CtrlE Movie Eject . To Pause a Movie or Song To pause a movie or song that is playing, click on the Shows pause button. button, or choose CtrlSpace Movie Play / Pause . You may also use the P key to pause or play a movie. To resume playing a movie or song, click on the Shows play button. button again, or choose CtrlSpace Movie Play / Pause . To View Properties of a Movie or Song To view the properties of a movie or song, choose View Sidebar to make the sidebar appear, and choose Properties in the drop-down list at the top of the sidebar. To Seek Through Movies or Songs To seek through movies or songs, you can use the following methods: To skip forward To skip forward through a movie or song, choose Right Go Skip Forward . To skip backward To skip backwards through a movie or song, choose Left Go Skip Backwards . To skip to a time To skip to a specific elapsed time in the movie or song, choose CtrlK Go Skip to . The Skip to dialog is displayed. Use the spin box to specify the elapsed time (in seconds) to skip to, then click OK. The spin box also allows more natural language to be used. You can enter a time in the formats "hh:mm:ss", "mm:ss" or "ss"; where "hh" is the hour, "mm" is the minute and "ss" is the second to skip to. To move to the next movie or song To move to the next movie or song, choose AltRight Go Next Chapter/Movie or click on the Shows a seek next button button. To move to the previous movie or song To move to the previous movie or song, choose AltLeft Go Previous Chapter/Movie or click on the Shows a seek previous button button. To Change the Zoom Factor To Change the Video Size To change the zoom factor of the display area, you can use the following methods: To zoom to fullscreen mode, choose F11 ViewFullscreen. You can also use the F key to toggle fullscreen mode. To exit fullscreen mode, click on the Leave Fullscreen button or press Esc, F11 or F. To change the size of the original movie or visualization, choose Ctrl0 ViewFit Window to Movie and choose a scale ratio. To Change the Video Aspect Ratio To switch between different aspect ratios, choose A View Aspect Ratio . To Adjust the Volume To increase the volume, choose Up Sound Volume Up . To decrease the volume, choose Down Sound Volume Down . You can also use the volume button: click on the volume button and choose the volume level with the slider. To Make the Window Always on Top To make the Totem Movie Player window always on top of other application windows, choose Edit Plugins . Select the Always on Top plugin to enable it. The Totem Movie Player window will now stay on top of all other windows while a movie is playing, but not while audio or visualizations are playing. To stop the window from always being on top, disable the Always on Top plugin again. See for more information. To Show or Hide Controls To show or hide the Totem Movie Player window controls, choose CtrlH View Show Controls , or press the H key. You can also right-click on the Totem Movie Player window, then choose CtrlH Show Controls from the popup menu. If the Show Controls option is selected, Totem Movie Player will show the menubar, elapsed time slider, seek control buttons, volume slider and statusbar on the window. If the Show Controls option is unselected, the application will hide these controls and show only the display area. Gerir una tièra de lectura To Show or Hide the Playlist To show or hide the playlist, choose ViewSidebar or click on the Sidebar button, and choose Playlist on the top of the sidebar. Manage a Playlist You can use the Playlist dialog to do the following: To add a track or movie To add a track or movie to the playlist, click on the Add button. The Select Movies or Playlists dialog is displayed. Select the file that you want to add to the playlist, then click Add. To remove a track or movie To remove a track or movie from the playlist, select the item or items to remove from the playlist, then click on the Remove button. To save the playlist to a file To save the playlist to a file, click on the Save Playlist button. The Save Playlist dialog is displayed; specify the filename as which you want to save the playlist, and click Save. To move a track or movie up the playlist To move a track or movie up the playlist, select the item from the playlist, then click on the Move Up button. To move a track or movie down the playlist To move a track or movie down the playlist, select the item from the playlist, then click on the Move Down button. To Select or Unselect Repeat Mode To enable or disable repeat mode, choose EditRepeat Mode. To Select or Unselect Shuffle Mode To enable or disable shuffle mode, choose EditShuffle Mode. To Choose Subtitles To choose the language of the subtitles, select ViewSubtitles and choose the subtitle language you want to display. To disable the display of subtitles, select ViewSubtitlesNone. By default, Totem Movie Player will choose the same language for the subtitles as the one you normally use on your computer. Totem Movie Player will automatically load and display subtitles for a video if it finds a subtitle file with the same name as the video being played, and the extension asc, txt, sub, srt, smi, ssa or ass. If the file containing the subtitles has a different name from the video being played, you can right-click on the video in the playlist and choose Select Text Subtitles from the popup menu to load the correct subtitle file. You may also choose subtitles by choosing ViewSelect Text Subtitles. Using the Subtitle Downloader plugin, you can also download subtitles from the OpenSubtitles service. See for more information. To Take a Screenshot To take a screenshot of the movie or visualization that is playing, choose Edit Take Screenshot . The Save Screenshot dialog is displayed. Choose a location and insert the filename as which you want to save the screenshot, then click on the Save button to save the screenshot. Totem Movie Player will display a preview of the screenshot which is to be saved on the left-hand side of the Save Screenshot dialog. To Create a Screenshot Gallery To create a gallery of screenshots of the movie or visualization that is playing, choose Edit Create Screenshot Gallery . The Save Gallery dialog is displayed. Choose a location and insert the filename as which you want to save the gallery image, then click on the Save button to save the screenshot. You may specify the width of the individual screenshots in the gallery using the Screenshot width entry. The default width is 128 pixels. You may also specify the number of screenshots to be put in the gallery. By default, this is calculated based on the length of the movie; however, this may be overridden by deselecting the Calculate the number of screenshots checkbox and entering the new number in the Number of screenshots spin box. Plugins Totem Movie Player has many features which are present in the form of plugins — pieces of the software which are only loaded if necessary. To Enable a Plugin To view the list of installed plugins, choose EditPlugins. The Configure Plugins dialog is displayed. On the left is a list of all the plugins you have installed, while on the right is a description of the currently selected plugin. Plugins which have options which can be changed will have a sensitive Configure button on the right. To enable a plugin, simply select the checkbox to the left of its name in the plugin list, and the plugin will be loaded immediately. If there is any error loading the plugin, an error dialog will also be displayed immediately. To disable a plugin again, deselect its checkbox. Plugins will remain enabled or disabled as set even when Totem Movie Player is closed. Always on Top When enabled, the Always on Top plugin will force the main Totem Movie Player window to be on top of all other windows while a movie is playing, but not while audio or visualizations are playing. To stop the window being on top, disable the plugin again. Coherence DLNA/UPnP Client The Coherence DLNA/UPnP Client plugin allows Totem Movie Player to play multimedia content from UPnP media servers (such as Coherence servers) on the local network. With the Coherence DLNA/UPnP Client plugin enabled, choose F9ViewSidebar or click on the Sidebar button to show the sidebar. Select Coherence DLNA/UPnP Client from the drop-down list at the top of the sidebar to display the Coherence DLNA/UPnP Client sidebar. The tree view in the sidebar will list the available media servers. Clicking on one will expand it to show the types of media it can serve, and clicking on a media folder will expand it to list the media files available. Double-clicking on a media file will add it to Totem Movie Player's playlist and play it. You may alternatively right-click on a file and choose Play or Enqueue to play the file immediately or add it to the playlist, respectively. If the media server allows it, choosing Delete from a file's context menu allows you to delete that file from the media server. Gromit Annotations The Gromit Annotations plugin allows you to draw on top of movies as they are played using Gromit. You must have Gromit installed before you can enable the plugin — consult your operating system documentation for information on how to do this. With the plugin enabled, press CtrlD to toggle Gromit on or off. When Gromit is enabled, your pointer will change to a crosshair. To draw on the screen, hold down your mouse button and drag your pointer around, before releasing your mouse button. Press CtrlD again to toggle Gromit off. To clear the screen of annotations, press CtrlE, or close Totem Movie Player. Jamendo The Jamendo plugin allows you to listen to the collection of Creative Commons-licensed music on the Jamendo service. To Configure the Plugin The Jamendo plugin can be configured. Click on the Configure button when enabling the plugin, and the Jamendo Plugin Configuration dialog will be displayed. Here, you can choose whether to download songs in Ogg or MP3 format (Ogg is preferred due to its open-source nature); and the number of albums to retrieve when doing a search (choose more albums if you have a faster Internet connection). Once you're done, click OK. To Display the Jamendo Sidebar With the Jamendo plugin enabled, choose F9ViewSidebar or click on the Sidebar button to show the sidebar. Select Jamendo from the drop-down list at the top of the sidebar to display the Jamendo sidebar. To Search for Music Enter your search terms in the search entry at the top of the Jamendo sidebar. You can search by either artist or by tags. Click on the search button to start your search. Search results will be displayed in the tree view in the Search Results page of the sidebar, and can be browsed through using the arrow buttons at the bottom of the sidebar. Albums are listed, and if you click on an album, its tracks will be listed below it. Click again to hide the album's tracks. With an artist selected, you can click on the Jamendo Album Page button to open that album's page on the Jamendo website. Double-clicking an album, or choosing Add to Playlist from the album's context menu, will replace your playlist with all the tracks on that album and begin streaming the first track from Jamendo's website. Double-clicking an individual track will replace your playlist with just that track. Popular Albums and Latest Releases Viewing the Popular page in the Jamendo sidebar will load a list of the most popular albums on Jamendo at the moment, which can be played as with search results. Viewing the Latest Releases page will likewise load a list of the latest albums released on Jamendo. Local Search The Local Search plugin allows you to search for playable movies and audio files on your computer from within Totem Movie Player. With the plugin enabled, choose F9ViewSidebar or click on the Sidebar button to show the sidebar. Select Local Search from the drop-down list at the top of the sidebar to display the Local Search sidebar. To perform a search, enter your search terms in the search entry at the top of the sidebar and click Find. Your search terms may include wildcards such as *, which will match any character. For example, the search *.mpg will find all movies with the .mpg file extension. Search results may be browsed using the Back and Forward buttons at the bottom of the sidebar, and you may jump to a specific results page by entering its number in the spin box. Publish Playlist The Publish Playlist plugin allows you to publish playlists on your local network to allow other computers to access and play them. To Configure the Plugin The Publish Playlist plugin can be configured. Click on the Configure button when enabling the plugin, and the configuration dialog will be displayed. Here, you can change the name which will appear for your playlist share. The following strings will be replaced when playlists are published: %a Replaced with the program's name: Totem Movie Player. %h Replaced with your computer's host name. %u Replaced with your username. %U Replaced with your real name. %% Replaced with a literal percent sign. You can also select the Use encrypted transport protocol checkbox if you wish to encrypt the shared playlists when they're transmitted over the network. Once you're done, click Close. To Publish Playlists With the plugin enabled, you do not need to explicitly publish playlists; they are automatically made available on the network as a Zeroconf website. To Browse your Neighborhood To view the shared playlists of others on your network, select Neighborhood from the drop-down list at the top of the sidebar. If any playlists have been published on the network, they will be listed here. Double-click on a playlist to load and play it on your computer. Subtitle Downloader The Subtitle Downloader plugin allows you to find and download subtitle files from the OpenSubtitles service. Subtitles can only be downloaded for local movies; not audio files, DVDs, DVB streams, VCDs or HTTP streams. To search for subtitles for the currently playing movie, choose ViewDownload Movie Subtitles, which will display the Download Movie Subtitles dialog. Select the language in which you wish to have your subtitles from the drop-down list at the top of the dialog, then click on the Find button to search for subtitles for the current movie. Subtitles are found on the basis of the movie's content, rather than its filename or tags. Search results are listed in the tree view in the middle of the dialog. Currently, subtitles can only be used with a movie by reloading the movie with the subtitles, so after selecting the subtitle file you wish to download, click on the Play with Subtitle button to download the subtitles and reload the movie. Downloaded subtitle files are cached (in ~/.cache/totem/subtitles, by default) so that they do not need to be downloaded again when playing the movie again. When downloading new subtitles for a movie, any previously downloaded subtitles for that movie are deleted. Thumbnail The Thumbnail plugin sets Totem Movie Player's main window icon to a thumbnail of the current movie, and updates the icon when new movies are loaded. If a thumbnail doesn't exist for the current movie (or if you're playing an audio file), the main window icon will be reset to the Totem Movie Player logo. Video Disc Recorder The Video Disc Recorder plugin allows you to burn the current playlist to a DVD or VCD using Brasero. To burn the current playlist, choose MovieCreate Video Disc. A Brasero dialog will be displayed, giving options for converting the movies to the appropriate format and burning them to disc. For more information, see the Brasero documentation. YouTube Browser The YouTube Browser plugin allows you to search and browse YouTube, and play YouTube videos directly in Totem Movie Player. With the plugin enabled, choose F9ViewSidebar or click on the Sidebar button to show the sidebar. Select YouTube from the drop-down list at the top of the sidebar to display the YouTube sidebar. To search for a YouTube video, enter your search terms in the entry at the top of the sidebar, then click Find. The search results will be listed in the tree view below. More results will be loaded automatically as you scroll down the list. To play a video, double-click it in the results list, or choose Add to Playlist from its context menu. When a video is played, a list of related videos will automatically be loaded in the Related Videos page of the YouTube sidebar. YouTube videos can be opened in a web browser by choosing Open in Web Browser from their context menu. This will open the video in its original location on the YouTube website. D-Bus Service The D-Bus Service plugin broadcasts notifications of which track is playing in Totem Movie Player on the D-Bus session bus. Applications such as Gajim can listen for such notifications and respond accordingly by, for example, updating your instant messaging status message to display the video currently being played in Totem Movie Player. Preferéncias To modify the preferences of Totem Movie Player, choose Edit Preferences . General Ret Select network connection speed from the Connection speed drop-down list. Text Subtitles Automatically load subtitle files: select this option to automatically load any subtitle files with the same filename as a movie when the movie is loaded. Font: select this option to change the font used to display subtitles. Encoding: select this option to change the encoding used to display subtitles. Visualizar Visualizar Select the resize option if you want Totem Movie Player to automatically resize the window to the size of the video when a new video is loaded. Select the screensaver option if you want to allow the screensaver to activate when playing audio files. Some monitors with integrated speakers may stop playing music when the screensaver is activated. Visual Effects Visual: select this option to show visual effects while an audio file is playing. Type of visualization: select type of visualization from the drop-down list. Visualization size: select visualization size from the drop-down list. Color balance Brightness: use the slider to specify the level of brightness. Contrast: use the slider to specify the level of contrast. Saturation: use the slider to specify the level of saturation. Hue: use the slider to specify the level of hue. You may use the Reset to Defaults button to reset the color balance controls to their default positions. Audio Audio Output Select audio output type from the Audio output type drop-down list. A prepaus de <application>Totem Movie Player</application> Totem Movie Player is written by Bastien Nocera (hadess@hadess.net), Julien Moutte (julien@moutte.net) for the GStreamer backend, and Guenter Bartsch (guenter@users.sourceforge.net). To find more information about Totem Movie Player, please visit the Totem Movie Player website. To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the Totem Movie Player application or this manual, follow the directions in the GNOME Feedback Page. This program is distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public license as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. A copy of this license can be found at this link, or in the file COPYING included with the source code of this program.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/klondike.xml0000644000373100047300000001133712307311655024011 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Klondike Written by Jonathan Blandford Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Two redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Four piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Seven piles. Deal card face up in first pile. Place one card face down on all other piles. Place one card face up on next pile followed by one card face down on all covered piles. Repeat until there are seven cards in last pile. Tableau can be built down in alternating colors. Groups of cards can be moved. Empty piles can only be filled by Kings or group of cards starting with a King. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Groups of cards can be moved. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with a King or a group of cards with a King on the bottom. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. When Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. You can go through the deck three times. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Double clicking on a foundation card will move all the cards that can be moved to the foundation to the foundation. This is useful for cleaning up at the end of the game. Opcions There are three possible ways to play. The difference between them is in how the cards are dealt from the stock. Three card deals Cards are dealt from the stock three at a time. There is no limit to how many times you can redeal the stock. Single card deals Cards are dealt from the stock one at a time. However you can only turn the stock over and redeal twice. No redeals Cards are dealt one at a time from the stock. There is no redeal. Play this way if you want a challenge (and some frustration). Unlimited redeals Cards are dealt one at a time from the stock. There is no limit to how many times you can redeal the stock. Most likely you will consider one of the first two methods traditional - depending on where you live and who taught you. The no redeals option is the one normally found in older sets of rules, but the game is rarely played that way. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Don't give up the ship! Try brute force methods when the game seems over. Sometimes a combination of using cards already in the Foundation and rearranging sequences will free up some needed cards. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/gaps.xml0000644000373100047300000000466212307311655023146 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Gaps Written by Zach Keene Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock All cards are dealt into four rows of 13 cards each; the aces are then discarded to leave four gaps. Two redeals are allowed. Goal To place all cards in sequence from 2 to king, in suit. Règlas Gaps in the leftmost column may be filled by moving a 2 of any suit there. A gap to the right of any non-King card may be filled by placing the card with the same suit but one rank higher into the gap. Gaps following Kings or other gaps may not be filled. Once a card is placed in a sequence starting with a 2 in the leftmost slot, it can no longer be moved. If no moves are possible (i.e., all gaps follow Kings), double-clicking any card will cause a redeal. Any cards not in sequence will be removed, shuffled, and redealt. Only two redeals are allowed. Opcions Randomly Placed Gaps on Redeal: Check this to have randomly placed gaps after a redeal. If unchecked, the gaps will always be placed directly to the right of any cards already in sequence after redealing. Scoring Each card placed in sequence, starting with a two in the leftmost slot, is worth one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Put off making any move that will add a gap after a king for as long as possible. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/aunt_mary.xml0000644000373100047300000000621012307311655024202 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Tanta Maria Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Two redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundations Four piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Six piles, deal card face up in first pile. Place one card face down on all other piles. Place one card face up on the first two piles then one card face down on all covered piles. Place three cards face up and the rest face down and so on. Repeat gradually revealing more cards each time until there are six rows with six cards. Tableau can be built down in alternating colors. Builds of cards can be moved. Empty piles can only be filled by Kings or group of cards starting with a King. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Builds of cards can be moved. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with a King or a group of cards with a King on the bottom. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. When Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. You can go through the deck three times. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Aunt Mary is extremely difficult and rarely solvable. The real challenge is not finishing but seeing how far you can get. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/isabel.xml0000644000373100047300000000321412307311656023444 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Isabel Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Tableau Thirteen piles. Deal three cards face down and one card face up on every pile. Goal Remove all cards. Règlas Remove cards in pairs of equal rank. Every time a card is removed, the card underneath is flipped face up and becomes playable. Empty slots are not filled. Scoring Each pair of cards removed scores two points. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Each pile starts with four cards. The trick is to remember how many cards each slot has left at any given time so that you can try to remove cards evenly. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/poker.xml0000644000373100047300000000716412307311656023335 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Poker Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. Waste Next to Stock. The Waste can only hold one card. Tableau Five by five grid. Each slot can only hold one card. Goal Score as many points as possible using poker hands. There are twelve hands in the board -- 5 rows, 5 columns, and 2 diagonals. Scoring 75 points or higher is considered a win. Règlas Click on the Stock to flip over cards one at a time. The card must be placed somewhere on to the Tableau before the next card can be flipped. Once placed, a card cannot be moved. Opcions Shuffle mode: If selected, you can move the cards after they have been placed. You need at least 120 points to win this way. Scoring Poker hands are scored using the British point system, which is as follows Hand Descripcion Marca Straight flush Cards are all in sequence and are the same suit 30 Four of a kind Contains four cards have the same rank 16 Straight Cards are all in sequence 12 Full House Three of one rank and two of another 10 Three of a kind Contains three cards have the same rank 6 Flush All five cards are the same suit 5 Two pair Contains two sets of two cards of the same rank 3 One pair Contains two cards of the same rank 1 Maximum possible score: 276 Strategy Remember you are going to see almost half the deck and plan accordingly. Trying to bluff the computer is not recommended. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/scorpion.xml0000644000373100047300000000436412307311655024047 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Scorpion Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The last three cards are placed here after the deal. Tableau Seven piles to the right of Stock. * Deal one cards face down on each of the first four rows. Deal one card face up on the last three rows. Repeat from * two more times, dealing a total of three rows. Deal one card face up on each pile for four more rows. Goal Create four piles of thirteen cards each, each pile consisting of one suit and in rank order. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down by suit. Groups of cards can be moved regardless of sequence. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with a King or a group of cards with a King on the bottom. At any point, clicking on the Stock will deal the last three cards, one each on the first three piles. Scoring For every sequence in suit, points given is (length of sequence - 1). Each time a sequence of thirteen is created and is in its own slot, four extra points are awarded. Reaching a card that was face down gives three points. Maximum possible score: 100 Strategy Unknotting knots is not often easy. Avoid tangling yourself up with no way out. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/athena.xml0000644000373100047300000000706012307311655023447 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Atenà Written by Alan Horkan, based on work by Jonathan Blandford Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Two redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundations Four piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Seven piles. Four rows, the first row is face down, the second row is face up, the third row is face down, and the fourth and final row is face up. Essentially Athena is the same as Klondike only the opening layout is different. Tableau can be built down in alternating colors. Builds of cards can be moved. Empty piles can only be filled by Kings or group of cards starting with a King. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Builds of cards can be moved. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with a King or a group of cards with a King on the bottom. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. When Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. You can go through the deck three times. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Don't give up the ship! Try brute force methods when the game seems over. Sometimes a combination of using cards already in the Foundation and rearranging sequences will free up some needed cards. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/doublets.xml0000644000373100047300000000602412307311656024030 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Doublets Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Two redeals. Waste Directly to the right of Stock. To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Reserve Seven piles, forming an arch shape (upside down U) to the right. Deal one card face up on each pile. During this deal, if a King is dealt, remove the King and place it on the bottom of the deck. Deal another card into this pile. Each Reserve pile can only hold one card. When a Reserve pile is empty, it is automatically filled by the Waste, or, if the Waste is empty, from the Stock. Once original deal is over, when a King is placed in a pile of the Reserve, this pile is frozen as Kings cannot be moved. Foundation One pile, the center pile on the bottom row of the Reserve slots. To be built on from original card by doubling, regardless of suit or color. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation pile. Règlas Cards can be put in the Foundation pile if they are twice the value of the card currently on top of the Foundation. Jacks and Queens are eleven and twelve, respectively. If the doubled number exceeds thirteen, subtract thirteen to find next needed card. The series goes: A, 2, 4, 8, 3, 6, Q, J, 9, 5, 10, 7, repeat... Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste by one. When the Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. You can go through the deck three times. Scoring Each card in the Foundation pile scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Without a King, you can't have regicide. Avoid them. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/giant.xml0000644000373100047300000000656012307311655023315 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Giant Written by Ed Sirett Configuracion Type of Deck Double Deck Stock Top left pile. All cards are placed here after dealing on the Tableau. Cards are dealt a row at a time onto the tableau piles. No redeals. Foundation Eight piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Eight piles. Deal one card face up to all eight piles. Reserve To the right of the Tableau. Initially empty. May contain any single card. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating-colors. Cards are moved singly or in groups. An empty slot in the Tableau can be filled with any card. There is an option to restrict the movement to only cards of the same suit. See below. Cards are dealt from the Stock to the Tableau in complete rows. The reserve may be empty or occupied as you wish. Foundations are built up from suit from Ace to King. Top cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Double clicking on a Foundation will automatically move as many cards as possible to the Foundations. Opcions There are two ways to play. The difference between them is in how the cards may be built in the tableau. Same suit Cards must be of the same suit to be moved as a group and must be placed on a card of the same suit. Alternating colors To be moved as a gorup cards must be in a sequence of alternaing colors. The top card must be placed on a card of the opposite color. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 104 Strategy Avoid leaving small cards buried in the tableau. Use the Reserve wisely. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/spiderette.xml0000644000373100047300000000476512307311655024370 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Spiderette Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. Deals a card to each Tableau pile when clicked. Foundation Four piles top right. Tableau Seven piles on the bottom. Deal one card face down on all seven piles, then one on the last six piles, followed by one on the last five piles. Continue in this manner until you have seven cards in the last pile. Flip up the top card on every pile. Goal Create four piles of thirteen cards each built down in suit and sequence. Règlas Cards in Tableau can be built down regardless of suit. Builds of cards in sequence and in the same suit can by moved as a unit. Empty Tableau piles can be filled with any card or build of cards. Each Tableau pile must be filled before any deal. Clicking on the Stock will deal a card on to every Tableau pile except for the last deal which places one card on each of the first three piles. A build of all thirteen cards in a suit may be moved on to a Foundation pile. Cards in the Foundation are no longer in play. Scoring Every pair of cards in suit and sequence scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Try to keep a Tableau pile empty whenever possible to create a swap space for moving around cards. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/terrace.xml0000644000373100047300000001457312307311656023644 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Terrace Written by David Rogers Configuracion Type of Deck Double Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Reserve and on to the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Stock cannot be turned. Waste To be taken from the Stock. Top card available for play. Reserve Eleven cards dealt face up in a pile. All cards are visible but only top card is in play. Foundation Eight piles in the middle. To be built up in sequence by alternating colours from the base card. Tableau Nine cards dealt face up from the deck once based card is selected. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down in sequence by alternating colours building round the corner. Groups of cards can't be moved. An empty pile in the Tableau must be filled by the top card in Waste or the next card from the Stock. Top cards can be moved to the Foundation or other Tableau piles. Foundations are built up in sequence by alternating colours from the base card. Empty Foundations must be filled with the base card that is selected by the user from four random cards as the first move. Cards in Foundations are out of play. Top card of the Reserve is in play and can only be moved to Foundations. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually as many times as you like unless there is a space in the tableau. If there is a space in the tableau then only one card may be flipped from the stock to the waste until the tableau is filled or the top card of the waste is moved to the foundation or tableau. While the stock is locked you can still move cards around on the tableau, from the reserve and to the foundation. If the Waste is empty a card from the Stock is automatically dealt. Top card in Waste is in play. Stock cannot be turned. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Opcions There are seven ways to play. The difference between them is in number of Reserve cards, Tableau piles or choice of Base Card. Terrace Reserve of 11 cards, 9 Tableau piles. Foundations are built up in sequence by alternating colours from the base card. User selection of the base card from a choice of four at the start of the game and one card is dealt to each Tableau pile. Stock cannot be turned. General Patience Reserve of 13 cards, 9 Tableau piles. Foundations are built up in sequence by suit from the base card. User selection of the base card from a choice of four at the start of the game and one card is dealt to each Tableau pile. Stock can be turned once but the game is lost if you cannot play each new card after its turned. Falling Stars Reserve of 11 cards, 9 Tableau piles. Foundations are built up in sequence by alternating colours from the base card. At the start of the game a base card is selected automatically and one card is dealt to each Tableau pile. Stock cannot be turned. Signora Reserve of 11 cards, 9 Tableau piles. Foundations are built up in sequence by alternating colours from the base card. At the start of the game a base card is selected automatically and one card is dealt to each Tableau pile. Spaces in the Tableau are automatically filled from the Waste or Stock if the Waste is empty. Stock cannot be turned. Redheads Reserve of 21 cards, 8 Tableau piles. Foundations are built up in sequence by alternating colours from the base card. At the start of the game a base card is selected automatically and one card is dealt to each Tableau pile. Spaces in the Tableau are automatically filled from the Reserve or any card if the Reserve is empty. Stock cannot be turned. Blondes and Brunettes Reserve of 10 cards, 8 Tableau piles. Foundations are built up in sequence by alternating colours from the base card. At the start of the game a base card is selected automatically and one card is dealt to each Tableau pile. Stock cannot be turned. Wood Reserve of 10 cards, 9 Tableau piles. Foundations are built up in sequence by alternating colours from the base card. At the start of the game a base card is selected automatically and one card is dealt to each Tableau pile. Stock cannot be turned. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Strategy When the game starts examine the Reserve carefully before choosing your base card, avoid base cards that have several buried in the Reserve. Watch for reversed sequences in the Stock, Reserve a Foundation to remove each reversed sequence. Try to start Tableau piles from the last card needed to complete a Foundation. Remember that you can continue to flip cards from the stock while it is locked without filling the tableau by using the top card of the waste. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/gold_mine.xml0000644000373100047300000000533212307311656024145 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Gold Mine Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau. Cards are turned over three at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundations Four piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Seven piles, all empty to start. Gold Mine is a variation of Klondike. Tableau can be built down in alternating colors. Groups of cards can be moved. Empty piles can be filled with any card. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Groups of cards can be moved. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with any card. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste three at a time. Top card in Waste is in play. When Stock is empty, game over. Only one chance to get it right and establish your gold mine. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Be careful how you fill the empty foundation piles. With skill it is possible to win Gold Mine most of the time. If at first you do not succeed restart and try again. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/definitions.xml0000644000373100047300000001657712307311656024540 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Glossari Author's note: These definitions are meant as a guideline only. See individual game rules as any game has the right to redefine or modify the rules to make it fun. Base card The first card dealt into a foundation pile. Other foundations usually have to start with a card of this rank. See: Foundation Build by alternate color Building by placing a card on to another card of the opposite color is permitted. Example: Placing a Diamond on a Spade is good, but placing a Diamond on a Heart is not. Build by any suit but own Building by placing a card on to another card of any suit but the suit of the original card is permitted. Example: Placing a Diamond on a Heart is good, but placing a Heart on a Heart is not. Build by color Building by placing a card on to another card of the same color is permitted. Example: Placing a Diamond on a Heart is good, but Placing a Diamond on a Club is not. Build regardless of suit It's all good. Build by suit Building by placing a card on to another card of the same suit is permitted. Example: Placing a Spade on a Spade is good, but placing a Spade on a Club is not. Build down Building by placing a card of a lower rank on to a card of a higher rank is permitted. Usually implies a difference of only one ranking between the two cards. Example: Placing a 10 on a Jack is good, but placing a 10 on a 9 is not. Build down by * Building by placing a card of a lower rank on to a card of a higher rank by * is permitted. Example: If * is 2, placing a 10 on a Queen is good, but placing a 10 on a Jack is not. Build up Building by placing a card of a higher rank on to a card of a lower rank is permitted. Usually implies a difference of only one ranking between the two cards. Example: Placing a Queen on a Jack is good, but placing a Queen on a King is not. Build up by * Building by placing a card of a higher rank on to a card of a lower rank by * is permitted. Example: If * is 2, placing a 10 on an 8 is good, but placing a 10 on a 9 is not. Build up or down Building by placing a card on to a card of one higher or one lower rank is permitted. Example: Placing a Jack on a Queen or a 10 is good, but placing a 10 on a Queen is not. Building The ability to place a card (or group of cards) on another card. In regards to rank, you can build up, build down, or build up/down by *. In regards to suit/color, you can build by suit, build by color, build by alternate color, build by any suit but own, or build regardless of suit. Note that all games that build will follow two of these rules, one from each list. Deck The set of cards used. Most games use a Standard deck, but games that use a Double deck, a Joker deck, or a Stripped deck are not uncommon. Double deck A deck of cards consisting of two Standard decks making a total of 104 cards. Foundation If a game has a foundation, the game is usually won by placing all the cards in the foundation pile(s). Joker deck A deck of cards consisting of a Standard deck and two jokers making a total of 54 cards. Pile A designated area where cards can exist. Rank The value of the card. Numbered cards usually have the rank of the associated number. Aces can either be high or low. If high, aces are ranked 14. If low, aces are ranked as 1. J, Q, and K are usually ranked 11, 12, and 13 respectively. However, some games may rank these cards as 10. In such a case, a high ace might be ranked as 11. Reserve Cards in the reserve are usually available to play anywhere. Usually cannot be built on. Slot See Pile. Standard deck A 52 card poker deck. There are four suits of thirteen cards each. Each suit contains an Ace, 2 through 10, Jack, Queen, and King. These suits are usually Clubs, Spades, Hearts and Diamonds. These suits can be grouped into two colors, usually black and red. The Clubs and the Spaces are black while the Hearts and the Diamonds are red. AisleRiot allows the possibility of using different decks. In this case, the new colors and/or suits are substituted into this paradigm. Stock The remainder of the deck after all the original cards have been dealt and are usually kept faced down. Suit Four different kinds in a Standard deck. Usually Clubs, Spades, Hearts, and Diamonds. Tableau The playing field, where the main action occurs. Usually allows building. Waste A stack of cards face up, usually next to the Stock. Top card usually in play. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/thumb_and_pouch.xml0000644000373100047300000000571212307311655025350 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Thumb and Pouch Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Two redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Four piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Seven piles. Deal card face up in first pile. Place one card face down on all other piles. Place one card face up on next pile followed by one card face down on all covered piles. Repeat until there are seven cards in last pile. Tableau can be built down in any suit but own. Groups of cards can be moved. Empty piles can be filled by any legal sequence of cards. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down by any suit but own. Groups of cards can be moved. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with a any legal sequence of cards. Cards are flipped from the stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. When Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. You can go through the deck three times. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Brute force may not always work, but in this case it probably will. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/kansas.xml0000644000373100047300000000636512307311656023477 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Kansas Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Four piles on top right. Deal one card on first Foundation pile to start. Other Foundation piles are to be started with the other three cards with the same rank as this base card. All four piles are to be built up, with the ranks continuous. Reserve Pile under Stock. Deal twelve cards here to begin. Top card available for play on to Tableau or Foundation piles. Tableau Three piles bottom right. Deal one card on each pile to start. Piles can be built down regardless of suit. Spaces are automatically filled from Reserve. Once Reserve is empty, Tableau spaces can be filled from the Waste at your leisure. Goal Move all cards on to Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down regardless of suit. Groups of cards can be moved. An empty slot in the Tableau is filled automatically from the Reserve. If the Reserve is empty, an empty slot can be filled by the top card of the Waste at your leisure. Cards can be flipped singly from the Stock to the Waste. Top card is available for play. There is no redeal. Foundations are built up in suit from the base card (first card dealt to first Foundation). New Foundations are started when a card of the same rank as this base card is placed on an empty Foundation pile. Aces are built on Kings, and twos on Aces. Cards in Foundations are no longer in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy You can't go digging through junkyards. Once a card is buried in the waste, it is hard to get back. Try and move as many cards from the Waste to the Tableau as possible. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/spider_three_decks.xml0000644000373100047300000000523212307311656026035 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Spider Three Decks written by Jonathan Blandford, Daniel Werner Configuracion Type of Deck Triple Deck Stock Top left pile. Deck placed here after dealing onto Tableau. Clicking deals one card face up to every pile. Foundation Top twelve piles. Not part of "official rules". Tableau Twelve piles. The first six piles get dealt 4 cards down and one card up while rest of the piles get dealt 3 cards down and one card up. Cards can be built down regardless of suit. Sequences of cards in the same suit can be moved as a unit. Empty piles can be filled with any card or movable unit. Goal To have twelve sequences of cards (three for each suit) going down from King down to Ace in the foundation. If you want an extremely difficult challenge, you can also win by forming the same twelve sequences in the tableau. This is harder because there are fewer empty piles available. In fact, it is nearly impossible. Règlas Build down regardless of suit. Sequences of cards in the same suit can be moved as a unit. Empty piles can be filled with any card or legal sequence. Clicking on the Stock pile at any time deals a card face up to every pile. Unlike in other Spider variants, empty piles are allowed at redeals. A sequence of thirteen cards can be moved to a foundation pile. Once there, these cards are no longer in play. Scoring For every sequence in suit, points given is (length of sequence - 1). Maximum possible score: 144 Strategy If at first you don't succeed, don't become addicted. Build in suit whenever possible, but expose as many cards as you can. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/bakers_dozen.xml0000644000373100047300000000420312307311655024651 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Bakers Dozen Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles at top. To be built in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Thirteen piles. Four cards are dealt face up on each pile. Kings are moved to the bottom of their respective piles. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas The top card on each Tableau can be moved to another Tableau pile if it has a value of one lower than the top card on the second pile. Suit is not relevant. Empty Tableau piles cannot be filled. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card in the Tableau will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card moved to the Foundation scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Be careful not to bury low cards. Try to keep Tableau piles from emptying. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/streets_and_alleys.xml0000644000373100047300000000411612307311655026072 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Streets and Alleys Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles in the middle column. To be built from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Eight slots (four to the left and four to the right of Foundations.) Deal all cards face up and extended on to these eight piles so that there are seven cards in each pile on the left flank and six cards in each pile on the right flank and all cards are showing. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down regardless of suit. Only one card can be moved at a time. Empty piles can be filled with any single card. Foundations are built up in suit. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Build evenly on to Foundations if possible. Try and get an empty Tableau slot. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/peek.xml0000644000373100047300000000511112307311655023126 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Peek Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Reserves Four spread piles on left. Deal four cards face up in each Reserve pile. No building allowed. Foundation Four piles on right. Deal one card on to first Foundation. Stock Place all remaining cards here. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Two redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Any card of the suit in the first Foundation can be played on to this Foundation pile at any time. Each ensuing Foundation can only be started with a card of the same rank as this first card. Once started, these latter foundations can be built on in suit as long as a card of the same rank already exists in the Foundation directly above it. Play cards from Reserves whenever possible following these rules. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. When Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. You can go through the deck three times. Opcions Three card deals: Deal three cards at a time from Stock to Waste and enable unlimited redeals. Scoring One point for every card placed on Foundation. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy The Reserves are open for you to see. Choose your suit order wisely. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/union_square.xml0000644000373100047300000000523212307311656024717 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Union Square Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Double Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Tableau Deal face up a four by four grid for the Tableau, making sixteen piles. Top card of each pile available for play. Foundation Four piles on the right. Foundation piles are built by suit from Ace to King, then King back to Ace. Goal Move all cards to Foundations. Règlas Cards in Tableau can be built either up or down in suit. However, each pile must follow only one of these rules. For example, if a Tableau pile has a three of clubs over a two of clubs, one can only play a four of clubs on this pile. Any available card can be played on to an empty Tableau pile. Foundation piles are to be built in suit from Ace to King, followed by another King, then back down to Ace, giving 26 cards per pile when game is won. Cards in Foundation piles are no longer in play. Cards can be flipped singly from the Stock to the Waste. Top card of Waste is available for play. There is no redeal. Scoring Each card moved to Foundations scores one point. Maximum possible score: 104 Strategy A string of beads can be added to from both ends, and so should your piles. Make good use of any empty slots to append cards. With a little perseverance, this game can be a lot of fun! usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/beleaguered_castle.xml0000644000373100047300000000415712307311656026013 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Beleaguered Castle Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles in the middle column. Four aces are placed here, one in each pile, before the shuffle. To be built from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Eight slots (four to the left and four to the right of Foundations.) Deal all cards face up and extended on to these eight piles so that there are six cards in each pile and all cards are showing. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down regardless of suit. Only one card can be moved at a time. Empty piles can be filled with any single card. Foundations are built up in suit. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles other than the original Aces scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Build evenly on to Foundations if possible. Try and get an empty slot. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/bakers_game.xml0000644000373100047300000000512212307311656024445 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Bakers Game Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles top right. Built from Ace to King in suit. Reserves Four piles at top left. Each reserve can only hold one card. Tableau Eight piles underneath the Foundation and Reserves. The cards are dealt face up on to the Tableau, with seven cards each in the first four slots and six cards each in the last four slots. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas The Tableau is built down by suit. Only the top card or build of cards can be moved. A build of cards can only be moved if the number of cards in the build is equal or less than one more than the number of Reserve slots free. Empty spaces in the Tableau can only be filled with a King or a build starting with a King. Foundations are built up by suit from Ace to King. Although cards in the Foundations are technically still in play, there really is no need as playing these cards are not in any way helpful. Any top card in the Tableau can be placed in an empty Reserve slot. These cards are available for play back into the Tableau or on to a Foundation pile. Scoring Each card placed on to the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Move any card you can on to the Foundations as soon as possible. Leaving them around can only hinder your movement. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/maze.xml0000644000373100047300000000540012307311655023137 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Maze Written by Matthew Wilcox Configuracion Type of Deck 48 cards: Standard Deck without the kings Tableau Fifty-four spaces in six rows of nine each. Deal cards into spaces one to eight. Leave space nine blank. Deal cards into spaces ten to seventeen. Leave space eighteen blank. Deal the remaining cards similarly. Then remove all the kings (which play no further part in the game), so that six empty spaces remain in total. Any card can be moved into a space to the left of another card of the same suit and face value one higher. Any card can be moved into a space to the right of another card of the same suit and face value one lower. An ace may be moved to the right of a queen or in the top left space. A queen may be moved to the left of an ace or in the bottom right space. Goal Put each suit of cards into ascending order, with an ace in the top left corner, to create a run of cards: Ace to Queen of one suit, Ace to Queen of another, Ace to Queen of the third, Ace to Queen of the fourth. Règlas Cards are moved singly. Any card can be moved into a space to the left of another card of face value one higher in the same suit. Any card can be moved into a space to the right of another card of face value one lower in the same suit. An ace may be moved to the right of a queen or in the top left space. A queen may be moved to the left of an ace or in the bottom right space. Scoring Each card placed next to another card of the same suit in the correct order scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Multiple adjacent spaces enable you to generate long sequences of cards. Beware of getting trapped into a situation where you move one card endlessly between two points. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/quatorze.xml0000644000373100047300000000464412307311656024067 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Quatorze Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Empty spaces in the Tableau are immediately filled in with cards from the Stock. Tableau Five-by-five grid, each capable of holding one card. One card dealt to each space at the beginning of the game. Empty spaces are filled in from the Stock. Once Stock is exhausted, spaces are filled by moving cards from the right to the left, from the leftmost card of the row below to the the rightmost space, leaving all empty spaces at the end. Goal Remove all cards. Règlas Cards can be removed in pairs if they add up to fourteen (with Jacks being 11, Queens 12, and Kings 13) and are in the same row or column. Empty slots are automatically filled from the Stock. Once the Stock is exhausted, cards to the right of empty piles are automatically moved over to fill the space, with empty piles in the right column filled in by the cards of the leftmost column in the row below. Scoring Each pair of cards removed scores two points. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Oftentimes in the middle of this game, there is only one move. Make it. Once the Stock is exhausted, there is much more movement in the Tableau. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/zebra.xml0000644000373100047300000000572012307311656023314 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Zebra Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Double Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. One redeal. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Eight piles on top right. Place the eight Aces on to these piles to begin the Foundations. The Foundations are to be built up in alternate color up to Kings. Cards in Foundations are no longer in play. Tableau Eight piles below Foundations. Deal a card to each Tableau pile to start. Tableau piles are to be built down by alternate color. Only the top card of each pile is available for play. Empty spaces are immediately filled from the Waste, or if the Waste is empty, from the Stock. Goal Move all cards on to Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in Tableau are built down by alternate color. Only the top card of each pile is in play. However, to facilitate play, a whole pile can be moved to an appropriate Foundation with one drag. Double clicking on a pile will move the top card to an appropriate Foundation pile if possible. Spaces in Tableau are automatically filled from the Waste, or if Waste is empty, from the Stock. Stock is dealt on to Waste singly. Top card of Waste is available for play. There is one redeal. Foundations are built up by alternate color from Aces to Kings. Cards in Foundation piles are no longer in play. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 96 Strategy There are very few second chances in the real world, so use them when you find them. Chances are you will need to use the second deal to win this game. Remember where the key cards are and you'll be glad you did. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/easthaven.xml0000644000373100047300000000477412307311655024176 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Easthaven Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. Deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau. Foundation Four piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Tableau Seven piles on the bottom. Deal two cards face down and one card face up for every pile. Goal Remove all cards. Règlas The Tableau is built down by alternate color. Builds of cards in sequence and alternating color can be moved as a unit. Empty Tableau piles can be filled by Kings or builds starting with a King. Any empty Tableau slots must be filled if possible before dealing more cards. Clicking on the Stock deals one card face up on to each Tableau pile. The last deal places one card face up on the first three piles. There are no redeals. The Foundation is built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in the Foundation are no longer in play. Scoring Each card placed on to a Foundation scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Move cards up to the Foundation when you can because the next deal may block it. However since cards in the Foundation are no longer in play, you may get stuck later needing that card. Hopefully this conundrum will be the most difficult one facing you today. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/backbone.xml0000644000373100047300000000615312307311655023755 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Backbone Written by Vincent Povirk Configuracion Type of Deck Double Deck Stock Single pile below the foundations on the left. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau and Reserve. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. One redeal. Waste Single pile to the right of the Stock. To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Eight piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Reserve Two stacks of 9 cards each, with a single above both stacks. Cards that are not obscured are available for play to anywhere except empty tableau spaces. Tableau Eight piles, four on each side of the reserve. A card is dealt to each tableau pile when the game starts. Build down in suit. Empty spaces can be filled with any card. Only one card can be moved at a time. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down by suit. Only one card can be moved at a time. Empty slots can be filled with any card except from the reserve. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. When Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. You can go through the deck twice. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in the Foundations are no longer in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 104 Strategy You can use empty spaces in the Tableau to move multiple cards. Be careful with Kings in the Reserve: the only way to remove them is by playing them to a Foundation on top of a Queen. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/forty_thieves.xml0000644000373100047300000000553212307311654025102 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Forty Thieves Written by Ed Sirett Configuracion Type of Deck Double Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are dealt singly to the waste, The top card of the waste is available for play. Foundation Eight piles top right. To be built in suit from Ace to King. Tableau Ten piles. Deal four rows face up to start. Tableau can be built down in suit. Cards are moved singly. Empty piles can be filled with any card. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in Tableau are built down in the same suit. Cards can only be moved singly. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with any card. As a short cut you can move more than one if there are enough empty spaces. Cards can also be moved in groups to the Foundation piles. Cards are played singly from the Stock to the waste pile, whose top card is available for play. There are no redeals. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Double clicking on a foundation will autoplay cards. Double clicking on a card in the Tableau or waste will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible, or to the tableau if possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation scores 5 points. When a Foundation pile is complete (from Ace to King), 60 more points are scored. Maximum possible score: 1000 Strategy Refrain from bringing cards to the tableau in order to obtain an empty space as soon as possible. Then balance the requirements to maintain empty spaces against the need to save low cards from being buried in the waste. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/valentine.xml0000644000373100047300000000521112307311656024171 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Valentine Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. All remaining cards are placed here after dealing. Waste Top right pile. Can only hold one card. Tableau Four piles. One card is dealt in each slot at the beginning of the game. Redealing from the stock moves all cards currently in the Tableau to the bottom of the Stock slot. Goal Have all the cards in the Tableau, each slot containing Ace to King of one suit. Avoid going crazy achieving this. Règlas If any two cards dealt on to the Tableau are the same suit and in sequence, place the lower card on to the higher. Aces are low, Kings are high and sequence does not wrap. Click on the Stock to fill in the empty slots that are made. When no plays can be made in the Tableau, click on the Stock to deal a card on to the Waste. If this card can be played on to any of the Tableau piles, do so. Repeat this process until there are no more moves in the Tableau or from the Waste. At this point, clicking on the Foundation again moves all the cards in the Tableau back to the bottom of the Stock. The card in the Waste is put in the first Tableau pile and the rest of the Tableau is filled with one card to each pile from the Stock. Scoring There is no scoring in this game. Strategy A great game for killing time, Valentine really has no strategy, unless the strategy is to play it instead of doing other, more important things, like going to bed. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/plait.xml0000644000373100047300000000523512307311654023321 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Plait Written by W. Borgert Configuracion Type of Deck Double Deck Stock Third row from the right side in the middle. Two redeals are allowed. Waste Fourth row from the right in the middle, directly left of the stock. Foundation Right eight piles. One card is already there at start. This is the base card. All fields have to be started with this card. Plait The group of cards in the middle of the table. Starts with 20 cards. Only the one top level card can be moved. Edges The four fields at the top and bottom, left and right of the plait. These are automatically refilled from the plait. Tableau The eight fields left and right of the plait, between the edge fields. Only one card per pile is possible. Goal Move all cards to Foundations. Règlas All eight Foundations have to be started with the same card value. At the beginning you can choose whether to build up or down. You can take cards from the plait in the middle of the tableau, from the eight free fields left and right of the plait, from the four edges around the plait, and from the waste. The game is lost if no available cards can be moved on to the Foundation piles and the Stock is empty. Scoring No scoring. You either win or lose. Strategy Pick the cards from the plait as soon as possible as they are hard to free. Then pick the cards from the tableau as it will give you empty slots to temporarily store some cards. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/scuffle.xml0000644000373100047300000000500212307311655023630 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Scuffle Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. All cards except the Aces are placed here at the start of play. Clicking on the Stock will deal one card to each of the four Reserve piles. Two redeals allowed. Foundation Four piles on top, to the right of Stock. Place an Ace on each Foundation to begin the game. The Foundation piles are to be built up regardless of suit. Reserves Four piles placed underneath Foundations. Each time Stock is clicked, one card will be placed on each Reserve pile. Top card is available for play. Reserve cards can only be moved on to Foundations. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Play begins by dealing four cards face up on to the Reserve. If possible, play cards on to the Foundation from the Reserve. Continue this process until no cards are left in stock and no more moves on to the Foundation can be made. Take all cards left over on the Reserve and reshuffle. Place these cards back to the stock for redealing. There are two redeals. Scoring Each card placed on to the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Try to keep in mind what is underneath the Reserve piles. When given a choice, it is this knowledge which should help you decide which card to play. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/fortunes.xml0000644000373100047300000000361012307311655024051 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Fortunes Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. Deals a card to each Tableau pile when clicked. Tableau Four piles on right. Groups of cards can be moved on to empty piles. Goal To remove all cards except the four Aces. Règlas Aces are high cards. When two cards of the same suit are available, the one with the lower rank can be removed. When an empty slot appears, it can be filled with an group of cards. Scoring Each card removed scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy There is no reason to have an empty slot when dealing another batch of cards. However, when you have an empty slot, try to keep it empty as long as possible, as this is a great way to get rid of buried cards. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/bear_river.xml0000644000373100047300000000643512307311655024334 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Bear River Written by Bruce and Joel Levin Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles at top. One card is dealt face up in the first Foundation pile. Tableau There are 18 Tableau piles arranged in three rows of six piles each. All cards are dealt face up and fanned, such that all cards are visible. The first five piles of each row start with three cards each. The sixth pile of each row starts with two cards each. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas One random card has already been dealt to a Foundation pile. The rank of that card becomes the Base Card. The other three cards with the same rank can be moved to an empty Foundation. Foundations are built up in ascending order, matching suit. Cards can "wrap-around" from Queen to King to Ace to Two. Cards on the Foundations may not be moved back onto Tableau piles. None of the Tableau piles can have more than three cards. The top card of each Tableau pile can be moved to any other Tableau pile if it matches suit and has a face value of one higher or one lower than the top card of the pile it is being moved to. Cards can "wrap-around" between King and Ace. There are two types of Tableau piles: "Standard" piles, and "Hole" piles. The first five piles of each row (the ones with three cards) are the Standard piles. An empty standard pile CANNOT have a new card placed on it. The last pile of each row (the ones with two cards) are the Hole piles. An empty Hole pile CAN have a new card placed on it. Scoring Each card moved to the Foundation scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Try to free up one or more Hole piles early. There is never a disadvantage in moving cards to the Foundations. Move as many as possible, as soon as possible. Cards that have a rank one lower than the Base Card can be very difficult to move. Be careful where you place them. Bear River can be won about one third of the time. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/agnes.xml0000644000373100047300000000536112307311656023307 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Anhès Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are dealt in batches of seven, one on every Tableau pile. Foundation Four piles top right. To be built in suit and sequence, wrapping from King to Ace when necessary. One card is dealt on to the first Foundation pile. The other Foundation piles must be started with cards of the same rank. Tableau Seven piles. Deal card face up in first pile. Place one card face down on all other piles. Place one card face up on next pile followed by one card face down on all the covered piles. Repeat until there are seven cards in last pile. Tableau can be built down in same colors. Groups of cards can be moved. Empty piles can only be filled by the next deal from the Stock. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down by same color. Groups of cards in sequence and same color can be moved as a unit. Each deal flips one card from the Stock to each pile of the Tableau. There are no redeals. Foundations are built up in suit in sequence, wrapping from King to Ace when necessary. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card in the Tableau will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in Foundation scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Try to build down in suit whenever possible. Try to score as many points as you can as this game is very hard to win. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/labyrinth.xml0000644000373100047300000000454412307311654024206 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Laberint Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Foundation Four piles top right. Aces are placed in their respective Foundation pile prior to shuffling the deck. Tableau One card is dealt face up in each Tableau pile at the start of the game. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Build any cards from the Tableau in suit and sequence on to the Foundation. Spaces are automatically filled from the Stock. Once the eight cards in the Tableau piles cannot be played, click on the Stock to deal a card to each pile. Empty slots in the Tableau are no longer filled automatically. Cards at the top and bottom of each Tableau pile is available for play on to the Foundation piles. There is no building on the Tableau. There is no redeal. Scoring Each card placed on to the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Get plenty of sleep the night before so that you are bright and alert when you play this game. Move any card you possibly can on to the Foundation piles. Have fun! usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/yield.xml0000644000373100047300000000462312307311655023317 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Rendement Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card and bottom card available for play. Tableau Deal cards face up in seven overlapping rows starting with seven cards on the first row, decreasing by one per row and staggering the piles as to achieve an inverted pyramid. Goal Remove all cards. Règlas All exposed cards in the pyramid are available for play. Kings can be removed singly. All other cards can be removed in pairs that add up to treize with Aces equal to 1, Jacks equal to 11, and Queens equal to 12. Cards can be flipped singly from the Stock to the Waste. Top and bottom cards are available for play either by themselves or with the available cards in the pyramid. The top card of the Waste can also be played with the second card on the Waste. There is no redeal. Scoring Each card removed scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Removing the bottom of the inverted pyramid is the hard part. Once that is achieved, it is sometimes better to remove cards from the Waste than the inverted pyramid, as there are more cards in play there. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/golf.xml0000644000373100047300000000377512307311656023150 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Golf Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Place all remaining cards here. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Tableau Seven piles. Deal five cards face up on every pile. Goal Move all cards to Waste. Règlas The Waste can be built up or down from the available cards on the Tableau. Only Deuces can be placed on Aces and nothing can be played on to a King. Cards are dealt singly from Stock to Waste. There are no redeals. Scoring Every card moved from Tableau to Waste scores one point. Maximum possible score: 35 Strategy Remember that nothing can be played on to a King. Try to generate sequences where many cards can be removed without a new card from Stock. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/glenwood.xml0000644000373100047300000000633112307311656024026 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Glenwood Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau and Reserves. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. One redeal. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Four piles top right. First Foundation pile is started by player selecting a card from the Reserves. Built up by suit, wrapping from King to Ace when necessary. Reserves Four piles of three cards each on the left hand side dealt face up. The top card in each Reserve is available for play. No cards can be put in empty Reserve piles. Tableau Four piles below Foundations. Deal one card face up on to each pile. Tableau can be built down in alternating color. Top card can be played on to Foundation. Whole piles can be played on to another Tableau. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas The first item of play is to select an available card for the first Foundation. Once selected, all other Foundations must also start with this value. Foundations are built up by suit, wrapping from King to Ace where necessary. Once a card is placed on a Foundation pile, it is out of play. Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Whole piles of cards can be moved on to another Tableau pile. Empty slots in the Tableau can be filled by any available card in the Reserves or, if all the Reserves are empty, from the Waste. Cards are flipped singly from Stock to Waste. There is one redeal. Scoring Each card placed on to the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Be careful when selecting your first Foundation pile. Try to get the cards out of the Reserves as early as possible. Sometimes keeping cards in play is more important than moving them to the Foundation. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/ten_across.xml0000644000373100047300000000506712307311655024354 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ten Across Written by James LewisMoss Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Temporary Spots Locations to place one card out of play. The spots begin the game filled. One version of the game does not allow you to put new cards into these spots once they are empty. Tableau Ten piles across the bottom. To deal place 10 cards across going from left to right with the first and last cards face up. Continuing you place ten cards across the piles from right to left (reversed) with the first two and last two cards placed face up. Continue this pattern (reversed and one more card each pass) until 50 cards have been placed. Place the last two cards in the temporary spots at the top. Goal Form four piles in the tableau all of the same suit running from King to Ace. Règlas Only a King may be moved to a blank tableau spot. Cards may be moved only onto other cards if the suit matches and the moved card is one less than the moved to. This includes moving a pile of cards of different suits as long as the top card of the moved pile matches the bottom card of the location moved to. Opcions Allow temporary spots use: If checked the temporary spots may be reused. Scoring You win or lose. There is no scoring. Strategy This game is hard to win (being very influenced by how the cards are placed to begin with). Don't forget you have the temporary spots. Try to clear them quickly because they are very useful when you get stuck. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/jumbo.xml0000644000373100047300000000537212307311656023330 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jumbo Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Double Deck Stock Top left pile. All cards are placed here after dealing on the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. One redeal. Waste Directly to the right of the Stock. Cards to be dealt from the Stock during play one at a time. Top card available for play. Foundation Eight piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Nine piles. Deal one card face down to all nine piles, then one card to first eight piles, followed by one card to first seven piles, etc. until there are nine cards in the first pile. Flip the last card dealt on each pile. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Groups of cards can be moved. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with a King or a group of cards with a King on the bottom. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. When Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. There is one redeal. Foundations are built up from suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 104 Strategy usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/diamond_mine.xml0000644000373100047300000000463612307311655024640 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Diamond Mine Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation One pile at top. Build in sequence for diamonds starting from any diamond of your choice. Tableau Thirteen piles. Deal three cards face down and one card face up on every pile. Goal Remove all diamonds to the foundation and have all the other cards in suit and sequence with Aces being low in the Tableau. Règlas Cards (other than diamonds) can be built down in sequence regardless of suit. Builds of cards can be moved as a unit. Empty slots can be filled by any card (except for diamonds) or build of cards. Diamonds cannot be moved except to be place on to the Foundation. The diamond Foundation must be built up in sequence but can start from any number you want. Scoring Each diamond placed on to the Foundation scores the face value of the card, with Ace as one point, Jacks as eleven points, Queens as twelve points, and Kings as thirteen points. Each Ace through King in sequence and in suit on the Tableau pile scores three points. Maximum possible score: 100 Strategy Mining for diamonds is hard work. Keep in mind that not all diamonds are worth the same. Don't forget to clean up after yourself and put the other suits in order. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000736112307311655023277 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/accordion.xml0000644000373100047300000000440012307311655024143 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Accordion Written by Ed Sirett Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Tableau Fifty-four spaces in five rows of nine and a last row of seven. Deal cards face up one per space. The spaces should be considered as one continuous line, the rows simply arrange the tableau so all of it can be seen at once. Thus the rightmost space of a row is to be considered to the left of the leftmost space of the row below. Goal To remove all cards except one. Règlas Cards are moved singly. Any card can be moved over another card of the same suit or rank that is in the space immediately to its left or three spaces to its left. The card that is covered is removed from play. All the cards (if any) in spaces to the right of the resulting gap are moved to the left one space so as to close the gap. Double-clicking causes the card to move three spaces, if possible, or failing that one space to the left. Scoring Each card removed scores 1 point. Maximum possible score: 51 Strategy This is a diffcult game. Try to find two or three cards of the same rank at or near the last row. Try not to remove any card of this rank. At the end you can move these cards onto each other to win. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/straight_up.xml0000644000373100047300000000544512307311656024546 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Straight Up Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Two redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Four piles on top right. Deal one two on each Foundation pile to start. To be built up in suit to Ace. Reserve Pile under Stock. Deal thirteen cards here to begin. Top card available for play on to Tableau or Foundation piles. Tableau Four piles bottom right. Deal one card on each pile to start. Piles can be built in suit. Spaces are automatically filled from Reserve. Once Reserve is empty, Tableau spaces can be filled from the Waste at your leisure. Goal Move all cards on to Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down in suit. Groups of cards can be moved. An empty slot in the Tableau is filled automatically from the Reserve. If the Reserve is empty, an empty slot can be filled by the top card of the Waste at your leisure. Cards can be flipped singly from the Stock to the Waste. Top card is available for play. There are two redeals Foundations are built up in suit from twos to aces. Cards in Foundations are no longer in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card moved to Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy No point lagging behind! Move cards to Foundation piles whenever possible. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/osmosis.xml0000644000373100047300000000544412307311655023707 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Osmosis Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Reserves Four spread piles on left. Deal three cards face down and one card face up in each Reserve pile. No building allowed. Foundation Four piles on right. Deal one card on to first Foundation. Stock Place all remaining cards here. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Two redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Any card of the suit in the first Foundation can be played on to this Foundation pile at any time. Each ensuing Foundation can only be started with a card of the same rank as this first card. Once started, these latter foundations can be built on in suit as long as a card of the same rank already exists in the Foundation directly above it. Play cards from Reserves whenever possible following these rules. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. When Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. You can go through the deck three times. Opcions Three card deals: Deal three cards at a time from Stock to Waste and enable unlimited redeals. Scoring One point for every card placed on Foundation. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy It's no coincidence that solitaire games are also known as "patience games". Do not automatically put first available card on the second (and third) foundation piles. Sometimes it is worth using a different suit so as to free up more cards in the Reserves. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/kings_audience.xml0000644000373100047300000000574312307311655025165 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 King's Audience Written by Zach Keene Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Reserves (Antechamber) The outer rectangle of sixteen cards. Cards in the reserve are available to play, and are replenished from the Waste (or the Stock if no cards are currently in the Waste.) Stock Left slot in the center row. Cards are dealt one at a time to the Waste. There is no redeal. Waste Slot to the right of the Stock. The top card of the Waste is available to play. "Thrones" Top four slots in the "audience chamber" (the area inside the surrounding sixteen cards.) Whenever a King and Queen of the same suit are available, they can be move to one of these slots. Foundations Bottom four slots in the audience chamber. Whenever a Jack and an Ace of the same suit are available, they can be moved to an empty Foundation slot, with the Jack on top. The foundation then may be built down in suit. Goal Move all cards to the foundation piles or thrones. Règlas Deal cards one at a time from Stock to Waste. Whenever a King and Queen of the same suit are available, they can be moved into a throne slot by either by dragging the King onto the Queen (or vice versa) or double clicking either card. Whenever a Jack and Ace of the same suit are available, they can be moved into a foundation slot in the same manner. Scoring Each card placed in the audience chamber receives one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy None; King's Audience is pretty much entirely based on luck. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/carpet.xml0000644000373100047300000000474112307311655023470 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Carpet Written by Vincent Povirk Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Four piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Aces are removed before dealing and placed on the foundations. Tableau The "Carpet". Four rows of five cards dealt face up. Cards on the tableau are available for play. There is no building. Empty spaces are automatically filled from the waste if possible or the stock. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards on the tableau are in play. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. There are no redeals. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card places in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Just put anything you can on the foundation. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/seahaven.xml0000644000373100047300000000545312307311656024006 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Seahaven Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles -- two top left, two top right. Built from Ace to King in suit. Reserves Four piles at top in the center. Each reserve can only hold one card. Two of the reserves are each dealt one card to start. Tableau Ten piles underneath the Foundation and Reserves. The other fifty cards are dealt face up here with five in each slot. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas The Tableau is built down by suit. Only the top card or build of cards can be moved. A build of cards can only be moved if the number of cards in the build is equal or less than one more than the number of Reserve slots free. Empty spaces in the Tableau can only be filled with a King or a build starting with a King. Foundations are built up by suit from Ace to King. Although cards in the Foundations are technically still in play, there really is no need as playing these cards are not in any way helpful. Any top card in the Tableau can be placed in an empty Reserve slot. These cards are available for play back into the Tableau or on to a Foundation pile. As a convenience, sequences of the same suit can be moved onto the matching Foundation pile rather than being moved individually. This is especially useful at the end of the game. Scoring Each card placed on to the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Move any card you can on to the Foundations as soon as possible. Leaving them around can only hinder your movement. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/eagle-wing.xml0000644000373100047300000000750712307311655024234 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Eagle Wing Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Two redeals. Waste Directly to the right of Stock. To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundations Four piles top right. One card is dealt in the first Fondation at the start of the game, this is the base card. Other Fondations must be started with a card of the same rank as the base card. To be built up in suit from the base card. Reserve Middle (and lowest) slot. Deal thirteen cards face down here. Flip card to fill any spaces in the Tableau. When only one card is left in the Reserve, it will flip up and can be played on Foundation or a Tableau pile. Tableau Eight slots (four to the left and four to the right of Reserve.) Deal one card face up per slot. Tableau can be built down by suit. Cards can be moved singly to other slots on the Tableau, or in a group on to the Foundation. Each Tableau slot can hold a maximum of three cards. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the tableau are built down by suit. Cards can only be moved singly to another Tableau pile. However, to ease monotony, groups of cards can be moved to Foundation. An empty slot in the Tableau is filled automatically from the Reserve. If the Reserve is empty, an empty slot can be filled by a card from the Waste or from another Tableau pile. The Reserve exists mainly to deal cards into empty slots of the Tableau. However, when there is only one card left in the Reserve, it will become visible and is in play. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste singly. When the Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. You can go through the deck three times. Foundations are built up in suit from the base card (first card dealt to first Foundation). New Foundations are started when a card of the same rank as the first card placed during the dealing period are placed on empty Foundation piles. Aces are placed on Kings, and twos on Aces. Cards in Foundations are not in play. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy A little planning goes a long way. Check before piling cards in a Tableau. Remember the three card in a slot rule. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/spider.xml0000644000373100047300000000777112307311655023506 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Aranha Written by Jonathan Blandford Configuracion Type of Deck Double Deck Stock Top left pile. Deck placed here after dealing onto Tableau. Clicking deals one card face up to every pile. Foundation Top eight piles. Only used to hold sequences of cards going down from King down to Ace once completed. Tableau Ten piles. Four piles (piles 1, 4, 7, and 10) get dealt 5 cards down and one card up while rest of the piles get dealt 4 cards down and one card up. Cards can be built down regardless of suit. Sequences of cards in the same suit can be moved as a unit. Empty piles can be filled with any card or movable unit. Goal To have eight sequences of cards going down from King down to Ace in the foundation. If you want an extremely difficult challenge, do not move completed sequences of cards to a foundation. You can also win by leaving the same eight sequences in the tableau. This is harder because there are fewer empty piles available. In fact, it is nearly impossible. Règlas Build down regardless of suit. Sequences of cards in the same suit can be moved as a unit. Empty piles can be filled with any card or legal sequence. Clicking on the Stock pile at any time deals a card face up to every pile. However, all piles must be non-empty. If an empty pile exists, an error message will appear. A sequence of cards going down from King down to Ace can be moved to a foundation pile. Once there, these cards are no longer in play. Opcions There are three possible types of deck. Each deck has 104 cards. One Suit The deck is an octuple deck of Spades only. This is the simplest of the spider decks and a good way to learn the basics. Two Suits The deck is a quadruple deck of Hearts and Spades only. There are four complete sequences of cards for each suit. This is not quite as diabolical as the standard four suit spider deck. Four Suits The deck is a standard double deck. There are two complete sequences of cards for each suit. This is the standard Spider deck. It is also the most difficult. Many traditional implementations of Spider do not use a foundation and simply remove completed sequences of cards. This has no impact upon game play. Scoring For every sequence in suit, points given is (length of sequence - 1). Maximum possible score: 96 Strategy If at first you don't succeed, don't become addicted. Build in suit whenever possible, but expose as many cards as you can. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/thirteen.xml0000644000373100047300000000452712307311655024036 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Thirteen Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. The top card is available for play. Tableau Deal face down seven overlapping rows starting with one card on the first row, increasing by one per row and staggering the piles as to achieve a pyramid. Flip bottom row. Goal Remove all cards. Règlas All exposed cards in the pyramid are available for play. Kings can be removed singly. All other cards can be removed in pairs that add up to thirteen with Aces equal to 1, Jacks equal to 11, and Queens equal to 12. Cards can be flipped singly from the Stock to the Waste. The top card is available for play either with the available cards in the pyramid or with the card below. There is no redeal. Scoring Each card removed scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Every pyramid needs a strong foundation. Get rid of the lower cards first, with an eye out to try to expose as many cards as possible. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/neighbor.xml0000644000373100047300000000372012307311654024002 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Vesin Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. Dealt to the Tableau in the manner described below. Tableau Five by five grid, each capable of holding one card. One card dealt to each space at the beginning of game. Empty spaces automatically filled by moving cards from the right to the left, from the leftmost card of the row below to the rightmost space, and from the Stock to all otherwise empty spaces. Goal Remove all cards. Règlas Click on Kings to remove them. All other cards can be removed in pairs that add up to thirteen as long as the two cards are touching horizontally, vertically, or diagonally. Opcions Pas cap Scoring Each card removed scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Remove cards higher up on the table first as this creates more movement within the grid. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/elevator.xml0000644000373100047300000000426312307311655024032 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Elevator Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Tableau Deal face down seven overlapping rows starting with one card on the first row, increasing by one per row and staggering the piles as to achieve a pyramid. Flip bottom row. Goal Move all cards to Waste. Règlas All exposed cards in the pyramid are available for play. Build on to the Waste from these available cards whenever possible by playing a card with a rank immediately above or immediately below the rank of the top card in the Waste. Aces are both above Kings and below Deuces. Cards can be flipped singly from the Stock to the Waste. There is no redeal. Scoring Each card removed from the pyramid scores one point. Maximum possible score: 28 Strategy Every pyramid needs a strong foundation. Get rid of the lower cards first, with an eye out to try to expose as many cards as possible. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/sir_tommy.xml0000644000373100047300000000463712307311655024240 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sir Tommy Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. All cards are placed here at beginning of play. Cards are dealt singly to Waste. Waste To the right of the Stock. Can only hold one card. Card must immediately be placed on either a Foundation pile or on to the Reserve pile of your choice. Foundation Four piles on top, to the right of Waste. To be built in sequence from Ace to King regardless of suit. Reserves Four piles placed underneath Foundations. Cards in Reserve can only be played on to Foundation piles. Goal Move all cards to the Foundations Règlas Build on to Foundations in sequence from Ace to King regardless of suit. Cards in Foundations are no longer in play. Cards are dealt singly in to the Waste from the Stock. However, as the Waste pile can only hold one card, this card must immediately be played on to a Foundation pile or on to any of the four Reserve piles. Cards in the Reserve piles cannot be rearranged. Scoring Each card moved to Foundations scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Try not to place cards of higher rank on to cards of lower rank in the Reserve. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/clock.xml0000644000373100047300000000553112307311654023302 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Relòtge Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Tableau Deal cards in a clock shape, for a total of twelve piles with four cards each. Stock Place last four cards in the Stock pile (middle of the Tableau) Flip over top card. Goal To reveal all the cards. Règlas Move the top card in the middle to the appropriate pile. The Tableau is in the shape of a clock, and so the numbered cards go where they would on an analog clock. Aces go where the ones go, and the Jacks and Queens go where the elevens and twelves go respectively. For all the people who have never had an analog watch/clock, this is the pattern: Clock Layout. Kings are kept in the middle pile. When a card is moved to a new pile (or made to stay in the same pile, as the case is with the King), the bottom card in the new pile is taken and placed on top of the middle pile face up. This new card is ready for play. To move a card to the appropriate pile, either drag the card over or double click on the appropriate receptor pile. Game is over when there are four kings in the middle. At this point, you've won if goal is achieved. Note that if a card in a pile is in the right place it is okay even if it is faced down. Scoring Each card in the appropriate pile of the clock (not counting Kings, as there are no Kings on real clocks) scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Find a way to automate this game. There are no decisions ever to be made. If you lose it's not your fault. (Contrariwise, if you win, it's just luck!) usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/eight_off.xml0000644000373100047300000000512712307311656024144 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Eight Off Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles on the left. Built from Ace to King in suit. Reserves Eight piles at top. Each reserve can only hold one card. The first four Reserve piles are each dealt one card at the beginning of the game. Tableau Eight piles underneath the Reserves. The cards are dealt face up on to the Tableau, with six cards in each of the slots. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas The Tableau is built down by suit. Only the top card or build of cards can be moved. A build of cards can only be moved if the number of cards in the build is equal or less than one more than the number of Reserve slots free. Empty spaces in the Tableau can only be filled with a King or a build starting with a King. Foundations are built up by suit from Ace to King. Although cards in the Foundations are technically still in play, there really is no need as playing these cards are not in any way helpful. Any top card in the Tableau can be placed in an empty Reserve slot. These cards are available for play back into the Tableau or on to a Foundation pile. Scoring Each card placed on to the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Move any card you can on to the Foundations as soon as possible. Leaving them around can only hinder your movement. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/fortress.xml0000644000373100047300000000406512307311655024060 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Fortress Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles in the middle. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundation piles are no longer in play. Tableau Five piles one each side of the Foundation. Deal five cards face up on to each of these piles and one more on the top two piles. The top card in any Tableau pile is available for play. Goal Move all cards to Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in Tableau piles can be built up or down in suit. Only the top card in every pile is available for play. Empty slots can be filled with any available card. The Foundations are built up from Ace to King in suit. Cards in Foundation piles are no longer in play. Scoring Each card in Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Safeguard any empty Tableau slots you may create. They are the key to a successful game. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/will_o_the_wisp.xml0000644000373100047300000000464512307311655025404 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Will o' the Wisp Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. When clicked, deal a card on to every Tableau pile except for the last deal which places one card on each of the first three piles. Foundation Four piles top right. Tableau Seven piles on the bottom. Deal two cards face down and one card face up on every pile. Goal Create four piles of thirteen cards each built down in suit and sequence. Règlas Tableau piles can be built down regardless of suit. Builds of cards in sequence and in the same suit can by moved as a unit. Empty Tableau piles can be filled with any card or build of cards. Each Tableau pile must be filled before any deal. Clicking on the Stock will deal a card on to every Tableau pile except for the last deal which places one card on each of the first three piles. A build of all thirteen cards in a suit may be moved on to a Foundation pile. Cards in the Foundation are no longer in play. Scoring Every pair of cards in suit and sequence scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Try to keep a Tableau pile empty whenever possible to create a swap space for moving around cards. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/hopscotch.xml0000644000373100047300000000557112307311655024206 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Hopscotch Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. All cards except the Ace to four of clubs are placed here at beginning of play. Cards are dealt singly to Waste. Waste Directly to the right of Stock. Can only hold one card at a time. Card must immediately be placed on either a Foundation pile or on to the Reserve pile of your choice. Foundation Four piles on top, to the right of Stock. Place an Ace on the first pile, a two on the second pile, a three on the third pile, and a four on the fourth pile. The first Foundation pile is built up by one, the second is built up by two, the third by three, and the fourth by four, all of which wrap around to Ace when it reaches past thirteen. cards in Foundations are no longer in play. Suits do not matter. Reserve Four piles placed underneath Foundations. Cards in Reserve can only be played on to Foundation piles. Cards moved from Waste can be placed on any of the Reserve piles. Goal Move all cards on to Foundations. Règlas Build on to Foundations by ones, twos, threes, and fours for piles one, two, three, and four respectively. Cards are dealt singly in to the Waste from the Stock. However, as the Waste pile can only hold one card, this card must immediately be played on to a Foundation pile or on to any of the four Reserve piles. Cards in the Reserve piles cannot be rearranged. Scoring Each card moved to Foundations scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy Hone your skills for this game. Luck will not get you very far here. Try not to cover cards you might need sooner. Consider saving a column just for kings (as they are the last card to be played on each Foundation). usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/auld_lang_syne.xml0000644000373100047300000000460612307311656025177 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Auld Lang Syne Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. All cards except the Aces are placed here at the start of play. Clicking on the Stock will deal one card to each of the four Reserve piles. Foundation Four piles on top, to the right of Stock. Place an Ace on each Foundation to begin the game. The Foundation piles are to be built up regardless of suit. Reserve Four piles placed underneath Foundations. Each time Stock is clicked, one card will be placed on each Reserve pile. Top card is available for play. Reserve cards can only be moved on to Foundations. Goal Move all cards on to Foundations. Règlas Play begins by dealing four cards to the Reserve. If possible, play cards on to the Foundation from the Reserve. Continue this process until no cards are left in stock and no more moves on to Foundation can be made. A similar game that is a bit easier is Scuffle. Scoring Each card removed scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Do you believe in Luck? Although this game takes more skill to play than Clock, the skill involved entails paying attention. A great game for brainless play. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/treize.xml0000644000373100047300000000444612307311656023517 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Treize Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card and bottom card available for play. Tableau Deal cards face up in seven overlapping rows starting with one card on the first row, increasing by one per row and staggering the piles as to achieve a pyramid. Goal Remove all cards. Règlas All exposed cards in the pyramid are available for play. Kings can be removed singly. All other cards can be removed in pairs that add up to treize with Aces equal to 1, Jacks equal to 11, and Queens equal to 12. Cards can be flipped singly from the Stock to the Waste. Top and bottom cards are available for play either by themselves or with the available cards in the pyramid. The top card of the Waste can also be played with the second card on the Waste. There is no redeal. Scoring Each card removed scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy This game is easier to win than Thirteen. This is because you can plan ahead and avoid blocks by strategic play. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/escalator.xml0000644000373100047300000000422112307311655024160 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Escalator Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals Waste To be taken from Stock. Tableau Deal face up seven overlapping rows starting with one card on the first row, increasing by one per row and staggering the piles as to achieve a pyramid. Goal Move all cards to Waste. Règlas All exposed cards in the pyramid are available for play. Build on to the Waste from these available cards whenever possible by playing a card with a rank immediately above or immediately below the rack of the top card in the Waste. Aces are both above Kings and below Deuces. Cards are flipped singly from the Stock to the Waste. There is no redeal. Scoring Each card removed from the Tableau scores one point. Maximum possible score: 28 Strategy Try to plan ahead so that you can make runs in the future. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/westhaven.xml0000644000373100047300000000447512307311655024222 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Westhaven Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Four piles on top row. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Tableau Ten piles of three cards each, with the last row of cards face up. Goal Move all cards to Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in Tableau are built down by alternate color. The top card or the complete face up portion of each pile is available for play. Empty piles can be filled with any available card or group of cards. Foundation piles are to be built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundation are no longer in play. Cards are flipped singly from Stock to Waste. Top card of Waste pile is always available for play. There are no redeals. Scoring Each card moved to Foundation scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Caution is for those who actually have money at stake. Live dangerously. Make any moves you can, as chance is on your side. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/cover.xml0000644000373100047300000000354312307311655023327 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Cover Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. All remaining cards are placed here after dealing. Tableau Four piles. One card is dealt in each slot at the beginning of the game. Empty slots are immediately filled from the Stock. Goal Empty the Stock. Règlas Any two cards in the Tableau can be removed if they belong to the same suit. Spaces are immediately filled by cards in the Stock. The game is over when each suit is represented by one card in the Tableau. Scoring Each pair removed from the game scores two points. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy A quick short game with not much thought involved, cover is best played with minimal thought and quick reflexes. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/odessa.xml0000644000373100047300000000452712307311656023473 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Odessa Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles on left. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Tableau Seven piles. Deal three rows face down followed by three rows face up. Then deal two more rows face up in the middle five piles. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down by suit. Groups of cards can be moved regardless of sequence. Groups of cards in sequence can be moved into an appropriate and receptive Foundation pile. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with a King or a group of cards with a King on the bottom. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are no longer in play. Opcions Pas cap Scoring When game is dealt, any sequence of cards going down in suit is awarded one point per card. Every move within the Tableau will award a point for every card in the newly created sequence. A point is also rewarded for every card placed on to the Foundation. Maximum possible score: 412 Strategy The more you can hold on to, the more you will have. Try to keep cards out of Foundations as long as possible. The larger the sequences, the more points are made. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/royal_east.xml0000644000373100047300000000540112307311656024347 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Royal East Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Four corner piles of three by three grid. Deal one card on to first Foundation pile. This card is now the base card. Build up in suit, playing Aces on Kings as necessary. Tableau Deal one card face up on each of the five Tableau piles. These piles are the ones forming a cross in the three by three grid. Goal Move all cards to Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in Tableau are built down regardless of suit. Kings can be placed on Aces. Cards can only be moved singly. Any available card can be played on an empty Tableau pile. Each Foundation pile must be started with a card the same rank as the base card. Foundation piles are to be built up in suit from base card, playing Aces on top of Kings if necessary. Cards in Foundation piles are no longer in play. Cards are flipped singly from Stock to Waste. Top card of Waste pile is always available for play. There are no redeals. Scoring Each card in Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Hidden treasures are wonderful things, but only if you know they are there. Keep track of what cards are in which piles as this information will probably come in handy. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/jamestown.xml0000644000373100047300000000317212307311655024216 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Jamestown Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. All cards are placed here at beginning of play. Tableau Nine piles in a 3x3 formation. Each Tableau pile is dealt one card face up. Goal Remove all cards. Règlas Remove pairs of cards with the same rank. Empty piles are automatically filled from the Stock. Scoring Removing each pair of cards scores two points. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Remove pairs of cards as fast as possible. That is the only challenge. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/bristol.xml0000644000373100047300000000511112307311656023661 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Bristol Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. There are no redeals. Reserve Three piles to the right of Stock. One card is dealt into each of the Reserves every time the Stock is clicked. Foundation Four piles on the top right. Foundations are built up in sequence regardless of suit. Tableau Deal face up eight piles of three cards each. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down regardless of suit. Cards can only be moved singly. An empty pile in the Tableau can not be filled. Cards are flipped from the Stock on to the three Reserve piles, one card each per deal. Top card of each Reserve pile is available for play. Empty Reserve piles cannot be filled except with the next deal from Stock. Foundation piles are built up regardless of suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundation are no longer in play. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Never look backwards. Cards that are locked in backwards order are to be dealt with as soon as possible. Move as many cards from the Reserve on to the Tableau as you can, for Kings are hard to move. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/triple_peaks.xml0000644000373100047300000000622712307311656024676 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Triple Peaks Written by Richard Hoelscher Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste All play is on the Waste pile. Cards faced down are not part of the current scoring run. Tableau Deal 18 cards face down in the form of three triangles, with three rows in each triangle, increasing with one card in the first row to three in the last. Connect the triangles by dealing another 10 cards face up in the bottom row. End cards of each row should overlap the end cards of the row above, and interior cards should overlap two adjacent cards of that row. Goal Remove all cards from the Tableau. Règlas Exposed cards in the Tableau are available for play. Build on the top card of Waste with cards ranked immediately above or below it from the Tableau, regardless of suit. Aces are ranked both above Kings and below Deuces. Tableau cards are made available when not covered by other cards. Cards can be flipped singly from Stock to the top of Waste. Opcions Multiplier Scoring: Points double for every card played in a run. A run of five cards will score 1, 2, 4, 16, and 32 points, for a total of 55 points. Bonuses are worth 25 points. No points are deducted for playing a card from the stock to the waste. Progressive Rounds: After all cards have been cleared from the tableu, a new round begins. The score from the last round carries over into the new round. Scoring The score for each card played is equal to the number of cards your have played since the last card flipped from the Stock to the Waste. The longer the run, the higher your score. 5 points are deducted when you flip a card from Stock to Waste. Each triangle peak cleared will give a 15 point bonus, and an additional 15 points are awarded when all the cards have been cleared from the Tableau. Maximum possible score for a single round: 466 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/king_albert.xml0000644000373100047300000000464412307311656024476 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 King Albert Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles on the top. Foundations are built up in both suit and sequence from Ace to King. Reserve Seven piles on the right. One card is dealt face up on each Reserve pile at the start. There is no building on the Reserves. Empty Reserve piles can not be filled. Tableau Nine piles of cards, with nine cards in the first pile, eight in the second, and so on to the one card in the last pile. These cards are dealt face down. The top card in every pile is then flipped up. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Empty Tableau slots can be filled by any card or build of cards. Cards in the Reserve can be played on to the Tableau or the Foundation. Empty Reserve piles cannot be filled. Foundation piles are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundation are still in play. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Remember that any card can be placed on an empty Tableau slot. Exposing new cards is the top priority in this game. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/lady_jane.xml0000644000373100047300000000677012307311655024144 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Lady Jane Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing. Cards are turned on to the Reserve one on each pile per deal. When there are only two cards left in Stock, they are dealt such that both cards are available for play. Foundation Four piles on top right. Deal one card on to first Foundation pile after dealing on to Tableau and Reserve. This card is now the base card. Built up by suit. Reserve Seven piles on the right. Top card of each pile is available for play on to either the Tableau or the Foundation. Empty spaces are not filled except by a deal from Stock. Tableau Seven piles below Stock and Foundation. Deal card face up in first pile. Place one card face down on all other piles. Place one card face up on next pile followed by one card face down on all covered piles. Repeat until there are seven cards in last pile. Tableau can be built down in alternating colors. Groups of cards can be moved. Empty piles can only be filled by the card whose rank is one lower than the base card or group of cards starting with a card of this rank. Goal Move all cards on to Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Groups of cards can be moved. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with a card whose rank is one lower than the base card or with a group of cards starting with a card with this rank. Cards are dealt from the Stock to the Reserve. Each deal places one card on each pile of the Reserve. The top card of each Reserve pile is always available for play on to either the Tableau or the Foundation. There is no building on the Reserve piles. Foundations are built up in suit from the base card. New Foundations are started when a card of the same rank as the base card is placed on empty Foundation piles. Aces are placed on Kings, and twos on Aces. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy The deeper something is, the harder it is to get to. Try and move cards out of the Reserve whenever possible. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/yukon.xml0000644000373100047300000000424712307311656023361 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Yukon Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles on left. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Tableau Seven piles. Deal card face up in first pile. Place one card face down on all other piles. Place one card face up on next pile followed by one card face down on all covered piles. Repeat until there are seven cards in last pile. Deal the rest of the cards face up on the second to seventh piles. To be built down in opposite color. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in Tableau are built down in opposite color. Groups of cards can be moved regardless of sequence. A faced-down card is flipped when it is unburied. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with a King or a group of cards with a King on the bottom. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are no longer in play. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Try and uncover as many cards as early on as possible. Doing so will greatly aid your quest to conquer yukon. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/saratoga.xml0000644000373100047300000000760712307311656024020 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Saratoga Written by Alan Horkan, based on work by Jonathan Blandford Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. Two redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundations Four piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Seven piles. Place one card face up on all piles. Next row skip the first pile and place cards on all the other piles. Continue this process skipping one place to the right each row until there are seven rows with seven cards in the last pile. Essentially Saratoga is the same as Klondike only the all cards are face up to begin with. Being able to see all cards reduces the element of risk and makes Saratoga slightly easier than Klondike. Tableau can be built down in alternating colors. Builds of cards can be moved. Empty piles can only be filled by Kings or group of cards starting with a King. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Builds of cards can be moved. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with a King or a group of cards with a King on the bottom. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. When Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. You can go through the deck three times. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Don't give up the ship! Try brute force methods when the game seems over. Sometimes a combination of using cards already in the Foundation and rearranging sequences will free up some needed cards. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/fourteen.xml0000644000373100047300000000335312307311656024040 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Fourteen Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Tableau Deal all cards face up evenly on to twelve piles. The first four piles will each have five cards while the other piles will all have four cards. The exposed card in each pile is in play. Empty piles cannot be filled. Goal Remove all cards. Règlas Cards can be removed in pairs that add up to fourteen. Aces are worth one and Jacks, Queens, and Kings are worth 11, 12, and 13 respectively. Scoring Each card removed scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Watch your step! Try to move cards that are resting on matching pairs as otherwise you might get stuck. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/whitehead.xml0000644000373100047300000000527312307311655024155 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Whitehead Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing on to the Tableau. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Foundation Four piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Seven piles. Deal all cards face up such that there is one card in the first pile, two in the second pile, ending with seven in the seventh pile. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down by same color. Builds of cards that are the same suit and in sequence can be moved as a unit. Empty Tableau slots can be filled with any card or build of cards. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste individually. Top card in Waste is in play. There are no redeals. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Empty Tableau slots are a prized commodity in this game. Sometimes keeping them around until you need them is a very good idea. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/napoleons_tomb.xml0000644000373100047300000000476712307311656025242 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Napoleon's Tomb Written by Kimmo Karlsson Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. Waste Next to Stock. Tableau Three by three grid, all face up. Foundations Center pile of the grid is to be built down, corners to be built up. Suit doesn't count. Reserves Four piles on the grid that are not foundations. Each reserve can hold only one card at a time. Goal Move all cards of 6 or smaller to the center pile, 7 or greater to corner piles. Règlas Click on the stock to flip over cards. Move one card at the time to the tableau. Once placed on a foundation pile, a card cannot be moved. Each corner pile is built up from 7 to king. Center pile is built down from 6 to ace. After ace comes another 6, etc. Suit doesn't count. Opcions Deal Three Cards: If you deal three cards at a time from the stock, you get to go through the deck three times. Autoplay: If autoplay is activated, cards are automatically placed to foundation piles as soon as possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Try to keep reserve. It's not easy to get Napoleon to his tomb, but keep trying. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/thieves.xml0000644000373100047300000000525512307311656023663 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Thieves Written by Robert Brady Configuracion Type of Deck Joker Deck Tableau Seven piles of five cards each, face up. Stock Place all remaining cards here. Cards are turned over one at a time to Waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Goal Move all cards to Waste. Règlas The Waste can be built up or down from the available cards on the Tableau. Jokers are wild and can be played on any rank as well as be played upon by a card of any rank. At any point, a card can be dealt from the Stock to the Waste. Scoring The following table shows the points you receive for each type of card. No points are scored for jokers. Card Points Ace 8 2, 3 6 4, 5 4 6, 7, 8 2 9, 10 4 Queen 6 King 8 Strategy Since you can see all the cards on the Tableau, try to engineer `runs', to try and get rid of as many cards up there as possible, as you only have a finite supply of cards in Stock. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/pileon.xml0000644000373100047300000000461512307311656023501 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Pileon Written by Nick Lamb Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Tableau Fifteen piles, arranged in rows of four. Deal cards four at a time, face up onto the first thirteen piles. Leave the last two spaces empty. A pile can hold as many as four cards, and as few as none. Goal Rearrange the cards so that each pile contains all four cards from a single value. This should leave two piles empty, but it doesn't matter whether they are the same piles which were empty at the start. Règlas Cards can be moved on top of any other card or cards of the same value so long as no pile grows to have more than four cards. Groups of cards can be moved if they are of the same value, but it doesn't gain you anything. An empty slot can be filled with any card or group of cards with the same value. Once a pile contains all four cards of the same value it is frozen, and the top card is flipped to indicate that you need do nothing further to those cards. They are no longer in play, but it would be useless to move them anyway. Scoring When a pile of four cards is frozen you score 4 points, one for each card. There is no other way to score points. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Keep one of the piles clear as much as possible. Don't allow a pile of three cards to build up on top of a single card, especially if the final card from the set is not a bottom card in another pile. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/eliminator.xml0000644000373100047300000000345312307311655024354 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Eliminator Written by Wa (logicplace.com) Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Tableau Four piles. Deal 13 cards to each. (This is all of the cards.) Foundation Four to six empty slots that you build in either direction. Goal Move all cards to Foundation. Règlas Any card can be placed as the first card in the Foundation. Foundation piles can be built up or down from the top card's value, disregarding suit. Kings can be placed on Aces and vice versa. Scoring Every card moved from the Tableau on top of a card in the Foundation scores one point. Maximum possible score: 51 Strategy Make sure to look at all the cards coming up, and be sure you're not going to lock any cards that are necessary to move the one on top. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/chessboard.xml0000644000373100047300000000424712307311656024331 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Chessboard Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Foundation Four piles in the middle. To be built up in suit from base card of your choice, wrapping from King to Ace if necessary. Cards in Foundation piles are no longer in play. Tableau Five piles one each side of the Foundation. Deal five cards face up on to each of these piles and one more on the top two piles. The top card in any Tableau pile is available for play. Goal Move all cards to Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in Tableau piles can be built up or down in suit. Only the top card in every pile is available for play. Empty slots can be filled with any available card. The Foundations are built up from the base card of your choice, wrapping from King to Ace if necessary. Cards in Foundation piles are no longer in play. Scoring Each card in Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Choose your base card wisely. The obvious choice may lead to nought but a dead end. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/gypsy.xml0000644000373100047300000000531112307311656023360 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Gypsy Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Double Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are dealt in batches of eight, one on every Tableau. Foundation Eight piles top right. To be built in suit from Ace to King. Topmost card in each Foundation can be played back on to the Tableau. Tableau Eight piles. Deal two rows face down and one row face up to start. Tableau can be built down in alternating colors. Builds of cards can be moved. Empty piles can be filled with any card or build. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in Tableau are built down by alternating color. Builds of cards can be moved. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with any card or build of cards. Each deal flips one card from the Stock to each pile of the Tableau. There are no redeals. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card in the Tableau will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation scores 5 points. When a Foundation pile is complete (from Ace to King), 60 more points are scored. Each card pair on the Tableau in alternating order scores 2 points. Maximum possible score: 1000 Strategy Try and expose new cards in the Tableau whenever possible. Remember you can always bring cards from the Foundation back into play. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/first_law.xml0000644000373100047300000000444012307311655024200 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 First Law Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. All cards are placed here in beginning. When emptied, cards are brought back from Tableau and put back in the Stock. Tableau Four piles on the right. Each deal from Stock will deal one card to each Tableau pile. Goal Remove all cards. Règlas Clicking on the Stock will deal one card to each of the Tableau piles. If any of the cards showing in the Tableau are of the same rank, move the others on to the leftmost of the like cards. Empty piles can only be filled by an ensuing deal from Stock. If at any point, all four cards showing are the same rank, they are removed. When Stock is empty, the Tableau piles are gathered, right pile on left, and placed back into stock. The first card dealt will always be the first card dealt until it is removed. There are unlimited redeals. Scoring Each set of four cards removed scores one point. Maximum possible score: 13 Strategy Don't forget to use the brakes! This game might never end unless you decide carefully whether or not to make a move. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/camelot.xml0000644000373100047300000000742412307311656023640 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Camelot Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock All the cards are placed in the Stock at the beginning of the game. Cards are turned over one at a time to waste. No redeals. Waste To be taken from Stock. Can only hold one card which must immediately be played on to Tableau. Tableau Four by four grid, each capable of holding one card. Kings can only be placed in a corner space. Queens can only be placed in the middle two spaces of first and last row. Jacks can only be placed in the middle two spaces of first and last column. Goal Remove all cards but picture cards (Jacks, Queens, and Kings). You have won if your Tableau looks like this -- The Winning Tableau. -- and your Stock and Waste are empty. The suits do not matter. Règlas There are two phases to this game. Alternate between the two phases until game is lost or won. Start with Phase One until Tableau is completely filled. At that point, move to Phase Two. Please note that you cannot begin Phase Two unless the Tableau is completely filled. At any point, you can return to Phase One, but remember that you cannot go back to Phase Two unless the tableau is once again filled. An exception to this rule is if the stock and waste are empty. Phase One -- Click on the Stock to move a card into the empty Waste pile. If card is a: King: Place in one of the empty four corner spaces. Queen: Place in one of the empty middle two spaces of the top or bottom row. Jack: Place in any of the empty middle two spaces of the leftmost or rightmost column. Any other card: Place in any empty space. Phase Two -- Remove 10's singly by clicking on them. Remove pairs that add up to 10 by dragging one card on top of its pair. Game is lost if a picture card cannot be put in an appropriate spot or if all the spaces are filled and no cards can be removed. Scoring Each card removed scores one point. Maximum possible score: 40 Strategy It is always safest in the middle. During Phase One of play, deal in the middle before going to the edges. If you see a possible pair, place that card on the edge so as to free more edge spaces during Phase Two of play. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000002456612307311656024151 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 AisleRiot"> ]> Manual d'<application>AisleRiot</application> AisleRiot is a collection of over 80 card games programmed in GNOME's scripting language, Scheme. 2001 Rosanna Yuen Projècte de documentacion de GNOME Rosanna Yuen GNOME Documentation Project
zana@webwynk.net
Telsa Gwynne
hobbit@aloss.ukuu.org.uk
 AisleRiot Manual V3.2 September 2011 Rosanna Yuen zana@webwynk.net GNOME Documentation Project This manual describes version 3.2 of AisleRiot. Feedback To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the AisleRiot application or this manual, follow the directions in the GNOME Feedback Page. Introduccion AisleRiot AisleRiot (also known as Solitaire or sol) is a collection of card games which are easy to play with the aid of a mouse. The rules for the games have been coded for your pleasure in the GNOME scripting language (Scheme). Playing <application>AisleRiot</application> Use the mouse to move cards. Click a card and drag it somewhere. Release the mouse button to deposit the card. Alternatively, you can move a card by clicking once to pick it up and clicking again to place it. To enable this way of moving cards, choose ControlClick to move. This can be faster than dragging and will be easier on your hand since you don't have to hold the mouse down. However, it may take a while to get used to. If a card can be moved to the foundation(s), you do not need to drag it. You can double-click on it and it will move. If a sequence of cards can be moved to the foundations, you can generally move the sequence as one move. Double clicking a card will send it to a foundation, if that is possible. This is useful for cleaning up large numbers of cards at the end of a successful game. In games which have a stock pile you can redeal it by clicking on the empty space where it was. Be warned that some games only let you do this a limited number of time. Watch for the Redeals Left message at the bottom of the window. A useful tip to know is that right-clicking on a face-up card which is partially obscured by a card laid over it will raise it so that you can see what it is. Some games have options to change the way the game is played. For example Klondike can be played with either single card deals or three-card deals. In these games there is a separate menu with the game's name. You can only change the rules of the game at the beginning of the game - the menu will be inactive during the game. Statistics on how well you have done at a particular game are available by selecting Statistics from the Game menu. Only games where you actually start moving cards are counted. The statistics are here for your own enjoyment, there are numerous ways to cheat and it is unwise to make comparisons. The Games usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/cruel.xml0000644000373100047300000000542312307311656023323 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Cruel Written by Zach Keene Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left slot. Since all remaining cards are always dealt to the tableau, it will always be empty. Redeals are unlimited. Foundations Rightmost piles in the top row; the aces are placed here upon the start of the game. Build up in suit from ace to king. Tableau Up to thirteen piles, dealt four cards at a time until the stock is exhausted. Tableau piles can be built down in suit. Goal Move all cards to the foundation piles. Règlas Build foundations up in suit and tableau piles down in suit. If no moves are available (or you just feel like it), click on the empty top left slot for a redeal. Redeals are accomplished by placing the tableau piles on top of each other in order, starting from the last pile. Then the deck is simply turned over and redealt, four cards at a time, back to the tableau. If no moves are made, redealing will not alter the arrangement of the cards. Therefore, the game is lost if no move is possible immediately after a redeal. Note: a degenerate case occurs whenever, after a redeal, the last tableau pile contains only one card and the only move possible is from the final tableau pile one before it. Making this move and redealing only results in the original card arrangement. AisleRiot will end the game if this situation is detected. Scoring Each card placed in the foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy If more than one pile on the tableau can be built upon, choose to build upon the one with the highest rank first. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/canfield.xml0000644000373100047300000000657012307311655023761 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Canfield Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing. Cards are turned over three at a time to Waste. Unlimited redeals. Waste Directly to the right of Stock. To be taken from Stock. Top card available for play. Reserve On left under stock. Deal thirteen cards here with top card face up. Top card available for play to Foundations or Tableau. Tableau Four piles below Foundations. Deal one card face up on to each pile. Tableau can be built down in alternating color. Groups of cards can be moved. Foundation Four piles top right. Deal one card face up on first Foundation pile. This card is now the base card. Built up by suit. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Groups of cards can be moved. An empty slot in the Tableau is filled automatically from the Reserve. If the Reserve is empty, an empty slot can be filled by any card or group of cards in sequence. Cards are flipped from the Stock to the Waste by three. If the last flip has less than three cards, that many cards are flipped for that move only. When Stock is empty, move all cards in Waste back to the Stock, maintaining order. Foundations are built up in suit from the base card (first card dealt to first Foundation) New Foundations are started when a card of the same rank as the first card placed during the dealing period are placed on empty Foundation piles. Aces are placed on Kings, and twos on Aces. Cards in Foundations are still in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. This game used to be played in casinos. You would break even if your score is 10. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy A bird in hand is worth two in the bush. This game is hard to win. Most people play with the betting rules in mind and try to get as many points as possible. To this end, always move cards into the Foundations as soon as they are available. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/helsinki.xml0000644000373100047300000000342212307311655024013 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Helsinki Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are automatically placed on to the Tableau whenever a space opens up. Tableau Ten piles. Deal a card face up in every pile. Goal Remove all cards. Règlas Remove cards in pairs that add up to thirteen with Aces being one, Jacks being eleven, and Queens being twelve. Kings are removed singly. Empty Tableau piles are automatically filled from the Stock. Scoring Each card removed scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Go as fast as you can. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/freecell.xml0000644000373100047300000000504012307311655023764 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Freecell Written by Changwoo Ryu Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Reserves Four left piles on top row. Each Reserve pile can only hold one card. Foundation Four piles top right. To be built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are no longer in play. Tableau Eight piles. Deal all cards face up on to these eight piles, ending up with seven cards in each of the first four piles and six cards in the last four piles. Tableau can be built down in alternating colors. Cards can only be moved singly, but as a shortcut, if there are enough Reserve piles free to allow it, cards in sequence can be moved together. Goal Move all cards to the Foundation piles. Règlas Cards in the Tableau are built down by alternating color. Groups of cards can be moved if there are enough Reserve piles free to allow the move if the cards were moved singly. An empty pile in the Tableau can be filled with any card or group of cards. Foundations are built up in suit from Ace to King. Cards in Foundations are not in play. Double clicking on a card will move it to the appropriate Foundation pile if such a move is possible. Cards in Reserve piles can be played back on to Tableau or on to the Foundation. Scoring Each card in the Foundation piles scores one point. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Space is a valuable commodity. Keep as many of the Reserve piles free as possible. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/gay_gordons.xml0000644000373100047300000000333612307311655024524 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Gay Gordons Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Reserve Top left pile. Deal two cards face up here. The top card is in play. Cannot be refilled or built on. Tableau Ten piles. Deal five cards face up in each pile. The top card in each pile is in play. Empty piles cannot be filled. Goal Remove all cards. Règlas Remove cards in pairs that add up to eleven. Kings are paired off with Queens. Jacks are paired off with other Jacks. Scoring Each pair of cards removed scores two points. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Try to uncover cards that are buried under their pair-mate. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/block_ten.xml0000644000373100047300000000336512307311655024153 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Block Ten Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. All cards are placed here at beginning of play. Tableau Nine piles in a 3x3 formation. Each Tableau pile is dealt one card face up. Goal Remove all cards. Règlas Remove cards in pairs that add up to ten. Jacks, Queens and Kings are removed in pairs. Tens cannot be removed. All empty slots are automatically filled by the Stock. Scoring Removing each pair of cards scores two points. Maximum possible score: 48 Strategy This is a pure luck game. Therefore, any strategy involved would have to do with increasing your luck. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/aisleriot/monte_carlo.xml0000644000373100047300000000463012307311655024511 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Monte Carlo Written by Rosanna Yuen Configuracion Type of Deck Standard Deck Stock Top left pile. The rest of the deck is placed here after dealing the Tableau. Cards are dealt after concatenating the Tableau onto the empty slots. Tableau Five by five grid, each capable of holding one card. One card dealt to each space at the beginning of game. Empty spaces can be filled by moving cards from the right to the left, from the leftmost card of the row below to the rightmost space, and from the Stock to all otherwise empty spaces by clicking on the Stock. Goal Remove all cards. Règlas Cards can be removed in pairs that have the same value as long as the two cards are touching horizontally, vertically, or diagonally. At any point that there are empty piles in the Tableau, dealing from the Stock moves all the cards already in the Tableau from the right to left and moving them up a row to the far right if necessary making all the empty slots at the end. The Stock is then dealt on to these empty slots. Scoring Each pair of cards removed scores two points. Maximum possible score: 52 Strategy Keep an eye out as to how the Tableau will shrink when you deal. Sometimes leaving pairs in will allow more pairs to become available after a deal. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/deja-dup/license.page0000644000373100047300000000165112317333264023444 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Know your rights Licéncia

This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program. If not, see http://www.gnu.org/licenses/.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/deja-dup/support.page0000644000373100047300000000133512317333264023535 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Get more help Presa en carga

If you have unanswered questions or a problem you don’t understand, please ask about it it in the support forum.

Keep in mind that the people answering your questions are volunteers and that while Déjà Dup is intended to work well, it comes with no warranty. So please be polite and patient.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/deja-dup/contribute.page0000644000373100047300000000363512317333265024205 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Help make Déjà Dup better Getting Involved

So you want to help make Déjà Dup even better? Excellent! Here are some suggestions.

Report Issues

Did you see a flaw? Do you have an idea for a new feature? Simply report it as a bug. Be patient for a reply.

Note that bug reports should be in English only.

Talk to Us

We don’t bite. Send an email to the mailing list.

Or subscribe to the list. The list is very low traffic.

Note that the list is English only.

Translating

Do you speak both English and another language? Good! You can help translate Déjà Dup through a web interface. It’s really quite easy and is very appreciated.

Presa en carga

Do you like helping people? Answer user questions and support requests.

This is another great way for non-English speakers to get involved, as you can answer questions posted in your language.

Encodatge

There are always more bugs to fix. If you want to find out what needs doing, talk to us on the mailing list as described above.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/deja-dup/restore-revert.page0000644000373100047300000000235712317333265025017 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Restore a previous version of a file Reverting a File

Browse to the folder containing the file you want to revert.

Select the file you want to revert by clicking on it.

Click EditRevert to Previous Version….

When the Restore dialog appears, choose the date from which to restore.

Click Forward.

Review your selections and click Restore. Note that this will overwrite your current version of the file.

You can select multiple files at once before reverting.

You can also revert files on the command line:

deja-dup --restore FILE1 FILE2 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/deja-dup/backup-auto.page0000644000373100047300000000171712317333264024240 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Give yourself peace of mind Salvaments automatics

If you only back up when you remember to do so, you’re not backing up often enough. Fortunately, it’s easy to set up automatic backups.

Open your Backups settings.

Review your backup settings, to confirm they are what you want.

Turn on the Automatic backups option on the Overview page.

Consider only saving your backups for a certain length of time, using the Keep backups option on the Schedule page. Otherwise, they may end up consuming a lot of space while you’re not paying attention.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/deja-dup/backup-first.page0000644000373100047300000000136012317333265024412 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Start now Your First Backup

Open your Backups settings.

Review your backup settings, to confirm they are what you want.

Click on the Back Up Now… button on the Overview page.

Wait. It may take a long time to backup, especially if you are backing up to a remote server. Just let it run in the background while you do something else.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/deja-dup/prefs.page0000644000373100047300000001070112317333265023136 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Adjust your backup settings Paramètres <gui>Automatic backup</gui>

Turn this option on to have Déjà Dup automatically back up for you. This is recommended so that you don’t forget to do it yourself. Backups are more useful the more recent they are, so it is important to back up regularly.

 <gui>Folders to save</gui>

Choose a list of folders to save in your backup. Press the Add or Remove buttons to modify the list. If you are only interested in backing up your own data, the default of Home is sufficient.

 <gui>Folders to ignore</gui>

Choose a list of folders to not save in your backup. Press the Add or Remove buttons to modify the list.

Some of your data may be large and not very important to you. In that case, you can save yourself some time and space by not backing them up.

Some locations are always ignored by default:

~/.adobe/Flash_Player/AssetCache

~/.cache

~/.gvfs

~/.Private

~/.recent-applications.xbel

~/.recently-used.xbel

~/.steam/root (which by default also ignores ~/.local/share/Steam)

~/.thumbnails

~/.xsession-errors

/proc

/run

/sys

/tmp

 <gui>Storage location</gui>

Use these options to specify the storage location that Déjà Dup will use when backing up or restoring:

Cloud Services

The first few storage locations are cloud storage services provided by various companies. For a small fee, they hold your data for you. A cloud service like this is recommended because it is an easy way to keep your data offsite (meaning out of your home: in case of disaster or theft, your data will still be safe).

These services cost money. Read their rates carefully before using them.

 Remote Servers

Choose the type of remote server to which you want to connect. Then you can enter the server information. Alternatively, if you know your server’s URL, choose Custom Location and enter it.

 Supòrts amovibles

You may see removable media like external hard drives or thumb drives listed.

 Dorsièr local

You may also want to choose a local folder as a storage location. Note that backups can be quite large, so make sure you have enough free disk space.

This is not recommended, because if your hardware fails, you will lose both your original data and your backups.

 <gui>Keep</gui>

Choose the minimum amount of time to keep backup files. If you find that the backup files are taking up too much space, you may want to decrease this duration. Due to implementation details, files may be kept a bit longer than the chosen time. But no files will be deleted early.

Backups are kept forever by default, but still may be deleted earlier if the storage location begins to run out of space.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/deja-dup/restore-lost.page0000644000373100047300000000223512317333265024464 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Restore a file that is no longer present Restoring a Lost File

Browse to the folder containing the file you lost.

Click FileRestore Missing Files….

When the Restore dialog appears, it will scan for files that are in the backup but no longer in the folder.

When you see the file you want to restore appear, select it and click Forward.

Review your selections and click Restore.

You can restore lost files from the command line as well, if you remember what their filenames were:

deja-dup --restore FILE1 FILE2 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/deja-dup/restore-full.page0000644000373100047300000000462212317333265024447 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Recover from total system failure Full System Restore
Configuracion

Get your system to a fresh state. For example, a fresh install or a new account on an old computer. Don’t worry about getting comfortable and customizing settings yet. Wait until after you restore your previous settings to change anything, as any customizations you make now may get overridden once you restore.

Next, you need to install Déjà Dup. Your distribution vendor may package it for you. Otherwise, download and compile it.
Restablir

Open your Backups settings.

Click on the Restore… button on the Overview page.

A Restore dialog will appear asking where your backup files are stored (your Backup location).

Click Forward and wait for Déjà Dup to scan the backup location.

Choose the date you want to restore from. Usually you can just leave this alone, as the default is the most recent backup.

Click Forward.

Choose where to restore. Since this is a full system backup, leave it as the default (which restores over your current install).

Click Forward.

Review your selections and click Restore.

Wait. It may take a long time to finish restoring.

Finally, reinstall any programs that you enjoyed in your previous install.

If for whatever reason you have a problem after trying to restore with the Restore files to original locations option, try restoring instead to a temporary directory and moving your files to where they belong.

If that still doesn’t work, there are more drastic things you can try.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/deja-dup/restore-worst-case.page0000644000373100047300000002431212317333264025571 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 What to do if you can’t restore your files When Everything Goes Wrong

Déjà Dup may fail. Maybe it crashes or gives you an error when you try to restore. When you really need your data back, the last thing you want do deal with is a bug. Consider filing a bug report but in the meantime, here are some approaches to workaround a misbehaving Déjà Dup and get your data back.

This is going to get technical. If none of this makes sense to you, don’t be afraid to ask for help.

Open a Terminal window by pressing CtrlAltT.

Create the directory in which you will place your restored files. This guide will use /tmp/restore:

mkdir -p /tmp/restore
Restoring with Duplicity

On the assumption that Déjà Dup is just not working for you right now, you’re going to use the command line tool duplicity that is used by Déjà Dup behind the scenes to back up and restore your files.

If you want more information about duplicity than presented here, run man duplicity.

The first thing we’ll try is a simple restore of all your data. Assuming your files are on an external drive mounted as /media/backup and you chose to encrypt the backup, try this:

duplicity --gio file:///media/backup /tmp/restore

If you didn’t encrypt the backup, add --no-encryption to the command.

Other Backup Locations

If you backed up to a remote or cloud server, the syntax you use with duplicity will be different than the external drive example above. See below for how to connect to your chosen backup location.

Remember to add --no-encryption to any example commands if your backup is not encrypted.

If duplicity appears to be having trouble connecting to your server, try downloading all the duplicity files yourself to a local folder and following the simpler example above.

Amazon S3

Look up your Amazon S3 access key ID and secret access key and replace instances of ID and SECRET in the example below with those respective values.

You may have specified a folder in which to put the backup files. In the example below, replace any instance of FOLDER with that path.

export AWS_ACCESS_KEY_ID=Identificant (ID) export AWS_SECRET_ACCESS_KEY=SECRET duplicity s3+http://deja-dup-auto-LOWERCASE_ID/DORSIÈR /tmp/restore Rackspace Cloud Files

Look up your Rackspace username and API key and replace instances of USERNAME and KEY in the example below with those respective values.

You may have specified a container in which to put the backup files. In the example below, replace any instance of CONTAINER with that name.

export CLOUDFILES_USERNAME=NOM D'UTILIZAIRE export CLOUDFILES_APIKEY=CLAU duplicity cf+http://CONTENIDOR /tmp/restore FTP

Look up your server address, port, username, and password and replace instances of SERVER, PORT, USERNAME, and PASSWORD in the example below with those respective values.

You may have specified a folder in which to put the backup files. In the example below, replace any instance of FOLDER with that path.

If you chose to not log in with a username, use anonymous as your USERNAME below.

gvfs-mount ftp://NOM D'UTILIZAIRE@SERVIDOR:PÒRT/DORSIÈR duplicity --gio ftp://NOM D'UTILIZAIRE@SERVIDOR:PÒRT/DORSIÈR /tmp/restore SSH

Look up your server address, port, username, and password and replace instances of SERVER, PORT, USERNAME, and PASSWORD in the example below with those respective values.

You may have specified a folder in which to put the backup files. In the example below, replace any instance of FOLDER with that path.

gvfs-mount ssh://NOM D'UTILIZAIRE@SERVIDOR:PÒRT/DORSIÈR duplicity --gio ssh://NOM D'UTILIZAIRE@SERVIDOR:PÒRT/DORSIÈR /tmp/restore WebDAV

Look up your server address, port, username, and password and replace instances of SERVER, PORT, USERNAME, and PASSWORD in the example below with those respective values.

You may have specified a folder in which to put the backup files. In the example below, replace any instance of FOLDER with that path.

If you chose to use a secure connection (HTTPS) when backing up, use davs:// instead of dav:// in the example below.

gvfs-mount dav://NOM D'UTILIZAIRE@SERVIDOR:PÒRT/DORSIÈR duplicity --gio dav://NOM D'UTILIZAIRE@SERVIDOR:PÒRT/DORSIÈR /tmp/restore Partiment Windows

Look up your server address, username, and password and replace instances of SERVER, USERNAME, and PASSWORD in the example below with those respective values.

You may have specified a folder in which to put the backup files. In the example below, replace any instance of FOLDER with that path.

If you specified a domain for your Windows server, add it to the beginning of USERNAME with a semicolon between them. For example, domain;username.

gvfs-mount smb://NOM D'UTILIZAIRE@SERVIDOR/DORSIÈR duplicity --gio smb://NOM D'UTILIZAIRE@SERVIDOR/DORSIÈR /tmp/restore
Restoring by Hand

If even duplicity isn’t working for you, there may be little hope. The backup file format is complicated and not easily manipulated. But if you’re desperate, it’s worth a try.

If you used a remote or cloud server to store your backup, first download all the duplicity files and place them in a folder on your computer. Then enter that folder in your terminal.

Duplicity stores your data in small chunks called volumes. Some volumes belong to the periodic ‘full’ or fresh backups and others to the ‘inc’ or incremental backups. Starting with a full backup set of volumes at volume 1, you’ll need to restore files volume by volume.

If you encrypted your backup, first you must decrypt the volume with gpg. Say you have duplicity-full.20110127T131352Z.vol1.difftar.gpg:

gpg --output duplicity-full.20110127T131352Z.vol1.difftar --decrypt duplicity-full.20110127T131352Z.vol1.difftar.gpg

Or to do all at once (make sure you have plenty of space!):

gpg --multifile --decrypt duplicity-full.20110127T131352Z.*.difftar.gpg

Now you have either a .difftar or a .difftar.gz volume (depending on whether you had to decrypt it or not). Use tar on whichever one you have to extract the individual patch files:

tar xf duplicity-full.20110127T131352Z.vol1.difftar

Or again, to do all at once:

for t in duplicity-full.20110127T131352Z.*.difftar; do tar xf $t; done

Now the patch files will be in multivolume_snapshot and snapshot folders. Each file that spanned multiple volumes will be in multivolume_snapshot. Let’s say you backed up /home/jane/essay.txt:

cd multivolume_snapshot/home/jane/essay.txt cat * > essay.txt

To recover data from incremental backups, use rdiff to stitch the files together. See man rdiff for usage.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/deja-dup/credits.page0000644000373100047300000000346512317333264023464 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Meet the team Credits
Desvolopament

Andrew Fister

Michael Terry

Michael Vogt

Urban Skudnik

Canonical Ltd
Documentacion

Michael Terry

Canonical Ltd
Art

Andreas Nilsson

Jakub Steiner

Lapo Calamandrei

Michael Terry
Traduccion Launchpad Contributions: Cédric VALMARY (Tot en òc) https://launchpad.net/~cvalmary
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/deja-dup/index.page0000644000373100047300000000174612317333265023137 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Backup Help Backup Help Michael Terry mike@mterry.name 2010,2011

Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0 Unported License

 <media type="image" mime="image/png" src="figures/deja-dup-icon.png"/> Backup Help
Backing Up
Restoring Files
About <app>Déjà Dup Backup Tool</app>
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/baobab/pref-view-menu.page0000644000373100047300000000205212307647423024405 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Hide or show the toolbar and the status bar. Toolbar and statusbar

The Toolbar provides shortcuts to the various scan actions, while the Statusbar provides the status of the application (for example, Ready and Scanning…).

Select ViewToolbar from the menu and enable or disable the option

Select ViewStatusbar from the menu and enable or disable the option

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/baobab/pref.page0000644000373100047300000000260512307647422022476 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Skip specific devices and partitions when scanning the file system. Disable scanning of individual storage devices and partitions

Disk Usage Analyzer allows you to scan only the partitions and storage devices that you have selected in the Preferences dialog. By default, all devices and partitions are selected, but the application will store your preferences when you close it.

Select EditPreferences

Select the storage devices and partitions that you want to scan, or deselect those that you do not wish to scan

Click Close to save your preferences

The first item in the list, which is mounted on /, cannot be deselected

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/baobab/introduction.page0000644000373100047300000000302512307647423024261 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Disk Usage Analyzer, also referred to as baobab, graphically represents your use of storage space. Introduccion

Disk Usage Analyzer is a graphical, menu-driven application for analysing storage device usage. It can be used to scan multiple local or remote storage device (including hard disks, SSDs, USB sticks, digital cameras and memory cards). Disk Usage Analyzer can scan either the whole file system tree, your Home directory, a specific user-requested directory or a remote folder.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/baobab/pref-view-chart.page0000644000373100047300000000263012307647423024544 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Display the results as a ring chart or a treemap chart. Different chart views

By default, the scan results show each subfolder as the section of a ring, comprising an angle proportional to the size of the relevant folder. Sub-folders are shown in different colors.

Move your mouse over the rings chart displays more details about the subfolders.

Chart visibility can be changed to Treemap View using the drop-down list at the top of the chart on the right-hand side. The tree layout displays the folders as proportionately sized boxes.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/baobab/scan-file-system.page0000644000373100047300000000415112307647422024723 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Scan all internal and removable storage devices. Scan the file system

To find out how much space your file system takes up:

Select AnalyzerScan File System from the menu

Your file system includes all internal and removable storage devices which are mounted when the respective folder is scanned.

If the file system that you are trying to scan is large, it may take a few minutes for the scan to complete.

Select AnalyzerStop to cancel the current scan, or AnalyzerRefresh to repeat the last scan.

The results may be useful in deciding which folders can be archived, deleted or moved to free up space. You can also use the results to estimate how much space would be needed for a backup of specific folders.

Right-click on any folder and select Open Folder to launch the Files application, or Move to Trash to move your folder to Trash.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/baobab/scan-home.page0000644000373100047300000000514212307647422023413 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Scan all of your personal files that are on your internal storage device. Scan your <file>Home</file> folder

The Home folder is where most files are located for the average user because default settings are often set to save or copy files into subdirectories within it. This includes downloads from the internet, documents which you work on and photos from your camera. Normally, one Home folder exists for each user on the computer.

Select AnalyzerScan Home Folder from the menu

Select AnalyzerStop to cancel the current scan, or AnalyzerRefresh to repeat the last scan.

The results may be useful in deciding which folders can be archived, deleted or moved to free up space. You can also use the results to estimate how much space would be needed for a backup of your Home folder.

Right-click on any folder and select Open Folder to launch the Files application, or Move to Trash to move your folder to Trash.

The default subdirectories usually include Desktop, Documents, Downloads, Pictures and Music, among others. Some of these will already exist when GNOME is installed; others will be created by applications when they are needed.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/baobab/scan-remote.page0000644000373100047300000000706412307647423023764 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Scan a folder remotely from your computer. Scan a remote folder

Disk Usage Analyzer can scan storage devices which are accessible remotely. To scan the whole file system or any specific folder remotely:

Select Analyzer Scan Remote Folder… from the menu

Choose the protocol that you wish to use

Enter in the IP address of the remote storage device into the Server field or the URI, depending on the protocol that you are using.

Click Scan to continue; you may be asked for more details, like a password and username, before the scan will commence.

Scanning over the network may be slower than scanning a local file system.

Right-click on any folder and select Open Folder to launch the Files application, or Move to Trash to move your folder to Trash.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/baobab/index.page0000644000373100047300000000172212307647423022651 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Disk Usage Analyzer, a graphical storage device scanner. Disk Usage Analyzer
Scan storage devices
Views and preferences
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/baobab/scan-folder.page0000644000373100047300000000434112307647422023736 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Julita Inca yrazes@gmail.com Michael Hill mdhillca@gmail.com Ekaterina Gerasimova kittykat3756@gmail.com Scan a local folder, including all subfolders. Scan a folder

Scans of individual folders are faster than those of the whole file system, so they may be more efficient if you want information only about a specific part of your file system.

Select AnalyzerScan Folder… from the menu

Use the file browser to navigate around your file system and select the desired folder

Click Open to commence scanning

Select AnalyzerStop to cancel the current scan, or AnalyzerRefresh to repeat the last scan.

The results may be useful in deciding which folders can be archived, deleted or moved to free up space. You can also use the results to estimate how much space would be needed for a backup of specific folders.

Right-click on any folder and select Open Folder to launch the Files application, or Move to Trash to move your folder to Trash.

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gucharmap/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000717012300411173023236 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/gucharmap/index.docbook0000644000373100047300000007016012300411173024100 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 ]>
Character Map Manual Character Map is a Unicode character map that allows you to select characters from a table and insert then in to a text string. 2004 Sun Microsystems 2003 2004 Chee Bin HOH Projècte de documentacion de GNOME Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Sun GNOME Documentation Team Sun Microsystems Chee Bin HOH GNOME Documentation Project
cbhoh@gnome.org
Projècte de documentacion de GNOME Character Map Manual V2.1 2004-02-26 Updated for GNOME 2.6, program version 1.3.0. Sun GNOME Documentation Team GNOME Documentation Project Unicode Character Map Manual V2.0 October 2003 Chee Bin HOH cbhoh@gnome.org GNOME Documentation Project This manual describes version 1.3.0 of Character Map. Feedback To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding the Character Map application or this manual, follow the directions in the GNOME Feedback Page. gucharmap Character Map Character Map Introduccion The Character Map application allows you to insert special characters into a document or a text field. Character Map provides accented characters, mathematical symbols, special symbols, and punctuation marks. Use Character Map to access characters that are not available on your keyboard. Character Map displays all the characters are available in all of the language scripts on your system, using the Unicode character set. Unicode is a character set standard with the goal to include all of the characters that are used in all of the written languages in the world. Per començar To Start Character Map You can start Character Map in the following ways: Menut Applications Choose AccessoriesCharacter Map. Linha de comanda Execute the following command: gnome-character-map When You Start Character Map When you start Character Map, the following window is displayed.
Character Map Window Shows Character Map window.
The Character Map window contains the following elements: Barra de menuts The menus on the menubar contain most of the commands that you need to work with Character Map. Barra d'espleches The toolbar contains a drop-down list of fonts, font style buttons, and a zoom spin box. Display area The display area contains the following components: Script or Unicode Block list box Character Table tabbed section Character Details tabbed section Text to copy text box Copy button Statusbar The statusbar displays the currently selected character's Unicode code point and Unicode character name. Utilizacion To Change the Character-Set List To list the character sets by script name, choose ViewBy Script. To list the character sets by Unicode block, choose ViewBy Unicode Block. To Create a Text String To create a text string in the Text to copy field, perform the following steps: Select a character set from the Script or Unicode Block list box. Insert characters in one of the following ways: Double-click on a character button in the Character Table tabbed section, to insert the character in the Text to copy field. Select a character button in the Character Table tabbed section, then press Return to insert the character in the Text to copy field. Select a character button in the Character Table tabbed section, then click and drag the character to the Text to copy field. Click on the Text to copy field to give focus to the field. If a text string is already in the field, click on the text string at the point where you want to insert the character. Press a character key on your keyboard to insert that character into the field. To Copy and Paste Your Text String into an Application To copy and paste the text string from the Text to copy field into an application, perform the following steps: Click Copy. If none or all of the text string is selected, all of the string is copied to the clipboard. If a portion of the string is selected, only that portion is copied. Switch to your application and choose EditPaste, or press shortcut key CtrlV. When you paste the contents of the Text to copy field into other applications, the text string appears in the current character set of the application. If your text string contains non-visible characters, you can only insert the text string into applications that support the full character set. To Search for a Character To search for a character, perform the following steps: Choose SearchFind, or press shortcut key CtrlF. The Find dialog opens. Enter text to search for in the Search field. Select Match whole word to only find complete words that match your text. By default, only the character names are searched. Select Search in character details to search in other parts of a character's description, such as notes, equivalents, and approximate equivalents. Click Next to find the first occurrence of your text after the currently selected character. Character Map selects the character it finds. Click Next to find the next matching character. Alternatively, choose SearchFind Next, or press shortcut key CtrlG. Click Previous to find the previous matching character. Alternatively, choose SearchFind Previous, or press shortcut key ShiftCtrlG. To Browse Through all Characters To browse through the character map, use the Go menu. Next character, or press shortcut key CtrlN. Previous character, or press shortcut key CtrlP. Next script, or press shortcut key CtrlPage Down. Previous script, or press shortcut key CtrlPage Up. You can browse the character map by individual character, and script or by Unicode block. This depends on whether the character map is showing scripts or Unicode blocks. To change this, choose ViewBy Script or ViewBy Unicode Block. The following keys also work for browsing the character map: Press the arrow keys on the keyboard to browse through the characters. Press the Page Up and Page Down keys to browse through the characters page by page. Press the Home key to select the first character in the Unicode sequence. To select the last character, press the End key. To Display Detailed Information About a Character To display detailed information about a character, perform the following steps: Select a character set from the Script or Unicode Block list box. Example: Basic Latin Select a character from the Character Table tabbed section. Example: B Click on the Character Details tabbed section. The Character Details tabbed section displays the following information about the selected character: Unicode code point Example: U+0042 Unicode character name Example: LATIN CAPITAL LETTER B General Character Properties Unicode category Example: Letter, Uppercase Various Useful Representations UTF-8 encoding Example: 0x42 UTF-16 encoding Example: 0x0042 C octal escaped UTF-8 encoding Example: \102 XML decimal entity Example: "&#66" Annotations and Cross References Example: U+212C SCRIPT CAPITAL B Click on the link to display the details for the referenced character. To Change the Format of a Character To change the format of a character, perform any of the following steps: To change the font, select a font from the font drop-down list. To change the font type to bold type, click on the Bold button, or press shortcut key AltB. To change the font type to italic type, click on the Italic button, or press shortcut key AltI. To increase the font size, choose ViewZoom In or use the zoom spin box, or press shortcut key Ctrl+. To decrease the font size, choose ViewZoom Out or use the zoom spin box, or press shortcut key Ctrl-. To display normal font size, choose ViewNormal Size, or press shortcut key Ctrl=. To magnify the selected character, hold Shift. To Change the Format of the Character Table To change the format of the character table, choose ViewSnap Columns to Power of Two. Character Map changes the Character Table tabbed section so that the number of columns is a power of two, for example, two columns, four columns, eight columns, and so on. The number of columns depends on the size of the window and the size of the font.
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/zenity/color-selection.page0000644000373100047300000000252612320470040024742 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --color-selection option. Color Selection Dialog

Use the --color-selection option to create a color selection dialog.

The color selection dialog supports the following options:

<cmd>--color</cmd>=<var>VALUE</var>

Set the initial color.(ex: #FF0000)

 <cmd>--show-palette</cmd>

Show the palette.

The following example script shows how to create a color selection dialog:

#!/bin/sh COLOR=`zenity --color-selection --show-palette` case $? in 0) echo "You selected $COLOR.";; 1) echo "No color selected.";; -1) echo "An unexpected error has occurred.";; esac
Color Selection Dialog Example Zenity color selection dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/zenity/password.page0000644000373100047300000000234412320470040023501 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --password option. Password Dialog

Use the --password option to create a password entry dialog.

The password entry dialog supports the following options:

<cmd>--username</cmd>

Display the username field.

The following example script shows how to create a password entry dialog:

#!/bin/sh ENTRY=`zenity --password --username` case $? in 0) echo "User Name: `echo $ENTRY | cut -d'|' -f1`" echo "Password : `echo $ENTRY | cut -d'|' -f2`" ;; 1) echo "Stop login.";; -1) echo "An unexpected error has occurred.";; esac
Password Entry Dialog Example Zenity password entry dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/zenity/progress.page0000644000373100047300000000421712320470041023505 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --progress option. Progress Dialog

Use the --progress option to create a progress dialog.

Zenity reads data from standard input line by line. If a line is prefixed with #, the text is updated with the text on that line. If a line contains only a number, the percentage is updated with that number.

The progress dialog supports the following options:

<cmd>--text</cmd>=<var>text</var>

Specifies the text that is displayed in the progress dialog.

 <cmd>--percentage</cmd>=<var>percentage</var>

Specifies the initial percentage that is set in the progress dialog.

 <cmd>--auto-close</cmd>

Closes the progress dialog when 100% has been reached.

 <cmd>--pulsate</cmd>

Specifies that the progress bar pulsates until an EOF character is read from standard input.

The following example script shows how to create a progress dialog:

#!/bin/sh ( echo "10" ; sleep 1 echo "# Updating mail logs" ; sleep 1 echo "20" ; sleep 1 echo "# Resetting cron jobs" ; sleep 1 echo "50" ; sleep 1 echo "This line will just be ignored" ; sleep 1 echo "75" ; sleep 1 echo "# Rebooting system" ; sleep 1 echo "100" ; sleep 1 ) | zenity --progress \ --title="Update System Logs" \ --text="Scanning mail logs..." \ --percentage=0 if [ "$?" = -1 ] ; then zenity --error \ --text="Update canceled." fi
Progress Dialog Example Zenity progress dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/zenity/text.page0000644000373100047300000000421512320470040022622 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --text-info option. Text Information Dialog

Use the --text-info option to create a text information dialog.

The text information dialog supports the following options:

<cmd>--filename</cmd>=<var>filename</var>

Specifies a file that is loaded in the text information dialog.

 <cmd>--editable</cmd>

Allows the displayed text to be edited. The edited text is returned to standard output when the dialog is closed.

 <cmd>--font</cmd>=<var>FONT</var>

Specifies the text font.

 <cmd>--checkbox</cmd>=<var>TEXT</var>

Enable a checkbox for use like a 'I read and accept the terms.'

 <cmd>--html</cmd>

Enable html support.

 <cmd>--url</cmd>=<var>URL</var>

Sets an url instead of a file. Only works if you use --html option.

The following example script shows how to create a text information dialog:

#!/bin/sh # You must place file "COPYING" in same folder of this script. FILE=`dirname $0`/COPYING zenity --text-info \ --title="License" \ --filename=$FILE \ --checkbox="I read and accept the terms." case $? in 0) echo "Start installation!" # next step ;; 1) echo "Stop installation!" ;; -1) echo "An unexpected error has occurred." ;; esac
Text Information Dialog Example Zenity text information dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/zenity/notification.page0000644000373100047300000000205312320470041024323 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --notification option. Icòna de notificacion

Use the --notification option to create a notification icon.

<cmd>--text</cmd>=<var>text</var>

Specifies the text that is displayed in the notification area.

The following example script shows how to create a notification icon:

#!/bin/sh zenity --notification\ --window-icon="info" \ --text="There are system updates necessary!"
Exemple d'icòna de notificacion Zenity notification icon example
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/zenity/calendar.page0000644000373100047300000000424612320470041023414 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --calendar option. Calendar Dialog

Use the --calendar option to create a calendar dialog. Zenity returns the selected date to standard output. If no date is specified on the command line, the dialog uses the current date.

The calendar dialog supports the following options:

<cmd>--text</cmd>=<var>text</var>

Specifies the text that is displayed in the calendar dialog.

 <cmd>--day</cmd>=<var>day</var>

Specifies the day that is selected in the calendar dialog. day must be a number between 1 and 31 inclusive.

 <cmd>--month</cmd>=<var>month</var>

Specifies the month that is selected in the calendar dialog. month must be a number between 1 and 12 inclusive.

 <cmd>--year</cmd>=<var>year</var>

Specifies the year that is selected in the calendar dialog.

 <cmd>--date-format</cmd>=<var>format</var>

Specifies the format that is returned from the calendar dialog after date selection. The default format depends on your locale. Format must be a format that is acceptable to the strftime function, for example %A %d/%m/%y.

The following example script shows how to create a calendar dialog:

#!/bin/sh if zenity --calendar \ --title="Select a Date" \ --text="Click on a date to select that date." \ --day=10 --month=8 --year=2004 then echo $? else echo "No date selected" fi
Calendar Dialog Example Zenity calendar dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/zenity/legal.xml0000644000373100047300000000717012320470041022612 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. You can find a copy of the GFDL at this link or in the file COPYING-DOCS distributed with this manual. This manual is part of a collection of GNOME manuals distributed under the GFDL. If you want to distribute this manual separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the license to the manual, as described in section 6 of the license. Many of the names used by companies to distinguish their products and services are claimed as trademarks. Where those names appear in any GNOME documentation, and the members of the GNOME Documentation Project are made aware of those trademarks, then the names are in capital letters or initial capital letters. DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THE GNU FREE DOCUMENTATION LICENSE WITH THE FURTHER UNDERSTANDING THAT: DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL WRITER, AUTHOR OR ANY CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER; AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL THE AUTHOR, INITIAL WRITER, ANY CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE DOCUMENT OR MODIFIED VERSION OF THE DOCUMENT, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER DAMAGES OR LOSSES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO USE OF THE DOCUMENT AND MODIFIED VERSIONS OF THE DOCUMENT, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. usr/share/help-langpack/oc/zenity/question.page0000644000373100047300000000147412320470041023512 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --question option. Question Dialog

Use the --question option to create a question dialog.

The following example script shows how to create a question dialog:

#!/bin/bash zenity --question \ --text="Are you sure you wish to proceed?"
Question Dialog Example Zenity question dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/zenity/forms.page0000644000373100047300000000423512320470040022766 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --forms option. Forms Dialog

Use the --forms option to create a forms dialog.

The forms dialog supports the following options:

<cmd>--add-entry</cmd>=<var>FieldName</var>

Add a new Entry in forms dialog.

 --add-password<cmd/>=<var>FieldName</var>

Add a new Password Entry in forms dialog. (Hide text)

 <cmd>--add-calendar</cmd>=<var>FieldName</var>

Add a new Calendar in forms dialog.

 <cmd>--text</cmd>=<var>TEXT</var>

Set the dialog text.

 <cmd>--separator</cmd>=<var>SEPARATOR</var>

Set output separator character. (Default: | )

 <cmd>--forms-date-format</cmd>=<var>PATTERN</var>

Set the format for the returned date. The default format depends on your locale. format must be a Format that is acceptable to the strftime function, for example %A %d/%m/%y.

The following example script shows how to create a forms dialog:

#!/bin/sh zenity --forms --title="Add Friend" \ --text="Enter information about your friend." \ --separator="," \ --add-entry="First Name" \ --add-entry="Family Name" \ --add-entry="Email" \ --add-calendar="Birthday" >> addr.csv case $? in 0) echo "Friend added.";; 1) echo "No friend added." ;; -1) echo "An unexpected error has occurred." ;; esac
Forms Dialog Example Zenity forms dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/zenity/scale.page0000644000373100047300000000374412320470041022734 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --scale option. Scale Dialog

Use the --scale option to create a scale dialog.

The scale dialog supports the following options:

<cmd>--text</cmd>=<var>TEXT</var>

Set the dialog text. (Default: Adjust the scale value)

 <cmd>--value</cmd>=<var>VALUE</var>

Set initial value. (Default: 0) You must specify value between minimum value to maximum value.

 <cmd>--min-value</cmd>=<var>VALUE</var>

Set minimum value. (Default: 0)

 <cmd>--max-value</cmd>=<var>VALUE</var>

Set maximum value. (Default: 100)

 <cmd>--step</cmd>=<var>VALUE</var>

Set step size. (Default: 1)

 <cmd>--print-partial</cmd>

Print value to standard output, whenever a value is changed.

<cmd>--hide-value</cmd>

Hide value on dialog.

The following example script shows how to create a scale dialog:

#!/bin/sh VALUE=`zenity --scale --text="Select window transparency." --value=50` case $? in 0) echo "You selected $VALUE%.";; 1) echo "No value selected.";; -1) echo "An unexpected error has occurred.";; esac
Scale Dialog Example Zenity scale dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/zenity/usage.page0000644000373100047300000002023012320470041022736 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 You can use Zenity to create simple dialogs that interact graphically with the user. Utilizacion

When you write scripts, you can use Zenity to create simple dialogs that interact graphically with the user, as follows:

You can create a dialog to obtain information from the user. For example, you can prompt the user to select a date from a calendar dialog, or to select a file from a file selection dialog.

You can create a dialog to provide the user with information. For example, you can use a progress dialog to indicate the current status of an operation, or use a warning message dialog to alert the user.

When the user closes the dialog, Zenity prints the text produced by the dialog to standard output.

When you write Zenity commands, ensure that you place quotation marks around each argument.

For example, use:

zenity --calendar --title="Holiday Planner"

Do not use:

zenity --calendar --title=Holiday Planner

If you do not use quotation marks, you might get unexpected results.

Access Keys

An access key is a key that enables you to perform an action from the keyboard rather than use the mouse to choose a command from a menu or dialog. Each access key is identified by an underlined letter on a menu or dialog option.

Some Zenity dialogs support the use of access keys. To specify the character to use as the access key, place an underscore before that character in the text of the dialog. The following example shows how to specify the letter 'C' as the access key:

"_Choose a name".
Exit Codes

Zenity returns the following exit codes:

Exit Code

Descripcion

0

The user has pressed either OK or Close.

1

The user has either pressed Cancel, or used the window functions to close the dialog.

-1

An unexpected error has occurred.

5

The dialog has been closed because the timeout has been reached.
Opcions generalas

All Zenity dialogs support the following general options:

<cmd>--title</cmd>=<var>title</var>

Specifies the title of a dialog.

 <cmd>--window-icon</cmd>=<var>icon_path</var>

Specifies the icon that is displayed in the window frame of the dialog. There are 4 stock icons also available by providing the following keywords - 'info', 'warning', 'question' and 'error'.

<cmd>--width</cmd>=<var>width</var>

Specifies the width of the dialog.

 <cmd>--height</cmd>=<var>height</var>

Specifies the height of the dialog.

 <cmd>--timeout</cmd>=<var>timeout</var>

Specifies the timeout in seconds after which the dialog is closed.
Opcions d'ajuda

Zenity provides the following help options:

<cmd>--help</cmd>

Displays shortened help text.

 <cmd>--help-all</cmd>

Displays full help text for all dialogs.

 <cmd>--help-general</cmd>

Displays help text for general dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-calendar</cmd>

Displays help text for calendar dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-entry</cmd>

Displays help text for text entry dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-error</cmd>

Displays help text for error dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-info</cmd>

Displays help text for information dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-file-selection</cmd>

Displays help text for file selection dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-list</cmd>

Displays help text for list dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-notification</cmd>

Displays help text for notification icon options.

 <cmd>--help-progress</cmd>

Displays help text for progress dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-question</cmd>

Displays help text for question dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-warning</cmd>

Displays help text for warning dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-text-info</cmd>

Displays help for text information dialog options.

 <cmd>--help-misc</cmd>

Displays help for miscellaneous options.

 <cmd>--help-gtk</cmd>

Visualiza l'ajuda per las opcion GTK+.
Miscellaneous Options

Zenity also provides the following miscellaneous options:

<cmd>--about</cmd>

Displays the About Zenity dialog, which contains Zenity version information, copyright information, and developer information.

 <cmd>--version</cmd>

Displays the version number of Zenity.
Opcions GTK+

Zenity supports the standard GTK+ options. For more information about the GTK+ options, execute the zenity --help-gtk command.

Environment Variables

Normally, Zenity detects the terminal window from which it was launched and keeps itself above that window. This behavior can be disabled by unsetting the WINDOWID environment variable.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/zenity/file-selection.page0000644000373100047300000000405612320470040024543 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --file-selection option. File Selection Dialog

Use the --file-selection option to create a file selection dialog. Zenity returns the selected files or directories to standard output. The default mode of the file selection dialog is open.

The file selection dialog supports the following options:

<cmd>--filename</cmd>=<var>filename</var>

Specifies the file or directory that is selected in the file selection dialog when the dialog is first shown.

 <cmd>--multiple</cmd>

Allows the selection of multiple filenames in the file selection dialog.

 <cmd>--directory</cmd>

Allows only selection of directories in the file selection dialog.

 <cmd>--save</cmd>

Set the file selection dialog into save mode.

 <cmd>--separator</cmd>=<var>separator</var>

Specifies the string that is used to divide the returned list of filenames.

The following example script shows how to create a file selection dialog:

#!/bin/sh FILE=`zenity --file-selection --title="Select a File"` case $? in 0) echo "\"$FILE\" selected.";; 1) echo "No file selected.";; -1) echo "An unexpected error has occurred.";; esac
File Selection Dialog Example Zenity file selection dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/zenity/list.page0000644000373100047300000000527512320470040022620 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --list option. List Dialog

Use the --list option to create a list dialog. Zenity returns the entries in the first column of text of selected rows to standard output.

Data for the dialog must specified column by column, row by row. Data can be provided to the dialog through standard input. Each entry must be separated by a newline character.

If you use the --checklist or --radiolist options, each row must start with either 'TRUE' or 'FALSE'.

The list dialog supports the following options:

<cmd>--column</cmd>=<var>column</var>

Specifies the column headers that are displayed in the list dialog. You must specify a --column option for each column that you want to display in the dialog.

<cmd>--checklist</cmd>

Specifies that the first column in the list dialog contains check boxes.

<cmd>--radiolist</cmd>

Specifies that the first column in the list dialog contains radio boxes.

<cmd>--editable</cmd>

Autorizar la modificacion dels elements visualizats.

 <cmd>--separator</cmd>=<var>separator</var>

Specifies what string is used when the list dialog returns the selected entries.

<cmd>--print-column</cmd>=<var>column</var>

Specifies what column should be printed out upon selection. The default column is '1'. 'ALL' can be used to print out all columns in the list.

The following example script shows how to create a list dialog:

#!/bin/sh zenity --list \ --title="Choose the Bugs You Wish to View" \ --column="Bug Number" --column="Severity" --column="Description" \ 992383 Normal "GtkTreeView crashes on multiple selections" \ 293823 High "GNOME Dictionary does not handle proxy" \ 393823 Critical "Menu editing does not work in GNOME 2.0"
List Dialog Example Zenity list dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/zenity/info.page0000644000373100047300000000151012320470041022565 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --info option. Info Dialog

Use the --info option to create an information dialog.

The following example script shows how to create an information dialog:

#!/bin/bash zenity --info \ --text="Merge complete. Updated 3 of 10 files."
Information Dialog Example Zenity information dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/zenity/message.page0000644000373100047300000000111212320470041023254 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Error, Info, Question, Warning Message Dialog

For each type, use the --text option to specify the text that is displayed in the dialog.

usr/share/help-langpack/oc/zenity/warning.page0000644000373100047300000000150512320470040023302 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --warning option. Warning Dialog

Use the --warning option to create a warning dialog.

The following example script shows how to create a warning dialog:

#!/bin/bash zenity --warning \ --text="Disconnect the power cable to avoid electrical shock."
Warning Dialog Example Zenity warning dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/zenity/intro.page0000644000373100047300000000201512320470041022766 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Zenity enables you to create the various types of simple dialog. Introduccion

Zenity enables you to create the following types of simple dialog:

Calendièr

Seleccion de fichièrs

Forms

Tièra

Icòna de notificacion

Messatge

Error

Entresenhas

Question

Alèrta

Password entry

Avançament

Text entry

Text information

Scale

Color selection

 usr/share/help-langpack/oc/zenity/error.page0000644000373100047300000000144412320470041022771 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --error option. Error Dialog

Use the --error option to create an error dialog.

The following example script shows how to create an error dialog:

#!/bin/bash zenity --error \ --text="Could not find /var/log/syslog."
Error Dialog Example Zenity error dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/zenity/entry.page0000644000373100047300000000303712320470040023000 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Use the --entry option. Text Entry Dialog

Use the --entry option to create a text entry dialog. Zenity returns the contents of the text entry to standard output.

The text entry dialog supports the following options:

<cmd>--text</cmd>=<var>text</var>

Specifies the text that is displayed in the text entry dialog.

 <cmd>--entry-text</cmd>=<var>text</var>

Specifies the text that is displayed in the entry field of the text entry dialog.

 <cmd>--hide-text</cmd>

Hides the text in the entry field of the text entry dialog.

The following example script shows how to create a text entry dialog:

#!/bin/sh if zenity --entry \ --title="Add new profile" \ --text="Enter name of new profile:" \ --entry-text "NewProfile" then echo $? else echo "No name entered" fi
Text Entry Dialog Example Zenity text entry dialog example
usr/share/help-langpack/oc/zenity/index.page0000644000373100047300000000144512320470041022750 0ustar langpacklangpack00000000000000 Sun Java Desktop System Documentation Team Glynn Foster Nicholas Curran Yasumichi Akahoshi yasumichi@vinelinux.org

GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL)

 Manual de Zenity
Dialogs
language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/0000755000000000000000000000000012743727041014376 5ustar language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/LC_MESSAGES/0000755000000000000000000000000012743727055016170 5ustar language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/LC_MESSAGES/gdk-pixbuf.po0000644000000000000000000007673312743727041020603 0ustar # Translation of oc.po to Occitan # Occitan translation of gtk+ 2.x. # Copyright (C) 1998-2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This file is distributed under the GNU Library General Public License Version 2. # # Yannig Marchegay (Kokoyaya) , 2006-2008. msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: oc\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=gdk-" "pixbuf\n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-03-17 15:21-0400\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-03-14 06:32+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Cédric VALMARY (Tot en òc) \n" "Language-Team: Occitan \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n > 1;\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2016-07-20 11:52+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 18147)\n" "Language: oc\n" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-animation.c:156 gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:1084 #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:1340 #, c-format msgid "Failed to open file '%s': %s" msgstr "Impossible de dobrir lo fichièr « %s » : %s" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-animation.c:169 gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:969 #, c-format msgid "Image file '%s' contains no data" msgstr "Lo fichièr imatge '%s' conten pas de donadas" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-animation.c:207 #, c-format msgid "" "Failed to load animation '%s': reason not known, probably a corrupt " "animation file" msgstr "" "Impossible de cargar l'animacion '%s' : rason desconeguda, probable que siá " "corrompuda" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-animation.c:275 gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:1120 #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:1392 #, c-format msgid "" "Failed to load image '%s': reason not known, probably a corrupt image file" msgstr "" "Impossible de cargar l'imatge '%s' : rason desconeguda, probable qu'es " "corromput" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:781 #, c-format msgid "Unable to load image-loading module: %s: %s" msgstr "Impossible de cargar lo modul de cargament d'imatges : %s : %s" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:796 #, c-format msgid "" "Image-loading module %s does not export the proper interface; perhaps it's " "from a different gdk-pixbuf version?" msgstr "" "Lo modul de cargament d'imatges %s expòrta pas la bona interfàcia ; benlèu " "que proven d'una version diferenta de gdk-pixbuf ?" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:805 gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:856 #, c-format msgid "Image type '%s' is not supported" msgstr "Tipe d'imatge '%s' pas compatible" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:941 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't recognize the image file format for file '%s'" msgstr "Impossible de reconéisser lo format d'imatge del fichièr '%s'" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:949 msgid "Unrecognized image file format" msgstr "Format d'imatge pas reconegut" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:1131 #, c-format msgid "Failed to load image '%s': %s" msgstr "Impossible de cargar l'imatge '%s' : %s" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:2161 gdk-pixbuf/io-gdip-utils.c:838 #, c-format msgid "Error writing to image file: %s" msgstr "Error al moment d'escriure lo fichièr d'imatge : %s" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:2203 gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:2324 #, c-format msgid "This build of gdk-pixbuf does not support saving the image format: %s" msgstr "" "Aquesta version de gdk-pixbug gerís pas l'enregistrament al format " "d'imatge : %s" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:2234 msgid "Insufficient memory to save image to callback" msgstr "I a pas pro de memòria per salvar l'imatge per la foncion de rapèl" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:2247 msgid "Failed to open temporary file" msgstr "Impossible de dobrir lo fichièr temporari" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:2270 msgid "Failed to read from temporary file" msgstr "Lectura impossibla a partir del fichièr temporari" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:2520 #, c-format msgid "Failed to open '%s' for writing: %s" msgstr "La dobèrtura de '%s' en escritura a pas capitat : %s" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:2546 #, c-format msgid "" "Failed to close '%s' while writing image, all data may not have been saved: " "%s" msgstr "" "Impossible de tampar '%s' al moment d'escriure l'imatge, es possible que " "totas las donadas sián pas estadas enregistradas : %s" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:2767 gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:2819 msgid "Insufficient memory to save image into a buffer" msgstr "Memòria insufisenta per enregistrar l'imatge dins la memòria tampon" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-io.c:2865 msgid "Error writing to image stream" msgstr "Error al moment d'escriure lo fichièr d'imatge" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-loader.c:382 #, c-format msgid "" "Internal error: Image loader module '%s' failed to complete an operation, " "but didn't give a reason for the failure" msgstr "" "Error intèrna : lo modul de cargament d'imatges '%s' a pas capitat d'acabar " "una operacion mas n'a pas balhat la rason." #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixbuf-loader.c:424 #, c-format msgid "Incremental loading of image type '%s' is not supported" msgstr "Lo cargament progressiu d'imatges de tipe '%s' es pas suportat" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixdata.c:165 msgid "Image header corrupt" msgstr "Entèsta d'imatge corrompuda" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixdata.c:170 msgid "Image format unknown" msgstr "Format d'imatge desconegut" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixdata.c:175 gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixdata.c:513 msgid "Image pixel data corrupt" msgstr "Donadas dels pixels de l'imatge corrompudas" #: gdk-pixbuf/gdk-pixdata.c:457 #, c-format msgid "failed to allocate image buffer of %u byte" msgid_plural "failed to allocate image buffer of %u bytes" msgstr[0] "Es pas possible d'atribuir un tampon de %u octet per l'imatge" msgstr[1] "Es pas possible d'atribuir un tampon de %u octets per l'imatge" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ani.c:242 msgid "Unexpected icon chunk in animation" msgstr "Tròç (chunk) d'icòna parasita dins l'animacion" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ani.c:340 gdk-pixbuf/io-ani.c:398 gdk-pixbuf/io-ani.c:424 #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ani.c:447 gdk-pixbuf/io-ani.c:474 gdk-pixbuf/io-ani.c:561 msgid "Invalid header in animation" msgstr "Entèsta pas valida dins l'animacion" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ani.c:350 gdk-pixbuf/io-ani.c:372 gdk-pixbuf/io-ani.c:456 #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ani.c:483 gdk-pixbuf/io-ani.c:534 gdk-pixbuf/io-ani.c:606 msgid "Not enough memory to load animation" msgstr "Memòria insufisenta per cargar l'animacion" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ani.c:390 gdk-pixbuf/io-ani.c:416 gdk-pixbuf/io-ani.c:435 msgid "Malformed chunk in animation" msgstr "Tròç (chunk) mal fach dins l'animacion" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ani.c:628 msgid "ANI image was truncated or incomplete." msgstr "L'imatge ANI es troncada o incompleta." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ani.c:705 msgid "The ANI image format" msgstr "Lo format d'imatge ANI" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-bmp.c:227 gdk-pixbuf/io-bmp.c:264 gdk-pixbuf/io-bmp.c:358 #: gdk-pixbuf/io-bmp.c:381 gdk-pixbuf/io-bmp.c:484 msgid "BMP image has bogus header data" msgstr "L'imatge BMP a un entèsta de pagina erronèa" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-bmp.c:238 gdk-pixbuf/io-bmp.c:421 msgid "Not enough memory to load bitmap image" msgstr "Memòria insufisenta per cargar l'imatge bitmap" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-bmp.c:316 msgid "BMP image has unsupported header size" msgstr "La talha de l'entèsta de pagina de l'imatge BMP es tròp importanta." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-bmp.c:345 msgid "Topdown BMP images cannot be compressed" msgstr "Impossible de compressar las imatges BMP Topdown" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-bmp.c:705 gdk-pixbuf/io-png.c:531 gdk-pixbuf/io-pnm.c:705 msgid "Premature end-of-file encountered" msgstr "Fin de fichièr pas prevista" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-bmp.c:1317 msgid "Couldn't allocate memory for saving BMP file" msgstr "Es pas possible d'atribuir de memòria pel salvament del fichièr BMP" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-bmp.c:1358 msgid "Couldn't write to BMP file" msgstr "Impossible d'escriure lo fichièr BMP" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-bmp.c:1422 gdk-pixbuf/io-gdip-bmp.c:82 msgid "The BMP image format" msgstr "Lo format d'imatge BMP" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gdip-emf.c:59 msgid "The EMF image format" msgstr "Lo format d'imatge EMF" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gdip-gif.c:80 gdk-pixbuf/io-gif.c:1699 msgid "The GIF image format" msgstr "Lo format d'imatge GIF" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gdip-ico.c:59 gdk-pixbuf/io-ico.c:1271 msgid "The ICO image format" msgstr "Lo format d'imatge ICO" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gdip-jpeg.c:54 gdk-pixbuf/io-jpeg.c:1297 #, c-format msgid "" "JPEG quality must be a value between 0 and 100; value '%s' could not be " "parsed." msgstr "" "La qualitat de JPEG deu èsser una valor entre 0 e 100 ; la valor '%s' se pòt " "pas interpretar." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gdip-jpeg.c:69 gdk-pixbuf/io-jpeg.c:1313 #, c-format msgid "" "JPEG quality must be a value between 0 and 100; value '%d' is not allowed." msgstr "" "La qualitat de JPEG deu èsser una valor entre 0 e 100 ; la valor '%d' es pas " "autorizada." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gdip-jpeg.c:136 gdk-pixbuf/io-jpeg.c:1316 msgid "The JPEG image format" msgstr "Lo format d'imatge JPEG" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tiff.c:868 msgid "The TIFF image format" msgstr "Lo format d'imatge TIFF" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gdip-utils.c:155 #, c-format msgid "Could not allocate memory: %s" msgstr "Impossible d'atribuîr de memòria : %s" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gdip-utils.c:180 gdk-pixbuf/io-gdip-utils.c:294 #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gdip-utils.c:334 #, c-format msgid "Could not create stream: %s" msgstr "Impossible de crear lo flux : %s" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gdip-utils.c:194 #, c-format msgid "Could not seek stream: %s" msgstr "Impossible de se posicionar dins lo flux : %s" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gdip-utils.c:206 #, c-format msgid "Could not read from stream: %s" msgstr "Impossible de legir dins lo flux : %s" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gdip-utils.c:618 msgid "Couldn't load bitmap" msgstr "Impossible d'apondre lo bitmap" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gdip-utils.c:774 msgid "Couldn't load metafile" msgstr "Impossible de cargar lo metafichièr" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gdip-utils.c:879 msgid "Unsupported image format for GDI+" msgstr "GDI+ gerís pas aqueste tipe d'imatge" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gdip-utils.c:886 msgid "Couldn't save" msgstr "Impossible d'enregistrar" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gdip-wmf.c:58 msgid "The WMF image format" msgstr "Lo format d'imatge WMF" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gif.c:220 #, c-format msgid "Failure reading GIF: %s" msgstr "La lectura del fichièr GIP a pas capitat : %s" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gif.c:494 gdk-pixbuf/io-gif.c:1501 gdk-pixbuf/io-gif.c:1668 msgid "GIF file was missing some data (perhaps it was truncated somehow?)" msgstr "" "I a de mancas de donadas dins lo fichièr GIF. Benlèu foguèt troncat ?" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gif.c:503 #, c-format msgid "Internal error in the GIF loader (%s)" msgstr "Error intèrna dins lo cargador GIF (%s)" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gif.c:577 msgid "Stack overflow" msgstr "Desbordament de la pila" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gif.c:637 msgid "GIF image loader cannot understand this image." msgstr "Lo cargador d'imatge GIF pòt pas comprene aqueste imatge." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gif.c:666 msgid "Bad code encountered" msgstr "Còde invalid" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gif.c:676 msgid "Circular table entry in GIF file" msgstr "Entrada de taula circulara dins lo fichèr GIF" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gif.c:864 gdk-pixbuf/io-gif.c:1487 gdk-pixbuf/io-gif.c:1540 #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gif.c:1656 msgid "Not enough memory to load GIF file" msgstr "Pas pro de memòria per cargar lo fichièr GIF" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gif.c:958 msgid "Not enough memory to composite a frame in GIF file" msgstr "Pas pro de memòria per crear un quadre dins lo fichièr GIF" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gif.c:1130 msgid "GIF image is corrupt (incorrect LZW compression)" msgstr "L'imatge GIF es corrompuda (compression LZW incorrècta)" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gif.c:1180 msgid "File does not appear to be a GIF file" msgstr "Sembla que lo fichièr es pas al format GIF" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gif.c:1192 #, c-format msgid "Version %s of the GIF file format is not supported" msgstr "La version %s d'aqueste format de fichièr GIF es pas compatibla" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gif.c:1239 msgid "Resulting GIF image has zero size" msgstr "L'imatge GIF resultant a un talha nulla" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gif.c:1318 msgid "" "GIF image has no global colormap, and a frame inside it has no local " "colormap." msgstr "" "L'imatge GIF a pas cap de paleta de colors globalas e un teissum (trama) " "intèrne a pas de paleta de colors locala." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-gif.c:1563 msgid "GIF image was truncated or incomplete." msgstr "L'imatge GIF èra troncat o incomplet." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-icns.c:358 #, c-format msgid "Error reading ICNS image: %s" msgstr "Error de lectura de l'imatge ICNS : %s" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-icns.c:375 gdk-pixbuf/io-icns.c:452 msgid "Could not decode ICNS file" msgstr "Impossible de desencodar l'imatge ICNS" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-icns.c:397 msgid "The ICNS image format" msgstr "Lo format d'imatge ICNS" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ico.c:226 gdk-pixbuf/io-ico.c:240 gdk-pixbuf/io-ico.c:291 #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ico.c:302 gdk-pixbuf/io-ico.c:386 msgid "Invalid header in icon" msgstr "Entèsta valida dins l'icòna" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ico.c:255 gdk-pixbuf/io-ico.c:312 gdk-pixbuf/io-ico.c:396 #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ico.c:449 gdk-pixbuf/io-ico.c:479 msgid "Not enough memory to load icon" msgstr "Pas pro de memòria per cargar l'icòna" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ico.c:338 msgid "Compressed icons are not supported" msgstr "Las icònas compressadas son pas geridas" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ico.c:358 msgid "Icon has zero width" msgstr "L'icòna a una largor nulla" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ico.c:368 msgid "Icon has zero height" msgstr "L'icòna a una nautor nula" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ico.c:434 msgid "Unsupported icon type" msgstr "Tipe d'icòna pas compatible" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ico.c:528 msgid "Not enough memory to load ICO file" msgstr "Pas pro de memòria per cargar lo fichièr ICO" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ico.c:993 msgid "Image too large to be saved as ICO" msgstr "Imatges tròp bèls per èsser enregistrats coma ICO" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ico.c:1004 msgid "Cursor hotspot outside image" msgstr "Lo punt de referéncia del cursor (hotspot) es en defòra de l'imatge." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ico.c:1027 #, c-format msgid "Unsupported depth for ICO file: %d" msgstr "" "La prigondor de las colors es pas presa en carga pel fichièr ICO : %d" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-jasper.c:73 msgid "Couldn't allocate memory for stream" msgstr "Impossible d'atribuir de memòria pel flux" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-jasper.c:103 msgid "Couldn't decode image" msgstr "Impossible de desencodar l'imatge" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-jasper.c:121 msgid "Transformed JPEG2000 has zero width or height" msgstr "Lo JPEG2000 trasformat a una largor o una nautor nulla" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-jasper.c:135 msgid "Image type currently not supported" msgstr "Aqueste tipe d'imatge es pas gerida pel moment" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-jasper.c:147 gdk-pixbuf/io-jasper.c:155 msgid "Couldn't allocate memory for color profile" msgstr "Impossible d'atribuir de memòria pel perfil de colors" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-jasper.c:181 msgid "Insufficient memory to open JPEG 2000 file" msgstr "Memòria insufisenta per dobrir lo fichièr JPEG 2000" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-jasper.c:260 msgid "Couldn't allocate memory to buffer image data" msgstr "Impossible d'allogar de memòria pel tampon de donadas d'imatge" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-jasper.c:305 msgid "The JPEG 2000 image format" msgstr "Lo format d'imatge JPEG 2000" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-jpeg.c:124 #, c-format msgid "Error interpreting JPEG image file (%s)" msgstr "Error d'interpretacion del fichièr d'imatge JPEG (%s)" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-jpeg.c:600 msgid "" "Insufficient memory to load image, try exiting some applications to free " "memory" msgstr "" "Memòria insufisenta per cargar l'imatge, ensajatz de sortir d'aplicacions " "per liberar de memòria" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-jpeg.c:669 gdk-pixbuf/io-jpeg.c:882 #, c-format msgid "Unsupported JPEG color space (%s)" msgstr "Espaci de color JPEG pas compatible (%s)" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-jpeg.c:781 gdk-pixbuf/io-jpeg.c:1062 gdk-pixbuf/io-jpeg.c:1398 #: gdk-pixbuf/io-jpeg.c:1408 msgid "Couldn't allocate memory for loading JPEG file" msgstr "Impossible d'atribuir de memòria per cargar lo fichièr JPEG" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-jpeg.c:1036 msgid "Transformed JPEG has zero width or height." msgstr "Lo PNG transformat a una largor o una nautor nulla." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-jpeg.c:1369 #, c-format msgid "Color profile has invalid length '%u'." msgstr "La longor « %u » del perfil de color es pas valabla." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pcx.c:184 msgid "Couldn't allocate memory for header" msgstr "Es pas possible d'atribuïr de memòria per l'entèsta" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pcx.c:199 gdk-pixbuf/io-pcx.c:557 msgid "Couldn't allocate memory for context buffer" msgstr "" "Es pas possible d'atribuir de memòria pel tampon de contèxte (context buffer)" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pcx.c:598 msgid "Image has invalid width and/or height" msgstr "L'imatge a una largor o una nautor invalida" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pcx.c:610 gdk-pixbuf/io-pcx.c:671 msgid "Image has unsupported bpp" msgstr "L'imatge a una prigondor de colors qu'es pas presa en carga" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pcx.c:615 gdk-pixbuf/io-pcx.c:623 #, c-format msgid "Image has unsupported number of %d-bit planes" msgstr "L'imatge a un nombre de plans %d-bit pas preses en carga" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pcx.c:639 msgid "Couldn't create new pixbuf" msgstr "Impossible de crear un pixbuf novèl" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pcx.c:647 msgid "Couldn't allocate memory for line data" msgstr "Es pas possible de preveire de memòria per las donadas de linhas" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pcx.c:654 msgid "Couldn't allocate memory for PCX image" msgstr "Impossible d'atribuir de memòria per l'imatge PCX" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pcx.c:701 msgid "Didn't get all lines of PCX image" msgstr "Impossible d'obténer totas las linhas de l'imatge PCX" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pcx.c:708 msgid "No palette found at end of PCX data" msgstr "Pas cap de paleta trobada a la fin de las donadas PCX" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pcx.c:755 msgid "The PCX image format" msgstr "Lo format d'imatge PCX" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pixdata.c:150 msgid "Transformed pixbuf has zero width or height." msgstr "Lo pixbuf transformat a una largor o una nautor nulla." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pixdata.c:186 msgid "The GdkPixdata format" msgstr "Lo format GdkPixdata" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-png.c:54 msgid "Bits per channel of PNG image is invalid." msgstr "Lo nombre de bits per canal de l'imatge PNG es pas valid." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-png.c:135 gdk-pixbuf/io-png.c:671 msgid "Transformed PNG has zero width or height." msgstr "Lo PNG transformat a una largor o una nautor nulla." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-png.c:143 msgid "Bits per channel of transformed PNG is not 8." msgstr "Lo nombre de bits del PNG transformat es pas 8." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-png.c:152 msgid "Transformed PNG not RGB or RGBA." msgstr "" "Lo PNG (Portable Network Graphics) transformat es pas RVB, nimai RVBA." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-png.c:161 msgid "Transformed PNG has unsupported number of channels, must be 3 or 4." msgstr "" "Lo PNG (Portable Network Graphics) a un nombre de canals qu'es pas suportat, " "cal que siá 3 o 4." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-png.c:182 #, c-format msgid "Fatal error in PNG image file: %s" msgstr "Error fatala dins lo fichièr d'imatge PNG : %s" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-png.c:320 msgid "Insufficient memory to load PNG file" msgstr "Memòria insufisenta per cargar lo fichièr PNG" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-png.c:686 #, c-format msgid "" "Insufficient memory to store a %lu by %lu image; try exiting some " "applications to reduce memory usage" msgstr "" "Memòria insufisenta per emmagazinar un imatge de %lu sus %lu ; ensajatz de " "quitar qualques aplicacions per reduire la memòria ocupada" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-png.c:762 msgid "Fatal error reading PNG image file" msgstr "Error fatala al moment de legir un imatge PNG" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-png.c:812 #, c-format msgid "Fatal error reading PNG image file: %s" msgstr "Error fatala al moment de legir lo fichièr d'imatge PNG : %s" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-png.c:904 msgid "" "Keys for PNG text chunks must have at least 1 and at most 79 characters." msgstr "" "Las claus pels tròces (CHUNK) de tèxte PNG (Portable Network Graphics) devon " "conténer entre 1 e 79 caractèrs." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-png.c:913 msgid "Keys for PNG text chunks must be ASCII characters." msgstr "" "Cal que las claus pels tròces de tèxtes PNG (chunks) sián de caractèrs ASCII." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-png.c:927 gdk-pixbuf/io-tiff.c:796 #, c-format msgid "Color profile has invalid length %d." msgstr "La longor %d del perfil de color es pas valabla." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-png.c:940 #, c-format msgid "" "PNG compression level must be a value between 0 and 9; value '%s' could not " "be parsed." msgstr "" "Cal que lo nivèl de compression PNG siá entre 0 e 9 ; la valor '%s' se pòt " "pas interpretar." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-png.c:953 #, c-format msgid "" "PNG compression level must be a value between 0 and 9; value '%d' is not " "allowed." msgstr "" "Lo nivèl de compression PNG deu èsser una valor entre 0 e 9 ; la valor '%d' " "es pas autorizada." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-png.c:1041 #, c-format msgid "" "Value for PNG text chunk %s cannot be converted to ISO-8859-1 encoding." msgstr "" "La valor pel tròç de tèxte (chunk) PNG %s se pòt pas transformar dins " "l'encodatge ISO-8859-1." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-png.c:1122 msgid "The PNG image format" msgstr "Lo format d'imatge PNG" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pnm.c:246 msgid "PNM loader expected to find an integer, but didn't" msgstr "" "L'aisina de cargament de PNM (format portable anymap PPM,PGM,PBM) esperava " "un entièr, mas es pas estat lo cas" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pnm.c:278 msgid "PNM file has an incorrect initial byte" msgstr "Lo fichièr PNM a un octet inicial incorrècte" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pnm.c:308 msgid "PNM file is not in a recognized PNM subformat" msgstr "Lo fichièr PNM es pas un sosformat PNM reconegut" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pnm.c:333 msgid "PNM file has an image width of 0" msgstr "La largor d'imatge del fichièr es de 0" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pnm.c:354 msgid "PNM file has an image height of 0" msgstr "La nautor d'imatge del fichièr PNM es 0" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pnm.c:377 msgid "Maximum color value in PNM file is 0" msgstr "La valor maximala de color dins lo fichièr PNM es 0" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pnm.c:385 msgid "Maximum color value in PNM file is too large" msgstr "La valor maximala de color dins lo fichièr PNM es tròp larga" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pnm.c:425 gdk-pixbuf/io-pnm.c:455 gdk-pixbuf/io-pnm.c:500 msgid "Raw PNM image type is invalid" msgstr "Lo tipe d'imatge PNM brut es pas valid" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pnm.c:650 msgid "PNM image loader does not support this PNM subformat" msgstr "" "Lo cargador d'imatge PNM (Portable aNyMap) pòt pas gerir aqueste sosformat " "PNM" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pnm.c:737 gdk-pixbuf/io-pnm.c:964 msgid "Raw PNM formats require exactly one whitespace before sample data" msgstr "" "Los formats bruts PNM (Portable aNyMap) necessitan exactament un espaci " "abans las donadas" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pnm.c:764 msgid "Cannot allocate memory for loading PNM image" msgstr "Es pas possible d'atribuîr de memòria pel cargament de l'imatge PNM" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pnm.c:814 msgid "Insufficient memory to load PNM context struct" msgstr "Memòria insufisenta per cargar l'estructura de contèxte PNM" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pnm.c:865 msgid "Unexpected end of PNM image data" msgstr "Fin pas prevista de las donadas de l'imatge PNM" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pnm.c:993 msgid "Insufficient memory to load PNM file" msgstr "Memòria insufisenta per cargar lo fichièr PNM" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-pnm.c:1079 msgid "The PNM/PBM/PGM/PPM image format family" msgstr "La familha de format d'imatge PNM/PBM/PGM/PPM" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-qtif.c:126 msgid "Input file descriptor is NULL." msgstr "Lo descriptor del fichièr d'entrada es NULL." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-qtif.c:141 msgid "Failed to read QTIF header" msgstr "Impossible de legir l'entèsta QTIF" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-qtif.c:150 gdk-pixbuf/io-qtif.c:187 gdk-pixbuf/io-qtif.c:454 #, c-format msgid "QTIF atom size too large (%d byte)" msgid_plural "QTIF atom size too large (%d bytes)" msgstr[0] "Talha d'atòm QTIF tròp granda (%d octet)" msgstr[1] "Talha d'atòm QTIF tròp granda (%d octets)" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-qtif.c:173 #, c-format msgid "Failed to allocate %d byte for file read buffer" msgid_plural "Failed to allocate %d bytes for file read buffer" msgstr[0] "Fracàs d'allocacion de %d octet pel tampon de lectura del fichièr" msgstr[1] "" "Fracàs d'allocacion de %d octets pel tampon de lectura del fichièr" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-qtif.c:201 #, c-format msgid "File error when reading QTIF atom: %s" msgstr "Error de fichièr al moment de la lectura de l'atòm QTIF : %s" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-qtif.c:238 #, c-format msgid "Failed to skip the next %d byte with seek()." msgid_plural "Failed to skip the next %d bytes with seek()." msgstr[0] "L'octet seguent a pas pogut èsser sautat amb seek()." msgstr[1] "Los %d octets seguents an pas pogut èsser sautats amb seek()." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-qtif.c:265 msgid "Failed to allocate QTIF context structure." msgstr "Fracàs de creacion de l'estructura de contèxte QTIF." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-qtif.c:325 msgid "Failed to create GdkPixbufLoader object." msgstr "Impossible de crear un objècte GdkPixbufLoader." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-qtif.c:429 msgid "Failed to find an image data atom." msgstr "Impossible de trobar un atòm de donadas imatges." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-qtif.c:618 msgid "The QTIF image format" msgstr "Lo format d'imatge TIFF" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ras.c:123 msgid "RAS image has bogus header data" msgstr "" "L'imatge RAS (Remote Access Service) a un error dins son entèsta de pagina" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ras.c:145 msgid "RAS image has unknown type" msgstr "L'imatge RAS a un tipe desconegut" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ras.c:153 msgid "unsupported RAS image variation" msgstr "Tipe d'imatge RAS (Remote Access Service) qu'es pas pres en carga." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ras.c:168 gdk-pixbuf/io-ras.c:197 msgid "Not enough memory to load RAS image" msgstr "Pas pro de memòria per cargar l'imatge RAS" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-ras.c:544 msgid "The Sun raster image format" msgstr "Lo format d'imatge Sun raster" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tga.c:151 msgid "Cannot allocate memory for IOBuffer struct" msgstr "Es pas possible de preveire de memòria per l'estructura del IOBuffer" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tga.c:170 msgid "Cannot allocate memory for IOBuffer data" msgstr "Es pas possible de preveire de memòria per las donadas del IOBuffer" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tga.c:181 msgid "Cannot realloc IOBuffer data" msgstr "" "Es pas possible de tornar preveire de memòria per las donadas del IOBuffer" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tga.c:211 msgid "Cannot allocate temporary IOBuffer data" msgstr "" "Es pas possible d'atribuir de memòria per las donadas temporàrias del " "IOBuffer" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tga.c:383 msgid "Cannot allocate new pixbuf" msgstr "Es pas possible d'atribuïr un pixbuf novèl" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tga.c:678 msgid "Image is corrupted or truncated" msgstr "L'imatge GIF èra troncat o incomplet." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tga.c:685 msgid "Cannot allocate colormap structure" msgstr "Es pas possible d'atribuir d'estructura de paleta de colors" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tga.c:692 msgid "Cannot allocate colormap entries" msgstr "Es pas possible d'atribuir de dintradas de paleta de colors" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tga.c:747 msgid "Unexpected bitdepth for colormap entries" msgstr "" "Prigondor de color qu'èra pas prevista per las entradas de la paleta de " "colors" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tga.c:766 msgid "Cannot allocate TGA header memory" msgstr "" "Es pas possible d'atribuir de memòria per l'entèsta de pagina TGA (fichièr " "imatge Truevision Targa)" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tga.c:799 msgid "TGA image has invalid dimensions" msgstr "Las dimensions de l'imatge TGA son pas validas" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tga.c:805 gdk-pixbuf/io-tga.c:814 gdk-pixbuf/io-tga.c:824 #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tga.c:834 gdk-pixbuf/io-tga.c:841 msgid "TGA image type not supported" msgstr "Tipe d'imatge TGA pas gerit" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tga.c:888 msgid "Cannot allocate memory for TGA context struct" msgstr "" "Es pas possible d'atribuir de memòria per l'estructura de contèxte TGA " "(fichièr imatge Truevision Targa)" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tga.c:953 msgid "Excess data in file" msgstr "Tròp de donadas dins lo fichièr" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tga.c:1007 msgid "The Targa image format" msgstr "Lo format d'imatge Targa" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tiff.c:107 msgid "Could not get image width (bad TIFF file)" msgstr "Impossible d'obténer la largor de l'imatge (fichièr TIFF corromput)" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tiff.c:115 msgid "Could not get image height (bad TIFF file)" msgstr "Impossible d'obténer la nautor de l'imatge (fichièr TIFF corromput)" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tiff.c:123 msgid "Width or height of TIFF image is zero" msgstr "La largor o la nautor del fichièr TIFF es nula" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tiff.c:132 gdk-pixbuf/io-tiff.c:141 msgid "Dimensions of TIFF image too large" msgstr "Dimensions de l'imatge TIFF tròp bèlas" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tiff.c:165 gdk-pixbuf/io-tiff.c:177 gdk-pixbuf/io-tiff.c:535 msgid "Insufficient memory to open TIFF file" msgstr "Memòria insufisenta per dobrir lo fichièr TIFF" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tiff.c:275 msgid "Failed to load RGB data from TIFF file" msgstr "Impossible de cargar donadas RVB a partir del fichièr TIFF" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tiff.c:337 msgid "Failed to open TIFF image" msgstr "Impossible de dobrir l'imatge TIFF" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tiff.c:471 gdk-pixbuf/io-tiff.c:484 msgid "Failed to load TIFF image" msgstr "Impossible de cargar l'imatge TIFF" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tiff.c:710 msgid "Failed to save TIFF image" msgstr "Impossible d'enregistrar l'imatge TIFF" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tiff.c:766 msgid "TIFF compression doesn't refer to a valid codec." msgstr "La compression TIFF se referís pas a un codec valable." #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tiff.c:892 msgid "Failed to write TIFF data" msgstr "Impossible d'escriure las donadas TIFF" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-tiff.c:963 msgid "Couldn't write to TIFF file" msgstr "Impossible d'escriure dins lo fichièr TIFF" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-wbmp.c:243 msgid "Image has zero width" msgstr "L'imatge a una largor nula" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-wbmp.c:261 msgid "Image has zero height" msgstr "L'imatge a una nautor nula" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-wbmp.c:272 msgid "Not enough memory to load image" msgstr "Pas pro de memòria per cargar l'imatge" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-wbmp.c:331 msgid "Couldn't save the rest" msgstr "Es pas possible de salvar çò que demòra" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-wbmp.c:374 msgid "The WBMP image format" msgstr "Lo format d'imatge WBMP" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-xbm.c:302 msgid "Invalid XBM file" msgstr "Fichièr XBM invalid" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-xbm.c:312 msgid "Insufficient memory to load XBM image file" msgstr "Memòria insufisenta per cargar l'imatge XBM" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-xbm.c:460 msgid "Failed to write to temporary file when loading XBM image" msgstr "" "Impossible d'escriure dins lo fichièr temporari al moment de cargar l'imatge " "XBM" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-xbm.c:501 msgid "The XBM image format" msgstr "Lo format d'imatge XBM" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-xpm.c:467 msgid "No XPM header found" msgstr "Impossible de trobar un entèsta XPM" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-xpm.c:476 msgid "Invalid XPM header" msgstr "Fichièr XPM invalid" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-xpm.c:484 msgid "XPM file has image width <= 0" msgstr "Lo fichièr XPM a una largor d'imatge negativa" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-xpm.c:492 msgid "XPM file has image height <= 0" msgstr "Lo fichièr XPM a una nautor d'imatge negativa" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-xpm.c:500 msgid "XPM has invalid number of chars per pixel" msgstr "Lo nombre de caractèrs per pixèl del fichièr XPM es pas valid" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-xpm.c:509 msgid "XPM file has invalid number of colors" msgstr "Lo nombre de colors del fichièr XPM es invalid" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-xpm.c:521 gdk-pixbuf/io-xpm.c:530 gdk-pixbuf/io-xpm.c:582 msgid "Cannot allocate memory for loading XPM image" msgstr "" "Es pas possible d'atribuîr de memòria per cargar l'imatge XPM (format de " "fichièr X PixMap)" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-xpm.c:544 msgid "Cannot read XPM colormap" msgstr "" "Es pas possible de legir la paleta de colors XPM (format de fichièr X PixMap)" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-xpm.c:776 msgid "Failed to write to temporary file when loading XPM image" msgstr "" "L'escritura dins un fichièr temporari al moment de cargar l'imatge XPM a pas " "capitat" #: gdk-pixbuf/io-xpm.c:817 msgid "The XPM image format" msgstr "Lo format d'imatge XPM" language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/LC_MESSAGES/nautilus-sendto.po0000644000000000000000000001603312743727041021664 0ustar # Translation of oc.po to Occitan # Occitan translation of nautilus-sendto # Copyright (C) 2004-2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This file is distributed under the GNU General Public License Version 2. # # Yannig Marchegay (Kokoyaya) , 2006-2008, 2010. msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: oc\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-02-17 20:42+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2010-10-02 06:47+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Yannig MARCHEGAY (Kokoyaya) \n" "Language-Team: Occitan \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2016-07-20 12:37+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 18147)\n" #: ../src/nautilus-nste.c:90 ../src/nautilus-nste.c:95 #: ../src/nautilus-sendto.ui.h:1 msgid "Send To..." msgstr "Mandar a..." #: ../src/nautilus-nste.c:91 msgid "Send file by mail, instant message..." msgstr "Mandar lo fichièr per corrièl, messatge instantanèu..." #: ../src/nautilus-nste.c:96 msgid "Send files by mail, instant message..." msgstr "Mandar los fichièrs per corrièl, messatge instantanèu..." #: ../src/nautilus-sendto-command.c:592 msgid "Files" msgstr "Fichièrs" #: ../src/nautilus-sendto.c:530 #, c-format msgid "Expects URIs or filenames to be passed as options\n" msgstr "Las opcions esperadas son d'URI o de noms de fichièrs\n" #: ../src/nautilus-sendto.c:511 #, c-format msgid "Could not parse command-line options: %s\n" msgstr "Impossible d'analizar las opcions de la linha de comandas : %s\n" #: ../src/nautilus-sendto-command.c:839 msgid "Could not load any plugins." msgstr "Impossible de cargar un empeuton." #: ../src/nautilus-sendto-command.c:842 msgid "Please verify your installation" msgstr "Verificatz vòstra installacion" #: ../src/nautilus-sendto.ui.h:2 msgid "_Send" msgstr "_Mandar" #: ../src/nautilus-sendto.ui.h:3 msgid "Destination" msgstr "Destinacion" #: ../src/nautilus-sendto.ui.h:4 msgid "Send _as:" msgstr "Mandar _per :" #: ../src/nautilus-sendto.ui.h:5 msgid "Send t_o:" msgstr "_Destinatari :" #: ../src/nautilus-sendto.ui.h:6 msgid "Compression" msgstr "Compression" # #: ../src/nautilus-sendto.ui.h:7 msgid "Send _packed in:" msgstr "Mandar una còpia _compressada dins :" #: ../src/plugins/evolution/evolution.c:381 msgid "Email" msgstr "Corrièr electronic" #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:148 #, c-format msgid "Cannot get contact: %s" msgstr "Impossible d'obténer lo contacte : %s" #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:181 #, c-format msgid "Could not find contact: %s" msgstr "Impossible de trobar lo contacte : %s" #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:400 msgid "Cannot create searchable view." msgstr "Impossible de crear una vista de recèrca." #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:862 msgid "Success" msgstr "Capitat" #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:864 msgid "An argument was invalid." msgstr "Un argument èra pas valid." #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:866 msgid "The address book is busy." msgstr "Lo quasernet d'adreças es ocupat." #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:868 msgid "The address book is offline." msgstr "Lo quasernet d'adreças es fòra de linha." #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:870 msgid "The address book does not exist." msgstr "Lo quasernet d'adreças existís pas." #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:872 msgid "The \"Me\" contact does not exist." msgstr "Lo contacte « Ieu » existís pas." #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:874 msgid "The address book is not loaded." msgstr "Lo quasernet d'adreças es pas cargat." #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:876 msgid "The address book is already loaded." msgstr "Lo quasernet d'adreças es ja cargat." #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:878 msgid "Permission was denied when accessing the address book." msgstr "Permission refusada per accedir al quasernet d'adreças." #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:880 msgid "The contact was not found." msgstr "Impossible de trobar lo contacte." #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:882 msgid "This contact ID already exists." msgstr "L'identificant del contacte existís ja." #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:884 msgid "The protocol is not supported." msgstr "Lo protocòl es pas suportat." #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:886 msgid "The operation was cancelled." msgstr "Operacion anullada." #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:888 msgid "The operation could not be cancelled." msgstr "L'operacion pòt pas èsser anullada." #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:890 msgid "The address book authentication failed." msgstr "L'autentificacion alprèp del quasernet d'adreças a pas capitat." #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:892 msgid "" "Authentication is required to access the address book and was not given." msgstr "" "Una autentificacion es requesida per accedir al quasernet d'adreças e es pas " "estada provesida." #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:894 msgid "A secure connection is not available." msgstr "Cap de connexion segurizada es disponibla." #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:896 msgid "A CORBA error occurred whilst accessing the address book." msgstr "" "Una error CORBA s'es producha al moment de l'accès al quasernet d'adreças." #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:898 msgid "The address book source does not exist." msgstr "La sorça del quasernet d'adreças existís pas." #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:900 #: ../src/plugins/evolution/e-contact-entry.c:903 msgid "An unknown error occurred." msgstr "I a agut una error desconeguda." #: ../src/plugins/gajim/gajim.c:418 msgid "Unable to send file" msgstr "Impossible de mandar lo fichièr" #: ../src/plugins/gajim/gajim.c:419 msgid "There is no connection to gajim remote service." msgstr "I a pas de connexion al servici distant gajim." #: ../src/plugins/gajim/gajim.c:443 ../src/plugins/gajim/gajim.c:483 msgid "Sending file failed" msgstr "Lo mandadís de fichièr a pas capitat" #: ../src/plugins/gajim/gajim.c:444 msgid "Recipient is missing." msgstr "Manca lo destinatari." #: ../src/plugins/gajim/gajim.c:483 msgid "Unknown recipient." msgstr "Destinatari desconegut." #: ../src/plugins/gajim/gajim.c:506 msgid "Instant Message (Gajim)" msgstr "Messatge instantanèu (Gajim)" #: ../src/plugins/nautilus-burn/nautilus-burn.c:92 msgid "New CD/DVD" msgstr "CD/DVD novèl" #: ../src/plugins/nautilus-burn/nautilus-burn.c:99 msgid "Existing CD/DVD" msgstr "CD/DVD existent" #: ../src/plugins/nautilus-burn/nautilus-burn.c:178 msgid "CD/DVD Creator" msgstr "Creator de CD/DVD" #: ../src/plugins/pidgin/pidgin.c:464 msgid "Instant Message (Pidgin)" msgstr "Messatge instantanèu (Pidgin)" #: ../src/plugins/removable-devices/removable-devices.c:248 msgid "Removable disks and shares" msgstr "Partiments e disques amovibles" #: ../src/plugins/upnp/upnp.c:309 msgid "UPnP Media Server" msgstr "Servidor mèdia UPnP" language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/LC_MESSAGES/deja-dup.po0000644000000000000000000014321112743727041020216 0ustar # Occitan (post 1500) translation for deja-dup # Copyright (c) 2013 Rosetta Contributors and Canonical Ltd 2013 # This file is distributed under the same license as the deja-dup package. # FIRST AUTHOR , 2013. # msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: deja-dup\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: FULL NAME \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-04-03 18:48+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-01-18 11:40+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Cédric VALMARY (Tot en òc) \n" "Language-Team: Occitan (post 1500) \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n > 1;\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2016-07-20 13:51+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 18147)\n" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:1 #: ../deja-dup/preferences/Preferences.vala:286 msgid "Folders to save" msgstr "Dorsièrs de salvar" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "" "This list of directories will be backed up. Reserved values $HOME, $DESKTOP, " "$DOCUMENTS, $DOWNLOAD, $MUSIC, $PICTURES, $PUBLIC_SHARE, $TEMPLATES, $TRASH, " "and $VIDEO are recognized as the user’s special directories. Relative " "entries are relative to the user’s home directory." msgstr "" "Los dorsièrs d'aquesta lista seràn salvats. Los mots claus $HOME, $DESKTOP, " "$DOCUMENTS, $DOWNLOAD, $MUSIC, $PICTURES, $PUBLIC_SHARE, $TEMPLATES, $TRASH " "e $VIDEO son reconeguts en tant que dorsièrs especials de l'utilizaire. Los " "camins relatius foncionan per rapòrt al dorsièr personal de l'utilizaire." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:3 #: ../deja-dup/preferences/Preferences.vala:297 msgid "Folders to ignore" msgstr "Dorsièrs d'ignorar" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:4 msgid "" "This list of directories will not be backed up. Reserved values $HOME, " "$DESKTOP, $DOCUMENTS, $DOWNLOAD, $MUSIC, $PICTURES, $PUBLIC_SHARE, " "$TEMPLATES, $TRASH, and $VIDEO are recognized as the user’s special " "directories. Relative entries are relative to the user’s home directory." msgstr "" "Los dorsièrs d'aquesta lista seràn salvats. Los mots claus $HOME, $DESKTOP, " "$DOCUMENTS, $DOWNLOAD, $MUSIC, $PICTURES, $PUBLIC_SHARE, $TEMPLATES, $TRASH " "e $VIDEO son reconeguts en tant que dorsièrs especials de l'utilizaire. Los " "camins relatius foncionan per rapòrt al dorsièr personal de l'utilizaire." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:5 msgid "Whether to request the root password" msgstr "Se lo senhal d'administrator deu èsser requesit" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:6 msgid "" "Whether to request the root password when backing up from or restoring to " "system folders." msgstr "" "Se lo senhal d'administrator deu èsser requisit al moment del salvament o " "del restabliment cap a de dorsièrs del sistèma." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:7 msgid "The last time Déjà Dup was run" msgstr "La darrièra aviada de Déjà Dup" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:8 msgid "" "The last time Déjà Dup was successfully run. This time should be in ISO 8601 " "format." msgstr "" "Lo darrièr còp que Déjà Dup es estat executat amb succès. Aquesta data deu " "èsser al format ISO 8601." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:9 msgid "The last time Déjà Dup backed up" msgstr "Lo darrièr còp que Déjà Dup a salvat" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:10 msgid "" "The last time Déjà Dup successfully completed a backup. This time should be " "in ISO 8601 format." msgstr "" "Lo darrièr còp que Déjà Dup a menat coma caliá un salvament. Aquesta data " "deu èsser al format ISO 8601." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:11 msgid "The last time Déjà Dup restored" msgstr "Lo darrièr còp que Déjà Dup a restablit" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:12 msgid "" "The last time Déjà Dup successfully completed a restore. This time should be " "in ISO 8601 format." msgstr "" "Lo darrièr còp que Déjà Dup a menat coma caliá un restabliment. Aquesta data " "deu èsser al format ISO 8601." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:13 msgid "Whether to periodically back up" msgstr "Se un salvament automatic amb interval regular se deu debanar." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:14 msgid "Whether to automatically back up on a regular schedule." msgstr "Se un salvament automatic amb interval regular se deu debanar." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:15 msgid "How often to periodically back up" msgstr "A quina frequéncia efectuar de salvaments regulars" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:16 msgid "The number of days between backups." msgstr "Lo nombre de jorns entre los salvaments." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:17 msgid "" "The last time Déjà Dup checked whether it should prompt about backing up" msgstr "" "Lo darrièr còp que Déjà Dup a verificat se vos deviá prepausar de far un " "salvament" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:18 msgid "" "When a user logs in, the Déjà Dup monitor checks whether it should prompt " "about backing up. This is used to increase discoverability for users that " "don’t know about backups. This time should be either ‘disabled’ to turn off " "this check or in ISO 8601 format." msgstr "" "Quand un utilizaire se connècta, lo monitor Déjà Dup verifica se li cal " "demandar de salvar. Aquò servís a far descobrir lo principi dels salvaments " "als utilizaires que lo coneisson pas. Aqueste camp deu èsser siá " "« disabled » per atudar aquesta verificacion, siá una data al format ISO " "8601." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:19 msgid "" "The last time Déjà Dup checked whether it should prompt about your password" msgstr "" "Lo darrièr còp que Déjà Dup a verificat se vos deviá demandar de picar " "vòstre senhal" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:20 msgid "" "In order to prevent you from forgetting your passwords, Déjà Dup will " "occasionally notify you to confirm the password. This time should be either " "‘disabled’ to turn off this check or in ISO 8601 format." msgstr "" "Per vos evitar de doblidar vòstres senhals, Déjà Dup vos demandarà de temps " "en quora una confirmacion de senhal. Aqueste camp deu èsser siá « disabled » " "per arrestar aquesta verificacion, siá una data del format ISO 8601." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:21 msgid "How long to keep backup files" msgstr "Durada de conservacion dels fichièrs de salvament" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:22 msgid "" "The number of days to keep backup files on the backup location. A value of 0 " "means forever. This is a minimum number of days; the files may be kept " "longer." msgstr "" "Nombre de jorns de conservacion dels fichièrs de salvament dins " "l'emplaçament de salvament. Una valor de 0 implica totjorn. Es un nombre " "minimum de jorns ; los fichièrs se pòdont conservar mai longtemps." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:23 msgid "How long to wait between full backups" msgstr "Interval entre dos salvaments complets" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:24 msgid "" "Déjà Dup needs to occasionally make fresh full backups. This is the number " "of days to wait between full backups." msgstr "" "Déjà Dup deu far de temps en quora dels salvaments completas frescas. Es lo " "nombre de jorns d'esperar entre dos salvaments complets." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:25 msgid "Type of location to store backup" msgstr "Tipe de destinacion per enregistrar lo salvament" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:26 msgid "" "The type of backup location. If ‘auto’, a default will be chosen based on " "what is available." msgstr "" "Lo tipe d'emplaçament de salvament. Se « auto », una causida per defaut serà " "facha en foncion de çò qu'es disponible." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:27 msgid "Amazon S3 Access Key ID" msgstr "Clau d'accès ID d'Amazon S3" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:28 msgid "Your Amazon S3 Access Key Identifier. This acts as your S3 username." msgstr "" "Vòstre identificant Access Key d'Amazon S3. Fa ofici de nom d'utilizaire S3." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:29 msgid "The Amazon S3 bucket name to use" msgstr "Lo nom del bucket d'Amazon S3 d'utilizar" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:30 msgid "" "Which Amazon S3 bucket to store files in. This does not need to exist " "already. Only legal hostname strings are valid." msgstr "" "Quin bucket d'Amazon S3 per enregistrar los fichièrs. Deu pas existir pel " "moment. Sol un nom d'òste legal es valid." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:31 msgid "The Amazon S3 folder" msgstr "Lo dorsièr Amazon S3" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:32 msgid "" "An optional folder name to store files in. This folder will be created in " "the chosen bucket." msgstr "" "Un nom de dorsièr facultatiu ont enregistrar los fichièrs. Aqueste dorsièr " "serà creat a l'emplaçament causit." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:42 msgid "The Rackspace Cloud Files container" msgstr "Lo contenidor del servici de salvament de fichièrs Rackspace" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:43 msgid "" "Which Rackspace Cloud Files container to store files in. This does not need " "to exist already. Only legal hostname strings are valid." msgstr "" "Quin contenidor del servici d'emmagazinatge de fichièrs Rackspace utilizar " "per salvar los fichièrs. Deu pas necessàriament existir ja. Sols los noms " "d'òstes apropriats son valids." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:44 msgid "Your Rackspace username" msgstr "Vòstre identificant Rackspace" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:45 msgid "This is your username for the Rackspace Cloud Files service." msgstr "" "Aquò es vòstre identificant pel servici d'eemmagazinatge de fichièrs " "Rackspace Cloud" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:54 #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:221 msgid "Backup location" msgstr "Emplaçament de salvament" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:55 msgid "Location in which to hold the backup files." msgstr "Emplaçament ont cal emmagazinar los fichièrs de salvament." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:56 msgid "Folder type" msgstr "Tipe de repertòri" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:57 msgid "" "Whether the backup location is a mounted external volume or a normal folder." msgstr "" "Se l'emplaçament de salvament es un volum extèrne montat o un dorsièr " "classic." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:58 msgid "Relative path under the external volume" msgstr "Camin relatiu sul disc extèrne" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:59 msgid "" "If the backup location is on an external volume, this is the path of the " "folder on that volume." msgstr "" "Se lo salvament se situa sus un disc extèrne, aquò es lo camin del dorsièr " "sul disc." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:60 msgid "Unique ID of the external volume" msgstr "Identificant unic del disc extèrne" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:61 msgid "" "If the backup location is on an external volume, this is its unique " "filesystem identifier." msgstr "" "Se lo salvament se situa sus un disc extèrne, aquò es son unic identificant " "de sistèma de fichièr." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:62 msgid "Full name of the external volume" msgstr "Nom complet del disc extèrne" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:63 msgid "" "If the backup location is on an external volume, this is the volume’s longer " "descriptive name." msgstr "" "Se lo salvament se situa sus un disc extèrne, aquò es lo nom complet " "d'aqueste disc." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:64 msgid "Short name of the external volume" msgstr "Nom cort del disc extèrne" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:65 msgid "" "If the backup location is on an external volume, this is the volume’s " "shorter name." msgstr "" "Se lo salvament se situa sus un disc extèrne, aquò es lo nom d'aqueste disc." #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:66 msgid "Icon of the external volume" msgstr "Icòna del disc extèrne" #: ../data/org.gnome.DejaDup.gschema.xml.in.h:67 msgid "" "If the backup location is on an external volume, this is the volume’s icon." msgstr "" "Se lo salvament se situa sus un disc extèrne, aquò es l'icòna del disc." #. Translators: The name is a play on the French phrase "déjà vu" meaning #. "already seen", but with the "vu" replaced with "dup". "Dup" in this #. context is itself a reference to both the underlying command line tool #. "duplicity" and the act of duplicating data for backup. As a whole, the #. phrase "Déjà Dup" may not be very translatable. #: ../deja-dup/deja-dup.appdata.xml.in.h:1 ../deja-dup/deja-dup.desktop.in.h:2 #: ../deja-dup/main.vala:78 ../libdeja/CommonUtils.vala:138 msgid "Déjà Dup Backup Tool" msgstr "Aisina de salvament Déjà Dup" #: ../deja-dup/deja-dup.appdata.xml.in.h:3 msgid "" "Déjà Dup is a simple backup tool. It hides the complexity of backing up the " "Right Way (encrypted, off-site, and regular) and uses duplicity as the " "backend." msgstr "" "Déjà Dup es una aisina de salvament simpla. Amaga la complexitat necessària " "per salvar coma cal (chifrada, fòra site e normala) e utiliza lo motor " "duplicity." #: ../deja-dup/deja-dup.appdata.xml.in.h:4 msgid "" "Support for local, remote, or cloud backup locations, such as Amazon S3 and " "Rackspace Cloud Files" msgstr "" #: ../deja-dup/deja-dup.appdata.xml.in.h:5 msgid "Securely encrypts and compresses your data" msgstr "Chifra e compressa vòstras donadas" #: ../deja-dup/deja-dup.appdata.xml.in.h:6 msgid "" "Incrementally backs up, letting you restore from any particular backup" msgstr "" #: ../deja-dup/deja-dup.appdata.xml.in.h:7 msgid "Schedules regular backups" msgstr "Salvaments regulars planificats" #: ../deja-dup/deja-dup.appdata.xml.in.h:8 msgid "Integrates well into your GNOME desktop" msgstr "S'intègra plan amb lo burèu GNOME" #. Translators: "Backups" is a noun #: ../deja-dup/deja-dup.desktop.in.h:1 #: ../deja-dup/preferences/deja-dup-preferences.desktop.in.h:1 #: ../deja-dup/Prompt.vala:93 ../deja-dup/Prompt.vala:128 #: ../deja-dup/StatusIcon.vala:134 ../deja-dup/StatusIcon.vala:233 #: ../deja-dup/monitor/monitor.vala:115 #: ../deja-dup/preferences/preferences-main.vala:42 #: ../deja-dup/preferences/preferences-main.vala:121 msgid "Backups" msgstr "Salvaments" #. Translators: Monitor in this sense means something akin to 'watcher', not #. a computer screen. This program acts like a daemon that kicks off #. backups at scheduled times. #: ../deja-dup/monitor/deja-dup-monitor.desktop.in.h:1 #: ../deja-dup/monitor/monitor.vala:315 msgid "Backup Monitor" msgstr "Monitor de salvament" #: ../deja-dup/monitor/deja-dup-monitor.desktop.in.h:2 msgid "Schedules backups at regular intervals" msgstr "Planifica los salvaments amb interval regular" #: ../deja-dup/preferences/deja-dup-preferences.desktop.in.h:2 msgid "Change your backup settings" msgstr "Modificatz vòstra configuracion de salvament" #. These keywords are used when searching for applications in dashes, etc. #: ../deja-dup/preferences/deja-dup-preferences.desktop.in.h:4 msgid "déjà;deja;dup;" msgstr "déjà;deja;dup;" #: ../deja-dup/preferences/deja-dup-preferences.desktop.in.h:5 msgid "Back Up" msgstr "Salvar" #: ../deja-dup/ui/restore-missing.ui.h:1 msgid "Folder" msgstr "Dorsièr" #: ../deja-dup/ui/restore-missing.ui.h:2 #: ../deja-dup/AssistantOperation.vala:177 msgid "Scanning…" msgstr "Analisi en cors..." #: ../deja-dup/nautilus/NautilusExtension.c:173 msgid "Restore Missing Files…" msgstr "Restabliment dels fichièrs mancants..." #: ../deja-dup/nautilus/NautilusExtension.c:174 msgid "Restore deleted files from backup" msgstr "Restablís los fichièrs escafats dempuèi un salvament" #: ../deja-dup/nautilus/NautilusExtension.c:216 msgid "Revert to Previous Version…" msgid_plural "Revert to Previous Versions…" msgstr[0] "Tornar cap a la version precedenta…" msgstr[1] "Tornar cap a las versions precedentas…" #: ../deja-dup/nautilus/NautilusExtension.c:220 msgid "Restore file from backup" msgid_plural "Restore files from backup" msgstr[0] "Restablir lo fichièr del salvament" msgstr[1] "Restablir los fichièrs del salvament" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantBackup.vala:31 msgctxt "back up is verb" msgid "Back Up" msgstr "Salvar" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantBackup.vala:32 msgctxt "back up is verb" msgid "_Back Up" msgstr "_Salvar" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantBackup.vala:49 msgid "Creating the first backup. This may take a while." msgstr "Creacion del primièr salvament. Aquò pòt prene de temps." #: ../deja-dup/AssistantBackup.vala:50 msgid "" "Creating a fresh backup to protect against backup corruption. This will " "take longer than normal." msgstr "" "Creacion en cors d'un novèl salvament per tal de se protegir contra una " "eventuala corrupcion de salvament. Aquò prendrà mai de temps que de costuma." #. Translators: This is the phrase 'Backing up' in the larger phrase #. "Backing up '%s'". %s is a filename. #: ../deja-dup/AssistantBackup.vala:80 msgid "Backing up:" msgstr "Salvament en cors :" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantBackup.vala:89 msgid "Backup Failed" msgstr "Lo salvament a fracassat" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantBackup.vala:92 msgid "Backup Finished" msgstr "Lo salvament es acabat" #. Also leave ourselves up if we just finished a restore test. #: ../deja-dup/AssistantBackup.vala:96 msgid "Your files were successfully backed up and tested." msgstr "Vòstres fichièrs son estats salvats e testats amb succès." #: ../deja-dup/AssistantBackup.vala:103 msgid "Backing Up…" msgstr "Salvament en cors..." #: ../deja-dup/AssistantOperation.vala:176 msgid "Scanning:" msgstr "Analisi :" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantOperation.vala:258 msgid "_Details" msgstr "_Detalhs" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantOperation.vala:306 msgid "_Allow restoring without a password" msgstr "_Autorizar la recuperacion dels fichièrs sens senhal" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantOperation.vala:312 msgid "_Password-protect your backup" msgstr "_Protegissètz vòstre salvament per un senhal" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantOperation.vala:324 msgid "" "You will need your password to restore your files. You might want to write " "it down." msgstr "" "Vos caldrà vòstre senhal per recuperar vòstres fichièrs. Benlèu que vos lo " "caldriá notar endacòm." #: ../deja-dup/AssistantOperation.vala:339 #: ../deja-dup/AssistantOperation.vala:408 msgid "E_ncryption password" msgstr "Se_nhal de chiframent" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantOperation.vala:356 msgid "Confir_m password" msgstr "Confir_mar lo senhal" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantOperation.vala:369 #: ../deja-dup/AssistantOperation.vala:417 msgid "_Show password" msgstr "_Afichar lo senhal" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantOperation.vala:376 #: ../deja-dup/MountOperationAssistant.vala:40 msgid "_Remember password" msgstr "_Memorizar lo senhal" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantOperation.vala:395 msgid "" "In order to check that you will be able to retrieve your files in the case " "of an emergency, please enter your encryption password again to perform a " "brief restore test." msgstr "" "Per verificar que poiretz recuperar vòstres fichièrs en cas d'urgéncia, " "picatz tornarmai vòstre senhal de chiframent per efectuar un tèst rapid de " "restabliment." #: ../deja-dup/AssistantOperation.vala:422 msgid "Test every two _months" msgstr "Testar cada dos _meses" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantOperation.vala:496 msgid "Summary" msgstr "Resumit" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantOperation.vala:518 msgid "Restore Test" msgstr "Tèst de restabliment" #. For most, don't do anything special. Show generic 'unknown error' #. message, but provide the exception text for better bug reports. #. Plus, sometimes it may clue the user in to what's wrong. #. But first, try to restart without a cache, since that seems to quite #. frequently fix odd metadata errors with duplicity. If we hit an error #. a second time, we'll show the unknown error message. #: ../deja-dup/AssistantOperation.vala:594 #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:696 #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:1075 msgid "Failed with an unknown error." msgstr "Fracàs degut a una error desconeguda." #: ../deja-dup/AssistantOperation.vala:791 msgid "Require Password?" msgstr "Demandar un senhal ?" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantOperation.vala:793 msgid "Encryption Password Needed" msgstr "Senhal de chiframent necessari" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantOperation.vala:865 msgid "Backup encryption password" msgstr "Senhal del chiframent dels salvaments" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:68 msgid "Restore" msgstr "Restablir" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:69 msgid "_Restore" msgstr "_Restablir" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:91 msgid "_Backup location" msgstr "_Emplaçament del salvament" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:124 msgid "Restore From Where?" msgstr "Restablir dempuèi quin emplaçament ?" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:146 msgid "_Date" msgstr "_Data" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:169 msgid "Restore files to _original locations" msgstr "Restablir los fichièrs cap a lors emplaçaments d'_origina" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:174 msgid "Restore to _specific folder" msgstr "Restablir cap a un dorsièr e_specific" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:184 msgid "Choose destination for restored files" msgstr "Causissètz una destinacion pels fichièrs restablits" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:188 msgid "Restore _folder" msgstr "Restablir lo _dorsièr" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:229 msgid "Restore date" msgstr "Restablir la data" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:237 msgid "Restore folder" msgstr "Restablir lo dorsièr" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:263 msgid "Checking for Backups…" msgstr "Recèrca de salvaments..." #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:271 msgid "Restore From When?" msgstr "Restablir dempuèi quora ?" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:279 msgid "Restore to Where?" msgstr "Cap a ont restablir ?" #. Translators: This is the word 'Restoring' in the phrase #. "Restoring '%s'". %s is a filename. #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:306 msgid "Restoring:" msgstr "Restabliment en cors :" #. Translators: %x is the current date, %X is the current time. #. This will be in a list with other strings that just have %x (the #. current date). So make sure if you change this, it still makes #. sense in that context. #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:348 #, c-format msgid "%x %X" msgstr "%x %X" #. If we didn't see any dates... Must not be any backups on the backend #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:361 msgid "No backups to restore" msgstr "Cap de salvament pas disponible pel restabliment." #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:437 msgid "Original location" msgstr "Localizacion originala" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:448 msgid "File to restore" msgid_plural "Files to restore" msgstr[0] "Fichièr de restablir" msgstr[1] "Fichièrs de restablir" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:469 msgid "Restore Failed" msgstr "Lo restabliment a fracassat" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:471 msgid "Restore Finished" msgstr "Lo restabliment es acabat" #. if it *is* visible, a header will be set already #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:474 msgid "Your files were successfully restored." msgstr "Vòstres fichièrs son estats restablits amb succès." #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:477 msgid "Your file was successfully restored." msgid_plural "Your files were successfully restored." msgstr[0] "Vòstre fichièr es estat restablit amb succès." msgstr[1] "Vòstres fichièrs son estats restablits amb succès." #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestore.vala:484 ../libdeja/Operation.vala:63 msgid "Restoring…" msgstr "Restabliment en cors..." #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestoreMissing.vala:199 msgid "File" msgstr "Fichièr" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestoreMissing.vala:200 msgid "Last seen" msgstr "Darrièra visita" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestoreMissing.vala:215 msgid "Restore which Files?" msgstr "Restablir quins fichièrs ?" #. Hours #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestoreMissing.vala:346 msgid "Scanning for files from up to a day ago…" msgstr "Recèrca de fichièrs fins a una jornada en arrièr…" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestoreMissing.vala:349 msgid "Scanning for files from up to a week ago…" msgstr "Recèrca de fichièrs fins a una setmana en arrièr…" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestoreMissing.vala:352 msgid "Scanning for files from up to a month ago…" msgstr "Recèrca de fichièrs fins a una mesada en arrièr…" #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestoreMissing.vala:357 #, c-format msgid "Scanning for files from about a month ago…" msgid_plural "Scanning for files from about %d months ago…" msgstr[0] "Balejatge dels fichièrs que datan d'un mes..." msgstr[1] "Balejatge dels fichièrs que datan de %d meses..." #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestoreMissing.vala:364 #, c-format msgid "Scanning for files from about a year ago…" msgid_plural "Scanning for files from about %d years ago…" msgstr[0] "Balejatge dels fichièrs que datan d'un an..." msgstr[1] "Balejatge dels fichièrs que datan de %d ans..." #: ../deja-dup/AssistantRestoreMissing.vala:454 msgid "Scanning finished" msgstr "Balejatge acabat" #: ../deja-dup/Assistant.vala:38 #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationFile.vala:54 msgid "_OK" msgstr "_D'acòrdi" #: ../deja-dup/Assistant.vala:299 msgid "_Forward" msgstr "_Seguent" #: ../deja-dup/Assistant.vala:317 msgid "Co_ntinue" msgstr "Co_ntunhar" #: ../deja-dup/Assistant.vala:323 msgctxt "verb" msgid "_Test" msgstr "_Tèst" #: ../deja-dup/Assistant.vala:352 ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigList.vala:255 #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationFile.vala:53 msgid "_Cancel" msgstr "_Anullar" #: ../deja-dup/Assistant.vala:354 msgid "_Close" msgstr "_Tampar" #: ../deja-dup/Assistant.vala:358 msgid "_Back" msgstr "_Precedent" #: ../deja-dup/Assistant.vala:360 ../deja-dup/StatusIcon.vala:93 msgid "_Resume Later" msgstr "_Reprene pus tard" #: ../deja-dup/main.vala:34 ../deja-dup/monitor/monitor.vala:36 #: ../deja-dup/preferences/preferences-main.vala:85 msgid "Show version" msgstr "Afichar la version" #: ../deja-dup/main.vala:35 msgid "Restore given files" msgstr "Restabliment dels fichièrs seleccionats" #: ../deja-dup/main.vala:36 msgid "Immediately start a backup" msgstr "Aviar immediatament un salvament" #: ../deja-dup/main.vala:38 msgid "Restore deleted files" msgstr "Restablir de fichièrs suprimits" #: ../deja-dup/main.vala:55 msgid "No directory provided" msgstr "Dorsièr pas entresenhat" #: ../deja-dup/main.vala:60 msgid "Only one directory can be shown at once" msgstr "Sol un dorsièr pòt èsser afichat a l'encòp" #: ../deja-dup/main.vala:81 msgid "[FILES…]" msgstr "[FICHIÈRS…]" #: ../deja-dup/main.vala:82 msgid "DIRECTORY" msgstr "DORSIÈR" #. Translators: Wrap this to 80 characters per line if you can, as I have for English #: ../deja-dup/main.vala:86 msgid "" "Déjà Dup is a simple backup tool. It hides the complexity of backing up\n" "the Right Way (encrypted, off-site, and regular) and uses duplicity as\n" "the backend." msgstr "" "Déjà Dup es una aisina de salvament simple. Dissimula la complexitat\n" "dels salvaments plan faches (chifrats, fòra site e periodics) e\n" "utiliza duplicity coma motor." #: ../deja-dup/main.vala:137 msgid "Directory does not exists" msgstr "Lo dorsièr existís pas" #: ../deja-dup/main.vala:141 msgid "You must provide a directory, not a file" msgstr "Vos cal indicar un dorsièr e non pas un fichièr" #: ../deja-dup/main.vala:153 msgid "You must specify a mode" msgstr "Vos cal especificar un mòde" #: ../deja-dup/MountOperationAssistant.vala:36 msgid "Connect to Server" msgstr "Connexion al servidor" #: ../deja-dup/MountOperationAssistant.vala:37 #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationDAV.vala:49 #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationFTP.vala:45 #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationRackspace.vala:31 #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationSMB.vala:37 #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationSSH.vala:40 msgid "_Username" msgstr "Nom de l'_utilizaire" #: ../deja-dup/MountOperationAssistant.vala:38 #: ../libdeja/BackendGDrive.vala:160 msgid "_Password" msgstr "_Senhal" #: ../deja-dup/MountOperationAssistant.vala:39 msgid "S_how password" msgstr "Far veire lo se_nhal" #: ../deja-dup/MountOperationAssistant.vala:80 msgid "Location not available" msgstr "Emplaçament pas disponible" #: ../deja-dup/MountOperationAssistant.vala:166 msgid "Connect _anonymously" msgstr "Se connectar d'un biais _anonim" #: ../deja-dup/MountOperationAssistant.vala:170 msgid "Connect as u_ser" msgstr "Se connectar en tant qu' _utilizaire" #. Translators: this is a Windows networking domain #: ../deja-dup/MountOperationAssistant.vala:213 msgid "_Domain" msgstr "_Domeni" #: ../deja-dup/Prompt.vala:37 msgid "Keep your files safe by backing up regularly" msgstr "Protegissètz vòstres fichièrs en salvant regularament" #: ../deja-dup/Prompt.vala:42 msgid "" "Important documents, data, and settings can be protected by storing them in " "a backup. In the case of a disaster, you would be able to recover them from " "that backup." msgstr "" "Las donadas, configuracions e documents importants pòdon èsser protegits en " "los salvant. En cas de catastròfa las poiretz recuperar dempuèi lo salvament." #: ../deja-dup/Prompt.vala:48 msgid "_Don't Show Again" msgstr "Afichar pas p_us" #: ../deja-dup/Prompt.vala:50 msgid "Don't Show Again" msgstr "Afichar pas pus" #: ../deja-dup/Prompt.vala:56 msgid "_Open Backup Settings" msgstr "D_obrir la configuracion dels salvaments" #: ../deja-dup/Prompt.vala:58 msgid "Open Backup Settings" msgstr "Dobrir la configuracion dels salvaments" #: ../deja-dup/StatusIcon.vala:94 msgid "_Skip Backup" msgstr "Pa_ssar lo salvament" #: ../deja-dup/StatusIcon.vala:125 msgid "Backup completed" msgstr "Salvament acabat" #: ../deja-dup/StatusIcon.vala:129 msgid "Backup finished" msgstr "Salvament acabat" #: ../deja-dup/StatusIcon.vala:130 msgid "" "Not all files were successfully backed up. See dialog for more details." msgstr "" "Es pas estat possible de far la còpia de seguretat dels fichièrs seguents. " "Consultatz lo dialòg per mai d'entresenhas." #: ../deja-dup/StatusIcon.vala:234 msgid "Starting scheduled backup" msgstr "Aviada del salvament programada" #: ../deja-dup/StatusIcon.vala:237 msgid "Show Progress" msgstr "Afichar la progression" #: ../deja-dup/StatusIcon.vala:275 #, c-format msgid "%.1f%% complete" msgstr "%.1f%% acomplit" #: ../deja-dup/StatusIcon.vala:288 msgid "Show _Progress" msgstr "Afichar la _progression" #: ../deja-dup/monitor/monitor.vala:161 msgid "Scheduled backup delayed" msgstr "Salvament automatic planificat retardat" #: ../deja-dup/preferences/Preferences.vala:144 msgid "Categories" msgstr "Categorias" #: ../deja-dup/preferences/Preferences.vala:93 #: ../deja-dup/preferences/Preferences.vala:197 msgid "_Restore…" msgstr "_Restablir…" #: ../deja-dup/preferences/Preferences.vala:91 #: ../deja-dup/preferences/Preferences.vala:243 msgid "_Back Up Now…" msgstr "_Aviar lo salvament…" #: ../deja-dup/preferences/Preferences.vala:275 msgid "Overview" msgstr "Vista d'ensemble" #: ../deja-dup/preferences/Preferences.vala:308 msgid "_Storage location" msgstr "_Emplaçament d'emmagazinatge" #. Translators: storage as in "where to store the backup" #: ../deja-dup/preferences/Preferences.vala:325 msgid "Storage location" msgstr "Emplaçament d'emmagazinatge" #: ../deja-dup/preferences/Preferences.vala:349 msgid "_Automatic backup" msgstr "_Salvament automatic" #. translators: as in "Every day" #: ../deja-dup/preferences/Preferences.vala:361 msgid "_Every" msgstr "_Cada" #: ../deja-dup/preferences/Preferences.vala:371 msgctxt "verb" msgid "_Keep" msgstr "_Conservar" #: ../deja-dup/preferences/Preferences.vala:378 msgid "" "Old backups will be deleted earlier if the storage location is low on space." msgstr "" #: ../deja-dup/preferences/Preferences.vala:388 msgid "Scheduling" msgstr "Planificacion" #: ../deja-dup/preferences/preferences-main.vala:71 msgid "_Help" msgstr "_Ajuda" #: ../deja-dup/preferences/preferences-main.vala:73 msgid "_Quit" msgstr "_Quitar" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigDelete.vala:40 msgid "At least six months" msgstr "Al mens sièis meses" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigDelete.vala:41 msgid "At least a year" msgstr "Al mens un an" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigDelete.vala:42 msgid "Forever" msgstr "Indefinidament" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigDelete.vala:89 #, c-format msgid "At least %d day" msgid_plural "At least %d days" msgstr[0] "Al mens %d jorn" msgstr[1] "Al mens %d jorns" #. Check for some really simple/common friendly names #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLabelBackupDate.vala:66 msgid "Next backup is today." msgstr "" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLabelBackupDate.vala:68 msgid "Next backup is tomorrow." msgstr "" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLabelBackupDate.vala:76 #, c-format msgid "Next backup is %d day from now." msgid_plural "Next backup is %d days from now." msgstr[0] "" msgstr[1] "" #. Check for some really simple/common friendly names #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLabelBackupDate.vala:93 msgid "Last backup was today." msgstr "" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLabelBackupDate.vala:95 msgid "Last backup was yesterday." msgstr "" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLabelBackupDate.vala:103 #, c-format msgid "Last backup was %d day ago." msgid_plural "Last backup was %d days ago." msgstr[0] "" msgstr[1] "" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLabelBackupDate.vala:113 msgid "No recent backups." msgstr "Pas cap de salvament recent." #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLabelBackupDate.vala:122 msgid "No backup scheduled." msgstr "Pas cap de salvament de programat." #. This here encodes a lot of outside GUI information in this widget, #. but it's a very special case thing. #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLabelDescription.vala:69 msgid "Restore…" msgstr "Restablir…" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLabelDescription.vala:71 #, c-format msgid "You may use the %s button to browse for existing backups." msgstr "" #. Translators: Files is the user-visible name of nautilus in your language #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLabelDescription.vala:74 #, c-format msgid "" "You can restore the entire backup with the %s button or use Files to either " "revert individual files or restore missing ones." msgstr "" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLabelDescription.vala:88 msgid "Back Up Now…" msgstr "Salvar ara..." #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLabelDescription.vala:89 #, c-format msgid "" "You should enable automatic backups or use the %s button to " "start one now." msgstr "" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLabelDescription.vala:95 msgid "A backup automatically starts every day." msgstr "" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLabelDescription.vala:97 msgid "A backup automatically starts every week." msgstr "" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLabelDescription.vala:100 #, c-format msgid "A backup automatically starts every %d day." msgid_plural "A backup automatically starts every %d days." msgstr[0] "" msgstr[1] "" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigList.vala:178 #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigList.vala:256 msgid "_Add" msgstr "_Apondre" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigList.vala:179 msgid "Add" msgstr "Apondre" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigList.vala:187 msgid "_Remove" msgstr "_Suprimir" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigList.vala:188 msgid "Remove" msgstr "Suprimir" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigList.vala:252 msgid "Choose folders" msgstr "Causissètz los dorsièrs" #. Now insert remote servers #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocation.vala:124 msgid "SSH" msgstr "SSH" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocation.vala:126 msgid "Windows Share" msgstr "Partiment Windows" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocation.vala:128 msgid "FTP" msgstr "FTP" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocation.vala:130 msgid "WebDAV" msgstr "WebDAV" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocation.vala:133 msgid "Custom Location" msgstr "Emplaçament personalizat" #. And a local folder option #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocation.vala:139 msgid "Local Folder" msgstr "Dorsièr local" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocation.vala:182 ../libdeja/BackendS3.vala:122 msgid "Amazon S3" msgstr "Amazon S3" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocation.vala:210 ../libdeja/BackendU1.vala:45 msgid "Ubuntu One" msgstr "Ubuntu One" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocation.vala:218 #: ../libdeja/BackendRackspace.vala:69 msgid "Rackspace Cloud Files" msgstr "Rackspace Cloud Files" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationCustom.vala:34 msgid "_URI" msgstr "_URI" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationDAV.vala:31 #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationFTP.vala:32 #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationSMB.vala:31 #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationSSH.vala:31 msgid "_Server" msgstr "_Servidor" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationDAV.vala:38 msgid "Use secure connection (_HTTPS)" msgstr "Utilizar una connexion securizada (_HTTPS)" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationDAV.vala:43 #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationFTP.vala:35 #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationSSH.vala:34 msgid "_Port" msgstr "_Pòrt" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationDAV.vala:46 #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationFTP.vala:38 #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationFile.vala:45 #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationGDrive.vala:33 #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationS3.vala:33 #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationSMB.vala:34 #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationSSH.vala:37 #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationVolume.vala:33 msgid "_Folder" msgstr "_Dorsièr" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationFile.vala:39 msgid "_Choose Folder…" msgstr "_Causir un dorsièr…" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationFile.vala:50 msgid "Choose Folder" msgstr "Causir un dorsièr" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationRackspace.vala:33 msgid "_Container" msgstr "_Contenidor" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationS3.vala:31 msgid "S3 Access Key I_D" msgstr "L'Access Key I_D de S3" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationSMB.vala:40 msgid "_Domain Name" msgstr "Nom de _domeni" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigLocationU1.vala:32 ../libdeja/BackendU1.vala:50 msgid "Ubuntu One has shut down. Please choose another storage location." msgstr "" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigPeriod.vala:36 msgid "Day" msgstr "Jorn" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigPeriod.vala:37 msgid "Week" msgstr "Setmana" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/ConfigPeriod.vala:82 #, c-format msgid "%d day" msgid_plural "%d days" msgstr[0] "%d jorn" msgstr[1] "%d jorns" #: ../deja-dup/widgets/WidgetUtils.vala:33 #, c-format msgid "Could not display %s" msgstr "Impossible d'afichar %s" #. Translators: %2$s is the name of a removable drive, %1$s is a folder #. on that removable drive. #: ../libdeja/BackendFile.vala:135 ../libdeja/CommonUtils.vala:518 #, c-format msgid "%1$s on %2$s" msgstr "%1$s sus %2$s" #: ../libdeja/BackendFile.vala:168 #, c-format msgid "Backup will begin when %s becomes connected." msgstr "Lo salvament començarà quand %s serà connectat." #: ../libdeja/BackendFile.vala:175 ../libdeja/BackendGDrive.vala:51 #: ../libdeja/BackendRackspace.vala:49 ../libdeja/BackendS3.vala:59 msgid "Backup will begin when a network connection becomes available." msgstr "Lo salvament començarà quand una connexion de ret serà disponibla." #: ../libdeja/BackendFile.vala:384 ../libdeja/BackendFile.vala:448 msgid "Backup location not available" msgstr "Destinacion de salvament indisponible" #: ../libdeja/BackendFile.vala:385 msgid "Waiting for a network connection…" msgstr "En espèra d'una connexion a la ret..." #: ../libdeja/BackendFile.vala:448 #, c-format msgid "Waiting for ‘%s’ to become connected…" msgstr "En espèra de la connexion de‘%s’" #. Translators: %s is a folder. #: ../libdeja/BackendRackspace.vala:72 #, c-format msgid "%s on Rackspace Cloud Files" msgstr "%s sul servici d'emmagazinatge de fichièrs Rackspace" #: ../libdeja/BackendGDrive.vala:126 ../libdeja/BackendRackspace.vala:115 #: ../libdeja/BackendS3.vala:168 msgid "Permission denied" msgstr "Permission refusada" #: ../libdeja/BackendRackspace.vala:146 #, c-format msgid "" "You can sign up for a Rackspace Cloud Files account online." msgstr "" "Podètz crear un compte sul servici d'emmagazinatge de fichièrs Rackspace en linha." #: ../libdeja/BackendRackspace.vala:147 msgid "Connect to Rackspace Cloud Files" msgstr "Connexion a Rackspace Cloud Files" #: ../libdeja/BackendRackspace.vala:148 msgid "_API access key" msgstr "Clau d'accès _API" #: ../libdeja/BackendRackspace.vala:149 msgid "S_how API access key" msgstr "_Afichar la clau d'accès de l'API" #: ../libdeja/BackendRackspace.vala:150 msgid "_Remember API access key" msgstr "_Se remembrar de la clau d'accès de l'API" #. Translators: %s is a folder. #: ../libdeja/BackendS3.vala:125 #, c-format msgid "%s on Amazon S3" msgstr "%s sus Amazon S3" #: ../libdeja/BackendS3.vala:199 #, c-format msgid "You can sign up for an Amazon S3 account online." msgstr "Vos podètz crear un compte Amazon S3 en linha." #: ../libdeja/BackendS3.vala:200 msgid "Connect to Amazon S3" msgstr "Connexion a Amazon S3" #: ../libdeja/BackendS3.vala:201 msgid "_Access key ID" msgstr "ID de la clau d'_accès" #: ../libdeja/BackendS3.vala:202 msgid "_Secret access key" msgstr "Clau d'accès _secreta" #: ../libdeja/BackendS3.vala:203 msgid "S_how secret access key" msgstr "Far _veire la clau secreta d'accès" #: ../libdeja/BackendS3.vala:204 msgid "_Remember secret access key" msgstr "Se _remembrar de la clau d'accès secreta" #: ../libdeja/CommonUtils.vala:437 #, c-format msgid "Could not find backup tool in %s. Your installation is incomplete." msgstr "" "Impossible de trobar l'aisina de salvament dins %s. Vòstra installacion es " "incompleta." #: ../libdeja/CommonUtils.vala:439 msgid "Could not load backup tool. Your installation is incomplete." msgstr "" "Impossible de cargar l'aisina de salvament dins %s. Vòstra installacion es " "incompleta." #: ../libdeja/CommonUtils.vala:445 msgid "Backup tool is broken. Your installation is incomplete." msgstr "" "L'aisina de salvament es damatjada. Vòstra installacion es incompleta." #: ../libdeja/CommonUtils.vala:467 msgid "Could not start backup tool" msgstr "Impossible d'aviar l'aisina de salvament" #. Translators: this is the home folder and %s is the user's username #: ../libdeja/CommonUtils.vala:569 #, c-format msgid "Home (%s)" msgstr "Dorsièr personal (%s)" #. Translators: this is the home folder #: ../libdeja/CommonUtils.vala:574 msgid "Home" msgstr "Dorsièr personal" #. Translators: this is the trash folder #: ../libdeja/CommonUtils.vala:579 msgid "Trash" msgstr "Escobilhièr" #: ../libdeja/OperationBackup.vala:42 ../libdeja/OperationVerify.vala:56 msgid "Verifying backup…" msgstr "Verificacion del salvament…" #: ../libdeja/OperationRestore.vala:51 msgid "Restoring files…" msgstr "Restabliment dels fichièrs…" #: ../libdeja/OperationVerify.vala:94 msgid "" "Your backup appears to be corrupted. You should delete the backup and try " "again." msgstr "" "Vòstre salvament sembla corromput. Vos lo caldriá suprimir e tornar ensajar." #: ../libdeja/Operation.vala:61 msgid "Backing up…" msgstr "Salvament en cors…" #: ../libdeja/Operation.vala:65 msgid "Checking for backups…" msgstr "Recèrca de salvaments…" #: ../libdeja/Operation.vala:67 msgid "Listing files…" msgstr "Listatge dels fichièrs" #: ../libdeja/Operation.vala:69 ../libdeja/Operation.vala:103 #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:385 #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:392 #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:411 #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:416 msgid "Preparing…" msgstr "Preparacion…" #: ../libdeja/Operation.vala:296 msgid "Another backup operation is already running" msgstr "Una autra operacion de salvament es ja en cors" #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:89 #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:172 msgid "Paused (no network)" msgstr "En pausa (pas de connexion)" #. Was not even a file path (maybe something goofy like computer://) #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:443 #, c-format msgid "Could not restore ‘%s’: Not a valid file location" msgstr "Impossible de restablir « %s » : emplaçament de fichièr invalid" #. Tiny backup location. Suggest they get a larger one. #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:510 msgid "Backup location is too small. Try using one with more space." msgstr "" "L'endrech d'emmagazinatge del salvament a pas pro d'espaci. Utilizatz un " "endrech amb mai d'espaci disponible." #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:533 msgid "Backup location does not have enough free space." msgstr "" "L'endrech d'emmagazinatge del salvament a pas pro d'espaci liure disponible." #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:553 #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:567 msgid "Cleaning up…" msgstr "Netejatge…" #. OK, we succeeded yay! But some files didn't make it into the backup #. because we couldn't read them. So tell the user so they don't think #. everything is hunky dory. #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:663 msgid "" "Could not back up the following files. Please make sure you are able to " "open them." msgstr "" "Es pas estat possible de far la còpia de seguretat dels fichièrs seguents. " "Asseguratz-vos que los podètz dobrir." #. OK, we succeeded yay! But some files didn't actually restore #. because we couldn't write to them. So tell the user so they #. don't think everything is hunky dory. #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:679 msgid "" "Could not restore the following files. Please make sure you are able to " "write to them." msgstr "" "Los fichièrs seguents an pas pogut èsser restablits. Asseguratz-vos que son " "pas en lectura sola." #. make text a little nicer than duplicity gives #. duplicity gives something like "home/blah/blah not found in archive, #. no files restored". #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:923 #, c-format msgid "Could not restore ‘%s’: File not found in backup" msgstr "Impossible de restablir '%s' : Fichièr introbable dins lo salvament" #. notify upper layers, if they want to do anything #. Duplicity tried to ask the user what the encryption password is. #. notify upper layers, if they want to do anything #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:929 #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:1027 #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:1031 msgid "Bad encryption password." msgstr "Marrit senhal pel chifratge" #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:934 msgid "Computer name changed" msgstr "Nom de l'ordenador modificat" #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:934 #, c-format msgid "" "The existing backup is of a computer named %s, but the current computer’s " "name is %s. If this is unexpected, you should back up to a different " "location." msgstr "" "Lo salvament existent es estat fach per un ordenador apelat %s, mas lo nom " "de l'ordenador actual es %s. S'esperavatz pas aquò, vos caldriá enregistrar " "los salvaments a un autre endrech." #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:969 #, c-format msgid "Permission denied when trying to create ‘%s’." msgstr "" "Permission refusada al moment de la temptativa de creacion de \"%s\"." #. assume error is on backend side #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:973 #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:977 #, c-format msgid "Permission denied when trying to read ‘%s’." msgstr "Permission refusada al moment de la temptativa de lectura de \"%s\"." #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:981 #, c-format msgid "Permission denied when trying to delete ‘%s’." msgstr "" "Permission refusada al moment de la temptativa de supression de \"%s\"." #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:988 #, c-format msgid "Backup location ‘%s’ does not exist." msgstr "L'endrech d'emmagazinatge del salvament \"%s\" existís pas." #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:994 #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:1046 msgid "No space left." msgstr "Pas d'espaci liure restant." #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:1008 msgid "Invalid ID." msgstr "ID invalid." #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:1010 msgid "Invalid secret key." msgstr "Clau secreta invalida." #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:1012 msgid "Your Amazon Web Services account is not signed up for the S3 service." msgstr "Vòstre compte Amazon Web Services es pas enregistrat pel servici S3." #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:1021 msgid "S3 bucket name is not available." msgstr "Lo nom del bucket S3 es pas disponible." #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:1035 #, c-format msgid "Error reading file ‘%s’." msgstr "Error al moment de la lectura del fichièr '%s'." #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:1037 #, c-format msgid "Error writing file ‘%s’." msgstr "Error al moment de l'escritura del fichièr '%s'." #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:1048 #, c-format msgid "No space left in ‘%s’." msgstr "Pas d'espaci liure restant dins \"%s\"." #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:1056 msgid "No backup files found" msgstr "Cap de fichièr de salvament es pas estat trobat" #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityJob.vala:1106 msgid "Uploading…" msgstr "Mandadís en cors…" #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityPlugin.vala:41 msgid "Could not understand duplicity version." msgstr "Impossible de comprene la version de duplicity." #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityPlugin.vala:51 #, c-format msgid "Could not understand duplicity version ‘%s’." msgstr "Impossible de comprene la version ‘%s’ de duplicity." #: ../libdeja/tools/duplicity/DuplicityPlugin.vala:54 #, c-format msgid "" "Déjà Dup Backup Tool requires at least version %d.%d.%.2d of duplicity, but " "only found version %d.%d.%.2d" msgstr "" "L'aisina de salvament Déjà Dup necessita al mens la version %d.%d.%.2d de " "duplicity, mas a pas trobat que la version %d.%d.%.2d" language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/LC_MESSAGES/transmission-gtk.po0000644000000000000000000016071512743727042022052 0ustar # Occitan (post 1500) translation for transmission # Copyright (c) 2010 Rosetta Contributors and Canonical Ltd 2010 # This file is distributed under the same license as the transmission package. # FIRST AUTHOR , 2010. # msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: transmission\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: FULL NAME \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-07-11 19:03+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-03-11 06:10+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Cédric VALMARY (Tot en òc) \n" "Language-Team: Occitan (post 1500) \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n > 1;\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2016-07-20 13:15+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 18147)\n" #: ../cli/cli.c:115 ../gtk/util.c:86 ../libtransmission/utils.c:1525 msgid "None" msgstr "Pas cap" #: ../gtk/actions.c:42 msgid "Sort by _Activity" msgstr "Triar per _activitat" #: ../gtk/actions.c:43 msgid "Sort by _Name" msgstr "Triar per _nom" #: ../gtk/actions.c:44 msgid "Sort by _Progress" msgstr "Triar per _progression" #: ../gtk/actions.c:45 msgid "Sort by _Queue" msgstr "Triar per _fila d'espèra" #: ../gtk/actions.c:46 msgid "Sort by Rati_o" msgstr "Triar per rati_o" #: ../gtk/actions.c:47 msgid "Sort by Stat_e" msgstr "Tri_ar per estat" #: ../gtk/actions.c:48 msgid "Sort by A_ge" msgstr "Triar per at_ge" #: ../gtk/actions.c:49 msgid "Sort by Time _Left" msgstr "Triar per te_mps restant" #: ../gtk/actions.c:50 msgid "Sort by Si_ze" msgstr "Triar per _talha" #: ../gtk/actions.c:67 msgid "_Show Transmission" msgstr "_Afichar Transmission" #: ../gtk/actions.c:68 msgid "Message _Log" msgstr "Jorna_l dels messatges" #: ../gtk/actions.c:83 msgid "Enable Alternative Speed _Limits" msgstr "Activar los _limits de velocitat alternatius" #: ../gtk/actions.c:84 msgid "_Compact View" msgstr "Vista _compacta" #: ../gtk/actions.c:85 msgid "Re_verse Sort Order" msgstr "In_versar l'òrdre de triada" #: ../gtk/actions.c:86 msgid "_Filterbar" msgstr "Barra de _filtre" #: ../gtk/actions.c:87 msgid "_Statusbar" msgstr "Barra d'e_stat" #: ../gtk/actions.c:88 msgid "_Toolbar" msgstr "Barra d'_espleches" #: ../gtk/actions.c:93 msgid "_File" msgstr "_Fichièr" #: ../gtk/actions.c:94 msgid "_Torrent" msgstr "_Torrent" #: ../gtk/actions.c:95 msgid "_View" msgstr "_Afichatge" #: ../gtk/actions.c:96 msgid "_Sort Torrents By" msgstr "Triar los torrent_s per" #: ../gtk/actions.c:97 msgid "_Queue" msgstr "_Metre en espèra" #: ../gtk/actions.c:98 ../gtk/details.c:2604 msgid "_Edit" msgstr "_Edicion" #: ../gtk/actions.c:99 msgid "_Help" msgstr "_Ajuda" #: ../gtk/actions.c:100 msgid "Copy _Magnet Link to Clipboard" msgstr "Copiar lo ligam _Magnet dins lo quichapapièrs" #: ../gtk/actions.c:101 msgid "Open _URL…" msgstr "Dobrir l'_URL…" #: ../gtk/actions.c:101 msgid "Open URL…" msgstr "Dobrir l'URL…" #: ../gtk/actions.c:102 ../gtk/actions.c:103 msgid "Open a torrent" msgstr "Dobrir un fichièr torrent" #: ../gtk/actions.c:104 msgid "_Start" msgstr "_Aviar" #: ../gtk/actions.c:104 msgid "Start torrent" msgstr "Aviar aqueste torrent" #: ../gtk/actions.c:105 msgid "Start _Now" msgstr "Aviar a_ra" #: ../gtk/actions.c:105 msgid "Start torrent now" msgstr "Aviar lo torrent ara" #: ../gtk/actions.c:106 msgid "_Statistics" msgstr "E_statisticas" #: ../gtk/actions.c:107 msgid "_Donate" msgstr "_Far un don" #: ../gtk/actions.c:108 msgid "_Verify Local Data" msgstr "_Verificar las donadas localas" #: ../gtk/actions.c:109 msgid "_Pause" msgstr "_Pausa" #: ../gtk/actions.c:109 msgid "Pause torrent" msgstr "Metre aqueste torrent en pausa" #: ../gtk/actions.c:110 msgid "_Pause All" msgstr "Metre tot en _pausa" #: ../gtk/actions.c:110 msgid "Pause all torrents" msgstr "Metre en pausa totes los torrents" #: ../gtk/actions.c:111 msgid "_Start All" msgstr "Aviar tote_s" #: ../gtk/actions.c:111 msgid "Start all torrents" msgstr "Aviar totes los torrents" #: ../gtk/actions.c:112 msgid "Set _Location…" msgstr "Definir l'_emplaçament…" #: ../gtk/actions.c:113 msgid "Remove torrent" msgstr "Suprimir lo torrent" #: ../gtk/actions.c:114 msgid "_Delete Files and Remove" msgstr "_Suprimir los fichièrs e levar" #: ../gtk/actions.c:115 msgid "_New…" msgstr "_Novèl…" #: ../gtk/actions.c:115 msgid "Create a torrent" msgstr "Crear un torrent" #: ../gtk/actions.c:116 msgid "_Quit" msgstr "_Quitar" #: ../gtk/actions.c:117 msgid "Select _All" msgstr "Seleccionar _tot" #: ../gtk/actions.c:118 msgid "Dese_lect All" msgstr "Dese_leccionar tot" #: ../gtk/actions.c:120 msgid "Torrent properties" msgstr "Proprietats del torrent" #: ../gtk/actions.c:121 msgid "Open Fold_er" msgstr "Dobrir lo dorsi_èr" #: ../gtk/actions.c:123 msgid "_Contents" msgstr "_Ensenhador" #: ../gtk/actions.c:124 msgid "Ask Tracker for _More Peers" msgstr "Demandar _mai de pars al tracador" #: ../gtk/actions.c:125 msgid "Move to _Top" msgstr "Desplaçar amon_t de tot" #: ../gtk/actions.c:126 msgid "Move _Up" msgstr "Desplaçar cap a_mont" #: ../gtk/actions.c:127 msgid "Move _Down" msgstr "Desplaçar cap a_val" #: ../gtk/actions.c:128 msgid "Move to _Bottom" msgstr "Desplaçar cap a_val" #: ../gtk/actions.c:129 msgid "Present Main Window" msgstr "Presentar la fenèstra principala" #: ../gtk/details.c:475 ../gtk/details.c:487 msgid "Use global settings" msgstr "Utilizar los paramètres globals" #: ../gtk/details.c:476 msgid "Seed regardless of ratio" msgstr "Partejar quin que siá lo ratio" #: ../gtk/details.c:477 msgid "Stop seeding at ratio:" msgstr "Partejar fins a un ratio de :" #: ../gtk/details.c:488 msgid "Seed regardless of activity" msgstr "Partejar quina que siá l’activitat" #: ../gtk/details.c:489 msgid "Stop seeding if idle for N minutes:" msgstr "Arrestar de partejar se inactiu dempuèi N minutas :" #: ../gtk/details.c:505 ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1319 msgid "Speed" msgstr "Velocitat" #: ../gtk/details.c:507 msgid "Honor global _limits" msgstr "Respectar los _limits globals" #: ../gtk/details.c:512 #, c-format msgid "Limit _download speed (%s):" msgstr "Limitar la velocitat de _telecargament (%s) :" #: ../gtk/details.c:525 #, c-format msgid "Limit _upload speed (%s):" msgstr "Limitar la velocitat d_e mandadís (%s) :" #: ../gtk/details.c:538 ../gtk/open-dialog.c:368 msgid "Torrent _priority:" msgstr "_Prioritat del torrent :" #: ../gtk/details.c:542 msgid "Seeding Limits" msgstr "Limits de partiment :" #: ../gtk/details.c:552 msgid "_Ratio:" msgstr "_Ratio :" #: ../gtk/details.c:561 msgid "_Idle:" msgstr "_Inactivitat :" #: ../gtk/details.c:564 msgid "Peer Connections" msgstr "Connexions als pars" #: ../gtk/details.c:567 msgid "_Maximum peers:" msgstr "Nombre maximum de pars :" #: ../gtk/details.c:586 ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:206 #: ../libtransmission/verify.c:264 msgid "Queued for verification" msgstr "En espèra de verificacion" #: ../gtk/details.c:587 msgid "Verifying local data" msgstr "Verificacion de las donadas localas" #: ../gtk/details.c:588 ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:209 msgid "Queued for download" msgstr "Mes en espèra de telecargament" #: ../gtk/details.c:589 ../gtk/filter.c:591 msgctxt "Verb" msgid "Downloading" msgstr "Telecargament" #: ../gtk/details.c:590 ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:212 msgid "Queued for seeding" msgstr "Mes en fila d'espèra per ensemenament" #: ../gtk/details.c:591 ../gtk/filter.c:592 msgctxt "Verb" msgid "Seeding" msgstr "Partiment" #: ../gtk/details.c:592 ../gtk/filter.c:594 ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:203 msgid "Finished" msgstr "Acabat" #: ../gtk/details.c:592 ../gtk/filter.c:593 ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:203 msgid "Paused" msgstr "En pausa" #: ../gtk/details.c:625 msgid "N/A" msgstr "N/A" #: ../gtk/details.c:637 ../gtk/file-list.c:619 msgid "Mixed" msgstr "Mixte" #: ../gtk/details.c:638 msgid "No Torrents Selected" msgstr "Cap de torrent pas seleccionat" #: ../gtk/details.c:667 msgid "Private to this tracker -- DHT and PEX disabled" msgstr "Restrench a aqueste tracador -- DHT e PEX desactivats" #: ../gtk/details.c:669 msgid "Public torrent" msgstr "Torrent public" #: ../gtk/details.c:700 #, c-format msgid "Created by %1$s" msgstr "Creat per %1$s" #: ../gtk/details.c:702 #, c-format msgid "Created on %1$s" msgstr "Creat lo %1$s" #: ../gtk/details.c:704 #, c-format msgid "Created by %1$s on %2$s" msgstr "Creat per %1$s lo %2$s" #: ../gtk/details.c:816 msgid "Unknown" msgstr "Desconegut" #: ../gtk/details.c:849 #, c-format msgid "%1$s (%2$'d piece @ %3$s)" msgid_plural "%1$s (%2$'d pieces @ %3$s)" msgstr[0] "%1$s (%2$'d partida @ %3$s)" msgstr[1] "%1$s (%2$'d partidas @ %3$s)" #: ../gtk/details.c:857 #, c-format msgid "%1$s (%2$'d piece)" msgid_plural "%1$s (%2$'d pieces)" msgstr[0] "%1$s (%2$'d partida)" msgstr[1] "%1$s (%2$'d partidas)" #: ../gtk/details.c:899 #, c-format msgid "%1$s (%2$s%%)" msgstr "%1$s (%2$s%%)" #: ../gtk/details.c:901 #, c-format msgid "%1$s (%2$s%% of %3$s%% Available)" msgstr "%1$s (%2$s%% sus %3$s%% disponible)" #: ../gtk/details.c:903 #, c-format msgid "%1$s (%2$s%% of %3$s%% Available); %4$s Unverified" msgstr "%1$s (%2$s%% sus %3$s%% disponibles) ; %4$s pas verificats" #: ../gtk/details.c:930 #, c-format msgid "%1$s (+%2$s corrupt)" msgstr "%1$s (+%2$s corromput)" #: ../gtk/details.c:958 #, c-format msgid "%s (Ratio: %s)" msgstr "%s (ratio : %s)" #: ../gtk/details.c:991 msgid "No errors" msgstr "Pas d'errors" #: ../gtk/details.c:1010 msgid "Never" msgstr "Pas jamai" #: ../gtk/details.c:1017 msgid "Active now" msgstr "actualament actiu" #: ../gtk/details.c:1023 #, c-format msgid "%1$s ago" msgstr "I a %1$s" #: ../gtk/details.c:1042 msgid "Activity" msgstr "Activitat" #: ../gtk/details.c:1047 msgid "Torrent size:" msgstr "Talha del torrent :" #: ../gtk/details.c:1052 msgid "Have:" msgstr "Efectuat :" #: ../gtk/details.c:1062 ../gtk/stats.c:156 ../gtk/stats.c:178 msgid "Downloaded:" msgstr "Recebut :" #: ../gtk/details.c:1057 ../gtk/stats.c:152 ../gtk/stats.c:174 msgid "Uploaded:" msgstr "Mandat :" #: ../gtk/details.c:1067 msgid "State:" msgstr "Estat :" #: ../gtk/details.c:1072 msgid "Running time:" msgstr "Temps d'execucion :" #: ../gtk/details.c:1077 msgid "Remaining time:" msgstr "Temps que demòra :" #: ../gtk/details.c:1082 msgid "Last activity:" msgstr "Darrièra activitat :" #: ../gtk/details.c:1088 msgid "Error:" msgstr "Error :" #: ../gtk/details.c:1092 msgid "Details" msgstr "Detalhs" #: ../gtk/details.c:1098 msgid "Location:" msgstr "Emplaçament :" #: ../gtk/details.c:1105 msgid "Hash:" msgstr "Hachatge :" #: ../gtk/details.c:1111 msgid "Privacy:" msgstr "Confidencialitat :" #: ../gtk/details.c:1118 msgid "Origin:" msgstr "Origina :" #: ../gtk/details.c:1135 msgid "Comment:" msgstr "Comentari :" #: ../gtk/details.c:1163 msgid "Web Seeds" msgstr "Fonts web" #: ../gtk/details.c:1165 ../gtk/details.c:1218 msgid "Down" msgstr "Recepcion" #: ../gtk/details.c:1216 msgid "Address" msgstr "Adreça" #: ../gtk/details.c:1220 msgid "Up" msgstr "Mandadís" #: ../gtk/details.c:1221 msgid "Client" msgstr "Client" #: ../gtk/details.c:1222 msgid "%" msgstr "%" #: ../gtk/details.c:1224 msgid "Up Reqs" msgstr "Demandas de mandadís" #: ../gtk/details.c:1226 msgid "Dn Reqs" msgstr "Demandas de recepcion" #: ../gtk/details.c:1228 msgid "Dn Blocks" msgstr "Blòts recebuts" #: ../gtk/details.c:1230 msgid "Up Blocks" msgstr "Blòts mandats" #: ../gtk/details.c:1232 msgid "We Cancelled" msgstr "Anullats per nosautres" #: ../gtk/details.c:1234 msgid "They Cancelled" msgstr "Anullats per eles" #: ../gtk/details.c:1235 msgid "Flags" msgstr "Indicadors" #: ../gtk/details.c:1618 msgid "Optimistic unchoke" msgstr "Proposicion d'escambis optimista" #: ../gtk/details.c:1619 msgid "Downloading from this peer" msgstr "Recepcion a partir d'aqueste par" #: ../gtk/details.c:1620 msgid "We would download from this peer if they would let us" msgstr "Telecargariam a partir d'aqueste par s'o nos permetiá" #: ../gtk/details.c:1621 msgid "Uploading to peer" msgstr "Mandadís al par" #: ../gtk/details.c:1622 msgid "We would upload to this peer if they asked" msgstr "Mandariam cap a aqueste par se nos o demandián" #: ../gtk/details.c:1623 msgid "Peer has unchoked us, but we're not interested" msgstr "Lo par nos a prepausat un escambi, mas sèm pas interessats" #: ../gtk/details.c:1624 msgid "We unchoked this peer, but they're not interested" msgstr "Avèm prepausat un escambi a aqueste par, mas es pas interessat" #: ../gtk/details.c:1625 msgid "Encrypted connection" msgstr "Connexion chifrada" #: ../gtk/details.c:1626 msgid "Peer was found through Peer Exchange (PEX)" msgstr "Par trobat per escambi de pars (PEX)" #: ../gtk/details.c:1627 msgid "Peer was found through DHT" msgstr "Par trobat per DHT" #: ../gtk/details.c:1628 msgid "Peer is an incoming connection" msgstr "Lo par es una connexion entranta" #: ../gtk/details.c:1629 msgid "Peer is connected over µTP" msgstr "Par connectat via µTP" #: ../gtk/details.c:1881 ../gtk/details.c:2619 msgid "Show _more details" msgstr "Afichar _mai de detalhs" #: ../gtk/details.c:1952 #, c-format msgid "Got a list of %1$s%2$'d peers%3$s %4$s ago" msgstr "Lista de %1$s%2$'d pars recebuda i a %3$s %4$s" #: ../gtk/details.c:1956 #, c-format msgid "Peer list request %1$stimed out%2$s %3$s ago; will retry" msgstr "" "Demanda de la lista de pars %1$sexpirada i a %2$s %3$s ; novèla temptativa " "programada" #: ../gtk/details.c:1959 #, c-format msgid "Got an error %1$s\"%2$s\"%3$s %4$s ago" msgstr "Error que s'es producha i a %1$s\"%2$s\"%3$s %4$s" #: ../gtk/details.c:1967 msgid "No updates scheduled" msgstr "Cap de mesa a jorn pas prevista" #: ../gtk/details.c:1973 #, c-format msgid "Asking for more peers in %s" msgstr "Demandar mai de pars dins %s" #: ../gtk/details.c:1978 msgid "Queued to ask for more peers" msgstr "En espèra per demandar mai de pars" #: ../gtk/details.c:1984 #, c-format msgid "Asking for more peers now… %s" msgstr "Demanda de pars suplementaris en cors… %s" #: ../gtk/details.c:1995 #, c-format msgid "Tracker had %s%'d seeders and %'d leechers%s %s ago" msgstr "Lo tracador aviá %s%'d provesidors e %'d telecargadors i a %s %s" #: ../gtk/details.c:1999 #, c-format msgid "Got a scrape error \"%s%s%s\" %s ago" msgstr "Error d'agropament (scrape) « %s%s%s » i a %s" #: ../gtk/details.c:2010 #, c-format msgid "Asking for peer counts in %s" msgstr "Descomptar los pars dins %s" #: ../gtk/details.c:2015 msgid "Queued to ask for peer counts" msgstr "Descompte dels pars en espèra" #: ../gtk/details.c:2021 #, c-format msgid "Asking for peer counts now… %s" msgstr "Demanda de comptatge dels pars en cors… %s" #: ../gtk/details.c:2306 msgid "List contains invalid URLs" msgstr "La lista conten d'URL invalidas" #: ../gtk/details.c:2311 ../gtk/file-list.c:819 msgid "Please correct the errors and try again." msgstr "Corregissètz las errors e reensajatz." #: ../gtk/details.c:2367 #, c-format msgid "%s - Edit Trackers" msgstr "%s - Editar los tracadors" #: ../gtk/details.c:2377 msgid "Tracker Announce URLs" msgstr "URL d'anonci dels tracadors" #: ../gtk/details.c:2380 ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:499 msgid "" "To add a backup URL, add it on the line after the primary URL.\n" "To add another primary URL, add it after a blank line." msgstr "" "Per apondre una URL de secors, plaçatz-la sus la linha aprèp l'URL " "primària.\n" "Per apondre una autra URL primària, plaçatz-la aprèp una linha voida." #: ../gtk/details.c:2477 #, c-format msgid "%s - Add Tracker" msgstr "%s - Apondre un tracador" #: ../gtk/details.c:2491 msgid "Tracker" msgstr "Aisina de seguiment" #: ../gtk/details.c:2497 msgid "_Announce URL:" msgstr "_URL d'anonci :" #: ../gtk/details.c:2575 ../gtk/details.c:2720 msgid "Trackers" msgstr "Tracadors" #: ../gtk/details.c:2599 msgid "_Add" msgstr "_Apondre" #: ../gtk/details.c:2610 msgid "_Remove" msgstr "_Suprimir" #: ../gtk/details.c:2626 msgid "Show _backup trackers" msgstr "Afichar los tracadors de secors" #: ../gtk/details.c:2712 ../gtk/msgwin.c:438 msgid "Information" msgstr "Entresenhas" #: ../gtk/details.c:2716 msgid "Peers" msgstr "Pars" #: ../gtk/details.c:2725 msgid "File listing not available for combined torrent properties" msgstr "" "Lista de fichièrs pas disponibla pel resumit de las proprietats del torrent" #: ../gtk/details.c:2729 ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:446 msgid "Files" msgstr "Fichièrs" #: ../gtk/details.c:2733 ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1226 ../gtk/tr-window.c:685 msgid "Options" msgstr "Opcions" #: ../gtk/details.c:2757 #, c-format msgid "%s Properties" msgstr "Proprietats de %s" #: ../gtk/details.c:2768 #, c-format msgid "%'d Torrent Properties" msgstr "Proprietats del torrent %d" #: ../gtk/dialogs.c:95 #, c-format msgid "Remove torrent?" msgid_plural "Remove %d torrents?" msgstr[0] "Levar un torrent ?" msgstr[1] "Levar los %d torrents ?" #: ../gtk/dialogs.c:101 #, c-format msgid "Delete this torrent's downloaded files?" msgid_plural "Delete these %d torrents' downloaded files?" msgstr[0] "Suprimir los fichièrs telecargats d'aqueste torrent ?" msgstr[1] "Suprimir los fichièrs telecargats d'aqueles %d torrents ?" #: ../gtk/dialogs.c:111 msgid "" "Once removed, continuing the transfer will require the torrent file or " "magnet link." msgid_plural "" "Once removed, continuing the transfers will require the torrent files or " "magnet links." msgstr[0] "" "Un còp suprimit, la represa del torrent necessitarà lo fichièr torrent o lo " "ligam magnet." msgstr[1] "" "Un còp suprimit, la represa dels torrents necessitaràn los fichièrs torrent " "o los ligams magnet." #: ../gtk/dialogs.c:117 msgid "This torrent has not finished downloading." msgid_plural "These torrents have not finished downloading." msgstr[0] "Aqueste torrent a pas acabat d'èsser telecargat." msgstr[1] "Aquestes torrents an pas acabat d'èsser telecargats." #: ../gtk/dialogs.c:123 msgid "This torrent is connected to peers." msgid_plural "These torrents are connected to peers." msgstr[0] "Aqueste torrent es connectat a de pars." msgstr[1] "Aquestes torrents son connectats a de pars." #: ../gtk/dialogs.c:130 msgid "One of these torrents is connected to peers." msgid_plural "Some of these torrents are connected to peers." msgstr[0] "Un d'aqueles torrents es connectat a de pars." msgstr[1] "Mantun torrent es connectat a de pars." #: ../gtk/dialogs.c:137 msgid "One of these torrents has not finished downloading." msgid_plural "Some of these torrents have not finished downloading." msgstr[0] "Un d'aqueles torrents a pas acabat d'èsser telecargat." msgstr[1] "Mantun d'aqueles torrents a pas acabat d'èsser telecargat." #: ../gtk/file-list.c:616 ../gtk/util.c:474 msgid "High" msgstr "Elevat" #: ../gtk/file-list.c:617 ../gtk/util.c:475 msgid "Normal" msgstr "Normal" #: ../gtk/file-list.c:618 ../gtk/util.c:476 msgid "Low" msgstr "Bas" #: ../gtk/file-list.c:814 #, c-format msgid "Unable to rename file as \"%s\": %s" msgstr "Impossible de renomenar lo fichièr en \"%s\" : %s" #: ../gtk/file-list.c:936 ../gtk/msgwin.c:303 msgid "Name" msgstr "Nom" #. add "size" column #: ../gtk/file-list.c:953 msgid "Size" msgstr "Talha" #. add "progress" column #: ../gtk/file-list.c:968 msgid "Have" msgstr "Obtengut" #. add "enabled" column #: ../gtk/file-list.c:981 msgid "Download" msgstr "Telecargar" #. add priority column #: ../gtk/file-list.c:997 msgid "Priority" msgstr "Prioritat" #: ../gtk/filter.c:281 ../gtk/filter.c:588 msgid "All" msgstr "Totes" #: ../gtk/filter.c:590 msgid "Active" msgstr "Activa" #: ../gtk/filter.c:595 msgctxt "Verb" msgid "Verifying" msgstr "Verificacion" #: ../gtk/filter.c:596 ../gtk/msgwin.c:437 ../gtk/util.c:687 #, c-format msgid "Error" msgstr "Error" #: ../gtk/filter.c:893 #, c-format msgid "_Show:" msgstr "_Afichar :" #: ../gtk/filter.c:895 #, c-format msgid "_Show %'d of:" msgstr "" #: ../gtk/main.c:329 #, c-format msgid "Error registering Transmission as a %s handler: %s" msgstr "" #: ../gtk/main.c:492 #, c-format msgid "" "Got signal %d; trying to shut down cleanly. Do it again if it gets stuck." msgstr "" "Senhal %d recebut ; temptativa de tampadura pròpria. Recomençatz s'aquò se " "blòca." #: ../gtk/main.c:625 msgid "Where to look for configuration files" msgstr "Emplaçament ont recercar los fichièrs de configuracion" #: ../gtk/main.c:626 msgid "Start with all torrents paused" msgstr "Aviar amb totes los torrents en pausa" #: ../gtk/main.c:627 msgid "Start minimized in notification area" msgstr "Aviar en minimizat dins la zòna de notificacion" #: ../gtk/main.c:628 msgid "Show version number and exit" msgstr "Afichar lo numèro de version e quitar" #: ../gtk/main.c:647 ../gtk/transmission-gtk.desktop.in.h:1 msgid "Transmission" msgstr "Transmission" #. parse the command line #: ../gtk/main.c:651 msgid "[torrent files or urls]" msgstr "[Fichièrs torrent o URL]" #: ../gtk/main.c:656 #, c-format msgid "" "%s\n" "Run '%s --help' to see a full list of available command line options.\n" msgstr "" "%s\n" "Aviatz « %s --help » per veire la lista completa de las opcions en linha de " "comanda disponiblas.\n" #: ../gtk/main.c:756 msgid "" "Transmission is a file sharing program. When you run a torrent, its data " "will be made available to others by means of upload. Any content you share " "is your sole responsibility." msgstr "" #: ../gtk/main.c:758 msgid "I _Agree" msgstr "_Accèpti" #: ../gtk/main.c:989 msgid "Closing Connections" msgstr "Tampadura de las connexions" #: ../gtk/main.c:993 msgid "Sending upload/download totals to tracker…" msgstr "Manda de totals mandadís/recepcion al tracker…" #: ../gtk/main.c:998 msgid "_Quit Now" msgstr "_Quitar ara" #: ../gtk/main.c:1059 msgid "Couldn't add corrupt torrent" msgid_plural "Couldn't add corrupt torrents" msgstr[0] "Impossible d'apondre un torrent corromput" msgstr[1] "Impossible d'apondre de torrents corromputs" #: ../gtk/main.c:1066 msgid "Couldn't add duplicate torrent" msgid_plural "Couldn't add duplicate torrents" msgstr[0] "Impossible d'apondre un torrent duplicat" msgstr[1] "Impossible d'apondre de torrents duplicats" #: ../gtk/main.c:1374 msgid "A fast and easy BitTorrent client" msgstr "Un client BitTorrent simple e rapid" #: ../gtk/main.c:1375 msgid "Copyright (c) The Transmission Project" msgstr "Copyright (c) « The Transmission Project »" #. Translators: translate "translator-credits" as your name #. to have it appear in the credits in the "About" #. dialog #: ../gtk/main.c:1381 msgid "translator-credits" msgstr "" "Launchpad Contributions:\n" " Cédric VALMARY (Tot en òc) https://launchpad.net/~cvalmary\n" " Yannig MARCHEGAY (Kokoyaya) https://launchpad.net/~yannick-marchegay" #: ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:72 #, c-format msgid "Creating \"%s\"" msgstr "Creacion de « %s »" #: ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:74 #, c-format msgid "Created \"%s\"!" msgstr "« %s » es estat creat" #: ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:76 #, c-format msgid "Error: invalid announce URL \"%s\"" msgstr "Error : l'URL « %s » es pas valabla" #: ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:78 #, c-format msgid "Cancelled" msgstr "Anullat" #: ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:80 #, c-format msgid "Error reading \"%s\": %s" msgstr "Error de lectura « %s » : %s" #: ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:82 #, c-format msgid "Error writing \"%s\": %s" msgstr "Error d'escritura « %s » : %s" #. how much data we've scanned through to generate checksums #: ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:103 #, c-format msgid "Scanned %s" msgstr "%s analisat" #: ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:171 ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:434 msgid "New Torrent" msgstr "Torrent novèl" #: ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:187 msgid "Creating torrent…" msgstr "Creacion del torrent en cors…" #: ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:299 msgid "No source selected" msgstr "Cap de font pas seleccionada" #: ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:305 #, c-format msgid "%1$s; %2$'d File" msgid_plural "%1$s; %2$'d Files" msgstr[0] "%1$s; %2$'d fichièr" msgstr[1] "%1$s; %2$'d fichièrs" #: ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:312 #, c-format msgid "%1$'d Piece @ %2$s" msgid_plural "%1$'d Pieces @ %2$s" msgstr[0] "%1$'d fragment @ %2$s" msgstr[1] "%1$'d fragments @ %2$s" #: ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:448 msgid "Sa_ve to:" msgstr "Enregistrar _jos :" #: ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:454 msgid "Source F_older:" msgstr "D_orsièr Font :" #: ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:466 msgid "Source _File:" msgstr "_Fichièr Font :" #: ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:478 msgid "No source selected" msgstr "Cap de font pas seleccionada" #: ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:482 msgid "Properties" msgstr "Proprietats" #: ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:484 msgid "_Trackers:" msgstr "_Tracadors :" #: ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:506 msgid "Co_mment:" msgstr "Co_mentari :" #: ../gtk/makemeta-ui.c:515 msgid "_Private torrent" msgstr "_Torrent privat" #: ../gtk/msgwin.c:142 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't save \"%s\"" msgstr "Impossible d'enregistrar \"%s\"" #: ../gtk/msgwin.c:203 msgid "Save Log" msgstr "Enregistrar lo jornal" #: ../gtk/msgwin.c:298 msgid "Time" msgstr "Ora" #: ../gtk/msgwin.c:308 msgid "Message" msgstr "Messatge" #: ../gtk/msgwin.c:439 msgid "Debug" msgstr "Desbugatge" #: ../gtk/msgwin.c:465 msgid "Message Log" msgstr "Istoric dels messatges" #: ../gtk/msgwin.c:500 msgid "Level" msgstr "Nivèl" #: ../gtk/notify.c:214 msgid "Open File" msgstr "Dobrir un fichièr" #: ../gtk/notify.c:219 msgid "Open Folder" msgstr "Dobrir un dorsièr" #: ../gtk/notify.c:227 msgid "Torrent Complete" msgstr "Torrent complet" #: ../gtk/notify.c:249 msgid "Torrent Added" msgstr "Torrent apondut" #: ../gtk/open-dialog.c:250 msgid "Torrent files" msgstr "Fichièrs torrent" #: ../gtk/open-dialog.c:255 msgid "All files" msgstr "Totes los fichièrs" #. make the dialog #: ../gtk/open-dialog.c:280 msgid "Torrent Options" msgstr "Opcions del torrent" #: ../gtk/open-dialog.c:302 ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:296 msgid "Mo_ve .torrent file to the trash" msgstr "Man_dar lo fichièr .torrent a la banasta" #: ../gtk/open-dialog.c:304 msgid "_Start when added" msgstr "Aviar t_re l'apondon" #. "torrent file" row #: ../gtk/open-dialog.c:320 msgid "_Torrent file:" msgstr "Fichièr _torrent :" #: ../gtk/open-dialog.c:323 msgid "Select Source File" msgstr "Seleccionatz un fichièr font" #: ../gtk/open-dialog.c:335 msgid "_Destination folder:" msgstr "Dorsièr de _destinacion :" #: ../gtk/open-dialog.c:338 msgid "Select Destination Folder" msgstr "Seleccionatz un dorsièr de destinacion" #: ../gtk/open-dialog.c:444 msgid "Open a Torrent" msgstr "Dobrir un torrent" #: ../gtk/open-dialog.c:460 msgid "Show _options dialog" msgstr "Afichar las _opcions" #: ../gtk/open-dialog.c:509 msgid "Open URL" msgstr "Dobrir l'URL" #: ../gtk/open-dialog.c:522 msgid "Open torrent from URL" msgstr "Dobrir un torrent dempuèi una URL" #: ../gtk/open-dialog.c:527 msgid "_URL" msgstr "_URL" #: ../gtk/relocate.c:61 #, c-format msgid "Moving \"%s\"" msgstr "Desplaçament de « %s »" #: ../gtk/relocate.c:83 msgid "Couldn't move torrent" msgstr "Impossible de desplaçar lo torrent" #: ../gtk/relocate.c:118 msgid "This may take a moment…" msgstr "Aquò pòt prene un momenton..." #: ../gtk/relocate.c:149 ../gtk/relocate.c:169 msgid "Set Torrent Location" msgstr "Definir l'emplaçament del torrent" #: ../gtk/relocate.c:165 msgid "Location" msgstr "Emplaçament" #: ../gtk/relocate.c:172 msgid "Torrent _location:" msgstr "Emp_laçament del torrent :" #: ../gtk/relocate.c:173 msgid "_Move from the current folder" msgstr "_Desplaçar del dorsièr actual" #: ../gtk/relocate.c:176 msgid "Local data is _already there" msgstr "Las donadas loc_alas son ja aicí" #: ../gtk/stats.c:72 ../gtk/stats.c:167 #, c-format msgid "Started %'d time" msgid_plural "Started %'d times" msgstr[0] "Aviat %d còp" msgstr[1] "Aviat %d còps" #: ../gtk/stats.c:96 msgid "Reset your statistics?" msgstr "Tornar metre vòstras estatisticas a zèro ?" #: ../gtk/stats.c:97 msgid "" "These statistics are for your information only. Resetting them doesn't " "affect the statistics logged by your BitTorrent trackers." msgstr "" "Aquelas estatisticas vos son unicament destinadas. Las reïnicializar afècta " "pas las estatisticas enregistradas per vòstres tracadors BitTorrent." #: ../gtk/stats.c:108 ../gtk/stats.c:136 msgid "_Reset" msgstr "_Reïnicializar" #: ../gtk/stats.c:133 ../gtk/tr-window.c:730 msgid "Statistics" msgstr "Estatisticas" #: ../gtk/stats.c:148 msgid "Current Session" msgstr "Sesilha en cors" #: ../gtk/stats.c:160 ../gtk/stats.c:182 msgid "Ratio:" msgstr "Ratio :" #: ../gtk/stats.c:164 ../gtk/stats.c:186 msgid "Duration:" msgstr "Durada :" #: ../gtk/stats.c:166 msgid "Total" msgstr "Al total" #. %1$s is how much we've got, #. %2$s is how much we'll have when done, #. %3$s%% is a percentage of the two #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:59 #, c-format msgid "%1$s of %2$s (%3$s%%)" msgstr "%1$s de %2$s (%3$s% %)" #. %1$s is how much we've got, #. %2$s is the torrent's total size, #. %3$s%% is a percentage of the two, #. %4$s is how much we've uploaded, #. %5$s is our upload-to-download ratio, #. %6$s is the ratio we want to reach before we stop uploading #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:75 #, c-format msgid "%1$s of %2$s (%3$s%%), uploaded %4$s (Ratio: %5$s Goal: %6$s)" msgstr "%1$s de %2$s (%3$s% %), mandat %4$s (ratio : %5$s objectiu : %6$s)" #. %1$s is how much we've got, #. %2$s is the torrent's total size, #. %3$s%% is a percentage of the two, #. %4$s is how much we've uploaded, #. %5$s is our upload-to-download ratio #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:91 #, c-format msgid "%1$s of %2$s (%3$s%%), uploaded %4$s (Ratio: %5$s)" msgstr "%1$s de %2$s (%3$s% %), mandat %4$s (ratio : %5$s)" #. %1$s is the torrent's total size, #. %2$s is how much we've uploaded, #. %3$s is our upload-to-download ratio, #. %4$s is the ratio we want to reach before we stop uploading #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:108 #, c-format msgid "%1$s, uploaded %2$s (Ratio: %3$s Goal: %4$s)" msgstr "%1$s, mandat %2$s (ratio : %3$s objectiu : %4$s)" #. %1$s is the torrent's total size, #. %2$s is how much we've uploaded, #. %3$s is our upload-to-download ratio #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:120 #, c-format msgid "%1$s, uploaded %2$s (Ratio: %3$s)" msgstr "%1$s, mandat %2$s (Ratio : %3$s)" #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:134 msgid "Remaining time unknown" msgstr "Temps restant desconegut" #. time remaining #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:140 #, c-format msgid "%s remaining" msgstr "%s restant" #. down speed, down symbol, up speed, up symbol #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:165 #, c-format msgid "%1$s %2$s %3$s %4$s" msgstr "%1$s %2$s %3$s %4$s" #. up speed, up symbol #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:177 #, c-format msgid "%1$s %2$s" msgstr "%1$s %2$s" #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:183 msgid "Stalled" msgstr "Arrestat" #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:216 #, c-format msgid "Verifying local data (%.1f%% tested)" msgstr "Verificacion de las donadas localas (%.1f %% testat)" #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:246 #, c-format msgid "Tracker gave a warning: \"%s\"" msgstr "Lo tracador a retornat l'avertiment : \"%s\"" #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:247 #, c-format msgid "Tracker gave an error: \"%s\"" msgstr "Lo tracador a retornat l'error : \"%s\"" #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:248 #, c-format msgid "Error: %s" msgstr "Error : %s" #. Downloading metadata from 2 peer (s)(50% done) #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:268 #, c-format msgid "Downloading metadata from %1$'d %2$s (%3$d%% done)" msgstr "" #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:270 ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:279 #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:296 msgid "peer" msgid_plural "peers" msgstr[0] "par" msgstr[1] "pars" #. Downloading from 2 of 3 peer (s) and 2 webseed (s) #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:276 #, c-format msgid "Downloading from %1$'d of %2$'d %3$s and %4$'d %5$s" msgstr "" #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:281 ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:288 msgid "web seed" msgid_plural "web seeds" msgstr[0] "font web" msgstr[1] "fonts web" #. Downloading from 3 web seed (s) #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:286 #, c-format msgid "Downloading from %1$'d %2$s" msgstr "" #. Downloading from 2 of 3 peer (s) #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:293 #, c-format msgid "Downloading from %1$'d of %2$'d %3$s" msgstr "" #: ../gtk/torrent-cell-renderer.c:303 #, c-format msgid "Seeding to %1$'d of %2$'d connected peer" msgid_plural "Seeding to %1$'d of %2$'d connected peers" msgstr[0] "Partiment cap a %1$'d de %2$'d par connectat" msgstr[1] "Partiment cap a %1$'d de %2$'d pars connectats" #: ../gtk/transmission-gtk.desktop.in.h:2 msgid "BitTorrent Client" msgstr "Client BitTorrent" #: ../gtk/transmission-gtk.desktop.in.h:3 msgid "Transmission BitTorrent Client" msgstr "Client BitTorrent Transmission" #: ../gtk/transmission-gtk.desktop.in.h:4 msgid "Download and share files over BitTorrent" msgstr "Recep e parteja de fichièrs via BitTorrent" #: ../gtk/transmission-gtk.desktop.in.h:5 msgid "Start Transmission with All Torrents Paused" msgstr "Aviar Transmission amb totes los torrents en pausa" #: ../gtk/transmission-gtk.desktop.in.h:6 msgid "Start Transmission Minimized" msgstr "Aviar Transmission en mòde reduch" #: ../gtk/tr-core.c:1218 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't read \"%s\": %s" msgstr "Impossible de legir « %s » : %s" #: ../gtk/tr-core.c:1314 #, c-format msgid "Skipping unknown torrent \"%s\"" msgstr "Lo torrent desconegut « %s » es ignorat" #: ../gtk/tr-core.c:1568 msgid "Inhibiting desktop hibernation" msgstr "Empachar l'ivernacion de l'ordenador" #: ../gtk/tr-core.c:1572 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't inhibit desktop hibernation: %s" msgstr "A pas pogut inibar l'ivernacion : %s" #: ../gtk/tr-core.c:1606 msgid "Allowing desktop hibernation" msgstr "Activar l'ivernacion" #: ../gtk/tr-icon.c:61 msgid "Idle" msgstr "Inactiu" #: ../gtk/tr-icon.c:78 ../gtk/tr-icon.c:94 #, c-format msgid " (Limit: %s)" msgstr " (Limit : %s)" #. %1$s: current upload speed #. * %2$s: current upload limit, if any #. * %3$s: current download speed #. * %4$s: current download limit, if any #: ../gtk/tr-icon.c:101 #, c-format msgid "" "Transmission\n" "Up: %1$s %2$s\n" "Down: %3$s %4$s" msgstr "" "Transmission\n" "Emission : %1$s %2$s\n" "Recepcion : %3$s %4$s" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:279 msgctxt "Gerund" msgid "Adding" msgstr "Apondon" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:281 msgid "Automatically add .torrent files _from:" msgstr "Apondre automaticament los fichièrs .torrent _dempuèi :" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:288 msgid "Show the Torrent Options _dialog" msgstr "" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:292 msgid "_Start added torrents" msgstr "" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:301 msgid "Save to _Location:" msgstr "Enregistrar _cap a :" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:308 msgid "Download Queue" msgstr "Telecargaments en espèra" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:310 msgid "Ma_ximum active downloads:" msgstr "" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:314 msgid "Downloads sharing data in the last _N minutes are active:" msgstr "" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:319 ../libtransmission/torrent.c:2011 msgid "Incomplete" msgstr "Incomplet" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:321 msgid "Append \"._part\" to incomplete files' names" msgstr "Apondre « ._part » al nom dels fichièrs incomplets" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:325 msgid "Keep _incomplete torrents in:" msgstr "Conservar los torrents _incomplets dins :" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:332 msgid "Call scrip_t when torrent is completed:" msgstr "Apelar aqueste escrip_t quand un torrent es acabat :" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:356 msgid "Limits" msgstr "Limits" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:358 msgid "Stop seeding at _ratio:" msgstr "Partejar fins a un ratio de :" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:365 msgid "Stop seeding if idle for _N minutes:" msgstr "Arrestar de partejar se inactiu dempuèi _N minutas :" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:388 ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1329 msgid "Desktop" msgstr "Burèu" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:390 msgid "_Inhibit hibernation when torrents are active" msgstr "_Empachar la mesa en velha quand de torrents son actius" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:394 msgid "Show Transmission icon in the _notification area" msgstr "Afichar l'icòna de Transmission dins la zòna de _notificacion" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:399 msgid "Notification" msgstr "Notificacion" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:401 msgid "Show a notification when torrents are a_dded" msgstr "Afichar una notificacion al moment de l'a_pondon de torrents" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:405 msgid "Show a notification when torrents _finish" msgstr "Afichar una notificacion quand los telecargaments son acaba_ts" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:409 msgid "Play a _sound when torrents finish" msgstr "Emetre un _son quand un telecargament s'acaba" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:437 #, c-format msgid "Blocklist contains %'d rule" msgid_plural "Blocklist contains %'d rules" msgstr[0] "La lista de blocatge conten %'d règla" msgstr[1] "La lista de blocatge conten %'d règlas" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:471 #, c-format msgid "Blocklist has %'d rule." msgid_plural "Blocklist has %'d rules." msgstr[0] "La lista de blocatge a recuperat %'d règla." msgstr[1] "La lista de blocatge a recuperat %'d règlas." #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:475 msgid "Update succeeded!" msgstr "Mesa a jorn capitada !" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:475 msgid "Unable to update." msgstr "Mesa a jorn impossibla." #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:490 msgid "Update Blocklist" msgstr "Metre a jorn la lista d'exclusion" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:492 msgid "Getting new blocklist…" msgstr "Obtencion de la lista dels blòts en cors…" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:520 msgid "Allow encryption" msgstr "Chiframent autorizat" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:521 msgid "Prefer encryption" msgstr "Chiframent preferit" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:522 msgid "Require encryption" msgstr "Chiframent requesit" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:546 ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1325 msgid "Privacy" msgstr "Confidencialitat" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:548 msgid "_Encryption mode:" msgstr "Mòde de chifr_ament :" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:553 msgid "Blocklist" msgstr "Filtre d'exclusion" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:555 msgid "Enable _blocklist:" msgstr "Activar la lista d’exclusion :" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:569 msgid "_Update" msgstr "_Metre a jorn" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:579 msgid "Enable _automatic updates" msgstr "Activar las mesas a jorn _automaticas" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:797 msgid "Remote Control" msgstr "Contraròtle a distància" #. "enabled" checkbutton #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:800 msgid "Allow _remote access" msgstr "" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:806 msgid "_Open web client" msgstr "_Dobrir lo client Web" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:815 msgid "HTTP _port:" msgstr "_Pòrt HTTP :" #. require authentication #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:819 msgid "Use _authentication" msgstr "Utilizar l'_autentificacion" #. username #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:827 msgid "_Username:" msgstr "Nom d'_utilizaire :" #. password #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:834 msgid "Pass_word:" msgstr "_Senhal :" #. require authentication #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:842 msgid "Only allow these IP a_ddresses:" msgstr "Autorizar unicament aquelas a_dreças IP :" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:867 msgid "IP addresses may use wildcards, such as 192.168.*.*" msgstr "Las adreças IP pòdon utilizar de jokers, coma 192.168.*.*" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:889 msgid "Addresses:" msgstr "Adreças :" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1001 msgid "Every Day" msgstr "Cada jorn" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1002 msgid "Weekdays" msgstr "de la setmana" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1003 msgid "Weekends" msgstr "de la dimenjada" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1004 msgid "Sunday" msgstr "Dimenge" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1005 msgid "Monday" msgstr "Diluns" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1006 msgid "Tuesday" msgstr "Dimars" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1007 msgid "Wednesday" msgstr "Dimècres" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1008 msgid "Thursday" msgstr "Dijòus" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1009 msgid "Friday" msgstr "Divendres" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1010 msgid "Saturday" msgstr "Dissabte" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1041 msgid "Speed Limits" msgstr "Limits de velocitat" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1043 #, c-format msgid "_Upload (%s):" msgstr "_Mandadís (%s) :" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1050 #, c-format msgid "_Download (%s):" msgstr "_Telecargament (%s) :" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1059 msgid "Alternative Speed Limits" msgstr "Limits de velocitat alternatius" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1068 msgid "Override normal speed limits manually or at scheduled times" msgstr "" "Otrapassar los limits de velocitat manualament o al periòdes definits" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1075 #, c-format msgid "U_pload (%s):" msgstr "Ma_ndadís (%s) :" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1079 #, c-format msgid "Do_wnload (%s):" msgstr "Te_lecargament (%s) :" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1083 msgid "_Scheduled times:" msgstr "Periòde_s :" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1088 msgid " _to " msgstr " _cap a " #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1099 msgid "_On days:" msgstr "_los jorns :" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1131 ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1199 ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1280 msgid "Status unknown" msgstr "Estat desconegut" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1154 msgid "Port is open" msgstr "Lo pòrt es dobèrt" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1154 msgid "Port is closed" msgstr "Lo pòrt es tampat" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1169 msgid "Testing TCP port…" msgstr "Pòrt TCP en cors de tèst…" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1192 msgid "Listening Port" msgstr "Pòrt TCP/IP local d’entrada" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1194 msgid "_Port used for incoming connections:" msgstr "_Pòrt utilizat per las connexions entrantas :" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1202 msgid "Te_st Port" msgstr "Te_star lo pòrt" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1209 msgid "Pick a _random port every time Transmission is started" msgstr "Causir un pòrt a l'aza_rd a cada aviada de Transmission" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1213 msgid "Use UPnP or NAT-PMP port _forwarding from my router" msgstr "" "Utilizar las redireccions dels pòrts UPnP o NAT-PMP dempuèi mon rotador." #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1218 msgid "Peer Limits" msgstr "Limits del par" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1221 msgid "Maximum peers per _torrent:" msgstr "Nombre maximum de pars per _torrent :" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1223 msgid "Maximum peers _overall:" msgstr "Nombre de pars _global maximum :" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1229 msgid "Enable _uTP for peer communication" msgstr "Activar _uTP per la comunicacion entre pars" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1231 msgid "uTP is a tool for reducing network congestion." msgstr "uTP es una aisina destinada a reduire la congestion de la ret." #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1236 msgid "Use PE_X to find more peers" msgstr "Utilizar PE_X per trobar mai de pars" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1238 msgid "" "PEX is a tool for exchanging peer lists with the peers you're connected to." msgstr "" "PEX es una aisina que permet d'escambiar de listas de pars amb los als quals " "sètz connectat." #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1242 msgid "Use _DHT to find more peers" msgstr "Utilizar _DHT per trobar mai de pars" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1244 msgid "DHT is a tool for finding peers without a tracker." msgstr "" "DHT es una aisina que permet de trobar de pars en l'abséncia de tracador." #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1248 msgid "Use _Local Peer Discovery to find more peers" msgstr "Utilizar la descobèrta de pars _locals per trobar mai de pars" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1250 msgid "LPD is a tool for finding peers on your local network." msgstr "LPD es una aisina per trobar de pars sus vòstra ret locala." #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1305 msgid "Transmission Preferences" msgstr "Preferéncias de Transmission" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1321 msgctxt "Gerund" msgid "Downloading" msgstr "Telecargament" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1323 msgctxt "Gerund" msgid "Seeding" msgstr "Partiment" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1327 msgid "Network" msgstr "Ret" #: ../gtk/tr-prefs.c:1331 msgid "Remote" msgstr "A distància" #: ../gtk/tr-window.c:141 msgid "Torrent" msgstr "Torrent" #: ../gtk/tr-window.c:251 msgid "Total Ratio" msgstr "Ratio total" #: ../gtk/tr-window.c:252 msgid "Session Ratio" msgstr "Ratio de la sesilha" #: ../gtk/tr-window.c:253 msgid "Total Transfer" msgstr "Transferiment total" #: ../gtk/tr-window.c:254 msgid "Session Transfer" msgstr "Transferiment de la sesilha" #: ../gtk/tr-window.c:282 #, c-format msgid "" "Click to disable Alternative Speed Limits\n" " (%1$s down, %2$s up)" msgstr "" "Clicatz per desactivar la velocitat limita alternativa\n" " (%1$s de mens, %2$s de mai)" #: ../gtk/tr-window.c:283 #, c-format msgid "" "Click to enable Alternative Speed Limits\n" " (%1$s down, %2$s up)" msgstr "" "Clicatz per activar la velocitat limita alternativa\n" " (%1$s de mens, %2$s de mai)" #: ../gtk/tr-window.c:349 #, c-format msgid "Tracker will allow requests in %s" msgstr "Lo tracador autorizarà las requèstas dins %s" #: ../gtk/tr-window.c:424 msgid "Unlimited" msgstr "Illimitat" #: ../gtk/tr-window.c:497 msgid "Seed Forever" msgstr "Partiment illimitat" #: ../gtk/tr-window.c:536 msgid "Limit Download Speed" msgstr "Limitar la velocitat de telecargament" #: ../gtk/tr-window.c:540 msgid "Limit Upload Speed" msgstr "Limitar la velocitat de mandadís" #: ../gtk/tr-window.c:547 msgid "Stop Seeding at Ratio" msgstr "Arrestar lo mandadís al ratio" #: ../gtk/tr-window.c:581 #, c-format msgid "Stop at Ratio (%s)" msgstr "Arrestar al ratio (%s)" #: ../gtk/tr-window.c:804 ../gtk/tr-window.c:832 #, c-format msgid "Ratio: %s" msgstr "Ratio : %s" #: ../gtk/tr-window.c:815 #, c-format msgid "Down: %1$s, Up: %2$s" msgstr "Recepcion : %1$s, Mandadís : %2$s" #: ../gtk/tr-window.c:826 #, c-format msgid "size|Down: %1$s, Up: %2$s" msgstr "Recepcion : %1$s, Emission : %2$s" #: ../gtk/util.c:36 msgid "KiB" msgstr "ko" #: ../gtk/util.c:37 msgid "MiB" msgstr "Mo" #: ../gtk/util.c:38 msgid "GiB" msgstr "Go" #: ../gtk/util.c:39 msgid "TiB" msgstr "Tio" #: ../gtk/util.c:42 msgid "kB" msgstr "Ko" #: ../gtk/util.c:43 msgid "MB" msgstr "Mo" #: ../gtk/util.c:44 msgid "GB" msgstr "Go" #: ../gtk/util.c:45 msgid "TB" msgstr "To" #: ../gtk/util.c:48 msgid "kB/s" msgstr "ko/s" #: ../gtk/util.c:49 msgid "MB/s" msgstr "Mo/s" #: ../gtk/util.c:50 msgid "GB/s" msgstr "Go/s" #: ../gtk/util.c:51 msgid "TB/s" msgstr "To/s" #: ../gtk/util.c:107 #, c-format msgid "%'d day" msgid_plural "%'d days" msgstr[0] "%'d jorn" msgstr[1] "%'d jorns" #: ../gtk/util.c:108 #, c-format msgid "%'d hour" msgid_plural "%'d hours" msgstr[0] "%'d ora" msgstr[1] "%'d oras" #: ../gtk/util.c:109 #, c-format msgid "%'d minute" msgid_plural "%'d minutes" msgstr[0] "%'d minuta" msgstr[1] "%'d minutas" #: ../gtk/util.c:110 #, c-format msgid "%'d second" msgid_plural "%'d seconds" msgstr[0] "%'d segonda" msgstr[1] "%'d segondas" #: ../gtk/util.c:228 #, c-format msgid "The torrent file \"%s\" contains invalid data." msgstr "Lo fichièr torrent « %s » conten de donadas invalidas." #: ../gtk/util.c:230 #, c-format msgid "The torrent file \"%s\" is already in use by \"%s.\"" msgstr "" #: ../gtk/util.c:232 #, c-format msgid "The torrent file \"%s\" encountered an unknown error." msgstr "Lo fichièr torrent « %s » a rencontrat una error desconeguda." #: ../gtk/util.c:238 msgid "Error opening torrent" msgstr "Error al moment de la dobertura del torrent" #: ../gtk/util.c:543 #, c-format msgid "Error opening \"%s\"" msgstr "Impossible de dobrir « %s »" #: ../gtk/util.c:546 #, c-format msgid "Server returned \"%1$ld %2$s\"" msgstr "Lo servidor a renviat « %1$ld%2$s »" #: ../gtk/util.c:566 msgid "Unrecognized URL" msgstr "URL pas reconeguda" #: ../gtk/util.c:568 #, c-format msgid "Transmission doesn't know how to use \"%s\"" msgstr "Transmission sap pas cossí utilizar « %s »" #: ../gtk/util.c:573 #, c-format msgid "" "This magnet link appears to be intended for something other than BitTorrent. " "BitTorrent magnet links have a section containing \"%s\"." msgstr "" "Aqueste ligam magnet sembla destinat a quicòm mai que non pas BitTorrent. " "Los ligams magnet BitTorrent an una seccion que conten « %s »." #: ../gtk/util.c:693 #, c-format msgid "%s free" msgstr "%s liures" #: ../libtransmission/announcer.c:1060 ../libtransmission/announcer.c:1353 msgid "Could not connect to tracker" msgstr "Impossible de se connectar al tracker" #: ../libtransmission/announcer.c:1064 ../libtransmission/announcer.c:1357 msgid "Tracker did not respond" msgstr "Lo tracker a pas respondut" #: ../libtransmission/announcer.c:1126 msgid "Success" msgstr "Succès." #: ../libtransmission/announcer-http.c:205 #: ../libtransmission/announcer-http.c:355 #, c-format msgid "Tracker gave HTTP response code %1$ld (%2$s)" msgstr "Lo tracker a renviat lo còde de responsa HTTP %1$ld (%2$s)" #: ../libtransmission/announcer-udp.c:263 #: ../libtransmission/announcer-udp.c:413 msgid "Unknown error" msgstr "Error desconeguda" #: ../libtransmission/announcer-udp.c:502 #, c-format msgid "DNS Lookup failed: %s" msgstr "La recèrca de DNS a fracassat : %s" #: ../libtransmission/announcer-udp.c:603 msgid "Connection failed" msgstr "Connexion impossibla" #: ../libtransmission/blocklist.c:85 ../libtransmission/blocklist.c:322 #: ../libtransmission/utils.c:226 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't read \"%1$s\": %2$s" msgstr "Impossible de legir « %1$s » : %2$s" #: ../libtransmission/blocklist.c:115 #, c-format msgid "Blocklist \"%s\" contains %zu entries" msgstr "La lista d’exclusion « %s » conten %zu entradas" #. don't try to display the actual lines - it causes issues #: ../libtransmission/blocklist.c:365 #, c-format msgid "blocklist skipped invalid address at line %d" msgstr "" "las adreças invalidas a la linha %d de la lista d'exclusion son estadas " "ignoradas" #: ../libtransmission/blocklist.c:415 ../libtransmission/rpcimpl.c:1513 #: ../libtransmission/rpcimpl.c:1526 ../libtransmission/rpcimpl.c:1543 #: ../libtransmission/variant.c:1219 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't save file \"%1$s\": %2$s" msgstr "Impossible d'enregistrar lo fichièr « %1$s » : %2$s" #: ../libtransmission/blocklist.c:420 #, c-format msgid "Blocklist \"%s\" updated with %zu entries" msgstr "Lista d’exclusion « %s » mesa a jorn amb %zu entradas." #: ../libtransmission/fdlimit.c:345 ../libtransmission/utils.c:424 #: ../libtransmission/utils.c:434 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't create \"%1$s\": %2$s" msgstr "Impossible de crear « %1$s » : %2$s" #: ../libtransmission/fdlimit.c:370 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't open \"%1$s\": %2$s" msgstr "Impossible de dobrir « %1$s » : %2$s" #: ../libtransmission/fdlimit.c:383 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't truncate \"%1$s\": %2$s" msgstr "Impossible de troncar « %1$s » : %2$s" #: ../libtransmission/fdlimit.c:671 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't create socket: %s" msgstr "Impossible de crear un connectador : %s" #: ../libtransmission/makemeta.c:61 #, c-format msgid "Torrent Creator is skipping file \"%s\": %s" msgstr "Lo creator de torrent ignora lo fichièr « %s » : %s" #: ../libtransmission/metainfo.c:585 #, c-format msgid "Invalid metadata entry \"%s\"" msgstr "L'entrada de metadonadas « %s » es invalida" #: ../libtransmission/natpmp.c:30 msgid "Port Forwarding (NAT-PMP)" msgstr "Redireccion de pòrt (NAT-PMP)" #: ../libtransmission/natpmp.c:70 #, c-format msgid "%s succeeded (%d)" msgstr "%s a capitat (%d)" #: ../libtransmission/natpmp.c:139 #, c-format msgid "Found public address \"%s\"" msgstr "Adreça publica trobada « %s »" #: ../libtransmission/natpmp.c:174 #, c-format msgid "no longer forwarding port %d" msgstr "mai de redireccions pel pòrt %d" #: ../libtransmission/natpmp.c:219 #, c-format msgid "Port %d forwarded successfully" msgstr "Pòrt %d redirigit amb succès" #: ../libtransmission/net.c:269 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't set source address %s on %d: %s" msgstr "Impossible de definir l'adreça font %s sus %d : %s" #: ../libtransmission/net.c:286 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't connect socket %d to %s, port %d (errno %d - %s)" msgstr "" "Impossible de connectar lo connectador %d a %s, pòrt %d (n° d'error %d - %s)" #: ../libtransmission/net.c:362 msgid "Is another copy of Transmission already running?" msgstr "Una autra instància de Transmission s'executa ?" #: ../libtransmission/net.c:367 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't bind port %d on %s: %s" msgstr "Impossible de se connectar al pòrt %d sus %s : %s" #: ../libtransmission/net.c:369 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't bind port %d on %s: %s (%s)" msgstr "Impossible de s'estacar al pòrt %d sus %s : %s (%s)" #: ../libtransmission/peer-msgs.c:1903 #, c-format msgid "Please Verify Local Data! Piece #%zu is corrupt." msgstr "Verificar las donadas localas ! La partida #%zu es corrompuda." #: ../libtransmission/platform.c:405 #, c-format msgid "Searching for web interface file \"%s\"" msgstr "" #: ../libtransmission/port-forwarding.c:29 msgid "Port Forwarding" msgstr "Redireccion del pòrt" #: ../libtransmission/port-forwarding.c:56 msgid "Starting" msgstr "Aviada" #: ../libtransmission/port-forwarding.c:57 msgid "Forwarded" msgstr "Transmés" #: ../libtransmission/port-forwarding.c:58 msgid "Stopping" msgstr "En cors d'arrèst" #: ../libtransmission/port-forwarding.c:59 msgid "Not forwarded" msgstr "Pas redirigit" #: ../libtransmission/port-forwarding.c:90 ../libtransmission/torrent.c:2159 #, c-format msgid "State changed from \"%1$s\" to \"%2$s\"" msgstr "Estat modificat de « %1$s » en « %2$s »" #: ../libtransmission/port-forwarding.c:180 msgid "Stopped" msgstr "Arrestat" #: ../libtransmission/rpcimpl.c:1534 #, c-format msgid "Error uncompressing blocklist: %s (%d)" msgstr "" #: ../libtransmission/rpc-server.c:949 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't find settings key \"%s\"" msgstr "" #: ../libtransmission/rpc-server.c:1021 #, c-format msgid "%s is not a valid address" msgstr "%s es pas una adreça valida" #: ../libtransmission/rpc-server.c:1026 #, c-format msgid "%s is not an IPv4 address. RPC listeners must be IPv4" msgstr "%s es pas una adreça IPv4. Los receptors RPC devon utilizar IPv4" #: ../libtransmission/rpc-server.c:1033 #, c-format msgid "Serving RPC and Web requests on port 127.0.0.1:%d%s" msgstr "" #: ../libtransmission/rpc-server.c:1037 msgid "Whitelist enabled" msgstr "Lista blanca activada" #: ../libtransmission/rpc-server.c:1040 msgid "Password required" msgstr "Senhal necessari" #. first %s is the application name #. second %s is the version number #: ../libtransmission/session.c:736 #, c-format msgid "%s %s started" msgstr "%s %s aviat" #: ../libtransmission/session.c:1992 #, c-format msgid "Loaded %d torrents" msgstr "%d torrents cargats" #: ../libtransmission/torrent.c:573 #, c-format msgid "Tracker warning: \"%s\"" msgstr "Avertiment del tracador : « %s »" #: ../libtransmission/torrent.c:580 #, c-format msgid "Tracker error: \"%s\"" msgstr "Error del tracador : « %s »" #: ../libtransmission/torrent.c:844 msgid "" "No data found! Ensure your drives are connected or use \"Set Location\". To " "re-download, remove the torrent and re-add it." msgstr "" "Cap de donada pas trobada ! Asseguratz-vos que vòstres disques son " "connectats o utilizatz « Definir l'emplaçament ». Per tornar telecargar, " "levatz lo torrent e apondètz-lo tornamai." #: ../libtransmission/torrent.c:1733 msgid "Restarted manually -- disabling its seed ratio" msgstr "Reaviat manualament -- desactivacion de son ratio de font" #: ../libtransmission/torrent.c:1916 msgid "Removing torrent" msgstr "Supression del torrent" #: ../libtransmission/torrent.c:2005 msgid "Done" msgstr "Acabat" #: ../libtransmission/torrent.c:2008 msgid "Complete" msgstr "Acabat" #: ../libtransmission/torrent.c:3259 #, c-format msgid "Piece %, which was just downloaded, failed its checksum test" msgstr "" #: ../libtransmission/torrent-magnet.c:273 msgid "Magnet torrent's metadata is not usable" msgstr "" #: ../libtransmission/upnp.c:29 msgid "Port Forwarding (UPnP)" msgstr "Redireccion de pòrt (UPnP)" #: ../libtransmission/upnp.c:222 #, c-format msgid "Found Internet Gateway Device \"%s\"" msgstr "Periferic de palanca Internet trobat « %s »" #: ../libtransmission/upnp.c:225 #, c-format msgid "Local Address is \"%s\"" msgstr "L'adreça locala es « %s »" #: ../libtransmission/upnp.c:254 #, c-format msgid "Port %d isn't forwarded" msgstr "Lo pòrt %d es pas redirigit" #: ../libtransmission/upnp.c:265 #, c-format msgid "Stopping port forwarding through \"%s\", service \"%s\"" msgstr "Arrèst de la redireccion de pòrt via « %s », servici « %s »" #: ../libtransmission/upnp.c:298 #, c-format msgid "" "Port forwarding through \"%s\", service \"%s\". (local address: %s:%d)" msgstr "" "Translacion de pòrt via « %s », servici « %s ». (adreça locala : %s:%d)" #: ../libtransmission/upnp.c:303 msgid "Port forwarding successful!" msgstr "La redireccion de pòrt a capitat !" #: ../libtransmission/utils.c:240 msgid "Not a regular file" msgstr "Es pas un fichièr estandard" #: ../libtransmission/utils.c:258 msgid "Memory allocation failed" msgstr "L'atribucion de memòria a fracassat." #. Node exists but isn't a folder #: ../libtransmission/utils.c:433 #, c-format msgid "File \"%s\" is in the way" msgstr "Lo fichièr « %s » es en camin" #. did caller give us an uninitialized val? #: ../libtransmission/variant.c:889 msgid "Invalid metadata" msgstr "Metadonadas invalidas" #: ../libtransmission/variant.c:1204 ../libtransmission/variant.c:1227 #, c-format msgid "Couldn't save temporary file \"%1$s\": %2$s" msgstr "Impossible d'enregistrar lo fichièr temporari « %1$s » : %2$s" #: ../libtransmission/variant.c:1214 #, c-format msgid "Saved \"%s\"" msgstr "« %s » enregistrat" #: ../libtransmission/verify.c:219 msgid "Verifying torrent" msgstr "Verificacion del torrent" language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/LC_MESSAGES/gst-plugins-base-0.10.po0000644000000000000000000005014712743727042022273 0ustar # Occitan (post 1500) translation for gst-plugins-base0.10 # Copyright (c) 2007 Rosetta Contributors and Canonical Ltd 2007 # This file is distributed under the same license as the gst-plugins-base0.10 package. # FIRST AUTHOR , 2007. # msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: gst-plugins-base0.10\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: FULL NAME \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2012-02-20 23:28+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2011-09-07 19:48+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Cédric VALMARY (Tot en òc) \n" "Language-Team: Occitan (post 1500) \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2016-07-20 12:53+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 18147)\n" #: ext/alsa/gstalsamixertrack.c:144 msgid "Master" msgstr "Volum general" #: ext/alsa/gstalsamixertrack.c:145 msgid "Bass" msgstr "Bassas" #: ext/alsa/gstalsamixertrack.c:146 msgid "Treble" msgstr "Agudas" #: ext/alsa/gstalsamixertrack.c:147 msgid "PCM" msgstr "PCM" #: ext/alsa/gstalsamixertrack.c:148 msgid "Synth" msgstr "Sintetizador" #: ext/alsa/gstalsamixertrack.c:149 msgid "Line-in" msgstr "Entrada linha" #: ext/alsa/gstalsamixertrack.c:150 msgid "CD" msgstr "CD" #: ext/alsa/gstalsamixertrack.c:151 msgid "Microphone" msgstr "Micrò" #: ext/alsa/gstalsamixertrack.c:152 msgid "PC Speaker" msgstr "Nautparlaire PC" #: ext/alsa/gstalsamixertrack.c:153 msgid "Playback" msgstr "Lectura" #: ext/alsa/gstalsamixertrack.c:154 ext/alsa/gstalsamixertrack.c:220 #: ext/alsa/gstalsamixertrack.c:223 msgid "Capture" msgstr "Enregistrament" #: ext/alsa/gstalsasink.c:485 msgid "Could not open device for playback in mono mode." msgstr "Impossible d'utilizar lo periferic per la lectura en mòde monò." #: ext/alsa/gstalsasink.c:487 msgid "Could not open device for playback in stereo mode." msgstr "Impossible d'utilizar lo periferic per la lectura en mòde estereò." #: ext/alsa/gstalsasink.c:491 #, c-format msgid "Could not open device for playback in %d-channel mode." msgstr "Impossible d'utilizar lo periferic per la lectura en mòde %d canals." #: ext/alsa/gstalsasink.c:687 msgid "" "Could not open audio device for playback. Device is being used by another " "application." msgstr "" "Impossible de dobrir lo periferic àudio per la lectura. Lo periferic es " "utilizat per una autra aplicacion." #: ext/alsa/gstalsasink.c:692 msgid "Could not open audio device for playback." msgstr "Impossible de dobrir lo periferic àudio per la lectura." #: ext/alsa/gstalsasrc.c:422 msgid "Could not open device for recording in mono mode." msgstr "" "Impossible d'utilizar lo periferic per l'enregistrament en mòde monò." #: ext/alsa/gstalsasrc.c:424 msgid "Could not open device for recording in stereo mode." msgstr "" "Impossible d'utilizar lo periferic per l'enregistrament en mòde estereò." #: ext/alsa/gstalsasrc.c:428 #, c-format msgid "Could not open device for recording in %d-channel mode" msgstr "" "Impossible d'utilizar lo periferic per l'enregistrament en mòde %d canals." #: ext/alsa/gstalsasrc.c:634 msgid "" "Could not open audio device for recording. Device is being used by another " "application." msgstr "" "Impossible d'utilizar lo periferic àudio per l'enregistrament. Aqueste es " "ocupat per una autra aplicacion." #: ext/alsa/gstalsasrc.c:639 msgid "Could not open audio device for recording." msgstr "Impossible de dobrir lo periferic àudio per l'enregistrament." #: ext/cdparanoia/gstcdparanoiasrc.c:283 ext/cdparanoia/gstcdparanoiasrc.c:289 msgid "Could not open CD device for reading." msgstr "Impossible de dobrir lo periferic del lector CD en lectura." #: ext/cdparanoia/gstcdparanoiasrc.c:415 msgid "Could not seek CD." msgstr "Impossible de se posicionar sul CD." #: ext/cdparanoia/gstcdparanoiasrc.c:423 msgid "Could not read CD." msgstr "Impossible de legir lo CD." #: ext/gnomevfs/gstgnomevfssink.c:374 #, c-format msgid "Could not open vfs file \"%s\" for writing: %s." msgstr "Impossible de dobrir lo fichièr vfs « %s » en escritura : %s." #: ext/gnomevfs/gstgnomevfssink.c:381 msgid "No filename given" msgstr "Cap de nom de fichièr pas indicat" #: ext/gnomevfs/gstgnomevfssink.c:407 #, c-format msgid "Could not close vfs file \"%s\"." msgstr "Impossible de tampar lo fichièr vfs « %s »." #: ext/gnomevfs/gstgnomevfssink.c:565 #, c-format msgid "Error while writing to file \"%s\"." msgstr "Error al moment de l'escritura dins lo fichièr « %s »." #: ext/ogg/gstoggdemux.c:4466 msgid "Internal data stream error." msgstr "Error intèrna de flux de donadas." #: gst/playback/gstdecodebin.c:1000 gst/playback/gstdecodebin2.c:1696 #: gst/playback/gstplaybasebin.c:1549 gst/playback/gstplaybasebin.c:1685 #, c-format msgid "A %s plugin is required to play this stream, but not installed." msgstr "" "Un empeuton %s es requesit per legir aqueste flux, mas es pas installat." #: gst/playback/gstdecodebin.c:1845 gst/playback/gstdecodebin2.c:2264 msgid "This appears to be a text file" msgstr "Sembla qu'aqueste fichièr es un fichièr tèxte" #: gst/playback/gstdecodebin2.c:1703 msgid "Could not determine type of stream" msgstr "Impossible de determinar lo tipe de flux" #: gst/playback/gstplaybasebin.c:1532 #, c-format msgid "Invalid subtitle URI \"%s\", subtitles disabled." msgstr "URI de sostítols « %s » invalid, los sostítols son desactivats." #: gst/playback/gstplaybasebin.c:1655 gst/playback/gsturidecodebin.c:1256 msgid "No URI specified to play from." msgstr "Cap d'URI font pas indicat per la lectura." #: gst/playback/gstplaybasebin.c:1661 gst/playback/gsturidecodebin.c:1262 #, c-format msgid "Invalid URI \"%s\"." msgstr "URI « %s » invalid." #: gst/playback/gstplaybasebin.c:1667 msgid "RTSP streams cannot be played yet." msgstr "Es pas encara possible de legir los fluxes RTSP." #: gst/playback/gstplaybasebin.c:2020 msgid "Could not create \"decodebin\" element." msgstr "Impossible de crear un element « decodebin »." #: gst/playback/gstplaybasebin.c:2240 gst/playback/gsturidecodebin.c:2091 msgid "Source element is invalid." msgstr "Element font invalid." #: gst/playback/gstplaybasebin.c:2317 msgid "" "Only a subtitle stream was detected. Either you are loading a subtitle file " "or some other type of text file, or the media file was not recognized." msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gstplaybasebin.c:2322 msgid "" "You do not have a decoder installed to handle this file. You might need to " "install the necessary plugins." msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gstplaybasebin.c:2326 msgid "This is not a media file" msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gstplaybasebin.c:2331 msgid "A subtitle stream was detected, but no video stream." msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gstplaybin.c:902 msgid "Both autovideosink and xvimagesink elements are missing." msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gstplaybin.c:910 gst/playback/gstplaybin.c:920 #: gst/playback/gstplaybin.c:1177 gst/playback/gstplaybin.c:1186 #: gst/playback/gstplaybin.c:1195 gst/playback/gstplaybin.c:1326 #: gst/playback/gstplaybin.c:1335 gst/playback/gstplaybin.c:1344 #: gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:1186 gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:1199 #: gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:1330 gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:1510 #: gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:1559 gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:1574 #: gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:1599 gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:1631 #: gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:1751 gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:2106 #: gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:2115 gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:2124 #: gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:2133 gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:3125 #: gst/playback/gsturidecodebin.c:1343 #, c-format msgid "Missing element '%s' - check your GStreamer installation." msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gstplaybin.c:1170 msgid "Both autoaudiosink and alsasink elements are missing." msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:1379 #, c-format msgid "Both autovideosink and %s elements are missing." msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:1383 msgid "The autovideosink element is missing." msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:1388 #, c-format msgid "Configured videosink %s is not working." msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:1392 #, c-format msgid "Both autovideosink and %s elements are not working." msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:1396 msgid "The autovideosink element is not working." msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:1547 msgid "Custom text sink element is not usable." msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:1869 msgid "No volume control found" msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:1889 #, c-format msgid "Both autoaudiosink and %s elements are missing." msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:1893 msgid "The autoaudiosink element is missing." msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:1898 #, c-format msgid "Configured audiosink %s is not working." msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:1902 #, c-format msgid "Both autoaudiosink and %s elements are not working." msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:1906 msgid "The autoaudiosink element is not working." msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:2209 gst/playback/gstplaysink.c:2214 msgid "Can't play a text file without video or visualizations." msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gsturidecodebin.c:874 #, c-format msgid "No decoder available for type '%s'." msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gsturidecodebin.c:1268 msgid "This stream type cannot be played yet." msgstr "" #: gst/playback/gsturidecodebin.c:1285 #, c-format msgid "No URI handler implemented for \"%s\"." msgstr "" #: gst/tcp/gsttcp.c:503 gst/tcp/gsttcpclientsink.c:282 #, c-format msgid "Error while sending data to \"%s:%d\"." msgstr "" #: gst/tcp/gsttcp.c:555 #, c-format msgid "Error while sending gdp header data to \"%s:%d\"." msgstr "" #: gst/tcp/gsttcp.c:564 #, c-format msgid "Error while sending gdp payload data to \"%s:%d\"." msgstr "" #: gst/tcp/gsttcpclientsink.c:394 gst/tcp/gsttcpclientsrc.c:378 #, c-format msgid "Connection to %s:%d refused." msgstr "Connexion a %s:%d refusada." #: gst-libs/gst/audio/gstbaseaudiosrc.c:837 msgid "Can't record audio fast enough" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/gsttagdemux.c:1078 msgid "Failed to read tag: not enough data" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:79 msgid "track ID" msgstr "identificant de pista" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:79 msgid "MusicBrainz track ID" msgstr "identificant de pista MusicBrainz" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:81 msgid "artist ID" msgstr "identificant d'artista" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:81 msgid "MusicBrainz artist ID" msgstr "identificant d'artista MusicBrainz" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:83 msgid "album ID" msgstr "identificant d'album" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:83 msgid "MusicBrainz album ID" msgstr "identificant d'album MusicBrainz" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:86 msgid "album artist ID" msgstr "identificant d'artista de l'album" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:86 msgid "MusicBrainz album artist ID" msgstr "identificant d'artista de l'album MusicBrainz" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:88 msgid "track TRM ID" msgstr "identificant TRM de pista" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:88 msgid "MusicBrainz TRM ID" msgstr "identificant TRM MusicBrainz" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:110 msgid "capturing shutter speed" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:111 msgid "Shutter speed used when capturing an image, in seconds" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:114 msgid "capturing focal ratio" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:115 msgid "Focal ratio (f-number) used when capturing the image" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:118 msgid "capturing focal length" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:119 msgid "Focal length of the lens used capturing the image, in mm" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:122 msgid "capturing digital zoom ratio" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:123 msgid "Digital zoom ratio used when capturing an image" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:126 msgid "capturing iso speed" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:127 msgid "The ISO speed used when capturing an image" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:130 msgid "capturing exposure program" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:131 msgid "The exposure program used when capturing an image" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:134 msgid "capturing exposure mode" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:135 msgid "The exposure mode used when capturing an image" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:138 msgid "capturing exposure compensation" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:139 msgid "The exposure compensation used when capturing an image" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:142 msgid "capturing scene capture type" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:143 msgid "The scene capture mode used when capturing an image" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:146 msgid "capturing gain adjustment" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:147 msgid "The overall gain adjustment applied on an image" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:150 msgid "capturing white balance" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:151 msgid "The white balance mode set when capturing an image" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:154 msgid "capturing contrast" msgstr "contraste de la captura" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:155 msgid "The direction of contrast processing applied when capturing an image" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:159 msgid "capturing saturation" msgstr "saturacion de la captura" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:160 msgid "" "The direction of saturation processing applied when capturing an image" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:164 msgid "capturing sharpness" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:165 msgid "The direction of sharpness processing applied when capturing an image" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:169 msgid "capturing flash fired" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:170 msgid "If the flash fired while capturing an image" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:173 msgid "capturing flash mode" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:174 msgid "The selected flash mode while capturing an image" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:177 msgid "capturing metering mode" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:178 msgid "" "The metering mode used while determining exposure for capturing an image" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:182 msgid "capturing source" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:183 msgid "The source or type of device used for the capture" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:186 msgid "image horizontal ppi" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:187 msgid "Media (image/video) intended horizontal pixel density in ppi" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:190 msgid "image vertical ppi" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:191 msgid "Media (image/video) intended vertical pixel density in ppi" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:194 msgid "ID3v2 frame" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/tag/tags.c:194 msgid "unparsed id3v2 tag frame" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/cdda/gstcddabasesrc.c:1468 #: gst-libs/gst/cdda/gstcddabasesrc.c:1501 msgid "This CD has no audio tracks" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:70 msgid "ID3 tag" msgstr "Etiqueta ID3" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:71 #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:72 msgid "APE tag" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:73 msgid "ICY internet radio" msgstr "Ràdio Internet ICY" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:102 msgid "Apple Lossless Audio (ALAC)" msgstr "ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio)" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:112 msgid "Free Lossless Audio Codec (FLAC)" msgstr "FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:138 #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:139 msgid "Lossless True Audio (TTA)" msgstr "TTA (Lossless True Audio)" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:147 msgid "Windows Media Speech" msgstr "Windows Media Speech" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:162 msgid "CYUV Lossless" msgstr "CYUV sens perda" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:167 msgid "FFMpeg v1" msgstr "FFMpeg v1" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:181 msgid "Lossless MSZH" msgstr "MSZH sens perda" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:187 msgid "Uncompressed Gray Image" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:192 msgid "Run-length encoding" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:238 msgid "Sami subtitle format" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:239 msgid "TMPlayer subtitle format" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:241 msgid "Kate subtitle format" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:305 msgid "Uncompressed planar YUV 4:2:0" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:308 msgid "Uncompressed planar YVU 4:2:0" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:311 #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:321 msgid "Uncompressed packed YUV 4:2:2" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:314 msgid "Uncompressed packed YUV 4:1:0" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:317 msgid "Uncompressed packed YVU 4:1:0" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:324 msgid "Uncompressed packed YUV 4:1:1" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:327 msgid "Uncompressed packed YUV 4:4:4" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:330 msgid "Uncompressed planar YUV 4:2:2" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:333 msgid "Uncompressed planar YUV 4:1:1" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:336 msgid "Uncompressed black and white Y-plane" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:339 msgid "Uncompressed YUV" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:350 #, c-format msgid "Uncompressed palettized %d-bit %s" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:402 #, c-format msgid "DivX MPEG-4 Version %d" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:620 #, c-format msgid "Raw %d-bit PCM audio" msgstr "Àudio PCM brut %d bits" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:622 msgid "Raw PCM audio" msgstr "Àudio PCM brut" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:628 #, c-format msgid "Raw %d-bit floating-point audio" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:630 msgid "Raw floating-point audio" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:717 msgid "Audio CD source" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:720 msgid "DVD source" msgstr "Font DVD" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:723 msgid "Real Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP) source" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:727 msgid "Microsoft Media Server (MMS) protocol source" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:735 #, c-format msgid "%s protocol source" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:807 #, c-format msgid "%s video RTP depayloader" msgstr "Depayloader RTP vidèo %s" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:809 #, c-format msgid "%s audio RTP depayloader" msgstr "Depayloader RTP àudio %s" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:811 #, c-format msgid "%s RTP depayloader" msgstr "Depayloader RTP %s" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:818 #, c-format msgid "%s demuxer" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:820 #, c-format msgid "%s decoder" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:858 #, c-format msgid "%s video RTP payloader" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:860 #, c-format msgid "%s audio RTP payloader" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:862 #, c-format msgid "%s RTP payloader" msgstr "Payloader RTP %s" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:869 #, c-format msgid "%s muxer" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:871 #, c-format msgid "%s encoder" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/descriptions.c:903 #, c-format msgid "GStreamer element %s" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/missing-plugins.c:555 msgid "Unknown source element" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/missing-plugins.c:558 msgid "Unknown sink element" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/missing-plugins.c:561 msgid "Unknown element" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/missing-plugins.c:564 msgid "Unknown decoder element" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/missing-plugins.c:567 msgid "Unknown encoder element" msgstr "" #: gst-libs/gst/pbutils/missing-plugins.c:572 msgid "Plugin or element of unknown type" msgstr "" #: sys/v4l/v4l_calls.c:159 msgid "No device specified." msgstr "" #: sys/v4l/v4l_calls.c:168 #, c-format msgid "Device \"%s\" does not exist." msgstr "" #: sys/v4l/v4l_calls.c:173 #, c-format msgid "Device \"%s\" is already being used." msgstr "" #: sys/v4l/v4l_calls.c:178 #, c-format msgid "Could not open device \"%s\" for reading and writing." msgstr "" language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/LC_MESSAGES/gnome-mime-data.po0000644000000000000000000007606612743727042021504 0ustar # Occitan (post 1500) translation for gnome-mime-data # Copyright (c) (c) 2006 Canonical Ltd, and Rosetta Contributors 2006 # This file is distributed under the same license as the gnome-mime-data package. # FIRST AUTHOR , 2006. # msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: gnome-mime-data\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: FULL NAME \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2007-04-28 02:27+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2013-03-03 12:21+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Cédric VALMARY (Tot en òc) \n" "Language-Team: Occitan (post 1500) \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2016-07-20 11:33+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 18147)\n" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:1 msgid "2D chemical structure" msgstr "Estructura quimica 2D" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:2 msgid "3D Studio image" msgstr "Imatge 3D Studio" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:3 msgid "AIFC audio" msgstr "Àudio AIFC" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:4 msgid "AIFF audio" msgstr "Àudio AIFF" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:5 msgid "ANIM animation" msgstr "Animacion ANIM" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:6 msgid "ARJ archive" msgstr "Archiva ARJ" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:7 msgid "AVI video" msgstr "Videá AVI" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:8 msgid "AbiWord document" msgstr "Document AbiWord" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:9 msgid "Active Server page" msgstr "Active Server page" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:10 msgid "Address card" msgstr "Carta de visita" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:11 msgid "Adobe FrameMaker font" msgstr "Poliça Adobe FrameMaker" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:12 msgid "Adobe font metrics" msgstr "metricas de poliça Adobe" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:13 msgid "Andrew Toolkit inset" msgstr "Inset Andrew Toolkit" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:14 msgid "Application launcher" msgstr "Aviador d'aplicacions" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:15 msgid "ApplixWare Graphics image" msgstr "Imatge Applixware Graphics" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:16 msgid "Applixware Words document" msgstr "Document Applixware Words" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:17 msgid "Applixware presentation" msgstr "Presentacion Applixware" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:18 msgid "Applixware spreadsheet" msgstr "Fuèlh de calcul Applixware" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:19 msgid "Ar archive" msgstr "Archiva Ar" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:20 msgid "Assembly source code" msgstr "Còde font Assemblador" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:21 msgid "Audio" msgstr "Àudio" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:22 msgid "Authors list" msgstr "Lista d'autors" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:23 msgid "AutoCAD image" msgstr "Imatge AutoCAD" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:24 msgid "BCPIO document" msgstr "Document BCPIO" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:25 msgid "BDF font" msgstr "Poliça BDF" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:26 msgid "Backup file" msgstr "Fichièr de salvament" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:27 msgid "Basic audio" msgstr "Àudio basic" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:28 msgid "Bibliography record" msgstr "Enregistrament bibliografic" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:29 msgid "Binary program" msgstr "Programa binari" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:30 msgid "BitTorrent seed file" msgstr "Fichièr de seguiment BitTorrent" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:31 msgid "Blender file" msgstr "Fichièr Blender" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:32 msgid "Block device" msgstr "Periferic blòc" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:33 msgid "Bzip2 compressed file" msgstr "Fichièr compressat amb bzip2" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:34 msgid "C shell script" msgstr "Script C shell" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:35 msgid "C source code" msgstr "còde font C" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:36 msgid "C source code header" msgstr "còde font d'entèsta C" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:37 msgid "C++ source code" msgstr "còde font C++" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:38 msgid "CGI program" msgstr "Programa CGI" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:39 msgid "CGM image" msgstr "Imatge CGM" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:40 msgid "CMU raster image" msgstr "imatge raster CMU" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:41 msgid "CPIO archive" msgstr "Archiva CPIO" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:42 msgid "CPIO archive (Gzip-compressed)" msgstr "Archiu CPIO (compressat amb gzip)" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:43 msgid "Calendar file" msgstr "Fichièr de calendièr" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:44 msgid "Calendar or event document" msgstr "Document de calendièr o d'eveniment" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:45 msgid "Character device" msgstr "Periferic de caractèrs" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:46 msgid "Cinelerra editing sheet" msgstr "Fuèlh d'edicion Cinelerra" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:47 msgid "Comma-separated text document" msgstr "Document tèxte separat per de virgulas" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:48 msgid "Commodore 64 audio" msgstr "àudio Commodore 64" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:49 msgid "Compound document" msgstr "Document compausat" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:50 msgid "Compress-compressed file" msgstr "Fichièr compressat amb compress" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:51 msgid "Compressed GIMP document" msgstr "Document GIMP compressat" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:52 msgid "Corel Draw drawing" msgstr "dessenh Corel Draw" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:53 msgid "Crystalline structure model" msgstr "Modèl d'estructura cristallina" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:54 msgid "DCL script" msgstr "Script DCL" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:55 msgid "DOS font" msgstr "Poliça DOS" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:56 msgid "DOS/Windows program" msgstr "Programa DOS/Windows" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:57 msgid "DSSSL document" msgstr "Document DSSSL" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:58 msgid "DV video" msgstr "vidèo DV" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:59 msgid "DXF vector graphic" msgstr "Grafic vectorial DXF" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:60 msgid "Debian package" msgstr "Paquetatge Debian" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:61 msgid "Device Independant Bitmap" msgstr "Bitmap independent del periferic" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:62 msgid "Dia diagram" msgstr "Diagrama Dia" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:63 msgid "Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine image" msgstr "Imatge DICOM (Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine)" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:64 msgid "Digital Moving Picture Exchange image" msgstr "Imatge Digital Moving Picture Exchange" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:65 msgid "Directory information file" msgstr "Fichièr d'informacions de repertòri" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:66 msgid "DjVu image" msgstr "Imatge DjVu" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:67 msgid "Document type definition" msgstr "Definicion de tipe de document" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:68 msgid "Documents" msgstr "Documents" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:69 msgid "Documents/Diagram" msgstr "Documents/Diagrama" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:70 msgid "Documents/Extended Markup Language (XML)" msgstr "Documents/Lengatge amb balisa espandida (XML)" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:71 msgid "Documents/Numeric" msgstr "Documents/Numeric" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:72 msgid "Documents/Plain Text" msgstr "Documents/Tèxte brut" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:73 msgid "Documents/Presentation" msgstr "Documents/Presentacion" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:74 msgid "Documents/Project Management" msgstr "Gestionari de projèctes/documents" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:75 msgid "Documents/Published Materials" msgstr "Documents/Publicacion" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:76 msgid "Documents/Spreadsheet" msgstr "Documents/Fuèlh de calcul" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:77 msgid "Documents/TeX" msgstr "Documents/TeX" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:78 msgid "Documents/Text Markup" msgstr "Documents/Tèxte balisat" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:79 msgid "Documents/Vector Graphics" msgstr "Documents/Grafics vectorial" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:80 msgid "Documents/Word Processor" msgstr "Documents/Tractament de tèxt" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:81 msgid "Documents/World Wide Web" msgstr "Documents/Web" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:82 msgid "Dolby Digital audio" msgstr "àudio Dolby Digital" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:83 msgid "Dreamcast ROM" msgstr "ROM de Dreamcast" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:84 msgid "Emacs Lisp source code" msgstr "còde font Emacs Lisp" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:85 msgid "Email headers" msgstr "Entèstas de corrièr electronic" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:86 msgid "Email message/mailbox" msgstr "Corrièr/Bóstia de letras electronica" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:87 msgid "Encrypted message" msgstr "Messatge chifrat" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:88 msgid "Enlightenment theme" msgstr "Tèma per Enlightenment" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:89 msgid "Enriched text document" msgstr "Document tèxte enriquit" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:90 msgid "Epiphany bookmarks file" msgstr "Fichièr de favorits Epiphany" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:91 msgid "FLAC audio" msgstr "àudio FLAC" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:92 msgid "FLC animation" msgstr "Animacion FLC" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:93 msgid "FLI animation" msgstr "Animacion FLI" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:94 msgid "FastTracker II audio" msgstr "àudio FastTracker II" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:95 msgid "FlashPix Image" msgstr "Imatge FlashPix" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:96 msgid "Flexible Image Transport System" msgstr "Sistèma de transpòrt d'imatge flexible" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:97 msgid "Folder" msgstr "Repertòri" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:98 msgid "Fortran source code" msgstr "còde font Fortran" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:99 msgid "FrameMaker interchange document" msgstr "Document d'escambi FrameMaker" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:100 msgid "G3 fax image" msgstr "Imatge G3 fax" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:101 msgid "GIF image" msgstr "Imatge GIF" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:102 msgid "GIMP document" msgstr "Document GIMP" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:103 msgid "GMC link" msgstr "Ligam GMC" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:104 msgid "GNOME desktop theme" msgstr "Tèma de burèu GNOME" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:105 msgid "GNU Oleo Spreadsheet" msgstr "Fuèlh de calcul GNU Oleo" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:106 msgid "GNU mail message" msgstr "messatge de corrièl GNU" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:107 msgid "GTK configuration" msgstr "Configuracion GTK" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:108 msgid "Game Boy ROM" msgstr "ROM de Game Boy" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:109 msgid "Genesis ROM" msgstr "ROM Genesis" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:110 msgid "Glade project" msgstr "Projècte Glade" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:111 msgid "GnuCash workbook" msgstr "Classador GnuCash" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:112 msgid "Gnumeric spreadsheet" msgstr "fuèlh de calcul Gnumeric" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:113 msgid "Gtar archive" msgstr "Archiva Gtar" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:114 msgid "Gtktalog Catalogue" msgstr "Catalòg Gtktalog" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:115 msgid "Gzip-compressed file" msgstr "Fichièr compressat amb gzip" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:116 msgid "HDF document" msgstr "Document HDF" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:117 msgid "HTML page" msgstr "Pagina HTML" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:118 msgid "Haskell source code" msgstr "còde font Haskell" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:119 msgid "Help page" msgstr "Pagina d'ajuda" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:120 msgid "IDL document" msgstr "Document IDL" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:121 msgid "IEF image" msgstr "Imatge IEF" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:122 msgid "IFF image" msgstr "Imatge IFF" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:123 msgid "ILBM image" msgstr "Imatge ILBM" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:124 msgid "ISI video" msgstr "vidèo ISI" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:125 msgid "ISO image" msgstr "Imatge ISO" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:126 msgid "Images" msgstr "Imatges" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:127 msgid "Impulse Tracker audio" msgstr "àudio Impulse Tracker" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:128 msgid "Information" msgstr "Informacions" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:129 msgid "Information/Calendar" msgstr "Informacions/Calendièr" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:130 msgid "Information/Financial" msgstr "Informacion/Finança" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:131 msgid "Installed GNOME desktop theme" msgstr "Tèma de burèu GNOME installat" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:132 msgid "JBuilder Project" msgstr "Projècte JBuilder" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:133 msgid "JPEG image" msgstr "Imatge JPEG" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:134 msgid "Java byte code" msgstr "còde Java binari" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:135 msgid "Java code archive" msgstr "Archiu de còde Java" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:136 msgid "Java source code" msgstr "Còde font Java" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:137 msgid "JavaScript source code" msgstr "Còde font JavaScript" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:138 msgid "KDE application details" msgstr "Detalhs d'aplicacion KDE" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:139 msgid "KIllustrator document" msgstr "Document KIllustrator" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:140 msgid "KPresenter presentation" msgstr "Presentacion KPresenter" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:141 msgid "KSpread spreadsheet" msgstr "Fuèlh de calcul KSpread" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:142 msgid "KWord document" msgstr "Document KWord" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:143 msgid "Korn shell script" msgstr "Escript Korn Shell" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:144 msgid "LHA archive" msgstr "Archiu LHA" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:145 msgid "LHARC archive" msgstr "Archiu LHARC" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:146 msgid "LIBGRX font" msgstr "Poliça LIBGRX" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:147 msgid "LightWave object" msgstr "Objècte LightWave" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:148 msgid "LightWave scene" msgstr "Scèna LightWave" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:149 msgid "Linux PSF console font" msgstr "Poliça Linux console PSF" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:150 msgid "Literate haskell source code" msgstr "Còde font literal haskell" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:151 msgid "Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheet" msgstr "Fuèlh de calcul Lotus 1-2-3" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:152 msgid "LyX document" msgstr "Document LyX" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:153 msgid "MIDI audio" msgstr "Àudio MIDI" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:154 msgid "MOD audio" msgstr "Àudio MOD" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:155 msgid "MP3 audio" msgstr "Àudio MP3" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:156 msgid "MP3 audio playlist" msgstr "Àudio lista de lectura MP3" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:157 msgid "MPEG video" msgstr "Vidèo MPEG" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:158 msgid "MPEG-4 audio" msgstr "Àudio MPEG-4" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:159 msgid "MS ASF audio" msgstr "Àudio MS ASF" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:160 msgid "MS ASF video" msgstr "Vidèo MS ASF" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:161 msgid "MS video" msgstr "Vidèo MS" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:162 msgid "MSX ROM" msgstr "ROM de MSX" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:163 msgid "MacBinary file" msgstr "Fichièr MacBinary" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:164 msgid "Macintosh AppleDouble-encoded file" msgstr "Fichièr encodat Macintosh AppleDouble" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:165 msgid "Macintosh BinHex-encoded file" msgstr "Fichièr encodat Macintosh BinHex" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:166 msgid "Macintosh StuffIt archive" msgstr "Archiu Macintosh StuffIt" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:167 msgid "Macromedia Flash file" msgstr "Fichièr Macromedia Flash" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:168 msgid "MagicPoint presentation" msgstr "Presentacion MagicPoint" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:169 msgid "Magick image format" msgstr "Format d'imatge Magick" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:170 msgid "Mail delivery report" msgstr "Rapòrt de liurason de corrièr" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:171 msgid "Mail disposition report" msgstr "Rapòrt de mesa a disposicion de corrièr" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:172 msgid "Mail system report" msgstr "Rapòrt de sistèma de corrièr" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:173 msgid "Makefile" msgstr "Makefile" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:174 msgid "Manual page" msgstr "Pagina de manual" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:175 msgid "Manual page (compressed)" msgstr "Pagina de manual (compressat)" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:176 msgid "Master System or Game Gear ROM" msgstr "ROM Master System o Game Gear" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:177 msgid "MathML document" msgstr "Document MathML" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:178 msgid "Matroska video" msgstr "Vidèo Matroska" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:179 msgid "Memory dump" msgstr "Voidatge memòria" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:180 msgid "Message" msgstr "Messatge" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:181 msgid "Message digest" msgstr "Messatge digest" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:182 msgid "Message in several formats" msgstr "Messatge dins mantun format" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:183 msgid "Microsoft Excel spreadsheet" msgstr "Fuèlh de calcul Microsoft Excel" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:184 msgid "Microsoft PowerPoint document" msgstr "Document Microsoft PowerPoint" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:185 msgid "Microsoft WMV playlist" msgstr "Lista de lectura Microsoft WMV" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:186 msgid "Microsoft WMV video" msgstr "Vidèo Microsoft WMV" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:187 msgid "Microsoft Word document" msgstr "Document Microsoft Word" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:188 msgid "Microsoft video" msgstr "Vidèo Microsoft" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:189 msgid "Monkey audio" msgstr "Àudio Monkey" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:190 msgid "Mozilla bookmarks file" msgstr "Fichièr de favorits Mozilla" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:191 msgid "Multi-part message" msgstr "Messatge multipart" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:192 msgid "NES ROM" msgstr "ROM NES" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:193 msgid "Named pipe" msgstr "Tub nomenat" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:194 msgid "Nautilus link" msgstr "Ligam Nautilus" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:195 msgid "Netscape bookmarks file" msgstr "Fichièr de signets Netscape" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:196 msgid "Nintendo64 ROM" msgstr "ROM Nintendo64" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:197 msgid "Nullsoft video" msgstr "Vidèo Nullsoft" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:198 msgid "ODA document" msgstr "Document ODA" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:199 msgid "Object code" msgstr "Còde objècte" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:200 msgid "Objective C source code" msgstr "Còde font Objective C" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:201 msgid "Ogg audio" msgstr "Àudio Ogg" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:202 msgid "OpenOffice.org Impress presentation" msgstr "Presentacion OpenOffice.org Impress" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:203 msgid "OpenOffice.org Impress presentation template" msgstr "Model de presentacion OpenOffice.org Impress" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:204 msgid "OpenOffice.org Math document" msgstr "Document OpenOffice.org Math" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:205 msgid "OpenOffice.org Writer document" msgstr "Document OpenOffice.org Writer" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:206 msgid "OpenOffice.org Writer global document" msgstr "Document global OpenOffice.org Writer" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:207 msgid "OpenOffice.org Writer template" msgstr "Model OpenOffice.org Writer" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:208 msgid "OpenOffice.org drawing" msgstr "Dessenh OpenOffice.org" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:209 msgid "OpenOffice.org drawing template" msgstr "Modèl de dessenh OpenOffice.org" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:210 msgid "OpenOffice.org spreadsheet" msgstr "Fuèlh de calcul OpenOffice.org" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:211 msgid "OpenOffice.org spreadsheet template" msgstr "Modèl de fuèlh de calcul OpenOffice.org" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:212 msgid "OpenType font" msgstr "Poliça OpenType" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:213 msgid "PBM image" msgstr "Imatge PBM" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:214 msgid "PC Paintbrush image" msgstr "Imatge PC Paintbrush" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:215 msgid "PCF font" msgstr "Poliça PCF" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:216 msgid "PDF document" msgstr "Document PDF" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:217 msgid "PEF program" msgstr "Programa PEF" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:218 msgid "PGM image" msgstr "Imatge PGM" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:219 msgid "PGN chess game" msgstr "Partida d'escac PGN" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:220 msgid "PGP keys" msgstr "Claus PGP" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:221 msgid "PGP message" msgstr "Messatge PGP" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:222 msgid "PGP signature" msgstr "Signatura PGP" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:223 msgid "PGP-encrypted file" msgstr "Document encriptat PGP" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:224 msgid "PHP script" msgstr "Script PHP" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:225 msgid "PICT image" msgstr "Imatge PICT" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:226 msgid "PNG image" msgstr "Imatge PNG" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:227 msgid "PNM image" msgstr "Imatge PNM" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:228 msgid "PPM image" msgstr "Imatge PPM" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:229 msgid "Packages" msgstr "Paquetatges" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:230 msgid "Palm OS database" msgstr "Basa de donadas Palm OS" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:231 msgid "Palm Pixmap image" msgstr "Imatge Palm Pixmap" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:232 msgid "Partial email message" msgstr "Messatge de corrièr electronic parcial" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:233 msgid "Pascal source code" msgstr "Còde font Pascal" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:234 msgid "Perl script" msgstr "Script Perl" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:235 msgid "Photo CD image" msgstr "Imatge Photo CD" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:236 msgid "Photoshop document" msgstr "Document Photoshop" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:237 msgid "Plain text document" msgstr "Document Tèxte plen" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:238 msgid "Playlist" msgstr "Lista de lectura" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:239 msgid "PostScript Type 1 font" msgstr "Poliça PostScript Type 1" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:240 msgid "PostScript document" msgstr "Document PostScript" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:241 msgid "Profiler results" msgstr "Resultats del perfilador" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:242 msgid "Project Plan" msgstr "Projècte Plan" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:243 msgid "Python byte code" msgstr "Byte code Python" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:244 msgid "Python source code" msgstr "Còde font Python" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:245 msgid "QuickTime movie" msgstr "Vidèo QuickTime" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:246 msgid "Quicken document" msgstr "Document Quicken" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:247 msgid "Quicken for Windows document" msgstr "Document Quicken per Windows" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:248 msgid "RAR archive" msgstr "Archiu RAR" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:249 msgid "README document" msgstr "Document LEGISSETZME" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:250 msgid "RGB image" msgstr "Imatge RGB" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:251 msgid "RIFF audio" msgstr "Àudio RIFF" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:252 msgid "RPM package" msgstr "Paquetatge RPM" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:253 msgid "Raw Gray Sample" msgstr "Escandalhatge brut gris" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:254 msgid "RealAudio document" msgstr "Document RealAudio" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:255 msgid "RealAudio/Video document" msgstr "Document RealAudio/Vidèo" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:256 msgid "RealVideo video" msgstr "Vidèo RealVideo" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:257 msgid "Reference to remote file" msgstr "Referéncia cap a un fichièr distant" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:258 msgid "Rejected patch file" msgstr "Fichièr patch regetat" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:259 msgid "Rich text document" msgstr "Document tèxte ric" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:260 msgid "S/MIME file" msgstr "Fichièr S/MIME" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:261 msgid "S/MIME signature" msgstr "Signatura S/MIME" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:262 msgid "SGI video" msgstr "Vidèo SGI" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:263 msgid "SGML document" msgstr "Document SGML" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:264 msgid "SHOUTcast playlist" msgstr "Lista de lectura SHOUTcast" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:265 msgid "SMIL script" msgstr "Script SMIL" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:266 msgid "SQL code" msgstr "Còdi SQL" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:267 msgid "SUN Rasterfile" msgstr "Fichièr raster Sun" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:268 msgid "SV4 CPIO archive" msgstr "Archiu SV4 CPIO" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:269 msgid "SV4 CPIP archive (with CRC)" msgstr "Archiu CPIP SV4 (amb CRC)" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:270 msgid "SVG art" msgstr "Art SVG" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:271 msgid "Samba share" msgstr "Partiment Samba" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:272 msgid "Scheme source code" msgstr "Còde font Scheme" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:273 msgid "Scream Tracker 3 audio" msgstr "Àudio Scream Tracker 3" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:274 msgid "Scream Tracker audio" msgstr "Àudio Scream Tracker" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:275 msgid "Scream Tracker instrument" msgstr "instrument Scream Tracker" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:276 msgid "Search results" msgstr "Resultats de la recèrca" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:277 msgid "Security" msgstr "Seguretat" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:278 msgid "Setext document" msgstr "Document Setext" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:279 msgid "Shared Printer" msgstr "Imprimenta partejada" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:280 msgid "Shared library" msgstr "Bibliotèca partejada" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:281 msgid "Shell archive" msgstr "Archiu Shell" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:282 msgid "Shell script" msgstr "Script shell" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:283 msgid "Signed message" msgstr "Messatge signat" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:284 msgid "Silicon Graphics image" msgstr "Imatge Silicon Graphics" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:285 msgid "Socket" msgstr "Socket" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:286 msgid "Software Development" msgstr "Desvolopament logicial" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:287 msgid "Software Development/ROM Images" msgstr "Desvolopament logicial/Imatges ROM" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:288 msgid "Software Development/Source Code" msgstr "Desvolopament logicial/Còde font" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:289 msgid "Software author credits" msgstr "Credits dels autors del logicial" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:290 msgid "Software installation instructions" msgstr "Instruccions d'installacion del logicial" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:291 msgid "Software license terms" msgstr "Tèrmes de la licéncia del logicial" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:292 msgid "Source code patch" msgstr "Patch de còde font" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:293 msgid "Speech document" msgstr "Document Speech" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:294 msgid "Speedo font" msgstr "Poliça Speedo" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:295 msgid "Spreadsheet Interchange document" msgstr "Document d'escambi de fuèlh de calcul" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:296 msgid "Stampede package" msgstr "Paquetatge Stampede" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:297 msgid "StarCalc spreadsheet" msgstr "Fuèlh de calcul StarCalc" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:298 msgid "StarChart chart" msgstr "Grafic StarChart" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:299 msgid "StarDraw drawing" msgstr "Dessenh StarDraw" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:300 msgid "StarImpress presentation" msgstr "Presentacion StarImpress" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:301 msgid "StarMail file" msgstr "Fichièr StarMail" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:302 msgid "StarMath document" msgstr "Document StarMath" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:303 msgid "StarOffice extended metafile image" msgstr "Imatge metafichièr espandit StarOffice" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:304 msgid "StarWriter document" msgstr "Document StarWriter" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:305 msgid "Style sheet" msgstr "Fuèlh d'estil" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:306 msgid "Sun mu-law audio" msgstr "Àudio Sun µ-law" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:307 msgid "SunOS News font" msgstr "Poliça SunOS News" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:308 msgid "Symbolic link" msgstr "Ligam simbolic" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:309 msgid "System" msgstr "Sistèma" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:310 msgid "TIFF image" msgstr "Imatge TIFF" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:311 msgid "Tab-separated text document" msgstr "Document tèxte separat per de tabulacions" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:312 msgid "Tar archive" msgstr "Archiva Tar" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:313 msgid "Tar archive (Bzip2-compressed)" msgstr "Archiu Tar (compressat amb bzip2)" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:314 msgid "Tar archive (Gzip-compressed)" msgstr "Archiu Tar (compressat amb gzip)" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:315 msgid "TarGA image" msgstr "Imatge TarGA" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:316 msgid "Tcl script" msgstr "Script Tcl" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:317 msgid "TeX document" msgstr "Document TeX" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:318 msgid "TeX dvi document" msgstr "Document TeX dvi" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:319 msgid "TeX font" msgstr "Poliça TeX" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:320 msgid "TeX font metrics" msgstr "Metricas de poliça TeX" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:321 msgid "TeXInfo document" msgstr "Document TeXInfo" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:322 msgid "Theme" msgstr "Tèma" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:323 msgid "ToutDoux document" msgstr "Document ToutDoux" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:324 msgid "Troff document" msgstr "Document Troff" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:325 msgid "Troff me input document" msgstr "Document d'entrada Troff me" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:326 msgid "Troff mm input document" msgstr "Document d'entrada Troff mm" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:327 msgid "Troff ms input document" msgstr "Document d'entrada Troff ms" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:328 msgid "TrueType font" msgstr "Poliça Truetype" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:329 msgid "Truevision Targa image" msgstr "Imatge Targa Truevision" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:330 msgid "USENET news message" msgstr "Messatge de nòva USENET" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:331 msgid "Unidata netCDF document" msgstr "Document Unidata netCDF" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:332 msgid "Unknown type" msgstr "Tipe desconegut" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:333 msgid "User Interface" msgstr "Interfaç personalizada" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:334 msgid "User Interface/Fonts" msgstr "Interfaç/poliças personalizats" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:335 msgid "Ustar archive" msgstr "Archiu Ustar" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:336 msgid "V font" msgstr "Poliça V" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:337 msgid "VOC audio" msgstr "Àudio VOC" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:338 msgid "VRML document" msgstr "Document VRML" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:339 msgid "Verilog source code" msgstr "Còde font Verilog" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:340 msgid "Video" msgstr "Vidèo" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:341 msgid "Vivo video" msgstr "Vidèo Vivo" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:342 msgid "WAIS source code" msgstr "Còde font WAIS" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:343 msgid "Wave audio" msgstr "Àudio Wave" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:344 msgid "Wavelet video" msgstr "Vidèo Wavelet" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:345 msgid "Web folder" msgstr "Repertòri web" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:346 msgid "Windows bitmap image" msgstr "Imatge bitmap Windows" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:347 msgid "Windows icon image" msgstr "Imatge icòna Windows" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:348 msgid "Windows metafile graphics" msgstr "Grafic Windows Metafile" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:349 msgid "WordPerfect document" msgstr "Document WordPerfect" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:350 msgid "X bitmap image" msgstr "Imatge X bitmap" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:351 msgid "X window image" msgstr "Imatge X Window" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:352 msgid "XBEL bookmarks file" msgstr "Fichièr de favorits XBEL" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:353 msgid "XML document" msgstr "Document XML" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:354 msgid "XPM image" msgstr "Imatge XPM" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:355 msgid "Xbase database" msgstr "Base de donadas Xbase" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:356 msgid "Yacc grammar source code" msgstr "Còde font de gramatica Yacc" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:357 msgid "Z shell script" msgstr "Script Z shell" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:358 msgid "Zip archive" msgstr "Archiva zip" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:359 msgid "Zoo archive" msgstr "Archiva Zoo" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:360 msgid "gettext translation" msgstr "Revirada gettext" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:361 msgid "iPod software" msgstr "Logicial iPod" #: ../gnome-vfs.keys.in.h:362 msgid "xfig vector graphic" msgstr "Grafic vectorial xfig" language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/LC_MESSAGES/gimp20-script-fu.po0000644000000000000000000001773612743727042021552 0ustar # Translation of oc.po to Occitan # Occitan (post 1500) translation for gimp script-fu. # Copyright (c) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This file is distributed under the same license as the gimp package. # # # Yannig Marchegay (Kokoyaya) , 2007. # Yannig Marchegay (Kokoyaya) , 2007. msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: oc\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2016-06-30 19:06+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2016-07-06 12:22+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Yannig MARCHEGAY (Kokoyaya) \n" "Language-Team: Occitan \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2016-07-20 11:27+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 18147)\n" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu.c:110 msgid "Interactive console for Script-Fu development" msgstr "Consòla interactiva pel desvolopament de Script-Fu" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu.c:116 msgid "_Console" msgstr "_Consòla" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu.c:140 msgid "Server for remote Script-Fu operation" msgstr "Servidor per las operacions Script-Fu distantes" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu.c:145 msgid "_Start Server..." msgstr "_Aviar lo servidor..." #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu.c:301 msgid "_GIMP Online" msgstr "_GIMP en linha" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu.c:302 msgid "_User Manual" msgstr "_Manual de l'utilizaire" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu.c:305 msgid "_Script-Fu" msgstr "_Script-Fu" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu.c:307 msgid "_Test" msgstr "_Tèxt" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu.c:310 msgid "_Buttons" msgstr "_Botons" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu.c:312 msgid "_Logos" msgstr "_Lògos" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu.c:314 msgid "_Patterns" msgstr "Motiu" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu.c:317 msgid "_Web Page Themes" msgstr "_Tèmas de pagina Web" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu.c:319 msgid "_Alien Glow" msgstr "Lusor _exteriora" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu.c:321 msgid "_Beveled Pattern" msgstr "Motiu _biseutat" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu.c:323 msgid "_Classic.Gimp.Org" msgstr "_Classic.Gimp.Org" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu.c:326 msgid "Alpha to _Logo" msgstr "Alfa cap a _lògo" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu.c:329 msgid "Re-read all available Script-Fu scripts" msgstr "Relire totes los escripts Script-Fu disponibles" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu.c:334 msgid "_Refresh Scripts" msgstr "_Actualizar los escripts" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu.c:357 msgid "" "You can not use \"Refresh Scripts\" while a Script-Fu dialog box is open. " "Please close all Script-Fu windows and try again." msgstr "" "Podètz pas utilizar « Actualizar los escripts » tant que la bóstia de dialòg " "d'un Script-Fu es dobèrta. Tampatz totas las fenèstras de script-fu e " "ensajatz tornamai." #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-console.c:130 #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-console.c:197 msgid "Script-Fu Console" msgstr "Consòla Script-Fu" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-console.c:193 msgid "Welcome to TinyScheme" msgstr "Benvenguda sus TinyScheme" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-console.c:199 msgid "Interactive Scheme Development" msgstr "Desvolopament Scheme interactiu" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-console.c:235 msgid "_Browse..." msgstr "_Examinar..." #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-console.c:293 msgid "Save Script-Fu Console Output" msgstr "Enregistrar las sortidas de la consòla Script-Fu" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-console.c:340 #, c-format msgid "Could not open '%s' for writing: %s" msgstr "Impossible de dobrir « %s » per escriure : %s" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-console.c:369 msgid "Script-Fu Procedure Browser" msgstr "Navigador de proceduras Script-Fu" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-eval.c:60 msgid "Script-Fu evaluation mode only allows non-interactive invocation" msgstr "" "Lo mòde d'avaloracion de Script-Fu autoriza sonque un apèl non interactiu" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-interface.c:198 msgid "Script-Fu cannot process two scripts at the same time." msgstr "Script-Fu pòt pas executar dos escripts a l'encòp." #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-interface.c:200 #, c-format msgid "You are already running the \"%s\" script." msgstr "Utilizatz ja l'escript « %s »" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-interface.c:226 #, c-format msgid "Script-Fu: %s" msgstr "Script-Fu : %s" #. we add a colon after the label; #. * some languages want an extra space here #. #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-interface.c:290 #, c-format msgid "%s:" msgstr "%s :" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-interface.c:337 msgid "Script-Fu Color Selection" msgstr "Seleccion de la color Script-Fu" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-interface.c:446 msgid "Script-Fu File Selection" msgstr "Seleccion del fichièr Script-Fu" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-interface.c:449 msgid "Script-Fu Folder Selection" msgstr "Seleccion del repertòri del Script-Fu" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-interface.c:462 msgid "Script-Fu Font Selection" msgstr "Seleccion de la poliça Script-Fu" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-interface.c:470 msgid "Script-Fu Palette Selection" msgstr "Seleccion de la paleta Script-Fu" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-interface.c:479 msgid "Script-Fu Pattern Selection" msgstr "Seleccion del motiu Script-Fu" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-interface.c:488 msgid "Script-Fu Gradient Selection" msgstr "Seleccion del degradat Script-Fu" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-interface.c:497 msgid "Script-Fu Brush Selection" msgstr "Seleccion de la bròssa Script-Fu" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-interface.c:840 #, c-format msgid "Error while executing %s:" msgstr "Error al moment de l'execucion de %s :" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-scripts.c:146 msgid "Too few arguments to 'script-fu-register' call" msgstr "Tròp pauc de paramètres per l'apèl a « script-fu-register »" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-scripts.c:605 #, c-format msgid "Error while loading %s:" msgstr "Error al moment del cargament de %s :" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-server.c:811 msgid "Script-Fu Server Options" msgstr "Opcions del servidor Script-Fu" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-server.c:816 msgid "_Start Server" msgstr "_Aviar lo servidor" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-server.c:844 msgid "Server port:" msgstr "Pòrt del servidor :" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/script-fu-server.c:850 msgid "Server logfile:" msgstr "Fichièr jornal del servidor :" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/scripts/alien-glow-arrow.scm:182 #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/scripts/beveled-pattern-arrow.scm:156 msgid "Right" msgstr "Dreita" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/scripts/blended-logo.scm:136 #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/scripts/blended-logo.scm:195 msgid "FG-BG-RGB" msgstr "PP-AP-RGB" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/scripts/erase-rows.scm:47 msgid "Rows" msgstr "Linhas" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/scripts/erase-rows.scm:48 msgid "Even" msgstr "Para" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/scripts/erase-rows.scm:49 msgid "Erase" msgstr "Escafar" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/scripts/font-map.scm:164 msgid "Black on white" msgstr "Negre e blanc" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/scripts/guides-new-percent.scm:35 #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/scripts/guides-new.scm:35 msgid "Horizontal" msgstr "Orizontal" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/scripts/rendermap.scm:90 msgid "Tile" msgstr "Carrèu" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/scripts/ripply-anim.scm:129 msgid "Wrap" msgstr "Enrotlar" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/scripts/spyrogimp.scm:323 msgid "Spyrograph" msgstr "Espirograf" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/scripts/spyrogimp.scm:326 msgid "Circle" msgstr "Cercle" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/scripts/spyrogimp.scm:342 msgid "Pencil" msgstr "Gredon" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/scripts/spyrogimp.scm:347 msgid "Solid Color" msgstr "Color unida" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/scripts/textured-logo.scm:129 #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/scripts/textured-logo.scm:171 msgid "Squares" msgstr "Carrats" #: ../plug-ins/script-fu/scripts/tileblur.scm:79 msgid "IIR" msgstr "IIR" language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/LC_MESSAGES/slideshow-ubuntustudio.po0000644000000000000000000002124712743727042023303 0ustar # Occitan (post 1500) translation for ubiquity-slideshow-ubuntu # Copyright (c) 2012 Rosetta Contributors and Canonical Ltd 2012 # This file is distributed under the same license as the ubiquity-slideshow-ubuntu package. # FIRST AUTHOR , 2012. # msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: ubiquity-slideshow-ubuntu\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: FULL NAME \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-04-02 11:07-0400\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2013-03-26 07:36+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Cédric VALMARY (Tot en òc) \n" "Language-Team: Occitan (post 1500) \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2016-07-20 13:58+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 18147)\n" #. type: Content of:

#: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/00_welcome.html:2 msgid "Welcome!" msgstr "Benvenguda !" #. type: Content of:

#: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/00_welcome.html:7 msgid "Thanks for choosing Ubuntu Studio, and welcome to the installation." msgstr "Mercé d'aver causit Ubuntu Studio, e benvenguda dins l'installacion." #. type: Content of:

#: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/00_welcome.html:8 msgid "" "In this slideshow we will present a few features which make Ubuntu Studio " "the perfect companion for artists." msgstr "" "Dins aquesta presentacion descobriretz qualques foncionalitats que fan " "d'Ubuntu Studio lo perfièch companhon pels artistas." #. type: Content of:

#: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/01_audio.html:2 msgid "Let the world hear you" msgstr "Lo mond vos escota" #. type: Content of:

#: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/01_audio.html:7 msgid "" "From recording an album, podcast editing, or scoring a film, Ubuntu Studio " "includes applications and documented work flows to support your audio needs." msgstr "" "Que siá per l'enregistrament d'un album, la creacion d'un podcast o d'una " "musica de filme, Ubuntu Studio reunís las aplicacions e aisinas documentadas " "que respondon a totes vòstres besonhs per l'àudio." #. type: Content of:

#: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/01_audio.html:9 #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/02_video.html:9 #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/03_graphics.html:9 #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/04_photography.html:9 msgid "Included software" msgstr "Logicials incluses" #. type: Content of:
  • #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/01_audio.html:11 msgid "Ardour DAW" msgstr "Estacion àudio numerica Ardour" #. type: Content of:
    • #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/01_audio.html:12 msgid "JACK Sound Server" msgstr "Servidor de son Jack" #. type: Content of:
      • #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/01_audio.html:13 msgid "LADSPA/LV2 Plugins" msgstr "Moduls LADSPA/LV2" #. type: Content of:

        #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/02_video.html:2 msgid "Create amazing videos" msgstr "Creatz de vidèos supèrbas" #. type: Content of:

        #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/02_video.html:7 msgid "" "From simple home movies to feature length film with compositing and post " "production effects, Ubuntu Studio can help you realize your videographic " "vision." msgstr "" "Del simple filme amator al long metratge amb composicion e efièches " "especials, Ubuntu Studio vos pòt ajudar a realizar vòstre projècte vidèo lo " "mai ambiciós que siá." #. type: Content of:

        • #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/02_video.html:11 msgid "Blender Sequence Editor and Compositing" msgstr "Sequenciador vidèo e composit Blender" #. type: Content of:
          • #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/02_video.html:12 msgid "Kdenlive Video Editor" msgstr "Editor vidèo Kdenlive" #. type: Content of:
            • #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/02_video.html:13 msgid "Open Shot Video Editor" msgstr "Editor vidèo OpenShot" #. type: Content of:

              #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/03_graphics.html:2 msgid "Graphic artists and designers" msgstr "Artistas e conceptors grafistas" #. type: Content of:

              #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/03_graphics.html:7 msgid "" "With Ubuntu Studio, you can easily create 3D models, animated films, " "scalable vector graphics, logos, flyers... and more!" msgstr "" "Amb Ubuntu Studio, podètz crear aisidament de modèls 3D, de filmes " "d'animacion, d'illustracions vectorialas, de lògos, de flyers... e plan mai " "encara !" #. type: Content of:

              • #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/03_graphics.html:11 msgid "Blender 3D Content Creation Suite" msgstr "Logicial de creacion 3D Blender" #. type: Content of:
                • #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/03_graphics.html:12 msgid "Inkscape Scalable Vector Graphics Editor" msgstr "Editor de grafismes vectorials Inkscape" #. type: Content of:
                  • #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/03_graphics.html:13 msgid "Krita Paint Studio" msgstr "Krita Paint Studio" #. type: Content of:
                    • #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/03_graphics.html:14 #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/04_photography.html:14 msgid "GIMP Image Editor" msgstr "Editor d'imatges GIMP" #. type: Content of:

                      #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/04_photography.html:2 msgid "Photographers too" msgstr "Los fotografs tanben" #. type: Content of:

                      #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/04_photography.html:7 msgid "" "From casual hobbyist to professional, handy and powerful applications are " "included to help you manage your photos and process them." msgstr "" "Que siatz amator o professionnal, d'aplicacions practicas e poderosas son " "inclusas per vos ajudar a gerir e tractar vòstras fòtos." #. type: Content of:

                      • #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/04_photography.html:11 msgid "Darktable Photo Editor" msgstr "Editor fòto Darktable" #. type: Content of:
                        • #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/04_photography.html:12 msgid "RawTherapee Raw Image Processor" msgstr "Tractament d'imatges RAW RawTherapee" #. type: Content of:
                          • #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/04_photography.html:13 msgid "Shotwell Photo Manager" msgstr "Gestionari de fòtos Shotwell" #. type: Content of:

                            #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/05_software.html:2 msgid "Get more applications" msgstr "Obtenètz mai d'aplicacions" #. type: Content of:

                            #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/05_software.html:7 msgid "" "Not only is Ubuntu Studio designed to be a media creation power, it is also " "a robust desktop OS." msgstr "" "Ubuntu Studio es pas solament fach per la creacion multimèdia, es tanben un " "sistèma robuste per trabalhar." #. type: Content of:

                            #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/05_software.html:8 msgid "" "However, if you want additional applications not installed by default you " "can choose from the tens of thousands in the Ubuntu repositories." msgstr "" "Se volètz installar d'aplicacions suplementàrias, ne podètz causir demest de " "desenats de milièrs dins los depauses d'Ubuntu." #. type: Content of:

                            #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/06_support.html:2 msgid "Thank you!" msgstr "Mercés !" #. type: Content of:

                            #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/06_support.html:7 msgid "" "Thanks for taking the time with us. We'd love to hear about your experiences " "with Ubuntu Studio. You can share them on the Ubuntu Studio users mailing list." msgstr "" "Mercé d'aver pres lo temps de legir aquesta presentacion. Nos agradariá " "fòrça d'aver vòstre retorn d'experiéncia amb Ubuntu Studio. Lo podètz " "partejar sus la lista de difusion dels utilizaires d'Ubuntu Studio." #. type: Content of:

                            #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/06_support.html:8 msgid "" "Join our IRC channel #ubuntustudio for online support by clicking here." msgstr "" "Rejonhètz nòstre canal IRC #ubuntustudio per obténer de supòrt en " "linha en clicant aicí." #. type: Content of:

                            #: slideshows/ubuntustudio/slides/06_support.html:9 msgid "" "Finally, visit us on the web at the Ubuntu Studio website. Thank you again!" msgstr "" "Enfin, trantalhetz pas a visitar lo site " "web d'Ubuntu Studio. Mercé encara[bsp]!" language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/LC_MESSAGES/gnome-bluetooth2.po0000644000000000000000000003000612743727042021715 0ustar # Occitan (post 1500) translation for bluez-gnome # Copyright (c) 2007 Rosetta Contributors and Canonical Ltd 2007 # This file is distributed under the same license as the bluez-gnome package. # FIRST AUTHOR , 2007. # msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: bluez-gnome\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: FULL NAME \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2015-01-28 22:32+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2015-02-09 21:08+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Yannig MARCHEGAY (Kokoyaya) \n" "Language-Team: Occitan (post 1500) \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n > 1;\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2016-07-20 12:31+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 18147)\n" #: ../lib/bluetooth-chooser-button.c:75 msgid "Click to select device..." msgstr "Clicatz per causir un periferic..." #: ../lib/bluetooth-chooser.c:135 ../lib/bluetooth-filter-widget.c:82 #: ../lib/bluetooth-utils.c:101 msgid "Unknown" msgstr "Desconegut" #: ../lib/bluetooth-chooser.c:176 msgid "No adapters available" msgstr "Cap d'adaptatador pas disponible" #: ../lib/bluetooth-chooser.c:180 ../lib/bluetooth-chooser.c:804 msgid "Searching for devices..." msgstr "Recèrca de periferics..." #: ../lib/bluetooth-chooser.c:698 ../lib/bluetooth-chooser.c:988 msgid "Device" msgstr "Periferic" #: ../lib/bluetooth-chooser.c:734 ../lib/settings.ui.h:3 msgid "Type" msgstr "Tipe" #: ../lib/bluetooth-chooser.c:990 ../lib/bluetooth-settings-widget.c:1506 msgid "Devices" msgstr "Periferics" #: ../lib/bluetooth-filter-widget.c:72 msgid "All categories" msgstr "Totas las categorias" #: ../lib/bluetooth-filter-widget.c:74 ../lib/settings.ui.h:2 msgid "Paired" msgstr "Apariat" #: ../lib/bluetooth-filter-widget.c:76 msgid "Trusted" msgstr "Fisable" #: ../lib/bluetooth-filter-widget.c:78 msgid "Not paired or trusted" msgstr "Pas apariat o fisable" #: ../lib/bluetooth-filter-widget.c:80 msgid "Paired or trusted" msgstr "Apariat o fisable" #. This is the title of the filter section of the Bluetooth device chooser. #. * It used to say Show Only Bluetooth Devices With... #: ../lib/bluetooth-filter-widget.c:231 msgid "Show:" msgstr "Afichar :" #. The device category filter #: ../lib/bluetooth-filter-widget.c:247 msgid "Device _category:" msgstr "_Categoria de periferic :" #: ../lib/bluetooth-filter-widget.c:258 msgid "Select the device category to filter" msgstr "Seleccionar la categoria de periferic a filtrar" #. The device type filter #: ../lib/bluetooth-filter-widget.c:272 msgid "Device _type:" msgstr "_Tipe de periferic :" #: ../lib/bluetooth-filter-widget.c:289 msgid "Select the device type to filter" msgstr "Causir lo tipe de periferic de filtrar" #: ../lib/bluetooth-filter-widget.c:295 msgid "Input devices (mice, keyboards, etc.)" msgstr "Periferics de picada (mirgas, clavièrs, etc.)" #: ../lib/bluetooth-filter-widget.c:299 msgid "Headphones, headsets and other audio devices" msgstr "Escotadors, casques àudio e autres periferics àudio" #: ../lib/bluetooth-utils.c:59 msgid "All types" msgstr "Totes los tipes" #: ../lib/bluetooth-utils.c:61 msgid "Phone" msgstr "Telefòn" #: ../lib/bluetooth-utils.c:63 msgid "Modem" msgstr "Modèm" #: ../lib/bluetooth-utils.c:65 msgid "Computer" msgstr "Ordenador" #: ../lib/bluetooth-utils.c:67 msgid "Network" msgstr "Ret" #. translators: a hands-free headset, a combination of a single speaker with a microphone #: ../lib/bluetooth-utils.c:70 msgid "Headset" msgstr "Casc àudio" #: ../lib/bluetooth-utils.c:72 msgid "Headphones" msgstr "Escotadors" #: ../lib/bluetooth-utils.c:74 msgid "Audio device" msgstr "Periferic àudio" #: ../lib/bluetooth-utils.c:76 msgid "Keyboard" msgstr "Clavièr" #: ../lib/bluetooth-utils.c:78 msgid "Mouse" msgstr "Mirga" #: ../lib/bluetooth-utils.c:80 msgid "Camera" msgstr "Aparelh fòto" #: ../lib/bluetooth-utils.c:82 msgid "Printer" msgstr "Imprimenta" #: ../lib/bluetooth-utils.c:84 msgid "Joypad" msgstr "Manega de jòc" #: ../lib/bluetooth-utils.c:86 msgid "Tablet" msgstr "Tauleta" #: ../lib/bluetooth-utils.c:88 msgid "Video device" msgstr "Periferic vidèo" #: ../lib/plugins/geoclue.c:178 msgid "Use this GPS device for Geolocation services" msgstr "Utilizar aqueste periferic GPS pels servicis de geolocalizacion" #. translators: #. * This is in a test plugin, please make sure you add the "(test)" part, #. * or leave untranslated #: ../lib/plugins/test.c:53 msgid "Access the Internet using your cell phone (test)" msgstr "Accedir a Internet amb vòstre telefòn mobil (tèst)" #. translators: #. * The '%s' is the device name, for example: #. * Pairing with 'Sony Bluetooth Headset' cancelled #. #: ../wizard/main.c:242 ../wizard/main.c:374 #, c-format msgid "Pairing with '%s' cancelled" msgstr "Apariatge de « %s » anullat" #: ../wizard/main.c:283 #, c-format msgid "Please confirm that the PIN displayed on '%s' matches this one." msgstr "" "Confirmatz que lo numèro d'identificacion personal afichat sus « %s » " "correspond a aqueste." #: ../wizard/main.c:338 ../wizard/main.c:533 #, c-format msgid "" "Please enter the following PIN on '%s' and press “Enter” on the keyboard:" msgstr "" "Picatz lo numèro d'identificacion personal çaiaprèp sus « %s », puèi " "quichatz sus la tòca Entrada del clavièr :" #: ../wizard/main.c:342 ../wizard/main.c:530 #, c-format msgid "Please enter the following PIN on '%s':" msgstr "Picatz lo numèro d'identificacion personal seguent sus « %s » :" #. translators: #. * The '%s' is the device name, for example: #. * Setting up 'Sony Bluetooth Headset' failed #. #: ../wizard/main.c:434 #, c-format msgid "Setting up '%s' failed" msgstr "Fracàs de la configuracion de « %s »" #. translators: #. * The '%s' is the device name, for example: #. * Connecting to 'Sony Bluetooth Headset'... #. #: ../wizard/main.c:488 #, c-format msgid "Connecting to '%s'..." msgstr "Connexion en cors amb « %s »..." #: ../wizard/main.c:538 msgid "Please move the joystick of your iCade in the following directions:" msgstr "" "Desplaçar lo joystick de vòstre iCade dins las direccions seguentas :" #. translators: #. * The '%s' is the device name, for example: #. * Please wait while finishing setup on 'Sony Bluetooth Headset'... #. #: ../wizard/main.c:570 #, c-format msgid "Please wait while finishing setup on device '%s'..." msgstr "Pacientatz pendent la configuracion del periferic « %s »..." #: ../wizard/main.c:588 #, c-format msgid "Successfully set up new device '%s'" msgstr "Configuracion del periferic novèl « %s » capitada" #: ../wizard/wizard.ui.h:1 msgid "Bluetooth New Device Setup" msgstr "Configuracion del periferic Bluetooth novèl" #: ../wizard/wizard.ui.h:2 msgid "PIN _options..." msgstr "_Opcions de numèro d'identificacion personal..." #: ../wizard/wizard.ui.h:3 msgid "Device Search" msgstr "Recèrca de periferic" #: ../wizard/wizard.ui.h:4 msgid "Device Setup" msgstr "Configuracion del periferic" #: ../wizard/wizard.ui.h:5 msgid "Finishing Setup" msgstr "Fin de la configuracion" #: ../wizard/wizard.ui.h:6 msgid "Select the additional services you want to use with your device:" msgstr "" "Seleccionatz los servicis suplementaris que desiratz utilizar amb vòstre " "periferic :" #: ../wizard/wizard.ui.h:7 msgid "Setup Summary" msgstr "Resumit de la configuracion" #: ../wizard/wizard.ui.h:8 msgid "PIN Options" msgstr "Opcions de numèro d'identificacion personal" #: ../wizard/wizard.ui.h:9 msgid "_Automatic PIN selection" msgstr "Seleccion _automatica del numèro d'identificacion personal" #. Translators: this is a PIN with a set value, such as 1111, or 0000 #: ../wizard/wizard.ui.h:11 msgid "Fixed PIN" msgstr "Numèro d'identificacion personal fixe" #: ../wizard/wizard.ui.h:12 msgid "'0000' (most headsets, mice and GPS devices)" msgstr "« 0000 » (per la màger part dels casques, mirgas e GPS)" #: ../wizard/wizard.ui.h:13 msgid "'1111'" msgstr "« 1111 »" #: ../wizard/wizard.ui.h:14 msgid "'1234'" msgstr "« 1234 »" #: ../wizard/wizard.ui.h:15 msgid "Do not pair" msgstr "Apariar pas" #: ../wizard/wizard.ui.h:16 msgid "Custom PIN:" msgstr "Numèro d'identificacion personal personalizat :" #: ../wizard/wizard.ui.h:17 msgid "_Try Again" msgstr "_Ensajar tornamai" #: ../wizard/wizard.ui.h:18 msgid "_Quit" msgstr "_Quitar" #: ../lib/bluetooth-chooser-button.c:201 #: ../lib/bluetooth-settings-widget.c:1255 ../sendto/main.c:447 #: ../sendto/main.c:738 ../sendto/main.c:794 msgid "_Cancel" msgstr "A_nullar" #. This is a button to answer: Does the PIN matches the one on the device? #: ../wizard/wizard.ui.h:21 msgid "Does not match" msgstr "Correspond pas" #. This is a button to answer: Does the PIN matches the one on the device? #: ../wizard/wizard.ui.h:23 msgid "Matches" msgstr "Correspond" #: ../wizard/bluetooth-wizard.desktop.in.in.h:1 msgid "Bluetooth Device Setup" msgstr "Configuracion de periferics Bluetooth" #: ../wizard/bluetooth-wizard.desktop.in.in.h:2 msgid "Setup Bluetooth devices" msgstr "Configurar de periferics Bluetooth" #: ../sendto/main.c:363 #, c-format msgid "%'d second" msgid_plural "%'d seconds" msgstr[0] "%'d segonda" msgstr[1] "%'d segondas" #: ../sendto/main.c:368 ../sendto/main.c:381 #, c-format msgid "%'d minute" msgid_plural "%'d minutes" msgstr[0] "%'d minuta" msgstr[1] "%'d minutas" #: ../sendto/main.c:379 #, c-format msgid "%'d hour" msgid_plural "%'d hours" msgstr[0] "%'d ora" msgstr[1] "%'d oras" #: ../sendto/main.c:389 #, c-format msgid "approximately %'d hour" msgid_plural "approximately %'d hours" msgstr[0] "environ %'d ora" msgstr[1] "environ %'d oras" #: ../sendto/main.c:192 ../sendto/main.c:292 msgid "Connecting..." msgstr "Connexion en cors..." #: ../sendto/main.c:231 msgid "File Transfer" msgstr "Transferiment de fichièr" #: ../sendto/main.c:448 msgid "_Retry" msgstr "_Ensajar tornamai" #. translators: This is the heading for the progress dialogue #: ../sendto/main.c:253 msgid "Sending files via Bluetooth" msgstr "Mandadís de fichièrs per Bluetooth" #: ../sendto/main.c:470 msgid "From:" msgstr "Dempuèi :" #: ../sendto/main.c:484 msgid "To:" msgstr "Cap a :" #: ../sendto/main.c:117 msgid "An unknown error occurred" msgstr "Una error desconeguda s'es producha" #: ../sendto/main.c:130 msgid "" "Make sure that the remote device is switched on and that it accepts " "Bluetooth connections" msgstr "" "Verificatz que lo periferic es alucat e qu'accèpta las connexions Bluetooth" #: ../sendto/main.c:577 #, c-format msgid "Sending %s" msgstr "Mandadís de %s" #: ../sendto/main.c:584 ../sendto/main.c:633 #, c-format msgid "Sending file %d of %d" msgstr "Mandadís del fichièr %d sus %d" #: ../sendto/main.c:629 #, c-format msgid "%d kB/s" msgstr "%d Ko/s" #: ../sendto/main.c:631 #, c-format msgid "%d B/s" msgstr "%d o/s" #: ../sendto/main.c:734 msgid "Select device to send to" msgstr "Causida del periferic cibla" #: ../sendto/main.c:739 msgid "_Send" msgstr "_Mandar" #: ../sendto/main.c:789 msgid "Choose files to send" msgstr "Causida dels fichièrs de mandar" #: ../sendto/main.c:795 msgid "Select" msgstr "Seleccionar" #: ../sendto/main.c:825 msgid "Remote device to use" msgstr "Periferic distant d'utilizar" #: ../sendto/main.c:825 msgid "ADDRESS" msgstr "ADREÇA" #: ../sendto/main.c:827 msgid "Remote device's name" msgstr "Nom del periferic distant" #: ../sendto/main.c:827 msgid "NAME" msgstr "NOM" #: ../sendto/main.c:846 msgid "[FILE...]" msgstr "[FICHIÈR...]" #: ../sendto/nautilus-sendto-plugin.c:168 msgid "Programming error: could not find the device in the list" msgstr "" "Error de programacion : impossible de trobar lo periferic dins la lista" #: ../sendto/nautilus-sendto-plugin.c:243 #, c-format msgid "OBEX Push file transfer unsupported" msgstr "Lo transferiment de fichièrs « OBEX Push » es pas pres en carga" #: ../sendto/nautilus-sendto-plugin.c:262 msgid "Bluetooth (OBEX Push)" msgstr "Bluetooth (OBEX Push)" #: ../sendto/bluetooth-sendto.desktop.in.in.h:1 msgid "Bluetooth Transfer" msgstr "Transferiment Bluetooth" #: ../sendto/bluetooth-sendto.desktop.in.in.h:2 msgid "Send files via Bluetooth" msgstr "Mandadís de fichièrs per Bluetooth" language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/LC_MESSAGES/ModemManager.po0000644000000000000000000000740712743727042021070 0ustar # Occitan (post 1500) translation for modemmanager # Copyright (c) 2012 Rosetta Contributors and Canonical Ltd 2012 # This file is distributed under the same license as the modemmanager package. # FIRST AUTHOR , 2012. # msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: modemmanager\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: FULL NAME \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2015-11-12 21:56+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2013-07-07 07:17+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Cédric VALMARY (Tot en òc) \n" "Language-Team: Occitan (post 1500) \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2016-07-20 13:51+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 18147)\n" #: ../data/org.freedesktop.ModemManager1.policy.in.in.h:1 msgid "Control the Modem Manager daemon" msgstr "Contrarotlar lo processus del Gestionari de Modèms" #: ../data/org.freedesktop.ModemManager1.policy.in.in.h:2 msgid "System policy prevents controlling the Modem Manager." msgstr "" "La politica del sistèma empacha lo contraròtle del Gestionari de Modèms." #: ../data/org.freedesktop.ModemManager1.policy.in.in.h:3 msgid "Unlock and control a mobile broadband device" msgstr "Desvarrolhar e contrarotlar un periferic naut debit mobil" #: ../data/org.freedesktop.ModemManager1.policy.in.in.h:4 msgid "" "System policy prevents unlocking or controlling the mobile broadband device." msgstr "" "La politica del sistèma empacha de desvarrolhar e contrarotlar un periferic " "naut debit mobil." #: ../data/org.freedesktop.ModemManager1.policy.in.in.h:5 msgid "Add, modify, and delete mobile broadband contacts" msgstr "Apondre, modificar e escafar los contactes mobils de naut debit" #: ../data/org.freedesktop.ModemManager1.policy.in.in.h:6 msgid "" "System policy prevents adding, modifying, or deleting this device's contacts." msgstr "" "La politica del sistèma empacha d'apondre, modificar e escafar los contactes " "d'aqueste aparalh." #: ../data/org.freedesktop.ModemManager1.policy.in.in.h:7 msgid "Send, save, modify, and delete text messages" msgstr "Mandar, salvar, modificar e escafar de SMS" #: ../data/org.freedesktop.ModemManager1.policy.in.in.h:8 msgid "" "System policy prevents sending or maniuplating this device's text messages." msgstr "" "La politica del sistèma empacha lo mandadís e la manipulacion dels SMS " "d'aqueste aparelh." #: ../data/org.freedesktop.ModemManager1.policy.in.in.h:9 msgid "Enable and view geographic location and positioning information" msgstr "" "Activar e veire la posicion geografica e las informacions sul posicionament" #: ../data/org.freedesktop.ModemManager1.policy.in.in.h:10 msgid "" "System policy prevents enabling or viewing geographic location information." msgstr "" "La politica del sistèma empacha l'activacion o la visualizacion de las " "informacions sus la posicion geografica." #: ../data/org.freedesktop.ModemManager1.policy.in.in.h:11 msgid "Query and utilize network information and services" msgstr "Interrogar e utilizar las informacions e servicis de ret" #: ../data/org.freedesktop.ModemManager1.policy.in.in.h:12 msgid "" "System policy prevents querying or utilizing network information and " "services." msgstr "" "La politica del sistèma empacha l'interrogacion e l'utilizacion de las " "informacions e servicis de ret." #: ../data/org.freedesktop.ModemManager1.policy.in.in.h:13 msgid "Query and manage firmware on a mobile broadband device" msgstr "" "Interrogar e gerir lo micrologicial d'un dispositiu de connexion al naut " "debit mobil" #: ../data/org.freedesktop.ModemManager1.policy.in.in.h:14 msgid "System policy prevents querying or managing this device's firmware." msgstr "" "La politica del sistèma empacha l'interrogacion o la gestion del " "micrologicial d'aqueste dispositiu." language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/LC_MESSAGES/gnome-settings-daemon.po0000644000000000000000000033031312743727042022733 0ustar # Translation of oc.po to Occitan # Yannig Marchegay (Kokoyaya) , 2006-2008. # Translation of oc.po to Occitan # Occitan translation of gnome-control-center # This file is distributed under the same license as the PACKAGE package.# msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: oc\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-06-24 17:32+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-07-04 09:31+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Yannig MARCHEGAY (Kokoyaya) \n" "Language-Team: Occitan \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n > 1;\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2016-07-20 13:46+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 18147)\n" #: ../data/gnome-settings-daemon.desktop.in.in.h:1 msgid "GNOME Settings Daemon" msgstr "Servici dels paramètres GNOME" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:1 msgid "Smartcard removal action" msgstr "Accion quand la carta de piuse es levada" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:2 msgid "" "Set this to one of \"none\", \"lock-screen\", or \"force-logout\". The " "action will get performed when the smartcard used for log in is removed." msgstr "" "Definissètz aquesta clau segon una de las valors seguentas : « none » (pas " "cap), « lock-screen » (verrolhar l'ecran) o « force-logout » (forçar la " "desconnexion). Aquesta accion es efectuada quand la carta de piuse utilizada " "per se connectar es levada." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:3 msgid "Disable touchpad while typing" msgstr "Desactivar lo pavat tactil al moment de la picada al clavièr" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:4 msgid "" "Set this to TRUE if you have problems with accidentally hitting the touchpad " "while typing." msgstr "" "Activatz aquesta clau se vos arriba de tocar accidentalament lo pavat tactil " "quand escrivètz al clavièr." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:5 msgid "Enable horizontal scrolling" msgstr "Activar lo desfilament orizontal" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:6 msgid "" "Set this to TRUE to allow horizontal scrolling by the same method selected " "with the scroll_method key." msgstr "" "Activatz aquesta clau per permetre lo desfilament orizontal segon lo metòde " "seleccionat dins la clau « scroll_method »." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:7 msgid "Select the touchpad scroll method" msgstr "Metòde de desfilament del pavat tactil" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:8 msgid "" "Select the touchpad scroll method. Supported values are: \"disabled\", " "\"edge-scrolling\", \"two-finger-scrolling\"." msgstr "" "Selecciona lo metòde de desfilament amb lo pavat tactil. Las valors admesas " "sont : « disabled » (desactivat), « edge-scrolling » (desfilament suls " "bòrds), « two-finger-scrolling » (desfilament amb dos dets)." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:9 msgid "Enable mouse clicks with touchpad" msgstr "Activar los clics de mirga amb lo pavat tactil" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:10 msgid "" "Set this to TRUE to be able to send mouse clicks by tapping on the touchpad." msgstr "" "Activatz aquesta clau per poder efectuar de clics de mirgas en picant sul " "pavat tactil." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:11 msgid "Enable touchpad" msgstr "Activar lo pavat tactil" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:12 msgid "Set this to TRUE to enable all touchpads." msgstr "Activatz aquesta clau per activar totes los pavats tactils." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:3 msgid "" "Highlights the current location of the pointer when the Control key is " "pressed and released." msgstr "" "Met en evidéncia l'emplaçament actual del puntador quand la tòca Ctrl es " "quichada e relachada." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:4 msgid "Double click time" msgstr "Interval de clic doble" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:5 msgid "Length of a double click in milliseconds." msgstr "Durada d'un clic doble en millisegondas." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:6 msgid "Drag threshold" msgstr "Sulhet de lisament" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:7 msgid "Distance before a drag is started." msgstr "Distància abans qu'un lisar siá iniciat." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:18 msgid "Middle button emulation" msgstr "Emulacion del boton central de la mirga" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:19 msgid "" "Enables middle mouse button emulation through simultaneous left and right " "button click." msgstr "" "Activa la simulacion del boton central de la mirga amb un clic simultanèu " "suls botons de drecha e esquèrra." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:8 msgid "Whether the tablet's orientation is locked, or rotated automatically." msgstr "" "Indica se l'orientacion de la tableta es verrolhada o se la rotacion es " "automatica." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:9 msgid "Device hotplug custom command" msgstr "Comanda personalizada per las connexions a caud de periferics" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.gschema.xml.in.in.h:10 msgid "" "Command to be run when a device is added or removed. An exit value of 1 " "means that the device will not be handled further by gnome-settings-daemon." msgstr "" "Comanda d'activar al moment de l'apondon o del levament d'un periferic. Una " "valor de sortida de 1 significa que lo periferic serà pas mai pres en carga " "per gnome-settings-daemon." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:1 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.color.gschema.xml.in.in.h:1 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.datetime.gschema.xml.in.in.h:1 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.gschema.xml.in.in.h:3 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.housekeeping.gschema.xml.in.in.h:1 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.keyboard.gschema.xml.in.in.h:1 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:1 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.orientation.gschema.xml.in.in.h:1 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.gschema.xml.in.in.h:1 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.print-notifications.gschema.xml.in.in.h:1 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.sharing.gschema.xml.in.in.h:1 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:1 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xrandr.gschema.xml.in.in.h:1 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xsettings.gschema.xml.in.in.h:1 msgid "Activation of this plugin" msgstr "Activacion d'aqueste empeuton" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:2 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.color.gschema.xml.in.in.h:2 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.datetime.gschema.xml.in.in.h:2 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.gschema.xml.in.in.h:4 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.housekeeping.gschema.xml.in.in.h:2 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.keyboard.gschema.xml.in.in.h:2 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:2 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.orientation.gschema.xml.in.in.h:2 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.gschema.xml.in.in.h:2 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.print-notifications.gschema.xml.in.in.h:2 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.sharing.gschema.xml.in.in.h:2 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:2 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xrandr.gschema.xml.in.in.h:2 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xsettings.gschema.xml.in.in.h:2 msgid "" "Whether this plugin would be activated by gnome-settings-daemon or not" msgstr "Indica s'aqueste empeuton es activat per gnome-settings-daemon o pas" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:3 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.color.gschema.xml.in.in.h:3 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.datetime.gschema.xml.in.in.h:3 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.gschema.xml.in.in.h:5 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.housekeeping.gschema.xml.in.in.h:13 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.keyboard.gschema.xml.in.in.h:3 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:29 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.orientation.gschema.xml.in.in.h:3 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.gschema.xml.in.in.h:3 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.print-notifications.gschema.xml.in.in.h:3 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.sharing.gschema.xml.in.in.h:3 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:3 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xrandr.gschema.xml.in.in.h:5 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xsettings.gschema.xml.in.in.h:7 msgid "Priority to use for this plugin" msgstr "Prioritat d'utilizacion d'aqueste empeuton" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:4 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.color.gschema.xml.in.in.h:4 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.datetime.gschema.xml.in.in.h:4 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.gschema.xml.in.in.h:6 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.housekeeping.gschema.xml.in.in.h:14 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.keyboard.gschema.xml.in.in.h:4 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:30 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.orientation.gschema.xml.in.in.h:4 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.gschema.xml.in.in.h:4 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.print-notifications.gschema.xml.in.in.h:4 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.sharing.gschema.xml.in.in.h:4 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:4 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xrandr.gschema.xml.in.in.h:6 #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xsettings.gschema.xml.in.in.h:8 msgid "" "Priority to use for this plugin in gnome-settings-daemon startup queue" msgstr "" "Prioritat d'utilizacion d'aqueste empeuton dins la lista d'aviada de gnome-" "settings-daemon" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:5 msgid "Wacom stylus absolute mode" msgstr "Estilet Wacom en mòde absolut" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:6 msgid "Enable this to set the tablet to absolute mode." msgstr "Activatz aquesta opcion per metre la tauleta en mòde absolut." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:7 msgid "Wacom tablet area" msgstr "Zòna de la tauleta Wacom" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:8 msgid "Set this to x1, y1 and x2, y2 of the area usable by the tools." msgstr "" "Definís las coordenadas x1, y1 e x2, y2 de la susfàcia utilizabla per las " "aisinas." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:9 msgid "Wacom tablet aspect ratio" msgstr "Proporcions de la tauleta Wacom" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:10 msgid "" "Enable this to restrict the Wacom tablet area to match the aspect ratio of " "the output." msgstr "" "Activatz aquesta opcion per tal de limitar la susfàcia de la tauleta Wacom " "per correspondre a las proporcions de l'afichatge." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:11 msgid "Wacom tablet rotation" msgstr "Rotacion de la tauleta Wacom" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:12 msgid "" "Set this to 'none', 'cw' for 90 degree clockwise, 'half' for 180 degree, and " "'ccw' for 90 degree counterclockwise." msgstr "" "Reglatz aquò a « pas cap », « cw » per 90 grases dins lo sens orari, " "« half » per 180 grases e « ccw » per 90 grases dins lo sens antiorari." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:13 msgid "Wacom touch feature" msgstr "Foncionalitats tactilas Wacom" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:14 msgid "Enable this to move the cursor when the user touches the tablet." msgstr "" "Activar aquesta opcion per desplaçar lo cursor quand l'utilizaire tòca la " "tauleta." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:15 msgid "Wacom tablet PC feature" msgstr "Foncionalitat de la tauleta PC Wacom" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:16 msgid "Enable this to only report stylus events when the tip is pressed." msgstr "" "Activar aquesta opcion per tenir pas compte de las accions de l'estilet que " "quand la punta es quichada." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:17 msgid "Wacom display mapping" msgstr "Correspondéncia de l'afichatge Wacom" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:18 msgid "" "EDID information of monitor to map tablet to. Must be in the format [vendor, " "product, serial]. [\"\",\"\",\"\"] disables mapping." msgstr "" "Informacion EDID de l'ecran de far correspondre a la tauleta grafica. Deu " "èsser al format [constructor, produch, seria]. [\"\",\"\",\"\"] desactiva la " "correspondéncia." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:19 msgid "Wacom stylus pressure curve" msgstr "Corba de pression de l'estilet Wacom" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:20 msgid "" "Set this to x1, y1 and x2, y2 of the pressure curve applied to the stylus." msgstr "" "Definissètz aicí las coordenadas x1, y1 e x2, y2 segon la corba de pression " "aplicada a l'estilet." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:21 msgid "Wacom stylus button mapping" msgstr "Correspondéncia del boton de l'estilet Wacom" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:22 msgid "Set this to the logical button mapping." msgstr "Definís la correspondéncia del boton logic." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:23 msgid "Wacom stylus pressure threshold" msgstr "Sulhet de pression per l'estilet Wacom" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:24 msgid "" "Set this to the pressure value at which a stylus click event is generated." msgstr "" "Definissètz aicí la valor de pression per la quala un eveniment clic de " "l'estilet es generat." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:25 msgid "Wacom eraser pressure curve" msgstr "Corba de pression de la goma Wacom" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:26 msgid "" "Set this to x1, y1 and x2, y2 of the pressure curve applied to the eraser." msgstr "" "Definissètz aicí las coordenadas x1, y1 e x2, y2 segon la corba de pression " "aplicada a la goma." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:27 msgid "Wacom eraser button mapping" msgstr "Correspondéncia del boton de la goma Wacom" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:28 msgid "Wacom eraser pressure threshold" msgstr "Sulhet de pression de la goma Wacom" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:29 msgid "" "Set this to the pressure value at which an eraser click event is generated." msgstr "" "Definissètz aicí la valor de pression per la quala un eveniment clic de la " "goma es generat." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:30 msgid "Wacom button action type" msgstr "Tipe d'accion del boton Wacom" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:31 msgid "The type of action triggered by the button being pressed." msgstr "Lo tipe d'accion desenclavat quand lo boton es quichat." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:32 msgid "Key combination for the custom action" msgstr "Combinason de tòcas per l'accion personalizada" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:33 msgid "" "The keyboard shortcut generated when the button is pressed for custom " "actions." msgstr "" "L'acorchi de clavièr generat quand lo boton es quichat per d'accions " "personalizadas." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:34 msgid "Key combinations for a touchring or touchstrip custom action" msgstr "" "Combinasons de tòcas per una accion personalizada del tipe touchring o " "touchstrip" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.peripherals.wacom.gschema.xml.in.in.h:35 msgid "" "The keyboard shortcuts generated when a touchring or touchstrip is used for " "custom actions (up followed by down)." msgstr "" "Los acorchis de clavièr generats quand lo touchring o lo touchstrip es " "utilizat per d'accions personalizadas (movement cap amont puèi cap aval)." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.color.gschema.xml.in.in.h:5 msgid "The duration a display profile is valid" msgstr "La durada de validitat d'un perfil d'ecran" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.color.gschema.xml.in.in.h:6 msgid "" "This is the number of days after which the display color profile is " "considered invalid." msgstr "" "Nombre de jorns aprèp qué lo perfil colorimetric de l'afichatge es " "considerat coma perimit." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.color.gschema.xml.in.in.h:7 msgid "The duration a printer profile is valid" msgstr "La durada de validitat d'un perfil d'impression" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.color.gschema.xml.in.in.h:8 msgid "" "This is the number of days after which the printer color profile is " "considered invalid." msgstr "" "Nombre de jorns aprèp qué lo perfil colorimetric de l'impression es " "considerat coma perimit." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.gschema.xml.in.in.h:1 msgid "List of plugins that are allowed to be loaded" msgstr "Lista dels empeutons autorizats al cargament" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.gschema.xml.in.in.h:2 msgid "" "A list of strings representing the plugins that are allowed to be loaded " "(default: 'all'). The plugins still need to be marked as active to get " "loaded. This is only evaluated on startup." msgstr "" "Una lista de cadenas que descrivon los empeutons que son autorizats al " "cargament (la valor per defaut es « all », totes). Los empeutons devon " "encara èsser marcats coma actius per èsser cargats. Aquò es pas evaluat qu'a " "l'aviada." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.housekeeping.gschema.xml.in.in.h:3 msgid "Mount paths to ignore" msgstr "Camins de montatge d'ignorar" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.housekeeping.gschema.xml.in.in.h:4 msgid "Specify a list of mount paths to ignore when they run low on space." msgstr "" "Indica una lista de camins de montatge d'ignorar quand lor espaci de disc es " "feble." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.housekeeping.gschema.xml.in.in.h:5 msgid "Free percentage notify threshold" msgstr "Sulhet d'avertiment en percentatge d'espaci liure" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.housekeeping.gschema.xml.in.in.h:6 msgid "" "Percentage free space threshold for initial warning of low disk space. If " "the percentage free space drops below this, a warning will be shown." msgstr "" "Sulhet d'espaci liure, en percentatge, per l'alèrta iniciala d'espaci de " "disc feble. Se lo percentatge d'espaci liure tomba en dejós d'aqueste " "sulhet, una alèrta es afichada." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.housekeeping.gschema.xml.in.in.h:7 msgid "Subsequent free space percentage notify threshold" msgstr "Sulhet seguent d'avertiment d'espaci liure, en percentatge" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.housekeeping.gschema.xml.in.in.h:8 msgid "" "Specify the percentage that the free disk space should reduce by before " "issuing a subsequent warning." msgstr "" "Indica lo percentatge de reduccion d'espaci de disc abans d'emetre un novèl " "avertiment." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.housekeeping.gschema.xml.in.in.h:9 msgid "Free space notify threshold" msgstr "Sulhet d'avertiment d'espaci liure" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.housekeeping.gschema.xml.in.in.h:10 msgid "" "Specify an amount in GB. If the amount of free space is more than this, no " "warning will be shown." msgstr "" "Indica una talha en Go. Se la quantitat d'espaci de disc disponibla es " "superiora a aqueste paramètre, cap d'alèrta serà pas afichada." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.housekeeping.gschema.xml.in.in.h:11 msgid "Minimum notify period for repeated warnings" msgstr "Interval minimum de repeticion dels avertiments" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.housekeeping.gschema.xml.in.in.h:12 msgid "" "Specify a time in minutes. Subsequent warnings for a volume will not appear " "more often than this period." msgstr "" "Indica un interval en minutas. Aqueste paramètre constituís l'interval de " "temps minimum entre mantuna alèrtas per un meteis volum." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:3 msgid "Custom keybindings" msgstr "Acorchis de clavièr personalizats" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:4 msgid "List of custom keybindings" msgstr "Lista dels acorchis de clavièr personalizats" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:5 msgid "Launch calculator" msgstr "Aviar la calculadoira" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:6 msgid "Binding to launch the calculator." msgstr "Acorchi per aviar la calculadoira." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:9 msgid "Launch email client" msgstr "Aviar lo logicial de messatjariá" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:10 msgid "Binding to launch the email client." msgstr "Acorchi per aviar lo logicial de messatjariá." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:11 msgid "Eject" msgstr "Ejectar" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:12 msgid "Binding to eject an optical disc." msgstr "Acorchi per ejectar un disc optic." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:13 msgid "Launch help browser" msgstr "Aviar lo navigador d'ajuda" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:14 msgid "Binding to launch the help browser." msgstr "Acorchi per aviar lo navigador d'ajuda." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:15 msgid "Home folder" msgstr "Repertòri personal" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:16 msgid "Binding to open the Home folder." msgstr "Acorchi per dobrir lo dorsièr personal." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:17 msgid "Launch media player" msgstr "Aviar lo lector multimèdia" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:18 msgid "Binding to launch the media player." msgstr "Acorchi per aviar lo lector multimèdia." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:19 msgid "Next track" msgstr "Pista seguenta" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:20 msgid "Binding to skip to next track." msgstr "Acorchi per passar a la pista seguenta." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:21 msgid "Pause playback" msgstr "Metre en pausa la lectura" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:22 msgid "Binding to pause playback." msgstr "Acorchi per metre en pausa la lectura." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:23 msgid "Play (or play/pause)" msgstr "Lectura (o Lectura/Pausa)" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:24 msgid "Binding to start playback (or toggle play/pause)." msgstr "Acorchi per aviar (o suspendre) la lectura." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:25 msgid "Log out" msgstr "Desconnexion" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:26 msgid "Binding to log out." msgstr "Acorchi per se desconnectar." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:27 msgid "Previous track" msgstr "Pista precedenta" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:28 msgid "Binding to skip to previous track." msgstr "Acorchi per tornar a la pista precedenta." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:31 msgid "Lock screen" msgstr "Verrolhar l'ecran" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:32 msgid "Binding to lock the screen." msgstr "Acorchi per verrolhar l'ecran." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:33 msgid "Search" msgstr "Recercar" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:34 msgid "Binding to launch the search tool." msgstr "Acorchi per aviar l'aisina de recèrca." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:35 msgid "Stop playback" msgstr "Arrestar la lectura" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:36 msgid "Binding to stop playback." msgstr "Acorchi per interrompre la lectura." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:39 msgid "Volume down" msgstr "Reduire lo volum" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:40 msgid "Binding to lower the system volume." msgstr "Acorchi per baissar lo volum general del son." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:41 msgid "Volume mute" msgstr "Sordina" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:42 msgid "Binding to mute the system volume." msgstr "Acorchi per metre lo son general en sordina." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:43 msgid "Volume up" msgstr "Aumentar lo volum" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:44 msgid "Binding to raise the system volume." msgstr "Acorchi per aumentar lo volum general del son." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:45 msgid "Take a screenshot" msgstr "Far una captura d'ecran" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:46 msgid "Binding to take a screenshot." msgstr "Acorchi per prene una captura d'ecran." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:47 msgid "Take a screenshot of a window" msgstr "Far la captura d'ecran d'una fenèstra" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:48 msgid "Binding to take a screenshot of a window." msgstr "Acorchi per prene una captura d'ecran d'una fenèstra." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:49 msgid "Take a screenshot of an area" msgstr "Prene una captura d'una partida de l'ecran" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:50 msgid "Binding to take a screenshot of an area." msgstr "Acorchi per prene una captura d'una partida de l'ecran." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:51 msgid "Copy a screenshot to clipboard" msgstr "Copiar una captura d'ecran cap al quichapapièr" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:52 msgid "Binding to copy a screenshot to clipboard." msgstr "Acorchi per copiar una captura d'ecran cap al quichapapièrs." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:53 msgid "Copy a screenshot of a window to clipboard" msgstr "Copiar una captura d'ecran d'una fenèstra dins lo quichapapièrs" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:54 msgid "Binding to copy a screenshot of a window to clipboard." msgstr "" "Acorchi per copiar una captura d'ecran d'una fenèstra cap al quichapapièrs." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:55 msgid "Copy a screenshot of an area to clipboard" msgstr "Copiar una captura d'una partida de l'ecran dins lo quichapapièrs" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:56 msgid "Binding to copy a screenshot of an area to clipboard." msgstr "" "Acorchi per copiar una captura d'una partie de l'ecran cap al quichapapièr." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:58 msgid "Launch terminal" msgstr "Aviar un terminal" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:59 msgid "Binding to launch the terminal." msgstr "Acorchi per aviar un terminal" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:57 msgid "Record a short video of the screen" msgstr "" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:60 msgid "Launch web browser" msgstr "Aviar lo navigador web" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:61 msgid "Binding to launch the web browser." msgstr "Acorchi per aviar lo navigador Web." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:62 msgid "Toggle magnifier" msgstr "Activar o pas la lópia" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:63 msgid "Binding to show the screen magnifier" msgstr "Acorchi per afichar la lópia." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:64 msgid "Toggle screen reader" msgstr "Activar o pas lo lector d'ecran" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:65 msgid "Binding to start the screen reader" msgstr "Acorchi per activar lo lector d'ecran." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:66 msgid "Toggle on-screen keyboard" msgstr "Activar o pas lo clavièr visual" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:67 msgid "Binding to show the on-screen keyboard" msgstr "Acorchi per afichar lo clavièr visual." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:68 msgid "Increase text size" msgstr "Aumentar la talha del tèxte" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:69 msgid "Binding to increase the text size" msgstr "Acorchi per aumentar la talha del tèxte." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:70 msgid "Decrease text size" msgstr "Demesir la talha del tèxte" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:71 msgid "Binding to decrease the text size" msgstr "Acorchi per demesir la talha del tèxte." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:72 msgid "Toggle contrast" msgstr "Activar o pas lo contraste" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:73 msgid "Binding to toggle the interface contrast" msgstr "Acorchi per modificar lo contraste de l'interfàcia." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:74 msgid "Magnifier zoom in" msgstr "Zoom avant de la lópia" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:75 msgid "Binding for the magnifier to zoom in" msgstr "Acorchi del zoom per agrandir l'imatge." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:76 msgid "Magnifier zoom out" msgstr "Zoom arrièr de la lópia" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:77 msgid "Binding for the magnifier to zoom out" msgstr "Acorchi del zoom per demesir l'imatge." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:78 msgid "Name" msgstr "Nom" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:79 msgid "Name of the custom binding" msgstr "Nom de l'acorchi personalizat" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:80 msgid "Binding" msgstr "Acorchi" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:81 msgid "Binding for the custom binding" msgstr "Acorchi per l'acorchi personalizat" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:82 msgid "Command" msgstr "Comanda" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.media-keys.gschema.xml.in.in.h:83 msgid "Command to run when the binding is invoked" msgstr "Comanda d'aviar quand l'acorchi es invocat" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.gschema.xml.in.in.h:5 msgid "Percentage considered low" msgstr "Percentatge considerat coma feble" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.gschema.xml.in.in.h:6 msgid "" "The percentage of the battery when it is considered low. Only valid when use-" "time-for-policy is false." msgstr "" "Lo percentatge de la batariá quand es considerat coma feble. Valable " "unicament quand use-time-for-policy es fals." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.gschema.xml.in.in.h:7 msgid "Percentage considered critical" msgstr "Percentatge considerat coma critic" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.gschema.xml.in.in.h:8 msgid "" "The percentage of the battery when it is considered critical. Only valid " "when use-time-for-policy is false." msgstr "" "Lo percentatge de la batariá quand es considerat coma critic. Valable " "unicament quand use-time-for-policy es fals." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.gschema.xml.in.in.h:9 msgid "Percentage action is taken" msgstr "Percentatge ont l'accion es efectuada" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.gschema.xml.in.in.h:10 msgid "" "The percentage of the battery when the critical action is performed. Only " "valid when use-time-for-policy is false." msgstr "" "Lo percentatge de la batariá quand l'accion critica es efectuada. Valable " "unicament quand use-time-for-policy es fals." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.gschema.xml.in.in.h:11 msgid "The time remaining when low" msgstr "Lo temps que demòra quand feble" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.gschema.xml.in.in.h:12 msgid "" "The time remaining in seconds of the battery when it is considered low. Only " "valid when use-time-for-policy is true." msgstr "" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.gschema.xml.in.in.h:13 msgid "The time remaining when critical" msgstr "Lo temps que demòra quand critic" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.gschema.xml.in.in.h:14 msgid "" "The time remaining in seconds of the battery when it is considered critical. " "Only valid when use-time-for-policy is true." msgstr "" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.gschema.xml.in.in.h:15 msgid "The time remaining when action is taken" msgstr "Lo temps que demòra quand l'accion es efectuada" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.gschema.xml.in.in.h:16 msgid "" "The time remaining in seconds of the battery when critical action is taken. " "Only valid when use-time-for-policy is true." msgstr "" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.gschema.xml.in.in.h:17 msgid "Whether to use time-based notifications" msgstr "Indica se las notificacions basadas sul temps devon èsser utilizadas" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.gschema.xml.in.in.h:18 msgid "" "If time based notifications should be used. If set to false, then the " "percentage change is used instead, which may fix a broken ACPI BIOS." msgstr "" "Indica se cal utilizar de notificacions basadas sul temps. A defaut, la " "variacion en percentatge serà utilizada. Aquò pòt permetre de corregir lo " "foncionament d'unes BIOS ACPI defectuoses." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.gschema.xml.in.in.h:19 msgid "If we should show the recalled battery warning for a broken battery" msgstr "" "Indica se cal afichar l'avertiment de rapèl de batariá en preséncia d'una " "batariá defectuosa" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.gschema.xml.in.in.h:20 msgid "" "If we should show the recalled battery warning for a broken battery. Set " "this to false only if you know your battery is okay." msgstr "" "Indica se cal afichar l'avertiment de rapèl de batariá en preséncia d'una " "batariá defectuosa. Definissètz aquesta opcion a FALS unicament se sètz " "segur que vòstra batariá es en bon estat." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:5 msgid "Use mobile broadband connections" msgstr "Utilizacion de connexions per telefonet" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:6 msgid "" "Use mobile broadband connections such as GSM and CDMA to check for updates." msgstr "" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:7 msgid "Automatically download updates in the background without confirmation" msgstr "" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:8 msgid "" "Automatically download updates in the background without confirmation. " "Updates will be auto-downloaded when using wired network connnections, and " "mobile broadband if 'connection-use-mobile' is enabled." msgstr "" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:9 msgid "How often to check for updates" msgstr "Frequéncia de verificacion de las mesas a jorn" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:10 msgid "" "How often to check for updates. Value is in seconds. This is a maximum " "amount of time that can pass between a security update being published, and " "the update being automatically installed or the user notified." msgstr "" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:11 msgid "How often to notify the user that non-critical updates are available" msgstr "" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:12 msgid "" "How often to tell the user there are non-critical updates. Value is in " "seconds. Security update notifications are always shown after the check for " "updates, but non-critical notifications should be shown a lot less " "frequently." msgstr "" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:13 msgid "The last time we told the user about non-critical notifications" msgstr "" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:14 msgid "" "The last time we notified the user about non-critical updates. Value is in " "seconds since the epoch, or zero for never." msgstr "" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:15 msgid "How often to check for distribution upgrades" msgstr "" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:16 msgid "How often to check for distribution upgrades. Value is in seconds." msgstr "" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:17 msgid "How often to refresh the package cache" msgstr "Frequéncia de refrescament de lo cache dels paquets" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:18 msgid "How often to refresh the package cache. Value is in seconds." msgstr "" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:19 msgid "Check for updates when running on battery power" msgstr "Recercar las mesas a jorn quand l'ordenador fonciona sus batariá" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:20 msgid "Check for updates when running on battery power." msgstr "Recercar las mesas a jorn quand l'ordenador fonciona sus batariá." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:21 msgid "Notify the user when distribution upgrades are available" msgstr "" "Avertir l'utilizaire que de mesas a nivèl de sa distribucion son disponiblas" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:22 msgid "Notify the user when distribution upgrades are available." msgstr "" "Avertir l'utilizaire que de mesas a nivèl de sa distribucion son disponiblas." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:23 msgid "Ask the user if additional firmware should be installed" msgstr "" "Demandar a l'utilizaire se un microprograma suplementari deu èsser installat" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:24 msgid "" "Ask the user if additional firmware should be installed if it is available." msgstr "" "Demandar a l'utilizaire se un microprograma suplementari deu èsser installat " "se es disponible." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:25 msgid "Firmware files that should not be searched for" msgstr "Fichièrs de microprogramas que la recèrca n'es interdicha" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:26 msgid "" "Firmware files that should not be searched for, separated by commas. These " "can include '*' and '?' characters." msgstr "" "Fichièrs de microprogramas que la recèrca n'es interdicha, separats per de " "virgulas. Los caractèrs « * » e « ? » son autorizats tanben." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:27 msgid "Devices that should be ignored" msgstr "Periferics que devon èsser ignorats" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:28 msgid "" "Devices that should be ignored, separated by commas. These can include '*' " "and '?' characters." msgstr "" "Periferics que devon èsser ignorats, separats per de virgulas. Los caractèrs " "« * » e « ? » son autorizats tanben." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:29 msgid "The filenames on removable media that designate it a software source." msgstr "" "Noms de fichièrs sus un periferic amovible que lo designan coma font de " "logicials." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.updates.gschema.xml.in.in.h:30 msgid "" "When removable media is inserted, it is checked to see if it contains any " "important filenames in the root directory. If the filename matches, then an " "updates check is performed. This allows post-install disks to be used to " "update running systems." msgstr "" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xrandr.gschema.xml.in.in.h:3 msgid "File for default configuration for RandR" msgstr "Fichièr de configuracion per defaut de RandR" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xrandr.gschema.xml.in.in.h:4 msgid "" "The XRandR plugin will look for a default configuration in the file " "specified by this key. This is similar to the ~/.config/monitors.xml that " "normally gets stored in users' home directories. If a user does not have " "such a file, or has one that does not match the user's setup of monitors, " "then the file specified by this key will be used instead." msgstr "" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xrandr.gschema.xml.in.in.h:7 msgid "Whether to turn off specific monitors after boot" msgstr "" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xrandr.gschema.xml.in.in.h:8 msgid "" "'clone' will display the same thing on all monitors, 'dock' will switch off " "the internal monitor, 'do-nothing' will use the default Xorg behaviour " "(extend the desktop in recent versions). The default, 'follow-lid', will " "choose between 'do-nothing' and 'dock' depending on whether the lid is " "(respectively) open or closed." msgstr "" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xsettings.gschema.xml.in.in.h:3 msgid "Antialiasing" msgstr "Anticrenelatge" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xsettings.gschema.xml.in.in.h:4 msgid "" "The type of antialiasing to use when rendering fonts. Possible values are: " "\"none\" for no antialiasing, \"grayscale\" for standard grayscale " "antialiasing, and \"rgba\" for subpixel antialiasing (LCD screens only)." msgstr "" "Lo tipe d'anticrenelatge utilizat pel rendut de las poliças. Las valors " "possiblas son : « none » per cap d'anticrenelatge, « grayscale » per " "l'anticrenelatge classic per nivèls de gris e « rgba » per l'anticrenelatge " "per sospixèls (ecrans LCD unicament)." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xsettings.gschema.xml.in.in.h:5 msgid "Hinting" msgstr "Optimizacion" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xsettings.gschema.xml.in.in.h:6 msgid "" "The type of hinting to use when rendering fonts. Possible values are: " "\"none\" for no hinting, \"slight\" for basic, \"medium\" for moderate, and " "\"full\" for maximum hinting (may cause distortion of letter forms)." msgstr "" "Lo tipe d'optimizacion utilizat pel rendut de las poliças. Las valors " "possiblas son : « none » per cap d'optimizacion, « slight » pel minimum, " "« medium » per una optimizacion mejana e « full » pel maximum possible (pòt " "ocasionar de distorsions sus la forma de las letras)." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xsettings.gschema.xml.in.in.h:9 msgid "RGBA order" msgstr "Òrdre RVBA" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xsettings.gschema.xml.in.in.h:10 msgid "" "The order of subpixel elements on an LCD screen; only used when antialiasing " "is set to \"rgba\". Possible values are: \"rgb\" for red on left (most " "common), \"bgr\" for blue on left, \"vrgb\" for red on top, \"vbgr\" for red " "on bottom." msgstr "" "L'òrdre dels elements sospixèls sus un ecran LCD ; unicament utilizat se " "l'anticrenelatge es definit a « rgba ». Las valors possiblas son « rgb » pel " "roge a esquèrra (lo mai corrent), « bgr » pel blau a esquèrra, « vrgb » pel " "roge amont, « vbgr » pel roge aval." #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xsettings.gschema.xml.in.in.h:11 msgid "List of explicitly disabled GTK+ modules" msgstr "Lista de moduls GTK+ desactivats d'un biais explicit" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xsettings.gschema.xml.in.in.h:12 msgid "" "A list of strings representing the GTK+ modules that will not be loaded, " "even if enabled by default in their configuration." msgstr "" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xsettings.gschema.xml.in.in.h:13 msgid "List of explicitly enabled GTK+ modules" msgstr "Lista de moduls GTK+ activats d'un biais explicit" #: ../data/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.xsettings.gschema.xml.in.in.h:14 msgid "" "A list of strings representing the GTK+ modules that will be loaded, usually " "in addition to conditional and forcibly disabled ones." msgstr "" #: ../gnome-settings-daemon/main.c:53 msgid "Enable debugging code" msgstr "Activa lo còde de desbugatge" #: ../gnome-settings-daemon/main.c:54 msgid "Replace existing daemon" msgstr "Remplaçar lo demòni existent" #: ../gnome-settings-daemon/main.c:55 msgid "Exit after a time (for debugging)" msgstr "Quitar aprèp un certan relambi (per desbugatge)" #: ../plugins/a11y-keyboard/a11y-keyboard.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:1 msgid "Accessibility Keyboard" msgstr "Accessibilitat del clavièr" #: ../plugins/a11y-keyboard/a11y-keyboard.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "Accessibility keyboard plugin" msgstr "Empeuton d'accessibilitat del clavièr" #: ../plugins/a11y-keyboard/gsd-a11y-keyboard-manager.c:398 msgid "Slow Keys Turned On" msgstr "Tòcas lentas activadas" #: ../plugins/a11y-keyboard/gsd-a11y-keyboard-manager.c:399 msgid "Slow Keys Turned Off" msgstr "Tòcas lentas desactivadas" #: ../plugins/a11y-keyboard/gsd-a11y-keyboard-manager.c:400 msgid "" "You just held down the Shift key for 8 seconds. This is the shortcut for " "the Slow Keys feature, which affects the way your keyboard works." msgstr "" #: ../plugins/a11y-keyboard/gsd-a11y-keyboard-manager.c:410 #: ../plugins/a11y-keyboard/gsd-a11y-keyboard-manager.c:478 msgid "Universal Access" msgstr "Accès universal" #: ../plugins/a11y-keyboard/gsd-a11y-keyboard-manager.c:416 #: ../plugins/a11y-keyboard/gsd-a11y-keyboard-manager.c:484 msgid "Turn Off" msgstr "Atudar" #: ../plugins/a11y-keyboard/gsd-a11y-keyboard-manager.c:416 #: ../plugins/a11y-keyboard/gsd-a11y-keyboard-manager.c:484 msgid "Turn On" msgstr "Alucar" #: ../plugins/a11y-keyboard/gsd-a11y-keyboard-manager.c:422 #: ../plugins/a11y-keyboard/gsd-a11y-keyboard-manager.c:490 msgid "Leave On" msgstr "Interrompre" #: ../plugins/a11y-keyboard/gsd-a11y-keyboard-manager.c:422 #: ../plugins/a11y-keyboard/gsd-a11y-keyboard-manager.c:490 msgid "Leave Off" msgstr "Quitar" #: ../plugins/a11y-keyboard/gsd-a11y-keyboard-manager.c:463 msgid "Sticky Keys Turned On" msgstr "Tòcas remanentas activadas" #: ../plugins/a11y-keyboard/gsd-a11y-keyboard-manager.c:464 msgid "Sticky Keys Turned Off" msgstr "Tòcas remanentas desactivadas" #: ../plugins/a11y-keyboard/gsd-a11y-keyboard-manager.c:466 msgid "" "You just pressed the Shift key 5 times in a row. This is the shortcut for " "the Sticky Keys feature, which affects the way your keyboard works." msgstr "" #: ../plugins/a11y-keyboard/gsd-a11y-keyboard-manager.c:468 msgid "" "You just pressed two keys at once, or pressed the Shift key 5 times in a " "row. This turns off the Sticky Keys feature, which affects the way your " "keyboard works." msgstr "" #: ../plugins/a11y-settings/a11y-settings.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:1 msgid "Accessibility settings" msgstr "Paramètres d'accessibilitat" #: ../plugins/a11y-settings/a11y-settings.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "Accessibility settings plugin" msgstr "Empeuton dels paramètres d'accessibilitat" #: ../plugins/background/background.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:1 msgid "Background" msgstr "Fons" #: ../plugins/background/background.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "Background plugin" msgstr "Empeuton de rèire plan" #. Priority=100 #: ../plugins/clipboard/clipboard.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "Clipboard" msgstr "Quichapapièrs" #: ../plugins/clipboard/clipboard.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:3 msgid "Clipboard plugin" msgstr "Modul extèrne de quichapapièrs" #: ../plugins/color/color.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:1 #: ../plugins/color/gsd-color-calibrate.c:139 msgid "Color" msgstr "Color" #: ../plugins/color/color.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "Color plugin" msgstr "Empeuton de color" #: ../plugins/color/gsd-color-calibrate.c:144 msgid "Recalibrate now" msgstr "Recalibrar ara" #. TRANSLATORS: this is when the device has not been recalibrated in a while #: ../plugins/color/gsd-color-calibrate.c:187 msgid "Recalibration required" msgstr "Una recalibracion es necessària" #. TRANSLATORS: this is when the display has not been recalibrated in a while #: ../plugins/color/gsd-color-calibrate.c:199 #, c-format msgid "The display '%s' should be recalibrated soon." msgstr "L'ecran « %s » deuriá èsser recalibrat dins pas longtemps." #. TRANSLATORS: this is when the printer has not been recalibrated in a while #: ../plugins/color/gsd-color-calibrate.c:208 #, c-format msgid "The printer '%s' should be recalibrated soon." msgstr "L'imprimenta « %s » deuriá èsser recalibrada dins pas longtemps." #. TRANSLATORS: this is the application name #: ../plugins/color/gsd-color-calibrate.c:346 #: ../plugins/color/gsd-color-calibrate.c:362 msgid "GNOME Settings Daemon Color Plugin" msgstr "Empeuton de color del servici dels paramètres GNOME" #. TRANSLATORS: this is a sound description #: ../plugins/color/gsd-color-calibrate.c:348 msgid "Color calibration device added" msgstr "Aparelh de calibracion de las colors apondut" #. TRANSLATORS: this is a sound description #: ../plugins/color/gsd-color-calibrate.c:364 msgid "Color calibration device removed" msgstr "Aparelh de calibracion de las colors levat" #. Priority=100 #: ../plugins/cursor/cursor.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "Cursor" msgstr "Cursor" #: ../plugins/cursor/cursor.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:3 msgid "Show/hide cursor on tablet devices" msgstr "Aficha/amaga lo cursor dels periferics de la tableta" #: ../plugins/dummy/dummy.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:1 msgid "Dummy" msgstr "Factici" #: ../plugins/dummy/dummy.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "Dummy plugin" msgstr "Empeuton factici" #: ../plugins/housekeeping/gsd-disk-space.c:614 #, c-format msgid "Low Disk Space on \"%s\"" msgstr "Espaci de disc feble sus « %s »" #: ../plugins/housekeeping/gsd-disk-space.c:616 #, c-format msgid "" "The volume \"%s\" has only %s disk space remaining. You may free up some " "space by emptying the trash." msgstr "" #: ../plugins/housekeeping/gsd-disk-space.c:620 #: ../plugins/housekeeping/gsd-ldsm-dialog.c:80 #, c-format msgid "The volume \"%s\" has only %s disk space remaining." msgstr "" #: ../plugins/housekeeping/gsd-disk-space.c:598 msgid "Low Disk Space" msgstr "Espaci de disc feble" #: ../plugins/housekeeping/gsd-disk-space.c:600 #, c-format msgid "" "This computer has only %s disk space remaining. You may free up some space " "by emptying the trash." msgstr "" #: ../plugins/housekeeping/gsd-disk-space.c:603 #, c-format msgid "This computer has only %s disk space remaining." msgstr "" #: ../plugins/housekeeping/gsd-disk-space.c:618 msgid "Disk space" msgstr "Espaci de disc" #: ../plugins/housekeeping/gsd-disk-space.c:625 msgid "Examine" msgstr "Examinar" #: ../plugins/housekeeping/gsd-disk-space.c:633 msgid "Empty Trash" msgstr "Voidar l'escobilhièr" #: ../plugins/housekeeping/gsd-disk-space.c:640 msgid "Ignore" msgstr "Ignorar" #: ../plugins/housekeeping/gsd-ldsm-dialog.c:65 msgid "Don't show any warnings again for this file system" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/housekeeping/gsd-ldsm-dialog.c:67 msgid "Don't show any warnings again" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/housekeeping/gsd-ldsm-dialog.c:99 msgid "" "You can free up disk space by emptying the Trash, removing unused programs " "or files, or moving files to another disk or partition." msgstr "" #: ../plugins/housekeeping/gsd-ldsm-dialog.c:102 msgid "" "You can free up disk space by removing unused programs or files, or by " "moving files to another disk or partition." msgstr "" #: ../plugins/housekeeping/gsd-ldsm-dialog.c:107 msgid "" "You can free up disk space by emptying the Trash, removing unused programs " "or files, or moving files to an external disk." msgstr "" #: ../plugins/housekeeping/gsd-ldsm-dialog.c:110 msgid "" "You can free up disk space by removing unused programs or files, or by " "moving files to an external disk." msgstr "" #: ../plugins/housekeeping/gsd-ldsm-dialog.c:441 msgid "Examine…" msgstr "Examinar…" #: ../plugins/housekeeping/housekeeping.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:1 msgid "Housekeeping" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/housekeeping/housekeeping.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "" "Automatically prunes thumbnail caches and other transient files, and warns " "about low disk space" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: wireless keyboard with internal battery #: ../plugins/keyboard/keyboard.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:1 #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:612 msgid "Keyboard" msgid_plural "Keyboards" msgstr[0] "Clavièr" msgstr[1] "Clavièrs" #: ../plugins/keyboard/keyboard.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "Keyboard plugin" msgstr "Empeuton del clavièr" #: ../plugins/media-keys/gsd-media-keys-manager.c:2040 msgid "Screencast from %d %t.webm" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/gsd-screenshot-utils.c:84 msgid "Unable to capture a screenshot" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/gsd-screenshot-utils.c:115 #: ../plugins/media-keys/gsd-screenshot-utils.c:155 msgid "Screenshot taken" msgstr "" #. translators: this is the name of the file that gets made up #. * with the screenshot #: ../plugins/media-keys/gsd-screenshot-utils.c:304 #, c-format msgid "Screenshot from %s" msgstr "" #. translators: #. * The device has been disabled #: ../plugins/media-keys/gvc/gvc-mixer-control.c:1830 msgid "Disabled" msgstr "Desactivat" #. translators: #. * The number of sound outputs on a particular device #: ../plugins/media-keys/gvc/gvc-mixer-control.c:1837 #, c-format msgid "%u Output" msgid_plural "%u Outputs" msgstr[0] "%u sortida" msgstr[1] "%u sortidas" #. translators: #. * The number of sound inputs on a particular device #: ../plugins/media-keys/gvc/gvc-mixer-control.c:1847 #, c-format msgid "%u Input" msgid_plural "%u Inputs" msgstr[0] "%u entrada" msgstr[1] "%u entradas" #: ../plugins/media-keys/gvc/gvc-mixer-control.c:2371 msgid "System Sounds" msgstr "Sons sistèma" #. Priority=100 #: ../plugins/media-keys/media-keys.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "Media keys" msgstr "Tòcas multimèdias" #: ../plugins/media-keys/media-keys.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:3 msgid "Media keys plugin" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:45 msgid "Touchpad toggle" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:46 msgid "Touchpad On" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:47 msgid "Touchpad Off" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:51 #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:52 msgid "Microphone Mute" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:53 msgid "Quiet Volume Mute" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:54 msgid "Quiet Volume Down" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:55 msgid "Quiet Volume Up" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:65 msgid "Lock Screen" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:81 msgid "Rewind" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:82 msgid "Forward" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:83 msgid "Repeat" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:84 msgid "Random Play" msgstr "" #. Key code of the XF86Display key (Fn-F7 on Thinkpads, Fn-F4 on HP machines, etc.) #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:85 #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:87 msgid "Video Out" msgstr "" #. Key code of the XF86RotateWindows key (present on some tablets) #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:89 msgid "Rotate Screen" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:99 msgid "Power Off" msgstr "" #. the kernel / Xorg names really are like this... #. translators: "Sleep" means putting the machine to sleep, either through hibernate or suspend #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:102 msgid "Sleep" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:103 msgid "Suspend" msgstr "Suspendre" #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:104 msgid "Hibernate" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:105 msgid "Brightness Up" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:106 msgid "Brightness Down" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:107 msgid "Keyboard Brightness Up" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:108 msgid "Keyboard Brightness Down" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:109 msgid "Keyboard Brightness Toggle" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/media-keys/shortcuts-list.h:110 msgid "Battery Status" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/mouse/gsd-mouse-manager.c:936 msgid "Could not enable mouse accessibility features" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/mouse/gsd-mouse-manager.c:938 msgid "" "Mouse accessibility requires Mousetweaks to be installed on your system." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: wireless mice with internal batteries #: ../plugins/mouse/mouse.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:1 #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:608 msgid "Mouse" msgid_plural "Mice" msgstr[0] "Mirga" msgstr[1] "Mirgas" #: ../plugins/mouse/mouse.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "Mouse plugin" msgstr "Empeuton de la mirga" #. Priority=100 #: ../plugins/orientation/orientation.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "Orientation" msgstr "Orientacion" #: ../plugins/orientation/orientation.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:3 msgid "Orientation plugin" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:81 msgid "Unknown time" msgstr "Durada desconeguda" #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:86 #, c-format msgid "%i minute" msgid_plural "%i minutes" msgstr[0] "%i minuta" msgstr[1] "%i minutas" #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:96 #, c-format msgid "%i hour" msgid_plural "%i hours" msgstr[0] "%i ora" msgstr[1] "%i oras" #. TRANSLATOR: "%i %s %i %s" are "%i hours %i minutes" #. * Swap order with "%2$s %2$i %1$s %1$i if needed #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:102 #, c-format msgid "%i %s %i %s" msgstr "%i %s %i %s" #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:103 msgid "hour" msgid_plural "hours" msgstr[0] "ora" msgstr[1] "oras" #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:104 msgid "minute" msgid_plural "minutes" msgstr[0] "minuta" msgstr[1] "minuta" #. TRANSLATORS: The laptop battery is charged, and we know a time. #. * The parameter is the time, e.g. 7 hours 6 minutes #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:344 #, c-format msgid "provides %s laptop runtime" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: the device is discharging, and we have a time remaining #. * The first parameter is the device type, e.g. "Laptop battery" and #. * the second is the time, e.g. 7 hours 6 minutes #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:355 #, c-format msgid "%s %s remaining" msgstr "%s : demòra %s" #. TRANSLATORS: device is charging, and we have a time to full and a percentage #. * The first parameter is the device type, e.g. "Laptop battery" and #. * the second is the time, e.g. "7 hours 6 minutes" #. TRANSLATORS: device is charging, and we have a time to full and a percentage. #. * The first parameter is the device type, e.g. "Laptop battery" and #. * the second is the time, e.g. "7 hours 6 minutes" #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:376 ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:393 #, c-format msgid "%s %s until charged" msgstr "%s : %s abans l'estat cargat" #. TRANSLATORS: the device is charging, and we have a time to full and empty. #. * The parameter is a time string, e.g. "7 hours 6 minutes" #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:383 #, c-format msgid "provides %s battery runtime" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: the type of data, e.g. Laptop battery #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:474 msgid "Product:" msgstr "Produch :" #. TRANSLATORS: device is missing #. TRANSLATORS: device is charged #. TRANSLATORS: device is charging #. TRANSLATORS: device is discharging #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:478 ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:481 #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:484 ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:487 msgid "Status:" msgstr "Estat :" #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:478 msgid "Missing" msgstr "Mancant" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:481 ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:750 msgid "Charged" msgstr "Cargat" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:484 ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:738 msgid "Charging" msgstr "En carga" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:487 ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:742 msgid "Discharging" msgstr "En descarga" #. TRANSLATORS: percentage #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:492 msgid "Percentage charge:" msgstr "Percentatge de carga :" #. TRANSLATORS: manufacturer #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:496 msgid "Vendor:" msgstr "Vendeire :" #. TRANSLATORS: how the battery is made, e.g. Lithium Ion #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:501 msgid "Technology:" msgstr "Tecnologia :" #. TRANSLATORS: serial number of the battery #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:505 msgid "Serial number:" msgstr "Numèro de seria :" #. TRANSLATORS: model number of the battery #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:509 msgid "Model:" msgstr "Modèl :" #. TRANSLATORS: time to fully charged #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:514 msgid "Charge time:" msgstr "Durada de carga :" #. TRANSLATORS: time to empty #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:520 msgid "Discharge time:" msgstr "Durada de descarga :" #. TRANSLATORS: Excellent, Good, Fair and Poor are all related to battery Capacity #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:527 msgid "Excellent" msgstr "Excellent" #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:529 msgid "Good" msgstr "Bon" #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:531 msgid "Fair" msgstr "Corrècte" #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:533 msgid "Poor" msgstr "Marrit estat" #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:537 msgid "Capacity:" msgstr "Capacitat :" #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:543 ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:568 msgid "Current charge:" msgstr "Carga actuala :" #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:549 msgid "Last full charge:" msgstr "Darrièra carga completa :" #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:555 ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:573 msgid "Design charge:" msgstr "Carga teorica :" #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:560 msgid "Charge rate:" msgstr "Taus de carga :" #. TRANSLATORS: system power cord #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:592 msgid "AC adapter" msgid_plural "AC adapters" msgstr[0] "Adaptador sector" msgstr[1] "Adaptadors sector" #. TRANSLATORS: laptop primary battery #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:596 msgid "Laptop battery" msgid_plural "Laptop batteries" msgstr[0] "Batariá de l'ordenador" msgstr[1] "Batariás de l'ordenador" #. TRANSLATORS: battery-backed AC power source #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:600 msgid "UPS" msgid_plural "UPSs" msgstr[0] "Ondulator" msgstr[1] "Onduladors" #. TRANSLATORS: a monitor is a device to measure voltage and current #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:604 msgid "Monitor" msgid_plural "Monitors" msgstr[0] "Ecran" msgstr[1] "Ecrans" #. TRANSLATORS: portable device #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:616 msgid "PDA" msgid_plural "PDAs" msgstr[0] "Assistent personal" msgstr[1] "Assistents personals" #. TRANSLATORS: cell phone (mobile...) #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:620 msgid "Cell phone" msgid_plural "Cell phones" msgstr[0] "Telefonet" msgstr[1] "Telefonets" #. TRANSLATORS: media player, mp3 etc #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:625 msgid "Media player" msgid_plural "Media players" msgstr[0] "Lector multimèdia" msgstr[1] "Lectors multimèdia" #. TRANSLATORS: tablet device #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:629 msgid "Tablet" msgid_plural "Tablets" msgstr[0] "Tableta" msgstr[1] "Tabletas" #. TRANSLATORS: tablet device #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:633 msgid "Computer" msgid_plural "Computers" msgstr[0] "Ordenador" msgstr[1] "Ordenadors" #. TRANSLATORS: battery technology #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:697 msgid "Lithium Ion" msgstr "Liti-ion" #. TRANSLATORS: battery technology #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:701 msgid "Lithium Polymer" msgstr "Liti polimèr" #. TRANSLATORS: battery technology #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:705 msgid "Lithium Iron Phosphate" msgstr "Liti fosfat de fèrre" #. TRANSLATORS: battery technology #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:709 msgid "Lead acid" msgstr "Batariá al plomb" #. TRANSLATORS: battery technology #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:713 msgid "Nickel Cadmium" msgstr "Niquèl Cadmi" #. TRANSLATORS: battery technology #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:717 msgid "Nickel metal hydride" msgstr "Niquèl metal idrur" #. TRANSLATORS: battery technology #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:721 msgid "Unknown technology" msgstr "Tecnologia desconeguda" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:746 msgid "Empty" msgstr "Void" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:754 msgid "Waiting to charge" msgstr "En espèra de carga" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:758 msgid "Waiting to discharge" msgstr "En espèra de descarga" #. TRANSLATORS: device not present #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:786 msgid "Laptop battery not present" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:790 msgid "Laptop battery is charging" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:794 msgid "Laptop battery is discharging" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:798 msgid "Laptop battery is empty" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:802 msgid "Laptop battery is charged" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:806 msgid "Laptop battery is waiting to charge" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:810 msgid "Laptop battery is waiting to discharge" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:819 msgid "UPS is charging" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:823 msgid "UPS is discharging" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:827 msgid "UPS is empty" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:831 msgid "UPS is charged" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:840 msgid "Mouse is charging" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:844 msgid "Mouse is discharging" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:848 msgid "Mouse is empty" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:852 msgid "Mouse is charged" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:861 msgid "Keyboard is charging" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:865 msgid "Keyboard is discharging" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:869 msgid "Keyboard is empty" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:873 msgid "Keyboard is charged" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:882 msgid "PDA is charging" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:886 msgid "PDA is discharging" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:890 msgid "PDA is empty" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:894 msgid "PDA is charged" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:903 msgid "Cell phone is charging" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:907 msgid "Cell phone is discharging" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:911 msgid "Cell phone is empty" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:915 msgid "Cell phone is charged" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:925 msgid "Media player is charging" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:929 msgid "Media player is discharging" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:933 msgid "Media player is empty" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:937 msgid "Media player is charged" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:946 msgid "Tablet is charging" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:950 msgid "Tablet is discharging" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:954 msgid "Tablet is empty" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:958 msgid "Tablet is charged" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:967 msgid "Computer is charging" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:971 msgid "Computer is discharging" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:975 msgid "Computer is empty" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:979 msgid "Computer is charged" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: this is the sound description #: ../plugins/power/gpm-common.c:909 ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:687 #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:787 msgid "Battery is critically low" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: the battery may be recalled by its vendor #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:844 msgid "Battery may be recalled" msgstr "Un rapèl de la batariá es possible" #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:847 #, c-format msgid "" "A battery in your computer may have been recalled by %s and you may be at " "risk." msgstr "" #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:850 msgid "For more information visit the battery recall website." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: button text, visit the manufacturers recall website #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:861 msgid "Visit recall website" msgstr "Visitar lo site de rapèl" #. TRANSLATORS: button text, do not show this bubble again #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:865 msgid "Do not show me this again" msgstr "Afichar pas pus" #. TRANSLATORS: UPS is now discharging #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:347 msgid "UPS Discharging" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: tell the user how much time they have got #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:352 #, c-format msgid "%s of UPS backup power remaining" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: this is the notification application name #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:371 #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:519 #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:670 #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:778 #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:2090 #: ../plugins/power/power.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:1 msgid "Power" msgstr "Alimentacion" #. TRANSLATORS: laptop battery low, and we only have one battery #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:434 msgid "Battery low" msgstr "Batariá febla" #. TRANSLATORS: laptop battery low, and we have more than one kind of battery #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:437 msgid "Laptop battery low" msgstr "La batariá del portable es febla" #. TRANSLATORS: tell the user how much time they have got #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:444 #, c-format msgid "Approximately %s remaining (%.0f%%)" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: UPS is starting to get a little low #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:449 msgid "UPS low" msgstr "L'ondulador es feble" #. TRANSLATORS: tell the user how much time they have got #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:455 #, c-format msgid "Approximately %s of remaining UPS backup power (%.0f%%)" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: mouse is getting a little low #. TRANSLATORS: the mouse battery is very low #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:460 #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:597 msgid "Mouse battery low" msgstr "La batariá de la mirga es febla" #. TRANSLATORS: tell user more details #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:463 #, c-format msgid "Wireless mouse is low in power (%.0f%%)" msgstr "La poténcia de la mirga sens fial es febla (%.0f %%)" #. TRANSLATORS: keyboard is getting a little low #. TRANSLATORS: the keyboard battery is very low #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:467 #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:605 msgid "Keyboard battery low" msgstr "La batariá del clavièr es febla" #. TRANSLATORS: tell user more details #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:470 #, c-format msgid "Wireless keyboard is low in power (%.0f%%)" msgstr "La poténcia del clavièr sens fial es febla (%.0f %%)" #. TRANSLATORS: PDA is getting a little low #. TRANSLATORS: the PDA battery is very low #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:474 #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:614 msgid "PDA battery low" msgstr "La batariá de l'assistent personal es febla" #. TRANSLATORS: tell user more details #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:477 #, c-format msgid "PDA is low in power (%.0f%%)" msgstr "La poténcia de l'assistent personal es febla (%.0f %%)" #. TRANSLATORS: cell phone (mobile) is getting a little low #. TRANSLATORS: the cell battery is very low #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:481 #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:624 #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:633 msgid "Cell phone battery low" msgstr "La batariá del telefonet es febla" #. TRANSLATORS: tell user more details #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:484 #, c-format msgid "Cell phone is low in power (%.0f%%)" msgstr "La poténcia del telefonet es febla (%.0f %%)" #. TRANSLATORS: media player, e.g. mp3 is getting a little low #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:488 msgid "Media player battery low" msgstr "La batariá del lector multimèdia es febla" #. TRANSLATORS: tell user more details #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:491 #, c-format msgid "Media player is low in power (%.0f%%)" msgstr "La poténcia del lector multimèdia es febla (%.0f %%)" #. TRANSLATORS: graphics tablet, e.g. wacom is getting a little low #. TRANSLATORS: the cell battery is very low #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:495 #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:642 msgid "Tablet battery low" msgstr "La batariá de la tableta es febla" #. TRANSLATORS: tell user more details #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:498 #, c-format msgid "Tablet is low in power (%.0f%%)" msgstr "La poténcia de la tableta es febla (%.0f %%)" #. TRANSLATORS: computer, e.g. ipad is getting a little low #. TRANSLATORS: the cell battery is very low #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:502 #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:651 msgid "Attached computer battery low" msgstr "La batariá de l'ordenador es febla" #. TRANSLATORS: tell user more details #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:505 #, c-format msgid "Attached computer is low in power (%.0f%%)" msgstr "La poténcia de l'ordenador es febla (%.0f %%)" #. TRANSLATORS: this is the sound description #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:529 msgid "Battery is low" msgstr "Lo nivèl de la batariá es feble" #. TRANSLATORS: laptop battery critically low, and only have one kind of battery #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:561 msgid "Battery critically low" msgstr "Nivèl de batariá fòrça bas" #. TRANSLATORS: laptop battery critically low, and we have more than one type of battery #. TRANSLATORS: laptop battery is really, really, low #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:564 #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:714 msgid "Laptop battery critically low" msgstr "Lo nivèl de la batariá del portable es fòrça feble" #. TRANSLATORS: tell the use to insert the plug, as we're not going to do anything #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:1435 msgid "Plug in your AC adapter to avoid losing data." msgstr "Brancatz vòstre adaptador de sector per evitar de pèrdre de donadas." #. TRANSLATORS: give the user a ultimatum #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:1439 #, c-format msgid "Computer will suspend very soon unless it is plugged in." msgstr "" "L'ordenador se va metre en velha dins pauc de temps s'es pas brancat." #. TRANSLATORS: give the user a ultimatum #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:573 #, c-format msgid "Computer will hibernate very soon unless it is plugged in." msgstr "" "L'ordenador se va metre en ivernacion dins pauc de temps s'es pas brancat." #. TRANSLATORS: give the user a ultimatum #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:577 #, c-format msgid "Computer will shutdown very soon unless it is plugged in." msgstr "L'ordenador se va atudar dins pauc de temps s'es pas brancat." #. TRANSLATORS: the UPS is very low #. TRANSLATORS: UPS is really, really, low #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:585 #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:739 msgid "UPS critically low" msgstr "Lo nivèl de l'ondulador es critic" #. TRANSLATORS: give the user a ultimatum #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:591 #, c-format msgid "" "Approximately %s of remaining UPS power (%.0f%%). Restore AC power to your " "computer to avoid losing data." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: the device is just going to stop working #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:600 #, c-format msgid "" "Wireless mouse is very low in power (%.0f%%). This device will soon stop " "functioning if not charged." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: the device is just going to stop working #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:608 #, c-format msgid "" "Wireless keyboard is very low in power (%.0f%%). This device will soon stop " "functioning if not charged." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: the device is just going to stop working #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:617 #, c-format msgid "" "PDA is very low in power (%.0f%%). This device will soon stop functioning if " "not charged." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: the device is just going to stop working #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:627 #, c-format msgid "" "Cell phone is very low in power (%.0f%%). This device will soon stop " "functioning if not charged." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: the device is just going to stop working #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:636 #, c-format msgid "" "Media player is very low in power (%.0f%%). This device will soon stop " "functioning if not charged." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: the device is just going to stop working #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:645 #, c-format msgid "" "Tablet is very low in power (%.0f%%). This device will soon stop functioning " "if not charged." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: the device is just going to stop working #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:654 #, c-format msgid "" "Attached computer is very low in power (%.0f%%). The device will soon " "shutdown if not charged." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: computer will shutdown without saving data #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:1605 msgid "" "The battery is below the critical level and this computer will power-" "off when the battery becomes completely empty." msgstr "" "La batariá es en dejós de son nivèl critic ; l'ordenador se va atudar " "quand la batariá serà completament descargada." #. TRANSLATORS: computer will suspend #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:1611 msgid "" "The battery is below the critical level and this computer is about to " "suspend.\n" "NOTE: A small amount of power is required to keep your computer in a " "suspended state." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: computer will hibernate #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:722 msgid "" "The battery is below the critical level and this computer is about to " "hibernate." msgstr "" "La batariá es en dejós de son nivèl critic ; l'ordenador va ivernar." #. TRANSLATORS: computer will just shutdown #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:727 msgid "" "The battery is below the critical level and this computer is about to " "shutdown." msgstr "" "La batariá es en dejós de son nivèl critic ; l'ordenador se va atudar." #. TRANSLATORS: computer will shutdown without saving data #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:1643 msgid "" "UPS is below the critical level and this computer will power-off when " "the UPS becomes completely empty." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: computer will hibernate #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:747 msgid "" "UPS is below the critical level and this computer is about to hibernate." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: computer will just shutdown #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:752 msgid "" "UPS is below the critical level and this computer is about to shutdown." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: this is the sound description #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:1280 msgid "Lid has been opened" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: this is the sound description #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:1318 msgid "Lid has been closed" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:2068 msgid "Automatic logout" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:2068 msgid "You will soon log out because of inactivity." msgstr "" #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:2073 msgid "Automatic suspend" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:2073 #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:2078 msgid "Computer will suspend very soon because of inactivity." msgstr "" #: ../plugins/power/gsd-power-manager.c:2078 msgid "Automatic hibernation" msgstr "" #. SECURITY: #. - A normal active user on the local machine does not need permission #. to change the backlight brightness. #. #: ../plugins/power/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.policy.in.in.h:5 msgid "Modify the laptop brightness" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/power/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.power.policy.in.in.h:6 msgid "Authentication is required to modify the laptop brightness" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/power/power.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "Power plugin" msgstr "" #. Translators: We are configuring new printer #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-printer.c:890 msgid "Configuring new printer" msgstr "Configuracion de l'imprimenta novèla" #. Translators: Just wait #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-printer.c:892 msgid "Please wait..." msgstr "Esperatz..." #. Translators: We have no driver installed for this printer #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-printer.c:919 msgid "Missing printer driver" msgstr "Pilòt d'imprimenta mancant" #. Translators: We have no driver installed for the device #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-printer.c:928 #, c-format msgid "No printer driver for %s." msgstr "Pas cap de pilòt d'imprimenta per « %s »." #. Translators: We have no driver installed for this printer #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-printer.c:933 msgid "No driver for this printer." msgstr "Pas cap de pilòt per aquesta imprimenta." #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-printer.c:1031 #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:274 #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:716 #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:806 #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:849 msgid "Printers" msgstr "Imprimentas" #. Translators: The printer is low on toner (same as in system-config-printer) #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:380 msgid "Toner low" msgstr "Nivèl de toner feble" #. Translators: The printer has no toner left (same as in system-config-printer) #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:382 msgid "Toner empty" msgstr "Toner void" #. Translators: The printer is in the process of connecting to a shared network output device (same as in system-config-printer) #. N_("Not connected?"), #. Translators: One or more covers on the printer are open (same as in system-config-printer) #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:386 msgid "Cover open" msgstr "Capòt dobèrt" #. Translators: A filter or backend is not installed (same as in system-config-printer) #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:388 msgid "Printer configuration error" msgstr "Error de configuracion de l'imprimenta" #. Translators: One or more doors on the printer are open (same as in system-config-printer) #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:390 msgid "Door open" msgstr "Pòrta dobèrta" #. Translators: "marker" is one color bin of the printer #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:392 msgid "Marker supply low" msgstr "" #. Translators: "marker" is one color bin of the printer #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:394 msgid "Out of a marker supply" msgstr "" #. Translators: At least one input tray is low on media (same as in system-config-printer) #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:396 msgid "Paper low" msgstr "Pas gaire de papièr" #. Translators: At least one input tray is empty (same as in system-config-printer) #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:398 msgid "Out of paper" msgstr "Pas pus de papièr" #. Translators: The printer is offline (same as in system-config-printer) #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:400 msgid "Printer off-line" msgstr "Imprimenta desconnectada" #. Translators: The printer has detected an error (same as in system-config-printer) #. Translators: This is a title of an error notification for a printer #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:402 #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:792 msgid "Printer error" msgstr "Error d'impression" #. Translators: The printer is low on toner (same as in system-config-printer) #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:406 #, c-format msgid "Printer '%s' is low on toner." msgstr "Lo toner de l'imprimenta « %s » es gaireben void." #. Translators: The printer has no toner left (same as in system-config-printer) #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:408 #, c-format msgid "Printer '%s' has no toner left." msgstr "Lo toner de l'imprimenta « %s » es void." #. Translators: The printer is in the process of connecting to a shared network output device (same as in system-config-printer) #. N_("Printer '%s' may not be connected."), #. Translators: One or more covers on the printer are open (same as in system-config-printer) #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:412 #, c-format msgid "The cover is open on printer '%s'." msgstr "Lo capòt de l'imprimenta « %s » es dobèrt." #. Translators: A filter or backend is not installed (same as in system-config-printer) #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:414 #, c-format msgid "There is a missing print filter for printer '%s'." msgstr "Manca un filtre d'impression per l'imprimenta « %s »." #. Translators: One or more doors on the printer are open (same as in system-config-printer) #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:417 #, c-format msgid "The door is open on printer '%s'." msgstr "La pòrta de l'imprimenta « %s » es dobèrta." #. Translators: "marker" is one color bin of the printer #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:419 #, c-format msgid "Printer '%s' is low on a marker supply." msgstr "" #. Translators: "marker" is one color bin of the printer #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:421 #, c-format msgid "Printer '%s' is out of a marker supply." msgstr "" #. Translators: At least one input tray is low on media (same as in system-config-printer) #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:423 #, c-format msgid "Printer '%s' is low on paper." msgstr "I a gaireben pas pus de papièr dins l'imprimenta « %s »." #. Translators: At least one input tray is empty (same as in system-config-printer) #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:425 #, c-format msgid "Printer '%s' is out of paper." msgstr "L'imprimenta « %s » a pas pus de papièr." #. Translators: The printer is offline (same as in system-config-printer) #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:427 #, c-format msgid "Printer '%s' is currently off-line." msgstr "L'imprimenta « %s » es desconnectada." #. Translators: The printer has detected an error (same as in system-config-printer) #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:429 #, c-format msgid "There is a problem on printer '%s'." msgstr "I a un problèma amb l'imprimenta « %s »." #. Translators: New printer has been added #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:477 msgid "Printer added" msgstr "L'imprimenta es estada aponduda" #. Translators: A printer has been removed #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:465 msgid "Printer removed" msgstr "" #. Translators: A print job has been stopped #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:482 #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:520 msgid "Printing stopped" msgstr "" #. Translators: "print-job xy" on a printer #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:484 #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:490 #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:496 #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:502 #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:514 #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:522 #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:530 #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:538 #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:546 #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:559 #, c-format msgid "\"%s\" on %s" msgstr "" #. Translators: A print job has been canceled #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:488 #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:528 msgid "Printing canceled" msgstr "" #. Translators: A print job has been aborted #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:494 #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:536 msgid "Printing aborted" msgstr "" #. Translators: A print job has been completed #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:500 #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:544 msgid "Printing completed" msgstr "" #. Translators: A job is printing #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:512 #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:557 msgid "Printing" msgstr "Impression" #. Translators: This is a title of a report notification for a printer #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:786 msgid "Printer report" msgstr "" #. Translators: This is a title of a warning notification for a printer #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:789 msgid "Printer warning" msgstr "" #. Translators: "Printer 'MyPrinterName': 'Description of the report/warning/error from a PPD file'." #: ../plugins/print-notifications/gsd-print-notifications-manager.c:799 #, c-format msgid "Printer '%s': '%s'." msgstr "Imprimenta '%s': '%s'." #. Priority=100 #: ../plugins/print-notifications/print-notifications.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "Print-notifications" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/print-notifications/print-notifications.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:3 msgid "Print-notifications plugin" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/remote-display/remote-display.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:1 msgid "Remote Display" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/remote-display/remote-display.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "Disable animations on remote displays" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/screensaver-proxy/screensaver-proxy.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:1 msgid "Screensaver Proxy" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/screensaver-proxy/screensaver-proxy.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "Proxy FreeDesktop screensaver inhibition to gnome-session" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/smartcard/gsd-smartcard-manager.c:529 msgid "received error or hang up from event source" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/smartcard/gsd-smartcard-manager.c:663 #, c-format msgid "NSS security system could not be initialized" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/smartcard/gsd-smartcard-manager.c:791 #, c-format msgid "no suitable smartcard driver could be found" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/smartcard/gsd-smartcard-manager.c:805 #, c-format msgid "smartcard driver '%s' could not be loaded" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/smartcard/gsd-smartcard-manager.c:877 #, c-format msgid "could not watch for incoming card events - %s" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/smartcard/gsd-smartcard-manager.c:1275 #, c-format msgid "encountered unexpected error while waiting for smartcard events" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/smartcard/smartcard.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:1 msgid "Smartcard" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/smartcard/smartcard.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "Smartcard plugin" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/sound/sound.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:1 msgid "Sound" msgstr "Son" #: ../plugins/sound/sound.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "Sound Sample Cache plugin" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: we need to restart so the new hardware can re-request the firmware #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-firmware.c:250 msgid "" "You will need to restart this computer before the hardware will work " "correctly." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: title of libnotify bubble #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-firmware.c:253 #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-firmware.c:281 #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-firmware.c:309 msgid "Additional software was installed" msgstr "Un logicial suplementari es estat installat" #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-firmware.c:255 #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-firmware.c:283 #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-firmware.c:311 #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-firmware.c:603 #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:360 #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:496 #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:565 #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:626 #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:1261 msgid "Software Updates" msgstr "Mesa a jorn dels logicials" #. TRANSLATORS: we need to remove an replug so the new hardware can re-request the firmware #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-firmware.c:278 msgid "" "You will need to remove and then reinsert the hardware before it will work " "correctly." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: we need to remove an replug so the new hardware can re-request the firmware #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-firmware.c:306 msgid "Your hardware has been set up and is now ready to use." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: we need another package to keep udev quiet #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-firmware.c:587 msgid "" "Additional firmware is required to make hardware in this computer function " "correctly." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: title of libnotify bubble #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-firmware.c:601 msgid "Additional firmware required" msgstr "Un microprograma suplementari es necessari" #. TRANSLATORS: button label #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-firmware.c:608 msgid "Install firmware" msgstr "Installar lo microprograma" #. TRANSLATORS: we should ignore this device and not ask anymore #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-firmware.c:611 msgid "Ignore devices" msgstr "Ignorar los periferics" #. TRANSLATORS: this is when the offline update failed #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:121 msgid "Failed To Update" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: the transaction could not be completed #. * as a previous transaction was unfinished #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:127 msgid "A previous update was unfinished." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: the package manager needed to download #. * something with no network available #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:137 msgid "Network access was required but not available." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: if the package is not signed correctly #. * #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:146 msgid "An update was not signed in the correct way." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: the transaction failed in a way the user #. * probably cannot comprehend. Package management systems #. * really are teh suck. #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:156 msgid "The update could not be completed." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: the user aborted the update manually #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:161 msgid "The update was cancelled." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: the user must have updated manually after #. * the updates were prepared #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:167 msgid "An offline update was requested but no packages required updating." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: we ran out of disk space #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:171 msgid "No space was left on the drive." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: the update process failed in a general #. * way, usually this message will come from source distros #. * like gentoo #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:179 msgid "An update failed to install correctly." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: We didn't handle the error type #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:184 msgid "The offline update failed in an unexpected way." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: these are geeky messages from the #. * package manager no mortal is supposed to understand, #. * but google might know what they mean #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:193 msgid "Detailed errors from the package manager follow:" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: a distro update is available, e.g. Fedora 8 to Fedora 9 #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:355 msgid "Distribution upgrades available" msgstr "Mesas a nivèl disponiblas per aquesta distribucion" #. TRANSLATORS: provides more information about the upgrade #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:370 msgid "More information" msgstr "Mai d'entresenhas" #. TRANSLATORS: title in the libnotify popup #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:478 #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:547 msgid "Update" msgid_plural "Updates" msgstr[0] "Mesa a jorn" msgstr[1] "Mesas a jorn" #. TRANSLATORS: message when there are security updates #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:481 msgid "An important software update is available" msgid_plural "Important software updates are available" msgstr[0] "" msgstr[1] "" #. TRANSLATORS: button: open the update viewer to install updates #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:506 #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:575 msgid "Install updates" msgstr "Installar las mesas a jorn" #. TRANSLATORS: message when there are non-security updates #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:550 msgid "A software update is available." msgid_plural "Software updates are available." msgstr[0] "Una mese a jorn logiciala es disponibla." msgstr[1] "De mesas a jorn logicialas son disponiblas." #. TRANSLATORS: the updates mechanism #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:613 #: ../plugins/updates/updates.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:1 msgid "Updates" msgstr "Mesas a jorn" #. TRANSLATORS: we failed to get the updates multiple times, #. * and now we need to inform the user that something might be wrong #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:617 msgid "Unable to access software updates" msgstr "Impossible d'accedir a las mesas a jorn logicialas" #. TRANSLATORS: try again, this time launching the update viewer #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:620 msgid "Try again" msgstr "Tornar ensajar" #. TRANSLATORS: the reason why we've inhibited it #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:994 msgid "A transaction that cannot be interrupted is running" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: title in the libnotify popup #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:1214 msgid "Software Update Installed" msgid_plural "Software Updates Installed" msgstr[0] "" msgstr[1] "" #. TRANSLATORS: message when we've done offline updates #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:1219 msgid "An important OS update has been installed." msgid_plural "Important OS updates have been installed." msgstr[0] "" msgstr[1] "" #. TRANSLATORS: title in the libnotify popup #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:1242 msgid "Software Updates Failed" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: message when we've not done offline updates #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:1245 msgid "An important OS update failed to be installed." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: button: review the offline update changes #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:1247 msgid "Review" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: button: review the offline update changes #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:1267 msgid "Show details" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: button: clear notification #: ../plugins/updates/gsd-updates-manager.c:1271 msgid "OK" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/updates/updates.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "Updates plugin" msgstr "" #. If no mode is available, we use "left-ring-mode-1" for backward compat #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-device.c:1028 msgid "Left Ring" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-device.c:1039 #, c-format msgid "Left Ring Mode #%d" msgstr "" #. If no mode is available, we use "right-ring-mode-1" for backward compat #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-device.c:1059 msgid "Right Ring" msgstr "Ring drech" #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-device.c:1070 #, c-format msgid "Right Ring Mode #%d" msgstr "Mòde Ring drech numèro %d" #. If no mode is available, we use "left-strip-mode-1" for backward compat #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-device.c:1112 msgid "Left Touchstrip" msgstr "Touchstrip esquèrre" #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-device.c:1123 #, c-format msgid "Left Touchstrip Mode #%d" msgstr "Mòde Touchstrip esquèrre numèro %d" #. If no mode is available, we use "right-strip-mode-1" for backward compat #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-device.c:1143 msgid "Right Touchstrip" msgstr "Touchstrip drech" #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-device.c:1154 #, c-format msgid "Right Touchstrip Mode #%d" msgstr "Mòde Touchstrip drech numèro %d" #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-device.c:1180 #, c-format msgid "Left Touchring Mode Switch" msgstr "Commutator del mòde Touchring esquèrre" #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-device.c:1182 #, c-format msgid "Right Touchring Mode Switch" msgstr "Commutator del mòde Touchring drech" #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-device.c:1185 #, c-format msgid "Left Touchstrip Mode Switch" msgstr "Commutator del mòde Touchstrip esquèrre" #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-device.c:1187 #, c-format msgid "Right Touchstrip Mode Switch" msgstr "Commutator del mòde Touchstrip drech" #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-device.c:1192 #, c-format msgid "Mode Switch #%d" msgstr "Commutator de mòde numèro %d" #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-device.c:1300 #, c-format msgid "Left Button #%d" msgstr "Boton d'esquèrra numèro %d" #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-device.c:1303 #, c-format msgid "Right Button #%d" msgstr "Boton de drecha numèro %d" #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-device.c:1306 #, c-format msgid "Top Button #%d" msgstr "Boton superior numèro %d" #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-device.c:1309 #, c-format msgid "Bottom Button #%d" msgstr "Boton inferior numèro %d" #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-osd-window.c:1073 #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-osd-window.c:1093 #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-osd-window.c:1104 msgctxt "Action type" msgid "None" msgstr "Pas cap" #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-osd-window.c:1078 #, c-format msgctxt "Action type" msgid "Send Keystroke %s" msgstr "Simula la quichada sus la tòca %s" #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-button-editor.c:154 #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-osd-window.c:1096 msgctxt "Action type" msgid "Show On-Screen Help" msgstr "Aficha l'ajuda a l'ecran" #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-button-editor.c:157 #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-osd-window.c:1099 msgctxt "Action type" msgid "Switch Monitor" msgstr "Càmbia d'ecran" #: ../plugins/wacom/gsd-wacom-osd-window.c:1137 #, c-format msgid "Mode %d: %s" msgstr "Mòde %d : %s" #. SECURITY: #. - A normal active user on the local machine does not need permission #. to change the LED setting for a Wacom tablet #. #: ../plugins/wacom/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.wacom.policy.in.in.h:5 msgid "Modify the lit LED for a Wacom tablet" msgstr "Modifica los lums alucat d'una tableta Wacom" #: ../plugins/wacom/org.gnome.settings-daemon.plugins.wacom.policy.in.in.h:6 msgid "Authentication is required to modify the lit LED for a Wacom tablet" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/wacom/wacom.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:1 msgid "Wacom" msgstr "Wacom" #: ../plugins/wacom/wacom.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "Wacom plugin" msgstr "Empeuton Wacom" #: ../plugins/xrandr/gsd-xrandr-manager.c:509 msgid "Could not switch the monitor configuration" msgstr "Impossible de cambiar la configuracion de l'ecran" #: ../plugins/xrandr/gsd-xrandr-manager.c:533 msgid "Could not restore the display's configuration" msgstr "Impossible de restablir la configuracion de l'afichatge" #: ../plugins/xrandr/gsd-xrandr-manager.c:558 msgid "Could not restore the display's configuration from a backup" msgstr "" "Impossible de restablir la configuracion de l'afichatge a partir d'un " "salvament" #: ../plugins/xrandr/gsd-xrandr-manager.c:579 #, c-format msgid "The display will be reset to its previous configuration in %d second" msgid_plural "" "The display will be reset to its previous configuration in %d seconds" msgstr[0] "" "L'afichatge serà reïnicializat a sa configuracion precedenta dins %d segonda" msgstr[1] "" "L'afichatge serà reïnicializat a sa configuracion precedenta dins %d segondas" #: ../plugins/xrandr/gsd-xrandr-manager.c:628 msgid "Does the display look OK?" msgstr "L'afichatge es corrècte ?" #: ../plugins/xrandr/gsd-xrandr-manager.c:635 msgid "_Restore Previous Configuration" msgstr "_Restablir la configuracion precedenta" #: ../plugins/xrandr/gsd-xrandr-manager.c:636 msgid "_Keep This Configuration" msgstr "_Conservar aquesta configuracion" #: ../plugins/xrandr/gsd-xrandr-manager.c:717 msgid "The selected configuration for displays could not be applied" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/xrandr/gsd-xrandr-manager.c:965 #, c-format msgid "Could not refresh the screen information: %s" msgstr "Impossible d'actualizar las informacions de l'ecran : %s" #: ../plugins/xrandr/gsd-xrandr-manager.c:1379 msgid "Trying to switch the monitor configuration anyway." msgstr "" #: ../plugins/xrandr/gsd-xrandr-manager.c:1875 msgid "Could not apply the stored configuration for monitors" msgstr "Impossible d'aplicar la configuracion enregistrada pels ecrans" #: ../plugins/xrandr/xrandr.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:1 msgid "XRandR" msgstr "XRandR" #: ../plugins/xrandr/xrandr.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "Set up screen size and rotation settings" msgstr "" #: ../plugins/xsettings/xsettings.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:1 msgid "X Settings" msgstr "Paramètres X" #: ../plugins/xsettings/xsettings.gnome-settings-plugin.in.h:2 msgid "Manage X Settings" msgstr "Gestion dels paramètres X" language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/LC_MESSAGES/gnome-media-2.0.po0000644000000000000000000006645312743727042021221 0ustar # Translation of oc.po to Occitan # Occitan translation of gnome-media. # Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This file is distributed under the same license as the gnome-media package. # # Yannig Marchegay (Kokoyaya) , 2007. msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: oc\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2012-11-15 03:09+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2013-03-03 12:21+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Cédric VALMARY (Tot en òc) \n" "Language-Team: Occitan \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n > 1;\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2016-07-20 11:32+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 18147)\n" #: ../grecord/gnome-sound-recorder.desktop.in.in.h:1 #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1226 msgid "Sound Recorder" msgstr "Enregistrador de sons" #: ../grecord/gnome-sound-recorder.desktop.in.in.h:2 msgid "Record sound clips" msgstr "Enregistrar d'escandalhatges sonòrs" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:194 #, c-format msgid "" "Could not create the GStreamer %s element.\n" "Please install the '%s' plugin from the '%s' module.\n" "Verify that the installation is correct by running\n" " gst-inspect-0.10 %s\n" "and then restart gnome-sound-recorder." msgstr "" "Impossible de crear l'element GStreamer %s.\n" "Installatz l'empeuton « %s » del modul « %s ».\n" "Verificatz que l'installacion es corrècta en executant\n" " gst-inspect-0.10 %s\n" "e reaviatz puèi gnome-sound-recorder." #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:210 msgid "" "Please verify its settings.\n" "You may be missing the necessary plugins." msgstr "" "Verificatz los paramètres.\n" "Benlèu que los empeutons necessaris son mancants." #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:295 #, c-format msgid "%ld minute" msgid_plural "%ld minutes" msgstr[0] "%ld minuta" msgstr[1] "%ld minutas" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:296 #, c-format msgid "%ld hour" msgid_plural "%ld hours" msgstr[0] "%ld ora" msgstr[1] "%ld oras" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:297 #, c-format msgid "%ld second" msgid_plural "%ld seconds" msgstr[0] "%ld segonda" msgstr[1] "%ld segondas" #. Translators: the format is "X hours, X minutes and X seconds" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:304 #, c-format msgid "%s, %s and %s" msgstr "%s, %s e %s" #. Translators: the format is "X hours and X minutes" #. Translators: the format is "X minutes and X seconds" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:310 ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:318 #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:329 #, c-format msgid "%s and %s" msgstr "%s e %s" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:372 msgid "Open a File" msgstr "Dobrís un fichièr" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:449 #, c-format msgid "" "Unable to load file:\n" "%s" msgstr "" "Impossible de cargar lo fichièr :\n" "%s" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:595 ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1531 #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1800 ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2501 msgid "Ready" msgstr "Prèst" #. Add replace button #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:648 msgid "_Replace" msgstr "_Remplaçar" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:665 #, c-format msgid "" "A file named \"%s\" already exists. \n" "Do you want to replace it with the one you are saving?" msgstr "" "Un fichièr nomenat « %s » existís ja. \n" "Lo volètz remplaçar amb lo qu'enregistratz ?" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:713 #, c-format msgid "Could not save the file \"%s\"" msgstr "Impossible d'enregistrar lo fichièr  « %s »" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:733 msgid "Save file as" msgstr "Enregistrar lo fichièr jos" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:816 #, c-format msgid "%s is not installed in the path." msgstr "%s es pas installat dins lo camin." #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:825 #, c-format msgid "There was an error starting %s: %s" msgstr "Error al moent de l'aviada de %s : %s" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:853 msgid "Save recording before closing?" msgstr "Enregistrar l'enregistrament abans de tampar ?" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:854 msgid "Save recording?" msgstr "Enregistrar l'enregistrament ?" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:858 msgid "Close _without Saving" msgstr "Tampar _sens enregistrar" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:859 msgid "Continue _without Saving" msgstr "Contunhar _sens enregistrar" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:869 msgid "Question" msgstr "Punt d'interrogacion" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:976 #, c-format msgid "%s (Has not been saved)" msgstr "%s (es pas estat enregistrat)" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:992 #, c-format msgid "%s (%llu byte)" msgid_plural "%s (%llu bytes)" msgstr[0] "%s (%llu octet)" msgstr[1] "%s (%llu octet)" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:996 msgid "Unknown size" msgstr "Talha desconeguda" #. Attempts to get length ran out. #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1005 ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1015 #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1031 ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1040 #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1399 #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.c:302 msgid "Unknown" msgstr "Desconegut" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1017 #, c-format msgid "%.1f kHz" msgstr "%.1f kHz" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1025 #, c-format msgid "%.0f kb/s" msgstr "%.0f kb/s" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1028 #, c-format msgid "%.0f kb/s (Estimated)" msgstr "%.0f kb/s (estimat)" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1043 msgid "1 (mono)" msgstr "1 (mono)" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1046 msgid "2 (stereo)" msgstr "2 (esterèo)" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1073 #, c-format msgid "%s Information" msgstr "Entresenhas de %s" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1096 ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2413 msgid "File Information" msgstr "Entresenhas sul fichièr" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1111 msgid "Folder:" msgstr "Dorsièr :" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1117 ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2420 msgid "Filename:" msgstr "Nom del fichièr :" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1123 msgid "File size:" msgstr "Talha del fichièr :" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1132 msgid "Audio Information" msgstr "Informacions àudio" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1147 msgid "File duration:" msgstr "Durada del fichièr :" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1153 msgid "Number of channels:" msgstr "Nombre de canals :" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1159 msgid "Sample rate:" msgstr "Taus d'escandalhatge :" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1165 msgid "Bit rate:" msgstr "Debit :" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1229 msgid "" "A sound recorder for GNOME\n" " gnome-multimedia@gnome.org" msgstr "" "Un enregistrador de sons per GNOME\n" "gnome-multimedia@gnome.org" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1503 msgid "Playing…" msgstr "Lectura…" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1635 msgid "GConf audio output" msgstr "Sortida àudio GConf" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1644 ../gst-mixer/src/misc.c:62 msgid "Playback" msgstr "Lectura" #. Translators: this is the window title, %s is the currently open file's name or Untitled #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1726 ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2574 #, c-format msgid "%s — Sound Recorder" msgstr "%s — Enregistrador de sons" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1746 msgid "Recording…" msgstr "Enregistrament…" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1822 msgid "GConf audio recording" msgstr "Enregistrament àudio GConf" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:1831 msgid "" "Your audio capture settings are invalid. Please correct them with the " "\"Sound Preferences\" under the System Preferences menu." msgstr "" "Vòstres paramètres de captura àudio son pas valids. Corregissètz-los dins " "las preferéncias del son dins lo menú Sistèma - Preferéncias." #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2003 msgid "file output" msgstr "fichièr de sortida" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2021 msgid "level" msgstr "nivèl" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2045 #, c-format msgid "Could not parse the '%s' audio profile. " msgstr "Impossible d'analisar lo perfil àudio « %s ». " #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2062 #, c-format msgid "Could not capture using the '%s' audio profile. " msgstr "" "Impossible d'efectuar la captura en utilizant lo perfil àudio « %s ». " #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2071 #, c-format msgid "Could not write to a file using the '%s' audio profile. " msgstr "" "Impossible d'escriure dins un fichièr en utilizant lo perfil àudio « %s ». " #. File menu. #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2125 msgid "_File" msgstr "_Fichièr" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2127 msgid "Create a new sample" msgstr "Crèa un escandalhatge novèl" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2129 msgid "Open a file" msgstr "Dobrir un fichièr" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2131 msgid "Save the current file" msgstr "Enregistrar lo fichièr actual" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2133 msgid "Save the current file with a different name" msgstr "Enregistra lo fichièr actual jos un autre nom" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2134 msgid "Open Volu_me Control" msgstr "Dobrir lo contrarotlador de _volum" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2135 msgid "Open the audio mixer" msgstr "Dobrir lo mixador àudio" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2137 msgid "Show information about the current file" msgstr "Aficha las informacions a prepaus del fichièr actual" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2139 msgid "Close the current file" msgstr "Tampa lo fichièr actual" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2141 msgid "Quit the program" msgstr "Quita l'aplicacion" #. Control menu #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2144 msgid "_Control" msgstr "_Contraròtle" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2146 msgid "Record sound" msgstr "Enregistrar un son" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2148 msgid "Play sound" msgstr "Legir lo son" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2150 msgid "Stop sound" msgstr "Arrestar lo son" #. Help menu #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2153 msgid "_Help" msgstr "_Ajuda" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2154 msgid "Contents" msgstr "Ensenhador" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2155 msgid "Open the manual" msgstr "Dobrir lo manual" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2157 msgid "About this application" msgstr "A prepaus d'aquesta aplicacion" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2279 msgid "Could not load UI file. The program may not be properly installed." msgstr "" "Impossible de cargar lo fichièr d'interfàcia. Benlèu que lo programa es pas " "installat corrèctament." #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2302 msgid "Open" msgstr "Dobrir" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2304 msgid "Save" msgstr "Enregistrar" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2306 msgid "Save As" msgstr "Enregistrar jos" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2362 msgid "Record from _input:" msgstr "Enregistrar dempuèi l'_entrada :" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2380 msgid "_Record as:" msgstr "Enregistrar _jos :" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2427 msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2441 msgid "Length:" msgstr "Durada :" #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2479 msgid "Level:" msgstr "Nivèl :" #. Translator comment: default trackname is 'untitled', which #. * has as effect that the user cannot save to this file. The #. * 'save' action will open the save-as dialog instead to give #. * a proper filename. See gnome-record.c:94. #: ../grecord/src/gsr-window.c:2690 msgid "Untitled" msgstr "Sens títol" #: ../gst-mixer/gnome-volume-control.desktop.in.in.h:1 #: ../gst-mixer/src/window.c:269 ../gst-mixer/src/window.c:270 msgid "Volume Control" msgstr "Contrarotlador de volum" #: ../gst-mixer/gnome-volume-control.desktop.in.in.h:2 msgid "Change sound volume and sound events" msgstr "Modificar lo volum e d'eveniments sonòrs" #: ../gst-mixer/gnome-volume-control.schemas.in.h:1 msgid "Height of the Window" msgstr "Nautor de la fenèstra" #: ../gst-mixer/gnome-volume-control.schemas.in.h:2 msgid "Height of the window to be displayed." msgstr "Nautor de la fenèstra d'afichar." #: ../gst-mixer/gnome-volume-control.schemas.in.h:3 msgid "Width of the Window" msgstr "Largor de la fenèstra" #: ../gst-mixer/gnome-volume-control.schemas.in.h:4 msgid "Width of the window to be displayed." msgstr "Largor de la fenèstra d'afichar." #: ../gst-mixer/src/element.c:495 msgid "Sound Theme" msgstr "Tèma sonòr" #: ../gst-mixer/src/main.c:39 msgid "Startup page" msgstr "Pagina d'aviada" #: ../gst-mixer/src/main.c:82 #, c-format msgid "Unknown Volume Control %d" msgstr "Contrarotlador de volum desconegut : %d" #: ../gst-mixer/src/main.c:159 msgid "No volume control GStreamer plugins and/or devices found." msgstr "" "Cap d'empeuto, de contraròtle de volum GStreamer e/o periferics pas trobats." #: ../gst-mixer/src/misc.c:64 msgid "Recording" msgstr "Enregistrament" #: ../gst-mixer/src/misc.c:66 msgid "Switches" msgstr "Paramètres" #: ../gst-mixer/src/misc.c:68 msgid "Options" msgstr "Opcions" #. make window look cute #: ../gst-mixer/src/preferences.c:107 msgid "Volume Control Preferences" msgstr "Preferéncias del contrarotlador de volum" #: ../gst-mixer/src/preferences.c:120 msgid "_Select mixers to be visible:" msgstr "_Causir las pistas d'afichar :" #: ../gst-mixer/src/track.c:295 #, c-format msgid "%s:" msgstr "%s :" #. mute button #: ../gst-mixer/src/track.c:339 #, c-format msgid "Mute/Unmute %s" msgstr "Desactivar/Activar lo son per %s" #: ../gst-mixer/src/track.c:356 #, c-format msgid "Track %s: mute" msgstr "Pista %s : sordina" #. only the record button here #: ../gst-mixer/src/track.c:433 #, c-format msgid "Toggle audio recording from %s" msgstr "Activar la captura àudio dempuèi %s" #: ../gst-mixer/src/track.c:449 #, c-format msgid "Track %s: audio recording" msgstr "Pista %s : enregistrament àudio" #: ../gst-mixer/src/track.c:562 #, c-format msgid "%s Option Selection" msgstr "Seleccion d'opcion %s" #: ../gst-mixer/src/volume.c:112 #, c-format msgid "Track %s" msgstr "Pista %s" #: ../gst-mixer/src/volume.c:115 #, c-format msgid "Channel %d of track %s" msgstr "Canal %d de la pista %s" #: ../gst-mixer/src/volume.c:118 #, c-format msgid "Track %s, channel %d" msgstr "Pista %s, canal %d" #: ../gst-mixer/src/volume.c:138 #, c-format msgid "Lock channels for %s together" msgstr "Varrolhar los canals ensembles per %s" #: ../gst-mixer/src/volume.c:156 #, c-format msgid "Track %s: lock channels together" msgstr "Pista %s : varrolhar los canals ensemble" #: ../gst-mixer/src/volume.c:201 msgid "mono" msgstr "mono" #: ../gst-mixer/src/volume.c:203 msgid "left" msgstr "esquèrra" #: ../gst-mixer/src/volume.c:203 msgid "right" msgstr "drecha" #: ../gst-mixer/src/volume.c:206 msgid "front left" msgstr "avant esquèrra" #: ../gst-mixer/src/volume.c:207 msgid "front right" msgstr "avant drech" #: ../gst-mixer/src/volume.c:208 msgid "rear left" msgstr "arrièr esquèrra" #: ../gst-mixer/src/volume.c:209 msgid "rear right" msgstr "arrièr drech" #: ../gst-mixer/src/volume.c:210 msgid "front center" msgstr "avant central" #. Translators: This is the name of a surround sound channel. It #. * stands for "Low-Frequency Effects". If you're not sure that #. * this has an established and different translation in your #. * language, leave it unchanged. #: ../gst-mixer/src/volume.c:215 msgid "LFE" msgstr "Efièches bassa frequéncia (LFE)" #: ../gst-mixer/src/volume.c:216 msgid "side left" msgstr "costat esquèrra" #: ../gst-mixer/src/volume.c:217 msgid "side right" msgstr "costat drech" #: ../gst-mixer/src/volume.c:218 msgid "unknown" msgstr "desconegut" #. Here, we can actually tell people that this #. * is a slider that will change channel X. #: ../gst-mixer/src/volume.c:224 #, c-format msgid "Volume of %s channel on %s" msgstr "Volum del canal %s de %s" #: ../gst-mixer/src/window.c:133 msgid "A GNOME/GStreamer-based volume control application" msgstr "Una aplicacion de mixatge basada sus GNOME/GStreamer" #: ../gst-mixer/src/window.c:136 msgid "translator-credits" msgstr "" "Yannig Marchegay (Kokoyaya) \n" "\n" "Launchpad Contributions:\n" " Cédric VALMARY (Tot en òc) https://launchpad.net/~cvalmary\n" " Yannig MARCHEGAY (Kokoyaya) https://launchpad.net/~yannick-marchegay\n" " Yannig MARCHEGAY (Kokoyaya) https://launchpad.net/~yannig-marchegay" #. change window title #: ../gst-mixer/src/window.c:173 #, c-format msgid "Volume Control: %s" msgstr "Contrarotlador de volum : %s" #: ../gst-mixer/src/window.c:378 msgid "_Device: " msgstr "_Periferic : " #. set tooltips #: ../gst-mixer/src/window.c:417 msgid "Control volume on a different device" msgstr "Contrarotlador de volum sus un periferic diferent" #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.c:205 msgid "None" msgstr "Pas cap" #. Element does not support setting devices #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.c:247 msgid "Unsupported" msgstr "Pas pres en carga" #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.c:269 #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-chooser.c:818 #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:891 #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:995 msgid "Default" msgstr "Per defaut" #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.c:626 msgid "Failure instantiating main window" msgstr "L'instanciacion de la fenèstra principala a fracassat" #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.c:679 msgid "Failed to load UI file; please check your installation." msgstr "" "Lo cargament del fichièr d'interfàcia d'utilizaire a fracassat ; verificatz " "vòstra installacion." #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.desktop.in.in.h:1 #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.ui.h:1 msgid "Multimedia Systems Selector" msgstr "Selector de sistèmas multimèdias" #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.desktop.in.in.h:2 msgid "Configure defaults for GStreamer applications" msgstr "Configurar las valors per defaut per las aplicacions GStreamer" #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.ui.h:2 msgid "Default Output" msgstr "Sortida per defaut" #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.ui.h:3 msgid "_Plugin:" msgstr "E_nsèrt :" #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.ui.h:4 msgid "P_ipeline:" msgstr "P_ipeline :" #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.ui.h:5 msgid "_Test" msgstr "_Tèxt" #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.ui.h:6 msgid "_Device:" msgstr "_Periferic :" #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.ui.h:7 msgid "Default Input" msgstr "Entrada per defaut" #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.ui.h:8 msgid "P_lugin:" msgstr "_Empeuton :" #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.ui.h:9 msgid "Pipeli_ne:" msgstr "Pipe_line :" #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.ui.h:10 msgid "Te_st" msgstr "Tè_st" #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.ui.h:11 msgid "D_evice:" msgstr "P_eriferic :" #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.ui.h:12 msgid "Audio" msgstr "Audio" #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.ui.h:13 msgid "Video" msgstr "Vidèo" #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.ui.h:14 msgid "Testing Pipeline" msgstr "Tèst del pipeline" #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.ui.h:15 msgid "Testing…" msgstr "Tèst…" #: ../gstreamer-properties/gstreamer-properties.ui.h:16 msgid "Click Ok to finish." msgstr "Clicatz sus Validar per acabar." #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:52 #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:90 msgid "Autodetect" msgstr "Deteccion automatica" #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:54 #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:121 msgid "ALSA — Advanced Linux Sound Architecture" msgstr "ALSA — Advanced Linux Sound Architecture" #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:69 msgid "Artsd — ART Sound Daemon" msgstr "Artsd — ART Sound Daemon" #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:71 #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:123 msgid "ESD — Enlightenment Sound Daemon" msgstr "ESD — Enlightenment Sound Daemon" #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:77 #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:130 msgid "OSS — Open Sound System" msgstr "OSS — Open Sound System" #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:79 #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:132 msgid "OSS - Open Sound System Version 4" msgstr "OSS - Open Sound System version 4" #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:81 #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:136 msgid "PulseAudio Sound Server" msgstr "Servidor de son PulseAudio" #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:83 #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:134 msgid "Sun Audio" msgstr "Sun Audio" #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:85 #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:116 #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:144 #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:159 #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-chooser.c:623 #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:705 #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:759 #: ../sound-theme/sound-theme-file-utils.c:292 msgid "Custom" msgstr "Personalizat" # #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:108 msgid "OpenGL" msgstr "OpenGL" #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:110 msgid "SDL — Simple DirectMedia Layer" msgstr "SDL — Simple DirectMedia Layer" #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:112 msgid "X Window System (No Xv)" msgstr "X Window System (sens Xv)" #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:114 msgid "X Window System (X11/XShm/Xv)" msgstr "X Window System (X11/XShm/Xv)" #. Note: using triangle instead of sine for test sound so we #. * can test the vorbis encoder as well (otherwise it'd compress too well) #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:140 msgid "Test Sound" msgstr "Testar lo son" #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:142 msgid "Silence" msgstr "Silenci" #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:149 msgid "MJPEG (e.g. Zoran v4l device)" msgstr "MJPEG (ex. periferic Zoran v4l)" #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:151 msgid "QCAM" msgstr "QCAM" #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:153 msgid "Test Input" msgstr "Tèst d'entrada" #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:155 msgid "Video for Linux (v4l)" msgstr "Vidèo per Linux (v4l)" #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-constants.c:157 msgid "Video for Linux 2 (v4l2)" msgstr "Vidèo per Linux 2 (v4l2)" #: ../gstreamer-properties/pipeline-tests.c:176 #, c-format msgid "Failed to construct test pipeline for '%s'" msgstr "La construccion del pipeline de tèst per « %s » a fracassat" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-chooser.c:321 #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:522 msgid "No sounds" msgstr "Pas de son" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-chooser.c:443 msgid "Built-in" msgstr "Intèrne" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-chooser.c:688 #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-chooser.c:700 #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-chooser.c:712 #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:560 #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:949 msgid "Sound Preferences" msgstr "Preferéncias del son" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-chooser.c:691 #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-chooser.c:702 #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-chooser.c:714 #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:562 #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:951 msgid "Testing event sound" msgstr "Tèst del son d'un eveniment" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-chooser.c:819 msgid "From theme" msgstr "A partir del tèma" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-chooser.c:828 msgid "Name" msgstr "Nom" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-chooser.c:835 msgid "Type" msgstr "Tipe" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-chooser.c:1039 msgid "Sound _theme:" msgstr "_Tèma sonòr :" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-chooser.c:1047 msgid "C_hoose an alert sound:" msgstr "Ca_usissètz un son d'alèrta :" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-chooser.c:1078 msgid "Enable _window and button sounds" msgstr "Acti_var los sons de las fenèstras e botons" #. Bell #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:79 msgctxt "Sound event" msgid "Alert sound" msgstr "Son d'alèrta" #. Windows and buttons #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:81 msgctxt "Sound event" msgid "Windows and Buttons" msgstr "Fenèstras e botons" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:82 msgctxt "Sound event" msgid "Button clicked" msgstr "Clic sus un boton" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:83 msgctxt "Sound event" msgid "Toggle button clicked" msgstr "Clic sus un boton bascuola" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:84 msgctxt "Sound event" msgid "Window maximized" msgstr "Fenèstra maximizada" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:85 msgctxt "Sound event" msgid "Window unmaximized" msgstr "Fenèstra restablida" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:86 msgctxt "Sound event" msgid "Window minimised" msgstr "Fenèstra reducha" #. Desktop #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:88 msgctxt "Sound event" msgid "Desktop" msgstr "Burèu" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:89 msgctxt "Sound event" msgid "Login" msgstr "Se connectar" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:90 msgctxt "Sound event" msgid "Logout" msgstr "Se desconnectar" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:91 msgctxt "Sound event" msgid "New e-mail" msgstr "Corrièl novèl" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:92 msgctxt "Sound event" msgid "Empty trash" msgstr "Voidar l'escobilhièr" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:93 msgctxt "Sound event" msgid "Long action completed (download, CD burning, etc.)" msgstr "Fin d'una longa accion (telecargament, gravadura de CD, etc.)" #. Alerts? #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:95 msgctxt "Sound event" msgid "Alerts" msgstr "Alèrtas" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:96 msgctxt "Sound event" msgid "Information or question" msgstr "Informacion o question" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:97 msgctxt "Sound event" msgid "Warning" msgstr "Avertiment" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:98 msgctxt "Sound event" msgid "Error" msgstr "Error" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:99 msgctxt "Sound event" msgid "Battery warning" msgstr "Avertiment de la batariá" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:592 msgid "Select Sound File" msgstr "Seleccionar un fichièr son" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:603 msgid "Sound files" msgstr "Fichièrs son" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:895 #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:991 msgid "Disabled" msgstr "Desactivat" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:899 msgid "Custom…" msgstr "Personalizat…" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:1302 msgid "Sound Theme:" msgstr "Tèma sonòr :" #: ../sound-theme/gvc-sound-theme-editor.c:1330 msgid "Enable window and button sounds" msgstr "Activar los sons de las fenèstras e botons" #. Translators: This is the name of an audio file that sounds like the bark of a dog. #. You might want to translate it into the equivalent words of your language. #: ../sound-theme/sounds/gnome-sounds-default.xml.in.in.h:3 msgid "Bark" msgstr "Rusca" #. Translators: This is the name of an audio file that sounds like a water drip. #. You might want to translate it into the equivalent words of your language. #: ../sound-theme/sounds/gnome-sounds-default.xml.in.in.h:6 msgid "Drip" msgstr "Gota" #. Translators: This is the name of an audio file that sounds like tapping glass. #. You might want to translate it into the equivalent words of your language. #: ../sound-theme/sounds/gnome-sounds-default.xml.in.in.h:9 msgid "Glass" msgstr "Veire" #. Translators: This is the name of an audio file that sounds sort of like a submarine sonar ping. #. You might want to translate it into the equivalent words of your language. #: ../sound-theme/sounds/gnome-sounds-default.xml.in.in.h:12 msgid "Sonar" msgstr "Sonar" language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/LC_MESSAGES/gnome-power-manager.po0000644000000000000000000005153212743727042022401 0ustar # Translation of oc.po to Occitan # Occitan translation of gnome-power-manager. # Copyright (C) 2005-2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This file is distributed under the same license as the gnome-power-manager package. # # Yannig Marchegay (Kokoyaya) , 2006-2008. msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: oc\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-02-17 13:18+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2013-07-06 14:20+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Cédric VALMARY (Tot en òc) \n" "Language-Team: Occitan \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n > 1;\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2016-07-20 12:43+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 18147)\n" "Language: oc\n" #: ../data/org.gnome.power-manager.gschema.xml.h:1 msgid "Whether we should show the history data points" msgstr "Indica se los punts de donadas de l'istoric an d'èsser afichats" #: ../data/org.gnome.power-manager.gschema.xml.h:2 msgid "" "Whether we should show the history data points in the statistics window." msgstr "" "Indica se los punts de donadas de l'istoric an d'èsser afichats dins la " "fenèstra de las estatisticas." #: ../data/org.gnome.power-manager.gschema.xml.h:3 msgid "Whether we should smooth the history data" msgstr "Indica se las donadas de l'istoric an d'èsser lissadas" #: ../data/org.gnome.power-manager.gschema.xml.h:4 msgid "Whether we should smooth the history data in the graph." msgstr "Indica se las donadas de l'istoric an d'èsser lissadas sul grafic" #: ../data/org.gnome.power-manager.gschema.xml.h:5 msgid "The default graph type to show for history" msgstr "Lo tipe de grafic per defaut d'afichar per l'istoric" #: ../data/org.gnome.power-manager.gschema.xml.h:6 msgid "The default graph type to show in the history window." msgstr "Lo tipe de grafic per defaut d'afichar dins la fenèstra de l'istoric" #: ../data/org.gnome.power-manager.gschema.xml.h:7 msgid "The maximum time displayed for history" msgstr "Durada maximala afichada sus l'istoric" #: ../data/org.gnome.power-manager.gschema.xml.h:8 msgid "" "The maximum duration of time displayed on the x-axis of the history graph." msgstr "" "Durada maximala afichada sus l'axe de las abscissas del grafic de l'istoric." #: ../data/org.gnome.power-manager.gschema.xml.h:9 msgid "Whether we should show the stats data points" msgstr "Indica se los punts de las estatisticas an d'èsser afichats" #: ../data/org.gnome.power-manager.gschema.xml.h:10 msgid "" "Whether we should show the stats data points in the statistics window." msgstr "" "Indica se los punts de las estatisticas an d'èsser afichats dins la fenèstra " "de las estatisticas." #: ../data/org.gnome.power-manager.gschema.xml.h:11 msgid "Whether we should smooth the stats data" msgstr "Indica se las donadas de las estatisticas an d'èsser lissadasa" #: ../data/org.gnome.power-manager.gschema.xml.h:12 msgid "Whether we should smooth the stats data in the graph." msgstr "" "Indica se las donadas de las estatisticas an d'èsser lissadas sul grafic" #: ../data/org.gnome.power-manager.gschema.xml.h:13 msgid "The default graph type to show for stats" msgstr "Lo tipe de grafic per defaut d'afichar per las estatisticas" #: ../data/org.gnome.power-manager.gschema.xml.h:14 msgid "The default graph type to show in the stats window." msgstr "" "Lo tipe de grafic per defaut d'afichar dins la fenèstra de las estatisticas" #: ../data/org.gnome.power-manager.gschema.xml.h:15 msgid "The index of the page number to show by default" msgstr "L'indici del numèro de pagina d'afichar per defaut" #: ../data/org.gnome.power-manager.gschema.xml.h:16 msgid "" "The index of the page number to show by default which is used to return " "focus to the correct page." msgstr "" "L'indici del numèro de pagina d'afichar per defaut qu'es utilizat per " "redonar lo focus a la bona pagina." #: ../data/org.gnome.power-manager.gschema.xml.h:17 msgid "The ID of the last device selected" msgstr "L'ID del darrièr periferic seleccionat" #: ../data/org.gnome.power-manager.gschema.xml.h:18 msgid "" "The identifier of the last device which is used to return focus to the " "correct device." msgstr "" "L'identificant del darrièr periferic qu'es utilizat per redonar lo focus cap " "al bon periferic." #. TRANSLATORS: shown on the titlebar #. TRANSLATORS: the program name #: ../data/gnome-power-statistics.desktop.in.in.h:1 #: ../src/gpm-statistics.ui.h:1 ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1357 #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1830 msgid "Power Statistics" msgstr "Estatisticas de l'alimentacion" #: ../data/appdata/gnome-power-statistics.appdata.xml.in.h:2 #: ../data/gnome-power-statistics.desktop.in.in.h:2 msgid "Observe power management" msgstr "Susvellha la gestion d'energia" #: ../data/gnome-power-statistics.desktop.in.in.h:3 msgid "battery;consumption;charge;" msgstr "batariá;consum;carga;" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.ui.h:2 ../src/gpm-statistics.c:472 msgid "Details" msgstr "Detalhs" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.ui.h:3 msgid "Graph type:" msgstr "Tipe de grafic :" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.ui.h:4 msgid "Data length:" msgstr "Longor de las donadas :" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.ui.h:5 msgid "There is no data to display." msgstr "I a pas de donadas d'afichar." #: ../src/gpm-statistics.ui.h:6 msgid "Use smoothed line" msgstr "Lissar la corba" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.ui.h:7 msgid "Show data points" msgstr "Afichar los punts de donadas" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.ui.h:8 msgid "History" msgstr "Istoric" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.ui.h:9 msgid "Statistics" msgstr "Estatisticas" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.ui.h:10 msgid "Processor wakeups per second:" msgstr "Nombre de revelhs del processor per segonda :" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.ui.h:11 msgid "0" msgstr "0" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.ui.h:12 ../src/gpm-statistics.c:458 msgid "Wakeups" msgstr "Revelhs" #. Translators: This is %i days #: ../src/gpm-graph-widget.c:432 #, c-format msgid "%id" msgstr "%i j" #. Translators: This is %i days %02i hours #: ../src/gpm-graph-widget.c:435 #, c-format msgid "%id%02ih" msgstr "%i j %02i h" #. Translators: This is %i hours #: ../src/gpm-graph-widget.c:440 #, c-format msgid "%ih" msgstr "%i o" #. Translators: This is %i hours %02i minutes #: ../src/gpm-graph-widget.c:443 #, c-format msgid "%ih%02im" msgstr "%i h %02i m" #. Translators: This is %2i minutes #: ../src/gpm-graph-widget.c:448 #, c-format msgid "%2im" msgstr "%2i m" #. Translators: This is %2i minutes %02i seconds #: ../src/gpm-graph-widget.c:451 #, c-format msgid "%2im%02i" msgstr "%2i m %02i" #. Translators: This is %2i seconds #: ../src/gpm-graph-widget.c:455 #, c-format msgid "%2is" msgstr "%2is" #. Translators: This is %i Percentage #: ../src/gpm-graph-widget.c:459 #, c-format msgid "%i%%" msgstr "%i %%" #. Translators: This is %.1f Watts #: ../src/gpm-graph-widget.c:462 #, c-format msgid "%.1fW" msgstr "%.1f W" #. Translators: This is %.1f Volts #: ../src/gpm-graph-widget.c:467 #, c-format msgid "%.1fV" msgstr "%.1f V" #. TRANSLATORS: the rate of discharge for the device #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:82 ../src/gpm-statistics.c:729 msgid "Rate" msgstr "Taus" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:83 msgid "Charge" msgstr "Carga" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:84 ../src/gpm-statistics.c:743 msgid "Time to full" msgstr "Durada de la carga" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:85 ../src/gpm-statistics.c:748 msgid "Time to empty" msgstr "Durada de la descarga" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:92 msgid "10 minutes" msgstr "10 minutas" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:93 msgid "2 hours" msgstr "2 oras" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:94 msgid "6 hours" msgstr "6 oras" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:95 msgid "1 day" msgstr "1 jorn" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:96 msgid "1 week" msgstr "1 setmana" #. TRANSLATORS: what we've observed about the device #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:105 msgid "Charge profile" msgstr "Perfil de carga" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:106 msgid "Discharge profile" msgstr "Perfil de descarga" #. TRANSLATORS: how accurately we can predict the time remaining of the battery #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:108 msgid "Charge accuracy" msgstr "Precision de la carga" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:109 msgid "Discharge accuracy" msgstr "Precision de la descarga" #. TRANSLATORS: system power cord #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:247 msgid "AC adapter" msgid_plural "AC adapters" msgstr[0] "Adaptador sector" msgstr[1] "Adaptadors sector" #. TRANSLATORS: laptop primary battery #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:251 msgid "Laptop battery" msgid_plural "Laptop batteries" msgstr[0] "Batariá de l'ordenador" msgstr[1] "Batariás de l'ordenador" #. TRANSLATORS: battery-backed AC power source #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:255 msgid "UPS" msgid_plural "UPSs" msgstr[0] "Ondulador" msgstr[1] "Onduladors" #. TRANSLATORS: a monitor is a device to measure voltage and current #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:259 msgid "Monitor" msgid_plural "Monitors" msgstr[0] "Ecran" msgstr[1] "Ecrans" #. TRANSLATORS: wireless mice with internal batteries #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:263 msgid "Mouse" msgid_plural "Mice" msgstr[0] "Mirga" msgstr[1] "Mirgas" #. TRANSLATORS: wireless keyboard with internal battery #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:267 msgid "Keyboard" msgid_plural "Keyboards" msgstr[0] "Clavièr" msgstr[1] "Clavièrs" #. TRANSLATORS: portable device #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:271 msgid "PDA" msgid_plural "PDAs" msgstr[0] "Assistent personal" msgstr[1] "Assistents personals" #. TRANSLATORS: cell phone (mobile...) #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:275 msgid "Cell phone" msgid_plural "Cell phones" msgstr[0] "Telefonet" msgstr[1] "Telefonets" #. TRANSLATORS: media player, mp3 etc #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:280 msgid "Media player" msgid_plural "Media players" msgstr[0] "Lector multimèdia" msgstr[1] "Lectors multimèdia" #. TRANSLATORS: tablet device #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:284 msgid "Tablet" msgid_plural "Tablets" msgstr[0] "Tableta" msgstr[1] "Tabletas" #. TRANSLATORS: tablet device #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:288 msgid "Computer" msgid_plural "Computers" msgstr[0] "Ordenador" msgstr[1] "Ordenadors" #. TRANSLATORS: battery technology #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:308 msgid "Lithium Ion" msgstr "Liti-ion" #. TRANSLATORS: battery technology #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:312 msgid "Lithium Polymer" msgstr "Liti polimèr" #. TRANSLATORS: battery technology #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:316 msgid "Lithium Iron Phosphate" msgstr "Liti fosfat de fèrre" #. TRANSLATORS: battery technology #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:320 msgid "Lead acid" msgstr "Batariá al plomb" #. TRANSLATORS: battery technology #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:324 msgid "Nickel Cadmium" msgstr "Niquèl Cadmi" #. TRANSLATORS: battery technology #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:328 msgid "Nickel metal hydride" msgstr "Niquèl metal idrur" #. TRANSLATORS: battery technology #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:332 msgid "Unknown technology" msgstr "Tecnologia desconeguda" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:352 msgid "Charging" msgstr "en carga" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:356 msgid "Discharging" msgstr "en descarga" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:360 msgid "Empty" msgstr "Void" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:364 msgid "Charged" msgstr "Cargat" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:368 msgid "Waiting to charge" msgstr "En espèra de carga" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:372 msgid "Waiting to discharge" msgstr "En espèra de descarga" #. TRANSLATORS: battery state #. TRANSLATORS: this is when the stats time is not known #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:376 ../src/gpm-statistics.c:550 msgid "Unknown" msgstr "Desconegut" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:396 msgid "Attribute" msgstr "Atribut" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:403 msgid "Value" msgstr "Valor" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:420 msgid "Image" msgstr "Imatge" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:426 msgid "Description" msgstr "Descripcion" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:445 ../src/gpm-statistics.c:668 msgid "Type" msgstr "Tipe" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:451 msgid "ID" msgstr "Identificant (ID)" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:465 msgid "Command" msgstr "Comanda" #. TRANSLATORS: this is a time value, usually to show on a graph #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:554 #, c-format msgid "%.0f second" msgid_plural "%.0f seconds" msgstr[0] "%.0f segonda" msgstr[1] "%.0f segondas" #. TRANSLATORS: this is a time value, usually to show on a graph #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:559 #, c-format msgid "%.1f minute" msgid_plural "%.1f minutes" msgstr[0] "%.1f minuta" msgstr[1] "%.1f minutas" #. TRANSLATORS: this is a time value, usually to show on a graph #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:564 #, c-format msgid "%.1f hour" msgid_plural "%.1f hours" msgstr[0] "%.1f ora" msgstr[1] "%.1f oras" #. TRANSLATORS: this is a time value, usually to show on a graph #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:568 #, c-format msgid "%.1f day" msgid_plural "%.1f days" msgstr[0] "%.1f jorn" msgstr[1] "%.1f jorns" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:577 msgid "Yes" msgstr "Òc" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:577 msgid "No" msgstr "Non" #. TRANSLATORS: the device ID of the current device, e.g. "battery0" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:666 msgid "Device" msgstr "Periferic" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:670 msgid "Vendor" msgstr "Vendeire" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:672 msgid "Model" msgstr "Modèl" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:674 msgid "Serial number" msgstr "Numèro de seria" #. TRANSLATORS: a boolean attribute that means if the device is supplying the #. * main power for the computer. For instance, an AC adapter or laptop battery #. * would be TRUE, but a mobile phone or mouse taking power is FALSE #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:679 msgid "Supply" msgstr "Alimentacion" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:682 #, c-format msgid "%d second" msgid_plural "%d seconds" msgstr[0] "%d segonda" msgstr[1] "%d segondas" #. TRANSLATORS: when the device was last updated with new data. It's #. * usually a few seconds when a device is discharging or charging. #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:686 msgid "Refreshed" msgstr "Actualizat" #. TRANSLATORS: Present is whether the device is currently attached #. * to the computer, as some devices (e.g. laptop batteries) can #. * be removed, but still observed as devices on the system #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:696 msgid "Present" msgstr "Present(a)" #. TRANSLATORS: If the device can be recharged, e.g. lithium #. * batteries rather than alkaline ones #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:703 msgid "Rechargeable" msgstr "Recargable" #. TRANSLATORS: The state of the device, e.g. "Changing" or "Fully charged" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:709 msgid "State" msgstr "Estat" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:713 msgid "Energy" msgstr "Energia" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:716 msgid "Energy when empty" msgstr "Energia a void" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:719 msgid "Energy when full" msgstr "Energia a plena carga" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:722 msgid "Energy (design)" msgstr "Energia (teorica)" #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:736 msgid "Voltage" msgstr "Tension" #. TRANSLATORS: the amount of charge the cell contains #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:758 msgid "Percentage" msgstr "Percentatge" #. TRANSLATORS: the capacity of the device, which is basically a measure #. * of how full it can get, relative to the design capacity #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:765 msgid "Capacity" msgstr "Capacitat" #. TRANSLATORS: the type of battery, e.g. lithium or nikel metal hydroxide #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:770 msgid "Technology" msgstr "Tecnologia" #. TRANSLATORS: this is when the device is plugged in, typically #. * only shown for the ac adaptor device #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:775 msgid "Online" msgstr "En linha" #. TRANSLATORS: the command line was not provided #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1098 msgid "No data" msgstr "Pas de donada" #. TRANSLATORS: kernel module, usually a device driver #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1105 ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1110 msgid "Kernel module" msgstr "Modul del nucli" #. TRANSLATORS: kernel housekeeping #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1115 msgid "Kernel core" msgstr "Nucli central" #. TRANSLATORS: interrupt between processors #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1120 msgid "Interprocessor interrupt" msgstr "Interrupcion entre processors" #. TRANSLATORS: unknown interrupt #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1125 msgid "Interrupt" msgstr "Interrupcion" #. TRANSLATORS: the keyboard and mouse device event #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1171 msgid "PS/2 keyboard/mouse/touchpad" msgstr "Clavièr/mirga/pavat tactil PS/2" #. TRANSLATORS: ACPI, the Intel power standard on laptops and desktops #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1174 msgid "ACPI" msgstr "ACPI" #. TRANSLATORS: serial ATA is a new style of hard disk interface #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1177 msgid "Serial ATA" msgstr "ATA seria" #. TRANSLATORS: this is the old-style ATA interface #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1180 msgid "ATA host controller" msgstr "Contrarolador d'òste ATA" #. TRANSLATORS: 802.11 wireless adaptor #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1183 msgid "Intel wireless adaptor" msgstr "Adaptator sens fial Intel" #. TRANSLATORS: a timer is something that fires periodically. #. * The parameter is a process name, e.g. "firefox-bin". #. * This is shown when the timer wakes up. #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1190 ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1195 #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1200 ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1205 #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1210 #, c-format msgid "Timer %s" msgstr "Prètfach periodic %s" #. TRANSLATORS: the parameter is the name of task that's woken up from sleeping. #. * This is shown when the task wakes up. #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1214 #, c-format msgid "Sleep %s" msgstr "Prètzfach endormit %s" #. TRANSLATORS: this is the name of a new realtime task. #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1217 #, c-format msgid "New task %s" msgstr "Prètzfach novèl %s" #. TRANSLATORS: this is the name of a task that's woken to check state. #. * This is shown when the task wakes up. #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1221 #, c-format msgid "Wait %s" msgstr "Prètzfach en espèra %s" #. TRANSLATORS: this is the name of a work queue. #. * A work queue is a list of work that has to be done. #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1225 ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1229 #, c-format msgid "Work queue %s" msgstr "Fila d'espèra %s" #. TRANSLATORS: this is when the networking subsystem clears out old entries #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1232 #, c-format msgid "Network route flush %s" msgstr "Voidatge de las rotas de ret %s" #. TRANSLATORS: this is the name of an activity on the USB bus #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1235 #, c-format msgid "USB activity %s" msgstr "Activitat USB %s" #. TRANSLATORS: we've timed out of an aligned timer, with the name #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1238 #, c-format msgid "Wakeup %s" msgstr "Despèrtament de %s" #. TRANSLATORS: interupts on the system required for basic operation #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1241 msgid "Local interrupts" msgstr "Interrupcions localas" #. TRANSLATORS: interrupts when a task gets moved from one core to another #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1244 msgid "Rescheduling interrupts" msgstr "Interrupcions de reordonançament" #. TRANSLATORS: shown on the titlebar #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1347 msgid "Device Information" msgstr "Informacions sul periferic" #. TRANSLATORS: shown on the titlebar #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1349 msgid "Device History" msgstr "Istoric del periferic" #. TRANSLATORS: shown on the titlebar #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1351 msgid "Device Profile" msgstr "Perfil del periferic" #. TRANSLATORS: shown on the titlebar #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1353 msgid "Processor Wakeups" msgstr "Despèrtaments del processor" #. TRANSLATORS: this is the X axis on the graph #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1557 ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1563 #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1569 ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1575 msgid "Time elapsed" msgstr "Temps" #. TRANSLATORS: this is the Y axis on the graph #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1559 msgid "Power" msgstr "Poténcia" #. TRANSLATORS: this is the Y axis on the graph for the whole battery device #. TRANSLATORS: this is the X axis on the graph for the whole battery device #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1565 ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1607 #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1613 ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1619 #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1625 msgid "Cell charge" msgstr "Carga de la batariá" #. TRANSLATORS: this is the Y axis on the graph #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1571 ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1577 msgid "Predicted time" msgstr "Durada prevista" #. TRANSLATORS: this is the Y axis on the graph #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1609 ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1621 msgid "Correction factor" msgstr "Factor de correccion" #. TRANSLATORS: this is the Y axis on the graph #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1615 ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1627 msgid "Prediction accuracy" msgstr "Precision de la prediccion" #. TRANSLATORS: show verbose debugging #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1818 msgid "Show extra debugging information" msgstr "Aficha las informacions de desbugatge" #. TRANSLATORS: show a device by default #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:1821 msgid "Select this device at startup" msgstr "Seleccionar aqueste periferic a l'aviada" #. TRANSLATORS: the icon for the CPU #: ../src/gpm-statistics.c:2072 msgid "Processor" msgstr "Processor" language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/LC_MESSAGES/gstreamer-0.10.po0000644000000000000000000013020212743727042021067 0ustar # Occitan (post 1500) translation for gstreamer0.10 # Copyright (c) (c) 2006 Canonical Ltd, and Rosetta Contributors 2006 # This file is distributed under the same license as the gstreamer0.10 package. # FIRST AUTHOR , 2006. # msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: gstreamer0.10\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: FULL NAME \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2012-02-20 21:32+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2013-05-20 14:13+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Cédric VALMARY (Tot en òc) \n" "Language-Team: Occitan (post 1500) \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n > 1;\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2016-07-20 12:53+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 18147)\n" #: gst/gst.c:310 msgid "Print the GStreamer version" msgstr "Mostrar la version de GStreamer" #: gst/gst.c:312 msgid "Make all warnings fatal" msgstr "Fa los avertiments coma critics" #: gst/gst.c:316 msgid "Print available debug categories and exit" msgstr "Aficha las categorias de desbugatge disponibles e quita" #: gst/gst.c:320 msgid "" "Default debug level from 1 (only error) to 5 (anything) or 0 for no output" msgstr "" "Nivèl de desbugatge per defaut, de 1 (errors unicament) a 5 (tot) o 0 per " "pas cap de sortida" #: gst/gst.c:322 msgid "LEVEL" msgstr "NIVÈL" #: gst/gst.c:324 msgid "" "Comma-separated list of category_name:level pairs to set specific levels for " "the individual categories. Example: GST_AUTOPLUG:5,GST_ELEMENT_*:3" msgstr "" "Lista separada per de virgulas de paras nom_categoria:nivèl que definís de " "nivèls especifics per cada categoria.\r\n" "Exemple : GST_AUTOPLUG:5,GST_ELEMENT_*:3" #: gst/gst.c:327 msgid "LIST" msgstr "TIÈRA" #: gst/gst.c:329 msgid "Disable colored debugging output" msgstr "Desactiva la color dins la sortida de desbugatge" #: gst/gst.c:332 msgid "Disable debugging" msgstr "Desactiva lo desbugatge" #: gst/gst.c:336 msgid "Enable verbose plugin loading diagnostics" msgstr "Activa lo diagnostic detalhat del cargament dels empeutons" #: gst/gst.c:340 msgid "Colon-separated paths containing plugins" msgstr "Camins que contenon d'empeutons, separats per de dos-punts" #: gst/gst.c:340 msgid "PATHS" msgstr "CAMINS" #: gst/gst.c:343 msgid "" "Comma-separated list of plugins to preload in addition to the list stored in " "environment variable GST_PLUGIN_PATH" msgstr "" "Lista d'empeutons de precargar, separada per de virgulas, amai de la lista " "contenguda dins la variabla d'environament GST_PLUGIN_PATH" #: gst/gst.c:345 msgid "PLUGINS" msgstr "AJUSTONS" #: gst/gst.c:348 msgid "Disable trapping of segmentation faults during plugin loading" msgstr "" "Desactiva la deteccion de las errors de segmentacion pendent lo cargament " "dels empeutons" #: gst/gst.c:353 msgid "Disable updating the registry" msgstr "Desactiva la mesa a jorn del registre" #: gst/gst.c:358 msgid "Disable spawning a helper process while scanning the registry" msgstr "" "Desactiva l'aviada d'un processus annèxe al moment de l'analisi del registre" #: gst/gst.c:389 msgid "GStreamer Options" msgstr "Opcions de GStreamer" #: gst/gst.c:390 msgid "Show GStreamer Options" msgstr "Mostrar las opcions de GStreamer" #: gst/gst.c:957 msgid "Unknown option" msgstr "Opcion desconeguda" #: gst/gsterror.c:148 msgid "GStreamer encountered a general core library error." msgstr "GStreamer a rencontrat una error generala de bibliotèca centrala." #: gst/gsterror.c:150 gst/gsterror.c:192 gst/gsterror.c:216 gst/gsterror.c:256 msgid "" "GStreamer developers were too lazy to assign an error code to this error." msgstr "" "Los desvolopaires de GStreamer son tròp fenhants per associar un còde " "d'error a aquesta error." #: gst/gsterror.c:153 msgid "Internal GStreamer error: code not implemented." msgstr "Error intèrna de GStreamer : còde pas implementat." #: gst/gsterror.c:155 msgid "" "GStreamer error: state change failed and some element failed to post a " "proper error message with the reason for the failure." msgstr "" "Error GStreamer : fracàs de cambiament d'estat e un element a pas pogut " "senhalar un messatge d'error corrècte que conten la rason del fracàs." #: gst/gsterror.c:158 msgid "Internal GStreamer error: pad problem." msgstr "Error intèrna de GStreamer : problèma de connector." #: gst/gsterror.c:160 msgid "Internal GStreamer error: thread problem." msgstr "Error intèrna de GStreamer : problèma de thread." #: gst/gsterror.c:162 msgid "Internal GStreamer error: negotiation problem." msgstr "Error intèrna de GStreamer : problèma de negociacion." #: gst/gsterror.c:164 msgid "Internal GStreamer error: event problem." msgstr "Error intèrna de GStreamer : problèma d'eveniment." #: gst/gsterror.c:166 msgid "Internal GStreamer error: seek problem." msgstr "Error intèrna de GStreamer : problèma de recèrca." #: gst/gsterror.c:168 msgid "Internal GStreamer error: caps problem." msgstr "Error intèrna de GStreamer : problèma de caps." #: gst/gsterror.c:170 msgid "Internal GStreamer error: tag problem." msgstr "Error intèrna de GStreamer : problèma de balisa." #: gst/gsterror.c:172 msgid "Your GStreamer installation is missing a plug-in." msgstr "Manca un empeuton dins vòstra installacion de GStreamer." #: gst/gsterror.c:174 msgid "Internal GStreamer error: clock problem." msgstr "Error intèrna de GStreamer : problèma de relòtge." #: gst/gsterror.c:176 msgid "" "This application is trying to use GStreamer functionality that has been " "disabled." msgstr "" "Aquesta aplicacion ensaja d'utilizar una foncionalitat de GStreamer qu'es " "estada desactivada." #: gst/gsterror.c:190 msgid "GStreamer encountered a general supporting library error." msgstr "" "GStreamer a rencontrat una error generala de bibliotèca de presa en carga." #: gst/gsterror.c:195 msgid "Could not initialize supporting library." msgstr "Impossible d'inicializar la bibliotèca de presa en carga." #: gst/gsterror.c:197 msgid "Could not close supporting library." msgstr "Impossible de tampar la bibliotèca de presa en carga." #: gst/gsterror.c:199 msgid "Could not configure supporting library." msgstr "Impossible de configurar la bibliotèca de presa en carga." #: gst/gsterror.c:201 msgid "Encoding error." msgstr "Error d'encodatge." #: gst/gsterror.c:214 msgid "GStreamer encountered a general resource error." msgstr "GStreamer a rencontrat una error generala de ressorsa." #: gst/gsterror.c:219 msgid "Resource not found." msgstr "Ressorsa introbabla." #: gst/gsterror.c:221 msgid "Resource busy or not available." msgstr "Ressorsa ocupada o indisponibla." #: gst/gsterror.c:223 msgid "Could not open resource for reading." msgstr "Impossible de dobrir la ressorsa en lectura." #: gst/gsterror.c:225 msgid "Could not open resource for writing." msgstr "Impossible de dobrir la ressorsa en escritura." #: gst/gsterror.c:227 msgid "Could not open resource for reading and writing." msgstr "Impossible de dobrir la ressorsa en lectura e escritura." #: gst/gsterror.c:229 msgid "Could not close resource." msgstr "Impossible de tampar la ressorsa." #: gst/gsterror.c:231 msgid "Could not read from resource." msgstr "Impossible de legir a partir de la ressorsa." #: gst/gsterror.c:233 msgid "Could not write to resource." msgstr "Impossible d'escriure dins la ressorsa." #: gst/gsterror.c:235 msgid "Could not perform seek on resource." msgstr "Impossible de recercar dins la ressorsa." #: gst/gsterror.c:237 msgid "Could not synchronize on resource." msgstr "Impossible de sincronizar dins la ressorsa." #: gst/gsterror.c:239 msgid "Could not get/set settings from/on resource." msgstr "Impossible d'obténer o de definir un paramètre de ressorsa." #: gst/gsterror.c:241 msgid "No space left on the resource." msgstr "Espaci liure insufisent dins la ressorsa." #: gst/gsterror.c:254 msgid "GStreamer encountered a general stream error." msgstr "GStreamer a rencontrat una error generala de flux." #: gst/gsterror.c:259 msgid "Element doesn't implement handling of this stream. Please file a bug." msgstr "L'element gerís pas aqueste flux. Senhalatz lo problèma." #: gst/gsterror.c:262 msgid "Could not determine type of stream." msgstr "Impossible de determinar lo tipe del flux." #: gst/gsterror.c:264 msgid "The stream is of a different type than handled by this element." msgstr "Lo tipe del flux es diferent de lo qu'es gerit per aqueste element." #: gst/gsterror.c:267 msgid "There is no codec present that can handle the stream's type." msgstr "Cap de codec pas disponible per gerir lo tipe del flux." #: gst/gsterror.c:269 msgid "Could not decode stream." msgstr "Impossible de desencodar lo flux." #: gst/gsterror.c:271 msgid "Could not encode stream." msgstr "Impossible d'encodar lo flux." #: gst/gsterror.c:273 msgid "Could not demultiplex stream." msgstr "Impossible de demultiplexar lo flux." #: gst/gsterror.c:275 msgid "Could not multiplex stream." msgstr "Impossible de multiplexar lo flux." #: gst/gsterror.c:277 msgid "The stream is in the wrong format." msgstr "Lo format del flux es pas corrècte." #: gst/gsterror.c:279 msgid "The stream is encrypted and decryption is not supported." msgstr "Lo flux es chifrat e lo deschiframent es pas pres en carga." #: gst/gsterror.c:281 msgid "" "The stream is encrypted and can't be decrypted because no suitable key has " "been supplied." msgstr "" "Lo flux es chifrat e pòt pas èsser deschifrat perque cap de clau valabla es " "pas estada provesida." #: gst/gsterror.c:321 #, c-format msgid "No error message for domain %s." msgstr "Pas cap de messatge d'error pel domeni %s." #: gst/gsterror.c:329 #, c-format msgid "No standard error message for domain %s and code %d." msgstr "Pas cap de messatge d'error estandard pel domeni %s e lo còde %d." #: gst/gstpipeline.c:535 msgid "Selected clock cannot be used in pipeline." msgstr "Lo relòtge seleccionat pòt pas èsser utilizar dins lo pipeline." #: gst/gsttaglist.c:114 msgid "title" msgstr "titol" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:114 msgid "commonly used title" msgstr "títol utilizat de costuma" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:117 msgid "title sortname" msgstr "títol per la triada" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:117 msgid "commonly used title for sorting purposes" msgstr "títol utilizat de costuma dins una tòca de triada" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:120 msgid "artist" msgstr "artista" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:121 msgid "person(s) responsible for the recording" msgstr "persona(s) responsabla(s) de l'enregistrament" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:125 msgid "artist sortname" msgstr "nom d'artista per la triada" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:126 msgid "person(s) responsible for the recording for sorting purposes" msgstr "" "persona(s) responsabla(s) de l'enregistrament, dins una tòca de triada" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:129 msgid "album" msgstr "album" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:130 msgid "album containing this data" msgstr "album que conten aquelas donadas" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:133 msgid "album sortname" msgstr "nom d'album per la triada" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:134 msgid "album containing this data for sorting purposes" msgstr "album que conten aquelas donadas, dins una tòca de triada" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:137 msgid "album artist" msgstr "artista de l'album" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:138 msgid "The artist of the entire album, as it should be displayed" msgstr "L'artista de l'album entièr, tal coma se deuriá afichar" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:142 msgid "album artist sortname" msgstr "nom d'artista de l'album per la triada" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:143 msgid "The artist of the entire album, as it should be sorted" msgstr "L'artista de l'album entièr, adaptat per la triada" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:145 msgid "date" msgstr "data" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:145 msgid "date the data was created (as a GDate structure)" msgstr "data de creacion de las donadas (jos la forma d'estructura GDate)" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:147 msgid "datetime" msgstr "data e ora" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:148 msgid "date and time the data was created (as a GstDateTime structure)" msgstr "" "data e ora de creacion de las donadas (jos la forma d'estructura GstDateTime)" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:152 msgid "genre" msgstr "genre" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:153 msgid "genre this data belongs to" msgstr "genre al qual aquelas donadas apartenon" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:156 msgid "comment" msgstr "comentari" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:157 msgid "free text commenting the data" msgstr "tèxte liure que descriu las donadas" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:160 msgid "extended comment" msgstr "comentari espandit" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:161 msgid "free text commenting the data in key=value or key[en]=comment form" msgstr "" "tèxte liure que descriu las donadas jos la forma clau=valor o " "clau[en]=comentari" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:165 msgid "track number" msgstr "numèro de la pista" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:166 msgid "track number inside a collection" msgstr "numèro de pista al dintre d'una colleccion" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:169 msgid "track count" msgstr "nombre de pistas" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:170 msgid "count of tracks inside collection this track belongs to" msgstr "" "nombre de pistas dins la colleccion qu'aquelas donadas ne fan partida" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:174 msgid "disc number" msgstr "numèro del disc" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:175 msgid "disc number inside a collection" msgstr "numèro de disc al dintre d'una colleccion" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:178 msgid "disc count" msgstr "nombre de disques" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:179 msgid "count of discs inside collection this disc belongs to" msgstr "" "nombre de disques dins la colleccion qu'aquelas donadas ne fan partida" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:183 msgid "location" msgstr "emplaçament" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:183 msgid "" "Origin of media as a URI (location, where the original of the file or stream " "is hosted)" msgstr "" "Origina del mèdia jos la forma d'URI (emplaçament de l'albergament d'origina " "del fichièr o del flux)" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:188 msgid "homepage" msgstr "site Web" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:189 msgid "Homepage for this media (i.e. artist or movie homepage)" msgstr "Site Web d'aqueste mèdia (per ex. site de l'artista o del filme)" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:192 msgid "description" msgstr "descripcion" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:192 msgid "short text describing the content of the data" msgstr "tèxte cort que descriu lo contengut de las donadas" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:195 msgid "version" msgstr "version" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:195 msgid "version of this data" msgstr "version d'aquestas donadas" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:196 msgid "ISRC" msgstr "ISRC" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:198 msgid "International Standard Recording Code - see http://www.ifpi.org/isrc/" msgstr "" "International Standard Recording Code - veire http://www.ifpi.org/isrc/" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:202 msgid "organization" msgstr "organizacion" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:204 msgid "copyright" msgstr "Contributors" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:204 msgid "copyright notice of the data" msgstr "informacion sul copyright de las donadas" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:206 msgid "copyright uri" msgstr "URI del copyright" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:207 msgid "URI to the copyright notice of the data" msgstr "URI cap a l'informacion de copyright de las donadas" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:209 msgid "encoded by" msgstr "encodat per" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:209 msgid "name of the encoding person or organization" msgstr "nom de la persona o de l'organizacion qu'a efectuat l'encodatge" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:213 msgid "contact" msgstr "contacte" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:213 msgid "contact information" msgstr "informacions sul contacte" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:215 msgid "license" msgstr "licéncia" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:215 msgid "license of data" msgstr "licéncia de las donadas" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:217 msgid "license uri" msgstr "URI de la licéncia" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:218 msgid "URI to the license of the data" msgstr "URI cap a la licéncia de las donadas" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:221 msgid "performer" msgstr "interprèt" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:222 msgid "person(s) performing" msgstr "persona(s) qu'interprèta(n)" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:225 msgid "composer" msgstr "compositor" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:226 msgid "person(s) who composed the recording" msgstr "persona(s) qu'a(n) compausat l'enregistrament" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:230 msgid "duration" msgstr "durada" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:230 msgid "length in GStreamer time units (nanoseconds)" msgstr "longor en unitat de temps GStreamer (nanosegondas)" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:233 msgid "codec" msgstr "codèc" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:234 msgid "codec the data is stored in" msgstr "codec d'emmagazinatge de las donadas" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:237 msgid "video codec" msgstr "codec vidèo" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:237 msgid "codec the video data is stored in" msgstr "codec d'emmagazinatge de las donadas vidèo" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:240 msgid "audio codec" msgstr "codec àudio" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:240 msgid "codec the audio data is stored in" msgstr "codec d'emmagazinatge de las donadas àudio" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:243 msgid "subtitle codec" msgstr "codec dels sostítols" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:243 msgid "codec the subtitle data is stored in" msgstr "codec d'emmagazinatge dels sostítols" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:245 msgid "container format" msgstr "format del contenidor" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:246 msgid "container format the data is stored in" msgstr "format del contenidor dins lo qual son emmagazinadas las donadas" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:248 msgid "bitrate" msgstr "debit" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:248 msgid "exact or average bitrate in bits/s" msgstr "debit exacte o mejan en bits per segonda" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:250 msgid "nominal bitrate" msgstr "debit nominal" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:250 msgid "nominal bitrate in bits/s" msgstr "debit nominal en bits per segonda" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:252 msgid "minimum bitrate" msgstr "debit minimum" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:252 msgid "minimum bitrate in bits/s" msgstr "debit minimum en bits per segonda" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:254 msgid "maximum bitrate" msgstr "debit maximum" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:254 msgid "maximum bitrate in bits/s" msgstr "debit maximum en bits per segonda" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:257 msgid "encoder" msgstr "encodador" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:257 msgid "encoder used to encode this stream" msgstr "encodador utilizat per l'encodatge del flux" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:260 msgid "encoder version" msgstr "version de l'encodador" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:261 msgid "version of the encoder used to encode this stream" msgstr "version de l'encodador utilizat per l'encodatge del flux" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:263 msgid "serial" msgstr "numèro de seria" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:263 msgid "serial number of track" msgstr "numèro de seria de la pista" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:265 msgid "replaygain track gain" msgstr "ganh de pista replaygain" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:265 msgid "track gain in db" msgstr "ganh de la pista en decibèls" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:267 msgid "replaygain track peak" msgstr "crèsta de pista replaygain" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:267 msgid "peak of the track" msgstr "crèsta de la pista" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:269 msgid "replaygain album gain" msgstr "ganh d'album replaygain" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:269 msgid "album gain in db" msgstr "ganh de l'album en decibèls" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:271 msgid "replaygain album peak" msgstr "crèsta d'album replaygain" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:271 msgid "peak of the album" msgstr "crèsta de l'album" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:273 msgid "replaygain reference level" msgstr "nivèl de referéncia replaygain" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:274 msgid "reference level of track and album gain values" msgstr "nivèl de referéncia de las valors de ganh de pista e d'album" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:276 msgid "language code" msgstr "còde de lenga" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:277 msgid "language code for this stream, conforming to ISO-639-1" msgstr "" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:279 msgid "image" msgstr "imatge" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:279 msgid "image related to this stream" msgstr "imatge ligat a aqueste flux" #. TRANSLATORS: 'preview image' = image that shows a preview of the full image #: gst/gsttaglist.c:282 msgid "preview image" msgstr "imatge d'apercebut" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:282 msgid "preview image related to this stream" msgstr "imatge d'apercebut ligat a aqueste flux" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:284 msgid "attachment" msgstr "fichièr junt" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:284 msgid "file attached to this stream" msgstr "fichièr junt a aqueste flux" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:287 msgid "beats per minute" msgstr "pulsacions per minuta" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:287 msgid "number of beats per minute in audio" msgstr "nombre de pulsacions per minuta de la pista àudio" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:289 msgid "keywords" msgstr "mots claus" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:289 msgid "comma separated keywords describing the content" msgstr "mots claus que descrivon lo contengut, separats per de virgulas" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:292 msgid "geo location name" msgstr "nom d'emplaçament geografic" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:292 msgid "" "human readable descriptive location of where the media has been recorded or " "produced" msgstr "" "descripcion intelligibla de l'endrech ont lo mèdia es estat enregistrat o " "produch" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:295 msgid "geo location latitude" msgstr "latitud de l'emplaçament" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:296 msgid "" "geo latitude location of where the media has been recorded or produced in " "degrees according to WGS84 (zero at the equator, negative values for " "southern latitudes)" msgstr "" "latitud de l'endrech geografic ont lo mèdia es estat enregistrat o produch, " "en grases, conformadament a WGS84 (zèro a l'eqüator, valors negativas dins " "l'emisfèri sud)" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:300 msgid "geo location longitude" msgstr "longitud de l'emplaçament" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:301 msgid "" "geo longitude location of where the media has been recorded or produced in " "degrees according to WGS84 (zero at the prime meridian in Greenwich/UK, " "negative values for western longitudes)" msgstr "" "longitud de l'endrech geografic ont lo mèdia es estat enregistrat o produch, " "en grases, conformadament a WGS84 (zèro a l'eqüator, valors negativas per " "las longituds cap a l'oèst)" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:305 msgid "geo location elevation" msgstr "altitud de l'emplaçament" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:306 msgid "" "geo elevation of where the media has been recorded or produced in meters " "according to WGS84 (zero is average sea level)" msgstr "" "altitud de l'endrech geografic ont lo mèdia es estat enregistrat o produch, " "en mètres, conformadament a WGS84 (zèro al nivèl mejan de la mar)" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:309 msgid "geo location country" msgstr "país de l'emplaçament" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:310 msgid "country (english name) where the media has been recorded or produced" msgstr "país (nom anglés) ont lo mèdia es estat enregistrat o produch" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:313 msgid "geo location city" msgstr "vila de l'emplaçament" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:314 msgid "city (english name) where the media has been recorded or produced" msgstr "vila (nom anglés) ont lo mèdia es estat enregistrat o produsit" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:317 msgid "geo location sublocation" msgstr "zòna locala de l'emplaçament" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:318 msgid "" "a location whithin a city where the media has been produced or created (e.g. " "the neighborhood)" msgstr "" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:321 msgid "geo location horizontal error" msgstr "error orizontala de l'emplaçament" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:322 msgid "expected error of the horizontal positioning measures (in meters)" msgstr "error probabla de las mesuras de posicion orizontala (en mètres)" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:325 msgid "geo location movement speed" msgstr "velocitat de desplaçament geolocalizat" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:326 msgid "" "movement speed of the capturing device while performing the capture in m/s" msgstr "" "velocitat del movement (en m/s) del periferic de captura pendent la captura" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:329 msgid "geo location movement direction" msgstr "direccion del desplaçament geolocalizat" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:330 msgid "" "indicates the movement direction of the device performing the capture of a " "media. It is represented as degrees in floating point representation, 0 " "means the geographic north, and increases clockwise" msgstr "" "indica la direccion del desplaçament del periferic qu'efectua la captura " "d'un mèdia. Es indicada en grases, per un nombre amb de virgulas. 0 indica " "lo nòrd geografic e lo nombre aumenta dins lo sens orari" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:335 msgid "geo location capture direction" msgstr "direccion de la captura geolocalizada" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:336 msgid "" "indicates the direction the device is pointing to when capturing a media. " "It is represented as degrees in floating point representation, 0 means the " "geographic north, and increases clockwise" msgstr "" "indica la direccion del periferic al moment de la captura d'un mèdia. Es " "indicada en grases, per un nombre amb de virgulas. 0 indica lo nòrd " "geografic e lo nombre aumenta dins lo sens orari" #. TRANSLATORS: 'show name' = 'TV/radio/podcast show name' here #: gst/gsttaglist.c:342 msgid "show name" msgstr "nom d'emission" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:343 msgid "Name of the tv/podcast/series show the media is from" msgstr "" "Nom de l'emission TV, del podcast o de la seria d'ont proven lo mèdia" #. TRANSLATORS: 'show sortname' = 'TV/radio/podcast show name as used for sorting purposes' here #: gst/gsttaglist.c:347 msgid "show sortname" msgstr "nom d'emission per la triada" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:348 msgid "" "Name of the tv/podcast/series show the media is from, for sorting purposes" msgstr "" "Nom de l'emission TV, del podcast o de la seria d'ont proven lo mèdia, dins " "l'optica de la triada" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:351 msgid "episode number" msgstr "numèro d'episòdi" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:352 msgid "The episode number in the season the media is part of" msgstr "Lo numèro d'episòdi de la seria que ne fa partida lo mèdia" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:355 msgid "season number" msgstr "numèro de sason" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:356 msgid "The season number of the show the media is part of" msgstr "Lo numèro de la sason de l'emission que ne fa partida lo mèdia" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:359 msgid "lyrics" msgstr "paraulas" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:359 msgid "The lyrics of the media, commonly used for songs" msgstr "Las paraulas del mèdia, utilizat sustot per las cançons" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:362 msgid "composer sortname" msgstr "nom del compositor per le triada" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:363 msgid "person(s) who composed the recording, for sorting purposes" msgstr "" "persona(s) qu'a(n) compausat l'enregistrament, dins una tòca de triada" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:365 msgid "grouping" msgstr "regropament" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:366 msgid "" "Groups related media that spans multiple tracks, like the different pieces " "of a concerto. It is a higher level than a track, but lower than an album" msgstr "" "Unitat de grop per de mèdias que contenon mantuna pista, coma los diferents " "tròces d'un concerto. De mai naut nivèl que la pista, mas de mai bas nivèl " "que l'album" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:370 msgid "user rating" msgstr "evaluacion per l'utilizaire" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:371 msgid "" "Rating attributed by a user. The higher the rank, the more the user likes " "this media" msgstr "" "Nòta atribuida per una persona. Mai la nòta es elevada, mai la persona presa " "aqueste mèdia" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:374 msgid "device manufacturer" msgstr "fabricant del periferic" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:375 msgid "Manufacturer of the device used to create this media" msgstr "Fabricant del periferic utilizat per crear aqueste mèdia" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:377 msgid "device model" msgstr "modèl del periferic" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:378 msgid "Model of the device used to create this media" msgstr "Modèl del periferic utilizat per crear aqueste mèdia" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:380 msgid "application name" msgstr "nom de l'aplicacion" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:380 msgid "Application used to create the media" msgstr "Aplicacion utilizada per crear aqueste mèdia" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:382 msgid "application data" msgstr "donadas aplicativas" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:383 msgid "Arbitrary application data to be serialized into the media" msgstr "Donadas arbitràrias de l'aplicacion de serializar dins lo mèdia" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:385 msgid "image orientation" msgstr "orientacion de l'imatge" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:386 msgid "How the image should be rotated or flipped before display" msgstr "Indica lo biais de pivotar o de revirar l'imatge abans de l'afichar" #: gst/gsttaglist.c:425 msgid ", " msgstr ", " #: gst/gstutils.c:2535 tools/gst-launch.c:433 #, c-format msgid "ERROR: from element %s: %s\n" msgstr "ERROR : de l'element %s : %s\n" #: gst/gstutils.c:2537 tools/gst-launch.c:435 tools/gst-launch.c:738 #, c-format msgid "" "Additional debug info:\n" "%s\n" msgstr "" "Informacion de desbugatge suplementària :\n" "%s\n" #: gst/parse/grammar.y:229 #, c-format msgid "specified empty bin \"%s\", not allowed" msgstr "contenidor « %s » void, pas autorizat" #: gst/parse/grammar.y:238 #, c-format msgid "no bin \"%s\", skipping" msgstr "pas de contenidor « %s », ignorat" #: gst/parse/grammar.y:447 #, c-format msgid "no property \"%s\" in element \"%s\"" msgstr "pas de proprietat « %s » dins l'element « %s »" #: gst/parse/grammar.y:462 #, c-format msgid "could not set property \"%s\" in element \"%s\" to \"%s\"" msgstr "" "impossible de definir la proprietat « %s » de l'element « %s » a « %s »" #: gst/parse/grammar.y:613 #, c-format msgid "could not link %s to %s" msgstr "impossible de connectar %s a %s" #: gst/parse/grammar.y:661 #, c-format msgid "no element \"%s\"" msgstr "pas d'element « %s »" #: gst/parse/grammar.y:713 #, c-format msgid "could not parse caps \"%s\"" msgstr "impossible d'analisar lo caps « %s »" #: gst/parse/grammar.y:735 gst/parse/grammar.y:783 gst/parse/grammar.y:799 #: gst/parse/grammar.y:862 msgid "link without source element" msgstr "ligam sens element font" #: gst/parse/grammar.y:741 gst/parse/grammar.y:780 gst/parse/grammar.y:871 msgid "link without sink element" msgstr "ligam sens element d'entrada (sink)" #: gst/parse/grammar.y:817 #, c-format msgid "no source element for URI \"%s\"" msgstr "pas d'element font per l'URI « %s »" #: gst/parse/grammar.y:827 #, c-format msgid "no element to link URI \"%s\" to" msgstr "pas d'element al qual religar l'URI « %s »" #: gst/parse/grammar.y:835 #, c-format msgid "no sink element for URI \"%s\"" msgstr "pas d'element d'entrada per l'URI « %s »" #: gst/parse/grammar.y:842 #, c-format msgid "could not link sink element for URI \"%s\"" msgstr "impossible de ligar un element d'entrada per l'URI « %s »" #: gst/parse/grammar.y:856 msgid "empty pipeline not allowed" msgstr "pipeline void pas autorizat" #: libs/gst/base/gstbasesrc.c:2256 msgid "Internal clock error." msgstr "Error de relòtge intèrne." #: libs/gst/base/gstbasesrc.c:2624 libs/gst/base/gstbasesrc.c:2634 #: libs/gst/base/gstbasesink.c:4166 plugins/elements/gstqueue.c:1289 #: plugins/elements/gstqueue2.c:2571 msgid "Internal data flow error." msgstr "Error intèrna de flux de donadas." #: libs/gst/base/gstbasesink.c:2874 msgid "A lot of buffers are being dropped." msgstr "Fòrça tampons son eliminats." #: libs/gst/base/gstbasesink.c:3637 msgid "Internal data flow problem." msgstr "Problèma intèrne de flux de donadas." #: libs/gst/base/gstbasesink.c:4156 msgid "Internal data stream error." msgstr "Error intèrna de flux de donadas." #: plugins/elements/gstcapsfilter.c:115 msgid "Filter caps" msgstr "Capacitats de filtratge" #: plugins/elements/gstcapsfilter.c:116 msgid "" "Restrict the possible allowed capabilities (NULL means ANY). Setting this " "property takes a reference to the supplied GstCaps object." msgstr "" "Restrenh las capacitats possiblas autorizadas (NULL significa ANY). La " "definicion d'aquesta proprietat necessita una referéncia a l'objècte GSTCaps " "fourni." #: plugins/elements/gstfilesink.c:427 msgid "No file name specified for writing." msgstr "Cap de nom de fichièr pas indicat per l'escritura." #: plugins/elements/gstfilesink.c:433 #, c-format msgid "Could not open file \"%s\" for writing." msgstr "Impossible de dobrir lo fichièr « %s » en escritura." #: plugins/elements/gstfilesink.c:458 #, c-format msgid "Error closing file \"%s\"." msgstr "Error al moment de la tampadura del fichièr « %s »." #: plugins/elements/gstfilesink.c:607 #, c-format msgid "Error while seeking in file \"%s\"." msgstr "Error de posicionament dins lo fichièr « %s »." #: plugins/elements/gstfilesink.c:614 plugins/elements/gstfilesink.c:676 #, c-format msgid "Error while writing to file \"%s\"." msgstr "Error al moment de l'escritura dins lo fichièr « %s »." #: plugins/elements/gstfilesrc.c:1034 msgid "No file name specified for reading." msgstr "Cap de nom de fichièr pas indicat per la lectura." #: plugins/elements/gstfilesrc.c:1046 plugins/elements/gstqueue2.c:1494 #, c-format msgid "Could not open file \"%s\" for reading." msgstr "Impossible de dobrir lo fichièr « %s » en lectura." #: plugins/elements/gstfilesrc.c:1055 #, c-format msgid "Could not get info on \"%s\"." msgstr "Impossible d'obténer cap d'infos sus « %s »." #: plugins/elements/gstfilesrc.c:1062 #, c-format msgid "\"%s\" is a directory." msgstr "\"%s\" es un repertòri." #: plugins/elements/gstfilesrc.c:1069 #, c-format msgid "File \"%s\" is a socket." msgstr "Lo fichièr « %s » es un connector." #: plugins/elements/gstidentity.c:649 msgid "Failed after iterations as requested." msgstr "Fracàs en seguida de las iteracions demandadas." #: plugins/elements/gstqueue2.c:1480 msgid "No Temp directory specified." msgstr "Cap de repertòri temporari pas indicat." #: plugins/elements/gstqueue2.c:1486 #, c-format msgid "Could not create temp file \"%s\"." msgstr "Impossible de crear lo fichièr temporari « %s »." #: plugins/elements/gstqueue2.c:1860 msgid "Error while writing to download file." msgstr "Error d'escritura dins lo fichièr de telecargament." #: plugins/elements/gsttypefindelement.c:218 msgid "caps" msgstr "capacitats" #: plugins/elements/gsttypefindelement.c:219 msgid "detected capabilities in stream" msgstr "capacitats detectadas dins lo flux" #: plugins/elements/gsttypefindelement.c:222 msgid "minimum" msgstr "minimum" #: plugins/elements/gsttypefindelement.c:227 msgid "maximum" msgstr "maximum" #: plugins/elements/gsttypefindelement.c:232 msgid "force caps" msgstr "forçar las capacitats" #: plugins/elements/gsttypefindelement.c:233 msgid "force caps without doing a typefind" msgstr "fòrça las capacitats sens far cap de recèrca de tipe" #: plugins/elements/gsttypefindelement.c:569 #: plugins/elements/gsttypefindelement.c:954 msgid "Stream contains no data." msgstr "Lo flux conten pas cap de donada." #: tools/gst-inspect.c:273 msgid "Implemented Interfaces:\n" msgstr "Interfàcias implementadas :\n" #: tools/gst-inspect.c:359 msgid "readable" msgstr "accès en lectura" #: tools/gst-inspect.c:368 msgid "writable" msgstr "accès en escritura" #: tools/gst-inspect.c:372 msgid "controllable" msgstr "contrarotlable" #: tools/gst-inspect.c:376 msgid "changeable in NULL, READY, PAUSED or PLAYING state" msgstr "modificable en l'estat NULL, READY, PAUSED o PLAYING" #: tools/gst-inspect.c:378 msgid "changeable only in NULL, READY or PAUSED state" msgstr "modificable unicament en l'estat NULL, READY o PAUSED" #: tools/gst-inspect.c:380 msgid "changeable only in NULL or READY state" msgstr "modificable unicament en l'estat NULL o READY" #: tools/gst-inspect.c:1003 msgid "Blacklisted files:" msgstr "Fichièrs sus lista negra :" #: tools/gst-inspect.c:1015 tools/gst-inspect.c:1108 msgid "Total count: " msgstr "Nombre total : " #: tools/gst-inspect.c:1016 #, c-format msgid "%d blacklisted file" msgid_plural "%d blacklisted files" msgstr[0] "%d fichièr sus lista negra" msgstr[1] "%d fichièrs sus lista negra" #: tools/gst-inspect.c:1109 #, c-format msgid "%d plugin" msgid_plural "%d plugins" msgstr[0] "%d ajuston" msgstr[1] "%d ajustons" #: tools/gst-inspect.c:1112 #, c-format msgid "%d blacklist entry" msgid_plural "%d blacklist entries" msgstr[0] "%d element de lista negra" msgstr[1] "%d elements de lista negra" #: tools/gst-inspect.c:1117 #, c-format msgid "%d feature" msgid_plural "%d features" msgstr[0] "%d foncionalitat" msgstr[1] "%d foncionalitats" #: tools/gst-inspect.c:1537 msgid "Print all elements" msgstr "Aficha totes los elements" #: tools/gst-inspect.c:1539 msgid "Print list of blacklisted files" msgstr "Aficha una lista dels fichièrs sus lista negra" #: tools/gst-inspect.c:1541 msgid "" "Print a machine-parsable list of features the specified plugin or all " "plugins provide.\n" " Useful in connection with external " "automatic plugin installation mechanisms" msgstr "" "Aficha jos la forma maquina una lista de foncionalitats ofèrtas per " "l'empeuton indicat o totes los empeutons.\n" " Utile en ligam amb de mecanismes " "extèrnes d'installacion automatica d'empeutons" #: tools/gst-inspect.c:1546 msgid "List the plugin contents" msgstr "Enumèra lo contengut de l'empeuton" #: tools/gst-inspect.c:1549 msgid "Print supported URI schemes, with the elements that implement them" msgstr "" "Aficha los tipes d'URI preses en carga, amb los elements que los implementan" #: tools/gst-inspect.c:1654 #, c-format msgid "Could not load plugin file: %s\n" msgstr "Impossible de cargar lo fichièr d'empeuton : %s\n" #: tools/gst-inspect.c:1659 #, c-format msgid "No such element or plugin '%s'\n" msgstr "Pas cap d'element o d'empeuton « %s »\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:93 msgid "Usage: gst-xmllaunch [ element.property=value ... ]\n" msgstr "" #: tools/gst-launch.c:102 #, c-format msgid "ERROR: parse of xml file '%s' failed.\n" msgstr "" #: tools/gst-launch.c:108 #, c-format msgid "ERROR: no toplevel pipeline element in file '%s'.\n" msgstr "" #: tools/gst-launch.c:114 msgid "WARNING: only one toplevel element is supported at this time.\n" msgstr "" #: tools/gst-launch.c:125 #, c-format msgid "ERROR: could not parse command line argument %d: %s.\n" msgstr "" #: tools/gst-launch.c:136 #, c-format msgid "WARNING: element named '%s' not found.\n" msgstr "" #: tools/gst-launch.c:363 msgid "Index statistics" msgstr "Estatisticas d'indèx" #: tools/gst-launch.c:642 #, c-format msgid "Got message #%u from element \"%s\" (%s): " msgstr "Messatge n°%u recebut de l'element « %s » (%s) : " #: tools/gst-launch.c:646 #, c-format msgid "Got message #%u from pad \"%s:%s\" (%s): " msgstr "Messatge n°%u recebut del connector « %s:%s » (%s) : " #: tools/gst-launch.c:650 #, c-format msgid "Got message #%u from object \"%s\" (%s): " msgstr "Messatge n°%u recebut de l'objècte « %s » (%s) : " #: tools/gst-launch.c:654 #, c-format msgid "Got message #%u (%s): " msgstr "Messatge n°%u recebut (%s) : " #: tools/gst-launch.c:686 #, c-format msgid "Got EOS from element \"%s\".\n" msgstr "EOS recebut de l'element « %s ».\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:695 #, c-format msgid "FOUND TAG : found by element \"%s\".\n" msgstr "BALISA TROBADA : descobèrta per l'element « %s ».\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:698 #, c-format msgid "FOUND TAG : found by pad \"%s:%s\".\n" msgstr "BALISA TROBADA : descobèrta pel connector « %s:%s ».\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:701 #, c-format msgid "FOUND TAG : found by object \"%s\".\n" msgstr "BALISA TROBADA : descobèrta per l'objècte « %s ».\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:704 msgid "FOUND TAG\n" msgstr "BALISA TROBADA\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:719 #, c-format msgid "" "INFO:\n" "%s\n" msgstr "" "INFO :\n" "%s\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:736 #, c-format msgid "WARNING: from element %s: %s\n" msgstr "AVERTIMENT : de l'element %s : %s\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:766 msgid "Prerolled, waiting for buffering to finish...\n" msgstr "Preparacion acabada, espèra de la fin d'emplenatge del tampon...\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:783 msgid "buffering..." msgstr "mesa en memòria tampon..." #: tools/gst-launch.c:794 msgid "Done buffering, setting pipeline to PLAYING ...\n" msgstr "Memòria tampon plena, definicion del pipeline a PLAYING...\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:802 msgid "Buffering, setting pipeline to PAUSED ...\n" msgstr "Emplenatge del tampon, definicion del pipeline a PAUSED...\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:811 msgid "Redistribute latency...\n" msgstr "Redistribucion de laténcia...\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:822 #, c-format msgid "Setting state to %s as requested by %s...\n" msgstr "Definicion de l'estat a %s coma demandat per %s...\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:838 msgid "Interrupt: Stopping pipeline ...\n" msgstr "Interrupcion : arrèst del pipeline...\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:849 #, c-format msgid "Missing element: %s\n" msgstr "Element mancant : %s\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:931 msgid "Output tags (also known as metadata)" msgstr "Aficha las balisas (tanben conegudas jol nom de metadonadas)" #: tools/gst-launch.c:933 msgid "Output status information and property notifications" msgstr "Aficha d'informacions d'estat e de notificacions de proprietats" #: tools/gst-launch.c:935 msgid "Do not print any progress information" msgstr "Aficha pas cap d'informacions de progression" #: tools/gst-launch.c:937 msgid "Output messages" msgstr "Aficha de messatges" #: tools/gst-launch.c:939 msgid "Do not output status information of TYPE" msgstr "Aficha pas cap d'informacions d'estat de TYPE" #: tools/gst-launch.c:939 msgid "TYPE1,TYPE2,..." msgstr "TIPE1,TIPE2,..." #: tools/gst-launch.c:942 msgid "Save xml representation of pipeline to FILE and exit" msgstr "" #: tools/gst-launch.c:942 msgid "FILE" msgstr "FICHIÈR" #: tools/gst-launch.c:945 msgid "Do not install a fault handler" msgstr "Installa pas cap de gestionari de disfoncionament" #: tools/gst-launch.c:947 msgid "Do not install signal handlers for SIGUSR1 and SIGUSR2" msgstr "" #: tools/gst-launch.c:949 msgid "Print alloc trace (if enabled at compile time)" msgstr "" #: tools/gst-launch.c:951 msgid "Force EOS on sources before shutting the pipeline down" msgstr "Fòrça l'EOS sus las fonts abans de tampar lo pipeline" #: tools/gst-launch.c:953 msgid "Gather and print index statistics" msgstr "Acampa e aficha las estatisticas d'indèx" #: tools/gst-launch.c:1037 #, c-format msgid "ERROR: pipeline could not be constructed: %s.\n" msgstr "ERROR : lo pipeline a pas pogut èsser construch : %s.\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:1041 msgid "ERROR: pipeline could not be constructed.\n" msgstr "ERROR : lo pipeline a pas pogut èsser construch : %s.\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:1045 #, c-format msgid "WARNING: erroneous pipeline: %s\n" msgstr "AVERTIMENT : pipeline erronèu : %s\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:1077 msgid "ERROR: the 'pipeline' element wasn't found.\n" msgstr "ERROR : l'element « pipeline » es introbable.\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:1103 tools/gst-launch.c:1179 msgid "Setting pipeline to PAUSED ...\n" msgstr "Definicion del pipeline a PAUSED...\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:1108 msgid "ERROR: Pipeline doesn't want to pause.\n" msgstr "ERROR : lo pipeline refusa de se metre en pausa.\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:1113 msgid "Pipeline is live and does not need PREROLL ...\n" msgstr "Lo pipeline es actiu e a pas besonh de fasa PREROLL...\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:1117 msgid "Pipeline is PREROLLING ...\n" msgstr "Lo pipeline es en fasa de PREROLL...\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:1120 tools/gst-launch.c:1133 msgid "ERROR: pipeline doesn't want to preroll.\n" msgstr "ERROR : lo pipeline refusa de passar en fasa de preparacion.\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:1126 msgid "Pipeline is PREROLLED ...\n" msgstr "Lo pipeline a acabat la fasa PREROLL...\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:1138 msgid "Setting pipeline to PLAYING ...\n" msgstr "Passatge del pipeline a la fasa PLAYING...\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:1145 msgid "ERROR: pipeline doesn't want to play.\n" msgstr "ERROR : lo pipeline refusa de passar en mòde actiu.\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:1159 msgid "EOS on shutdown enabled -- Forcing EOS on the pipeline\n" msgstr "EOS a la tampadura es activat -- EOS forçat sul pipeline\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:1162 msgid "Waiting for EOS...\n" msgstr "Espèra d'EOS...\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:1167 msgid "EOS received - stopping pipeline...\n" msgstr "EOS recebut - arrèst del pipeline...\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:1169 msgid "An error happened while waiting for EOS\n" msgstr "Una error s'es producha al moment de l'espèra de l'EOS\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:1176 msgid "Execution ended after %" msgstr "L'execucion s'es acabada aprèp %" #: tools/gst-launch.c:1187 msgid "Setting pipeline to READY ...\n" msgstr "Definicion del pipeline a READY (prèst)...\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:1197 msgid "Setting pipeline to NULL ...\n" msgstr "Definicion del pipeline a NULL...\n" #: tools/gst-launch.c:1202 msgid "Freeing pipeline ...\n" msgstr "Liberacion del pipeline...\n" language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/LC_MESSAGES/glib20.po0000644000000000000000000044175312743727042017621 0ustar # Occitan translation of glib. # Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This file is distributed under the same license as the ekiga package. # # # Yannig Marchegay (Kokoyaya) , 2007. msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: oc\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: " "http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=glib&keywords=I18N+L10N&compo" "nent=general\n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-09-22 14:02-0400\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2011-09-07 11:47+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Yannig MARCHEGAY (Kokoyaya) \n" "Language-Team: Occitan \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=n > 1;\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2016-07-20 11:52+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 18147)\n" "Language: oc\n" #: ../gio/gapplication.c:538 msgid "Enter GApplication service mode (use from D-Bus service files)" msgstr "" "Entrar dins lo mòde de servici GApplication (utilizar a partir dels fichièrs " "de servici D-Bus)" #: ../gio/gapplication.c:493 msgid "GApplication options" msgstr "Opcions GApplication" #: ../gio/gapplication.c:493 msgid "Show GApplication options" msgstr "Afichar las opcions GApplication" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:45 ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:46 #: ../gio/gresource-tool.c:488 ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:512 msgid "Print help" msgstr "Afichar l'ajuda" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:47 ../gio/gresource-tool.c:489 #: ../gio/gresource-tool.c:557 msgid "[COMMAND]" msgstr "[COMANDA]" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:49 msgid "Print version" msgstr "Afichar la version" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:50 ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:518 msgid "Print version information and exit" msgstr "Afichar las informacions de version e quitar" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:52 msgid "List applications" msgstr "Listar las aplicacions" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:53 msgid "List the installed D-Bus activatable applications (by .desktop files)" msgstr "" "Afichar la lista de las aplicacions installadas activablas per D-Bus (per " "fichièrs .desktop)" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:55 msgid "Launch an application" msgstr "Aviar una aplicacion" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:56 msgid "Launch the application (with optional files to open)" msgstr "Aviar l'aplicacion (amb d'eventuals fichièrs de dobrir)" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:57 msgid "APPID [FILE...]" msgstr "ID_APP [FICHIÈR...]" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:59 msgid "Activate an action" msgstr "Activar una accion" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:60 msgid "Invoke an action on the application" msgstr "Invocar una accion sus l'aplicacion" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:61 msgid "APPID ACTION [PARAMETER]" msgstr "ID_APP ACCION [PARAMÈTRE]" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:63 msgid "List available actions" msgstr "Afichar las accions disponiblas" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:64 msgid "List static actions for an application (from .desktop file)" msgstr "" "Afichar la lista de las accions estaticas d'una aplicacion (a partir del " "fichièr .desktop)" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:65 ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:71 msgid "APPID" msgstr "ID_APP" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:70 ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:133 #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:90 msgid "COMMAND" msgstr "COMANDA" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:70 msgid "The command to print detailed help for" msgstr "La comanda per la quala l'ajuda detalhada deu èsser affichée" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:71 msgid "Application identifier in D-Bus format (eg: org.example.viewer)" msgstr "Identificant d'aplicacion al format D-Bus (ex. : org.example.viewer)" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:72 ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:592 #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:623 ../gio/gresource-tool.c:495 #: ../gio/gresource-tool.c:561 msgid "FILE" msgstr "FICHIÈR" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:72 msgid "Optional relative or relative filenames, or URIs to open" msgstr "" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:73 msgid "ACTION" msgstr "ACCION" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:73 msgid "The action name to invoke" msgstr "Nom de l'accion d'invocar" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:74 msgid "PARAMETER" msgstr "PARAMÈTRE" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:74 msgid "Optional parameter to the action invocation, in GVariant format" msgstr "" "Paramètre facultatiu per l'invocacion de l'accion, al format GVariant" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:96 ../gio/gresource-tool.c:526 #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:598 #, c-format msgid "" "Unknown command %s\n" "\n" msgstr "" "Comanda desconeguda %s\n" "\n" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:101 msgid "Usage:\n" msgstr "Utilizacion :\n" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:114 ../gio/gresource-tool.c:551 #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:632 msgid "Arguments:\n" msgstr "Paramètres :\n" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:133 msgid "[ARGS...]" msgstr "[PARAMS...]" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:134 #, c-format msgid "Commands:\n" msgstr "Comandas :\n" #. Translators: do not translate 'help', but please translate 'COMMAND'. #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:146 #, c-format msgid "" "Use '%s help COMMAND' to get detailed help.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "Utilizatz « %s help COMANDA » per obténer de l'ajuda detalhada.\n" "\n" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:165 #, c-format msgid "" "%s command requires an application id to directly follow\n" "\n" msgstr "" "La comanda %s exige un identificant d'aplicacion de seguir dirèctament\n" "\n" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:171 #, c-format msgid "invalid application id: '%s'\n" msgstr "identificant d'aplicacion invalid : « %s »\n" #. Translators: %s is replaced with a command name like 'list-actions' #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:182 #, c-format msgid "" "'%s' takes no arguments\n" "\n" msgstr "" "« %s » accèpta pas cap de paramètre\n" "\n" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:266 #, c-format msgid "unable to connect to D-Bus: %s\n" msgstr "impossible de se connectar a D-Bus : %s\n" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:286 #, c-format msgid "error sending %s message to application: %s\n" msgstr "error de mandadís del messatge %s a l'aplicacion : %s\n" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:317 #, c-format msgid "action name must be given after application id\n" msgstr "" "un nom d'accion deu èsser indicat aprèp l'identificant d'aplicacion\n" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:325 #, c-format msgid "" "invalid action name: '%s'\n" "action names must consist of only alphanumerics, '-' and '.'\n" msgstr "" "nom d'accion invalid : « %s »\n" "los noms d'accions pòdon pas conténer que de caractèrs alfanumerics, « - » e " "« . »\n" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:344 #, c-format msgid "error parsing action parameter: %s\n" msgstr "error d'analisi del paramètre d'accion : %s\n" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:356 #, c-format msgid "actions accept a maximum of one parameter\n" msgstr "las accions accèptan pas mai d'un paramètre\n" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:411 #, c-format msgid "list-actions command takes only the application id" msgstr "" "la comanda list-actions accèpta pas que l'identificant de l'aplicacion" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:421 #, c-format msgid "unable to find desktop file for application %s\n" msgstr "impossible de trobar lo fichièr desktop per l'aplicacion %s\n" #: ../gio/gapplication-tool.c:466 #, c-format msgid "" "unrecognised command: %s\n" "\n" msgstr "" "comanda pas reconeguda : %s\n" "\n" #: ../gio/gbufferedinputstream.c:420 ../gio/gbufferedinputstream.c:498 #: ../gio/ginputstream.c:179 ../gio/ginputstream.c:379 #: ../gio/ginputstream.c:617 ../gio/ginputstream.c:1016 #: ../gio/goutputstream.c:203 ../gio/goutputstream.c:834 #: ../gio/gpollableinputstream.c:205 ../gio/gpollableoutputstream.c:206 #, c-format msgid "Too large count value passed to %s" msgstr "La valor de comptage provesida a %s es tròp granda" #: ../gio/gbufferedinputstream.c:891 ../gio/gbufferedoutputstream.c:575 #: ../gio/gdataoutputstream.c:562 msgid "Seek not supported on base stream" msgstr "Lo posicionament es pas pres en carga sul flux de basa" #: ../gio/gbufferedinputstream.c:937 msgid "Cannot truncate GBufferedInputStream" msgstr "Impossible de troncar GBufferedInputStream" #: ../gio/gbufferedinputstream.c:982 ../gio/ginputstream.c:1205 #: ../gio/giostream.c:300 ../gio/goutputstream.c:1658 msgid "Stream is already closed" msgstr "Lo flux es ja tampat" #: ../gio/gbufferedoutputstream.c:612 ../gio/gdataoutputstream.c:592 msgid "Truncate not supported on base stream" msgstr "La troncadura es pas presa en carga sul flux de basa" #: ../gio/gcancellable.c:317 ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:1847 #: ../gio/gdbusprivate.c:1375 ../gio/glocalfile.c:2223 #: ../gio/gsimpleasyncresult.c:870 ../gio/gsimpleasyncresult.c:896 #, c-format msgid "Operation was cancelled" msgstr "L'operacion es estada anullada" #: ../gio/gcharsetconverter.c:260 msgid "Invalid object, not initialized" msgstr "Objècte invalid, non inicializat" #: ../gio/gcharsetconverter.c:281 ../gio/gcharsetconverter.c:309 msgid "Incomplete multibyte sequence in input" msgstr "Sequéncia multi-octet incompleta en entrada" #: ../gio/gcharsetconverter.c:315 ../gio/gcharsetconverter.c:324 msgid "Not enough space in destination" msgstr "Espaci insufisent dins la destinacion" #: ../gio/gcharsetconverter.c:342 ../gio/gdatainputstream.c:848 #: ../gio/gdatainputstream.c:1256 ../glib/gconvert.c:438 ../glib/gconvert.c:845 #: ../glib/giochannel.c:1556 ../glib/giochannel.c:1598 #: ../glib/giochannel.c:2442 ../glib/gutf8.c:853 ../glib/gutf8.c:1306 msgid "Invalid byte sequence in conversion input" msgstr "Sequéncia d'octets incorrècta en entrada del convertidor" #: ../gio/gcharsetconverter.c:347 ../glib/gconvert.c:446 ../glib/gconvert.c:770 #: ../glib/giochannel.c:1563 ../glib/giochannel.c:2454 #, c-format msgid "Error during conversion: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la conversion : %s" #: ../gio/gcharsetconverter.c:444 ../gio/gsocket.c:1078 msgid "Cancellable initialization not supported" msgstr "Initialisation annulable pas presa en carga" #: ../gio/gcharsetconverter.c:454 ../glib/gconvert.c:321 #: ../glib/giochannel.c:1384 #, c-format msgid "Conversion from character set '%s' to '%s' is not supported" msgstr "" "La conversion del jòc de caractèrs « %s » cap a « %s » es pas presa en carga" #: ../gio/gcharsetconverter.c:458 ../glib/gconvert.c:325 #, c-format msgid "Could not open converter from '%s' to '%s'" msgstr "Impossible de dobrir lo convertidor de « %s » cap a « %s »" #: ../gio/gcontenttype.c:335 #, c-format msgid "%s type" msgstr "Tipe %s" #: ../gio/gcontenttype-win32.c:160 msgid "Unknown type" msgstr "Tipe desconegut" #: ../gio/gcontenttype-win32.c:162 #, c-format msgid "%s filetype" msgstr "Tipe de fichièr %s" #: ../gio/gcredentials.c:312 ../gio/gcredentials.c:571 msgid "GCredentials is not implemented on this OS" msgstr "GCredentials es pas implementat sus aqueste sistèma operatiu" #: ../gio/gcredentials.c:467 msgid "There is no GCredentials support for your platform" msgstr "I a pas de presa en carga de GCredentials per vòstra plataforma" #: ../gio/gcredentials.c:513 msgid "GCredentials does not contain a process ID on this OS" msgstr "" "GCredentials conten pas d'identificant de processus sus aqueste sistèma " "operatiu" #: ../gio/gcredentials.c:565 msgid "Credentials spoofing is not possible on this OS" msgstr "" "L'usurpacion d'identitat es pas possible sus aqueste sistèma operatiu" #: ../gio/gdatainputstream.c:304 msgid "Unexpected early end-of-stream" msgstr "Fin precòça de flux inesperada" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:153 ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:241 #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:322 #, c-format msgid "Unsupported key '%s' in address entry '%s'" msgstr "Clau « %s » pas presa en carga dins l'element d'adreça « %s »" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:180 #, c-format msgid "" "Address '%s' is invalid (need exactly one of path, tmpdir or abstract keys)" msgstr "" "L'adreça « %s » es pas valida (necessita exactement una de las claus de « " "path », « tmpdir » o « abstract »)" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:193 #, c-format msgid "Meaningless key/value pair combination in address entry '%s'" msgstr "" "Combinason clau/valor sens significacion dins l'element d'adreça « %s »" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:256 ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:337 #, c-format msgid "Error in address '%s' - the port attribute is malformed" msgstr "Error dins l'adreça « %s » — l'atribut del pòrt es mal format" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:267 ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:348 #, c-format msgid "Error in address '%s' - the family attribute is malformed" msgstr "Error dins l'adreça « %s » — l'atribut de la familha es mal format" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:457 #, c-format msgid "Address element '%s' does not contain a colon (:)" msgstr "L'element d'adreça « %s » compòrta pas de caractèr dos-punts (:)" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:478 #, c-format msgid "" "Key/Value pair %d, '%s', in address element '%s' does not contain an equal " "sign" msgstr "" "Lo couple clau/valor %d, « %s », dins l'element d'adreça « %s » compòrta pas " "de signe egal" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:492 #, c-format msgid "" "Error unescaping key or value in Key/Value pair %d, '%s', in address element " "'%s'" msgstr "" "Error al moment del desencodatge de la clau o de la valor dins lo couple " "clau/valor %d, « %s », dins l'element d'adreça « %s »" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:570 #, c-format msgid "" "Error in address '%s' - the unix transport requires exactly one of the keys " "'path' or 'abstract' to be set" msgstr "" "Error dins l'adreça « %s » — lo transpòrt Unix requerís que siá exactement " "definida una de las claus « path » o « abstract »" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:606 #, c-format msgid "Error in address '%s' - the host attribute is missing or malformed" msgstr "" "Error dins l'adreça « %s » — l'atribut de l'òste es mancant o mal format" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:620 #, c-format msgid "Error in address '%s' - the port attribute is missing or malformed" msgstr "" "Error dins l'adreça « %s » — l'atribut del pòrt es mancant o mal format" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:634 #, c-format msgid "" "Error in address '%s' - the noncefile attribute is missing or malformed" msgstr "" "Error dins l'adreça « %s » — l'atribut del fichièr de denominacion unica es " "mancant o mal format" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:655 msgid "Error auto-launching: " msgstr "Error d'aviada automatica : " #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:663 #, c-format msgid "Unknown or unsupported transport '%s' for address '%s'" msgstr "Transpòrt « %s » desconegut o pas pres en carga per l'adreça « %s »" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:699 #, c-format msgid "Error opening nonce file '%s': %s" msgstr "" "Error al moment de la dobertura del fichièr de denominacion unica « %s » : %s" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:717 #, c-format msgid "Error reading from nonce file '%s': %s" msgstr "Error de lectura del fichièr de denominacion unica « %s » : %s" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:726 #, c-format msgid "Error reading from nonce file '%s', expected 16 bytes, got %d" msgstr "" "Error de lectura del fichièr de denominacion unica « %s », 16 octets " "esperats, %d recebuts" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:744 #, c-format msgid "Error writing contents of nonce file '%s' to stream:" msgstr "" "Error d'escritura del contengut del fichièr a numerotacion unica « %s » sul " "flux :" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:950 msgid "The given address is empty" msgstr "L'adreça indicada es voida" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:1063 #, c-format msgid "Cannot spawn a message bus when setuid" msgstr "" "Impossible de generar dinamicament un bus messatges quand lo drapeau setuid " "es mis" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:1070 msgid "Cannot spawn a message bus without a machine-id: " msgstr "" "Impossible de generar dinamicament un bus messatges sens identificant " "maquina : " #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:1112 #, c-format msgid "Error spawning command line '%s': " msgstr "Error al moment de la génération de la linha de comanda « %s » : " #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:1329 #, c-format msgid "(Type any character to close this window)\n" msgstr "(saisissez n'importe quel caractèr per tampar aquesta fenèsser)\n" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:1481 #, c-format msgid "Session dbus not running, and autolaunch failed" msgstr "" "La session dbus es pas lancée e autolaunch (lo aviada automatica) a fracassat" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:1492 #, c-format msgid "Cannot determine session bus address (not implemented for this OS)" msgstr "" "Impossible de determinar l'adreça del bus de session (pas pres en carga per " "aqueste sistèma operatiu)" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:1627 ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:7128 #, c-format msgid "" "Cannot determine bus address from DBUS_STARTER_BUS_TYPE environment variable " "- unknown value '%s'" msgstr "" "Impossible de determinar l'adreça del bus a partir de la variabla " "d'environament DBUS_STARTER_BUS_TYPE — valor desconeguda « %s »" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:1636 ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:7137 msgid "" "Cannot determine bus address because the DBUS_STARTER_BUS_TYPE environment " "variable is not set" msgstr "" "Impossible de determinar l'adreça del bus étant donné que la variabla " "d'environament DBUS_STARTER_BUS_TYPE es pas definida" #: ../gio/gdbusaddress.c:1646 #, c-format msgid "Unknown bus type %d" msgstr "Tipe de bus %d desconegut" #: ../gio/gdbusauth.c:293 msgid "Unexpected lack of content trying to read a line" msgstr "" "Manca de contengut imprévu al moment de la tentative de lectura d'una linha" #: ../gio/gdbusauth.c:337 msgid "Unexpected lack of content trying to (safely) read a line" msgstr "" "Manca de contengut imprévu al moment de la tentative de lectura (sécurisée) " "d'una linha" #: ../gio/gdbusauth.c:508 #, c-format msgid "" "Exhausted all available authentication mechanisms (tried: %s) (available: %s)" msgstr "" "Totes los mecanismes d'autentificacion disponibles son estats agotats " "(tentés : %s) (disponibles : %s)" #: ../gio/gdbusauth.c:1170 msgid "Cancelled via GDBusAuthObserver::authorize-authenticated-peer" msgstr "Annulé via GDBusAuthObserver::authorize-authenticated-peer" #: ../gio/gdbusauthmechanismsha1.c:261 #, c-format msgid "Error when getting information for directory '%s': %s" msgstr "" "Error al moment de la récuperacion d'informacion sul repertòri « %s » : %s" #: ../gio/gdbusauthmechanismsha1.c:273 #, c-format msgid "" "Permissions on directory '%s' are malformed. Expected mode 0700, got 0%o" msgstr "" "Los dreches d'accès al repertòri « %s » son mal formats. Mòde 0700 esperat, " "0%o obtenu" #: ../gio/gdbusauthmechanismsha1.c:294 #, c-format msgid "Error creating directory '%s': %s" msgstr "Error a la creacion del repertòri « %s » : %s" #: ../gio/gdbusauthmechanismsha1.c:377 #, c-format msgid "Error opening keyring '%s' for reading: " msgstr "" "Error al moment de la dobertura del trossèl de claus « %s » en lectura : " #: ../gio/gdbusauthmechanismsha1.c:401 ../gio/gdbusauthmechanismsha1.c:714 #, c-format msgid "Line %d of the keyring at '%s' with content '%s' is malformed" msgstr "" "La linha %d del trossèl de claus de « %s » amb lo contengut « %s » es mal " "formada" #: ../gio/gdbusauthmechanismsha1.c:415 ../gio/gdbusauthmechanismsha1.c:728 #, c-format msgid "" "First token of line %d of the keyring at '%s' with content '%s' is malformed" msgstr "" "Lo premier geton de la linha %d del trossèl de claus de « %s » amb lo " "contengut « %s » es mal format" #: ../gio/gdbusauthmechanismsha1.c:430 ../gio/gdbusauthmechanismsha1.c:742 #, c-format msgid "" "Second token of line %d of the keyring at '%s' with content '%s' is malformed" msgstr "" "Lo segond geton de la linha %d del trossèl de claus de « %s » amb lo " "contengut « %s » es mal format" #: ../gio/gdbusauthmechanismsha1.c:454 #, c-format msgid "Didn't find cookie with id %d in the keyring at '%s'" msgstr "" "Impossible de trobar un cookie amb l'identificant %d dins lo trossèl de " "claus de « %s »" #: ../gio/gdbusauthmechanismsha1.c:532 #, c-format msgid "Error deleting stale lock file '%s': %s" msgstr "" "Error al moment de la destruccion de l'ancian fichièr verrolh « %s » : %s" #: ../gio/gdbusauthmechanismsha1.c:564 #, c-format msgid "Error creating lock file '%s': %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la creacion del fichièr verrolh « %s » : %s" #: ../gio/gdbusauthmechanismsha1.c:594 #, c-format msgid "Error closing (unlinked) lock file '%s': %s" msgstr "" "Error al moment de la tampadura del fichièr verrolh (non lié) « %s » : %s" #: ../gio/gdbusauthmechanismsha1.c:604 #, c-format msgid "Error unlinking lock file '%s': %s" msgstr "" "Error al moment de la supression del ligam amb lo fichièr verrolh « %s » : %s" #: ../gio/gdbusauthmechanismsha1.c:681 #, c-format msgid "Error opening keyring '%s' for writing: " msgstr "" "Error al moment de la dobertura del trossèl de claus « %s » en escritura : " #: ../gio/gdbusauthmechanismsha1.c:878 #, c-format msgid "(Additionally, releasing the lock for '%s' also failed: %s) " msgstr "" "(en outre, lo relevament del verrolh per « %s » a aussi échoué : %s) " #: ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:612 ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:2373 msgid "The connection is closed" msgstr "La connexion es tampada" #: ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:1877 msgid "Timeout was reached" msgstr "Lo relambi d'espèra es depassat" #: ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:2495 msgid "" "Unsupported flags encountered when constructing a client-side connection" msgstr "" "Marcadors pas preses en carga rencontrats al moment de la construccion d'una " "connexion côté client" #: ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:4105 ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:4452 #, c-format msgid "" "No such interface 'org.freedesktop.DBus.Properties' on object at path %s" msgstr "" "Pas d'interfàcia « org.freedesktop.DBus.Properties » per l'objècte a " "l'emplacement %s" #: ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:4247 #, c-format msgid "No such property '%s'" msgstr "La proprietat « %s » existís pas" #: ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:4259 #, c-format msgid "Property '%s' is not readable" msgstr "La proprietat « %s » pòt pas èsser legida" #: ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:4270 #, c-format msgid "Property '%s' is not writable" msgstr "La proprietat « %s » pòt pas èsser écrite" #: ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:4290 #, c-format msgid "Error setting property '%s': Expected type '%s' but got '%s'" msgstr "" "Error al moment de la definicion de la proprietat « %s » : tipe esperat « %s " "», « %s » obtenu" #: ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:4395 ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:6568 #, c-format msgid "No such interface '%s'" msgstr "L'interfàcia « %s » existís pas" #: ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:4603 msgid "No such interface" msgstr "Interfàcia pas reconeguda" #: ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:4821 ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:7077 #, c-format msgid "No such interface '%s' on object at path %s" msgstr "L'interfàcia « %s » existís pas per l'objècte a l'emplacement %s" #: ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:4919 #, c-format msgid "No such method '%s'" msgstr "Lo metòde « %s » existís pas" #: ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:4950 #, c-format msgid "Type of message, '%s', does not match expected type '%s'" msgstr "Lo tipe del messatge, « %s », correspond pas al tipe esperat « %s »" #: ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:5148 #, c-format msgid "An object is already exported for the interface %s at %s" msgstr "Un objècte es ja exportat per l'interfàcia « %s » en « %s »" #: ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:5606 #, c-format msgid "Method '%s' returned type '%s', but expected '%s'" msgstr "Lo metòde « %s » a renviat lo tipe « %s », mas « %s » èra esperat" #: ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:6679 #, c-format msgid "Method '%s' on interface '%s' with signature '%s' does not exist" msgstr "" "Lo metòde « %s » sus l'interfàcia « %s » amb la signatura « %s » existís pas" #: ../gio/gdbusconnection.c:6800 #, c-format msgid "A subtree is already exported for %s" msgstr "Una sosarborescéncia es ja exportada per « %s »" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:1244 msgid "type is INVALID" msgstr "lo tipe es « INVALID »" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:1255 msgid "METHOD_CALL message: PATH or MEMBER header field is missing" msgstr "Messatge de METHOD_CALL : camp d'entèsta PATH o MEMBER mancant" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:1266 msgid "METHOD_RETURN message: REPLY_SERIAL header field is missing" msgstr "Messatge de METHOD_RETURN : camp d'entèsta REPLY_SERIAL mancant" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:1278 msgid "ERROR message: REPLY_SERIAL or ERROR_NAME header field is missing" msgstr "Messatge d'ERROR : camp d'entèsta REPLY_SERIAL o ERROR_NAME mancant" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:1291 msgid "SIGNAL message: PATH, INTERFACE or MEMBER header field is missing" msgstr "Messatge de SIGNAL : camp d'entèsta PATH, INTERFACE o MEMBER mancant" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:1299 msgid "" "SIGNAL message: The PATH header field is using the reserved value " "/org/freedesktop/DBus/Local" msgstr "" "Messatge de SIGNAL : lo camp d'entèsta PATH utilise la valor reservada " "/org/freedesktop/DBus/Local" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:1307 msgid "" "SIGNAL message: The INTERFACE header field is using the reserved value " "org.freedesktop.DBus.Local" msgstr "" "Messatge de SIGNAL : lo camp d'entèsta INTERFACE utilise la valor reservada " "org.freedesktop.DBus.Local" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:1355 ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:1415 #, c-format msgid "Wanted to read %lu byte but only got %lu" msgid_plural "Wanted to read %lu bytes but only got %lu" msgstr[0] "Lectura de %lu octet demandada, mas solament %lu recebut(s)" msgstr[1] "Lectura de %lu octets demandada, mas solament %lu recebut(s)" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:1369 #, c-format msgid "Expected NUL byte after the string '%s' but found byte %d" msgstr "" "Octet 00 (NUL) esperat a la fin de la cadena « %s » mas un octet %d es estat " "trobat" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:1388 #, c-format msgid "" "Expected valid UTF-8 string but found invalid bytes at byte offset %d " "(length of string is %d). The valid UTF-8 string up until that point was '%s'" msgstr "" "Una cadena UTF-8 valida es esperada mas d'octets invalids son rencontrats a " "la posicion %d (longor de la cadena : %d octets). La cadena UTF-8 valida " "fins a aqueste endrech es « %s »" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:1587 #, c-format msgid "Parsed value '%s' is not a valid D-Bus object path" msgstr "" "La valor analisada « %s » es pas un camin cap a un objècte D-Bus valid" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:1609 #, c-format msgid "Parsed value '%s' is not a valid D-Bus signature" msgstr "La valor analisada « %s » es pas una signatura D-Bus valida" # 2<<26 donne 128 Mo, 2^26 donne 64 Mo, 1<<26 donne 64 Mo #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:1656 #, c-format msgid "" "Encountered array of length %u byte. Maximum length is 2<<26 bytes (64 MiB)." msgid_plural "" "Encountered array of length %u bytes. Maximum length is 2<<26 bytes (64 MiB)." msgstr[0] "" "Un tablèu de %u octet de long es estat trobat. La longor maximala es de " "2<<26 octets (64 Mo)." msgstr[1] "" "Un tablèu de %u octets de long es estat trobat. La longor maximala es de " "2<<26 octets (64 Mo)." #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:1843 #, c-format msgid "Parsed value '%s' for variant is not a valid D-Bus signature" msgstr "" "La valor « %s » analisada en tant que variant es pas una signatura valida de " "D-Bus" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:1867 #, c-format msgid "" "Error deserializing GVariant with type string '%s' from the D-Bus wire format" msgstr "" "Error en deserializant lo GVariant en cadena de tipe « %s » a partir del " "format de transmission D-Bus" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:2051 #, c-format msgid "" "Invalid endianness value. Expected 0x6c ('l') or 0x42 ('B') but found value " "0x%02x" msgstr "" "Valor de boutisme invalida. 0x6c (« l ») o 0x42 (« B ») esperats, mas 0x%02x " "trobat" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:2064 #, c-format msgid "Invalid major protocol version. Expected 1 but found %d" msgstr "Version majeure del protocòl invalida. 1 esperat, %d trobat" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:2120 #, c-format msgid "Signature header with signature '%s' found but message body is empty" msgstr "" "Entèsta de signatura trobat amb la signatura « %s », mas lo còs del messatge " "es void" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:2134 #, c-format msgid "Parsed value '%s' is not a valid D-Bus signature (for body)" msgstr "" "La valor analisada « %s » es pas una signatura valida de D-Bus (per lo còs)" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:2164 #, c-format msgid "No signature header in message but the message body is %u byte" msgid_plural "" "No signature header in message but the message body is %u bytes" msgstr[0] "" "Pas de signatura d'entèsta dins lo messatge, mas lo còs del messatge es de " "%u octet" msgstr[1] "" "Pas de signatura d'entèsta dins lo messatge, mas lo còs del messatge es de " "%u octets" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:2174 msgid "Cannot deserialize message: " msgstr "Impossible de déserializar lo messatge : " #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:2515 #, c-format msgid "" "Error serializing GVariant with type string '%s' to the D-Bus wire format" msgstr "" "Error en sérialisant lo GVariant en cadena de tipe « %s » dins lo format de " "transmission D-Bus" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:2652 #, c-format msgid "" "Message has %d file descriptors but the header field indicates %d file " "descriptors" msgstr "" "Lo messatge compòrta %d descriptors de fichièrs mentre que lo camp d'entèsta " "indique %d descriptors de fichièrs" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:2660 msgid "Cannot serialize message: " msgstr "Impossible de serializar lo messatge : " #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:2704 #, c-format msgid "Message body has signature '%s' but there is no signature header" msgstr "" "Lo còs del messatge a la signatura « %s », mas i a pas d'entèsta de signatura" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:2714 #, c-format msgid "" "Message body has type signature '%s' but signature in the header field is " "'%s'" msgstr "" "Lo còs del messatge a una signatura de tipe « %s », mas la qu'es dins lo " "camp d'entèsta es « %s »" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:2730 #, c-format msgid "Message body is empty but signature in the header field is '(%s)'" msgstr "" "Lo còs del messatge es void mas sa signatura dins lo camp d'entèsta es « " "(%s) »" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:3283 #, c-format msgid "Error return with body of type '%s'" msgstr "Retorn d'error amb un còs de tipe « %s »" #: ../gio/gdbusmessage.c:3291 msgid "Error return with empty body" msgstr "Retorn d'error amb un còs void" #: ../gio/gdbusprivate.c:2036 #, c-format msgid "Unable to get Hardware profile: %s" msgstr "Impossible d'obténer lo perfil material : %s" #: ../gio/gdbusprivate.c:2081 msgid "Unable to load /var/lib/dbus/machine-id or /etc/machine-id: " msgstr "" "Cargament de /var/lib/dbus/machine-id o /etc/machine-id impossible : " #: ../gio/gdbusproxy.c:1610 #, c-format msgid "Error calling StartServiceByName for %s: " msgstr "Error al moment de l'apèl de StartServiceByName per %s : " # Guillemets anglais laissés volontairement #: ../gio/gdbusproxy.c:1633 #, c-format msgid "Unexpected reply %d from StartServiceByName(\"%s\") method" msgstr "Responsa %d inesperada del metòde StartServiceByName(\"%s\")" #: ../gio/gdbusproxy.c:2709 ../gio/gdbusproxy.c:2843 msgid "" "Cannot invoke method; proxy is for a well-known name without an owner and " "proxy was constructed with the G_DBUS_PROXY_FLAGS_DO_NOT_AUTO_START flag" msgstr "" "Impossible d'apelar lo metòde ; lo servidor es mandatari d'un nom connu sens " "proprietari mentre que lo proxy es estat construch amb lo marcador " "G_DBUS_PROXY_FLAGS_DO_NOT_AUTO_START" #: ../gio/gdbusserver.c:708 msgid "Abstract name space not supported" msgstr "L'espaci de noms abstrait es pas pres en carga" #: ../gio/gdbusserver.c:795 msgid "Cannot specify nonce file when creating a server" msgstr "" "Impossible de definir un fichièr de denominacion unica al moment de la " "creacion d'un serveur" #: ../gio/gdbusserver.c:873 #, c-format msgid "Error writing nonce file at '%s': %s" msgstr "" "Error al moment de l'escritura del fichièr de denominacion unica a « %s » : " "%s" #: ../gio/gdbusserver.c:1044 #, c-format msgid "The string '%s' is not a valid D-Bus GUID" msgstr "La cadena « %s » es pas un GUID valid de D-Bus" #: ../gio/gdbusserver.c:1084 #, c-format msgid "Cannot listen on unsupported transport '%s'" msgstr "Impossible d'escotar sul transpòrt « %s » pas pres en carga" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:95 #, c-format msgid "" "Commands:\n" " help Shows this information\n" " introspect Introspect a remote object\n" " monitor Monitor a remote object\n" " call Invoke a method on a remote object\n" " emit Emit a signal\n" "\n" "Use \"%s COMMAND --help\" to get help on each command.\n" msgstr "" "Comandas :\n" " help Aficha la presenta informacion\n" " introspect Inspècta la constitucion d'un objècte distant\n" " monitor Susvelha un objècte distant\n" " call Apèla un metòde sus un objècte distant\n" " emit Emet un senhal\n" "\n" "Utilizar « %s COMANDA --help » per obténer una ajuda sus cada comanda.\n" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:164 ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:226 ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:298 #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:322 ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:711 ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:1043 #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:1477 #, c-format msgid "Error: %s\n" msgstr "Error : %s\n" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:175 ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:239 ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:1493 #, c-format msgid "Error parsing introspection XML: %s\n" msgstr "Error al moment de l'analisi del XML d'introspection : %s\n" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:356 msgid "Connect to the system bus" msgstr "Connexion al bus sistèma" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:357 msgid "Connect to the session bus" msgstr "Connexion al bus de session" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:358 msgid "Connect to given D-Bus address" msgstr "Connexion a l'adreça D-Bus donada" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:368 msgid "Connection Endpoint Options:" msgstr "Opcions de connexion al punt terminal :" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:369 msgid "Options specifying the connection endpoint" msgstr "Opcions que definisson la connexion al punt terminal" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:391 #, c-format msgid "No connection endpoint specified" msgstr "Cap de punt terminal de connexion pas definit" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:401 #, c-format msgid "Multiple connection endpoints specified" msgstr "Mantun punt terminals de connexion definits" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:471 #, c-format msgid "" "Warning: According to introspection data, interface '%s' does not exist\n" msgstr "" "Avertiment : segon las donadas de l'examèn intèrne, l'interfàcia « %s » " "existís pas\n" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:480 #, c-format msgid "" "Warning: According to introspection data, method '%s' does not exist on " "interface '%s'\n" msgstr "" "Avertiment : segon las donadas de l'examèn intèrne, lo metòde « %s » existís " "pas sus l'interfàcia « %s »\n" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:542 msgid "Optional destination for signal (unique name)" msgstr "Destinacion facultativa pel senhal (nom unic)" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:543 msgid "Object path to emit signal on" msgstr "Camin de l'objècte sul qual émetra lo senhal" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:544 msgid "Signal and interface name" msgstr "Noms de senhal e d'interfàcia" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:576 msgid "Emit a signal." msgstr "Emet un senhal." #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:610 ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:842 ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:1583 #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:1818 #, c-format msgid "Error connecting: %s\n" msgstr "Error de connexion : %s\n" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:622 #, c-format msgid "Error: object path not specified.\n" msgstr "Error : lo camin per l'objècte es pas precisat.\n" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:627 ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:909 ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:1648 #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:1884 #, c-format msgid "Error: %s is not a valid object path\n" msgstr "Error : « %s » es pas un camin d'objècte valid\n" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:633 #, c-format msgid "Error: signal not specified.\n" msgstr "Error : lo senhal es pas precisat.\n" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:640 #, c-format msgid "Error: signal must be the fully-qualified name.\n" msgstr "Error : lo senhal deu èsser lo nom completament qualificat.\n" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:648 #, c-format msgid "Error: %s is not a valid interface name\n" msgstr "Error : %s es pas un nom d'interfàcia valida\n" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:654 #, c-format msgid "Error: %s is not a valid member name\n" msgstr "Error : %s es pas un nom de membre valid\n" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:660 #, c-format msgid "Error: %s is not a valid unique bus name.\n" msgstr "Error : %s es pas un nom unic de bus valid.\n" #. Use the original non-"parse-me-harder" error #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:687 ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:1011 #, c-format msgid "Error parsing parameter %d: %s\n" msgstr "Error al moment de l'analisi del paramètre %d : %s\n" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:718 #, c-format msgid "Error flushing connection: %s\n" msgstr "Error de purge de la connexion : %s\n" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:745 msgid "Destination name to invoke method on" msgstr "Nom de la destinacion sus la quala apelar un metòde" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:746 msgid "Object path to invoke method on" msgstr "Camin de l'objècte sul qual apelar un metòde" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:747 msgid "Method and interface name" msgstr "Noms de metòde e d'interfàcia" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:748 msgid "Timeout in seconds" msgstr "Relambi d'espèra en segondas" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:787 msgid "Invoke a method on a remote object." msgstr "Apelar un metòde sus un objècte distant." #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:862 ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:1602 ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:1837 #, c-format msgid "Error: Destination is not specified\n" msgstr "Error : la destinacion es pas precisada\n" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:889 ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:1628 #, c-format msgid "Error: Object path is not specified\n" msgstr "Error : lo camin per l'objècte es pas precisat\n" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:924 #, c-format msgid "Error: Method name is not specified\n" msgstr "Error : lo nom del metòde es pas definit\n" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:935 #, c-format msgid "Error: Method name '%s' is invalid\n" msgstr "Error : lo nom de metòde « %s » es pas valid\n" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:1003 #, c-format msgid "Error parsing parameter %d of type '%s': %s\n" msgstr "Error d'analisi del paramètre %d de tipe « %s » : %s\n" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:1440 msgid "Destination name to introspect" msgstr "Nom de la destinacion d'examinar en intèrne" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:1441 msgid "Object path to introspect" msgstr "Camin de l'objècte d'examinar en intèrne" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:1442 msgid "Print XML" msgstr "Imprimir lo XML" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:1443 msgid "Introspect children" msgstr "Examinar en intèrne los enfants" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:1444 msgid "Only print properties" msgstr "Afichar pas que las proprietats" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:1535 msgid "Introspect a remote object." msgstr "Examinar en intèrne un objècte distant." #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:1740 msgid "Destination name to monitor" msgstr "Nom de la destinacion de susvelhar" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:1741 msgid "Object path to monitor" msgstr "Camin de l'objècte de susvelhar" #: ../gio/gdbus-tool.c:1770 msgid "Monitor a remote object." msgstr "Susvelhar un objècte distant." #: ../gio/gdesktopappinfo.c:1993 ../gio/gdesktopappinfo.c:4499 msgid "Unnamed" msgstr "Sans nom" # Un fichier Desktop n'est pas forcément sur le bureau... #: ../gio/gdesktopappinfo.c:2402 msgid "Desktop file didn't specify Exec field" msgstr "Lo fichièr .desktop a pas precisat son camp Exec" #: ../gio/gdesktopappinfo.c:2687 msgid "Unable to find terminal required for application" msgstr "Impossible de trobar lo terminal requesit per l'aplicacion" #: ../gio/gdesktopappinfo.c:3095 #, c-format msgid "Can't create user application configuration folder %s: %s" msgstr "" "Impossible de crear lo dorsièr de configuracion utilizaire d'aplicacion %s : " "%s" #: ../gio/gdesktopappinfo.c:3099 #, c-format msgid "Can't create user MIME configuration folder %s: %s" msgstr "" "Impossible de crear lo dorsièr de configuracion utilizaire MIME %s : %s" #: ../gio/gdesktopappinfo.c:3339 ../gio/gdesktopappinfo.c:3363 msgid "Application information lacks an identifier" msgstr "Las informacions de l'aplicacion compòrtan pas d'identificant" #: ../gio/gdesktopappinfo.c:3597 #, c-format msgid "Can't create user desktop file %s" msgstr "Impossible de crear lo fichièr .desktop utilizaire %s" #: ../gio/gdesktopappinfo.c:3731 #, c-format msgid "Custom definition for %s" msgstr "Definicion personnalisée per %s" #: ../gio/gdrive.c:392 msgid "drive doesn't implement eject" msgstr "lo lector implementa pas l'ejeccion (« eject »)" #. Translators: This is an error #. * message for drive objects that #. * don't implement any of eject or eject_with_operation. #: ../gio/gdrive.c:470 msgid "drive doesn't implement eject or eject_with_operation" msgstr "" "lo lector implementa pas l'ejeccion combinada o pas (« eject » o « " "eject_with_operation »)" #: ../gio/gdrive.c:546 msgid "drive doesn't implement polling for media" msgstr "lo lector implementa pas la scrutation del média (« polling »)" #: ../gio/gdrive.c:751 msgid "drive doesn't implement start" msgstr "lo lector implementa pas lo démarrage (« start »)" #: ../gio/gdrive.c:853 msgid "drive doesn't implement stop" msgstr "lo lector implementa pas l'arrêt (« stop »)" #: ../gio/gdummytlsbackend.c:195 ../gio/gdummytlsbackend.c:317 #: ../gio/gdummytlsbackend.c:509 msgid "TLS support is not available" msgstr "La presa en carga TLS es pas disponible" #: ../gio/gemblem.c:323 #, c-format msgid "Can't handle version %d of GEmblem encoding" msgstr "Impossible de gerir la version %d de l'encodatge GEmblem" #: ../gio/gemblem.c:333 #, c-format msgid "Malformed number of tokens (%d) in GEmblem encoding" msgstr "Nombre de getons incorrècte (%d) dins lo encodatge GEmblem" #: ../gio/gemblemedicon.c:362 #, c-format msgid "Can't handle version %d of GEmblemedIcon encoding" msgstr "Impossible de gerir la version %d de l'encodatge GEmblemedIcon" #: ../gio/gemblemedicon.c:372 #, c-format msgid "Malformed number of tokens (%d) in GEmblemedIcon encoding" msgstr "Nombre de getons incorrècte (%d) dins lo encodatge GEmblemedIcon" #: ../gio/gemblemedicon.c:395 msgid "Expected a GEmblem for GEmblemedIcon" msgstr "Un GEmblem es esperat pel GEmblemedIcon" #: ../gio/gfile.c:969 ../gio/gfile.c:1207 ../gio/gfile.c:1345 #: ../gio/gfile.c:1583 ../gio/gfile.c:1638 ../gio/gfile.c:1696 #: ../gio/gfile.c:1780 ../gio/gfile.c:1837 ../gio/gfile.c:1901 #: ../gio/gfile.c:1956 ../gio/gfile.c:3604 ../gio/gfile.c:3659 #: ../gio/gfile.c:3894 ../gio/gfile.c:3936 ../gio/gfile.c:4404 #: ../gio/gfile.c:4815 ../gio/gfile.c:4900 ../gio/gfile.c:4990 #: ../gio/gfile.c:5087 ../gio/gfile.c:5174 ../gio/gfile.c:5275 #: ../gio/gfile.c:7796 ../gio/gfile.c:7886 ../gio/gfile.c:7970 #: ../gio/win32/gwinhttpfile.c:437 msgid "Operation not supported" msgstr "Operacion pas presa en carga" #. Translators: This is an error message when #. * trying to find the enclosing (user visible) #. * mount of a file, but none exists. #. #. Translators: This is an error message when trying to #. * find the enclosing (user visible) mount of a file, but #. * none exists. #. Translators: This is an error message when trying to find #. * the enclosing (user visible) mount of a file, but none #. * exists. #: ../gio/gfile.c:1468 ../gio/glocalfile.c:1137 ../gio/glocalfile.c:1148 #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:1161 msgid "Containing mount does not exist" msgstr "Lo punt de montatge contenidor existís pas" #: ../gio/gfile.c:2515 ../gio/glocalfile.c:2379 msgid "Can't copy over directory" msgstr "Impossible d'espotir un repertòri" #: ../gio/gfile.c:2575 msgid "Can't copy directory over directory" msgstr "Impossible d'espotir un repertòri per un autre repertòri" #: ../gio/gfile.c:2583 ../gio/glocalfile.c:2388 msgid "Target file exists" msgstr "Lo fichièr cibla existe" #: ../gio/gfile.c:2602 msgid "Can't recursively copy directory" msgstr "Impossible de copier recursivament un repertòri" # http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Splice_(system_call) #: ../gio/gfile.c:2884 msgid "Splice not supported" msgstr "L'operacion « splice » es pas presa en carga" #: ../gio/gfile.c:2888 #, c-format msgid "Error splicing file: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de l'operacion de « splicing » sul fichièr : %s" #: ../gio/gfile.c:3019 msgid "Copy (reflink/clone) between mounts is not supported" msgstr "" "La còpia (reflink/clone) entre punts de montatge es pas presa en carga" #: ../gio/gfile.c:3023 msgid "Copy (reflink/clone) is not supported or invalid" msgstr "La còpia (reflink/clone) es pas presa en carga o es pas valida" #: ../gio/gfile.c:3028 msgid "Copy (reflink/clone) is not supported or didn't work" msgstr "La còpia (reflink/clone) es pas presa en carga o a pas foncionné" #: ../gio/gfile.c:3091 msgid "Can't copy special file" msgstr "Impossible de copier lo fichièr spécial" #: ../gio/gfile.c:3884 msgid "Invalid symlink value given" msgstr "Valor de ligam simbolic donada invalida" #: ../gio/gfile.c:4045 msgid "Trash not supported" msgstr "L'escobilhièr es pas presa en carga" #: ../gio/gfile.c:4157 #, c-format msgid "File names cannot contain '%c'" msgstr "Los noms de fichièrs pòdon pas comportar de « %c »" #: ../gio/gfile.c:6586 ../gio/gvolume.c:363 msgid "volume doesn't implement mount" msgstr "lo volum implementa pas lo montatge" #: ../gio/gfile.c:6695 msgid "No application is registered as handling this file" msgstr "Cap d'aplicacion es pas enregistrada per gerir aqueste fichièr" #: ../gio/gfileenumerator.c:212 msgid "Enumerator is closed" msgstr "L'enumerador es tampat" #: ../gio/gfileenumerator.c:219 ../gio/gfileenumerator.c:278 #: ../gio/gfileenumerator.c:377 ../gio/gfileenumerator.c:476 msgid "File enumerator has outstanding operation" msgstr "L'enumerador de fichièrs es en cors d'operacion" #: ../gio/gfileenumerator.c:368 ../gio/gfileenumerator.c:467 msgid "File enumerator is already closed" msgstr "L'enumerador de fichièrs es ja tampat" #: ../gio/gfileicon.c:236 #, c-format msgid "Can't handle version %d of GFileIcon encoding" msgstr "Impossible de gerir la version %d de l'encodatge de GFileIcon" #: ../gio/gfileicon.c:246 msgid "Malformed input data for GFileIcon" msgstr "Donadas d'entrada incorrèctas per GFileIcon" #: ../gio/gfileinputstream.c:149 ../gio/gfileinputstream.c:394 #: ../gio/gfileiostream.c:167 ../gio/gfileoutputstream.c:164 #: ../gio/gfileoutputstream.c:497 msgid "Stream doesn't support query_info" msgstr "Lo flux pren pas en carga query_info" #: ../gio/gfileinputstream.c:325 ../gio/gfileiostream.c:379 #: ../gio/gfileoutputstream.c:371 msgid "Seek not supported on stream" msgstr "Lo posicionament es pas pres en carga sul flux" #: ../gio/gfileinputstream.c:369 msgid "Truncate not allowed on input stream" msgstr "La troncadura es pas autorizada sus un flux d'entrada" #: ../gio/gfileiostream.c:455 ../gio/gfileoutputstream.c:447 msgid "Truncate not supported on stream" msgstr "La troncadura es pas presa en carga sul flux" #: ../gio/gicon.c:290 #, c-format msgid "Wrong number of tokens (%d)" msgstr "Nombre de getons incorrècte (%d)" #: ../gio/gicon.c:310 #, c-format msgid "No type for class name %s" msgstr "Pas cap de tipe pel nom de classa %s" #: ../gio/gicon.c:320 #, c-format msgid "Type %s does not implement the GIcon interface" msgstr "Lo tipe %s implementa pas l'interfàcia GIcon" #: ../gio/gicon.c:331 #, c-format msgid "Type %s is not classed" msgstr "Lo tipe %s es pas classat" #: ../gio/gicon.c:345 #, c-format msgid "Malformed version number: %s" msgstr "Numèro de version incorrècte : %s" #: ../gio/gicon.c:359 #, c-format msgid "Type %s does not implement from_tokens() on the GIcon interface" msgstr "" "Lo tipe %s implementa pas la foncion from_tokens() de l'interfàcia GIcon" #: ../gio/gicon.c:461 msgid "Can't handle the supplied version of the icon encoding" msgstr "Impossible de gerir la version provesida de l'encodatge de l'icòna" #: ../gio/ginetaddressmask.c:182 msgid "No address specified" msgstr "Cap d'adreça pas indicada" #: ../gio/ginetaddressmask.c:190 #, c-format msgid "Length %u is too long for address" msgstr "La longor %u es tròp importanta per l'adreça" #: ../gio/ginetaddressmask.c:223 msgid "Address has bits set beyond prefix length" msgstr "L'adreça possedís de bits definits al delà de la longor del prefix" #: ../gio/ginetaddressmask.c:300 #, c-format msgid "Could not parse '%s' as IP address mask" msgstr "Impossible d'analisar « %s » coma masque d'adreça IP" #: ../gio/ginetsocketaddress.c:203 ../gio/ginetsocketaddress.c:220 #: ../gio/gnativesocketaddress.c:106 ../gio/gunixsocketaddress.c:216 msgid "Not enough space for socket address" msgstr "Espaci insufisent per una adreça de connector ret" #: ../gio/ginetsocketaddress.c:235 msgid "Unsupported socket address" msgstr "Adreça de connector ret pas presa en carga" #: ../gio/ginputstream.c:188 msgid "Input stream doesn't implement read" msgstr "Lo flux en entrada implementa pas « read »" #. Translators: This is an error you get if there is already an #. * operation running against this stream when you try to start #. * one #. Translators: This is an error you get if there is #. * already an operation running against this stream when #. * you try to start one #: ../gio/ginputstream.c:1215 ../gio/giostream.c:310 #: ../gio/goutputstream.c:1668 msgid "Stream has outstanding operation" msgstr "Lo flux a una operacion en cors" #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:142 ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1491 #, c-format msgid "Element <%s> not allowed inside <%s>" msgstr "Element <%s> interdich dins <%s>" #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:146 #, c-format msgid "Element <%s> not allowed at toplevel" msgstr "Element <%s> interdich al premier niveau" #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:236 #, c-format msgid "File %s appears multiple times in the resource" msgstr "Lo fichièr %s apparaît mantun còp dins la ressorsa" #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:247 #, c-format msgid "Failed to locate '%s' in any source directory" msgstr "La localizacion de « %s » dins totes los repertòris font a fracassat" #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:258 #, c-format msgid "Failed to locate '%s' in current directory" msgstr "La localizacion de « %s » dins lo repertòri actual a fracassat" #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:287 #, c-format msgid "Unknown processing option \"%s\"" msgstr "Opcion de tractament desconeguda « %s »" #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:305 ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:351 #, c-format msgid "Failed to create temp file: %s" msgstr "La creacion del fichièr temporari a fracassat : %s" #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:379 #, c-format msgid "Error reading file %s: %s" msgstr "Error de lectura del fichièr %s : %s" #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:399 #, c-format msgid "Error compressing file %s" msgstr "Error a la compression del fichièr %s" #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:467 ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1603 #, c-format msgid "text may not appear inside <%s>" msgstr "<%s> pòt pas conténer de tèxte" #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:592 msgid "name of the output file" msgstr "nom del fichièr de sortida" #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:593 msgid "" "The directories where files are to be read from (default to current " "directory)" msgstr "" "Los repertòris a partir desquels los fichièrs seràn legits (per defaut lo " "repertòri actual)" #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:593 ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:2036 #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:2065 msgid "DIRECTORY" msgstr "REPERTÒRI" #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:594 msgid "" "Generate output in the format selected for by the target filename extension" msgstr "" "Generar la sortida dins lo format seleccionat per l'extension del nom de " "fichièr cibla" #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:595 msgid "Generate source header" msgstr "Generar l'entèsta de la font" #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:596 msgid "Generate sourcecode used to link in the resource file into your code" msgstr "" "Generar lo còde font utilizat per ligar cap a lo fichièr ressorsa dins " "vòstre còde" #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:597 msgid "Generate dependency list" msgstr "Generar la lista de las dependéncias" #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:598 msgid "Don't automatically create and register resource" msgstr "Crear pas e enregistrar automaticament la ressorsa" #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:599 msgid "Don't export functions; declare them G_GNUC_INTERNAL" msgstr "Exportar pas las foncions ; las declarar G_GNUC_INTERNAL" #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:600 msgid "C identifier name used for the generated source code" msgstr "Nom d'identificant C utilizat pel còde font generat" #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:626 msgid "" "Compile a resource specification into a resource file.\n" "Resource specification files have the extension .gresource.xml,\n" "and the resource file have the extension called .gresource." msgstr "" "Compilar una especificacion de ressorsa dins un fichièr de ressorsa.\n" "Los fichièrs d'especificacion de ressorsa possedisson l'extension " ".gresource.xml\n" "e lo fichièr de ressorsa possedís l'extension .gresource." #: ../gio/glib-compile-resources.c:642 #, c-format msgid "You should give exactly one file name\n" msgstr "Vos cal indicar un e un sol nom de fichièr\n" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:784 msgid "empty names are not permitted" msgstr "los noms voids son pas autorizats" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:794 #, c-format msgid "invalid name '%s': names must begin with a lowercase letter" msgstr "nom « %s » invalid : los noms devon començar per una letra minuscula" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:806 #, c-format msgid "" "invalid name '%s': invalid character '%c'; only lowercase letters, numbers " "and hyphen ('-') are permitted." msgstr "" "nom « %s » invalid : caractèr « %c » invalid ; sols las minusculas, los " "nombres e lo tiret (« - ») son autorizats." #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:815 #, c-format msgid "invalid name '%s': two successive hyphens ('--') are not permitted." msgstr "" "nom « %s » invalid : dos tirets successius (« -- ») son pas autorizats." #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:824 #, c-format msgid "invalid name '%s': the last character may not be a hyphen ('-')." msgstr "" "nom « %s » invalid : lo dernier caractèr pòt pas èsser un tiret (« - »)." #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:832 #, c-format msgid "invalid name '%s': maximum length is 1024" msgstr "nom « %s » invalid : la longor maximala es 1024" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:901 #, c-format msgid " already specified" msgstr " a ja été definit" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:927 msgid "cannot add keys to a 'list-of' schema" msgstr "impossible d'apondre de claus a un esquèma « list-of »" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:938 #, c-format msgid " already specified" msgstr " a ja été definit" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:956 #, c-format msgid "" " shadows in ; use " "to modify value" msgstr "" " masque dins ; utilizatz " " per modifier la valor" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:967 #, c-format msgid "" "exactly one of 'type', 'enum' or 'flags' must be specified as an attribute " "to " msgstr "" " pòt pas recebre qu'un e un sol atribut demest « tipe », « enum » o « " "flags »" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:986 #, c-format msgid "<%s id='%s'> not (yet) defined." msgstr "<%s id='%s'> pas (encara) definit." #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1001 #, c-format msgid "invalid GVariant type string '%s'" msgstr "cadena de tipe GVariant « %s » invalida" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1031 msgid " given but schema isn't extending anything" msgstr "un es donat mas son esquèma espandís pas res" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1044 #, c-format msgid "no to override" msgstr "pas cap de de redefinir" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1052 #, c-format msgid " already specified" msgstr " ja definit" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1125 #, c-format msgid " already specified" msgstr " ja definit" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1137 #, c-format msgid " extends not yet existing schema '%s'" msgstr " espandís l'esquèma « %s » qu'existís pas encara" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1153 #, c-format msgid " is list of not yet existing schema '%s'" msgstr "" " es una lista de l'esquèma « %s » qu'existís pas encara" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1161 #, c-format msgid "Can not be a list of a schema with a path" msgstr "Un esquèma amb un camin pòt pas conténer de lista" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1171 #, c-format msgid "Can not extend a schema with a path" msgstr "Impossible d'espandir un esquèma amb un camin" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1181 #, c-format msgid "" " is a list, extending which is not a list" msgstr "" " es una lista ; espandís qu'es pas una lista" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1191 #, c-format msgid "" " extends but '%s' " "does not extend '%s'" msgstr "" " espandís mas « " "%s » n'étend pas « %s »" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1208 #, c-format msgid "a path, if given, must begin and end with a slash" msgstr "si un camin es indicat, deu començar e finir per una barre oblique" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1215 #, c-format msgid "the path of a list must end with ':/'" msgstr "lo camin d'una lista deu finir per « :/ »" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1247 #, c-format msgid "<%s id='%s'> already specified" msgstr "<%s id='%s'> es ja definit" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1495 #, c-format msgid "Element <%s> not allowed at the top level" msgstr "Element <%s> interdich al premier niveau" #. Translators: Do not translate "--strict". #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1794 ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1865 #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1941 #, c-format msgid "--strict was specified; exiting.\n" msgstr "--strict es estat especificat ; sortida en cors.\n" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1802 #, c-format msgid "This entire file has been ignored.\n" msgstr "Lo fichièr complet es estat ignorat.\n" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1861 #, c-format msgid "Ignoring this file.\n" msgstr "Aqueste fichièr es ignorat.\n" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1901 #, c-format msgid "No such key '%s' in schema '%s' as specified in override file '%s'" msgstr "" "Pas cap de clau nomenada « %s » dins l'esquèma « %s » coma definit dins lo " "fichièr « %s » de redefinicion" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1907 ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1965 #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1993 #, c-format msgid "; ignoring override for this key.\n" msgstr "; la redefinicion de aquesta clau es estada ignorada.\n" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1911 ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1969 #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1997 #, c-format msgid " and --strict was specified; exiting.\n" msgstr " e --strict es estat especificat ; sortida en cors.\n" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1927 #, c-format msgid "" "error parsing key '%s' in schema '%s' as specified in override file '%s': %s." msgstr "" "Error d'analisi de la clau « %s » dins l'esquèma « %s » coma definit dins lo " "fichièr « %s » de redefinicion : %s." #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1937 #, c-format msgid "Ignoring override for this key.\n" msgstr "La redefinicion de aquesta clau es estada ignorada.\n" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1955 #, c-format msgid "" "override for key '%s' in schema '%s' in override file '%s' is outside the " "range given in the schema" msgstr "" "la redefinicion de la clau « %s » dins l'esquèma « %s » del fichièr de " "redefinicion « %s » es pas dins la plaja indicada per l'esquèma" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:1983 #, c-format msgid "" "override for key '%s' in schema '%s' in override file '%s' is not in the " "list of valid choices" msgstr "" "la redefinicion de la clau « %s » dins l'esquèma « %s » del fichièr de " "redefinicion « %s » es pas dins la lista de las causida validas" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:2036 msgid "where to store the gschemas.compiled file" msgstr "endroit où enregistrar lo fichièr gschemas.compiled" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:2037 msgid "Abort on any errors in schemas" msgstr "Anullacion en cas d'errors dins d'esquèmas" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:2038 msgid "Do not write the gschema.compiled file" msgstr "Ne pas escriure de fichièr gschema.compiled" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:2039 msgid "Do not enforce key name restrictions" msgstr "Ne pas aplicar las limitacions de nom de clau" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:2068 msgid "" "Compile all GSettings schema files into a schema cache.\n" "Schema files are required to have the extension .gschema.xml,\n" "and the cache file is called gschemas.compiled." msgstr "" "Compilar totes los fichièrs esquèmas GSettings dins un cache.\n" "L'extension .gschema.xml es requesida per los fichièrs esquèmas,\n" "et lo fichièr cache es nomenat gschemas.compiled." #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:2084 #, c-format msgid "You should give exactly one directory name\n" msgstr "Vos cal indicar un e un sol nom de repertòri\n" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:2123 #, c-format msgid "No schema files found: " msgstr "Cap de fichièr esquèma pas trobat : " #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:2126 #, c-format msgid "doing nothing.\n" msgstr "cap d'accion pas efectuada.\n" #: ../gio/glib-compile-schemas.c:2129 #, c-format msgid "removed existing output file.\n" msgstr "fichièr de sortida existant suprimit.\n" #: ../gio/glocaldirectorymonitor.c:224 msgid "Unable to find default local directory monitor type" msgstr "" "Impossible de trouver le type de moniteur de répertoire local par défaut" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:638 ../gio/win32/gwinhttpfile.c:420 #, c-format msgid "Invalid filename %s" msgstr "Nom de fichièr invalid : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:1015 #, c-format msgid "Error getting filesystem info: %s" msgstr "Impossible d'obténer las informacions del sistèma de fichièrs : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:1183 msgid "Can't rename root directory" msgstr "Impossible de renomenar lo repertòri raiç" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:1203 ../gio/glocalfile.c:1229 #, c-format msgid "Error renaming file: %s" msgstr "Error al cambiament de nom del fichièr : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:1212 msgid "Can't rename file, filename already exists" msgstr "Impossible de renomenar lo fichièr perque aqueste nom es ja utilizat" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:1225 ../gio/glocalfile.c:2252 ../gio/glocalfile.c:2281 #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:2441 ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:549 msgid "Invalid filename" msgstr "Nom de fichièr invalid" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:1392 ../gio/glocalfile.c:1416 msgid "Can't open directory" msgstr "Impossible de dobrir lo repertòri" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:1400 #, c-format msgid "Error opening file: %s" msgstr "Error a la dobertura del fichièr : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:1541 #, c-format msgid "Error removing file: %s" msgstr "Error a la supression del fichièr : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:1925 #, c-format msgid "Error trashing file: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la mise a l'escobilhièr del fichièr : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:1948 #, c-format msgid "Unable to create trash dir %s: %s" msgstr "Impossible de crear lo repertòri de l'escobilhièr %s : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:1969 msgid "Unable to find toplevel directory for trash" msgstr "Impossible de trobar lo repertòri raiç per l'escobilhièr" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:2048 ../gio/glocalfile.c:2068 msgid "Unable to find or create trash directory" msgstr "Impossible de trobar o crear lo repertòri de l'escobilhièr" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:2102 #, c-format msgid "Unable to create trashing info file: %s" msgstr "" "Impossible de crear lo fichièr d'informacions de mise a l'escobilhièr : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:2160 ../gio/glocalfile.c:2165 ../gio/glocalfile.c:2222 #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:2229 #, c-format msgid "Unable to trash file: %s" msgstr "Impossible de metre a l'escobilhièr lo fichièr : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:2230 ../glib/gregex.c:281 msgid "internal error" msgstr "error intèrna" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:2256 #, c-format msgid "Error creating directory: %s" msgstr "Error a la creacion del repertòri : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:2285 #, c-format msgid "Filesystem does not support symbolic links" msgstr "Lo sistèma de fichièrs gerís pas los ligams simbolics" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:2289 #, c-format msgid "Error making symbolic link: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la creacion del ligam simbolic : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:2351 ../gio/glocalfile.c:2445 #, c-format msgid "Error moving file: %s" msgstr "Error al moment del desplaçament del fichièr : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:2374 msgid "Can't move directory over directory" msgstr "Impossible de desplaçar un repertòri per dessús un autre" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:2401 ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:925 #: ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:939 ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:954 #: ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:970 ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:984 msgid "Backup file creation failed" msgstr "La creacion del fichièr de salvament a fracassat" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:2420 #, c-format msgid "Error removing target file: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la supression del fichièr cibla : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:2434 msgid "Move between mounts not supported" msgstr "Lo desplaçament entre punts de montatge es pas pres en carga" #: ../gio/glocalfile.c:2626 #, c-format msgid "Could not determine the disk usage of %s: %s" msgstr "Impossible de determinar l'utilizacion disque de %s : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:721 msgid "Attribute value must be non-NULL" msgstr "La valor d'atribut deu pas èsser « NULL »" #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:728 msgid "Invalid attribute type (string expected)" msgstr "Tipe d'atribut invalid (une cadena es esperada)" #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:735 msgid "Invalid extended attribute name" msgstr "Nom d'atribut espandit invalid" #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:775 #, c-format msgid "Error setting extended attribute '%s': %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la definicion de l'atribut espandit « %s » : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:1575 msgid " (invalid encoding)" msgstr " (encodatge invalid)" #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:1766 ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:803 #, c-format msgid "Error when getting information for file '%s': %s" msgstr "" "Error al moment de l'obtencion de las informacions del fichièr « %s » : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:2017 #, c-format msgid "Error when getting information for file descriptor: %s" msgstr "" "Error al moment de l'obtencion de las informacions del descriptor de fichièr " ": %s" #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:2062 msgid "Invalid attribute type (uint32 expected)" msgstr "Tipe d'atribut invalid (uint32 esperat)" #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:2080 msgid "Invalid attribute type (uint64 expected)" msgstr "Tipe d'atribut invalid (uint64 esperat)" #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:2099 ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:2118 msgid "Invalid attribute type (byte string expected)" msgstr "Tipe d'atribut invalid (cadena d'octets esperada)" #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:2153 msgid "Cannot set permissions on symlinks" msgstr "Impossible de definir de permissions suls ligams simbolics" #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:2169 #, c-format msgid "Error setting permissions: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la definicion de las permissions : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:2220 #, c-format msgid "Error setting owner: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la definicion del proprietari : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:2243 msgid "symlink must be non-NULL" msgstr "un ligam simbolic deu pas èsser « NULL »" #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:2253 ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:2272 #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:2283 #, c-format msgid "Error setting symlink: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la definicion del ligam simbolic : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:2262 msgid "Error setting symlink: file is not a symlink" msgstr "" "Error al moment de la definicion del ligam simbolic : lo fichièr es pas un " "ligam simbolic" #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:2388 #, c-format msgid "Error setting modification or access time: %s" msgstr "" "Error al moment de la definicion de l'ora de modificacion o d'accès : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:2411 msgid "SELinux context must be non-NULL" msgstr "Lo contèxte SELinux deu pas èsser « NULL »" #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:2426 #, c-format msgid "Error setting SELinux context: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la definicion del contèxte SELinux : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:2433 msgid "SELinux is not enabled on this system" msgstr "SELinux es pas activé sus aqueste sistèma" #: ../gio/glocalfileinfo.c:2525 #, c-format msgid "Setting attribute %s not supported" msgstr "La definicion de l'atribut %s es pas presa en carga" #: ../gio/glocalfileinputstream.c:168 ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:694 #, c-format msgid "Error reading from file: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la lectura del fichièr : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfileinputstream.c:199 ../gio/glocalfileinputstream.c:211 #: ../gio/glocalfileinputstream.c:225 ../gio/glocalfileinputstream.c:333 #: ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:456 ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:1002 #, c-format msgid "Error seeking in file: %s" msgstr "Error de posicionament dins lo fichièr : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfileinputstream.c:255 ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:246 #: ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:340 #, c-format msgid "Error closing file: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la tampadura del fichièr : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfilemonitor.c:840 msgid "Unable to find default local file monitor type" msgstr "Impossible de trobar lo tipe de monitor de fichièr local per defaut" #: ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:194 ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:226 #: ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:715 #, c-format msgid "Error writing to file: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de l'escritura del fichièr : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:273 #, c-format msgid "Error removing old backup link: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la supression de l'ancian ligam de salvament : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:287 ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:300 #, c-format msgid "Error creating backup copy: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la creacion de la còpia de salvament : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:318 #, c-format msgid "Error renaming temporary file: %s" msgstr "Error al moment del cambiament de nom del fichièr temporari : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:502 ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:1053 #, c-format msgid "Error truncating file: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la troncadura del fichièr : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:555 ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:785 #: ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:1034 ../gio/gsubprocess.c:360 #, c-format msgid "Error opening file '%s': %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la dobertura del fichièr « %s » : %s" #: ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:816 msgid "Target file is a directory" msgstr "Lo fichièr cibla es un repertòri" #: ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:821 msgid "Target file is not a regular file" msgstr "Lo fichièr cibla es pas un fichièr estandard" #: ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:833 msgid "The file was externally modified" msgstr "Lo fichièr es estat modificat exteriorament" #: ../gio/glocalfileoutputstream.c:1018 #, c-format msgid "Error removing old file: %s" msgstr "Error a la supression de l'ancian fichièr : %s" #: ../gio/gmemoryinputstream.c:471 ../gio/gmemoryoutputstream.c:771 msgid "Invalid GSeekType supplied" msgstr "Lo tipe GSeekType provesit es pas valid" #: ../gio/gmemoryinputstream.c:481 msgid "Invalid seek request" msgstr "Requête « seek » invalida" #: ../gio/gmemoryinputstream.c:505 msgid "Cannot truncate GMemoryInputStream" msgstr "Impossible de troncar GMemoryInputStream" #: ../gio/gmemoryoutputstream.c:567 msgid "Memory output stream not resizable" msgstr "Lo flux de sortida memòria es pas redimensionnable" #: ../gio/gmemoryoutputstream.c:583 msgid "Failed to resize memory output stream" msgstr "Lo redimensionnement del flux de sortida memòria a fracassat" #: ../gio/gmemoryoutputstream.c:673 msgid "" "Amount of memory required to process the write is larger than available " "address space" msgstr "" "La quantitat de memòria nécessaire per effectuer l'escritura es mai granda " "que l'espaci d'adressatge disponible" #: ../gio/gmemoryoutputstream.c:781 msgid "Requested seek before the beginning of the stream" msgstr "Posicionament demandat avant lo començament del flux" #: ../gio/gmemoryoutputstream.c:796 msgid "Requested seek beyond the end of the stream" msgstr "Posicionament demandat aprèp la fin del flux" #. Translators: This is an error #. * message for mount objects that #. * don't implement unmount. #: ../gio/gmount.c:393 msgid "mount doesn't implement \"unmount\"" msgstr "mount implementa pas lo démontatge (« unmount »)" #. Translators: This is an error #. * message for mount objects that #. * don't implement eject. #: ../gio/gmount.c:469 msgid "mount doesn't implement \"eject\"" msgstr "mount implementa pas l'ejeccion (« eject »)" #. Translators: This is an error #. * message for mount objects that #. * don't implement any of unmount or unmount_with_operation. #: ../gio/gmount.c:547 msgid "mount doesn't implement \"unmount\" or \"unmount_with_operation\"" msgstr "" "mount implementa pas lo démontatge (« unmount » o « unmount_with_operation »)" #. Translators: This is an error #. * message for mount objects that #. * don't implement any of eject or eject_with_operation. #: ../gio/gmount.c:632 msgid "mount doesn't implement \"eject\" or \"eject_with_operation\"" msgstr "" "mount implementa pas l'ejeccion (« eject » o « eject_with_operation »)" #. Translators: This is an error #. * message for mount objects that #. * don't implement remount. #: ../gio/gmount.c:720 msgid "mount doesn't implement \"remount\"" msgstr "mount implementa pas lo remontatge (« remount »)" #. Translators: This is an error #. * message for mount objects that #. * don't implement content type guessing. #: ../gio/gmount.c:802 msgid "mount doesn't implement content type guessing" msgstr "mount implementa pas l'estimation del tipe de contengut" #. Translators: This is an error #. * message for mount objects that #. * don't implement content type guessing. #: ../gio/gmount.c:889 msgid "mount doesn't implement synchronous content type guessing" msgstr "mount implementa pas la supposition d'un tipe de contengut synchrone" #: ../gio/gnetworkaddress.c:378 #, c-format msgid "Hostname '%s' contains '[' but not ']'" msgstr "Lo nom d'òste « %s » compòrta « [ » mas pas « ] »" #: ../gio/gnetworkmonitorbase.c:206 ../gio/gnetworkmonitorbase.c:309 msgid "Network unreachable" msgstr "Ret inaccessible" #: ../gio/gnetworkmonitorbase.c:244 ../gio/gnetworkmonitorbase.c:274 msgid "Host unreachable" msgstr "Òste inaccessible" #: ../gio/gnetworkmonitornetlink.c:96 ../gio/gnetworkmonitornetlink.c:108 #: ../gio/gnetworkmonitornetlink.c:127 #, c-format msgid "Could not create network monitor: %s" msgstr "Impossible de crear lo monitor de ret : %s" #: ../gio/gnetworkmonitornetlink.c:117 msgid "Could not create network monitor: " msgstr "Impossible de crear lo monitor de ret : " #: ../gio/gnetworkmonitornetlink.c:175 msgid "Could not get network status: " msgstr "Impossible d'obténer l'estatut de la ret : " #: ../gio/goutputstream.c:212 ../gio/goutputstream.c:560 msgid "Output stream doesn't implement write" msgstr "Lo flux de sortida implementa pas « write »" #: ../gio/goutputstream.c:521 ../gio/goutputstream.c:1222 msgid "Source stream is already closed" msgstr "Lo flux font es ja tampat" #: ../gio/gresolver.c:330 ../gio/gthreadedresolver.c:116 #: ../gio/gthreadedresolver.c:126 #, c-format msgid "Error resolving '%s': %s" msgstr "Error de resolucion de « %s » : %s" #: ../gio/gresource.c:304 ../gio/gresource.c:555 ../gio/gresource.c:572 #: ../gio/gresource.c:693 ../gio/gresource.c:762 ../gio/gresource.c:823 #: ../gio/gresource.c:903 ../gio/gresourcefile.c:453 ../gio/gresourcefile.c:576 #: ../gio/gresourcefile.c:713 #, c-format msgid "The resource at '%s' does not exist" msgstr "La ressorsa dins « %s » existís pas" #: ../gio/gresource.c:469 #, c-format msgid "The resource at '%s' failed to decompress" msgstr "La descompression de la ressorsa dins « %s » a pas réussi" #: ../gio/gresourcefile.c:709 #, c-format msgid "The resource at '%s' is not a directory" msgstr "La ressorsa dins « %s » es pas un repertòri" #: ../gio/gresourcefile.c:917 msgid "Input stream doesn't implement seek" msgstr "Lo flux en entrada implementa pas « seek » (lo posicionament)" #: ../gio/gresource-tool.c:494 msgid "List sections containing resources in an elf FILE" msgstr "Enumèra las seccions contenant las ressorsas dins un fichièr « elf »" #: ../gio/gresource-tool.c:500 msgid "" "List resources\n" "If SECTION is given, only list resources in this section\n" "If PATH is given, only list matching resources" msgstr "" "Enumèra las ressorsas\n" "Se SECCION es provesida, énumère solament las ressorsas de aquesta seccion\n" "Se CAMIN es fourni, énumère solament las ressorsas correspondantes" #: ../gio/gresource-tool.c:503 ../gio/gresource-tool.c:513 msgid "FILE [PATH]" msgstr "FICHIÈR [CAMIN]" #: ../gio/gresource-tool.c:504 ../gio/gresource-tool.c:514 #: ../gio/gresource-tool.c:521 msgid "SECTION" msgstr "SECCION" #: ../gio/gresource-tool.c:509 msgid "" "List resources with details\n" "If SECTION is given, only list resources in this section\n" "If PATH is given, only list matching resources\n" "Details include the section, size and compression" msgstr "" "Enumèra las ressorsas en detalh\n" "Se SECCION es provesida, énumère solament las ressorsas de aquesta seccion\n" "Se CAMIN es fourni, énumère solament las ressorsas correspondantes\n" "Los detalhs incluent la seccion, la taille e la compression" #: ../gio/gresource-tool.c:519 msgid "Extract a resource file to stdout" msgstr "Extrait un fichièr ressorsa cap a la sortida estandard" #: ../gio/gresource-tool.c:520 msgid "FILE PATH" msgstr "CAMIN DEL FICHIÈR" #: ../gio/gresource-tool.c:534 msgid "" "Usage:\n" " gresource [--section SECTION] COMMAND [ARGS...]\n" "\n" "Commands:\n" " help Show this information\n" " sections List resource sections\n" " list List resources\n" " details List resources with details\n" " extract Extract a resource\n" "\n" "Use 'gresource help COMMAND' to get detailed help.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "Utilizacion :\n" " gresource [--seccion SECCION] COMANDA [ARGUMENTS...]\n" "\n" "Comandas :\n" " help Aficha aquesta informacion\n" " seccions Enumèra las seccions de ressorsas\n" " list Enumèra las ressorsas\n" " details Enumèra las ressorsas en detalh\n" " extract Extrait una ressorsa\n" "\n" "Utilizatz « gresource help COMANDA » per obténer d'ajuda detalhada.\n" "\n" #: ../gio/gresource-tool.c:548 #, c-format msgid "" "Usage:\n" " gresource %s%s%s %s\n" "\n" "%s\n" "\n" msgstr "" "Utilizacion :\n" " gresource %s%s%s %s\n" "\n" "%s\n" "\n" #: ../gio/gresource-tool.c:555 msgid " SECTION An (optional) elf section name\n" msgstr " SECCION Un nom de seccion elf (facultatiu)\n" #: ../gio/gresource-tool.c:559 ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:639 msgid " COMMAND The (optional) command to explain\n" msgstr " COMANDA La comanda (facultativa) d'explicar\n" #: ../gio/gresource-tool.c:565 msgid " FILE An elf file (a binary or a shared library)\n" msgstr "" " FICHIÈR Un fichièr elf (un binari o una bibliotèca partejada)\n" #: ../gio/gresource-tool.c:568 msgid "" " FILE An elf file (a binary or a shared library)\n" " or a compiled resource file\n" msgstr "" " FICHIÈR Un fichièr elf (un binari o una bibliotèca partejada)\n" " o un fichièr ressorsa compilat\n" #: ../gio/gresource-tool.c:572 msgid "[PATH]" msgstr "[CAMIN]" #: ../gio/gresource-tool.c:574 msgid " PATH An (optional) resource path (may be partial)\n" msgstr "" " CAMIN Un camin (facultatiu) de ressorsa (peut èsser parcial)\n" #: ../gio/gresource-tool.c:575 msgid "PATH" msgstr "CAMIN" #: ../gio/gresource-tool.c:577 msgid " PATH A resource path\n" msgstr " CAMIN Un camin de ressorsa\n" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:51 ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:72 #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:830 #, c-format msgid "No such schema '%s'\n" msgstr "L'esquèma « %s » existís pas\n" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:57 #, c-format msgid "Schema '%s' is not relocatable (path must not be specified)\n" msgstr "" "L'esquèma « %s » es pas readreçable (lo camin deu pas èsser indicat)\n" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:78 #, c-format msgid "Schema '%s' is relocatable (path must be specified)\n" msgstr "L'esquèma « %s » es readreçable (lo camin deu èsser indicat)\n" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:92 #, c-format msgid "Empty path given.\n" msgstr "Camin indicat void.\n" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:98 #, c-format msgid "Path must begin with a slash (/)\n" msgstr "Un camin deu començar per una barre oblique (/)\n" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:104 #, c-format msgid "Path must end with a slash (/)\n" msgstr "Un camin deu s'acabar per una barre oblique (/)\n" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:110 #, c-format msgid "Path must not contain two adjacent slashes (//)\n" msgstr "Un camin deu pas conténer doas barres obliques a la suite (//)\n" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:481 #, c-format msgid "The provided value is outside of the valid range\n" msgstr "La valor donada es en dehors del domeni de validitat\n" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:488 #, c-format msgid "The key is not writable\n" msgstr "La clau pòt pas èsser écrite\n" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:524 msgid "List the installed (non-relocatable) schemas" msgstr "Listar los esquèmas (non-readreçables) installats" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:530 msgid "List the installed relocatable schemas" msgstr "Listar los esquèmas readreçables installats" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:536 msgid "List the keys in SCHEMA" msgstr "Listar las claus del ESQUÈMA" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:537 ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:543 #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:580 msgid "SCHEMA[:PATH]" msgstr "ESQUÈMA[:CAMIN]" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:542 msgid "List the children of SCHEMA" msgstr "Listar los enfants del ESQUÈMA" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:548 msgid "" "List keys and values, recursively\n" "If no SCHEMA is given, list all keys\n" msgstr "" "Listar las claus e las valors recursivament\n" "Se cap d'ESQUÈMA es pas indicat, listar totas las claus\n" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:550 msgid "[SCHEMA[:PATH]]" msgstr "[ESQUÈMA[:CAMIN]]" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:555 msgid "Get the value of KEY" msgstr "Obténer la valor de KEY" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:556 ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:562 #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:574 ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:586 msgid "SCHEMA[:PATH] KEY" msgstr "ESQUÈMA[:CAMIN] CLAU" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:561 msgid "Query the range of valid values for KEY" msgstr "Demandar la plaja de validitat de las valors de la CLAU" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:567 msgid "Set the value of KEY to VALUE" msgstr "Definir la valor de CLAU a VALOR" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:568 msgid "SCHEMA[:PATH] KEY VALUE" msgstr "ESQUÈMA[:CAMIN] CLAU VALOR" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:573 msgid "Reset KEY to its default value" msgstr "Rétablir CLAU a sa valor per defaut" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:579 msgid "Reset all keys in SCHEMA to their defaults" msgstr "Reïnicializar totas las claus de ESQUÈMA a lors valors per defaut" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:585 msgid "Check if KEY is writable" msgstr "Tester se CLAU es inscriptible" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:591 msgid "" "Monitor KEY for changes.\n" "If no KEY is specified, monitor all keys in SCHEMA.\n" "Use ^C to stop monitoring.\n" msgstr "" "Contrarotlar las modificacions de CLAU.\n" "Se CLAU es pas definit, contraròtla totas las claus dins ESQUÈMA.\n" "Quichar ^C per metre fin al contraròtle.\n" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:594 msgid "SCHEMA[:PATH] [KEY]" msgstr "ESQUÈMA[:CAMIN] [CLAU]" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:606 msgid "" "Usage:\n" " gsettings --version\n" " gsettings [--schemadir SCHEMADIR] COMMAND [ARGS...]\n" "\n" "Commands:\n" " help Show this information\n" " list-schemas List installed schemas\n" " list-relocatable-schemas List relocatable schemas\n" " list-keys List keys in a schema\n" " list-children List children of a schema\n" " list-recursively List keys and values, recursively\n" " range Queries the range of a key\n" " get Get the value of a key\n" " set Set the value of a key\n" " reset Reset the value of a key\n" " reset-recursively Reset all values in a given schema\n" " writable Check if a key is writable\n" " monitor Watch for changes\n" "\n" "Use 'gsettings help COMMAND' to get detailed help.\n" "\n" msgstr "" "Utilizacion :\n" " gsettings --version\n" " gsettings [--schemadir REPERTÒRI2ESQUÈMA] COMANDA [PARAMÈTRES...]\n" "\n" "Comandas :\n" " help Aficha la presenta informacion\n" " list-schemas Lista los esquèmas installats\n" " list-relocatable-schemas Lista los esquèmas readreçables\n" " list-keys Lista las claus dins un esquèma\n" " list-children Lista los enfants d'un esquèma\n" " list-recursively Lista las claus e las valors, recursivament\n" " range Demande lo domeni de validitat de la clau\n" " get Renvia la valor d'una clau\n" " set Definís la valor d'una clau\n" " reset Restablís la valor per defaut d'una clau\n" " reset-recursively Restablís totas las valors dins un esquèma " "donné\n" " writable Tèsta se la clau es inscriptible\n" " monitor Contraròtla las modificacions\n" "\n" "Picatz 'gsettings help COMANDA' per una ajuda detalhada.\n" "\n" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:629 #, c-format msgid "" "Usage:\n" " gsettings [--schemadir SCHEMADIR] %s %s\n" "\n" "%s\n" "\n" msgstr "" "Utilizacion :\n" " gsettings [--schemadir REPERTÒRI2ESQUÈMA] %s %s\n" "\n" "%s\n" "\n" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:635 msgid " SCHEMADIR A directory to search for additional schemas\n" msgstr "" " REPERTÒRI2ESQUÈMA Un repertòri de recèrca d'esquèmas suplementaris\n" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:643 msgid "" " SCHEMA The name of the schema\n" " PATH The path, for relocatable schemas\n" msgstr "" " ESQUÈMA Lo nom de l'esquèma\n" " CAMIN Lo camin, pels esquèmas readreçables\n" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:648 msgid " KEY The (optional) key within the schema\n" msgstr " CLAU La clau (opcionala) dins l'esquèma\n" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:652 msgid " KEY The key within the schema\n" msgstr " CLAU La clau dins l'esquèma\n" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:656 msgid " VALUE The value to set\n" msgstr " VALOR La valor a definir\n" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:711 #, c-format msgid "Could not load schemas from %s: %s\n" msgstr "Impossible de cargar los esquèmas dempuèi %s : %s\n" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:788 #, c-format msgid "Empty schema name given\n" msgstr "Nom d'esquèma provesit void\n" #: ../gio/gsettings-tool.c:843 #, c-format msgid "No such key '%s'\n" msgstr "La clau « %s » existís pas\n" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:364 msgid "Invalid socket, not initialized" msgstr "Connector invalid, pas inicializat" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:371 #, c-format msgid "Invalid socket, initialization failed due to: %s" msgstr "Connector invalid, l'initialisation a fracassat en raison de : %s" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:379 msgid "Socket is already closed" msgstr "Lo connector es ja tampat" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:394 ../gio/gsocket.c:2751 ../gio/gsocket.c:3897 #: ../gio/gsocket.c:3952 msgid "Socket I/O timed out" msgstr "Entradas/sortidas fòra relambi sul connector" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:526 #, c-format msgid "creating GSocket from fd: %s" msgstr "creacion de GSocket a partir del descriptor de fichièr : %s" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:554 ../gio/gsocket.c:608 ../gio/gsocket.c:615 #, c-format msgid "Unable to create socket: %s" msgstr "Impossible de crear lo connector : %s" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:608 msgid "Unknown family was specified" msgstr "Indicacion d'una familha desconeguda" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:615 msgid "Unknown protocol was specified" msgstr "Indicacion d'un protocòl desconegut" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:1925 #, c-format msgid "could not get local address: %s" msgstr "impossible d'obténer l'adreça locale : %s" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:1968 #, c-format msgid "could not get remote address: %s" msgstr "impossible d'obténer l'adreça distante : %s" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:2034 #, c-format msgid "could not listen: %s" msgstr "impossible d'escotar : %s" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:2133 #, c-format msgid "Error binding to address: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de liaison a l'adreça : %s" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:2248 ../gio/gsocket.c:2285 #, c-format msgid "Error joining multicast group: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la connexion al grop multicast : %s" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:2249 ../gio/gsocket.c:2286 #, c-format msgid "Error leaving multicast group: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la desconnexion del grop multicast : %s" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:2250 msgid "No support for source-specific multicast" msgstr "Pas cap de presa en carga pel multicast especific a la font" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:2470 #, c-format msgid "Error accepting connection: %s" msgstr "Error d'acceptacion de la connexion : %s" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:2593 msgid "Connection in progress" msgstr "Connexion en cors" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:2644 msgid "Unable to get pending error: " msgstr "Impossible d'obténer l'error actuala : " #: ../gio/gsocket.c:2816 #, c-format msgid "Error receiving data: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la recepcion de las donadas : %s" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:3013 #, c-format msgid "Error sending data: %s" msgstr "Error al moment del mandadís de las donadas : %s" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:3200 #, c-format msgid "Unable to shutdown socket: %s" msgstr "Impossible de tampar lo connector : %s" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:3281 #, c-format msgid "Error closing socket: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la tampadura del connector : %s" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:3890 #, c-format msgid "Waiting for socket condition: %s" msgstr "En espèra de l'estat del connector : %s" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:4362 ../gio/gsocket.c:4442 ../gio/gsocket.c:4620 #, c-format msgid "Error sending message: %s" msgstr "Error de mandadís de messatge : %s" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:4386 msgid "GSocketControlMessage not supported on Windows" msgstr "GSocketControlMessatge es pas pres en carga per Windows" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:4841 ../gio/gsocket.c:4914 ../gio/gsocket.c:5141 #, c-format msgid "Error receiving message: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la recepcion del messatge : %s" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:5413 #, c-format msgid "Unable to read socket credentials: %s" msgstr "Impossible de legir las donadas d'autentificacion del connector : %s" #: ../gio/gsocket.c:5422 msgid "g_socket_get_credentials not implemented for this OS" msgstr "" "g_socket_get_credentials es pas implementat sus aqueste sistèma operatiu" #: ../gio/gsocketclient.c:176 #, c-format msgid "Could not connect to proxy server %s: " msgstr "Impossible de se connectar al servidor mandatari %s : " #: ../gio/gsocketclient.c:190 #, c-format msgid "Could not connect to %s: " msgstr "Impossible de se connectar a %s : " #: ../gio/gsocketclient.c:192 msgid "Could not connect: " msgstr "Impossible de se connectar : " #: ../gio/gsocketclient.c:1027 ../gio/gsocketclient.c:1599 msgid "Unknown error on connect" msgstr "Error desconeguda a la connexion" #: ../gio/gsocketclient.c:1081 ../gio/gsocketclient.c:1535 msgid "Proxying over a non-TCP connection is not supported." msgstr "L'usage d'un proxy es pas pres en carga dins una connexion non-TCP." #: ../gio/gsocketclient.c:1110 ../gio/gsocketclient.c:1561 #, c-format msgid "Proxy protocol '%s' is not supported." msgstr "Lo protocòl del proxy « %s » es pas pres en carga." #: ../gio/gsocketlistener.c:218 msgid "Listener is already closed" msgstr "Lo processus d'escota es ja tampat" #: ../gio/gsocketlistener.c:264 msgid "Added socket is closed" msgstr "Lo connector ret apondut es tampat" #: ../gio/gsocks4aproxy.c:118 #, c-format msgid "SOCKSv4 does not support IPv6 address '%s'" msgstr "SOCKSv4 pren pas en carga l'adreça IPv6 « %s »" #: ../gio/gsocks4aproxy.c:136 msgid "Username is too long for SOCKSv4 protocol" msgstr "Lo nom d'utilizaire es tròp long pel protocòl SOCKSv4" #: ../gio/gsocks4aproxy.c:153 #, c-format msgid "Hostname '%s' is too long for SOCKSv4 protocol" msgstr "Lo nom d'òste « %s » es tròp long pel protocòl SOCKSv4" #: ../gio/gsocks4aproxy.c:179 msgid "The server is not a SOCKSv4 proxy server." msgstr "Lo servidor es pas un servidor mandatari SOCKSv4." #: ../gio/gsocks4aproxy.c:186 msgid "Connection through SOCKSv4 server was rejected" msgstr "La connexion a travèrs lo servidor SOCKSv4 es estada regetada" #: ../gio/gsocks5proxy.c:153 ../gio/gsocks5proxy.c:324 #: ../gio/gsocks5proxy.c:334 msgid "The server is not a SOCKSv5 proxy server." msgstr "Lo servidor es pas un servidor mandatari SOCKSv5." #: ../gio/gsocks5proxy.c:167 msgid "The SOCKSv5 proxy requires authentication." msgstr "Lo servidor mandatari SOCKSv5 necessita una autentificacion." #: ../gio/gsocks5proxy.c:177 msgid "" "The SOCKSv5 proxy requires an authentication method that is not supported by " "GLib." msgstr "" "Lo protocòl SOCKSv5 necessita un metòde d'autentificacion qu'es pas presa en " "carga per GLib." #: ../gio/gsocks5proxy.c:206 msgid "Username or password is too long for SOCKSv5 protocol." msgstr "Lo nom d'utilizaire o lo senhal es tròp long pel protocòl SOCKSv5." #: ../gio/gsocks5proxy.c:236 msgid "SOCKSv5 authentication failed due to wrong username or password." msgstr "" "L'autentificacion SOCKSv5 a fracassat a cause d'un marrit nom d'utilizaire o " "senhal." #: ../gio/gsocks5proxy.c:286 #, c-format msgid "Hostname '%s' is too long for SOCKSv5 protocol" msgstr "Lo nom d'òste « %s » es tròp long pel protocòl SOCKSv5" #: ../gio/gsocks5proxy.c:348 msgid "The SOCKSv5 proxy server uses unknown address type." msgstr "Lo servidor mandatari SOCKSv5 utilise un tipe d'adreça desconegut." #: ../gio/gsocks5proxy.c:355 msgid "Internal SOCKSv5 proxy server error." msgstr "Error intèrna de servidor mandatari SOCKSv5." #: ../gio/gsocks5proxy.c:361 msgid "SOCKSv5 connection not allowed by ruleset." msgstr "La connexion SOCKSv5 es pas autorizada per la règla." #: ../gio/gsocks5proxy.c:368 msgid "Host unreachable through SOCKSv5 server." msgstr "L'òste es pas accessible a travèrs lo servidor SOCKSv5." #: ../gio/gsocks5proxy.c:374 msgid "Network unreachable through SOCKSv5 proxy." msgstr "La ret es pas accessibla a travèrs lo proxy SOCKSv5." #: ../gio/gsocks5proxy.c:380 msgid "Connection refused through SOCKSv5 proxy." msgstr "Connexion a travèrs lo servidor mandatari SOCKSv5 refusada." #: ../gio/gsocks5proxy.c:386 msgid "SOCKSv5 proxy does not support 'connect' command." msgstr "" "Lo servidor mandatari SOCKSv5 pren pas en carga la comanda « connect »." #: ../gio/gsocks5proxy.c:392 msgid "SOCKSv5 proxy does not support provided address type." msgstr "" "Lo servidor mandatari SOCKSv5 pren pas en carga lo tipe d'adreça fourni." #: ../gio/gsocks5proxy.c:398 msgid "Unknown SOCKSv5 proxy error." msgstr "Error desconeguda del servidor mandatari SOCKSv5." #: ../gio/gthemedicon.c:518 #, c-format msgid "Can't handle version %d of GThemedIcon encoding" msgstr "Impossible de gerir la version %d de l'encodatge GThemedIcon" #: ../gio/gthreadedresolver.c:546 ../gio/gthreadedresolver.c:626 #: ../gio/gthreadedresolver.c:724 ../gio/gthreadedresolver.c:774 #, c-format msgid "No DNS record of the requested type for '%s'" msgstr "Cap d'enregistrament DNS del tipe pas demandat per « %s »" #: ../gio/gthreadedresolver.c:211 #, c-format msgid "Error reverse-resolving '%s': %s" msgstr "Error de resolucion invèrsa de « %s » : %s" #: ../gio/gthreadedresolver.c:551 ../gio/gthreadedresolver.c:729 #, c-format msgid "Temporarily unable to resolve '%s'" msgstr "Impossible temporàriament de resòlvre « %s »" #: ../gio/gthreadedresolver.c:556 ../gio/gthreadedresolver.c:734 #, c-format msgid "Error resolving '%s'" msgstr "Error de resolucion de « %s »" #: ../gio/gtlscertificate.c:250 msgid "Cannot decrypt PEM-encoded private key" msgstr "Impossible de deschifrar la clau privada encodada-PEM" #: ../gio/gtlscertificate.c:255 msgid "No PEM-encoded private key found" msgstr "Cap de clau privada pas encodada PEM trobada" #: ../gio/gtlscertificate.c:265 msgid "Could not parse PEM-encoded private key" msgstr "Impossible d'analisar la clau privada encodada-PEM" #: ../gio/gtlscertificate.c:290 msgid "No PEM-encoded certificate found" msgstr "Cap de certificat encodat-PEM pas trobat" #: ../gio/gtlscertificate.c:299 msgid "Could not parse PEM-encoded certificate" msgstr "Impossible d'analisar lo certificat encodat-PEM" #: ../gio/gtlspassword.c:111 msgid "" "This is the last chance to enter the password correctly before your access " "is locked out." msgstr "" "Aquò es vòstra darrièra chança de picar un senhal corrècte abans que vòstre " "accès siá blocat." #: ../gio/gtlspassword.c:113 msgid "" "Several password entered have been incorrect, and your access will be locked " "out after further failures." msgstr "" "Mantun senhal picats son estats incorrèctes, vòstre accès serà blocat aprèp " "qualques fracasses mai." #: ../gio/gtlspassword.c:115 msgid "The password entered is incorrect." msgstr "Lo senhal picat es incorrècte." #: ../gio/gunixconnection.c:166 ../gio/gunixconnection.c:561 #, c-format msgid "Expecting 1 control message, got %d" msgid_plural "Expecting 1 control message, got %d" msgstr[0] "1 messatge de contraròtle esperat, %d recebut" msgstr[1] "1 messatge de contraròtle esperat, %d recebuts" #: ../gio/gunixconnection.c:182 ../gio/gunixconnection.c:573 msgid "Unexpected type of ancillary data" msgstr "Tipe de donadas auxiliaires inesperat" #: ../gio/gunixconnection.c:200 #, c-format msgid "Expecting one fd, but got %d\n" msgid_plural "Expecting one fd, but got %d\n" msgstr[0] "Un descriptor de fichièr esperat, %d obtenu\n" msgstr[1] "Un descriptor de fichièr esperat, %d obtenus\n" #: ../gio/gunixconnection.c:219 msgid "Received invalid fd" msgstr "Lo descriptor de fichièr recebut es pas valid" #: ../gio/gunixconnection.c:355 msgid "Error sending credentials: " msgstr "Error al moment del mandadís de l'identificacion : " #: ../gio/gunixconnection.c:503 #, c-format msgid "Error checking if SO_PASSCRED is enabled for socket: %s" msgstr "" "Error al moment de la verificacion de l'activacion de SO_PASSCRED pel " "connector : %s" #: ../gio/gunixconnection.c:518 #, c-format msgid "Error enabling SO_PASSCRED: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de l'activacion de SO_PASSCRED : %s" #: ../gio/gunixconnection.c:547 msgid "" "Expecting to read a single byte for receiving credentials but read zero bytes" msgstr "" "Lectura d'un unic octet esperada a la recepcion de l'identificacion, mas pas " "cap d'octet lu" #: ../gio/gunixconnection.c:587 #, c-format msgid "Not expecting control message, but got %d" msgstr "Pas de messatge de contraròtle esperat, %d recebut(s)" #: ../gio/gunixconnection.c:611 #, c-format msgid "Error while disabling SO_PASSCRED: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de la desactivacion de SO_PASSCRED : %s" #: ../gio/gunixinputstream.c:369 ../gio/gunixinputstream.c:390 #, c-format msgid "Error reading from file descriptor: %s" msgstr "Error de lectura a partir del descriptor de fichièr : %s" #: ../gio/gunixinputstream.c:423 ../gio/gunixoutputstream.c:409 #: ../gio/gwin32inputstream.c:217 ../gio/gwin32outputstream.c:204 #, c-format msgid "Error closing file descriptor: %s" msgstr "Error de tampadura del descriptor de fichièr : %s" #: ../gio/gunixmounts.c:2099 ../gio/gunixmounts.c:2152 msgid "Filesystem root" msgstr "Raiç del sistèma de fichièrs" #: ../gio/gunixoutputstream.c:355 ../gio/gunixoutputstream.c:376 #, c-format msgid "Error writing to file descriptor: %s" msgstr "Error d'escritura cap a lo descriptor de fichièr : %s" #: ../gio/gunixsocketaddress.c:239 msgid "Abstract UNIX domain socket addresses not supported on this system" msgstr "" "Las adreças abstraites de connector ret de domeni UNIX son pas presas en " "carga sus aqueste sistèma" #: ../gio/gvolume.c:437 msgid "volume doesn't implement eject" msgstr "lo volum implementa pas l'ejeccion (« eject »)" #. Translators: This is an error #. * message for volume objects that #. * don't implement any of eject or eject_with_operation. #: ../gio/gvolume.c:514 msgid "volume doesn't implement eject or eject_with_operation" msgstr "" "lo volum implementa pas l'ejeccion (« eject » o « eject_with_operation »)" #: ../gio/gwin32appinfo.c:274 msgid "Can't find application" msgstr "Impossible de trouver l'application" #: ../gio/gwin32appinfo.c:303 #, c-format msgid "Error launching application: %s" msgstr "Erreur lors du lancement de l'application : %s" #: ../gio/gwin32appinfo.c:342 msgid "URIs not supported" msgstr "URI non pris en charge" #: ../gio/gwin32appinfo.c:378 msgid "association changes not supported on win32" msgstr "" "Les modifications d'association ne sont pas prises en en charge sur win32" #: ../gio/gwin32appinfo.c:390 msgid "Association creation not supported on win32" msgstr "La création d'associations n'est pas prise en charge sur win32" #: ../gio/gwin32inputstream.c:185 #, c-format msgid "Error reading from handle: %s" msgstr "Error de lectura a partir de l'identificador : %s" #: ../gio/gwin32inputstream.c:232 ../gio/gwin32outputstream.c:219 #, c-format msgid "Error closing handle: %s" msgstr "Error de tampadura de l'identificador : %s" #: ../gio/gwin32outputstream.c:172 #, c-format msgid "Error writing to handle: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de l'escritura cap a l'identificador : %s" #: ../gio/gzlibcompressor.c:394 ../gio/gzlibdecompressor.c:347 msgid "Not enough memory" msgstr "Memòria insufisenta" #: ../gio/gzlibcompressor.c:401 ../gio/gzlibdecompressor.c:354 #, c-format msgid "Internal error: %s" msgstr "Error intèrna : %s" #: ../gio/gzlibcompressor.c:414 ../gio/gzlibdecompressor.c:368 msgid "Need more input" msgstr "Entrada que necessita mai de donadas" #: ../gio/gzlibdecompressor.c:340 msgid "Invalid compressed data" msgstr "Donadas coompressadas invalidas" #: ../gio/tests/gdbus-daemon.c:18 msgid "Address to listen on" msgstr "Adreça a escotar" #: ../gio/tests/gdbus-daemon.c:19 msgid "Ignored, for compat with GTestDbus" msgstr "Ignorat, per compatibilitat amb GTestDbus" #: ../gio/tests/gdbus-daemon.c:20 msgid "Print address" msgstr "Imprimir l'adreça" #: ../gio/tests/gdbus-daemon.c:21 msgid "Print address in shell mode" msgstr "Imprimir l'adreça en mòde shell" #: ../gio/tests/gdbus-daemon.c:28 msgid "Run a dbus service" msgstr "Executar un servici dbus" #: ../gio/tests/gdbus-daemon.c:42 #, c-format msgid "Wrong args\n" msgstr "Arguments incorrèctes\n" #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:755 #, c-format msgid "Unexpected attribute '%s' for element '%s'" msgstr "Atribut « %s » inesperat per l'element « %s »" #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:766 ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:837 #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:847 ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:954 #, c-format msgid "Attribute '%s' of element '%s' not found" msgstr "L'atribut « %s » de l'element « %s » es introbable" #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:1124 ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:1189 #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:1253 ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:1263 #, c-format msgid "Unexpected tag '%s', tag '%s' expected" msgstr "Balisa « %s » inesperada. La balisa « %s » èra esperada" #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:1149 ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:1163 #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:1231 #, c-format msgid "Unexpected tag '%s' inside '%s'" msgstr "Balisa « %s » inesperada a l'interior de « %s »" #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:1756 msgid "No valid bookmark file found in data dirs" msgstr "" "Impossible de trobar un fichièr de signets valid dins los repertòris de " "donadas" #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:1957 #, c-format msgid "A bookmark for URI '%s' already exists" msgstr "Un signet per l'URI « %s » existís ja" #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:2003 ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:2161 #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:2246 ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:2326 #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:2411 ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:2494 #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:2572 ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:2651 #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:2693 ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:2790 #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:2910 ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:3100 #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:3176 ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:3344 #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:3433 ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:3522 #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:3638 #, c-format msgid "No bookmark found for URI '%s'" msgstr "Cap de signet pas trobat per l'URI « %s »" #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:2335 #, c-format msgid "No MIME type defined in the bookmark for URI '%s'" msgstr "Cap de tipe MIME pas definit dins lo signet per l'URI « %s »" #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:2420 #, c-format msgid "No private flag has been defined in bookmark for URI '%s'" msgstr "" "Cap d'indicator privat es pas definit dins lo signet per l'URI « %s »" #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:2799 #, c-format msgid "No groups set in bookmark for URI '%s'" msgstr "Cap de grop es pas definit dins lo signet per l'URI « %s »" #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:3197 ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:3354 #, c-format msgid "No application with name '%s' registered a bookmark for '%s'" msgstr "" "Cap d'aplicacion nomenada « %s » a pas enregistrat un signet per « %s »" #: ../glib/gbookmarkfile.c:3377 #, c-format msgid "Failed to expand exec line '%s' with URI '%s'" msgstr "" "Fracàs del desvolopament de la linha de comanda « %s » per l'URI « %s »" #: ../glib/gconvert.c:477 ../glib/gutf8.c:849 ../glib/gutf8.c:1061 #: ../glib/gutf8.c:1198 ../glib/gutf8.c:1302 msgid "Partial character sequence at end of input" msgstr "Sequéncia de caractèrs incompleta en fin d'entrada" #: ../glib/gconvert.c:742 #, c-format msgid "Cannot convert fallback '%s' to codeset '%s'" msgstr "" "Impossible de convertir lo caractèr de replec « %s » dins lo jòc de còdes « " "%s »" #: ../glib/gconvert.c:1567 #, c-format msgid "The URI '%s' is not an absolute URI using the \"file\" scheme" msgstr "L'URI « %s » es pas una URI absoluda qu'utiliza lo protocòl « file »" #: ../glib/gconvert.c:1577 #, c-format msgid "The local file URI '%s' may not include a '#'" msgstr "L'URI de fichièr local « %s » pòt pas inclure un caractèr « # »" #: ../glib/gconvert.c:1594 #, c-format msgid "The URI '%s' is invalid" msgstr "L'URI « %s » es pas valid" #: ../glib/gconvert.c:1606 #, c-format msgid "The hostname of the URI '%s' is invalid" msgstr "Lo nom d'òste de l'URI « %s » es pas valid" #: ../glib/gconvert.c:1622 #, c-format msgid "The URI '%s' contains invalidly escaped characters" msgstr "L'URI « %s » conten de caractèrs d'escapament incorrèctes" #: ../glib/gconvert.c:1717 #, c-format msgid "The pathname '%s' is not an absolute path" msgstr "Lo camin « %s » es pas un camin absolu" #: ../glib/gconvert.c:1727 msgid "Invalid hostname" msgstr "Nom d'òste invalid" #. Translators: 'before midday' indicator #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:201 msgctxt "GDateTime" msgid "AM" msgstr "AM" #. Translators: 'after midday' indicator #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:203 msgctxt "GDateTime" msgid "PM" msgstr "PM" #. Translators: this is the preferred format for expressing the date and the time #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:206 msgctxt "GDateTime" msgid "%a %b %e %H:%M:%S %Y" msgstr "%a %d %b %Y %T %Z" #. Translators: this is the preferred format for expressing the date #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:209 msgctxt "GDateTime" msgid "%m/%d/%y" msgstr "%d/%m/%y" #. Translators: this is the preferred format for expressing the time #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:212 msgctxt "GDateTime" msgid "%H:%M:%S" msgstr "%H:%M:%S" #. Translators: this is the preferred format for expressing 12 hour time #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:215 msgctxt "GDateTime" msgid "%I:%M:%S %p" msgstr "%I:%M:%S %p" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:228 msgctxt "full month name" msgid "January" msgstr "genièr" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:230 msgctxt "full month name" msgid "February" msgstr "febrièr" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:232 msgctxt "full month name" msgid "March" msgstr "març" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:234 msgctxt "full month name" msgid "April" msgstr "abril" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:236 msgctxt "full month name" msgid "May" msgstr "mai" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:238 msgctxt "full month name" msgid "June" msgstr "junh" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:240 msgctxt "full month name" msgid "July" msgstr "julhet" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:242 msgctxt "full month name" msgid "August" msgstr "agost" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:244 msgctxt "full month name" msgid "September" msgstr "setembre" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:246 msgctxt "full month name" msgid "October" msgstr "octobre" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:248 msgctxt "full month name" msgid "November" msgstr "novembre" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:250 msgctxt "full month name" msgid "December" msgstr "decembre" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:265 msgctxt "abbreviated month name" msgid "Jan" msgstr "gen." #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:267 msgctxt "abbreviated month name" msgid "Feb" msgstr "febr." #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:269 msgctxt "abbreviated month name" msgid "Mar" msgstr "març" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:271 msgctxt "abbreviated month name" msgid "Apr" msgstr "abril" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:273 msgctxt "abbreviated month name" msgid "May" msgstr "mai" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:275 msgctxt "abbreviated month name" msgid "Jun" msgstr "junh" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:277 msgctxt "abbreviated month name" msgid "Jul" msgstr "julh." #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:279 msgctxt "abbreviated month name" msgid "Aug" msgstr "agost" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:281 msgctxt "abbreviated month name" msgid "Sep" msgstr "set." #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:283 msgctxt "abbreviated month name" msgid "Oct" msgstr "oct." #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:285 msgctxt "abbreviated month name" msgid "Nov" msgstr "nov." #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:287 msgctxt "abbreviated month name" msgid "Dec" msgstr "dec." #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:302 msgctxt "full weekday name" msgid "Monday" msgstr "diluns" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:304 msgctxt "full weekday name" msgid "Tuesday" msgstr "dimars" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:306 msgctxt "full weekday name" msgid "Wednesday" msgstr "dimècres" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:308 msgctxt "full weekday name" msgid "Thursday" msgstr "dijòus" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:310 msgctxt "full weekday name" msgid "Friday" msgstr "divendres" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:312 msgctxt "full weekday name" msgid "Saturday" msgstr "dissabte" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:314 msgctxt "full weekday name" msgid "Sunday" msgstr "dimenge" #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:329 msgctxt "abbreviated weekday name" msgid "Mon" msgstr "lun." #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:331 msgctxt "abbreviated weekday name" msgid "Tue" msgstr "mar." #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:333 msgctxt "abbreviated weekday name" msgid "Wed" msgstr "mèr." #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:335 msgctxt "abbreviated weekday name" msgid "Thu" msgstr "jòu." #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:337 msgctxt "abbreviated weekday name" msgid "Fri" msgstr "ven." #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:339 msgctxt "abbreviated weekday name" msgid "Sat" msgstr "sab." #: ../glib/gdatetime.c:341 msgctxt "abbreviated weekday name" msgid "Sun" msgstr "dim." #: ../glib/gdir.c:155 #, c-format msgid "Error opening directory '%s': %s" msgstr "Error a la dobertura del repertòri « %s » : %s" #: ../glib/gfileutils.c:700 ../glib/gfileutils.c:792 #, c-format msgid "Could not allocate %lu byte to read file \"%s\"" msgid_plural "Could not allocate %lu bytes to read file \"%s\"" msgstr[0] "Impossible d'allouer %lu octet per legir lo fichièr « %s »" msgstr[1] "Impossible d'allouer %lu octets per legir lo fichièr « %s »" #: ../glib/gfileutils.c:717 #, c-format msgid "Error reading file '%s': %s" msgstr "Error de lectura del fichièr « %s » : %s" #: ../glib/gfileutils.c:753 #, c-format msgid "File \"%s\" is too large" msgstr "Lo fichièr « %s » es tròp grand" #: ../glib/gfileutils.c:817 #, c-format msgid "Failed to read from file '%s': %s" msgstr "La lectura dempuèi lo fichièr « %s » a fracassat : %s" #: ../glib/gfileutils.c:865 ../glib/gfileutils.c:937 #, c-format msgid "Failed to open file '%s': %s" msgstr "La dobertura del fichièr « %s » a fracassat : %s" #: ../glib/gfileutils.c:877 #, c-format msgid "Failed to get attributes of file '%s': fstat() failed: %s" msgstr "" "L'obtencion dels atributs del fichièr « %s » a fracassat : fracàs de fstat() " ": %s" #: ../glib/gfileutils.c:907 #, c-format msgid "Failed to open file '%s': fdopen() failed: %s" msgstr "" "La dobertura del fichièr « %s » a fracassat : fracàs de fdopen() : %s" #: ../glib/gfileutils.c:1006 #, c-format msgid "Failed to rename file '%s' to '%s': g_rename() failed: %s" msgstr "" "Lo cambiament de nom del fichièr « %s » cap a « %s » a fracassat : fracàs de " "g_rename() : %s" #: ../glib/gfileutils.c:1041 ../glib/gfileutils.c:1540 #, c-format msgid "Failed to create file '%s': %s" msgstr "La creacion del fichièr « %s » a fracassat : %s" #: ../glib/gfileutils.c:1068 #, c-format msgid "Failed to write file '%s': write() failed: %s" msgstr "" "L'escritura dins lo fichièr « %s » a fracassat : fracàs de write() : %s" #: ../glib/gfileutils.c:1111 #, c-format msgid "Failed to write file '%s': fsync() failed: %s" msgstr "" "L'escritura dins lo fichièr « %s » a fracassat : fracàs de fsync() : %s" #: ../glib/gfileutils.c:1235 #, c-format msgid "Existing file '%s' could not be removed: g_unlink() failed: %s" msgstr "" "Lo fichièr existent « %s » pòt pas èsser suprimit : fracàs de g_unlink() : %s" #: ../glib/gfileutils.c:1506 #, c-format msgid "Template '%s' invalid, should not contain a '%s'" msgstr "Lo modèl « %s » es pas valid, deuriá pas conténer un « %s »" #: ../glib/gfileutils.c:1519 #, c-format msgid "Template '%s' doesn't contain XXXXXX" msgstr "Lo modèl « %s » conten pas XXXXXX" #: ../glib/gfileutils.c:2038 #, c-format msgid "Failed to read the symbolic link '%s': %s" msgstr "La lectura del ligam simbolic « %s » a fracassat : %s" #: ../glib/gfileutils.c:2057 msgid "Symbolic links not supported" msgstr "Ligams simbolics pas preses en carga" #: ../glib/giochannel.c:1388 #, c-format msgid "Could not open converter from '%s' to '%s': %s" msgstr "Impossible de dobrir lo convertidor de « %s » cap a « %s » : %s" #: ../glib/giochannel.c:1733 msgid "Can't do a raw read in g_io_channel_read_line_string" msgstr "" "Lectura de donadas brutas impossible dins g_io_channel_read_line_string" #: ../glib/giochannel.c:1780 ../glib/giochannel.c:2038 #: ../glib/giochannel.c:2125 msgid "Leftover unconverted data in read buffer" msgstr "Donadas restantes non convertidas dins lo tampon de lectura" #: ../glib/giochannel.c:1861 ../glib/giochannel.c:1938 msgid "Channel terminates in a partial character" msgstr "La canal s'acaba amb un caractèr parcial" #: ../glib/giochannel.c:1924 msgid "Can't do a raw read in g_io_channel_read_to_end" msgstr "Lectura de donadas brutas impossibla dins g_io_channel_read_to_end" #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:737 msgid "Valid key file could not be found in search dirs" msgstr "" "Impossible de trobar un fichièr de claus valid dins los repertòris de recèrca" #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:773 msgid "Not a regular file" msgstr "Es pas un fichièr estandard" #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:1174 #, c-format msgid "" "Key file contains line '%s' which is not a key-value pair, group, or comment" msgstr "" "Lo fichièr de claus conten la linha « %s » qu'es pas ni una para de valors " "de clau, ni un grop, ni un comentari" #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:1231 #, c-format msgid "Invalid group name: %s" msgstr "Nom de grop invalid : %s" #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:1253 msgid "Key file does not start with a group" msgstr "Lo fichièr de claus comença pas per un grop" #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:1279 #, c-format msgid "Invalid key name: %s" msgstr "Nom de clau invalid : %s" #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:1306 #, c-format msgid "Key file contains unsupported encoding '%s'" msgstr "" "Lo fichièr de claus conten un encodatge de caractèrs pas preses en carga « " "%s »" #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:1549 ../glib/gkeyfile.c:1722 ../glib/gkeyfile.c:3100 #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:3163 ../glib/gkeyfile.c:3293 ../glib/gkeyfile.c:3423 #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:3567 ../glib/gkeyfile.c:3796 ../glib/gkeyfile.c:3863 #, c-format msgid "Key file does not have group '%s'" msgstr "Lo fichièr de claus a pas de grop « %s »" #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:1704 #, c-format msgid "Key file does not have key '%s'" msgstr "Le fichier de clés n'a pas de clé « %s »" #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:1839 ../glib/gkeyfile.c:1955 #, c-format msgid "Key file contains key '%s' with value '%s' which is not UTF-8" msgstr "" "Lo fichièr de claus conten la clau « %s » amb la valor « %s » qu'es pas " "encodat en UTF-8" #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:1859 ../glib/gkeyfile.c:1975 ../glib/gkeyfile.c:2344 #, c-format msgid "" "Key file contains key '%s' which has a value that cannot be interpreted." msgstr "" "Lo fichièr de claus conten la clau « %s » qu'una valor n'es impossibla a " "interpretar." #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:2561 ../glib/gkeyfile.c:2929 #, c-format msgid "" "Key file contains key '%s' in group '%s' which has a value that cannot be " "interpreted." msgstr "" "Lo fichièr de claus conten la clau « %s » dins lo grop « %s » qu'a una valor " "impossibla a interpretar." #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:2639 ../glib/gkeyfile.c:2716 #, c-format msgid "Key '%s' in group '%s' has value '%s' where %s was expected" msgstr "" "La clau « %s » dins lo grop « %s » a una valor « %s » mentre que %s èra " "esperat" #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:1677 #, c-format msgid "Key file does not have key '%s' in group '%s'" msgstr "Lo fichièr de claus conten pas de clau « %s » dins lo grop « %s »" #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:4103 msgid "Key file contains escape character at end of line" msgstr "Lo fichièr de claus conten un caractèr d'escapament en fin de linha" #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:4125 #, c-format msgid "Key file contains invalid escape sequence '%s'" msgstr "" "Lo fichièr de claus conten una sequéncia d'escapament invalida « %s »" #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:4267 #, c-format msgid "Value '%s' cannot be interpreted as a number." msgstr "La valor « %s » pòt pas èsser interpretada coma un nombre." #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:4281 #, c-format msgid "Integer value '%s' out of range" msgstr "La valor entièra « %s » es fòra plaja" #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:4314 #, c-format msgid "Value '%s' cannot be interpreted as a float number." msgstr "" "La valor « %s » pòt pas èsser interpretada coma un nombre a virgula flotanta." #: ../glib/gkeyfile.c:4351 #, c-format msgid "Value '%s' cannot be interpreted as a boolean." msgstr "La valor « %s » pòt pas èsser interpretada coma un boolean." #: ../glib/gmappedfile.c:129 #, c-format msgid "Failed to get attributes of file '%s%s%s%s': fstat() failed: %s" msgstr "" "L'obtencion dels atributs del fichièr « %s%s%s%s » a fracassat : fracàs de " "fstat() : %s" #: ../glib/gmappedfile.c:195 #, c-format msgid "Failed to map %s%s%s%s: mmap() failed: %s" msgstr "Lo mappage %s%s%s%s a fracassat : fracàs de mmap() : %s" #: ../glib/gmappedfile.c:261 #, c-format msgid "Failed to open file '%s': open() failed: %s" msgstr "La dobertura del fichièr « %s » a fracassat : fracàs de open() : %s" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:398 ../glib/gmarkup.c:440 #, c-format msgid "Error on line %d char %d: " msgstr "Error a la linha %d, caractèr %d : " #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:462 ../glib/gmarkup.c:545 #, c-format msgid "Invalid UTF-8 encoded text in name - not valid '%s'" msgstr "Encodatge UTF-8 invalid dins lo nom - « %s » es pas valid" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:473 #, c-format msgid "'%s' is not a valid name" msgstr "« %s » es pas un nom valid" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:489 #, c-format msgid "'%s' is not a valid name: '%c'" msgstr "« %s » es pas un nom valid : « %c »" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:599 #, c-format msgid "Error on line %d: %s" msgstr "Error a la linha %d : %s" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:676 #, c-format msgid "" "Failed to parse '%-.*s', which should have been a digit inside a character " "reference (ê for example) - perhaps the digit is too large" msgstr "" "Fracàs de l'analisi de « %-.*s » que deuriá èsser un nombre dins la plaja de " "referéncia dels caractèrs (ê per exemple) - benlèu que lo nombre es " "tròp grand" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:688 msgid "" "Character reference did not end with a semicolon; most likely you used an " "ampersand character without intending to start an entity - escape ampersand " "as &" msgstr "" "La referéncia del caractèr s'acaba pas per un punt-virgula ; vous avez " "vraisemblablement utilizat una esperluette sens intention d'escriure una " "entitat - échappez l'esperluette amb &" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:714 #, c-format msgid "Character reference '%-.*s' does not encode a permitted character" msgstr "La referéncia al caractèr « %-.*s » encòda pas un caractèr autorizat" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:752 msgid "" "Empty entity '&;' seen; valid entities are: & " < > '" msgstr "" "Entitat voida « &; » rencontrada : las entitats validas son : & " " "< > '" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:760 #, c-format msgid "Entity name '%-.*s' is not known" msgstr "L'entitat nomenada « %-.*s » es desconeguda" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:765 msgid "" "Entity did not end with a semicolon; most likely you used an ampersand " "character without intending to start an entity - escape ampersand as &" msgstr "" "L'entitat s'acaba pas per un punt-virgula ; vous avez probablement utilizat " "una esperluette sens intention d'escriure una entitat - échappez " "l'esperluette amb &" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:1171 msgid "Document must begin with an element (e.g. )" msgstr "Lo document deu començar amb un element (per ex. )" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:1211 #, c-format msgid "" "'%s' is not a valid character following a '<' character; it may not begin an " "element name" msgstr "" "« %s » es pas un caractèr valid en seguida del caractèr « < » ; sembla que " "comença pas un nom d'element" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:1253 #, c-format msgid "" "Odd character '%s', expected a '>' character to end the empty-element tag " "'%s'" msgstr "" "Caractèr anormal « %s », un caractèr « > » es requesit per acabar la balisa " "d'element void « %s »" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:1334 #, c-format msgid "" "Odd character '%s', expected a '=' after attribute name '%s' of element '%s'" msgstr "" "Caractèr anormal « %s », un caractèr « = » es requesit aprèp lo nom de " "l'atribut « %s » de l'element « %s »" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:1375 #, c-format msgid "" "Odd character '%s', expected a '>' or '/' character to end the start tag of " "element '%s', or optionally an attribute; perhaps you used an invalid " "character in an attribute name" msgstr "" "Caractèr anormal « %s », es requesit un caractèr « > » o « / », o " "opcionalament un atribut, per clore la balisa de començament de l'element « " "%s » ; benlèu qu'avètz utilizat un caractèr invalid dins un nom d'atribut" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:1419 #, c-format msgid "" "Odd character '%s', expected an open quote mark after the equals sign when " "giving value for attribute '%s' of element '%s'" msgstr "" "Caractèr anormal « %s », una vergueta de dobertura aprèp lo signe egal es " "requesit quand s'afècta una valor a l'atribut « %s » de l'element « %s »" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:1552 #, c-format msgid "" "'%s' is not a valid character following the characters ''" msgstr "" "« %s » es pas un caractèr valid en seguida del nom d'element « %s » a tampar " "; lo caractèr autorizat es « > »" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:1599 #, c-format msgid "Element '%s' was closed, no element is currently open" msgstr "" "L'element « %s » es estat tampat, cap d'element es pas actualament dobèrt" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:1608 #, c-format msgid "Element '%s' was closed, but the currently open element is '%s'" msgstr "" "L'element « %s » es estat tampat, mas l'element actualament dobèrt es « %s »" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:1761 msgid "Document was empty or contained only whitespace" msgstr "Lo document èra void o conteniá pas que d'espacis" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:1775 msgid "Document ended unexpectedly just after an open angle bracket '<'" msgstr "" "Lo document s'es acabat d'un biais imprevist juste aprèp un crochet ouvrant " "« < »" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:1783 ../glib/gmarkup.c:1828 #, c-format msgid "" "Document ended unexpectedly with elements still open - '%s' was the last " "element opened" msgstr "" "Lo document s'es acabat d'un biais imprevist amb d'elements encara dobèrts - " "« %s » èra lo darrièr element dobèrt" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:1791 #, c-format msgid "" "Document ended unexpectedly, expected to see a close angle bracket ending " "the tag <%s/>" msgstr "" "Lo document s'es acabat d'un biais imprevist, un crochet fermant per la " "balisa <%s/> es requesit" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:1797 msgid "Document ended unexpectedly inside an element name" msgstr "" "Lo document s'es acabat d'un biais imprevist a l'interior d'un nom d'element" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:1803 msgid "Document ended unexpectedly inside an attribute name" msgstr "" "Lo document s'es acabat d'un biais imprevist a l'interior d'un nom d'atribut" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:1808 msgid "Document ended unexpectedly inside an element-opening tag." msgstr "" "Lo document s'es acabat d'un biais imprevist a l'interior d'una balisa de " "dobertura d'element." #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:1814 msgid "" "Document ended unexpectedly after the equals sign following an attribute " "name; no attribute value" msgstr "" "Lo document s'es acabat d'un biais imprevist aprèp lo signe egal que seguis " "un nom d'atribut ; pas cap de valor d'atribut" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:1821 msgid "Document ended unexpectedly while inside an attribute value" msgstr "" "Lo document s'es acabat d'un biais imprevist mentre qu'èra a l'interior " "d'una valor d'atribut" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:1837 #, c-format msgid "Document ended unexpectedly inside the close tag for element '%s'" msgstr "" "Lo document s'es acabat d'un biais imprevist a l'interior de la balisa de " "tampadura per l'element « %s »" #: ../glib/gmarkup.c:1843 msgid "" "Document ended unexpectedly inside a comment or processing instruction" msgstr "" "Lo document s'es acabat d'un biais imprevist a l'interior d'un comentari o " "d'una instruccion de tractament" #: ../glib/goption.c:857 msgid "Usage:" msgstr "Utilizacion :" #: ../glib/goption.c:861 msgid "[OPTION...]" msgstr "[OPCION...]" #: ../glib/goption.c:977 msgid "Help Options:" msgstr "Opcions de l'ajuda :" #: ../glib/goption.c:978 msgid "Show help options" msgstr "Aficha las opcions de l'ajuda" #: ../glib/goption.c:984 msgid "Show all help options" msgstr "Aficha totas las opcions de l'ajuda" #: ../glib/goption.c:1047 msgid "Application Options:" msgstr "Opcions de l'aplicacion :" #: ../glib/goption.c:1113 ../glib/goption.c:1183 #, c-format msgid "Cannot parse integer value '%s' for %s" msgstr "Impossible d'analisar la valor entièra « %s » per %s" #: ../glib/goption.c:1123 ../glib/goption.c:1191 #, c-format msgid "Integer value '%s' for %s out of range" msgstr "La valor entièra « %s » per %s es fòra plaja" #: ../glib/goption.c:1148 #, c-format msgid "Cannot parse double value '%s' for %s" msgstr "Impossible d'analisar la valor dobla « %s » per %s" #: ../glib/goption.c:1156 #, c-format msgid "Double value '%s' for %s out of range" msgstr "La valor dobla « %s » per %s es fòra plaja" #: ../glib/goption.c:1442 ../glib/goption.c:1521 #, c-format msgid "Error parsing option %s" msgstr "Error al moment de l'analisi de l'opcion %s" #: ../glib/goption.c:1552 ../glib/goption.c:1665 #, c-format msgid "Missing argument for %s" msgstr "Argument mancant per %s" #: ../glib/goption.c:2126 #, c-format msgid "Unknown option %s" msgstr "Opcion desconeguda %s" #: ../glib/gregex.c:258 msgid "corrupted object" msgstr "objècte damatjat" #: ../glib/gregex.c:260 msgid "internal error or corrupted object" msgstr "error intèrna o objècte damatjat" #: ../glib/gregex.c:262 msgid "out of memory" msgstr "memòria insufisenta" #: ../glib/gregex.c:267 msgid "backtracking limit reached" msgstr "limit de seguiment arrièr atench" #: ../glib/gregex.c:279 ../glib/gregex.c:287 msgid "the pattern contains items not supported for partial matching" msgstr "" "lo motiu conten d'elements pas preses en carga per una correspondéncia " "parciala" #: ../glib/gregex.c:289 msgid "back references as conditions are not supported for partial matching" msgstr "" "las referéncias inverses utilizadas coma condicions son pas presas en carga " "per una correspondéncia parciala" #: ../glib/gregex.c:298 msgid "recursion limit reached" msgstr "limit de recursivitat atench" #: ../glib/gregex.c:300 msgid "invalid combination of newline flags" msgstr "combinason de marcadors de novèla linha invalida" #: ../glib/gregex.c:302 msgid "bad offset" msgstr "marrit décalage" #: ../glib/gregex.c:304 msgid "short utf8" msgstr "utf8 cort" #: ../glib/gregex.c:306 msgid "recursion loop" msgstr "bocla recursiva" #: ../glib/gregex.c:310 msgid "unknown error" msgstr "error desconeguda" #: ../glib/gregex.c:330 msgid "\\ at end of pattern" msgstr "\\ a la fin del motiu" #: ../glib/gregex.c:333 msgid "\\c at end of pattern" msgstr "\\c a la fin del motiu" #: ../glib/gregex.c:336 msgid "unrecognized character following \\" msgstr "un caractèr pas reconegut suit \\" #: ../glib/gregex.c:339 msgid "numbers out of order in {} quantifier" msgstr "nombres en desòrdre dins lo quantificador {}" #: ../glib/gregex.c:342 msgid "number too big in {} quantifier" msgstr "nombre tròp grand dins lo quantificador {}" #: ../glib/gregex.c:345 msgid "missing terminating ] for character class" msgstr "caractèr terminason ] mancant per la classa de caractèr" #: ../glib/gregex.c:348 msgid "invalid escape sequence in character class" msgstr "sequéncia d'escapament invalida dins la classa de caractèr" #: ../glib/gregex.c:351 msgid "range out of order in character class" msgstr "plaja déclassada dins la classa de caractèr" #: ../glib/gregex.c:354 msgid "nothing to repeat" msgstr "pas res de repetir" #: ../glib/gregex.c:358 msgid "unexpected repeat" msgstr "répétition inesperada" #: ../glib/gregex.c:361 msgid "unrecognized character after (? or (?-" msgstr "caractèr pas reconegut aprèp (? o (?-" #: ../glib/gregex.c:364 msgid "POSIX named classes are supported only within a class" msgstr "" "Las classas nomenadas segon la norme POSIX son unicament presas en carga " "dins una classa" #: ../glib/gregex.c:367 msgid "missing terminating )" msgstr ") de terminason mancanta" #: ../glib/gregex.c:370 msgid "reference to non-existent subpattern" msgstr "referéncia a un sosmotiu inexistant" #: ../glib/gregex.c:373 msgid "missing ) after comment" msgstr "« ) » mancanta aprèp un comentari" #: ../glib/gregex.c:376 msgid "regular expression is too large" msgstr "l'expression regulara es tròp granda" #: ../glib/gregex.c:379 msgid "failed to get memory" msgstr "l'obtencion de la memòria a fracassat" #: ../glib/gregex.c:383 msgid ") without opening (" msgstr ") sens ( de dobertura" #: ../glib/gregex.c:387 msgid "code overflow" msgstr "depassament de còde" #: ../glib/gregex.c:391 msgid "unrecognized character after (?<" msgstr "caractèr pas reconegut aprèp (?<" #: ../glib/gregex.c:394 msgid "lookbehind assertion is not fixed length" msgstr "l'assercion « lookbehind » a pas de longor fixe" #: ../glib/gregex.c:397 msgid "malformed number or name after (?(" msgstr "nom o nombre non conforme aprèp (?(" #: ../glib/gregex.c:400 msgid "conditional group contains more than two branches" msgstr "un grop condicional conten mai de doas brancas" #: ../glib/gregex.c:403 msgid "assertion expected after (?(" msgstr "une assercion es esperada aprèp (?(" #. translators: '(?R' and '(?[+-]digits' are both meant as (groups of) #. * sequences here, '(?-54' would be an example for the second group. #. #: ../glib/gregex.c:410 msgid "(?R or (?[+-]digits must be followed by )" msgstr "« (?R » o « (?[+-]chifras » devon èsser seguits d'una « ) »" #: ../glib/gregex.c:413 msgid "unknown POSIX class name" msgstr "nom de classa POSIX desconegut" #: ../glib/gregex.c:416 msgid "POSIX collating elements are not supported" msgstr "los elements d'interclassament POSIX son pas preses en carga" #: ../glib/gregex.c:419 msgid "character value in \\x{...} sequence is too large" msgstr "la valor del caractèr dins la sequéncia \\x{...} es tròp granda" #: ../glib/gregex.c:422 msgid "invalid condition (?(0)" msgstr "condicion (?(0) invalida" #: ../glib/gregex.c:425 msgid "\\C not allowed in lookbehind assertion" msgstr "\\C es pas autorizat dins l'assercion « lookbehind »" #: ../glib/gregex.c:432 msgid "escapes \\L, \\l, \\N{name}, \\U, and \\u are not supported" msgstr "" "los escapaments \\L, \\l, \\N{name}, \\U e \\u son pas preses en carga" #: ../glib/gregex.c:435 msgid "recursive call could loop indefinitely" msgstr "un apèl recursiu pòt efectuar de boclas indefinidament" #: ../glib/gregex.c:439 msgid "unrecognized character after (?P" msgstr "caractèr pas reconegut aprèp (?P" #: ../glib/gregex.c:442 msgid "missing terminator in subpattern name" msgstr "terminason mancanta dins lo nom del sosmotiu" #: ../glib/gregex.c:445 msgid "two named subpatterns have the same name" msgstr "dos sosmotius nomenats possedisson lo meteis nom" #: ../glib/gregex.c:448 msgid "malformed \\P or \\p sequence" msgstr "sequéncia \\P o \\p mal formada" #: ../glib/gregex.c:451 msgid "unknown property name after \\P or \\p" msgstr "nom de proprietat desconegut aprèp \\P o \\p" #: ../glib/gregex.c:454 msgid "subpattern name is too long (maximum 32 characters)" msgstr "lo nom del sosmotiu es tròp long (32 caractèrs maximum)" #: ../glib/gregex.c:457 msgid "too many named subpatterns (maximum 10,000)" msgstr "tròp de sosmotius nomenats (10 000 maximum)" #: ../glib/gregex.c:460 msgid "octal value is greater than \\377" msgstr "la valor octala es mai granda que \\377" #: ../glib/gregex.c:464 msgid "overran compiling workspace" msgstr "depassament de capacitat en compilant l'espaci de trabalh" #: ../glib/gregex.c:468 msgid "previously-checked referenced subpattern not found" msgstr "un sosmotiu referenciat e precedentament verificat a pas été trobat" #: ../glib/gregex.c:471 msgid "DEFINE group contains more than one branch" msgstr "lo grop DEFINE conten mai d'una branca" #: ../glib/gregex.c:474 msgid "inconsistent NEWLINE options" msgstr "options NEWLINE inconsistantes" #: ../glib/gregex.c:477 msgid "" "\\g is not followed by a braced, angle-bracketed, or quoted name or number, " "or by a plain number" msgstr "" "\\g es pas seguit d'un nom o nombre entre acoladas, cabirons, verguetas " "simplas o d'un nombre simple" #: ../glib/gregex.c:481 msgid "a numbered reference must not be zero" msgstr "une referéncia numerotada deu pas èsser zéro" #: ../glib/gregex.c:484 msgid "an argument is not allowed for (*ACCEPT), (*FAIL), or (*COMMIT)" msgstr "un argument es pas permis per (*ACCEPT), (*FAIL) o (*COMMIT)" #: ../glib/gregex.c:487 msgid "(*VERB) not recognized" msgstr "(*VERB) pas reconegut" #: ../glib/gregex.c:490 msgid "number is too big" msgstr "lo nombre es tròp grand" #: ../glib/gregex.c:493 msgid "missing subpattern name after (?&" msgstr "nom de sosmotiu mancant aprèp (?&" #: ../glib/gregex.c:496 msgid "digit expected after (?+" msgstr "chifra esperat aprèp (?+" #: ../glib/gregex.c:499 msgid "] is an invalid data character in JavaScript compatibility mode" msgstr "" "] es un caractèr de donadas invalid en mòde de compatibilitat JavaScript" #: ../glib/gregex.c:502 msgid "different names for subpatterns of the same number are not allowed" msgstr "" "es pas permés d'aver de noms diferents per de sosmotius del meteis nombre" #: ../glib/gregex.c:505 msgid "(*MARK) must have an argument" msgstr "(*MARK) deu aver un argument" #: ../glib/gregex.c:508 msgid "\\c must be followed by an ASCII character" msgstr "\\c deu èsser seguit d'un caractèr ASCII" #: ../glib/gregex.c:511 msgid "\\k is not followed by a braced, angle-bracketed, or quoted name" msgstr "" "\\k es pas seguit d'un nom entre accolades, chevrons o verguetas simplas" #: ../glib/gregex.c:514 msgid "\\N is not supported in a class" msgstr "\\N es pas pres en carga dins una classa" #: ../glib/gregex.c:517 msgid "too many forward references" msgstr "tròp de referéncias en avant" #: ../glib/gregex.c:520 msgid "name is too long in (*MARK), (*PRUNE), (*SKIP), or (*THEN)" msgstr "lo nom es tròp long dins (*MARK), (*PRUNE), (*SKIP) o (*THEN)" #: ../glib/gregex.c:523 msgid "character value in \\u.... sequence is too large" msgstr "la valor del caractèr dins la sequéncia \\u.... es tròp granda" #: ../glib/gregex.c:746 ../glib/gregex.c:1973 #, c-format msgid "Error while matching regular expression %s: %s" msgstr "" "Error al moment de la correspondéncia de l'expression regulara %s : %s" #: ../glib/gregex.c:1317 msgid "PCRE library is compiled without UTF8 support" msgstr "La bibliotèca PCRE es compilada sens la presa en carga UTF-8" #: ../glib/gregex.c:1321 msgid "PCRE library is compiled without UTF8 properties support" msgstr "" "La bibliotèca PCRE es compilada sens la presa en carga de las proprietats " "UTF-8" #: ../glib/gregex.c:1329 msgid "PCRE library is compiled with incompatible options" msgstr "La bibliotèca PCRE es compilada amb d'opcions incompatiblas" #: ../glib/gregex.c:1438 #, c-format msgid "Error while compiling regular expression %s at char %d: %s" msgstr "" "Error a la compilation de l'expression regulara %s al caractèr %d : %s" #: ../glib/gregex.c:1358 #, c-format msgid "Error while optimizing regular expression %s: %s" msgstr "Error al moment de l'optimizacion de l'expression regulara %s : %s" #: ../glib/gregex.c:2409 msgid "hexadecimal digit or '}' expected" msgstr "chifra hexadécimal o « } » esperat" #: ../glib/gregex.c:2425 msgid "hexadecimal digit expected" msgstr "chifra hexadécimal esperat" #: ../glib/gregex.c:2465 msgid "missing '<' in symbolic reference" msgstr "« < » mancant dins la referéncia simbolica" #: ../glib/gregex.c:2474 msgid "unfinished symbolic reference" msgstr "referéncia simbolica pas acabada" #: ../glib/gregex.c:2481 msgid "zero-length symbolic reference" msgstr "referéncia simbolica de longor nulla" #: ../glib/gregex.c:2492 msgid "digit expected" msgstr "chifra esperada" #: ../glib/gregex.c:2510 msgid "illegal symbolic reference" msgstr "referéncia simbolica illegala" #: ../glib/gregex.c:2572 msgid "stray final '\\'" msgstr "terminason parasite « \\ »" #: ../glib/gregex.c:2576 msgid "unknown escape sequence" msgstr "sequéncia d'escapament desconeguda" #: ../glib/gregex.c:2586 #, c-format msgid "Error while parsing replacement text \"%s\" at char %lu: %s" msgstr "" "Error al moment de l'analisi del tèxte de substitucion « %s » al caractèr " "%lu : %s" #: ../glib/gshell.c:96 msgid "Quoted text doesn't begin with a quotation mark" msgstr "Lo tèxte citat comença pas per de verguetas" #: ../glib/gshell.c:186 msgid "Unmatched quotation mark in command line or other shell-quoted text" msgstr "" "Verguetas de tampadura introbablas dins la linha de comanda o autre tèxte " "rapporté" #: ../glib/gshell.c:582 #, c-format msgid "Text ended just after a '\\' character. (The text was '%s')" msgstr "" "Lo tèxte s'es acabat juste aprèp un caractèr « \\ » (lo tèxte èra « %s »)." #: ../glib/gshell.c:589 #, c-format msgid "" "Text ended before matching quote was found for %c. (The text was '%s')" msgstr "" "Lo tèxte s'es acabat abans que de verguetas correspondentas sián rencontrats " "per %c (lo tèxte èra « %s »)." #: ../glib/gshell.c:601 msgid "Text was empty (or contained only whitespace)" msgstr "Lo tèxte èra void (o conteniá pas que d'espacis)" #: ../glib/gspawn.c:209 #, c-format msgid "Failed to read data from child process (%s)" msgstr "La lectura de las donadas dempuèi lo processus filh a fracassat (%s)" #: ../glib/gspawn.c:353 #, c-format msgid "Unexpected error in select() reading data from a child process (%s)" msgstr "" "Error inesperada dins select() a la lectura de las donadas dempuèi un " "processus filh (%s)" #: ../glib/gspawn.c:438 #, c-format msgid "Unexpected error in waitpid() (%s)" msgstr "Error inesperada dins waitpid() (%s)" #: ../glib/gspawn.c:844 ../glib/gspawn-win32.c:1233 #, c-format msgid "Child process exited with code %ld" msgstr "Lo processus filh s'es acabat amb lo còde %ld" #: ../glib/gspawn.c:852 #, c-format msgid "Child process killed by signal %ld" msgstr "Lo processus filh es estat tuat pel senhal %ld" #: ../glib/gspawn.c:859 #, c-format msgid "Child process stopped by signal %ld" msgstr "Lo processus filh es estat arrestat pel senhal %ld" #: ../glib/gspawn.c:866 #, c-format msgid "Child process exited abnormally" msgstr "Lo processus filh s'es acabat anormalement" #: ../glib/gspawn.c:1271 ../glib/gspawn-win32.c:339 ../glib/gspawn-win32.c:347 #, c-format msgid "Failed to read from child pipe (%s)" msgstr "La lectura dempuèi un tub filh a fracassat (%s)" #: ../glib/gspawn.c:1341 #, c-format msgid "Failed to fork (%s)" msgstr "Lo clonatge a fracassat (%s)" #: ../glib/gspawn.c:1490 ../glib/gspawn-win32.c:370 #, c-format msgid "Failed to change to directory '%s' (%s)" msgstr "Lo cambiament de repertòri « %s » a fracassat (%s)" #: ../glib/gspawn.c:1500 #, c-format msgid "Failed to execute child process \"%s\" (%s)" msgstr "L'execucion del processus filh « %s » a fracassat (%s)" #: ../glib/gspawn.c:1510 #, c-format msgid "Failed to redirect output or input of child process (%s)" msgstr "" "La redireccion de la sortida o de l'entrada del processus filh a fracassat " "(%s)" #: ../glib/gspawn.c:1519 #, c-format msgid "Failed to fork child process (%s)" msgstr "Lo clonatge del processus filh a fracassat (%s)" #: ../glib/gspawn.c:1527 #, c-format msgid "Unknown error executing child process \"%s\"" msgstr "Error desconeguda a l'execucion del processus filh « %s »" #: ../glib/gspawn.c:1551 #, c-format msgid "Failed to read enough data from child pid pipe (%s)" msgstr "" "Impossible de legir pro de donadas dempuèi lo tub del processus filh de pid " "(%s)" #: ../glib/gspawn-win32.c:283 msgid "Failed to read data from child process" msgstr "La lectura de las donadas dempuèi lo processus filh a fracassat" #: ../glib/gspawn-win32.c:300 #, c-format msgid "Failed to create pipe for communicating with child process (%s)" msgstr "" "La creacion del tub de comunicacion amb lo processus filh a fracassat (%s)" #: ../glib/gspawn-win32.c:376 ../glib/gspawn-win32.c:495 #, c-format msgid "Failed to execute child process (%s)" msgstr "L'execucion del processus filh a fracassat (%s)" #: ../glib/gspawn-win32.c:445 #, c-format msgid "Invalid program name: %s" msgstr "Nom de programa invalid : %s" #: ../glib/gspawn-win32.c:455 ../glib/gspawn-win32.c:722 #: ../glib/gspawn-win32.c:1297 #, c-format msgid "Invalid string in argument vector at %d: %s" msgstr "Cadena invalida dins l'argument vector a %d : %s" #: ../glib/gspawn-win32.c:466 ../glib/gspawn-win32.c:737 #: ../glib/gspawn-win32.c:1330 #, c-format msgid "Invalid string in environment: %s" msgstr "Cadena invalida dins l'environament : %s" #: ../glib/gspawn-win32.c:718 ../glib/gspawn-win32.c:1278 #, c-format msgid "Invalid working directory: %s" msgstr "Repertòri de trabalh invalid : %s" #: ../glib/gspawn-win32.c:783 #, c-format msgid "Failed to execute helper program (%s)" msgstr "L'execucion del programa d'ajuda a fracassat (%s)" #: ../glib/gspawn-win32.c:997 msgid "" "Unexpected error in g_io_channel_win32_poll() reading data from a child " "process" msgstr "" "Error inesperada dins g_io_channel_win32_poll() al moment de la lectura de " "las donadas dempuèi un processus fils" #: ../glib/gutf8.c:795 msgid "Failed to allocate memory" msgstr "Impossible d'allouer de la memòria" #: ../glib/gutf8.c:928 msgid "Character out of range for UTF-8" msgstr "Caractèr fòra plaja per UTF-8" #: ../glib/gutf8.c:1029 ../glib/gutf8.c:1038 ../glib/gutf8.c:1168 #: ../glib/gutf8.c:1177 ../glib/gutf8.c:1316 ../glib/gutf8.c:1413 msgid "Invalid sequence in conversion input" msgstr "Sequéncia invalida dins l'entrada del convertidor" #: ../glib/gutf8.c:1327 ../glib/gutf8.c:1424 msgid "Character out of range for UTF-16" msgstr "Caractèr fòra plaja per UTF-16" #: ../glib/gutils.c:2133 ../glib/gutils.c:2160 ../glib/gutils.c:2266 #, c-format msgid "%u byte" msgid_plural "%u bytes" msgstr[0] "%u octet" msgstr[1] "%u octets" #: ../glib/gutils.c:2139 #, c-format msgid "%.1f KiB" msgstr "%.1f Kio" #: ../glib/gutils.c:2141 #, c-format msgid "%.1f MiB" msgstr "%.1f Mio" #: ../glib/gutils.c:2144 #, c-format msgid "%.1f GiB" msgstr "%.1f Gio" #: ../glib/gutils.c:2147 #, c-format msgid "%.1f TiB" msgstr "%.1f Tio" #: ../glib/gutils.c:2150 #, c-format msgid "%.1f PiB" msgstr "%.1f Pio" #: ../glib/gutils.c:2153 #, c-format msgid "%.1f EiB" msgstr "%.1f Eio" #: ../glib/gutils.c:2166 #, c-format msgid "%.1f kB" msgstr "%.1f ko" #: ../glib/gutils.c:2169 ../glib/gutils.c:2284 #, c-format msgid "%.1f MB" msgstr "%.1f Mo" #: ../glib/gutils.c:2172 ../glib/gutils.c:2289 #, c-format msgid "%.1f GB" msgstr "%.1f Go" #: ../glib/gutils.c:2174 ../glib/gutils.c:2294 #, c-format msgid "%.1f TB" msgstr "%.1f To" #: ../glib/gutils.c:2177 ../glib/gutils.c:2299 #, c-format msgid "%.1f PB" msgstr "%.1f Po" #: ../glib/gutils.c:2180 ../glib/gutils.c:2304 #, c-format msgid "%.1f EB" msgstr "%.1f Eo" #. Translators: the %s in "%s bytes" will always be replaced by a number. #: ../glib/gutils.c:2217 #, c-format msgid "%s byte" msgid_plural "%s bytes" msgstr[0] "%s octet" msgstr[1] "%s octets" #. Translators: this is from the deprecated function g_format_size_for_display() which uses 'KB' to #. * mean 1024 bytes. I am aware that 'KB' is not correct, but it has been preserved for reasons of #. * compatibility. Users will not see this string unless a program is using this deprecated function. #. * Please translate as literally as possible. #. #: ../glib/gutils.c:2279 #, c-format msgid "%.1f KB" msgstr "%.1f Ko" language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/LC_MESSAGES/gnome-user-share.po0000644000000000000000000002407012743727042021710 0ustar # Translation of oc.po to Occitan # Occitan translation of gnome-user-share. # Copyright (C) 2005-2006, 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This file is distributed under the same license as the gnome-user-share package. # # Yannig Marchegay (Kokoyaya) , 2006-2008 msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: oc\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-02-17 18:42+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2014-02-19 01:01+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Yannig MARCHEGAY (Kokoyaya) \n" "Language-Team: Occitan \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2016-07-20 12:31+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 18147)\n" #: ../data/org.gnome.desktop.file-sharing.gschema.xml.in.in.h:1 msgid "Share Public directory over the network" msgstr "Partèja lo repertòri Public sus la ret" #: ../data/org.gnome.desktop.file-sharing.gschema.xml.in.in.h:2 msgid "" "If this is true, the Public directory in the users home directory will be " "shared over the network when the user is logged in." msgstr "" "Se VERAI, lo repertòri Public dins lo dorsièr personal dels utilizaires es " "partejat sus la ret quand l'utilizaire se connècta." #: ../data/org.gnome.desktop.file-sharing.gschema.xml.in.in.h:3 msgid "When to require passwords" msgstr "Quora exigir los senhals" #: ../data/org.gnome.desktop.file-sharing.gschema.xml.in.in.h:4 msgid "" "When to ask for passwords. Possible values are \"never\", \"on_write\", and " "\"always\"." msgstr "" "Quora demandar de senhals. Las valors possiblas son : « never » (pas jamai), " "« on_write » (a l'escritura) e « always » (totjorn)." #: ../data/org.gnome.desktop.file-sharing.gschema.xml.in.in.h:5 msgid "Share Public directory over Bluetooth" msgstr "Partèja lo repertòri Public per Bluetooth" #: ../data/org.gnome.desktop.file-sharing.gschema.xml.in.in.h:6 msgid "" "If this is true, the Public directory in the users home directory will be " "shared over Bluetooth when the user is logged in." msgstr "" "Se VERAI, lo repertòri Public dins lo dorsièr personal dels utilizaires es " "partejat per Bluetooth quand l'utilizaire se connècta." #: ../data/org.gnome.desktop.file-sharing.gschema.xml.in.in.h:7 msgid "Whether to allow Bluetooth clients to write files." msgstr "" "Indica se cal autorizar los clients Bluetooth a escriure de fichièrs." #: ../data/org.gnome.desktop.file-sharing.gschema.xml.in.in.h:8 msgid "" "Whether to allow Bluetooth clients to write files, or share the files read-" "only." msgstr "" "Indica se cal autorizar los clients Bluetooth a escriure de fichièrs o se " "s'agís de partejar los fichièrs en lectura unicament." #: ../data/org.gnome.desktop.file-sharing.gschema.xml.in.in.h:9 msgid "" "Whether Bluetooth clients need to pair with the computer to send files." msgstr "" "Indica se los clients Bluetooth se devon ligar a l'ordenador per mandar de " "fichièrs." #: ../data/org.gnome.desktop.file-sharing.gschema.xml.in.in.h:5 msgid "Whether Bluetooth clients can send files using ObexPush." msgstr "" "Indica se los clients Bluetooth pòdon mandar de fichièrs en utilizant " "ObexPush." #: ../data/org.gnome.desktop.file-sharing.gschema.xml.in.in.h:6 msgid "" "If this is true, Bluetooth devices can send files to the user's Downloads " "directory when logged in." msgstr "" "Se VERAI, los periferics Bluetooth pòdon mandar de fichièrs dins lo dorsièr " "Telecargaments de l'utilizaire quand aqueste es connectat." #: ../data/org.gnome.desktop.file-sharing.gschema.xml.in.in.h:7 msgid "When to accept files sent over Bluetooth" msgstr "Quora acceptar de fichièrs per Bluetooth" #: ../data/org.gnome.desktop.file-sharing.gschema.xml.in.in.h:8 msgid "" "When to accept files sent over Bluetooth. Possible values are \"always\", " "\"bonded\" and \"ask\"." msgstr "" "Quora acceptar los fichièrs per Bluetooth. Las valors possiblas son : " "« always » (totjorn), « bonded » (se ligat) e « ask » (demandar)." #: ../data/org.gnome.desktop.file-sharing.gschema.xml.in.in.h:9 msgid "Whether to notify about newly received files." msgstr "Indica se cal senhalar los fichièrs recebuts novèlament." #: ../data/file-share-properties.ui.h:1 msgid "Personal File Sharing Preferences" msgstr "Preferéncias del partiment de fichièrs personals" #: ../data/file-share-properties.ui.h:2 msgid "Share Files over the Network" msgstr "Partiment de fichièrs sus la ret" #: ../data/file-share-properties.ui.h:3 msgid "_Share public files on network" msgstr "_Partejar los fichièrs publics sus la ret" #: ../data/file-share-properties.ui.h:4 msgid "_Password:" msgstr "Sen_hal :" #: ../data/file-share-properties.ui.h:5 msgid "_Require password:" msgstr "_Exigir lo senhal :" # #: ../data/file-share-properties.ui.h:6 msgid "Share Files over Bluetooth" msgstr "Partejar de fichièrs amb Bluetooth" #: ../data/file-share-properties.ui.h:7 msgid "Share public files over _Bluetooth" msgstr "Partejar los fichièrs publics per _Bluetooth" #: ../data/file-share-properties.ui.h:8 msgid "Allo_w remote devices to delete files" msgstr "Aut_orizar los periferics extèrnes a suprimir de fichièrs" #: ../data/file-share-properties.ui.h:9 msgid "Require re_mote devices to bond with this computer" msgstr "Exigir que los periferics e_xtèrnes se liguen a aqueste ordenador" #: ../data/file-share-properties.ui.h:6 msgid "Receive Files over Bluetooth" msgstr "Recepcion de fichièrs per Bluetooth" #: ../data/file-share-properties.ui.h:7 msgid "Receive files in _Downloads folder over Bluetooth" msgstr "Recebre los fichièrs per Bluetooth dins lo dorsièr _Telecargaments" #: ../data/file-share-properties.ui.h:8 msgid "_Accept files: " msgstr "_Acceptar los fichièrs : " #: ../data/file-share-properties.ui.h:9 msgid "_Notify about received files" msgstr "A_vertir quand de fichièrs son estats recebuts" #: ../data/gnome-user-share-obexpush.desktop.in.in.h:1 #: ../data/gnome-user-share-webdav.desktop.in.in.h:1 #: ../data/gnome-user-share-properties.desktop.in.h:1 msgid "Personal File Sharing" msgstr "Partiment de fichièrs personals" #: ../data/gnome-user-share-properties.desktop.in.h:2 msgid "Preferences for sharing of files" msgstr "Preferéncias pel partiment de fichièrs" #: ../data/gnome-user-share-webdav.desktop.in.in.h:2 msgid "Launch Personal File Sharing if enabled" msgstr "Avia lo partiment de fichièrs personals s'es activat" #: ../src/nautilus-share-bar.c:116 msgid "Preferences" msgstr "Preferéncias" #: ../src/nautilus-share-bar.c:120 msgid "Launch Personal File Sharing Preferences" msgstr "Dobrís las preferéncias del partiment de fichièrs personals" #: ../src/share-extension.c:70 msgid "Unable to launch the Personal File Sharing Preferences" msgstr "" "Imposible de dobrir las preferéncias del partiment de fichièrs personals" #: ../src/share-extension.c:164 msgid "May be used to share or receive files" msgstr "Pòt èsser utilizat per partejar o recebre de fichièrs" #: ../src/share-extension.c:166 msgid "May be shared over the network or Bluetooth" msgstr "Pòt èsser partejat sus la ret o per Bluetooth" #: ../src/share-extension.c:170 msgid "May be used to receive files over Bluetooth" msgstr "Pòt èsser utilizat per recebre de fichièrs per Bluetooth" #: ../src/file-share-properties.c:139 msgid "" "This feature cannot be enabled because the required packages are not " "installed on your system" msgstr "" "Aquesta foncion pòt pas èsser activada perque los paquets requesits son pas " "installats sus vòstre sistèma" #: ../src/file-share-properties.c:251 msgid "No reason" msgstr "Pas cap de rason" #: ../src/file-share-properties.c:279 msgid "Could not display the help contents." msgstr "Impossible d'afichar l'ensenhador de l'ajuda." #: ../src/file-share-properties.c:309 msgid "Could not build interface." msgstr "Impossible de construire l'interfàcia." #: ../src/file-share-properties.c:338 msgid "Never" msgstr "Pas jamai" #: ../src/file-share-properties.c:341 msgid "When writing files" msgstr "Al moment d'escriure los fichièrs" #: ../src/file-share-properties.c:344 ../src/file-share-properties.c:367 msgid "Always" msgstr "Totjorn" #: ../src/file-share-properties.c:370 msgid "Only for set up devices" msgstr "Solament pels periferics configurats" #: ../src/file-share-properties.c:375 msgid "Ask" msgstr "Demandar" #. Translators: The %s will get filled in with the user name #. of the user, to form a genitive. If this is difficult to #. translate correctly so that it will work correctly in your #. language, you may use something equivalent to #. "Public files of %s", or leave out the %s altogether. #. In the latter case, please put "%.0s" somewhere in the string, #. which will match the user name string passed by the C code, #. but not put the user name in the final string. This is to #. avoid the warning that msgfmt might otherwise generate. #: ../src/http.c:125 #, c-format msgid "%s's public files" msgstr "Fichièrs publics de %s" #. Translators: This is similar to the string before, only it #. has the hostname in it too. #: ../src/http.c:129 #, c-format msgid "%s's public files on %s" msgstr "Fichièrs publics de %s sus %s" #. Translators: %s is the name of the filename received #: ../src/obexpush.c:231 #, c-format msgid "You received \"%s\" via Bluetooth" msgstr "Avètz recebut « %s » per Bluetooth" #: ../src/obexpush.c:232 msgid "You received a file" msgstr "Avètz recebut un fichièr" #: ../src/obexpush.c:240 msgid "Open File" msgstr "Dobrir lo fichièr" #: ../src/obexpush.c:244 msgid "Reveal File" msgstr "Afichar lo fichièr" #: ../src/obexpush.c:254 #, c-format msgid "You have received the file “%s” over Bluetooth." msgstr "Avètz recebut lo fichièr « %s » per Bluetooth." #: ../src/obexpush.c:264 ../src/obexpush.c:387 msgid "File Received" msgstr "Fichièr recebut" #: ../src/obexpush.c:267 msgid "Open" msgstr "Dobrir" #: ../src/obexpush.c:270 msgid "Reveal" msgstr "Far veire l'emplaçament" #: ../src/obexpush.c:271 ../src/obexpush.c:391 msgid "OK" msgstr "D'acòrdi" #: ../src/obexpush.c:289 msgid "File reception complete" msgstr "Recepcion de fichièrs acabada" language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/LC_MESSAGES/xdg-user-dirs-gtk.po0000644000000000000000000000451312743727042022007 0ustar # Translation of oc.po to Occitan # Occitan (post 1500) translation of xdg-user-dirs-gtk. # Copyright (C) 2007 THE PACKAGE'S COPYRIGHT HOLDER # This file is distributed under the same license as the PACKAGE package. # # Yannig Marchegay (Kokoyaya) , 2006-2008 msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: oc\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2014-02-17 22:00+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2010-02-07 10:57+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Cédric VALMARY (Tot en òc) \n" "Language-Team: Occitan \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2016-07-20 13:33+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 18147)\n" #: ../update.c:159 msgid "Update standard folders to current language?" msgstr "Metre a jorn los dorsièrs estandards cap a la lenga actuala ?" #: ../update.c:161 msgid "" "You have logged in in a new language. You can automatically update the names " "of some standard folders in your home folder to match this language. The " "update would change the following folders:" msgstr "" "Vos sètz connectat amb una lenga novèla. Podètz metre a jorn los dorsièrs " "estandards de vòstre dorsièr personal dins aquesta lenga novèla. La mesa a " "jorn modificariá los dorsièrs seguents :" #: ../update.c:164 msgid "_Keep Old Names" msgstr "_Conservar los noms ancians" #: ../update.c:165 msgid "_Update Names" msgstr "_Actualizar los noms" #: ../update.c:191 msgid "Current folder name" msgstr "Nom del dorsièr actual" #: ../update.c:196 msgid "New folder name" msgstr "Nom novèl de dorsièr" #: ../update.c:206 msgid "Note that existing content will not be moved." msgstr "Sapiatz que lo contengut existent serà pas desplaçat." #: ../update.c:213 msgid "_Don't ask me this again" msgstr "_Me pausar pas pus la question" #: ../update.c:230 msgid "There was an error updating the folders" msgstr "I a agut una error al moment de metre a jorn de dorsièrs" #: ../user-dirs-update-gtk.desktop.in.h:1 msgid "User folders update" msgstr "Mesa a jorn dels dorsièrs d'utilizaire" #: ../user-dirs-update-gtk.desktop.in.h:2 msgid "Update common folders names to match current locale" msgstr "" "Metre a jorn los noms dels dorsièrs corrents per correspondre a la lenga " "(« locale ») actuala" language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/LC_MESSAGES/gksu.po0000644000000000000000000002155712743727042017507 0ustar # Occitan (post 1500) translation for gksu # Copyright (c) (c) 2006 Canonical Ltd, and Rosetta Contributors 2006 # This file is distributed under the same license as the gksu package. # Yannig MARCHEGAY (Kokoyaya) , 2006. # , fuzzy # # msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: gksu\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2012-10-02 09:43+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2013-03-03 12:14+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Cédric VALMARY (Tot en òc) \n" "Language-Team: Occitan (post 1500) \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2016-07-20 11:30+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 18147)\n" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:75 #, c-format msgid "" "GKsu version %s\n" "\n" msgstr "" "Version de GKsu %s\n" "\n" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:76 #, c-format msgid "" "Usage: %s [-u ] [options] \n" "\n" msgstr "" "Sintaxi : %s [-u ] [opcions] \n" "\n" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:77 msgid "" " --debug, -d\n" " Print information on the screen that might be\n" " useful for diagnosing and/or solving problems.\n" msgstr "" " --debug, -dAficha a l'ecran d'entresenhas que pòdon èsser utilasal " "diagnostic o a la resolucion de problèmas.\n" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:80 ../gksu/gksu.c:83 ../gksu/gksu.c:99 ../gksu/gksu.c:110 #: ../gksu/gksu.c:116 msgid "\n" msgstr "\n" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:81 msgid "" " --user , -u \n" " Call as the specified user.\n" msgstr "" " --user , -u \n" "Amòda en tant qu'utilizaire entresenhat.\n" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:84 msgid "" " --disable-grab, -g\n" " Disable the \"locking\" of the keyboard, mouse,\n" " and focus done by the program when asking for\n" " password.\n" msgstr "" " --disable-grab, -g\n" " Desactiva lo « varrolhatge » del clavièr, de la mirga\n" " e del focús efectuat pel programa al moment de la\n" " demanda d'un senhal.\n" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:88 msgid "" " --prompt, -P\n" " Ask the user if they want to have their keyboard\n" " and mouse grabbed before doing so.\n" msgstr "" " --prompt, -P\n" " Demanda a l'utilizaire se vòl que lo clavièr e la\n" " mirga sián varrolhats abans de pausar lo varrolh.\n" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:91 msgid "" " --preserve-env, -k\n" " Preserve the current environments, does not set $HOME\n" " nor $PATH, for example.\n" msgstr "" " --preserve-env, -k\n" " Preserva l'environament corrent, posiciona pas $HOME\n" " ni $PATH per exemple.\n" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:94 msgid "" " --login, -l\n" " Make this a login shell. Beware this may cause\n" " problems with the Xauthority magic. Run xhost\n" " to allow the target user to open windows on your\n" " display!\n" msgstr "" " --login, -l\n" " Se connècta dins un interpretador de comandas.\n" " Fasètz atencion, aquò pòt crear de problèmas\n" " amb la magiaXauthority. Podètz aviar xhost per autorizar un\n" " utilizaire a dobrir de fenèstras sus vòstre ecran !\n" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:100 msgid "" " --description , -D \n" " Provide a descriptive name for the command to\n" " be used in the default message, making it nicer.\n" " You can also provide the absolute path for a\n" " .desktop file. The Name key for will be used in\n" " this case.\n" msgstr "" " --descripcion , -D \n" " Provesís per la comanda, un nom descriptiu que serà utilizat\n" " coma messatge per defaut. Tanben avètz la possibilitat\n" " d'indicar lo camin absolut vèrs lo fichièr .desktop. Lo nom\n" " de la clau serà alara utilizat dins aqueste cas.\n" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:106 msgid "" " --message , -m \n" " Replace the standard message shown to ask for\n" " password for the argument passed to the option.\n" " Only use this if --description does not suffice.\n" msgstr "" " --messatge , -m \n" " Remplaça lo messatge afichat costumièrament per demandar\n" " lo senhal per l'argument passat en opcion.\n" " Utilizatz aquò pas que se --descripcion sufís pas.\n" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:111 msgid "" " --print-pass, -p\n" " Ask gksu to print the password to stdout, just\n" " like ssh-askpass. Useful to use in scripts with\n" " programs that accept receiving the password on\n" " stdin.\n" msgstr "" " --print-pass, -p\n" " Demanda a gksu d'imprimir lo senhal sus la sortida\n" " estandarda (coma o fa ssh-askpass). Util per\n" " l'utilizacion dins d'escriptes que recuperan lo senhal sus \n" " l'entrada estandarda.\n" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:117 msgid "" " --sudo-mode, -S\n" " Make GKSu use sudo instead of su, as if it had been\n" " run as \"gksudo\".\n" msgstr "" " --sudo-mode, -S\n" " Fa en sòrta que GKSu utilize su, coma se \n" " « gksudo » èra estat aviat.\n" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:120 msgid "" " --su-mode, -w\n" " Make GKSu use su, instead of using libgksu's\n" " default.\n" msgstr "" " --su-mode, -w\n" " Fa en sòrta que GKsu utilize su, al luòc d'utilizar\n" " libgksu per defaut.\n" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:123 msgid "" " --always-ask-pass\n" " Make GKSu always ask for a password, even if it is cached\n" " by sudo.\n" msgstr "" " --always-ask-pass\n" " Fa en sòrta que GKSu demande totjorn un senhal,\n" " quitament s'es dins l'amagatal\n" " de sudo.\n" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:232 msgid "Advanced options" msgstr "Opcions avançadas" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:248 msgid "Options to use when changing user" msgstr "Opcions d'utilizar al moment d'un cambiament d'utilizaire" #. login shell? (--login) #: ../gksu/gksu.c:253 msgid "_login shell" msgstr "_interpretador de comandas interactiu" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:261 msgid "_preserve environment" msgstr "_preservar l'environament" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:362 msgid "Run program" msgstr "Executar lo programa" #. command #: ../gksu/gksu.c:381 msgid "Run:" msgstr "Executar :" #. user name #: ../gksu/gksu.c:392 msgid "As user:" msgstr "Coma utilizaire :" #. advanced button #: ../gksu/gksu.c:409 msgid "_Advanced" msgstr "_Avançat" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:445 ../gksu/gksu.c:670 msgid "Missing command to run." msgstr "La comanda d'aviar es absenta." #: ../gksu/gksu.c:549 #, c-format msgid "Option not accepted for --disable-grab: %s\n" msgstr "Opcion incompatibla amb --disable-grab : %s\n" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:584 #, c-format msgid "Option not accepted for --prompt: %s\n" msgstr "Opcion incompatibla amb --prompt : %s\n" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:610 msgid "" "Would you like your screen to be \"grabbed\"\n" "while you enter the password?\n" "\n" "This means all applications will be paused to avoid\n" "the eavesdropping of your password by a a malicious\n" "application while you type it." msgstr "" "Volètz que vòstre ecran siá varrolhat al moment de la \n" "picada de vòstre senhal ?\n" "\n" "Aquò significa que totas las aplicacions serà mesas\n" "en pausa per evitar qu'una aplicacion malvolenta recupère \n" "vòstre senhal pendent qu'o picatz." #: ../gksu/gksu.c:634 msgid "" "Missing options or arguments\n" "\n" "You need to provide --description or --message." msgstr "" "\"Opcions o arguments mancants\n" "\n" "Es necessari de provesir --descripcion o --messatge." #: ../gksu/gksu.c:644 #, c-format msgid "" "Failed to request password.\n" "\n" "%s" msgstr "" "Impossible de demandar un senhal.\n" "\n" "%s" #: ../gksu/gksu.c:718 #, c-format msgid "User %s does not exist." msgstr "L'utilizaire %s existís pas." #: ../gksu/gksu.c:738 msgid "Incorrect password... try again." msgstr "Lo senhal es incorrècte. Ensajatz tornamai." #: ../gksu/gksu.c:770 #, c-format msgid "" "Failed to run %s as user %s.\n" "\n" "%s" msgstr "" "Impossible d'aviar %s en tant qu'utilizaire %s.\n" "\n" "%s" #: ../gksu.desktop.in.h:1 msgid "Root Terminal" msgstr "Terminal administrator" #: ../gksu.desktop.in.h:2 msgid "Opens a terminal as the root user, using gksu to ask for the password" msgstr "" "Dobrir un terminal en tant qu'administrator, en utilizant gksu per demandar " "lo senhal" #: ../nautilus-gksu/libnautilus-gksu.c:136 msgid "Open as administrator" msgstr "Dobrir en tant qu'administrator" #: ../nautilus-gksu/libnautilus-gksu.c:137 msgid "Opens the file with administrator privileges" msgstr "Dobrís lo fichièr amb los privilègis d'administrator" #: ../nautilus-gksu/libnautilus-gksu.c:224 msgid "" "Unable to determine the program to run.\n" "\n" "The item you selected cannot be open with administrator powers because the " "correct application cannot be determined." msgstr "" "Impossible de determinar lo programa d'aviar.\n" "\n" "L'element qu'avètz seleccionat pòt pas èsser dobert amb los dreches " "d'administrator perque l'aplicacion apropriada a pas pogut èsser determinada." language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/LC_MESSAGES/xdg-user-dirs.po0000644000000000000000000000427212743727043021227 0ustar # Occitan (post 1500) translation for xdg-user-dirs # Copyright (c) 2007 Rosetta Contributors and Canonical Ltd 2007 # This file is distributed under the same license as the xdg-user-dirs package. # FIRST AUTHOR , 2007. # msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: xdg-user-dirs\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: FULL NAME \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2009-09-18 14:16+0200\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2009-10-29 13:10+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Cédric VALMARY (Tot en òc) \n" "Language-Team: Occitan (post 1500) \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2016-07-20 13:33+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 18147)\n" #: translate.c:2 msgid "Applications" msgstr "Aplicacions" #: translate.c:2 msgid "applications" msgstr "aplicacions" #: translate.c:3 msgid "Desktop" msgstr "Burèu" #: translate.c:3 msgid "desktop" msgstr "burèu" #: translate.c:4 msgid "Documents" msgstr "Documents" #: translate.c:4 msgid "documents" msgstr "documents" #: translate.c:5 msgid "Download" msgstr "Telecargar" #: translate.c:5 msgid "download" msgstr "telecargar" #: translate.c:6 msgid "Downloads" msgstr "Telecargaments" #: translate.c:6 msgid "downloads" msgstr "telecargaments" #: translate.c:7 msgid "Movies" msgstr "Filmes" #: translate.c:7 msgid "movies" msgstr "filmes" #: translate.c:8 msgid "Music" msgstr "Musica" #: translate.c:8 msgid "music" msgstr "musica" #: translate.c:9 msgid "Photos" msgstr "Fòtos" #: translate.c:9 msgid "photos" msgstr "fòtos" #: translate.c:10 msgid "Pictures" msgstr "Imatges" #: translate.c:10 msgid "pictures" msgstr "imatges" #: translate.c:11 msgid "Projects" msgstr "Projèctes" #: translate.c:11 msgid "projects" msgstr "projèctes" #: translate.c:12 msgid "Public" msgstr "Public" #: translate.c:12 msgid "public" msgstr "public" #: translate.c:13 msgid "Share" msgstr "Partiment" #: translate.c:13 msgid "share" msgstr "partiment" #: translate.c:14 msgid "Templates" msgstr "Modèls" #: translate.c:14 msgid "templates" msgstr "modèls" #: translate.c:15 msgid "Videos" msgstr "Vidèos" #: translate.c:15 msgid "videos" msgstr "vidèos" language-pack-gnome-oc-base/data/oc/LC_MESSAGES/metacity.po0000644000000000000000000015324012743727043020351 0ustar # Translation of oc.po to Occitan # Occitan translation of metacity. # Copyright (C) 2002-2006, 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. # This file is distributed under the same license as the metacity package. # # Yannig Marchegay (Kokoyaya) , 2006-2008, 2010. msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: oc\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" "POT-Creation-Date: 2015-04-29 13:31+0000\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2013-07-07 06:27+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Cédric VALMARY (Tot en òc) \n" "Language-Team: Occitan \n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" "Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" "X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2016-07-20 11:57+0000\n" "X-Generator: Launchpad (build 18147)\n" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:1 msgid "Navigation" msgstr "Navigacion" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:2 msgid "Move window to workspace 1" msgstr "Desplaçar la fenèstra a l'espaci de trabalh 1" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:3 msgid "Move window to workspace 2" msgstr "Desplaçar la fenèstra cap a l'espaci de trabalh 2" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:4 msgid "Move window to workspace 3" msgstr "Desplaçar la fenèstra cap a l'espaci de trabalh 3" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:5 msgid "Move window to workspace 4" msgstr "Desplaçar la fenèstra a l'espaci de trabalh 4" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:6 msgid "Move window one workspace to the left" msgstr "Desplacar la fenèstra cap a l'espaci de trabalha a drecha" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:7 msgid "Move window one workspace to the right" msgstr "Desplacar la fenèstra cap a l'espaci de trabalha a esquèrra" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:8 msgid "Move window one workspace up" msgstr "Desplacar la fenèstra cap a l'espaci de trabalha amont" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:9 msgid "Move window one workspace down" msgstr "Desplacar la fenèstra cap a l'espaci de trabalha aval" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:10 msgid "Switch windows" msgstr "Bascular entre las fenèstras" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:11 msgid "Switch applications" msgstr "Cambiar d'aplicacion" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:12 msgid "Switch windows of an application" msgstr "Se desplaçar immediatament entre las fenèstras d'una aplicacion" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:13 msgid "Switch system controls" msgstr "Cambiar los contraròtles sistèma" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:14 msgid "Switch windows directly" msgstr "Cambiar de fenèstra dirèctament" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:15 msgid "Switch windows of an app directly" msgstr "Se desplaçar immediatament entre las fenèstras d'una aplicacion" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:16 msgid "Switch system controls directly" msgstr "Cambiar los contraròtles sistèma dirèctament" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:17 msgid "Hide all normal windows" msgstr "Amagar totas las fenèstras normalas e balhar lo focus al burèu" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:18 msgid "Switch to workspace 1" msgstr "Anar a l'espaci de trabalh 1" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:19 msgid "Switch to workspace 2" msgstr "Anar a l'espaci de trabalh 2" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:20 msgid "Switch to workspace 3" msgstr "Anar a l'espaci de trabalh 3" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:21 msgid "Switch to workspace 4" msgstr "Anar a l'espaci de trabalh 4" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:22 msgid "Move to workspace left" msgstr "Desplaçar cap a l'espaci de trabalh d'_esquèrra" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:23 msgid "Move to workspace right" msgstr "Desplaçar cap a l'espaci de trabalh de _drecha" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:24 msgid "Move to workspace above" msgstr "Desplaçar cap a l'espaci de trabalh d'_esquèrra" #: ../src/50-metacity-navigation.xml.in.h:25 msgid "Move to workspace below" msgstr "Desplaçar dins l'espaci de trabalh _inferior" #: ../src/50-metacity-system.xml.in.h:1 msgid "System" msgstr "Sistèma" #: ../src/50-metacity-system.xml.in.h:2 msgid "Show the run command prompt" msgstr "Afichar lo menú principal del panèl" #: ../src/50-metacity-system.xml.in.h:3 msgid "Show the activities overview" msgstr "Afichar l'apercebut de las activitats" #: ../src/50-metacity-windows.xml.in.h:1 msgid "Windows" msgstr "/_Fenèstras" #: ../src/50-metacity-windows.xml.in.h:2 msgid "Activate the window menu" msgstr "Activar lo menú de la fenèstra" #: ../src/50-metacity-windows.xml.in.h:3 msgid "Toggle fullscreen mode" msgstr "(Des)activar lo mòde ecran complet" #: ../src/50-metacity-windows.xml.in.h:4 msgid "Toggle maximization state" msgstr "Bascular l'estat d'agrandiment" #: ../src/50-metacity-windows.xml.in.h:5 msgid "Maximize window" msgstr "Maximizar la fenèstra" #: ../src/50-metacity-windows.xml.in.h:6 msgid "Restore window" msgstr "Restablir la fenèstra" #: ../src/50-metacity-windows.xml.in.h:7 msgid "Toggle shaded state" msgstr "Basculer l'estat de replec" #: ../src/50-metacity-windows.xml.in.h:8 msgid "Close window" msgstr "Tampar la fenèstra" #: ../src/50-metacity-windows.xml.in.h:9 msgid "Minimize window" msgstr "Reduire la fenèstra" #: ../src/50-metacity-windows.xml.in.h:10 msgid "Move window" msgstr "Desplaçar la fenèstra" #: ../src/50-metacity-windows.xml.in.h:11 msgid "Resize window" msgstr "Redimensionar la fenèstra" #: ../src/50-metacity-windows.xml.in.h:12 msgid "Toggle window on all workspaces or one" msgstr "Plaçar la fenèstra sus totes los espacis de trabalh, o sus un sol" #: ../src/50-metacity-windows.xml.in.h:13 msgid "Raise window if covered, otherwise lower it" msgstr "" "Metre la fenèstra al primièr plan s'es amagada per una autra fenèstra, " "siquenon en rière plan" #: ../src/50-metacity-windows.xml.in.h:14 msgid "Raise window above other windows" msgstr "Metre la fenèstra al primièr plan" #: ../src/50-metacity-windows.xml.in.h:15 msgid "Lower window below other windows" msgstr "Metre la fenèstra jos las autras fenèstras" #: ../src/50-metacity-windows.xml.in.h:16 msgid "Maximize window vertically" msgstr "Maximizar la fenèstra verticalament" #: ../src/50-metacity-windows.xml.in.h:17 msgid "Maximize window horizontally" msgstr "Maximizar la fenèstra orizontalament" #: ../src/core/bell.c:296 msgid "Bell event" msgstr "Eveniment sonariá" #: ../src/core/core.c:217 #, c-format msgid "Unknown window information request: %d" msgstr "Requèsta d'informacion de fenèstra desconeguda : %d" #. Translators: %s is a window title #: ../src/core/delete.c:94 #, c-format msgid "%s is not responding." msgstr "%s respond pas." #: ../src/core/delete.c:99 msgid "" "You may choose to wait a short while for it to continue or force the " "application to quit entirely." msgstr "" "Podètz esperar un moment per contunhar o insistir per quitar l'aplicacion." #: ../src/core/delete.c:108 msgid "_Wait" msgstr "_Esperar" #: ../src/core/delete.c:108 msgid "_Force Quit" msgstr "_Forçar a tampar" #: ../src/core/delete.c:206 #, c-format msgid "Failed to get hostname: %s\n" msgstr "Impossible d'obténer lo nom d'òste : %s\n" #: ../src/core/display.c:263 #, c-format msgid "Missing %s extension required for compositing" msgstr "Extension %s mancanta, mas necessària per la composicion" #: ../src/core/display.c:325 #, c-format msgid "Failed to open X Window System display '%s'\n" msgstr "Impossible de dobrir lo visual « %s » del sistèma X Window\n" #: ../src/core/errors.c:272 #, c-format msgid "" "Lost connection to the display '%s';\n" "most likely the X server was shut down or you killed/destroyed\n" "the window manager.\n" msgstr "" "Pèrda de la connexion amb lo visual « %s » ;\n" "probable que lo servidor X es estat arrestat o qu'avètz tuat/destruch\n" "lo gestionari de fenèstras.\n" #: ../src/core/errors.c:279 #, c-format msgid "Fatal IO error %d (%s) on display '%s'.\n" msgstr "Error fatala d'E/S %d (%s) sul visual « %s ».\n" #: ../src/core/keybindings.c:688 #, c-format msgid "" "Some other program is already using the key %s with modifiers %x as a " "binding\n" msgstr "" "Un autre programa utiliza ja la clau %s amb los modificators %x coma " "ligason\n" #: ../src/core/main.c:129 #, c-format msgid "" "metacity %s\n" "Copyright (C) 2001-%s Havoc Pennington, Red Hat, Inc., and others\n" "This is free software; see the source for copying conditions.\n" "There is NO warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A " "PARTICULAR PURPOSE.\n" msgstr "" "metacity %s\n" "Copyright © 2001-%s Havoc Pennington, Red Hat, Inc., e autres.\n" "Aquò es un logicial liure ; consultatz lo còde font per las\n" "condicions de còpia.\n" "I a PAS CAP de garantia ; quitament pas de VALOR MERCANDA o\n" "d'ADEQÜACION A UN USATGE PARTICULAR.\n" #: ../src/core/main.c:257 msgid "Disable connection to session manager" msgstr "Desactiva la connexion amb lo gestionari de sessions" #: ../src/core/main.c:263 msgid "Replace the running window manager with Metacity" msgstr "Remplaçar lo gestionari de fenèstras actiu per Metacity" #: ../src/core/main.c:269 msgid "Specify session management ID" msgstr "Especifica l'ID de gestion de session" #: ../src/core/main.c:274 msgid "X Display to use" msgstr "Visual X d'utilizar" #: ../src/core/main.c:280 msgid "Initialize session from savefile" msgstr "Inicializar la session dempuèi lo fichièr de salvament" #: ../src/core/main.c:286 msgid "Print version" msgstr "Afichar la version" #: ../src/core/main.c:292 msgid "Make X calls synchronous" msgstr "Rendre los apèls X sincròns" #: ../src/core/main.c:298 msgid "Turn compositing on" msgstr "Activar la composicion" #: ../src/core/main.c:304 msgid "Turn compositing off" msgstr "Desactivar la composicion" #: ../src/core/main.c:310 msgid "" "Don't make fullscreen windows that are maximized and have no decorations" msgstr "" "Metre pas en ecran complet de fenèstras que son maximizadas e qu'an pas de " "decoracions" #: ../src/core/main.c:511 #, c-format msgid "Failed to scan themes directory: %s\n" msgstr "Lo percors del repertòri de tèmas a pas capitat : %s\n" #: ../src/core/main.c:527 #, c-format msgid "" "Could not find a theme! Be sure %s exists and contains the usual themes.\n" msgstr "" "Impossible de trobar un tèma ! Asseguratz-vos que %s existís e conten los " "tèmas costumièrs.\n" #: ../src/core/main.c:586 #, c-format msgid "Failed to restart: %s\n" msgstr "Impossible de tornar aviar : %s\n" #: ../src/core/prefs.c:953 msgid "" "Workarounds for broken applications disabled. Some applications may not " "behave properly.\n" msgstr "" "Solucions de cambi desactivadas per las aplicacions damatjadas. Es possible " "que d'unas aplicacions se compòrten pas corrèctament.\n" #: ../src/core/prefs.c:1024 #, c-format msgid "Could not parse font description \"%s\" from GSettings key %s\n" msgstr "" "Impossible d'analisar la descripcion de poliça « %s » dempuèi la clau " "GSettings %s\n" #: ../src/core/prefs.c:1091 #, c-format msgid "" "\"%s\" found in configuration database is not a valid value for mouse button " "modifier\n" msgstr "" "« %s » trobada dins la banca de donadas de configuracion es pas una valor " "corrècta pel boton de mirga\n" #: ../src/core/prefs.c:1587 #, c-format msgid "" "\"%s\" found in configuration database is not a valid value for keybinding " "\"%s\"\n" msgstr "" "« %s » trobat dins la banca de donadas de configuracion es pas una valor " "corrècta per la combinason de tòcas « %s »\n" #: ../src/core/prefs.c:1689 #, c-format msgid "Workspace %d" msgstr "Espaci de trabalh %d" #: ../src/core/screen.c:364 #, c-format msgid "Screen %d on display '%s' is invalid\n" msgstr "L'ecran %d sul visual « %s » es pas valid\n" #: ../src/core/screen.c:380 #, c-format msgid "" "Screen %d on display \"%s\" already has a window manager; try using the --" "replace option to replace the current window manager.\n" msgstr "" "L'ecran %d sul visual « %s » a ja un gestionari de fenèstras ; ensajatz " "d'utilizar l'opcion --replace per remplaçar lo gestionari de fenèstras " "actual.\n" #: ../src/core/screen.c:407 #, c-format msgid "" "Could not acquire window manager selection on screen %d display \"%s\"\n" msgstr "" "Impossible d'aver la seleccion del gestionari de fenèstras sus l'ecran %d " "del visual « %s »\n" #: ../src/core/screen.c:465 #, c-format msgid "Screen %d on display \"%s\" already has a window manager\n" msgstr "L'ecran %d sul visual « %s » a ja un gestionari de fenèstras\n" #: ../src/core/screen.c:678 #, c-format msgid "Could not release screen %d on display \"%s\"\n" msgstr "Impossible de liberar l'ecran %d sul visual « %s »\n" #: ../src/core/session.c:842 ../src/core/session.c:849 #, c-format msgid "Could not create directory '%s': %s\n" msgstr "Impossible de crear lo repertòri '%s' : %s\n" #: ../src/core/session.c:859 #, c-format msgid "Could not open session file '%s' for writing: %s\n" msgstr "" "Impossible de dobrir lo fichièr de session « %s » en escritura : %s\n" #: ../src/core/session.c:1000 #, c-format msgid "Error writing session file '%s': %s\n" msgstr "Error al moment d'escriure lo fichièr de session '%s' : %s\n" #: ../src/core/session.c:1005 #, c-format msgid "Error closing session file '%s': %s\n" msgstr "Error al moment de la tampadura del fichièr de session « %s » : %s\n" #: ../src/core/session.c:1135 #, c-format msgid "Failed to parse saved session file: %s\n" msgstr "L'analisi del fichièr de session enregistrat a fracassat : %s\n" #: ../src/core/session.c:1184 #, c-format msgid " attribute seen but we already have the session ID" msgstr "" "L'atribut es estat trobat, mas avèm ja l'ID de session" #: ../src/core/session.c:1197 ../src/core/session.c:1272 #: ../src/core/session.c:1304 ../src/core/session.c:1376 #: ../src/core/session.c:1436 #, c-format msgid "Unknown attribute %s on <%s> element" msgstr "Atribut %s desconegut sus l'element <%s>" #: ../src/core/session.c:1214 #, c-format msgid "nested tag" msgstr "balisa imbricada" #: ../src/core/session.c:1456 #, c-format msgid "Unknown element %s" msgstr "Element %s desconegut" #: ../src/core/session.c:1812 msgid "" "These windows do not support "save current setup" and will have to " "be restarted manually next time you log in." msgstr "" "Aquestas fenèstras prenon pas en carga « l'enregistrament de la " "configuracion actuala » e deuràn èsser reaviadas manualament a la connexion " "venenta." #: ../src/core/util.c:99 #, c-format msgid "Failed to open debug log: %s\n" msgstr "La dobertura del jornal de debogatge a fracassat : %s\n" #: ../src/core/util.c:109 #, c-format msgid "Failed to fdopen() log file %s: %s\n" msgstr "" "L'execucion de la comanda fdopen() sul fichièr jornal %s a fracassat : %s\n" #: ../src/core/util.c:115 #, c-format msgid "Opened log file %s\n" msgstr "Dobertura del fichièr jornal %s\n" #: ../src/core/util.c:134 ../src/tools/metacity-message.c:206 #, c-format msgid "Metacity was compiled without support for verbose mode\n" msgstr "" "Metacity es estat compilat sens la presa en carga del mòde charraire\n" #: ../src/core/util.c:234 msgid "Window manager: " msgstr "Gestionari de fenèstras : " #: ../src/core/util.c:388 msgid "Bug in window manager: " msgstr "Anomalia dins lo gestionari de fenèstras : " #: ../src/core/util.c:421 msgid "Window manager warning: " msgstr "Alèrta del gestionari de fenèstras : " #: ../src/core/util.c:449 msgid "Window manager error: " msgstr "Error de gestionari de fenèstras : " #. Translators: This is the title used on dialog boxes #: ../src/core/util.c:568 ../src/metacity.desktop.in.h:1 #: ../src/metacity-wm.desktop.in.h:1 msgid "Metacity" msgstr "Metacity" #. first time through #: ../src/core/window.c:5952 #, c-format msgid "" "Window %s sets SM_CLIENT_ID on itself, instead of on the WM_CLIENT_LEADER " "window as specified in the ICCCM.\n" msgstr "" "La fenèstra %s posiciona SM_CLIENT_ID sus ela meteissa, al luòc de la " "posicionar sus la fenèstra WM_CLIENT_LEADER coma indicat dins l'ICCCM.\n" #. We ignore mwm_has_resize_func because WM_NORMAL_HINTS is the #. * authoritative source for that info. Some apps such as mplayer or #. * xine disable resize via MWM but not WM_NORMAL_HINTS, but that #. * leads to e.g. us not fullscreening their windows. Apps that set #. * MWM but not WM_NORMAL_HINTS are basically broken. We complain #. * about these apps but make them work. #. #: ../src/core/window.c:6442 #, c-format msgid "" "Window %s sets an MWM hint indicating it isn't resizable, but sets min size " "%d x %d and max size %d x %d; this doesn't make much sense.\n" msgstr "" "La fenèstra %s posiciona un indici MWM qu'indica qu'es pas redimensionabla, " "mas posiciona una talha minimala de %d x %d e una talha maximala de %d x " "%d ; aquò a pas gaire de sens.\n" #: ../src/core/window-props.c:403 #, c-format msgid "Application set a bogus _NET_WM_PID %lu\n" msgstr "L'aplicacion a definit un _NET_WM_PID %lu erronèu\n" #. Translators: the title of a window from another machine #: ../src/core/window-props.c:554 #, c-format msgid "%s (on %s)" msgstr "%s (sus %s)" #: ../src/core/window-props.c:1590 #, c-format msgid "Invalid WM_TRANSIENT_FOR window 0x%lx specified for %s.\n" msgstr "Fenèstra WM_TRANSIENT_FOR 0x%lx invalida indicada per %s.\n" #: ../src/core/xprops.c:153 #, c-format msgid "" "Window 0x%lx has property %s\n" "that was expected to have type %s format %d\n" "and actually has type %s format %d n_items %d.\n" "This is most likely an application bug, not a window manager bug.\n" "The window has title=\"%s\" class=\"%s\" name=\"%s\"\n" msgstr "" "La fenèstra 0x%lx a la proprietat %s\n" "que deuriá aver lo tipe %s e lo format %d\n" "e a, en fach lo tipe %s e lo format %d n_items %d\n" "Es probablament un bug de l'aplicacion, e non pas del gestionari\n" "de fenèstras.\n" "Lo títol de la fenèstra es=\"%s\" sa classa=\"%s\" e son nom=\"%s\"\n" #: ../src/core/xprops.c:409 #, c-format msgid "Property %s on window 0x%lx contained invalid UTF-8\n" msgstr "La proprietat %s de la fenèstra 0x%lx conten un còde UTF-8 invalid\n" #: ../src/core/xprops.c:492 #, c-format msgid "" "Property %s on window 0x%lx contained invalid UTF-8 for item %d in the list\n" msgstr "" "La proprietat %s de la fenèstra 0x%lx conten un còde UTF-8 invalid per " "l'element %d dins la lista\n" #: ../src/org.gnome.metacity.gschema.xml.in.h:1 msgid "Compositing Manager" msgstr "Gestionari de composicion" #: ../src/org.gnome.metacity.gschema.xml.in.h:2 msgid "Determines whether Metacity is a compositing manager." msgstr "Determina se Metacity es utilizat coma gestionari de composicion." #: ../src/org.gnome.metacity.gschema.xml.in.h:3 msgid "If true, trade off usability for less resource usage" msgstr "" "Se VERAI, afavorís una febla utilizacion de las ressorsas al detriment de la " "convivialitat" #: ../src/org.gnome.metacity.gschema.xml.in.h:4 msgid "" "If true, metacity will give the user less feedback by using wireframes, " "avoiding animations, or other means. This is a significant reduction in " "usability for many users, but may allow legacy applications to continue " "working, and may also be a useful tradeoff for terminal servers. However, " "the wireframe feature is disabled when accessibility is on." msgstr "" "Se VERAI, Metacity donarà a l'utilizaire mens de retorn d'informacions en " "utilizant de contorns en fial de fèrre, evitant d'animacions o autras " "floriduras. Aquò significa una baissa d'ergonomia per fòrça utilisatzaires " "mas pòt permetre a las vièlhas aplicacions de contunhar de foncionar, e pòt " "tanben èsser util als servidors de terminals X per melhorar las " "performàncias. Çaquelà, la foncion fial de fèrre es desactivat quand " "l'accessibilitat es activada." #: ../src/tools/metacity-message.c:176 #, c-format msgid "Usage: %s\n" msgstr "Sintaxi : %s\n" #: ../src/ui/frames.c:1268 msgid "Close Window" msgstr "Tampar la fenèstra" #: ../src/ui/frames.c:1271 msgid "Window Menu" msgstr "Menú de la fenèstra" #: ../src/ui/frames.c:1277 msgid "Minimize Window" msgstr "Reduire la fenèstra" #: ../src/ui/frames.c:1280 msgid "Maximize Window" msgstr "Maximizar la fenèstra" #: ../src/ui/frames.c:1283 msgid "Restore Window" msgstr "Restablir la fenèstra" #: ../src/ui/frames.c:1286 msgid "Roll Up Window" msgstr "Replegar la fenèstra" #: ../src/ui/frames.c:1289 msgid "Unroll Window" msgstr "Desplegar la fenèstra" #: ../src/ui/frames.c:1292 msgid "Keep Window On Top" msgstr "Gardar la fenèstra al primièr plan" #: ../src/ui/frames.c:1295 msgid "Remove Window From Top" msgstr "Levar la fenèstra del primièr plan" #: ../src/ui/frames.c:1298 msgid "Always On Visible Workspace" msgstr "Totjorn sul espaci de trabalh visible" #: ../src/ui/frames.c:1301 msgid "Put Window On Only One Workspace" msgstr "Metre la fenèstra sus un sol espaci de trabalh" #. Translators: Translate this string the same way as you do in libwnck! #: ../src/ui/menu.c:65 msgid "Mi_nimize" msgstr "Red_uire" #. Translators: Translate this string the same way as you do in libwnck! #: ../src/ui/menu.c:67 msgid "Ma_ximize" msgstr "Ma_ximizar" #. Translators: Translate this string the same way as you do in libwnck! #: ../src/ui/menu.c:69 msgid "Unma_ximize" msgstr "R_establir" #. Translators: Translate this string the same way as you do in libwnck! #: ../src/ui/menu.c:71 msgid "Roll _Up" msgstr "Repl_egar" #. Translators: Translate this string the same way as you do in libwnck! #: ../src/ui/menu.c:73 msgid "_Unroll" msgstr "_Desplegar" #. Translators: Translate this string the same way as you do in libwnck! #: ../src/ui/menu.c:75 msgid "_Move" msgstr "_Desplaçar" #. Translators: Translate this string the same way as you do in libwnck! #: ../src/ui/menu.c:77 msgid "_Resize" msgstr "_Redimensionar" #. Translators: Translate this string the same way as you do in libwnck! #: ../src/ui/menu.c:79 msgid "Move Titlebar On_screen" msgstr "Desplaçar la barra de títol sus l'e_cran" #. separator #. Translators: Translate this string the same way as you do in libwnck! #: ../src/ui/menu.c:82 ../src/ui/menu.c:84 msgid "Always on _Top" msgstr "Totjorn al _primièr plan" #. Translators: Translate this string the same way as you do in libwnck! #: ../src/ui/menu.c:86 msgid "_Always on Visible Workspace" msgstr "_Totjorn sul espaci de trabalh visible" #. Translators: Translate this string the same way as you do in libwnck! #: ../src/ui/menu.c:88 msgid "_Only on This Workspace" msgstr "_Sonque sus aqueste espaci de trabalh" #. Translators: Translate this string the same way as you do in libwnck! #: ../src/ui/menu.c:90 msgid "Move to Workspace _Left" msgstr "Desplaçar cap a l'espaci de trabalh d'_esquèrra" #. Translators: Translate this string the same way as you do in libwnck! #: ../src/ui/menu.c:92 msgid "Move to Workspace R_ight" msgstr "Desplaçar cap a l'espaci de trabalh de _drecha" #. Translators: Translate this string the same way as you do in libwnck! #: ../src/ui/menu.c:94 msgid "Move to Workspace _Up" msgstr "Desplaçar dins l'espaci de trabalh _superior" #. Translators: Translate this string the same way as you do in libwnck! #: ../src/ui/menu.c:96 msgid "Move to Workspace _Down" msgstr "Desplaçar dins l'espaci de trabalh _inferior" #. separator #. Translators: Translate this string the same way as you do in libwnck! #: ../src/ui/menu.c:100 msgid "_Close" msgstr "_Tampar" #: ../src/ui/menu.c:200 #, c-format msgid "Workspace %d%n" msgstr "Espaci de trabalh %d%n" #: ../src/ui/menu.c:210 #, c-format msgid "Workspace 1_0" msgstr "Espaci de trabalh 1_0" #: ../src/ui/menu.c:212 #, c-format msgid "Workspace %s%d" msgstr "Espaci de trabalh %s%d" #: ../src/ui/menu.c:379 msgid "Move to Another _Workspace" msgstr "Desplaçar cap a un autre _espaci de trabalh" #. This is the text that should appear next to menu accelerators #. * that use the shift key. If the text on this key isn't typically #. * translated on keyboards used for your language, don't translate #. * this. #. #: ../src/ui/metaaccellabel.c:75 msgid "Shift" msgstr "Shift" #. This is the text that should appear next to menu accelerators #. * that use the control key. If the text on this key isn't typically #. * translated on keyboards used for your language, don't translate #. * this. #. #: ../src/ui/metaaccellabel.c:81 msgid "Ctrl" msgstr "Ctrl" #. This is the text that should appear next to menu accelerators #. * that use the alt key. If the text on this key isn't typically #. * translated on keyboards used for your language, don't translate #. * this. #. #: ../src/ui/metaaccellabel.c:87 msgid "Alt" msgstr "Alt" #. This is the text that should appear next to menu accelerators #. * that use the meta key. If the text on this key isn't typically #. * translated on keyboards used for your language, don't translate #. * this. #. #: ../src/ui/metaaccellabel.c:93 msgid "Meta" msgstr "Meta" #. This is the text that should appear next to menu accelerators #. * that use the super key. If the text on this key isn't typically #. * translated on keyboards used for your language, don't translate #. * this. #. #: ../src/ui/metaaccellabel.c:99 msgid "Super" msgstr "Super" #. This is the text that should appear next to menu accelerators #. * that use the hyper key. If the text on this key isn't typically #. * translated on keyboards used for your language, don't translate #. * this. #. #: ../src/ui/metaaccellabel.c:105 msgid "Hyper" msgstr "Iper" #. This is the text that should appear next to menu accelerators #. * that use the mod2 key. If the text on this key isn't typically #. * translated on keyboards used for your language, don't translate #. * this. #. #: ../src/ui/metaaccellabel.c:111 msgid "Mod2" msgstr "Mod2" #. This is the text that should appear next to menu accelerators #. * that use the mod3 key. If the text on this key isn't typically #. * translated on keyboards used for your language, don't translate #. * this. #. #: ../src/ui/metaaccellabel.c:117 msgid "Mod3" msgstr "Mod3" #. This is the text that should appear next to menu accelerators #. * that use the mod4 key. If the text on this key isn't typically #. * translated on keyboards used for your language, don't translate #. * this. #. #: ../src/ui/metaaccellabel.c:123 msgid "Mod4" msgstr "Mod4" #. This is the text that should appear next to menu accelerators #. * that use the mod5 key. If the text on this key isn't typically #. * translated on keyboards used for your language, don't translate #. * this. #. #: ../src/ui/metaaccellabel.c:129 msgid "Mod5" msgstr "Mod5" #. Translators: This represents the size of a window. The first number is #. * the width of the window and the second is the height. #. #: ../src/ui/resizepopup.c:139 #, c-format msgid "%d x %d" msgstr "%d x %d" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:268 msgid "top" msgstr "naut" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:270 msgid "bottom" msgstr "bas" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:272 msgid "left" msgstr "esquèrra" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:274 msgid "right" msgstr "drecha" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:301 #, c-format msgid "frame geometry does not specify \"%s\" dimension" msgstr "la geometria del quadre indica pas la dimension « %s »" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:320 #, c-format msgid "frame geometry does not specify dimension \"%s\" for border \"%s\"" msgstr "" "la geometria del quadre indica pas la dimension « %s » per la bordadura " "« %s »" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:357 #, c-format msgid "Button aspect ratio %g is not reasonable" msgstr "La proporcion del boton %g es pas rasonabla" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:370 #, c-format msgid "Frame geometry does not specify size of buttons" msgstr "La geometria del quadre indica pas la talha dels botons" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:1304 #, c-format msgid "Gradients should have at least two colors" msgstr "Los degradats devon comportar al mens doas colors" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:1522 #, c-format msgid "" "GTK color specification must have the state in brackets, e.g. gtk:fg[NORMAL] " "where NORMAL is the state; could not parse \"%s\"" msgstr "" "L'especificacion de color GTK deu presentar l'estat entre croquets, p. ex. " "gtk:fg[NORMAL] ont NORMAL es l'estat ; impossible d'analisar « %s »" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:1536 #, c-format msgid "" "GTK color specification must have a close bracket after the state, e.g. " "gtk:fg[NORMAL] where NORMAL is the state; could not parse \"%s\"" msgstr "" "L'especificacion de color GTK deu comportar un croquet de tampadura aprèp " "l'estat, p. ex. gtk:fg[NORMAL] ont NORMAL es l'estat ; impossible d'analisar " "« %s »" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:1547 #, c-format msgid "Did not understand state \"%s\" in color specification" msgstr "Impossible de comprene l'estat « %s » dins l'especificacion de color" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:1560 #, c-format msgid "Did not understand color component \"%s\" in color specification" msgstr "" "Impossible de comprene lo compausant de color « %s » dins l'especificacion " "de color" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:1588 #, c-format msgid "" "Blend format is \"blend/bg_color/fg_color/alpha\", \"%s\" does not fit the " "format" msgstr "" "Lo format de mescla es « blend/bg_color/fg_color/alpha », « %s » correspond " "pas a aqueste format ." #: ../src/ui/theme.c:1599 #, c-format msgid "Could not parse alpha value \"%s\" in blended color" msgstr "Impossible d'analisar la valor alfa « %s » en color mesclada" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:1609 #, c-format msgid "Alpha value \"%s\" in blended color is not between 0.0 and 1.0" msgstr "" "La valor alfa « %s » en color mesclada es pas compresa entre 0,0 e 1,0" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:1655 #, c-format msgid "" "Shade format is \"shade/base_color/factor\", \"%s\" does not fit the format" msgstr "" "Lo format d'ombra es « shade/base_color/factor », « %s » correspond pas al " "format" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:1666 #, c-format msgid "Could not parse shade factor \"%s\" in shaded color" msgstr "Impossible d'analisar lo factor d'ombra « %s » en color ombrada" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:1676 #, c-format msgid "Shade factor \"%s\" in shaded color is negative" msgstr "Lo factor d'ombra « %s » en color ombrada es negatiu" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:1705 #, c-format msgid "Could not parse color \"%s\"" msgstr "Impossible d'analisar la color « %s »" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:2058 #, c-format msgid "Coordinate expression contains character '%s' which is not allowed" msgstr "" "L'expression de la coordenada conten lo caractèr « %s » qu'es pas autorizat" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:2085 #, c-format msgid "" "Coordinate expression contains floating point number '%s' which could not be " "parsed" msgstr "" "L'expression de la coordenada conten la valor en virgula flotanta « %s » que " "pòt pas èsser analisada" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:2099 #, c-format msgid "Coordinate expression contains integer '%s' which could not be parsed" msgstr "" "L'expression de la coordenada conten l'entièr « %s » qu'a pas pogut èsser " "analisat" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:2221 #, c-format msgid "" "Coordinate expression contained unknown operator at the start of this text: " "\"%s\"" msgstr "" "L'expression de la coordenada conteniá un operador desconegut al començament " "d'aqueste tèxte : « %s »" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:2278 #, c-format msgid "Coordinate expression was empty or not understood" msgstr "L'expression de la coordenada èra voida o incompresa" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:2389 ../src/ui/theme.c:2399 ../src/ui/theme.c:2434 #, c-format msgid "Coordinate expression results in division by zero" msgstr "L'expression de la coordenada provòca una division per zèro" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:2442 #, c-format msgid "" "Coordinate expression tries to use mod operator on a floating-point number" msgstr "" "L'expression de la coordenada tempta d'utilizar l'operadour mod sus una " "valor en virgula flotanta" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:2499 #, c-format msgid "" "Coordinate expression has an operator \"%s\" where an operand was expected" msgstr "" "L'expression de la coordenada a un operador « %s » lai ont un operand èra " "esperat" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:2508 #, c-format msgid "Coordinate expression had an operand where an operator was expected" msgstr "" "L'expression de la coordenada a un operand lai ont un operador èra esperat" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:2516 #, c-format msgid "Coordinate expression ended with an operator instead of an operand" msgstr "" "L'expression de la coordenada èra acabada per un operador al luòc d'un " "operand" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:2526 #, c-format msgid "" "Coordinate expression has operator \"%c\" following operator \"%c\" with no " "operand in between" msgstr "" "L'expression de la coordenada a un operador « %c » segon l'operador « %c » " "sens operand entre eles" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:2685 ../src/ui/theme.c:2730 #, c-format msgid "Coordinate expression had unknown variable or constant \"%s\"" msgstr "" "L'expression de la coordenada possedís una variabla o constanta desconeguda " "« %s »" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:2784 #, c-format msgid "Coordinate expression parser overflowed its buffer." msgstr "" "L'analisador d'expression de coordenadas a despassat la capacitat de son " "tampon." #: ../src/ui/theme.c:2813 #, c-format msgid "" "Coordinate expression had a close parenthesis with no open parenthesis" msgstr "" "L'expression de la coordenada compòrta una parentèsi de tampadura, mas pas " "de parentèsi de dobertura" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:2882 #, c-format msgid "" "Coordinate expression had an open parenthesis with no close parenthesis" msgstr "" "L'expression de la coordenada compòrta una parentèsi de dobertura, mas pas " "de parentèsi de tampadura" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:2893 #, c-format msgid "Coordinate expression doesn't seem to have any operators or operands" msgstr "" "L'expression de la coordenada sembla pas comprene d'operador ni d'operand" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:3098 ../src/ui/theme.c:3118 ../src/ui/theme.c:3138 #, c-format msgid "Theme contained an expression that resulted in an error: %s\n" msgstr "Lo tèma conten una expression qu'a provocat una error : %s\n" #: ../src/ui/theme.c:4797 #, c-format msgid "" "